- º
ºn aº A oºo-ºº:
RECLAMATION
Managing Water in the West
Reclamation Safety and Health Standards
RECLAMATION
SAFETY AND HEALTH
STANDARDS MANUAL
UNIVERSITY OF MICE
LIBRARIES
º STOCKNUMBER: P7610000AZ3725KT MAY 2, 2010
(*~\
º DEPOSITED BY
UNITED STATES OF AME.
U.S. Department of the Inter
Bureau of Reclamation October 2009
- - ---
º, º
-
º, -







Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
U.S. Department of the Interior
Bureau of Reclamation
Denver, Colorado October 2009

Mission Statements
The mission of the Department of the Interior is to protect and
provide access to our Nation’s natural and cultural heritage and
honor our trust responsibilities to Indian Tribes and our
commitments to island communities.
The mission of the Bureau of Reclamation is to manage, develop,
and protect water and related resources in an environmentally and
economically sound manner in the interest of the American public.
ForeWord
A contemporary water management agency, the Bureau of Reclamation is the
largest wholesale water supplier in the United States, with operations and
facilities in the 17 Western States. Today, these facilities include 348 reservoirs
with the capacity to store 245 million acre-feet of water. Reclamation projects
supply one out of five western farmers with irrigation water for approximately
10 million farmland acres.
Reclamation facilities also provide water to about 31 million people for municipal
and industrial uses. In addition, Reclamation is the Nation’s second largest
producer of hydroelectric power, generating more than 42 billion kilowatthours of
energy each year from 58 hydroelectric powerplants. Its facilities also provide
substantial flood control, recreation, and fish and wildlife benefits.
Though the times and needs have changed, one goal has remained constant—
Reclamation is committed to maintaining a safe place for employees, visitors, and
the public. Procedures, processes, and regulations have changed with technology,
but the commitment and value of safety excellence has not. This mission requires
safety to be at the forefront of every job, in all phases of planning and operations,
and of highest priority at all times. Excellence in safety is a core value that must
be consistently emphasized and maintained.
Most activities involve risk, but using a systematic process of identifying hazards,
developing and implementing countermeasures, and evaluating and overseeing
the activity reduces accident potential. The Reclamation Safety and Health
Standards, the foundation of the safety program, will be used for all activities in
Reclamation to perform work safely and maintain safe working conditions.
By incorporating safe work procedures in all activities, safety becomes more than
mere compliance. Safety is a lifetime value.
October 2009 iii

Contents
Page
Section 1 – Authority, Purpose, and Scope............................................. 1–1
1.1 Authority for Reclamation Safety and Health Standards................... 1-1
1.2 Purpose and Scope............................................................................. 1-1
Section 2 – General Requirements.......................................................... 2-1
2.1 General Duty Requirements............................................................... 2-1
2.2 Other Codes and Statutes.................................... - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
2.3 Variances.… 2-1
2.4 Requirements for Accident, Injury, and Illness Investigation
and Reporting.....…. 2–2
2.5 Alcohol, Drugs, and Firearms............................................................ 2–2
2.6 Public Safety..............................................................….. 2–2
2.7 Training … 2–2
2.8 Work Site Requirements.................................................................... 2–3
Section 3 – Contractor Requirements..................................................... 3–1
3.1 Contractor Responsibilities................................................................ 3–1
3.2 Certification Requirements................................................................ 3–1
3.3 Required Safety Programs .............. • - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3–1
3.4 Required Meetings......................................... .................................... 3–2
3.5 Safety and Health Professional Support............................................ 3–2
3.6 Required Inspections.......................................................................... 3–2
3.7 Accident and Incident Investigating and Reporting........................... 3–3
3.8 Contractor Monthly Accident Summary Reports.............................. 3–3
3.9 Training Requirements....................................................................... 3–4
3.10 Refusal to Comply With Occupational Safety and Health
Requirements......…. 3–4
3.11 Dispute Resolution............................................................................. 3–4
Section 4 - Work Planning....................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Hazard Assessments........................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Requirements for Job Hazard Analysis.............................................. 4-1
4.3 Employee Training and Physical Qualifications................................ 4–2
4.4 Working Alone.............................................................…. 4-2
4.5 Requirements for Lightning Hazard Plan.......................................... 4–3
Section 5 – Medical Services and First Aid ............................................ 5–1
5.1 General Requirements........................................................................ 5–1
5.2 Requirements for Medical Services................................................... 5-1
5.3 Requirements for First Aid Kits......................................................... 5–2
5.4 Ambulance Services........................................................................... 5–3
October 2009 V
Contents (continued)
Page
Section 6 - Emergency Plans ................................................................... 6-1
6.1 General Requirements of Emergency Plans ...................................... 6-1
6.2 Emergency Plans..................................................................…. 6-1
6.3 Employee Orientation........................................................................ 6–2
6.4 Alert Systems for Emergency Situations........................................... 6–2
6.5 Emergency Communications............................................................. 6–2
6.6 Resuming Normal Operations............................................................ 6–2
6.7 Emergency Response to Hazardous Substance Releases................... 6–2
Section 7 – Occupational Health.............................................................. 7-1
7.1 Employee Exposure Standards.......................................................... 7–1
7.2 Requirements for Health Hazard Assessments.................................. 7–1
7.3 Requirements for Exposure Control.................................................. 7–2
7.4 Requirements for the Hazard Control Plans...................................... 7–2
7.5 Recordkeeping Requirements............................................................ 7–3
7.6 Requirements for Medical Surveillance............................................. 7–3
7.7 Hazard Communication Program Requirements............................... 7–4
7.8 Requirements for Respiratory Protection........................................... 7–5
7.9 Requirements for Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation .......... 7-17
7.10 Requirements for Sanitation .............................................................. 7–20
7.11 Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories........................... 7–23
7.12 Bloodborne Pathogens....................................................................... 7–25
7.13 Heat Stress ......................................................................................... 7–28
7.14 Cold Stress................…. 7–28
7.15 Ionizing Radiation........... e < * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 7–30
7.16 Non-Ionizing Radiation and Fields.................................................... 7–36
7.17 Asbestos.…. 7–39
7.18 Lead … 7–42
7.19 Illumination...................................…. 7–46
Section 8 – Personal Protective Equipment............................................ 8–1
8.1 Requirements for Personal Protective Equipment............................. 8–1
8.2 Requirements for Head Protection..................................................... 8–1
8.3 Requirements for Eye and Face Protection........................................ 8–2
8.4 Requirements for Hearing Protection ................................................ 8-6
8.5 Requirements for Protective Clothing ............................................... 8-6
8.6 Protection Against Drowning............................................................ 8–10
8.7 Other Protective Equipment............................................................... 8–11
8.8 Safety Nets.…. 8–11
8.9 Lifesaving Skiffs................................................................................ 8–13
Vi October 2009
Contents (continued)
Page
Section 9 – Signs, Signals, and Barricades.............................................. 9-1
9.1 Requirements for Signs...................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Accident Prevention Tags.................................................................. 9–4
9.3 Requirements for Radiation Hazard Signs......................................... 9–5
9.4 Traffic Control Signals...................................................................... 9–5
9.5 Barrier Tape.…. 9–5
Section 10 – Fire Prevention and Protection.......................................... 10–1
10.1 Fire Prevention Requirements............................................................ 10–1
10.2 Requirements for Heating Devices.................................................... 10–2
10.3 Application of Fire Protection Requirements.................................... 10–6
Section 11 – Standards for Material Handling, Storage,
and Disposal......................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 General Requirements for Storage of Materials................................ 11-1
11.2 Storing Materials in an Open Yard.................................................... 11-1
11.3 Requirements for Storing Materials Indoors...................................... 11–2
11.4 Requirements for Stacking Bagged Material..................................... 11–2
11.5 Requirements for Storing Material in Bulk ....................................... 11–2
11.6 Requirements for Lumber Storage..................................................... 11–3
11.7 Requirements for Storing Bricks and Masonry Blocks..................... 11–3
11.8 Requirements for Handling and Storing Cement and Lime............... 11–3
11.9 Requirements for Handling and Storing Reinforcing, Sheet,
and Structural Steel............................................................................ 11–3
11.10 Requirements for Handling and Storing Pipe, Conduit,
and Cylindrical Material................................................................. 11–3
11.11 Requirements for Storing Sand, Gravel, and Crushed Stone.......... 11–
11.12 Requirements for Handling Flammable and Combustible
Liquids.…. 11-4
11.13 Requirements for Handling Asphalt and Tar Products................... 1 1-9
11.14 Requirements for Handling Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG)......... 11-10
11.15 Requirements for Storing and Handling Paints, Varnishes,
and Thinners.…. 11–11
11.16 Housekeeping.…. 11-12
Section 12 – Electrical Safety Requirements.......................................... 12–1
12.1 General Electrical Safety Requirements......................................... 12–1
12.2 Restricted Areas.............................................................................. 12–2
October 2009 Vii
Contents (continued)
Page
12.3 Working Near Exposed Energized Overhead Lines or Parts.......... 12–3
12.4 Operating Equipment Near Radio and Microwave Transmission
Towers.…. 12–6
12.5 Working on Electrical Equipment and Systems............................. 12–7
12.6 Personal Protective Grounding....... • a s a s s e s e s e o e o e o 'o e º e o n e s a e º e º e s s e e o 'o o e s e s e s e o e º e 12–10
12.7 Temporary Wiring .......................................................................... 12–10
12.8 Disconnect and Overcurrent Protection.......................................... 12–11
12.9 Ground-Fault Protection................................................................. 12–12
12.10 Hazardous Locations....................................................................... 12–13
12.11 Wet Locations................................................................................. 12–14
12.12 Battery Charging....................................…. 12–14
Attachment 12–1 – Training Requirements for Electrically
Qualified Persons............................................................................ 12–16
Section 13 – Walking and Working Surfaces......................................... 13-1
13.1 Safe Access to Work.......................................................................... 13–1
13.2 Safe Use of Scaffolds......................................................................... 13–5
13.3 Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms............................................ 13–20
13.4 Design and Construction of Guardrails.............................................. 13–20
13.5 Safeguarding Floor and Roof Openings ............................................ 13–21
13.6 Safeguarding Wall Openings............................................................. 13–22
13.7 Safeguarding Open Floors and Platforms.......................................... 13–23
13.8 Requirements for Roofing Protection................................................ 13–23
Section 14- Confined Spaces................................................................... 14-1
14.1 Purpose and Scope............................................................................. 14-1
14.2 Applicable Definitions....................................................................... 14-1
14.3 Requirements for Confined Spaces.................................................... 14–3
14.4 Program Requirements for Confined Spaces..................................... 14–3
14.5 Training Requirements....................................................................... 14-7
14.6 Duties of Entrants.............................................................................. 14–8
14.7 Duties of Attendants.......................................................................... 14–8
14.8 Duties of the Entry Supervisor........................................................... 14-9
Section 15 – Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)............. 15–1
15.1 Scope and Purpose of Lockout/Tagout Program............................... 15–1
15.2 Requirements of the Hazardous Energy Program.............................. 15–4
15.3 Application of Energy Control........................................................... 15-9
Viji October 2009
Contents (continued)
Page
15.4 Release From Lockout or Tagout...................................................... 15-10
15.5 Requirements of Operating Equipment Under Clearance ................. 15–11
15.6 Requirements for Outside Personnel (Contractors, etc.)................... 15-12
Section 16 – Fall Protection and Rope Supported Work...................... 16-1
16.1 Fall Protection............................................................................…. 16-1
16.2 Rope Supported Safety Requirements............................................... 16-5
Section 17 — Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure Vessels, Compressors,
and Welding...................................................................................... 17-1
17.1 General Requirements for Hand and Power Tools............................ 17-1
17.2 Requirements for Pneumatic Tools.................................................... 17–2
17.3 Requirements for Airless Spray Guns................................................ 17–3
17.4 Requirements for Using Grinding Tools............................................ 17–3
17.5 Requirements for Woodworking Tools ............................................. 17–4
17.6 Requirements for Power Saws........................................................... 17–5
17.7 Requirements for Hydraulic-Powered Tools..................................... 17–6
17.8 Requirements for Powder-Actuated Tools......................................... 17–6
17.9 Requirements for Hand-Powered Winches and Hoists...................... 17–8
17.10 Requirements for Lever and Ratchet, Screw, and
Hydraulic Jacks...........................…. 17-9
17.11 Requirements for Hand Tools......................................................... 17-9
17.12 General Requirements for Boilers and Unfired Pressure Vessels ... 17-10
17.13 Requirements for Unfired Pressure Vessels................................... 17–10
17.14 Requirements for Compressors....................................................... 17–11
17.15 Requirements for Gas Cylinders..................................................... 17-12
17.16 Standards for Welding and Cutting................................................. 17–13
17.17 Requirements for Gas Welding and Cutting................................... 17-17
17.18 Requirements for Arc Welding and Cutting................................... 17–18
17.19 Requirements for Inert-Gas Metal-Arc Welding............................ 17–18
Section 18 – Slings, Chains, and Accessories.......................................... 18-1
18.1 General Requirements for Using Slings, Chains, and Accessories ... 18–1
18.2 Requirements for Using Alloy Steel Chains...................................... 18–2
18.3 Requirements for Using Wire Rope Slings........................................ 18–2
18.4 Requirements for Using Synthetic Fiber Rope.................................. 18-5
18.5 Requirements for Using Synthetic Webbing Slings .......................... 18-6
18.6 Requirements for Synthetic Roundslings........................................... 18–7
18.7 Requirements for Shackles, Hooks, and Other Rigging Hardware ... 18–8
October 2009 iX
Contents (continued)
Page
Section 19 – Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors............ 19-1
19.1 General Requirements for Hoisting Equipment................................. 19-1
19.2 Requirements for Cranes and Hoisting Devices, Inspections,
and Testing................… 19–2
19.3 Availability and Retention of Records............................................... 19-5
19.4 Qualifications for Operating Hoisting Equipment............................. 19–5
19.5 Operating Requirements for Hoisting Equipment............................. 19-6
19.6 Requirements for Critical Lifts.......................................................... 19–8
19.7 Requirements for Working with Wire Rope...................................... 19–8
19.8 Requirements for Mobile and Locomotive Cranes............................ 19-10
19.9 Requirements for Overheard, Gantry, Monorail, and Underslung
Cranes … 19-10
19.10 Requirements for Portal, Tower, and Pillar Cranes........................ 19–12
19.11 Requirements for Derricks.............................................................. 19-13
19.12 Requirements for Floating Cranes and Derricks............................. 19-13
19.13 Requirements for Material Hoists................................................... 19-14
19.14 Requirements for Overhead Hoists................................................. 19-17
19. 15 Requirements for Elevators and Personnel Hoists.......................... 19-17
19.16 Requirements for Personnel Hoists................................................. 19-18
19.17 Requirements for Conveyors and Related Equipment.................... 19–20
19.18 Requirements for Cableways and Highlines................................... 19–21
19.19 Requirements for Base-Mounted Drum Hoists............................... 19–23
19.20 Requirements for Specialized Hoisting Systems............................ 19–23
19.21 Requirements for Piledrivers.......................................................... 19–24
19.22 Helicopter Operations..................................................................... 19–25
Attachment 19–1 – Inspection Elements for Hoisting Equipment.............. 19–29
Attachment 19–2 – Crane Performance and Load Testing
Requirements Tables with Associated Testing Elements.................. 19-35
Attachment 19–3 – Boom Stop Testing Requirements............................... 19-45
Section 20 – Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment............... 20-1
20.1 Operational Requirements ................................................................. 20-1
20.2 Inspection Requirements.................................................................... 20-5
20.3 Maintenance Requirements................................................................ 20-6
20.4 Testing Requirements........................................................................ 20-7
20.5 Requirements for On-Highway Equipment....................................... 20-7
20.6 Crawler Equipment Requirements..................................................... 20–9
20.7 Requirements for Off-Highway Wheel Construction Machines ....... 20-10
20.8 Requirements for Agricultural and Industrial Equipment ................. 20–11
X October 2009
Contents (continued)
Page
20.9 Requirements for Personnel Transport Vehicles and Buses.............. 20–11
20.10 Requirements for Industrial Trucks................................................ 20–12
20.11 Requirements for A-Frame Trucks................................................. 20–14
20.12 Requirements for Aerial Lifts......................................................... 20-14
20.13 Requirements for Other Mechanized Construction
Equipment Standards...................................................................... 20-16
20.14 Requirements for Roads.................................................................. 20-17
Section 21 – Hazardous Waste Site Operations..................................... 21–1
21.1 Scope … 21–1
21.2 Hazardous Waste Operations Safety and Health Program ................ 21–1
21.3 Work Plan.…. 21–1
21.4 Site-Specific Health and Safety Plan (HASP)................................... 21–2
21.5 Hazard Evaluation and Control.......................................................... 21–2
21.6 Hazard Communication..................................................................... 21–2
21.7 Training … 21–2
21.8 Medical Evaluation............................................................................ 21-4
21.9 Inspections.…. 21–5
21.10 Contaminant/Exposure Monitoring................................................ 21-5
21.11 Site Control......…. 21-6
21.12 Control of Worker Exposure to Hazardous Substances.................. 21-6
21.13 Personal Protective Equipment....................................................... 21-6
21.14 Communications............................................................................. 21-7
21.15 Decontamination............................................................................. 21-7
21.16 Emergency Planning....................................................................... 21-8
21.17 Underground Storage Tank Removal ............................................. 21-9
21.18 Handling Drums and Containers..................................................... 21-9
Section 22 - Excavation Operations........................................................ 22–1
22.1 General Requirements for Excavation Operations ............................ 22–1
22.2 Requirements for Excavation Protective Systems............................. 22–5
22.3 Requirements for Structure Footings................................................. 22–7
22.4 Requirements for Cofferdams............................................................ 22-7
Section 23 – Tunnel and Shaft Construction.......................................... 23–1
23.1 General Requirements for Tunnel and Shaft Construction................ 23–1
23.2 Emergency Provisions....................................................................... 23–2
23.3 Requirements for Ventilation............................................................. 23-4
23.4 Requirements for Air Quality............................................................ 23-6
23.5 Requirements for Dust Control.......................................................... 23–8
October 2009 Xi
Contents (continued)
23.6
23.7
23.8
23.9
23.10
23.11
23.12
23.13
23.14
Section 24 — Blasting Operations
General Requirements for Blasting Operations......................
Radio and Electromagnetic Radiation ....................................
Requirements for Transporting Explosives ............................
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
24.5
24.6
24.7
24.8
24.9
24.10
24.11
24.12
24.13
24.14
Section 25 — Concrete, Masonry Construction, and Formwork
25.1
25.2
25.3
25.4
25.5
25.6
25.7
25.8
25.9
25.10
25.11
25.12
25.13
25.14
Requirements for Combustion Engines..................................
Requirements for Noise Control.............................................
Requirements for Fire Prevention and Control.......................
Requirements for Excavation Operations...............................
Requirements for Ground Support.......................................
Requirements for Transportation and Haulage....................
Requirements for Shafts.......................................................
Requirements for Tunneling in Soil.....................................
Requirements for Compressed-Air Work............................
Requirements for Transporting Explosives Underground
Explosives Storage..................................................................
Requirements for Handling Explosives..................................
Loading Explosives and Blasting Agents...............................
Wiring Operations...................................................................
Firing
Inspections Following a Blast..............................................
Requirements Regarding Misfires.......................................
Requirements for Using Safety Fuses..................................
Use of Detonating Cord.......................................................
Underwater Blasting............................................................
Plant and Equipment
Concrete Conveyance Systems...............................................
Reinforcing Steel ....................................................................
Surface Preparation.................................................................
Formwork and Falsework
Vertical Shoring
Tubular Welded Frame Shoring..............................................
Tube and Coupler Shoring......................................................
Single-Post Shores..................................................................
Vertical Slip-Forms..............................................................
Releasing and Moving Forms..............................................
Precast Concrete...................................................................
Lift-Slab..….
tº e º 'º e o e º 'º - c.
© tº e º 'º - © Q & tº º
tº e º 'º tº º O & © tº tº
tº e º 'º e o 'º e - e. e.
© tº e º te e º 'º - G -
s e º e º 'º e º 'º e º e º o gº e º e e º e e º e º 'º e º e e º e º e º e º e g g º e º e º e º º e º e º e e º e º e º e º e º e º e º º ºs e º e º e º 'o e º 'º g º º
e e - e. e. e. e º 'º e e
e - © e º O & tº 9 o º
c. * c e º 'º e º 'º e e
* G - G - tº o e o 'º º
tº º & e º 'º & © tº ºn tº º º º ſº tº e º ſº e º tº e º 'º - e - © tº - © tº º tº º º e º tº º º tº e º e º º & © tº & © tº 6 tº 6 tº G & e º E
tº e º 'º o O - tº e º tº
e - e. e. e. e. e. e. e. e. e.
tº e - e º e º e - © to
- © tº º º e º 'º º g º e e º e º 'º & o e º º e o e º ſº tº e º e º e ∈ E G - G - - - - © 0 & 0 & 0 & 0 & 3 e º ºs
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * tº e º ſº tº e º e º e º ei e º e ºs e e º 'º e g º e o e º e g º e g o sº e º 'º e º e º - e º e º a g º e º g g g g tº
e - © e º 'º - - - - -
tº e º e o e - © e º 0.
xii
October 2009
Contents (continued)
Page
Section 26 – Steel Erection....................................................................... 26-1
26.1 General Requirements for Erecting Steel Structures......................... 26-1
26.2 Requirements for Installing Permanent Flooring............................... 26–1
26.3 Requirements for Installing Temporary Flooring.............................. 26–2
26.4 Requirements for Installing Other Flooring....................................... 26–2
26.5 Requirements for Structural Steel Erections...................................... 26–2
26.6 Requirements for Plumbing-Up......................................................... 26–3
26.7 Requirements for Bolting................................................................... 26–3
26.8 Requirements for Riveting................................................................. 26-4
26.9 Requirements for Fire Protection....................................................... 26-4
Section 27 – Reclamation Drilling Standards......................................... 27-1
27.1 Standards for Site Selection and Working Platforms ........................ 27–1
27.2 General Requirements for Drill Rigs................................................. 27–2
27.3 Truck-Mounted Drills........................................................................ 27–3
27.4 Skid-Mounted Units........................................................................... 27–4
27.5 Drilling Operations............................................................................ 27–4
27.6 Underground Drilling Operations...................................................... 27–5
Section 28 – Watercraft and Dredging.................................................... 28-1
28.1 General Requirements for Watercraft Operations ............................. 28–1
28.2 Dredging Operations.......................................................................... 28–2
Section 29 – Marine and Diving Operations........................................... 29-1
29.1 Requirements for Contractor Diving Operations............................... 29-1
29.2 Requirements for Reclamation Diving Operations............................ 29–4
Tables
Table Page
7–1 Permissible noise exposures........................................................... 7–18
7-2 Toilets at temporary jobsites........................................................... 7–22
7-3 Toilets at permanent facilities......................................................... 7–22
7–4 Heat stress control measures........................................................... 7–28
7-5 Equivalent Chill Temperature (ECT) in degrees Fahrenheit
for different combinations of temperature and air speed (also
called Windchill Index)................................................................... 7–29
7-6 Exposure to ionizing radiation........................................................ 7–32
7-7 Laser hazard classes........................................................................ 7–36
October 2009 xiii
Tables (continued)
Table
7-8 TLVs for static magnetic fields.......................................................
7–9 Asbestos work classification...........................................................
7-10 Minimum lighting requirements.....................................................
8-1 Eye and face protector selection guide...........................................
8–2 Filter lenses for protection against radiant energy..........................
10-1 Inspection schedule for fire protection equipment..........................
11-1 Maximum allowable size of containers and portable tanks,
combustible..….
12-1 Approach boundaries to exposed energized conductors/parts
for qualified employees...................................................................
12–2 Equipment in transit clearances......................................................
12-3 Equipment clearances for operations near energized
overhead lines.….
12–4 Working spaces around enclosures and equipment...........................
13-1 Permissible spans for wood Scaffold planks......................................
13–2 Tube and coupler Scaffold dimensions ..............................................
13–3 Figure-four scaffold dimensions........................................................
19-1 Crane and hoisting equipment design and construction standards....
19-2 Crane and hoist equipment inspection criteria...................................
19-3 Safety factors for hoisting ropes used in personnel hoists.................
20-1 Applicable standards and regulations................................................
29-1 Dive team recordkeeping...................................................................
Figures
Figure
3–1 Contractor's report of recordable injury/illness ..............................
3–2 Contractor monthly summary of occupational injuries/illnesses
experience.….
7-1 Respirator and respirable air system selection guide C-II ..............
7-2 Respirator and respirable air system selection guide C-III.............
7–3 Biohazard symbol...........................................................................
7–4 Radiation symbol............................................................................
8-1 Recommended eye and face protectors...........................................
9-1 Danger, warning, and caution signs................................................
12-1 Boundaries...….............….
12–2. Access and working space requirements around enclosures
and equipment.…..
12-3 Working space requirements for rear or side access..........................
Page
7–37
7–41
7–46
8–3
8–4
10-8
11-6
Page
3–5
3-7
7–13
7–14
7–26
7–34
8–5
9–2
12–3
12–8
12-9
Xiv October 2009
Figures (continued)
Figure
12-4 Working space requirements for doors and hinged panels................
25-1 Pipe couplings.….
25-2 Crane boom mounted concrete conveyor System ..............................
29-1 Diving flag…
Appendices
A Job Hazard Analysis..........................................................................
B Contractor Safety Program ................................................................
C Electrical Grounding..........................................................................
D Wire Rope.….
F Slings …
F Record of Performance Inspection and Test—Crawler,
Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes .......................................
G Record of Performance Inspection and Brake Test—
On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment ........................................
H Record of Performance—Inspection and Brake Test
Off-Highway, Wheel-Type Construction Machines,
Loaders, Dumpers, Scrapers, Graders, Tractor Water
Wagons, and Similar-Type Machines...........................................
Cleanout Operations...........................................................................
Explosives.…
Glossary of Terms, Definitions, and Acronyms................................
Referenced Material...........................................................................
:
Page
12-9
25–4
25-6
29-9
H-1
I-1
J–1
R3-1
October 2009
XV
Section 1
Authority, Purpose, and Scope
This section sets forth the authority, purpose, and scope of Reclamation Safety
and Health Standards.
1.1 Authority for Reclamation Safety and Health Standards
Federal law and departmental regulations provide the authority to expend funds
and manpower to develop and implement programs that protect the safety and
health of Federal and contractor employees and prevent accidental damage of
Government property. (See 5 United States Code [U.S.C.] 7902; Sections 6
and 19 of Public Law 91-596, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970;
29 U.S.C. 651 et seq., 43 U.S.C. 1457, Executive Order 12196, 29 Code of
Federal Regulations [CFR) 1960; Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act;
and Departmental Manual, 485 DM.)
These standards are incorporated into the Reclamation Manual by reference
through SAF 01-01, Safety and Occupational Health - General, Para. 3.E, under a
waiver authorized by the Commissioner dated December 22, 2009.
1.2 Purpose and Scope
The standards prescribe the safety and health requirements for all Bureau of
Reclamation (Reclamation) activities and operations.
All contracts or agreements for performance of work on Reclamation facilities
must incorporate provisions for compliance with these standards. These standards
are consistent with the health and safety standards prevalent in industry, the
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, Public Law 91-596, and Department
of the Interior regulations.
This section sets forth the authority, purpose, and scope of Reclamation Safety
and Health Standards.
October 2009 1-1
Section 2
General Requirements
This section sets forth the general requirements of Reclamation Safety and Health
Standards. The section applies to all operations on Reclamation facilities and
lands.
2.1 General Duty Requirements
2.1.1 Organization Duty. The operating organization must provide
employees a safe and healthful work environment. This responsibility
includes, but is not limited to, implementing and enforcing all applicable
program elements and provisions of these standards. Equipment and facilities
must conform fully with the standards contained and referenced in these
standards.
2.1.2 Employee Duty. Employees must observe all safety and health
regulations and comply with instructions issued to them by their supervisors.
Employees must promptly correct unsafe working conditions or report them to
their supervisor or other proper authority.
2.2 Other Codes and Statutes
In addition to the requirements set forth in these standards, all operations on
Reclamation facilities and operations utilizing Reclamation equipment must
comply with applicable provisions of Federal, State, and municipal Safety, health,
and sanitary statutes and codes. If there is a difference between the provisions of
these standards and the safety and health regulations promulgated by the
U.S. Department of Labor in Title 29 CFR, Parts 1910 and 1926, Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970, or approved State plans, the more stringent
provision will prevail.
2.3 Variances
No variance to the provisions of these standards must be approved that endangers
the health and safety of any person, is not consistent with the intent of the
provisions of these standards, or would be a variance to Federal or State
regulations. If a literal application of a Reclamation provision of these standards
is impractical or creates conflicts, the appropriate office head or contracting
officer (CO), in consultation with safety and health professionals, may authorize a
variation to the provision. All requests for a variance must be in writing and
directed to the appropriate office head or contracting officer’s representative
(COR). The written request must include: (a) a reference to the specific
provision of the standard, (b) an explanation as to why the provision is considered
impractical, and (c) the proposed adaptation to the standard. The request must
contain pertinent technical data, drawings, material or equipment specifications,
October 2009 2–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
and other information that will enable the office head or CO to make a decision.
The operation in question must not proceed until the Reclamation office head or
CO provides written approval.
2.4. Requirements for Accident, Injury, and Illness Investigation and
Reporting - &
2.4.1 Reclamation. Investigate and report accidents and incidents using the
Department of the Interior Safety Management Information System. Any
accident involving a fatality must be reported to the appropriate Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) office within 8 hours.
2.4.2 Non-Federal Operators of Reclamation Facilities. Operators must
report to the appropriate Reclamation office all third party injuries, deaths, or
substantial property losses that result or could result in claims against the
Government.
2.4.3 Contractor. Contractors must report and investigate injuries and
incidents in accordance with the section entitled, "Contractor Requirements."
2.5. Alcohol, Drugs, and Firearms
Using intoxicating beverages and narcotics on Government property is not
permitted. No one under the influence of alcohol or narcotics is permitted on the
jobsite. Employees using medication(s) must ensure that their performance will
not be impaired. Unauthorized firearms are not permitted on Reclamation
property.
2.6. Public Safety
Reclamation facilities must be operated and maintained in a manner that poses no
excessive risk to the public.
2.7 Training
2.7.1. General. All employees must receive training about hazards and
hazard control methods specific to their jobs. The employer is responsible for
providing these instructions, together with ensuring that employees possess
the necessary qualifications, licenses, and permits required to perform such
work.
2.7.2 Employee Orientation. All employees must receive an orientation on
provisions of the safety and health program. The orientation must include
applicable requirements of safety and health policies, reporting accidents and
injuries, first aid and medical care, emergency response, applicable Safety and
health standards, and sources of information on safety and health questions.
2–2 October 2009
Section 2–General Requirements
2.7.3 Documentation. Document all training with, at least, the title, date,
and length of training, instructor or provider, and names of employees
completing the training.
2.8 Work Site Requirements
All work sites and areas must be maintained to avoid potential hazards introduced
by poor housekeeping and shoddy work practices.
2.8.1 Housekeeping. Good housekeeping, including provisions for routine
scrap and debris removal, must be maintained in all areas.
2.8.2. Environmental Stewardship. Handling, storing, using, and disposing
of waste must not contaminate or pollute water, air, or ground. Disposal must
comply with Federal, State, and local regulations.
October 2009 2–3
Section 3
Contractor Requirements
This section sets forth requirements for contractors. It specifically addresses
contractor responsibilities, certification requirements, safety programs, required
meetings, safety and health professional support, inspection requirements,
accident and incident investigating and reporting, monthly accident Summary
report, training requirements, dismissal of employees who refuse to comply with
occupational safety and health requirements, and dispute resolution. The
requirements of this section apply to Reclamation contractors.
3.1 Contractor Responsibilities
The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all work under contract meets or
exceeds the OSHA standards in addition to complying with the Reclamation
Safety and Health Standards contained herein. The contractor is responsible for
ensuring safe work performance of employees and subcontractors. These
standards also apply to offsite activities, equipment, and facilities that primarily
support the contract work. Contractors must include provisions for coordination
with the safety and health requirements of these standards in the terms and
conditions of all contracts, subcontracts, and supply contracts.
3.2 Certification Requirements
The manufacturer or a professional engineer (PE) must certify that the design of
major or critical facilities, equipment, support structures, or Systems,
embankments, shoring systems, and formwork (falsework) is structurally suitable
for the intended use. This certification must be in writing and submitted to the
Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR) before construction or use of Such
facilities, equipment, or support systems.
3.3 Required Safety Programs
The contractor must submit a comprehensive written safety program covering all
aspects of onsite and applicable offsite operations and activities associated with
the contract. (See appendix entitled, "Contractor Safety Program.") Unless
adequately covered in the original plan, the contractor must Submit a
supplementary detailed plan before starting each major phase of work or when
requested by the COR. Onsite work must not begin until the COR has accepted
the program or appropriate supplementary submittals. Initial and Supplementary
submittals must include a timetable for completing required, detailed, job hazard
analysis (JHAs). Accepting contractor initial and Supplementary programs only
signifies that the contractor has provided adequate documentation to perform the
work safely. It does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for providing
employees with a safe and healthful work environment or compliance with stated
requirements and applicable specification paragraphs.
October 2009 3–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
3.4 Required Meetings
3.4.1 Contractor Safety Program Review. After the contractor Submits the
written safety program requirements, a meeting must be held to review the
program. The contractor must be prepared to discuss in detail the procedures
to control the hazards likely to happen during major phases of the work, and
the organizational assignments involved in administering the program. The
contractor's principal onsite representative, general Superintendent, the COR,
and the safety representative must attend this meeting.
3.4.2 Joint Safety Policy Meeting. The COR, the contractor's principal
onsite representative, and designated members of respective staffs must
participate in scheduled monthly safety meetings. These meetings must
review the effectiveness of the contractor's safety effort, resolve health and
safety problems relating to current operations, and provide a forum for
planning safe future activities. The contractor must prepare and maintain
meeting minutes in a manner prescribed by the COR.
3.4.3 Supervisory Safety Meetings. The contractor must conduct regularly
scheduled (at least monthly) supervisory safety meetings for all levels of job
supervision. The contractor must maintain a Summary report containing
subject matter and signatures of all attendees and make it available for review
by the COR.
3.4.4 Tool Box Safety Meetings. Each field supervisor or foreman must
conduct at least one on-the-job or toolbox safety meeting each week, and all
employees under their supervision must attend. The field Supervisor or
foreman must maintain a record of each meeting, including signatures of
attendees, and make it available for review by the COR.
3.5 Safety and Health Professional Support
When the contract does not require the services of a full-time safety professional,
the contractor must designate, in writing, a competent Supervisory employee,
acceptable to the COR, to administer the safety program. However, if the CO
considers the contractor's safety effort inadequate, the CO may require the
contractor to employ a full-time qualified safety professional in place of a safety
representative. These standards make further provisions for using safety and
health specialists where special or technical expertise is required.
3.6 Required Inspections
The contractor must ensure competent employees conduct frequent and regular (at
least weekly) safety inspections of the worksites, materials, and equipment. The
contractor must maintain detailed written inspection records and make them
available for review by the COR. The contractor must prohibit the use of any
machinery, tool, material, or equipment that is not safe and/or does not comply
3–2 October 2009
Section 3–Contractor Requirements
with applicable requirement of these standards. The contractor must identify such
machine, tool, material, or equipment as unsafe, by tagging or locking the controls
to make them inoperable or by physically removing it from its place of operation.
3.7 Accident and Incident Investigating and Reporting
3.7.1 Report accidents and incidents immediately to the COR and appropriate
contractor personnel. The contractor is responsible for providing and
obtaining appropriate medical and emergency assistance and notifying the
coroner, fire and law enforcement agencies, the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration, and family members. Except for rescue and
emergency measures, do not disturb the scene of the accident or incident, and
do not resume the operation until authorized by COR. The contractor must
assist and cooperate fully with the COR in conducting the investigations of the
accident/incident and ensure availability of all information, personnel, and
data pertinent to the investigation. When ordered by the COR, the contractor
must conduct a separate and complete independent investigation of the
accident or incident and submit a comprehensive report of findings and
recommendations to the COR. The contractor must arrange, and be
financially responsible for, the independent investigation and any equipment
or material inspections or tests, or diagnostic studies required by the
Government or contractor investigators. Further, for each injured person, the
contractor must complete Reclamation form 7-2077, Contractor's Report of
Recordable Injury/Illness, and submit it to the COR. See figure 3-1.
3.7.2 The contractor must report nonserious accidents or incidents
immediately to the contractor's supervisor delegated authority to arrange for
medical assistance and to investigate the accident or incident. After arranging
for required medical assistance, the responsible supervisor must investigate
the accident/incident. Within 3 working days following the accident, the
contractor must submit to the COR a completed Reclamation form 7-2077,
Contractor's Report of Recordable Injury/Illness, for all personal injuries, and
a comprehensive narrative report for property damage accidents.
3.7.3 The contractor must report potentially serious accidents or incidents
immediately to the COR. The contractor's involved equipment and worksite
must remain secured until the contractor has completed a comprehensive
investigation, acceptable to the COR, and the COR has given permission to
resume work. Within 5 days following the investigation, the contractor must
submit a detailed, written investigation report to the COR.
3.8 Contractor Monthly Accident Summary Report
By the first day of each month, the contractor must submit a completed
Reclamation reporting form 7-2218, Contractor Recordable Accident
Experience, or equivalent, acceptable to the COR. See figure 3-2.
October 2009 3–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
3.9 Training Requirements
3.9.1 Orientation. The contractor must give each new contractor employee a
written notice containing pertinent provisions of the safety and health
program. The notice must indicate general policy and set forth procedures
and regulations applying to the work environment, accident reporting, and
first aid and medical care. Each employee must acknowledge receiving these
instructions. The contractor must file this acknowledgment and make it
available for review.
3.9.2 First Aid and CPR Training. Every contractor foreman must possess
a current first aid and CPR certificate from a recognized provider.
3.9.3 Contractor Supervisor Training. All contractor onsite supervisors,
including foremen, must attend a classroom review of applicable safety and
health requirements within 30 days after construction begins and annually
thereafter. Supervisors and foremen who begin work between formal training
sessions must receive initial instructions from the contractor's safety
representative and attend all subsequent annual reviews. Use these standards
and the contractor's safety program as a text for all training sessions. The
contractor must maintain records detailing course content and names of
attendees and make them available for review by the COR. A Reclamation
safety professional will be available for the formal classroom reviews to assist
with safety and health standards. The COR may grant exceptions to
Supervisory training requirements for short-term contracts or other
discretionary reasons.
3.10 Refusal to Comply With Occupational Safety and Health
Requirements
The contractor must remove employees who refuse or repeatedly fail to comply
with safe work practices and standards, or supervisors who fail to enforce
compliance, from the associated work assignments.
3.11 Dispute Resolution
If disputes involve safety issues, the work must not proceed until the dispute is
resolved.
3-4 October 2009
Section 3–Contractor Requirements
7-2077 (8-86)
Bureau of Reclamation
CONTRACTOR'S REPORT OF RECORDABLE INJURY/ILLNESS
Refer to Section 2 of Construction Safety Standards
Each work related fatality and injury/illness (first aid cases excepted), shall be reported on this form. The completed form will be
submitted to the contracting officer's representative within 3 working days from the date of the incident or onset of illness.
Responsibility for completion and submission of this form for all onsite injuries/illnesses to contractor, subcontractor, or supplier
form On
(Number and Feature)
SOCIAL
MEDICAL ONLY
(Never Date of Injury) |NJURY
DISABILITY7
(Date
YS
return to full to avoid delay in report (see reverse side for estimating instructions)
SUPERVISORY
OPINION
(Signature)
FOREMAN OR IMMEDIATE SUPERVISOR
PREVENTIVE
ACTION
TAKEN
(Signature)
PROJECT MANAGER OR SUPERINTENDENT
(NOTE: Information in this report is to be used for the prevention of accidents and is not intended as a basis for injury claims,
Recordable injuries/illnesses and workdays lost and injury classification shall be as defined on reverse side of this form.)
Figure 3-1.—Contractor's report of recordable injury/illness.


October 2009 3–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
7–2077 (8-86)
Bureau of Reclamation
Work-related injury/illness: All injuries/illnesses to contractor,
Subcontractor or supplier employees that result from an event or
exposure on any contractor controlled worksite associated with the
respective contract.
Medical Cases: injuries/illnesses are defined as medical cases
if (1) they can be treated only by a physician or licensed medical
personnel, (2) they result in damage or harm to physical structure
of a nonsuperficial nature (e.g. hairline fractures), (3) they impair
bodily functions (i.e. normal use of senses, limbs, etc.), (4) they
involve Complications requiring followup medical treatment.
The following are generally considered medical treatment:
g Treatment of INFECTION
& Application of ANTiSEPTICS during second or subsequent
visits to medical personnel
tº Treatment of SECOND OR THIRD DEGREE BURN(s)
& Application of BUTTERFLY ADHESIVE DRESSING(s) or
STERISTRIPS in lieu of Sutures.
& Application of SUTURES (stitches)
g Removal of FOREIGN BODIES EMBEDDED IN EYE
& Removal of FOREIGN BODIES from wound; if procedure is
COMPLICATED because of depths of embedment, size or
location
ge Use of PRESCRIPTION MEDICATIONS (except in a single
dose administered on first visit for minor injury or discomfort)
te Use of hot or cold SOAKING THERAPY during second or
subsequent visit to medical personnel
e Application of hot or cold COMPRESS(ES) during second or
subsequent visits to medical personnel
& CUTTING AWAY DEAD SKIN (surgical debridement)
& Application of HEAT THERAPY during second or subsequent
visit of medical personnel
§ Use of WHIRLPOOL BATH THERAPY during second or
subsequent visit of medical personnel
e POSITIVE X-RAY DIAGNOSIS (fractures, broken bones, etc.)
º ADMISSION TO A HOSPITAL or equivalent medical facility for
treatment or prolonged observation.
First Aid Cases: Cases (1) limited to one-time treatment and
subsequent observation and (2) involve treatment of only minor
injuries, not emergency treatment of serious injuries. Further, any
one-time treatment and followup visit for the sole purpose of
observation of minor scratches, cuts, burns, splinters, and so forth,
which do not ordinarily require medical care are classified as first
aid treatment. Such one-time treatment and followup visit for the
purpose of observation is considered first aid even though provided
by a physician or registered professional personnel. Visits to a doctor
for an examination or other diagnostic procedure to determine
whether the employee has an injury is classified as a first aid case
if no injury is discovered or medical treatment is rendered.
Conversely, if treatment is described and medical care is provided
even by someone other than a physician or registered medical
personnel, injury is classified as medical. Other examples of first
aid cases not requiring reporting unless they result in loss of
consciousness, restriction of work, or motion, or transfer to another
job are:
& Application of ANTiSEPTIC during first visit to medical personnel
e Treatment of FIRST DEGREE BURN(S)
º Application of BANDAGE(S) during first visit to medical
personnel
* Use of ELASTIC BANDAGE(S) during first visit to medical
personnel.
ſº Removal of FOREIGN BODIES NOT EMBEDDED IN EYE if only
irrigation is required
º Removal of FOREIGN BODIES from wound. If procedure is
UNCOMPLICATED, and is, for example, by tweezers or other
simple technique
* Use of NONPRESCRIPTION MEDICATIONS and administration
of single dose of PRESCRIPTION MEDICATION on first visit for
minor injury or discomfort
* SOAKING THERAPY ON INITIAL VISIT to medical personnel or
removal of bandages by SOAKING
e Application of hot or cold COMPRESS(ES) during first visit to
medical personnel
ë Application of OINTMENTS to abrasions to prevent drying or
cracking
DEFINITION OF TERMS
• Application of HEAT THERAPY during first visit to medical
personnel.
• Use of WHIRLPOOL BATH THERAPY during first visit to
medical personnel.
NEGATIVE X-RAY DAGNOSIS
BRIEF OBSERVATION of injury during visit to medical personnel.
Note: The administration of a TETANUS SHOT or BOOSTER, by
itself, is not considered medical treatment. However, these shots
are often given in conjunction with the more serious injuries.
Therefore, injuries requiring tetanus shots may be reportable for
other reasons.
illness Cases: Occupational illness of an employee is any abnormal
condition or disorder, other than one resulting from an occupational
injury caused by exposure to environmental factors associated with
employment. It includes acute and chronic illnesses or diseases
which may be caused by inhalation, absorption, ingestion, or direct
Contact
Some conditions may be classified as either an injury or illness
(but not both), depending upon the nature of the event that produced
the condition. For example, a loss of hearing resulting from an
explosion (an instantaneous event) is classified as an injury, the
same condition arising from exposure to industrial noise over a
period of time would be classified as an occupational illness.
Similarly, irritation of the throat from exposure to chlorine funes
would be classified as an injury if it resulted from a ruptured tank
And an illness if the exposure occurred over a period of time. The
Adverse reaction to a tetanus shot given for a laceration would be
classified as an injury. Back cases should always be recorded as
an injury. it should be noted that all occupational illnesses are
reportable and recordable incidents regardless of the type of
treatment provided.
Fatalities: Work related fatalities are reportable and recordable
regardless of the time between the injury and the death or the length
of the illness. Lost workdays attributable to the incident are not
counted and any charged should be removed from the record.
Lost Workdays: Lost workdays are defined as the number of
workdays (consecutive or not), beyond the day of injury or onset
of illness, the employee was away from work or limited to restricted
work activity. The number of days away from work or days of
restricted work activity does not include the day of injury or onset
of illness or any days on which the employee would not have worked
even though able to work, e.g. vacation days, days off, or holidays
are not counted. Termination of employment may stop the count
of lost workdays if unrelated to the employee's injury or illness.
if termination is related to injury/illness, an estimate of actual
workdays lost shall be made. Retirements unrelated to injury or
liness stop the count of lost workdays. Otherwise days lost are
estimated. Lost workday counts cease when injury or illness is
determined as totally disabling. Lost workday count stops when
position employee was in when injured is abolished due to work
Completion, e.g. a dozer operator lost workdays count would not
Continue beyond last day of dozer operations on the project even
if the operator still could not perform the operator functions.
Restricted work: The number of workdays on which, because of
injury or illness: (1) the employee was assigned to another job on
a temporary basis, (2) the employee worked at a permanent job
less than full time, or (3) the employee worked at a permanently
assigned job but could not perform all duties normally connected
with it. Lost workday count stops when employee is permanently
transferred to another permanently established position.
Contractor-Controlled Worksite Associated with the Contract: The
following and similar locations are considered contractor-controlled
worksites:
All areas within the boundaries of the construction site including
shops, plants, storage areas, haul-roads and borrow and fill areas.
All offsite locations (plants, shops, rock quarries, borrow areas,
erection sites, etc.) used exclusively for supporting construction
activities. All roads where traffic control is a contractor
responsibility.
Figure 3-1.-Contractor's report of recordable injury/illness (continued).
October 2009

7-22.18 (7-96)
Bureau of Reclamation
CONTRACTORS MONTHLY SUMMARY OF OCCUPATIONAL INJURIES/ILLNESSES EXPERIENCE
The prime contractor will submit this completed form to the contracting office's representative by the first day of each month. Included on this form will be the contractors,
Subcontractors, and suppliers onsite injury/illness experience for the previous reporting period. Reporting period cutoff dates can coincide with appropriate pay periods as long as the
ending date of this current report is the beginning date of the next report. All form terms are defined in Appendix DD of Reclamation Safety and Health Standards or elsewhere on
this form. -
REPORTNG PERIOD – STARTING ENDING
RECORDABLE CASES INCIDENT RATES
CONTRACTOR, TYPE OF NO DEATH
SUBCONTRACTOR - LOST
* CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES MAN-HOURS LOST WORKDAY TOTAL AND LOST LOST
SUPPLIER – SPEC. N.O. EXPOSURE | WORKDAYS TOTAL {DEATHS CASES CASES wº WORKDAYS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TOT 11
PRIME CONTRACTOR
NAME
SPEC, NO.
SUBCONTRACTOR
SUPPLIERS
TOTAL | | | | | | | |
CUMULATIVE TOTAL | | | | | | | |
Column 1. Name of General Contractor and General Specification No. only. Combine all subcontractor and/or supplier data under respective headings. Cumulative totals start
from first day of onsite work under the specification. -
Column 2. Major classification or type of work for contractor (earth dam, concrete dam, canals, tunnel, pumping plant, power facilities, etc.). Minor classification to supplier or
subcontractor (concrete work, earthwork, repair work, etc.).
Column 3. Average number of employees during reporting period. Include only onsite personnel. Number of subcontractor or supplier employees can be estimated by dividing
number of estimated man-hours by 8 x number of days in reporting period ( Number of man-hour )
(8 x number of days of reporting period)
Column 4. Actual man-hours of Onsite exposure. Do no include vacation time, holidays, down periods, etc.
Column 5. Lost workdays include actual days from work, restricted workdays, and days worked in another assigned position. (See Appendix DD of Reclamation, Safety and
Health Standards for detailed explanation of lost workdays and restricted work.)
Column 6. Total of fatalities, lost workday cases, restricted work cases or transfer to other job cases, and medical cases reported on all forms 7-2077. Contractor's Report of
Recordable injury/illness, submitted during the reporting period covered on this form.
Column 7. Fatalities are charged to date of injury or onset of illness regardless of date of death.
Column 8.
Includes all cases submitted during this reporting period on forms 7-2077, Contractor's Report of Recordable Injury/liness, that show figures under headings entitled,
"Workdays lost time" or "Days of restricted work or transfer to other job." (See Appendix DD of Reclamation Safety and Health Standards.)
g
Column 9, 10, 11. Incident rates are defined on the number of injuries/illnesses or lost workdays related to a common exposure base-100 full-time workers or 200,000 man-hours of
exposure (100 workmen x 40hrs/week x 50 weeks/year = 200,000). These rates are calculated as follows:
Total Cases (Column 9) = Total cases (column 6) x 200,000
Man-hours of Exposure (column 4)
Death, and lost = Deaths (column 7) and lost workday cases (column 8) x 200,000
Workday cases Man-hours of exposure (column 4)
(column 10)
Lost workdays = Lost Workdays (Column 5) x 200,000
(column 11) Man-hours of exposure (column 4)
3.
Section 4
Work Planning
This section sets forth the requirements of work planning. It includes hazard
assessment, job hazard analysis, communications, emergency response plan, and
lightning hazards. This section applies to all Reclamation and contractor
activities.
4.1 Hazard Assessments
The responsible supervisor, consulting with a safety or health professional if
needed, must assess the workplace and work activities to determine if hazards are
present or are likely to be present. The supervisor must develop a written Job
Hazard Analysis (JHA) if warranted by identified or potential hazards. If there is
potential exposure to any chemical, physical, or biological agent which may have
a detrimental effect, the supervisor must ensure that a health hazard assessment is
included in the JHA.
4.2 Requirements for Job Hazard Analysis
4.2.1 Requirement. The responsible supervisor, consulting with employees
who will perform the work and a safety and health representative, if needed,
must develop a written JHA if required by the hazard assessment. The
supervisor and employees must review the JHA at the Tool Box Safety
meeting before performing the work. A copy of the JHA must be available at
the work site.
4.2.2 Written Procedure. Written procedures for selected operations must
prescribe how actions should be accomplished, the proper sequence,
equipment required, specific instructions or limitations, potential hazards with
preventive measures, and instructions. Written procedures also must
reference appropriate codes, standards, and regulations.
4.2.3 Basic Elements of JHA. Record developed written procedures in
narrative form or on a standard printed form. See example in the “Job Hazard
Analysis” appendix.
At a minimum, the JHA must include the following basic elements:
a. Title: Identifies project and specifies operation.
b. Number: Used for recording and indexing.
c. Date: Required to ensure procedure is current. Include annual or
biennial revision dates with reviewer's initials.
d. Description of work to be performed.
October 2009 4-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
e. Equipment, tools, and facilities involved.
f. Employee knowledge, skills, physical ability, and certification required.
g. Principal steps of operation in sequence: break down operations only
into the sequence of significant steps necessary to ensure adequate
consideration of important items.
h. Identification of hazards:
1. Physical
2. Chemical
3. Biological
i. Identification of hazard control measures:
1. Engineering controls
2. Administrative controls
3. Safety equipment and apparel
j. References: Reference to codes, standards, or regulations.
k. Signatures of the supervisor and the reviewing official.
4.2.4 As work is performed under a JHA, reassess the JHA to ensure that
hazards have been addressed and adequate hazards controls have been
implemented. Job site monitoring and observation of work activities must be
a basis for assessment and revision. Where controls are determined to be
insufficient, halt work until adequate controls can be developed.
4.3 Employee Training and Physical Qualifications
4.3.1 Training Qualifications. Do not assign any work until the employee
has been adequately trained to perform the task.
4.3.2 Physical Qualifications. All employees must be physically and
medically qualified, as appropriate, for performing their assigned duties.
4.4 Working Alone
When employees must work alone and when the possibility of injury and inability
to provide medical treatment could create life-threatening situations, supervisors
must implement protective measures. The JHA process will determine
appropriate measures and will address the specific situations and hazards.
4.4.1 Communication. An effective means of communication must be
available. This communication could include cellular phone, two-way radios,
4-2 October 2009
Section 4–Work Planning
hard line telephones, and check-in and check-out procedures. Selected
communication must be tested prior to start of operation to Verify that
equipment will operate efficiently in the environment.
When an employee is working alone in an isolated location, make frequent
checks to ensure the employee’s safety.
In some instances, employees (dam tenders) are stationed in isolated work
areas and generally perform their duties alone. At a minimum, daily
communication identifying activities and locations for that day are required.
4.4.2 Emergency Response Procedures. An emergency response plan must
be written and all employees informed about the plan and procedures.
Employees working alone must have an effective way to obtain emergency
assistance. If an employee misses a pre-determined check-in, initiate
emergency procedures.
4.4.3 Emergency Response Plan. Emergency response plan must include
provisions for emergency medical care and treatment. Include arrangements
for ambulance service, emergency treatment, and maintain a list of phone
numbers. The plan must be submitted to and approved by the COR prior to
the start of operation.
4.5 Requirements for Lightning Hazard Plan
When outdoor work is performed where a lightning hazard has been identified, a
lightning hazard plan shall be developed. This plan shall contain, as a minimum,
the following items:
• A designated person(s) responsible to monitor the weather to initiate the
evacuation process when appropriate.
• A protocol to notify all persons at risk from the lightning threat.
Depending on the number of individuals involved, a team of people may
be needed to coordinate the evacuation plan.
• Safer sites identified beforehand, along with a means to route the people to
those locations.
• An “All Clear” signal identified that is considerably different than the
“Warning” signal.
October 2009 4-3
Section 5
Medical Services and First Aid
5.1 General Requirements
This section sets forth the requirements for medical services and first aid.
5.1.1 Requirement. Emergency medical services must be readily available
for employees and employees must know how and where to access the
Services or supplies. Adequately train employees to render first aid and
cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). Provide adequate first aid supplies to
address medical emergencies.
5.1.2 Communication. Make reliable means of communication to contact
emergency medical facilities. Provide specific guidance on actions to take
when a medical emergency occurs. Conspicuously post emergency numbers
(such as 911).
5.1.3 Signs. Post signs to clearly indicate the location of a first aid station
and first aid kits.
5.2 Requirements for Medical Services
5.2.1 Minimum requirements for medical first aid stations are as follows:
a. In the absence of readily available medical services, facility locations
with more than 99 employees (total number of employees on the largest
shift) must have a first aid station equipped as directed by a consulting
physician, preferably one specializing in occupational health medicine.
The first aid station must have, at least, a stretcher, blanket, eye wash
Solutions, and supplies to treat anticipated hazards.
b. A registered nurse (RN), an emergency medical technician (EMT), or a
paramedic must be on duty at the on-site first aid station, except when on
emergency call.
5.2.2 Make an assessment to determine the number of employees to be
trained to administer first aid and CPR, but at least one employee per shift.
The assessment must include analysis of the injury and illness log experience,
hazardous operations, work environment, and consultation with a health care
professional.
5.2.3 In isolated or remote work locations, all employees must be qualified to
administer first aid and CPR. Where the job hazard analysis indicates
significant risks, the job planning must include provisions for first aid
assistance. Employee training intervals for first aid and CPR must be in
accordance with the American Red Cross or the American Heart Association.
October 2009 5–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
5.3 Requirements for First Aid Kits
On projects with less than 100 people, first aid supplies will be provided and
accessible. At least one full kit must be provided for every 25 employees.
5.3.1 Consensus standard ANSI Z308.1, Minimum Requirements for
Industrial Unit-Type First Aid Kits, lists and establishes a minimum
assortment of first aid treatment packages that first aid kits should contain.
The basic fill kit must include the following:
a. Absorbent compress (32 square inches, with no side Smaller than
4 inches)
b. Adhesive bandages
c. Adhesive tape
d. Antiseptic applications (0.5 gram per application, total 0.14 fluid
ounces)
e. Burn treatment applications (0.5 gram per application, total 0.14 fluid
ounces)
f. Two pairs of medical exam gloves, and two additional pairs of latex
gloves
g. Sterile pads (3 by 3 inches)
h. Triangular bandage (40 by 40 by 56 inches)
i. Mouth protective valve for CPR
j. Disinfectant
k. Biohazard disposal receptacle
However, when larger operations or multiple operations occur at the same
location, supervisors must determine the need for additional first aid kits at the
work site, additional types of first aid equipment and Supplies, and additional
quantities and types of supplies and equipment in first aid kits. The Supervisor
must choose first aid supplies in consultation with a health care professional
or by a person competent in first aid and knowledgeable about the hazards of
that workplace.
5.3.2 Government-owned motor vehicles, aircraft, and watercraft must carry a
first aid kit.
5.3.3 Inspect first aid kits monthly (and weekly for construction activities).
The label inside the kit lid must include an inventory of the kit’s contents.
The inspector must verify that the listed items are available and that the sterile
packaging is intact. Record the date of the last inspection.
5–2 October 2009
Section 5—Medical Services
and First Aid
5.4 Ambulance Services
Provisions for ambulance or emergency services must be planned prior to
operations. Acceptable ambulance service may be provided by a licensed agency
that renders service or a standby emergency vehicle for that purpose at the jobsite.
October 2009 5–3
Section 6
Emergency Plans
This section describes emergency plans, including general requirements, what
they must include, employee orientation, alert systems, emergency
communications, and actions to resume normal operations.
6.1 General Requirements of Emergency Plans
Emergency plans must ensure employee and public safety, protection of property,
and continuity of essential operations. These plans must address foreseeable
emergency events, employee responsibilities, emergency response procedures,
training, and equipment; must be in writing; and must be reviewed with all
affected employees. Test emergency plans at least once every 12-month period to
ensure effectiveness.
6.1.1 Where outside emergency services are used, provide at least the
following information to the outside responders:
• Facility plans that provide the physical layout of the facility
• Locations of hazardous chemicals
• Locations of hazardous equipment
• Conduct periodic tours of the facility to familiarize the responders
• Function of the alarm, elevators, and communication systems
• Location and function of emergency equipment in the facility
6.1.2 Requirements for emergency responders include at least the following:
• Specialized training commensurate with actual tasks
• Specialized protective equipment and periodic drills with the
equipment
• Specialized rescue equipment and periodic drills with the equipment
• Medical evaluations
• At least four employees to conduct an initial entry by two individuals
• Specialized, tested communications procedures and equipment
• A detailed written plan
6.2 Emergency Plans
Plans must include:
• Lines of authority for emergency procedures
• Training requirements, including PPE, for all assisting in the emergency
evacuation of personnel
October 2009 6–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• Training requirements for communicating the plan to affected personnel
• Requirements for emergency equipment
• Escape procedures and routes
• Critical facility operations
• Employee accounting following an emergency evacuation
• Rescue and medical duties
• Means of reporting emergencies
• Contacts for information or clarification
• Communication systems and procedures
6.3 Employee Orientation
Review the plan with all affected employees when first developed, whenever
employees’ responsibilities change, when the plan changes, and periodically.
Upon initial assignment, brief new employees.
6.4. Alert Systems for Emergency Situations
Alert systems are alarms or procedures designed to warn of existing or imminent
emergency situations. They must be developed and tested to ensure all persons
likely to be affected by emergency situations are familiar with the systems and
will receive adequate warning to take appropriate actions. Alert Systems may also
be designed to alert and summon emergency response personnel.
6.5 Emergency Communications
Conspicuously post emergency telephone numbers and reporting instructions for
ambulance, medical services, hospital, fire, and police. Familiarize all personnel
with emergency communications procedures. Telephone lines and radio
frequencies must be kept clear for use by those in charge during an emergency.
6.6 Resuming Normal Operations
Normal operations may resume only after appropriate actions have been taken to
ensure that safe conditions exist before resuming normal operations. Do not
jeopardize the safety of employees, the public, or property because of the urgency
to resume operations or to restore service.
6.7 Emergency Response to Hazardous Substance Releases
In general, Reclamation requires a strategy for dealing with uncontrolled releases
of hazardous substances. You are provided a choice which will determine the
program elements and the complexity of implementation necessary to meet the
6–2 October 2009
Section 6—Emergency Plans
requirements of these standards. You need to address whether or not you expect
your employees to respond to emergency hazardous material spills.
Emergency response is a response effort by employees from outside the
immediate release area or by other designated responders to an occurrence
that results, or is likely to result, in an uncontrolled release of a hazardous
Substance.
Incidental releases, where the substance can be absorbed, neutralized, or
otherwise controlled at the point of release by employees in the immediate
release area or by maintenance personnel, are not considered to be emergency
responses within the scope of this standard, as long as there is no potential
safety or health hazard.
6.7.1 General Requirements When Employees Are Expected to Respond.
If you expect employees to respond to hazardous substance releases at
locations other than identified hazardous waste sites which fall under the
requirements of the hazardous waste site operations section, you are required
to develop an Emergency Response Plan and ensure that employees are
designated, trained, and equipped to safely deal with the emergency.
a. Pre-planning. You must identify the types, quantities, and locations of
hazardous substances; determine the relative hazard of each substance;
and develop response procedures and training for worst-case scenarios.
b. Emergency Response Plan. You must have a written plan in place
prior to commencement of emergency response operations. This plan will
be incorporated into the broader Emergency Action Plan developed for
your site, covering responses by all employees to a broad range of
potential emergencies. The plan must include at least all the following
elements:
• Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties
• An outline of personnel roles, lines of authority, training, and
communication
• Emergency recognition and prevention procedures
• Details about safe distances and places of refuge
• Site security and control procedures
• Evacuation routes and procedures
• Emergency alerting and response procedures
• Decontamination procedures
• Emergency medical treatment and first aid procedures
• Methods for evaluation of response and followup procedures
October 2009 6–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• Information on the location of Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS), personal protective equipment (PPE), and emergency
equipment
c. Incident Command System. You must develop a system that
identifies your senior emergency response official (Incident Commander)
who has ultimate site control responsibility and authority. Responsibilities
of the commander include:
• Identifying, to the extent possible, all hazardous substances or
conditions present
• Addressing site analysis, use of engineering controls, maximum
exposure limits, hazardous substance handling procedures, and use
of new technologies
• Implementing appropriate emergency operations
• Determining, through monitoring, when PPE or respiratory
protection is required
• Assuring that PPE worn is appropriate for the hazards encountered
during emergencies
d. Training. You are required to provide specialized training for
responders based upon their duties and functions within your plan. The
skill and knowledge levels required for all new responders must be
conveyed to them through training before they are permitted to take part in
actual emergency operations. There are a minimum of five types of
responders, each with specific training expectations to be met. They are:
First responder awareness level
First responder operations level
Hazardous materials technician
Hazardous materials specialist
• Onsite incident commander
A first responder awareness level employee is an individual who is likely
to witness or discover a hazardous substance release and who, through
training, is expected to initiate a response sequence by notifying
appropriate authorities of the release. They are not expected to take
further action.
A first responder operations level employee is an individual who is
expected to respond to releases as part of initial actions to protect nearby
personnel, property, or the environment from the effects of the release.
They are trained to respond defensively to a release without necessarily
being expected to stop the release.
A hazardous materials technician level employee is an individual who is
expected to stop the release. They assume a more aggressive role, perhaps
October 2009
Section 6—Emergency Plans
approaching the point of release in order to plug, patch, or otherwise stop
the release of hazard substance.
A hazardous material specialist level employee is an individual who is
expected to respond with and provide support to technician level
responders. They require more specific knowledge of the substances they
may be called upon to contain. They act as a liaison with other outside
authorities in regard to site activities.
An onsite incident commander is an individual who is expected to assume
control of the incident scene upon notification of release.
You must provide training which meets the following minimum
expectations associated with each type of responder.
1. First responder awareness level. Training enabling the individual
to demonstrate:
• Understanding of hazardous substances and their risks
• Ability to identify hazardous substances in an emergency
• Understanding of their role in the plan
• How to notify appropriate entities
2. First responder operations level. A minimum 8 hours of training
enabling the individual to demonstrate:
• Knowledge of basic hazard and risk assessment techniques
• How to select and use proper personal protective equipment
• Understanding of basic hazardous materials terminology
• How to perform basic control, containment, and/or
confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources
and equipment available
• How to implement basic decontamination procedures
• Understanding of the established standard operating procedures
3. Hazardous materials technician. A minimum 24 hours of
training enabling the individual to demonstrate:
• How to implement the emergency response plan
• Knowledge of the classification, identification, and verification
of known and unknown material by using field survey
instruments and equipment
• Ability to function within the assigned role in the incident
command system
• Knowledge to select and use proper specialized chemical
personal protective equipment provided
October 2009 6–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Knowledge of hazard and risk assessment techniques
Performance of advance control, containment, and/or
confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources
available
Understanding of implementation of decontamination
procedures
Understanding of termination procedures
Understanding of basic chemical and toxicological terminology
4. Hazardous materials specialist. A minimum 24 hours of training
enabling the individual to demonstrate:
How to implement the emergency response plan
Knowledge of the classification, identification, and verification
of known and unknown material by using field survey
instruments and equipment
Knowledge of the State emergency response plan
Knowledge on selecting and using proper specialized chemical
personal protective equipment provided
Knowledge of in-depth hazard and risk assessment techniques
Performing advance control, containment, and/or confinement
operations within the capabilities of the resources available
Understanding of implementation of decontamination
procedures
Understanding of termination procedures
Understanding of basic chemical and toxicological terminology
5. Onsite incident commander. A minimum 24 hours of training
with elements included meeting first responder training as well as
enabling the individual to demonstrate:
How to implement the incident command system
How to implement the site emergency response plan
Knowledge of the hazards and risks associated with employees
working in chemical protective clothing
How to implement local, State, and Federal emergency
response plans
Knowledge of decontamination procedures
e. Annual refresher training. You must annually provide training to
maintain individual competencies and substantiate that employees can
demonstrate competency in their level of emergency response. If time
October 2009
Section 6—Emergency Plans
periods lapse regarding these demonstrated competencies for more
than 2 years, individuals must be provided training meeting the initial
training requirements.
6.7.2 General Requirements When Employees Are Not Expected to
Respond. If you do not permit employees to respond to hazardous substance
releases, and you will evacuate the employees from the danger area when an
emergency occurs, you are required to specify this in the comprehensive
emergency action plan (employee emergency and fire prevention plans) as
required in other parts of this section.
October 2009 6–7
Section 7
Occupational Health
This section sets forth the requirements and standards for Reclamation’s
occupational health programs. It covers the following specific areas:
Employee Exposure Standards
Health Hazard Assessments
Exposure Control
Hazard Control Plans
Recordkeeping
Medical Surveillance
Hazard Communication Program
Respiratory Protection
Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation
Sanitation
Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories
Bloodborne Pathogens
Heat Stress and Cold Stress
Ionizing and Non-ionizing Radiation
Asbestos
Lead
Illumination
7.1 Employee Exposure Standards
An employee exposure measures dose, toxicity, and route of entry to an employee
for a specified period of time. Maintain employee exposures to airborne
contaminants at or below the more protective requirements of the OSHA
permissible exposure limits (PELs) or the American Conference of Governmental
Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) for Chemical
Substances and Physical Agents.
7.2 Requirements for Health Hazard Assessments
A health hazard assessment is a study of the worksite, including identification of
potential to hazardous materials or atmospheres, equipment, and work procedures.
7.2.1 Exposure Assessment. The exposure assessment is a process that
determines the magnitude (including dose and toxicity), duration, and route of
entry of a potential health threat. Conduct health hazard assessments for all
facilities and operations to determine the extent of existing, as well as
introduced, health hazards (physical, chemical, and biological).
October 2009 7–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
7.2.2 Exposure Monitoring. Conduct exposure monitoring when hazardous
materials or physical agents are present in the workplace. Also use exposure
monitoring to:
Evaluate new processes and establish baselines
Evaluate engineering controls
Investigate employee complaints
Comply with Federal, State, and local regulations
Conduct investigations or research
Periodically monitor exposure when employees wear respiratory protection, use
hearing protection devices, are exposed to radiation sources, or when monitoring
is required by specific standards. A qualified person must direct and supervise
employee exposure monitoring.
7.3 Requirements for Exposure Control
7.31 Engineering Controls. Use engineering controls as the primary means
to minimize workplace health hazards. Engineering controls may include, but
are not limited to, the use of enclosures, isolation, substitution of materials, or
ventilation.
7.3.2 Administrative Control Measures. Use administrative controls such
as scheduling reduced work times in high exposure areas, erecting signs,
training employees, and specific job procedures to reduce personnel
exposures.
7.3.3 Personal Protective Equipment. Use personal protective equipment
to protect employees from their environment when engineering and
administrative controls are not adequately protective.
7.3.4. Assessment. Complete a written assessment on the feasibility of
engineering controls when either of the following occurs:
a. The air contaminant concentrations meet or exceed an action level
(which is 50 percent of the more stringent of OSHA PEL’s, ACGIH
TLVs, or other specific occupational-based exposure standard in effect).
b. The source noise level meets or exceeds 85 dBA.
7.4 Requirements for the Hazard Control Plans
7.4.1 Air Contaminant Control Plan. Establish an air contaminant control
plan when an air contaminant is produced by stationary or portable sources at
concentrations that reach an Action Level. An Action Level is defined as one-
half of an established PEL or TLV, unless otherwise stated in a specific
standard. The plan will reflect the means and processes used to:
a. Identify all contaminant sources.
7–2 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
b. Track corrective actions associated with contaminant sources.
c. Conduct area monitoring to determine the effectiveness of the controls
applied.
d. Complete job hazard analyses for operations with air contaminant
exposure.
e. Provide exposure control through the use of administrative controls or
use of the personal protective devices when engineering control is
infeasible.
f. Implement a medical surveillance program, when necessary.
7.4.2 Noise Control Plan. Establish a noise control plan when noise is
produced by stationary or portable sources expose personnel to 85 or more
decibels (dBA). The plan will reflect the means and processes used to:
a. Conduct noise surveys to identify, inventory, and label all sources that
expose personnel to 85 dBA or more.
b. Track corrective actions associated with noise sources.
c. Conduct area monitoring to determine the effectiveness of the controls
applied.
d. Complete job hazard analyses for operations with noise source
exposure.
e. Provide exposure control through the use of administrative controls or
the use of personal protective devices when engineering control is
infeasible.
f. Implement a hearing conservation program, when necessary.
7.5 Recordkeeping Requirements
Maintain employee medical, exposure monitoring, and training records in
accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1020, the Privacy Act of 1974 (P.L.93–
579), and FPM 293. Follow the employee medial records maintenance guidance
found in the Department of the Interior’s Occupational Medicine Program
Handbook. Medical and exposure monitoring records must be maintained for the
duration of employment plus 30 years.
7.6 Requirements for Medical Surveillance
7.6.1 Requirements for Medical Surveillance are Determined by
Exposure or Risk. Include an employee in a medical surveillance program
after an initial hazard assessment for certain high demand jobs; where
required by specific Federal regulations; after exposure monitoring verifies
October 2009 7–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
the necessity; or when employees are exposed to or exhibit symptoms of
exposure to chemicals, dust, noise, and other workplace hazards as determined
by credible exposure monitoring.
7.6.2 Medical Administration. When medical surveillance is required, it
must be conducted under the direction of a physician who specializes in
occupational medicine. The medical surveillance program must be based on a
comprehensive evaluation of the workforce, worksites, and job duties.
Provide the examining physician with a description of duties that relate to the
hazardous workplace, results of employee exposure monitoring, a description
of personal protective equipment used, and information from previous medical
examinations.
7.6.3 Notification. Notify employees of their inclusion in the program and
educate them as to the program’s goals, benefits, and procedures. Provide
employees with a written summary of any examination, as well as laboratory tests
results. Recommendations for any additional tests relating to the medical
Surveillance program and information on non work-related problems requiring
further medical evaluation must be conveyed to the employee in a timely manner.
The medical provider will provide the employer with the physician’s opinion
concerning: (1) any detected medical conditions that place the employee at
increased risk of harm from continued performance on the job, (2) any
recommended work modifications, and (3) a statement that the employee has been
informed of the results and any other matters requiring further medical followup.
7.7 Hazard Communication Program Requirements
7.7.1 General Requirements. Obtain Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
for any substance possessing combustible, flammable, corrosive, explosive, or
toxic properties. Make MSDS readily available and accessible by employees.
All persons who use hazardous materials must receive training.
7.7.2 Written Program. Establish a written hazard communication program
wherever employees use, store, or produce substances with hazardous
properties. Exceptions to this requirement include laboratories where the
chemical hygiene plan is required. The OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1200 mandatory
Appendices A, B, and D shall be included in all written programs.
7.7.3 Program Requirements. The written program must identify the means
used and the individuals responsible for performing the following:
a. Maintaining an inventory of all hazardous substances that are available
to employees and regulatory officials at the point of use or storage.
b. Maintaining an MSDS for each inventoried substance that is available
to employees and regulatory officials at the point of use or storage.
c. Legibly and prominently label all containers of hazardous substances.
The label must identify the material link it to other required information
7–4 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
resources (inventory and MSDS), identify the primary hazard(s), and state
appropriate precautions such as “Do not use near open flame.”
d. Providing and documenting hazard communication training for each
employee who uses or stores inventoried substances. The training must
cover the following issues:
1. Terminology used in, and elements of, an MSDS.
2. Location(s) of written program, hazardous substance inventory, and
MSDS files.
3. Individuals responsible for hazard communication program.
4. The physical and health hazards of substances used and stored in
the workplace and specific protective measures.
5. How to use the labeling system.
6. How to recognize tasks that may lead to hazard exposure.
7. How to use work practice, engineering controls, and PPE to limit
exposure.
8. How to obtain information on the types, selection, proper use,
location, removal, handling, decontamination, and disposal of PPES.
9. Who to contact (and what to do) in an emergency.
e. Responding to hazardous substance spills/emergencies.
f. Annually assessing and reporting the status of implementation of the
program elements.
7.8 Requirements for Respiratory Protection
Reclamation requires using respiratory protective equipment when inhalation
hazards are anticipated to meet or exceed 50 percent of the PEL, TLV, or other
accepted exposure limit. Reclamation requires written programs for respirator
UISC.
7.8.1 General Requirements for Respiratory Protection. If the worksite
has respiratory hazards, measure the atmospheric contaminants and require
employees to use protective equipment properly.
a. Job Hazard Analysis. Provide a written job hazard analysis (JHA) for
every operation during which a respirator of any type is used. The JHA
must assess the perceived respiratory hazard. Measuring or estimating
airborne contaminant concentrations with confidence allows for the
determination of whether respirators are required and what respirator type
will provide adequate protection. These determinations are generally
October 2009 7–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
based on the relationship of the airborne contaminant concentration to an
established exposure limit such as a permissible exposure limit (PEL)
established by OSHA.
b. Failure to Measure Airborne Contaminants. If you do not measure
air contaminant concentrations or estimate based on Supporting studies,
you must consider the atmosphere to be “immediately dangerous to life or
health” (IDLH). This assumption forces the use of the most stringent
respiratory protection program requirements. The absence of a JHA that
appropriately characterizes the workplace atmosphere requires the use of
more restrictive, burdensome, and costly equipment, as well as additional
personnel, to enter the contaminated atmosphere. (See the Subsection on
IDLH entry.)
c. Written Program Requirement. Respiratory protective equipment
will not be used by any person until a written program meeting the
minimum requirements of these standards is established and all of the
requirements of the program have been met. Base program requirements
on the type of respirator used and whether respirator use is exclusively
Voluntary at a site.
d. Delegation of Responsibility and Authority. Identify a program
coordinator responsible for implementing the respiratory protection
program for all sites where respiratory protection is used. Delegate this
coordinator sufficient authority to implement the program. Select a
coordinator who is qualified by appropriate training or by experience
commensurate with the complexity of the program and the respirator use
requirements. -
e. Mandatory Records. Maintain the following documents in a manner
that allows for efficient program administration and evaluation:
Pertinent job hazard analysis
Written voluntary use requests
Respirator selection criteria
Medical evaluations
Fit testing documentation
Training records
Program evaluation records
Keep the following available onsite:
• Respirator selection criteria
• Record of completion for medical qualification of all respirator
UISCTS
• Record of completion for fit testing of all respirator users
7–6
October 2009
Section 7—Occupational Health
Record of completion for required respiratory protection training
of all respirator users
Workplace airborne contaminant monitoring records
Maintain the following records in the employee medical folder.
Results of personal physicals
Personal exposure monitoring results
Personal medical surveillance records
7.8.2 Requirements for the Written Program. If you require personnel to
use respiratory protection of any kind, provide a written program (except for
the Voluntary use of a filtering facepiece type).
a. Program Elements for Sites Where Respirator Use is Required.
Write your own site-specific program if respirators are required at your
site. The written program will contain or reference all the applicable
JHA(s) that indicate respirator use. The JHA will include exposure
monitoring data and clarify the scope of the hazard and the need for
respiratory protection. Include these elements in your site program:
• Respirator selection • User training
• Respirator-user medical • Respirator
qualification maintenance
• Fit testing • Recordkeeping
• Program evaluation
1. Selecting respirators. Use only respirators certified by the
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH).
(a) Selection criteria. Base your selection of respirators for
required use on known or anticipated atmospheric conditions,
contaminant warning properties, worksite physical limitations,
established respirator protection factors and user factors affecting
respirator performance.
(b) Protection against gases and vapors. Select an air-supplying
respirator unless the respirator (air-purifying) is equipped with an
end-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) or a change schedule for the
cartridges or canisters is included in the program, which is based
upon objective information, data, or experience.
(c) Protection against particulates. Select an air supplying
respirator unless the respirator (air-purifying) has a filter with one
of the following qualifications:
• Certified by NIOSH as a high efficiency particulate air
(HEPA) filter according to 30 CFR part 11
October 2009
7-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• Certified as a particulate filter according to 42 CFR part 84
• The primary particulate contaminants have a mass median
aerodynamic diameter (MMAD) greater than 2
micrometers(D), in which case, a respirator (air-purifying)
may be equipped with any particulate filter certified by
NIOSH.
2. Providing medical determinations. Allow respirator use only
when there is no negative impact on the health of the employee using
the respirator. Provide medical evaluations for employees before they
are allowed to use respirators to determine their ability to wear a
respirator without suffering adverse effects.
(a) Medical evaluator. The evaluator must be a physician or
licensed health care provider with the appropriate knowledge to
make a judgement. Before the medical evaluation, employees
must complete the OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation
Questionnaire, 29 CFR 1910.134, Appendix C for the medical
evaluator.
(b) Employee information. Before any evaluation, provide the
medical evaluator the following information about the conditions
of respirator use:
• Type and weight of respirators to be used
• Duration and frequency of use
• Expected physical effort during use
• Expected use of additional personal protective equipment
• Expected temperature and humidity to be encountered
• Anticipated workplace hazards and potential exposures
(c) Medical evaluator information. The medical evaluator must
furnish to the employer information that:
• States the employee’s ability to wear the identified
respirator types under the specified conditions without
adverse effect
• Specifies limitations on respirator use or provides another
type respirator which would mitigate existing medical
condition
• Identifies any need and time limit for a followup
examination
• States that the employee has been given a copy of the
recommendations
7–8 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
(d) Additional medical evaluations. Provide subsequent medical
evaluations or consultations not specified by the medical examiner
when:
• An employee using a respirator requires an explanation or
consultation regarding the evaluation results
• An employee using a respirator reports medical signs or
symptoms related to his ability to use a respirator
• A supervisor or program coordinator determines a need for
reevaluation
• Workplace conditions or expectations change and
substantially increase the employee’s physiological burden
3. Fit testing. Before using a respirator, provide a complete test for
each individual that verifies a satisfactory fit of the selected tight-
fitting facepiece. This test will include each of the following:
(a) Facepiece selection. Provide a suitable number of facepiece
choices that allow a proper fit and acceptable comfort for the user.
(b) Test protocol. Use the OSHA protocol, which may be found
in 29 CFR 1910.134.
(c) Test type. Require quantitative tests except where the
negative pressure air-purifying respirator must achieve a fit factor
of 100 or less, or where the tight fitting facepiece is used with an
atmosphere-supplying or powered air-purifying system and is
tested in the negative mode.
(d) Retesting. Provide subsequent testing annually or when:
• The use of a different facepiece configuration (size, style,
model, or make) is required
• The employee requests testing
• A change in the user’s physical condition could affect
facepiece fit
• Specific OSHA standards require more frequent testing
4. Providing respirator training. Before respirator use, provide
training that enables the user to demonstrate the following respirator
knowledge:
• Understanding of the nature and degree of the respiratory
hazard
• How to select a respirator based on the hazard and the
respirator’s capabilities and limitations
• How to don the respirator and use the seal check procedures
October 2009 7–9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• How to use the respirator
• Limitations of the respirator
• How to care for, maintain, clean, and store the respirator
5. Providing retraining. Retrain respirator users in respiratory
protection practices annually or in response to:
• Changes in the workplace or type of respirator used
• A supervisor’s or program coordinator’s determination of an
individual’s need of retraining
6. Providing respirator maintenance, cleaning, and inspection.
You will:
• Maintain respirators with all labeling and markings intact and
in a sanitary condition.
• Clean respirators frequently and in a manner that prevents the
spread of any harmful agent to users.
• Use either procedures recommended by the respirator
manufacturer or specified in 29 CFR 1910.134.
• Provide storage that protects against respirator damage or
contamination.
• Inspect all respirators for damage during cleaning and before
each use.
• Inspect emergency respirators in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations at least monthly and before
providing an escape-only respirator to an employee for his or
her specific use. Document all emergency respirator
inspections. Include identification of the respirator, the date of
inspection, the name of the inspector, deficiencies found, and
corrective actions taken in the documentation. Take cylinders
of emergency respirators out of service when the pressure falls
below 90 percent of manufacturer’s recommended pressure
level.
• Remove defective respirators from service until repairs are
completed in a manner that maintains the integrity of the
NIOSH certification.
7. Entry into IDLH atmospheres. In addition to complying with the
other parts of this section, implement the following requirements for
any entry into an area classified as immediately dangerous to life or
health (IDLH).
(a) The atmosphere will be considered IDLH when any of the
following apply:
October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
(b)
A JHA has not been completed
The contaminant concentration has not been measured or
estimated with confidence
The atmospheric contaminant exceeds an established IDLH
concentration
The atmosphere contains less than 16 percent O2
The atmosphere contains more than 16 percent but less than
19.5 percent O2 (oxygen-deficient atmosphere), and it can
not be demonstrated that the atmosphere can be maintained
within the parameters set forth in CFR 1910.134, table II,
under all foreseeable conditions.
All entries into IDLH atmospheres require that:
One employee or, when needed, more than one employee
be located outside the IDLH atmosphere
Visual, voice, or signal line communication be maintained
between the employee(s) in the IDLH atmosphere and the
employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere
The employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere be
trained and equipped to provide or activate effective
emergency rescue
The employer or designee be notified before the
employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere enter the
IDLH atmosphere to activate or provide emergency rescue
The employer or designee authorized to do so by the
employer, once notified, provide necessary assistance
appropriate to the situation
The employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmospheres be
equipped with:
o Pressure demand or other positive pressure SCBAs or a
pressure demand or other positive pressure supplied-air
respirator with auxiliary SCBA, and either
o Appropriate retrieval equipment for removing the
employee(s) who enter(s) these hazardous atmospheres
where retrieval equipment would contribute to the
rescue of the employee(s) and would not increase the
overall risk resulting from entry, or
o Equivalent means for rescue where retrieval equipment
is not required under the previous paragraph.
October 2009
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
8. Supplied air respirators
(a) Compressed breathing air odor and oxygen content.
Compressed breathing air must have no noticeable odor and an
oxygen content in the range of 19.5 to 23.5 percent. The supplied
air must have no more than 5 milligrams per cubic meter
condensed hydrocarbon, 10 parts per million (ppm) carbon
monoxide (CO), or 1,000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2).
(b) Purchasing cylinders of breathing air. Purchased cylinders
containing breathing air must have an analytical certificate
verifying the quality of the breathing air (must meet Type 1,
Grade D breathing air specifications) and verifying that the
moisture content in the cylinder does not exceed a dew point of -
50 degrees F at 1 atmosphere pressure. Ensure that all cylinders
used to supply breathing air are hydrostatically tested and
maintained according to 49 CFR Part 173 and Part 178 and marked
in accordance with 42 CFR Part 84.
(c) Compressor use and maintenance. Use and maintain
compressors (see figures 7-1 and 7-2) that are used to supply
breathing air in a manner to:
(1) Control moisture content so that a dew point at 1
atmosphere pressure is 10 degrees F below the ambient
temperature
(2) Replace or maintain sorbent beds and filters according to
manufacturer’s recommendation, and tag the compressor with
the most recent change date, printed name, and signature of the
employee performing the test.
(3) Equip oil-lubricated compressors with a carbon monoxide
and/or a high temperature alarm that is audible or otherwise
detectable to the employee wearing the respirator.
• Set carbon monoxide alarms to activate at or below
10 ppm
• Set high temperature alarms to activate according to the
manufacturer’s specification, and, if used exclusively as
the compressor monitor, conduct periodic monitoring to
prevent carbon monoxide in the breathing air from
exceeding 10 ppm
7-12
October 2009
Water *
ſlſl L.
High temperature
cut-out switch
Aftercooler |
Drain
| H H | PLANT AIR SUPPLY
Acceptable System for Supplying Respirable Air from an Oil Lubricated Compressor
Selection Guide C-ll
`--
Drain
Valve
To other
air systems
Valve
MN
AIR PURIFIER
Eºs
(Z)
l
Calibration (carbon
monoxide) port
Up to 300 feet of hose
length is permissible
Enclosed workplace containing gaseous or particulate contaminant
concentrations at or near specified respiratory protection factors
but not immediately hazardous to life and/or having an oxygen deficiency
below 19.5% but not immediately hazardous to life see ANSI Z88.2 for
acceptable type respirators for use in immediately hazardous to life environments.
At least 115 liters (four cubic feet) of air per minute to tight-fitting
facepieces and 170 liters (six cubic feet) of air per minute to
loose-fitting helmets, hoods, and suits is required:
e Water in
Air intake shall be in |
clean respirable air
Separator
environment (See C-III)
Tank
receiver
Plant air at
75 to
150 psig —-
§
X.
K}
Drain Valve :
Flowmeter
Pressure reducer
º monoxide alarm
operation
() Sand-blasting
Figure 7-1.-Respirator and respirable air system selection guide C-ll.











:
Acceptable Systems for Supplying Respirable Air from Oil-less Sources
Selection Guide C-lil
łespirable air intake (clean respirable air shall
have an oxygen content of 19.5% to 22% and
contaminant levels below their
~ID* 1/2 in.
Four to six cubic
feet of air per
recommended T.L.V.s)
(1) minute (See C-li)
Operating pressure is
between 9
and 11 psig
ELECTRIC-DRIVEN, sPRAY PAINTING/
OIL-LESS AIR PUMP OPERATION |
Operating pressure is
between 9 and 11 psig
* * * * ,
•:1; ; ,
* * * $:
Enclosed workplace containing gaseous or particulate
contaminant concentrations at or near specified respiratory
protection factors but not immediately hazardous to life
and/or having an oxygen deficiency below 19.5% but not
immediately hazardous to life. See ANSI Z88.2(1980)
- . . . . . . for acceptable type respirators for use in immediately
CASCADE RECHARGING SYSTEM hazardous to life environments.
1:
Figure 7-2.-Respirator and respirable air system selection guide C-Ill.














#
Section 7–Occupational Health
(4) Prevent the use of couplings that allow attachment to non-
respirable worksite air or other gas systems.
(5) Locate the air intake of the compressor in respirable quality
air.
(6) Ensure that compressors, hoses, Vortex heater/coolers,
connectors, filters, and valves are stored so as to prevent
contamination with dust, mist, vapor, fume, toxic gases, heat,
and intense light such as from welding operations.
(d) Testing breathing air quality. Test the quality of breathing
air at least every 6 months to ensure that the air meets Grade D
quality as specified in ANSI-CGA. G.7-1-1997 when non-vendor
breathing air is produced or when breathing air is transferred from
compressors, cascade system cylinders, storage receivers, and
other breathing air manufacturing or storage equipment.
9. Program Evaluation. Conduct evaluations of the implementation
of the elements of the program. Workplace observation, document
review, and consultation with employees will be used for this purpose.
Conduct evaluations annually or more frequently when management
determines it is necessary. Complete an abatement schedule when
deficiencies are identified.
10. Record Retention. Retain all records for time periods that meet
specific records management requirements. The program will identify
the locale of the following records:
• Pertinent job hazard analyses • Respiratory selection
• Medical evaluation Criter1a
• Training • Fit testing
• Program evaluations
b. Program Elements for Sites With Exclusive Voluntary Use of
Respirators. Write a site-specific program if there is exclusive voluntary
use of any respirator other than a filtering facepiece at your site. The
written program will contain or reference all the applicable JHAs that
indicate respirator use. Your written program will contain or reference all
the applicable JHAs, processes, and procedures that address the following
minimum requirements:
1. Have the employee submit a written request establishing a record
for voluntary use of the respirator.
October 2009 7–15
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
2. Complete a written JHA that assesses the perceived hazard and
indicates that respirator use is of a “voluntary” nature. The JHA
will also assess the possibility of introduced hazards associated
with respirator use.
3. Provide basic training on respirators (appendix D of 29 CFR
1910.134 may be used) and record the date and the content outline
used to satisfy this element.
4. The use of respirators will be allowed only if there is no negative
impact on the health and well being of the user. Therefore, prior to use
and periodically thereafter, provide a medical evaluation of the
respirator user to determine the user’s ability to wear a respirator
without being adversely affected. The evaluation must include the
following items:
(a) The evaluator will be a physician or licensed health care
provider with the appropriate knowledge to render judgment. The
evaluator will use the questionnaire in appendix C to 29 CFR
1910.134, or an equivalent, as an element of each employee’s
evaluation. -
(b) Before any evaluation or recommendation, provide the
following workplace information relative to the respirator user to
the physician or licensed health care provider:
• Type and weight of respirator to be used
• Duration and frequency of use
• Expected physical effort during respirator use
• Expected use of additional personal protective equipment
• Expected temperature and humidity encountered
(c) The medical evaluator will provide the following:
• An evaluation of the individual’s ability to wear the
identified respirator under the specified conditions without
adverse effect.
• Any limitations on respirator use or any other type of
respirator that would mitigate any existing medical
condition, when necessary
• The need and time for follow-up examinations
• A statement that the employee has been furnished a copy of
the medical evaluator’s recommendations.
5. Clean the respirator according to manufacturer’s recommendations
or by disassembling, thoroughly washing in warm (a maximum of
7–16 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
110 degrees Fahrenheit) water with a combination detergent or
disinfectant, thoroughly rinsing, air drying, and reassembling.
6. Inspect the respirator to ensure that all parts are working properly
and are in good condition.
7. Conduct evaluations of the implementation of the elements of the
program. Use workplace observation, document review, and
consultation with employees for this purpose. Conduct evaluations
annually or more frequently when it is necessary. Complete an
abatement plan when deficiencies are identified.
8. Retain all records for time periods that meet specific records
management requirements. The plan will identify the locale of the
following records:
• Pertinent job hazard analyses • Respiratory selection
• Medical evaluation and Criter1a
physician name • Fit testing
• Training • Program evaluations
c. Program Elements for Sites With Exclusive Voluntary Use of
Filtering Facepiece Respirators. Exclusive voluntary use of filtering
facepiece respirators (a negative pressure particulate respirator with a filter
as an integral part of the facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed
of the filtering media) necessitates the following minimum requirements:
1. Require the employee to submit a written request establishing a
record for voluntary use of the respirator.
2. Complete a written Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) that assesses the
perceived hazard and indicates the determination that the respirator use
is of a “voluntary” nature. The JHA will also assess the possibility of
introduced hazards associated with respirator use.
3. Provide the user with basic training on respirators (Appendix D of
29 CFR 1910.134 may be used) and record the date and outline of the
content used to satisfy this element.
4. The program coordinator will retain the request, associated JHA’s,
and training records.
7.9 Requirements for Noise Exposure And Hearing Conservation
7.10.1 General Requirements. Do not expose personnel to noise in excess
of the limits indicated in table 7-1.
October 2009 - 7-17
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table 7-1.-Permissible noise exposures'

Duration per day Sound level, dBA,
(hours) slow response
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1.5 102
1 105
0.5 110
0.25 115
"When the daily noise exposure is composed
of two or more periods of noise exposure of
different levels, their combined effect should be
Considered, rather than the individual effect of
each. If the sum of the following fractions:
C(1)/T(1) + C(2)/T(2) + ... + C(n)/T(n) exceeds
unity, the mixed exposure should be considered to
exceed the limit Value. Cn indicates the total time
of exposure at a specified noise level and Tn
indicates the total time of exposure permitted at
that level. Do not allow exposure to continuous,
intermittent, or impact noise in excess of a peak of
140 CE.
a. Noise Monitoring Program. Establish a noise monitoring program,
primarily based on dosimetry whenever information indicates that
personal exposure is likely to exceed an 8-hour time weighted average of
85 dBA. Integrate all continuous, intermittent, and impulsive sound levels
from 80 decibels to 130 decibels into the noise measurement. Use
representative personal monitoring for highly mobile workers if sound
levels vary significantly or impulse noise is present. Calibrate
instrumentation used in measuring the sound pressure levels in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations, allow employees to observe
the monitoring procedures, and notify employees of the results of any
exposure monitoring. Conduct the program in a manner that allows
identification of individuals for inclusion in the hearing conservation
program and enables the proper selection of hearing protective devices.
Repeat monitoring when changes in the process, equipment, or controls
increase noise levels.
b. Hearing Protective Devices. When engineering and/or administrative
controls do not reduce noise levels below 85 dBA, provide and ensure
personal protective equipment (PPE) that it is used. The hearing
protective device(s) provided must reduce the noise exposure to less than
90 dBA TWA or to less than 85 dBA TWA for those enrolled in the
hearing conservation program or who have experienced a standard
threshold shift. In addition, hearing protective devices must be worn by
employees until a baseline audiogram is obtained.
7–18
October 2009
Section 7—Occupational Health
Employees must decide, with the help of a person who is trained in fitting
hearing protectors, which size and type protector is most suitable for their
working environment. The protector selected must be comfortable to wear
and offer sufficient attenuation. The manufacturer’s NRR (noise reduction
rating) for hearing protectors is used to calculate the attenuated level based
on the equation:
Attenuated Level = measured sound level - [(NRR-7)/2]
When single protection does not provide the desired level of attenuation,
use double hearing protection. For double hearing protection, add 5 dBA
to the attenuated value.
7.9.2 Hearing Conservation Program Requirements. When it is
determined that noise levels exceed the 85 dBA 8-hour TWA, implement a
written hearing conservation program.
a. Enrollment. Enroll any employee whose noise exposure exceeds the
action level of 85 dBA 8-hour TWA in a hearing conservation program.
Dosimetry will be the means for substantiating exposure. Base continuing
enrollment on dosimetry results from subsequent periodic monitoring.
b. Audiometric Program.
(1) Audiometric Testing. A qualified technician may give the
audiogram, but the results must be reviewed by a qualified
professional. A licensed or certified audiologist (specialist dealing
with an individual having impaired hearing), an otolaryngologist
(physician specializing in the diagnosis and treatment of disorders of
the ear, nose, and throat), or a physician must be responsible for the
program. The professional’s responsibilities include overseeing the
program and the work of the technicians, reviewing problem
audiograms, and determining whether referral is necessary.
(2) Baseline Audiogram. The baseline audiogram is the reference
audiogram against which future audiograms are compared. Provide
baseline audiograms within 6 months of an employee’s first exposure
at or above an 8-hour TWA of 85 dB. Do not expose employees to
workplace noise for 14 hours preceding the baseline test unless
appropriate hearing protectors are worn during this period. Instruct
employees to avoid high, non-occupational noise levels in the 14 hours
preceding the baseline audiometric examination.
(3) Annual audiogram. Audiograms must be conducted yearly for
employees enrolled in the hearing conservation program. Routinely
compare annual audiograms to baseline audiograms to determine
whether the audiogram is valid and to determine whether the employee
has lost hearing ability, i.e., if a standard threshold shift (STS) has
October 2009 7–19
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
occurred. STS is an average shift in either ear of 10 dB or more at
2,000, 3,000, and 4,000 hertz. If an STS is detected, the employee
may be retested within 30 days and the better of the two tests used. If
an STS is identified, fit the employee or refit employees with adequate
hearing protectors, show how to use them, and require the employees
to wear them. Notify employees within 21 days from the time the
determination is made that their audiometric test results showed an
STS. A confirmed threshold shift is a reportable occupational illness
in the OSHA 200 Log and electronic Safety Management Information
System (SMIS).
c. Training. Enrolled employees must receive training at least annually
about the effects of noise; the purpose, advantages, and disadvantages of
various types of hearing protectors; the selection, fit, and care of
protectors; and the purpose and procedures of audiometric testing.
d. Recordkeeping. Maintain records of audiometric test results for
enrolled employees for the duration of employment of the affected
employee. Audiometric test records must include the name and job
classification of the employee, the date, the examiner’s name, the date of
the last acoustic or exhaustive calibration, and measurements of the
background sound pressure levels in audiometric test rooms. All area
noise measurements must be retained for at least 2 years.
7.9.3 Warnings and Labels. Post or label all areas and equipment which
emit noise levels of 85 dBA or greater. Post areas where noise levels are of
85 to 99 dBA and equipment that produces noise levels of 85 to 99 dBA in
black lettering on a yellow background with wording such as:
CAUTION
High Intensity Noise
Hearing Protection Required
Post areas where noise levels are 100 dBA or greater and equipment that
produces noise levels of 100dBA or greater in black lettering on a red and
white background with wording such as:
DANGER
High Intensity Noise
Hearing Protection Required
7.10 Requirements for Sanitation
7.10.1 General Requirements. Employers shall establish and maintain basic
sanitation provisions for all employees in all places of employment. These
provisions include, but are not limited to, a potable water, toilet, and waste
collection and removal system. Provide washroom, showers, and separate
eating facilities, as appropriate.
7–20 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
7.10.2 Potable Water. An adequate supply of potable water must be
provided in all places of employment. Cool water must be provided during
hot weather. Supply drinking water from sources that meets the quality
standards prescribed in the U.S. Public Health Service Drinking Water
Standards that are published in 42 CFR Part 72 that is approved for drinking
purposes by the State or local authority having jurisdiction. Keep portable
containers used to dispense drinking water tightly closed, equipped with a
dispensing tap, labeled as “DRINKING WATER,” and in a sanitary condition.
Water must not be dipped from any portable water container. Drinking
directly from the container is prohibited unless a properly installed drinking
fountain with guarded orifice is provided. Do not use containers used to
dispense or distribute drinking water for any other purpose. Use of breakable
cups or glasses is prohibited. Also provide fountain-type dispensers or one-
use cups at each dispenser and a waste receptacle. Conspicuously post outlets
dispensing nonpotable water:
CAUTION
WATER UNSAFE FOR DRINKING,
WASHING OR COOKING
7.10.3 Toilet Facilities.
a. Portable Toilet Facilities. When sewage disposal systems are not
available, provide one or more of the following type toilet facilities unless
they are prohibited by local codes:
1. Chemical toilets
2. Recirculating toilets
3. Combustion toilets
4. Other toilet systems as approved by State/local governments
b. Design of Portable Toilets. Equip each toilet facility with a toilet seat
and toilet seat cover. Design toilets to provide privacy and protection
from weather and falling objects. Cracks must be sealed and the door
tight-fitting, self-closing, and must be capable of being latched from the
inside. Toilets must have adequate ventilation and light, and all windows
and vents must be screened.
c. Chemical Toilets. Provide for routine servicing and disposing of the
sewage in accordance with Federal, State, and local health regulations.
d. Toilets at Temporary Jobsites. Toilets will be provided at each
temporary jobsite in accordance with table 7-2.
Toilets must be within easy access to the worksite unless they are for a
mobile crew and transportation is readily available.
October 2009 7–21
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table 7-2.-Toilets at temporary jobsites

Number of Minimum number of units
employees (per gender)"
1 to 20 1 toilet
21 to 199 1 additional toilet and urinal for each
additional 40 employees
200 Or more 1 additional toilet and urinal for each
additional 50 employees
"Where toilet rooms may be occupied by no more than one person at a
time, provide the doors with locks so that they can be locked from the inside,
and provide the toiletrooms with at least one toilet seat. Separate toilet
rooms for each gender are not needed.
e. Permanent facilities. Toilets at permanent facilities will be provided
in accordance with table 7-3. The number of units to be provided for each
gender must be based on the number of employees of that gender for
whom the facilities are furnished.
Table 7-3.—Toilets at permanent facilities

Number of Minimum water closets
employees (per gender)"
1 to 15
16 to 35
36 to 55
56 to 80
81 to 110
1 11 to 150
Over 150 one for each additional 40 persons
:
"Where toilet rooms may be occupied by no more than one person at a
time, provide the doors with locks so that they can be locked from the inside,
and provide the toiletrooms with at least one toilet seat. Separate toilet rooms
for each gender are not needed.
f. Sanitation. Provide frequent inspections and maintenance at all toilet
facilities to keep them clean and sanitary. Maintain an adequate supply of
toilet paper with holder for each seat.
7.10.4 Washing Facilities. Provide adequate washing facilities for all
employees to maintain healthful and sanitary conditions. Such facilities must
be near the worksite and furnished with cleaning materials that will remove
the specific type of contaminant. Maintain each washing facility with water
(either hot and cold running water or tepid running water), soap, and
individual means of drying.
7.10.5 Food Consumption. Designate a clean area for consuming food and
drink at each work location. Also, establish the following minimum
conditions:
7–22 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
• Do not consume or store food or beverage in a toilet room or in any
area exposed to biological or chemical hazard
• Provide an adequate number of waste receptacles in the food
consumption area. Construct receptacles of corrosion resistant or
disposable material provided with solid, tight-fitting covers. Empty
receptacles at least daily and maintain them in a sanitary condition.
7.10.6 Sleeping Facilities. Sleeping quarters will comply with all applicable
Federal, State, and local sanitation and fire protection codes. Sleeping
quarters constructed on the jobsite must comply with the NFPA 101, Life
Safety Code.
7.10.7 Waste Disposal. Keep decomposing or foul-smelling waste in
substantial, closed insect- and rodent-tight containers that are constructed to
prevent leakage and to allow thorough cleaning and sanitary maintenance.
Remove solid and liquid in a way that does not create a menace to health.
Remove waste as often as necessary to maintain a sanitary environment.
Dispose of garbage and similar refuse in designated areas.
7.10.8 Vermin Control. Construct and maintain enclosed workplaces to
prevent, to the extent practicable, the entrance and harborage of rodents,
insects, and other vermin. If the presence of such vermin is detected,
implement a control program.
7.11 Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories
7.11.1 Hazardous Chemicals. Laboratories where employees may be
exposed to hazardous chemicals must develop and implement a written
chemical hygiene plan and designate a chemical hygiene officer to ensure
compliance with OSHA standard 1910.1450. This standard generally applies
to all chemical laboratory activities and specifies that employee exposures to
hazardous chemicals be at or below the PELS and TLVs.
7.11.2 Employee Exposure Determination. Measure the employee’s
exposure to any regulated substance if there is reason to believe that exposure
levels for that substance routinely exceed the action level. Events or
circumstances that might reasonably constitute overexposure include (1) an
uncontrolled hazardous chemical leak or spill, (2) direct skin or eye contact
with a hazardous chemical, (3) physical symptoms that disappear when the
person is removed from the area but reappear soon after the person returns to
work with the same hazardous chemical, and (4) two or more people in the
same laboratory have similar complaints. Employees must be notified within
15 working days after receipt of the monitoring results.
7.11.3 Chemical Hygiene Plan. Where hazardous chemicals are used in a
laboratory, develop and implement a written Chemical Hygiene Plan. The
Chemical Hygiene Plan must include a chemical inventory, the necessary
October 2009 7–23
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
work practices, procedures, and policies to ensure that employees are
protected from all potentially hazardous chemicals in use in their work area.
Keep the plan readily available.
7.11.4 Employee Training and Information. Provide employees with
information and training to ensure that they are aware of the hazards of
chemicals in their work areas before their initial assignments and as any new
substances are introduced.
a. Inform employees of (1) the contents of the OSHA Laboratory
Standard (29 CFR 1910.1450), (2) location of the Chemical Hygiene Plan,
(3) PELs and TLVs for the chemicals used, (4) the signs and symptoms
associated with exposures to these chemicals, (5) the location of known
reference material on the hazards, safe handling, storage, and instructions
for disposing of hazardous chemicals, including the MSDS, and (6) spill
cleanup procedures.
b. Educate employees about: (1) methods and observations that may be
used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical,
(2) physical and health hazards of chemicals in the work area, and (3) the
measures the employees can take to protect themselves from these
hazards. Include appropriate work practices, emergency procedures,
personal protective equipment to be used in these specific procedures, and
the applicable details of the Chemical Hygiene Plan.
7.11.5 Hazard Identification. Do not remove or deface labels on incoming
containers of hazardous chemicals. Retain MSDSs on incoming hazardous
chemicals and make them available to laboratory employees. Label all
solutions prepared in-house with the name of the chemical, the date of
preparation, hazardous properties, emergency procedures, and the preparer’s
11a111C.
7.11.6 Medical Consultation and Examinations. Give laboratory
employees who have experienced events or circumstances that might
reasonably constitute overexposure the opportunity for medical consultation.
For these employees and those included in a medical surveillance program,
provide the physician with (1) the identity of the hazardous chemical(s) to
which the employee may have been exposed, (2) a description of the
conditions of exposure and any quantitative exposure data available, and (3) a
description of any signs and symptoms of exposure that the employee is
experiencing.
The examining physician will provide, in writing, (1) recommendations for
follow-up, if warranted; (2) a record of the results of the consultation and, if
applicable, the examination and any tests that were conducted; (3) conclusions
concerning any other medical condition noted that could put the employee at
risk; and (4) a statement that the employee has been informed both of the
results of the consultation or examination and of any medical condition that
7–24 - October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
may require further examination or treatment. These written statements and
records must only address the occupational exposure.
7.11.7 Records and Recordkeeping. All memos, notes, and reports related
to a complaint of actual or possible exposure to hazardous chemicals must be
maintained as part of the record. Retain monitoring data and medical records.
7.11.8 Laboratory Equipment. Provide an emergency eyewash fountain or
safety shower and ensure that it is immediately available where corrosive
materials are used. Conduct work that involves hazardous and noxious
materials that are toxic, odoriferous, volatile, or harmful within a laboratory
hood. If there is a need to refrigerate a substance that is flammable,
refrigerate it in an explosion-proof refrigerator that is either U.L. listed or
approved by an accredited laboratory.
7.12 Bloodborne Pathogens
Blood pathogens are pathogenic microorganisms that are present in human blood
and can cause disease in humans. These pathogens include, but are not limited to,
hepatitis B virus (HBV) and human immuno-deficiency virus (HIV) and are
regulated by 29 CFR 1910.1030 for workplace exposures.
7.12.1 Exposure Determination. Identify employees whose job duties place
them at risk of exposure to bloodborne pathogens and develop and implement
an exposure control program. Make this exposure determination without
regard to personal protective clothing or equipment.
7.12.2 Exposure Control Plan. Develop and implement a written exposure
control plan where employees are determined to have an occupational
exposure. The exposure control plan must include (1) the exposure
determination based on the tasks, procedures, and job classifications; (2) the
schedule and methods of compliance; and (3) procedures for evaluating
circumstances surrounding exposure incidents. Review and update the plan at
least annually.
7.12.3 Universal Precautions. Universal precautions must be observed
when any contact with blood or potentially infectious materials is possible.
These precautions are applicable to all employees. Treat all body fluids and
materials as if they are infectious. Use the following methods to eliminate or
reduce risk for transmission of bloodborne pathogens:
Wash hands frequently and use disposable garments
Select gloves for the hazards of a specific job
Avoid spray or splash of bloodily fluids
Label and package contaminated wastes properly
October 2009 7–25
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
After administering emergency care, wash hands and other skin surfaces
immediately and thoroughly with warm water and soap. Wash hands
immediately after removing protective gloves, even if the gloves appear to be
intact.
7.12.4 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Provide PPE to employees
and ensure that they are used properly to eliminate or minimize the risk of
infectious material entering the employees’ bodies. It is appropriate only if it
prohibits potentially infectious materials from reaching the employees’ Outer
clothing, skin, eyes, mouth, or other mucous membranes under normal
conditions of use.
a. Gloves. Provide hand protection whenever contact with blood or other
potentially infectious materials is possible. Disposable (single-use)
gloves, if possible.
b. Masks, Eye Protection and Face Shields. Use masks, eye protection,
and face shields in combination whenever splashes, spray, or droplets of
infectious materials are generated.
c. Gowns, Aprons, and Other Protective Clothing. Wear gowns,
aprons, and other protective clothing when splashing of body fluid on
skin or clothing is possible.
d. Resuscitation Equipment. Provide CPR mouthpieces, pocket masks,
resuscitation bags, or other ventilation equipment to eliminate the need for
direct mouth to mouth contact.
7.12.5 Cleanup of Contaminated Areas. Use personal protective equipment
when disinfecting areas. Presoak any spills of body fluid with an
antibacterial/viral solution (one part chlorine bleach to 8 parts water). Clean
up methods must prevent physical injury from direct handling of broken glass,
needles, or other sharps.
7.12.6 Handling Contaminated Materials. Waste handlers must not press
down, smash, step on, or otherwise compress any biohazard waste containers.
7.12.7 Hepatitis B Vaccination. Within 10 working days of assignment, the
Hepatitis B vaccine and vaccination series will be
made available to all employees who have
occupational exposure. Make available post-
exposure evaluation and follow-up to all
employees who have an exposure incident.
Prompt reporting of incidents is necessary for
exposed employees to be offered the vaccination
series in a timely manner.
SQL
BIOHAZARD
Figure 7-3–Biohazard
7.12.8 Container Labeling. Use an approved symbol.
biohazard container for blood, other potentially
infectious material, or regulated waste a fluorescent

7–26 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
orange or orange-red background label with lettering and biohazard symbol in
a contrasting color (see figure 7–3). Infectious waste must be disposed of by
an approved contractor in accordance with Federal, State, and local
regulations.
7.12.9 Training
a. General Training. All employees must receive basic information
about bloodborne pathogens and ways to reduce risks of exposure. The
training must include those tasks identified with increased risk, the
universal precautions about self-protection in the event of an incident, and
determining where to find more information in the local exposure control
plan.
b. Employees With Increased Risk of Exposure. Employees with
occupational exposure must have initial and annual training on the 29 CFR
1910.1030 bloodborne pathogen standard, bloodborne diseases and their
transmissions (a general discussion), exposure control plan, engineering
and work practice controls, personal protective equipment, hepatitis B
vaccine, response to emergencies involving blood, how to handle exposure
incidents, proper handling and disposal methods of infectious waste, the
post-exposure evaluation and follow-up program, and the signing and
labeling program. There must be an opportunity for questions and
answers about the bloodborne pathogen program.
7.12.10 Recordkeeping
a. Medical Records. Medical records for each employee with
occupational exposure must be kept for the duration of employment plus
30 years. Keep medical records confidential and include the name and
social security number, hepatitis B vaccination status (including dates),
results of any examinations, a copy of the health care professional’s
written opinion, and a copy of information provided to the health care
professional. Make medical records available to the subject employee or
anyone with written consent of the employee, but not to the employer.
b. Training Records. Training records must include dates, contents of
the training program or a summary, trainer’s name and qualifications, and
the names and job titles of all people attending.
c. Sharps Record Log. A sharps injury log must be maintained at
healthcare facilities for recording injuries resulting from contaminated
sharps penetrating the skin. The information in the sharps injury log must
be recorded and maintained in such manner as to protect the
confidentiality of the injured employee. The log must contain the type and
brand of device involved in the incident, the department or work area
where the exposure incident occurred, and an explanation of how the
incident occurred.
October 2009 7–27
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
d. SMIS (Safety Management Information System) Incident Report.
Report bloodborne pathogen exposures as personal injuries in the
automated SMIS. Information must include the method of injury, the
work area and activity when incident occurred, and what post-exposure
action followed.
7.13 Heat Stress
The combination of three risk factors (climatic conditions of the environment,
work demands, and clothing) causes heat stress is evidenced by an increase in
heat stress body temperature, heart rate, and sweating.
7.13.1 Assessment. Conduct an assessment of the working conditions, if the
environment is subjectively judged as being hot or the physiological markers
of increased body temperature, increased heart rate, or excessive water loss
are noted. Use a qualified individual who follows the guidelines stated in the
latest ACGIH Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical
Agents and Biological Exposure Indices to conduct the assessment.
7.13.2 Training. Conduct training for employees and supervisors working
on heat-related jobs. Training will include a description of heat stress; a
recognition of the physiological symptoms of dehydration, heat exhaustion,
fainting, heat cramps, and heat stroke; first-aid measures; personal hygiene
practices such as the need to replace fluids and the importance of diet, life-
style, general health and acclimation; and the specific engineering and
administrative control measures used to manage the hot work environment.
7.13.3 Controls. If the assessment concludes that employees may be at risk
of heat stress, implement one or more of the various control measures listed in
table 7-4 lists.
Table 7-4.—Heat stress control measures

Fluid replacement
Self-determination
Diet
Life style
ACClimation
Circulating water systems
Medical Surveillance
Reduce physical work
demands
Reduce air temperature
Reduce air humidity
Change clothing
Reflective clothing
Reduce radiant heat
Pacing work
Sharing work
Scheduling of work
Circulating air systems
lce garments
7.14 Cold Stress
Exposure to cold temperatures increases the likelihood and potential for worker
disorders or conditions that could result in injury or illness. Cold stress is
evidenced by the body trying to conserve body heat by reducing blood circulation
through the skin and by shivering to increase the rate of metabolism. Extreme
low temperatures or strong wind accompanied by cold temperatures can lead to
hypothermia or localized tissue damage.
7–28 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
7.14.1 Recognition of Cold Stress. Subjective responses of workers provide
a good tool for the recognition of cold stress. Behaviors such as seeking
warm locations, adding layers of clothing, or increasing work rate are
common indicators. Other behaviors are loss of manual dexterity, shivering,
accidents, and unsafe behaviors.
7.14.2 Evaluation of Cold Stress. When temperatures fall below 39 °F,
begin workplace monitoring. Below 30 °F, the dry bulb temperature and air
speed must be measured and recorded at least every 4 hours. When air speed
is greater than 5 miles per hour (mph), determine the equivalent chill
temperature from table 7-5. Do not expose employees to equivalent wind
chill temperatures (ECT) below −25 °F dry bulb.
Table 7-5.-Equivalent Chill Temperature (ECT) in degrees Fahrenheit for different
combinations of temperature and air speed (also called Windchill Index)

Actual temperature reading (°F)
Estimated wind speed 50 |40 |30 |20 || 10 || 0 |-10 |-20 |-30 |-40
(in mph) Equivalent Chill Temperature (“F)
Calm 50 | 40 || 30 | 20 10 0 -10 || -20 | –30 –40
5 48 || 37 27 | 16 6 –5 -15 -26 -36 –47
10 40 || 28 || 16 || 4 –9 –24 || –33 || –46 || –58 –70
15 36 22 || 9 –5 – 18 || -32 -45 || –58 || –72 –85
20 32 18 || 4 -10 || -25 || –39 || –53 || -67 -82 –96
25 30 | 16 || 0 -15 || -29 || -44 || –59 || -74 || -88 -104
30 28 || 13 || -2 – 18 || –33 -48 || –63 -79 || -94 -109
35 27 | 11 || -4 –20 || -35 | –51 –67 || -82 || -98 -113
40 26 || 10 || -6 –21 –37 || –53 || –69 || -85 -100 -116
Winds greater than 40 mph Little Danger in sº hr with Increasing Danger. Great Danger.
have little additional effect. dry skin. Maximum Danger from Flesh may freeze within
danger of false sense of freezing exposed 30 seconds.
security. flesh within one
minute.
7.14.3 Control of Cold Stress. General controls of cold stress include
training, hygiene practices, and medical surveillance. When the temperature
falls below 39 °F in the work environment, workers must be informed that
cold stress is a hazard and what clothing is proper, what they should do to
practice cold stress hygiene (such as replacing fluid with warm drinks, and
proper diet), and how to self-monitor for discomfort or symptoms of
hypothermia. When work is performed at or below 10 °F ECT, include safe
work practices, recognition and treatment of hypothermia, and other cold-
related disorders in the training. Initiate medical surveillance on those who
are routinely exposed below -1.1 °F ECT, and those workers who cannot
properly thermoregulate. Other methods of controlling cold exposures
include:
October 2009 7–29
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
a. Engineering controls to reduce loss of body heat such as general or
spot heating, hand warming, minimizing air movement, reducing heat
transfer, providing warming shelters where ECT is 20 °F or less, or using
thermal insulating material on equipment handles when temperature drops
below 30 °F.
b. Administrative controls to reduce exposure time, such as establishing
work-rest cycles; moving work to warmer areas; allowing individual
control over work, such as self-pacing and extra breaks if requested;
providing for mutual observation (buddy system); and adjusting for
productivity reductions when wearing extra clothing.
c. Protective clothing with proper insulating values, wind barriers, water
barriers, and eye protection for snow or ice covered terrain.
7.15 lonizing Radiation
Anyone who procures, uses, possesses, transports, transfers, or disposes of
regulated radioactive materials or radiation generating devices must:
Notify, in writing, the Designated Authority of the nature of the material
or device and provide a description of the intended use, the location of use
and storage, and all transportation and disposal requirements.
Secure appropriate authorization or a permit if a licensed or regulated
radiological device or radioactive material is to be used on Reclamation
property.
7.15.1 Qualified Personnel
a. Operations involving ionizing radiation hazards or use of radioactive
material or radiation generating devices must be performed under the
direct supervision of a person, designated in writing by the Radiation
Safety Officer (RSO), who is qualified and responsible for radiological
safety. This person will conduct surveys and evaluate and secure any
specialized assistance needed to ensure compliance with radiation
protection standards.
b. The RSO must be technically qualified and meet the experience,
training, and education requirements listed below:
(1) Formally trained in radiation protection including the following
topics: physics of radiation; radiation’s interaction with matter;
mathematics necessary for the subject matter; biological effects of
radiation; type and use of instruments for detection, monitoring, and
Surveying radiation; radiation safety techniques and procedures; and
use of time, distance, shielding, engineering controls, and PPE to
reduce radiation exposure.
7-30
October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
(2) Hands-on training regarding all the equipment, instrumentation,
procedures, and theory used.
(3) Knowledge of regulations (NRC, EPA, Department of Energy
(DOE), DOT, and DOI) pertaining to radioactive materials, radiation
generating devices, and radioactive and mixed waste.
(4) Knowledge of the standards and recordkeeping requirements for
work with radioactive materials and radiation generating devices.
7.15.2 Radiation Safety Program
a. Operations involving regulated radiation hazards and users of
radioactive material or radiation generating devices must develop and
implement a Radiation Safety Program. The RSO must manage the
program and base it on sound radiation safety principles that keep
occupational doses and doses to the public ALARA (as low as reasonably
acceptable). Review the program at least annually.
b. Instruct all personnel entering an area where radioactive material or
radiation generating devices are used and where there is a potential for an
individual to receive a Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) of
100 mrem or more in one year in:
The presence of the material or device
Health and safety problems associated with exposure to radiation,
including the potential effects of radiation on a pregnant female,
the fetus or embryo
Precautions and controls used to control exposure
Proper use of instrumentation and dosimetry in the area
The Radiation Safety Program
Their rights and responsibilities
7.15.3 Dose Limits
Occupational dose limits are based on the TEDE. See table 7-6.
No employee under 18 years of age will perform work with or around ionizing
radiation.
The dose to an embryo/fetus must not exceed the monthly equivalent dose of
0.05 rem during the entire gestation period.
October 2009
7–31
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards

Table 7-6.-Exposure to ionizing radiation
Annual limits
Body part (NRC)' Suggested ALARA limits’
Whole body 5 rem (50 mSv 0.1 rem (1 mSv)
{millisievert})*
Lens of eye 15 rem (150 mSv) 0.15 rem (1.5 mSv)
Skin 50 rem (500 mSv) 0.5 rem (5 mSv)
Hands/feet 50 rem (500 mSv) 0.5 rem (5 mSv)
"An annual limit which is the more limiting of 5 rems TEDE, 15 rems to the lens of the
eye, or 50 rems shallow dose equivalent to the skin or any extremity.
* To keep doses ALARA, the user will set administrative action levels below the annual
dose limits. These action levels must be realistic and attainable. Suggested action levels
are the more limiting of 0.1 rems TEDE, 0.15 rems to the lens of the eye, or 0.5 rems
shallow dose equivalent to the skin or any extremity.
* 10 mSv = 1 rem.
7.15.4 Radiation Monitoring, Surveys and Dosimetry
a. Users of radioactive material or radiation generating devices must
conduct surveys and monitoring to ensure occupational dose limits are not
exceeded.
b. Swipte-test each sealed source, other than those exempt by size or
specific regulation, for leakage at not greater than 6-month intervals and
maintain records for each test. If the sample indicated a contamination
activity greater than 0.005 microcuries (puCi), withdraw the source from
use and notify the RSO immediately.
c. Use instruments for radiation monitoring and surveying that are
appropriate for the type and intensity of radiation surveyed, calibrated to a
traceable source, and operationally checked before each use.
d. Users of radioactive material or radiation generating devices and
visitors or personnel performing work tasks in the area must coordinate
with the RSO for appropriate dosimetry use whenever either of the
following situations exist:
(1) an individual enters a Radiation Area (>5 mrem in any 1 hour)
(2) an individual has the potential to receive greater than 0.5 rem in
1 year.
All individuals must wear personnel monitoring equipment within the
radiation areas as defined above. Supervisors are responsible for ensuring
compliance.
e. Process all external dosimetry at a National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program (NVLAP) certified laboratory.
f. Users of unsealed radioactive material sources or personnel working on
a radioactive hazardous waste site must institute an internal dosimetry
7–32
October 2009
Section 7—Occupational Health
program approved by the RSO when there is a potential for a worker to
receive an internal dose of greater than 0.5 rem per year.
7.15.5 Access, Storage, and Control
a. Design, construct, install, use, store, transport, and dispose of all
radiological devices and radioactive materials in such a manner as to
ensure personnel exposures are kept ALARA.
b. Users of radioactive materials or radiation generating devices must post
signs and control access to radiation areas.
c. Users must use engineering controls, shielding, access time limitation,
and/or physical separation to keep doses to the public ALARA where
radiation levels exceed 2 mrem (20 Sv) in any one hour.
d. Users must secure radioactive material and radiation generating devices
against theft or unauthorized use.
e. Storage must be in accordance with any license or permit requirements.
f. Conduct surveys to ensure that the public dose limit of 0.01 rem
(0.0001 Sv) is not exceeded for operations involving regulated radiation
hazards or users of regulated radioactive material or radiation generating
devices.
7.15.6 Respiratory Protection and Other Controls
a. Users of radioactive material must, to the extent practicable, institute
process or engineering controls to limit concentrations of radioactive
materials in air.
b. Users must increase monitoring and limit intakes of radioactive
materials through control of access, limitation of exposure times, use of
respiratory protection equipment, or other controls where process or
engineering controls are unable to control airborne radioactive material
concentrations.
c. Users of respiratory protection equipment must comply with this
section of the standard. Limit the use of respiratory protection equipment
according to the protection factors listed in appendix A of 10 CFR 20.
7.15.7 Signs, Labels, and Posting Requirements
a. The RSO must post, in a conspicuous location, (1) a sign or signs
bearing the standard radiation symbol shown in figure 7-4, and (2) the
following words:
(1) “Caution, Radiation Area” - areas where the radiation field is equal
to or greater than 5 mrem (0.05 mSv) in any one hour and less than
100 mrem (1 mSv) in any 1 hour
October 2009 7–33
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
(2) “Caution, High Radiation Area” - areas --~~
where radiation field is equal to or greater º
than 100 mrem in any one hour (0.1 mSv) wº-60°
and less than 500 rads in any 1 hour A

(3) “Caution, Airborne Radioactivity Area”
– areas where airborne radioactive material
concentrations are greater than the derived
air concentration (DAC) limits listed in 10
CFR 20 appendix B. *"sa #
(4) “Caution, Radioactive Material” - rooms Figure 7-4. Radiation
where quantities of radioactive materials in symbol.
excess of 10 times the 10 CFR 20 appendix
C quantities are used or stored.
b. Users who receive or expect to receive a package containing
radioactive material must follow the package receipt procedures listed in
10 CFR 20.1906 “Procedures for Receiving and Opening Packages.”
c. The RSO must post an NRC Form 3 “Notice to Employees” in a
location visible to all employees who work with or around radioactive
materials.
7.15.8 Spills and Contamination Control
a. Promptly clean up all spills of radioactive material, using appropriate
PPE. Cleaning responsibility rests with the individual(s) working in the
area involved and responsible for the spill. Survey the area after cleaning
to verify that the cleaning has removed the radioactive material. Notify
the RSO of all spills or incidents involving radioactive contamination.
b. Where hand or shoe contamination is possible, all employees working
with radioactive materials are to:
(1) Accomplish decontamination before eating, Smoking, applying
makeup, or leaving work.
(2) Wash protective gloves before removing from hands unless
radiation level requires immediate removal.
(3) Refrain from wearing protective clothing outside the radiation area
if there is any possibility it has been contaminated.
7.15.9 Radioactive Waste Disposal
a. Radioactive sealed sources (and gauges), when no longer needed, may
be returned (transferred) to the manufacturer. Notify the local RSO and
amend or terminate any applicable licenses or permits.
7–34 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
b. Dispose of radioactive waste appropriately, in accordance with Federal,
State, and local regulations, only after coordinating with the designated
RSO.
7.15.10 Records
a. All users of radioactive material or radiation generating devices must
prepare and maintain records of the Radiation Safety Program for 3 years
after termination of the license or permit.
b. For any individual who frequents a restricted or controlled area and
may potentially be exposed to 100 mrem (1 mSv) or more per year, the
licensee must prepare and maintain records to determine that person’s:
(1) occupational dose during the current year
(2) dose received, both internal and external
The licensee must also attempt to obtain records of cumulative
occupational radiation exposure.
c. All users of radioactive material or radiation generating devices must
prepare and maintain records of all calculated or monitored radiation doses
to individual members of the public to document compliance with the
section on “Radiation Monitoring, Surveys and Dosimetry.”
7.15.11 Reports
a. Report immediately upon discovery, to the RSO, any spills, loss, theft,
damage, or overexposure. The RSO will then file a report with NRC in
accordance with the requirements of 10 CFR 20.
b. The RSO must issue annual reports and notify each individual radiation
worker of the recorded or calculated dose assigned to that worker for the
year or specific work project. These reports and notices must be
maintained in such a manner that accumulated exposure can be determined
at a future date.
7.15.12 Transportation. Transportation, interstate or intrastate, must
comply with the requirements of the DOT for transportation of radioactive
materials contained in 49 CFR.
7.15.13 Medical Examinations
a. Medical examinations are not routinely required before work with
ionizing radiation.
b. Defer all cases of overexposure and suspected ingestion or inhalation
of radioactive materials to a physician for examination.
October 2009 7–35
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
7.16 Non-ionizing Radiation and Fields
Employers will use qualified, competent persons and appropriately calibrated
monitoring equipment to assess, Survey, and evaluate non-ionizing radiation and
field strengths, employee exposures, and control measures.
7.16.1 Lasers. Comply with the manufacturer’s requirements and restrictions
in accordance with current ANSI Z.136.1, American National Standard for the
Safe Use of Lasers when installing and using lasers and laser systems.
Table 7–7 explains the laser hazard classification system and some of the
controls necessary.
Table 7-7.—Laser hazard classes

Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
Class 4
Cannot emit laser radiation at known hazard levels (typically Continuous Wave. CW 0.4
[Iwatts at visible wavelengths). Users of a Class 1 laser product are generally exempt
from radiation hazard controls during operation and maintenance (but not necessarily
during service).
Low power visible lasers which emit above Class 1 levels, but emit a radiant power not
above 1 mV. The concept is that the human aversion reaction to bright
light will protect a person. Only limited controls are specified.
Class 2A is a special designation that is based on a 1,000 second exposure and applies
only to lasers that are “not intended for viewing,” such as a supermarket laser Scanner.
The upper power limit of Class 2A is 4.0 [W. These are products whose emission does
not exceed the Class | limit for an emission duration Of 1,000
Seconds.
CLASS 3A: intermediate power lasers (CW: 1-5 m W). Only hazardous for intrabeam
viewing. Some limited controls are usually recommended.
CLASS 3B: moderate power lasers (CW: 5–500 mW, pulsed: 10 J/cm(2) - or the diffuse
reflection limit, which ever is lower). In general, Class 3B lasers will not be a fire hazard
and are not generally capable of producing a hazardous, diffuse reflection, unless the
diffuser is stored at from a short distance. Specific controls are recommended.
High power lasers (cw: 500 mW) are hazardous to view under any condition (directly or
diffusely scattered) and are a potential fire hazard and a skin hazard. Significant controls
are required of Class 4 laser facilities.
a. Assign only qualified and trained employees to install, adjust, and
operate laser equipment. The operator shall have proof of qualification of
the laser equipment in his or her possession during operation.
b. Laser equipment (except Class 1) must bear a label to indicate make,
maximum output, and beam spread.
c. Post areas in which Class 3 and Class 4 lasers are used with standard
laser warning signs.
d. Provide employees whose work requires exposure to Class 3b and
Class 4 laser beams with appropriate laser safety goggles that will protect
for the specific wavelength of the laser and be of optical density adequate
for the energy involved. Label protective goggles with the following
7–36
October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
data: the laser wavelengths for which use is intended, the optical density
of those wavelengths, and the visible light transmission.
e. Use beam shutters or caps on Class 3b or Class 4, and ensure the laser
is turned off when laser transmission is not required. When the laser is left
unattended for a period of time (e.g., during lunch hour, overnight, or at
change of shifts), turn the laser off.
f. Use only mechanical or electronic means as a detector for guiding the
internal alignment of the laser (except for Class 1 and 2a).
g. Do not direct any laser beam at employees. Whenever possible, set
laser units that are in operation above the heads of employees.
h. When it is raining or snowing or when there is dust or fog in the air, the
operation of outdoor laser systems will be prohibited. During such
weather conditions, keep employees out of range of the areas of source
and target if system operations continue.
i. Keep employee exposure to laser power densities within the threshold
limit values (TLVs) as specified by the ACGIH in “Threshold Limit
Values and Biological Exposure Indices.”
j. Do not direct lasers used as pointing devices toward employees.
Handle and store these lasers in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
7.16.2 Static Magnetic Fields. Routine occupational exposure must not
exceed 60 millitesla (mT), equivalent to 600 gauss (G), whole body or 600
mT (6000 G) to the limbs on a daily, time-weighted average basis [1 tesla (T)
= 10"G]. Ceiling values are 2 T for the whole body and 5 T for the limbs.
Safety hazards may exist from the mechanical forces exerted by the magnetic
field upon ferromagnetic tools and medical implants. Cardiac pacemaker and
similar medical electronic device wearers must not be exposed to field levels
exceeding 0.5 mT (5G). Areas exceeding 0.5 mT that are assumed to affect
medical devices must be labeled and access limited.

Table 7-8.-TLVs for static magnetic fields
Body part 8-hour TWA Ceiling
Whole body 60 mT 2 T
Limbs 600 mT 5 T
Medical electronic device || ------ 0.5 mT
WeaſerS
7.16.3 Sub-Radio Frequency (30 kHz and below) Magnetic Fields
a. Occupational exposures in the extremely-low frequency (ELF) range
from 1 Hz to 300 Hz must not exceed the ceiling value given by the
equation:
October 2009 7–37
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
BTLV = 60 f
where f is the frequency in Hz and BTLV is the magnetic flux density in
millitesla (mT).
b. For frequencies in the range of 300 Hz to 30 kHz (which includes the
voice frequency band from 300 Hz to 3 kHz and the very-low-frequency
band from 3 kHz to 30 kHz, occupational exposures must not exceed the
ceiling value of 0.2 mT. These ceiling values for frequencies of 300 Hz to
30 kHz are intended for both partial-body and whole-body exposures. For
frequencies below 300 Hz, the TLV for exposure of the extremities can be
increased by a factor of 10 for the hands and feet and by a factor of 5 for
the arms and legs. The magnetic flux density of 60 mT/f at 60 Hz
corresponds to a TLV of 1 m.T. At 30 kHz, the TLV is 0.2 mT. Limit the
exposure of people wearing cardiac pacemakers or similar medical
electronic devices to no more than 0.1 mT at power frequencies.
7.16.4 Sub-Radio Frequency (30 kHz and below) and Static Electric
Fields. Occupational exposures must not exceed a field strength of 25 kV/m
from 0 Hz to 100 Hz. For frequencies in the range of 100 Hz to 4 kHz, the
ceiling value is given by:
Erv = 2.5 x 10" f
where f is the frequency in Hz and ETLV is electric field strength in volts per
meter (V/m).
A value of 625 V/m is the ceiling value for frequencies from 4 Hz to 30 Hz.
These ceiling values for frequencies of 0 to 30 kHz are intended for both
partial-body and whole-body exposures. Limit the exposure of people
wearing cardiac pacemakers or similar medical electronic devices to no more
than 0.1 kV/m.
7.16.5 Radio Frequency and Microwave Radiation. The maximum
microwave power density is 10 milliwatts per square centimeter for
frequencies between 3 and 300 Ghz. For exposure limits at other frequencies,
refer to the latest edition of the ACGIH TLVs and BEIs.
7.16.6 Light and Near-Infrared and Ultraviolet Radiation. Do not operate
near-infrared, visible, or ultraviolet radiation in excess of the values and
indices specified in the ACGIH TLVs and BEIs. Although it is believed that
employees may be exposed repeatedly up to these TLVs without adverse
health effects, employers take all necessary measures to maintain exposures as
low as reasonably achievable and prevent needless exposure to higher levels
of radiation when simple measures will prevent exposure.
7–38 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
7.17 Asbestos
Airborne concentrations of asbestos must not exceed 0.1 fibers per cubic
centimeter of air averaged over 8 hours or 1.0 fiber per cubic centimeter of air
averaged over a sampling period of 30 minutes. When there is risk of exposure to
asbestos in the workplace, the regulatory provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1001, 29
CFR 1926.1101, or more stringent State standards apply.
7.17.1 Exposure Assessments and Monitoring. Assess all operations
conducted with or on asbestos containing materials for the potential to
generate airborne fibers. Employers must use exposure monitoring data to
assess employee exposures. Records of all measurements taken to monitor
employee exposure to asbestos must contain the date of measurement,
operation involving exposure, sampling and analytical methods used, and
evidence of their accuracy; number, duration, and results of samples taken;
type of respiratory protective devices worn; and name, social security number,
and results of all employee exposure measurements. Retain these records for
30 years.
7.17.2 Methods of Compliance. To the extent feasible, use engineering
controls to control exposures. If engineering controls are not feasible to meet
the exposure limit, use them to reduce employee exposures to the lowest
levels attainable and supplement them with the use of respiratory protection.
a. Control Measures. Use the following methods to reduce exposures:
• Equip local exhaust ventilation with a HEPA (high-efficiency
particulate air) filter dust collection system.
• Enclose or isolate processes producing asbestos dust.
• Ventilate regulated areas to move contaminated air to a collection
device with a HEPA filter.
• Control engineering and work practices to reduce exposures to the
lowest possible level and supplement with respiratory protection.
• Equip vacuum cleaners with HEPA filters to collect debris and
dust.
• Use wet methods or wetting agents, unless such methods would
cause electrical hazards, equipment malfunction, slipping hazards
or other hazards.
• Promptly clean up and dispose of asbestos-contaminated wastes
and debris in leak-tight containers.
b. Prohibited Practices. Regardless of the measured exposure levels, the
following practices are prohibited:
October 2009 7–39
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• Use of high-speed abrasive disk saws unless they are equipped
with point-of-cut ventilation or they are enclosed with HEPA-
filtered exhaust air.
• Use of compressed air to remove asbestos or asbestos-containing
materials unless the compressed air is used with an enclosed
ventilation system.
• Dry sweeping, shoveling, or other dry cleanup of dust and debris.
• Rotating employees to reduce exposure.
7.17.3 Hazard Identification. In the absence of analytical data to the
contrary, inventory and treat as all thermal insulation, sprayed, or troweled-on
surfacing materials, and resilient flooring material installed before 1981
asbestos containing materials. In addition, inventory all materials containing
more than 1 percent asbestos. Indicate at least the material identity, location,
and quantity present in the record of inventory. Maintain the records for the
duration of ownership.
7.17.4 Hazard Communication. Communicate the exposure hazards and
exposure control measures that were implemented to:
• All workers working with, on or adjacent to asbestos containing
materials
• All prospective employers applying or bidding for work in or adjacent
to areas containing asbestos
• All tenants who may occupy the areas containing asbestos
7.17.5 Signs. Post warning signs at all regulated areas. Regulated areas are
established where there are or a reasonable expectation of airborne
concentrations in excess of permissible exposure limits or where there is a
reasonable expectation of airborne concentrations in excess of permissible
exposure limits. At entrances to rooms or areas containing asbestos thermal
insulation and surfacing materials, the building owner must post signs
identifying the material, its location, and the work practices that ensure it is
not disturbed. The warning sign must contain at least the following
information:
DANGER
ASBESTOS
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
RESPIRATORY EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE
REQUIRED IN THIS AREA
7.17.6 Warning Labels. Warning labels with the following wording must be
placed on all raw materials, mixtures, scrap, waste, debris, and other products
containing asbestos fibers:
7–40 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
DANGER
Contains Asbestos Fibers
Avoid Creating Dust
Cancer And Lung Disease Hazard
7.17.7 Work Classification. Four classes of asbestos related work activities
are defined in table 7–9.
Table 7-9.-Asbestos work classification

Class
Definition and examples of asbestos work
Work involves the removal of asbestos-containing or presumed-asbestos-containing thermal
insulation and sprayed-on or troweled-on surfacing. Thermal insulation includes asbestos-
containing materials applied to pipes, boilers, tanks, ducts, or other structural Components to
prevent heat loss or gain. Surfacing materials may include decorative plaster on Ceilings,
acoustical materials on decking, or fireproofing on structural members.
Work includes the removal of other types of asbestos-containing materials that are not thermal
insulation, such as flooring and roofing materials. Removing intact incidental roofing materials
such as cements, mastics, coatings, and flashings is not regulated as Class II. Examples of
Class || Work include removal of floor and ceiling tiles, siding, roofing, or transite panels.
Work that includes repair and maintenance operations where asbestos-containing or
presumed-asbestos-containing materials are disturbed.
Work includes maintenance and custodial activities in which employees contact but do not
disturb asbestos-containing materials. These activities must be related to the construction
project and usually result from Class I, II, or lll activities.
7.17.8 Training. Train employees performing Class I through IV asbestos
operations before they begin these jobs and annually thereafter. The training
course must inform employees of:
• Ways to recognize asbestos
• Adverse health effects of asbestos exposure
• The relationship between smoking and asbestos in causing lung cancer
• Operations that could result in asbestos exposure and the importance
of protective controls
• The purpose, proper use, fitting instructions, and limitations of
respirators
• Appropriate work practices for performing asbestos jobs
• Medical surveillance program requirements
• The contents of the asbestos standard
• The names, addresses, and phone numbers of public health
organizations that provide information and materials or conduct
Smoking-cessation programs
• The required signs and labels and their meanings
October 2009 7–41
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Additional training based on the work classification that is required:
a. Class I. Equivalent in curriculum, method, and length to the
EPA Model Accreditation Plan asbestos worker training, (40 CFR 763,
Subpart E, appendix C). Eight hours of annual refresher training is
required.
b. Class II. Training must cover the elements listed above plus hands-on
training and last at least 8 hours. Annual refresher is required.
c. Class III. Training must be the equivalent in curriculum and method to
the 16-hour “Operations and Maintenance” course developed by EPA for
maintenance and custodial workers whose work disturbs asbestos-
containing materials (40 CFR 763.92). The course must include hand-on
training in proper respirator use and work practices. Annual refresher
training is required.
d. Class IV. Training must be equivalent in curriculum and method to
EPA awareness training. Focus on training locations of asbestos-
containing or presumed-asbestos-containing materials and ways to
recognize damage and avoid exposure. The course must be at least
2 hours long. Annual refresher training is required.
7.17.9 Work Plans. All Class I-III operations will have a written program
and plan in place before initiating activities that reflects the means
implemented to meet the applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1001 or 29
CFR 1926.1101. For all Class IV operations, provide a written Job Hazard
Analysis and Standard Operating Procedure reflecting the safety and health
protective expectations associated with the applicable operations before
initiating activities.
7.18 Lead
The permissible exposure limit (PEL) for lead is 50 pigſm3, averaged over an
8-hour period. Conduct monitoring and medical surveillance at an action level of
30 pg/m3 or more. OSHA standards regulating lead are at 29 CFR 1910.1025
and 29 CFR 1926.62. The employer must ensure that no employee is exposed to
lead at concentrations in excess of the PEL.
7.18.1 Written Lead Program. When work is conducted on surfaces
containing lead coatings, a lead compliance program containing the following
elements must be developed:
Detailed description of work activities
Engineering controls used to reduce or control exposures
Work practice controls
Decontamination procedures
Personal hygiene practices
7–42
October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
Training
A medical Surveillance program and biological monitoring
Exposure monitoring
Respiratory protection
Personal protective equipment
Workplace inspections
Signing of work area
Recordkeeping
7.18.2 Action Level. Several provisions of the lead standard, such as
periodic exposure monitoring, biologic monitoring, and initial and annual
employee training, are triggered whenever exposure measurements reach or
exceed the action level (30 Dg/m’). For employees exposed to lead at or
above the action level for more than 30 days per year, employers are also
required to provide an ongoing medical Surveillance program.
7.18.3 Minimum Program Requirement if Lead Is Present. Until
exposure monitoring is conducted that documents that employees are not
exposed above the PEL, the employer must assume that the following tasks
result in lead exposure and implement a full lead compliance program:
a. Manual demolition of structures, manual scraping, manual sanding, or
use of a heat gun when lead containing coatings are present or when the
composition of the coatings has not been tested
b. Abrasive blasting in an enclosure
c. Power tool cleaning
d. Lead burning
e. Using lead containing mortar or spray painting with lead-containing
paint
f. Abrasive blasting, welding, cutting, or burning on any structure where
lead-containing coatings or paint are present
g. Cleanup activities where dry expendable abrasives are used
h. Gouging with copper jacketed resistance rods known to contain high
amounts of lead
i. Performing any other task the employer believes may cause exposures
in excess of the PEL
7.18.4 Interim Measures. When an employee performs a specified task
where lead is present, interim protection must at least include:
October 2009 7–43
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
a. Appropriate respiratory protection
b. Appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment
c. Change areas
d. Hand washing facilities
e. Biological monitoring
f. Training, including hazard communication and respiratory training
7.18.5 Housekeeping
a. Maintain all surfaces as free as practicable of accumulated lead dust.
Accomplish this primarily by vacuuming floors, rafters, and other surfaces
or by employing methods equally effective in preventing the dispersal of
lead into the workplace. Vacuuming is considered to be the most reliable
method of cleaning surfaces on which dust accumulates, but equally
effective methods may be used, for example, a wet floor scrubber. Where
vacuuming methods are selected, the vacuums must be equipped with
HEPA filters. Dry or wet sweeping, shoveling, or brushing may not be
used except where vacuuming or other methods have been tried and do not
work.
b. Do not allow employees to smoke, eat, apply cosmetics, or have
tobacco products, food stuffs, or cosmetics in any work areas.
c. Provide separate storage facilities in change areas for street and work
clothing to prevent cross-contamination between the two. Employees
exposed to lead during their work shift must shower before leaving the
workplace, if showers are provided, and must not leave wearing protective
work clothing.
7.18.6 Medical Surveillance. If an employee’s airborne lead exposure is at
or above the action level for more than 30 days a year, the employer must
provide a medical Surveillance program to the employee consisting of routine
monitoring of an employee’s blood lead and ZPP (zinc protoporphyrin) levels,
made available at least every 2 months for the first 6 months in the exposed
job and every 6 months thereafter. If an employee’s blood lead exceeds
40 pug/dl., the monitoring frequency must be increased to at least every
2 months and not reduced until two consecutive blood leads are below
40 pug/dl.
7.18.7 Medical Removal Protection. When an employee’s blood lead level
is at or above 50 pug/dl on a periodic and follow-up blood sampling test
(within 2 weeks of the first report), remove the employee from any exposure
to lead. Also remove the employee from work having an exposure to lead at
or above the action level on each occasion when a final medical determination
results in a medical finding, determination, or opinion that the employee has a
detected medical condition that places the employee at increased risk of
material impairment to health from exposure to lead.
7–44 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health
7.18.8 Training. Employees who are exposed at or above the action level
must be trained in the following:
• The content of the OSHA lead standard and its appendices
• The specific nature of the operations that could result in exposure to
lead above the action level
• The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use, and limitations of
respirators
• The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program and
the medical removal protection program, including information
concerning the adverse health effects associated with excessive
exposure to lead (with particular attention to the adverse reproductive
effects on both males and females and hazards to the fetus and
additional precautions for employees who are pregnant)
• The engineering controls and work practices associated with the
employee’s job assignment, including training of employees to follow
relevant good work practices
• The contents of any compliance plan in effect
• Why chelating agents should not routinely be used to remove lead
from employees’ bodies and why they should not be used at all except
under the direction of a licensed physician
• The employee’s right of access to records under 29 CFR 1910.20.
7.18.9 Recordkeeping. Establish and maintain records of all exposure
monitoring and other data used in conducting the exposure assessment. The
records must include the name and job classification of employees monitored,
the details of the sampling and the analytic techniques, the results, and the
type of respiratory protection worn. Keep these records for 30 years in
accordance with OSHA’s standard 29 CFR 1910.20, Access to Exposure and
Medical records. Employers must establish and maintain records of medical
surveillance (biological monitoring and medical examination results). These
records must include the names of employees, the physician’s written opinion,
exposure data provided to the physician, and any employee medical
complaints associated with lead exposure. The employer is required to keep
or must ensure that the examining physician keeps a record of the results of
medical examinations, a description of laboratory procedures, and a copy of
the results of biological monitoring. These records must be kept for at least
the duration of employment plus 30 years.
7.18.10 Observation of Monitoring. Employers must provide employees or
their representatives with the opportunity to observe monitoring of employee
exposures to toxic materials or harmful physical agents. To ensure that this
right is meaningful, observers are entitled to an explanation of the
measurement procedure, to observe all steps related to the measurement
October 2009 7–45
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
procedure, and to record the results obtained. When results of the monitoring
are returned by the laboratory, make them available to the employee.
7.18.11 Signing. The following warning sign must be displayed in each work
area where lead hazards exist:
WARNING
LEAD WORK AREA
POISON
NO SMOKING OR EATING
7.19 Illumination
While work is in progress, provide lighting in accordance with the current
ANSI/IES RP-7, Recommended Practice for Industrial Lighting; ANSI/IES RP-1,
Recommended Practice for Office Lighting; and UL 924, Emergency Lighting
and Power Equipment. Table 7-10 is a summary of the minimum light intensities.
7.19.1 Means of Egress. Provide a minimum of 11 lux (1 footcandle) of
illumination, measured at the floor to the means of egress.
Table 7-10-Minimum lighting requirements
Illuminance — lux

Facility or function (footcandles)
ACCessways
- general indoor 55 (5)
- general outdoor 33 (3)
- exitways, walkways, ladders, stairs 110 (10)
Administrative areas (offices, drafting 540 (50)
and meeting rooms, etc.)
Chemical laboratories 540 (50)
Construction areas
- general indoor 55 (5)
- general outdoor 33 (3)
– tunnels and general underground 55 (5)
- tunnel and shaft heading during 110 (10)
drilling, mucking, and scaling
Conveyor routes 110 (10)
Docks and loading platforms 33 (3)
Elevators, freight, and passenger 215 (20)
First aid Stations and infirmaries 325 (30)
Mechanical/electrical equipment 110 (10)
ſOOmS
Parking areas 33 (3)
Toilets, wash rooms, dressing rooms 110 (10)
Visitor areas 215 (20)
7–46 October 2009
Section 7–Occupational Health

Table 7-10.-Minimum lighting requirements
Facility or function
Illuminance — lux
(footcandles)
Warehouses and storage
rooms/areas 110 (10)
- indoor Stockroom, active/bulk 55 (5)
storage 270 (25)
- indoor Stockroom, inactive 33 (3)
- indoor rack storage
- Outdoor storage
Work areas - general (not listed 325 (30)
above)
October 2009
7–47
Section 8
Personal Protective Equipment
8.1 Requirements for Personal Protective Equipment
This section sets forth minimum personal protective equipment (PPE)
requirements. It provides an overview of PPE requirements, including workplace
assessment, PPE maintenance, and training. The supervisor must ensure
availability, proper use, and maintenance of equipment specified in this section.
The “Occupational Health” section details the requirements for respirator use.
8.1.1 Workplace Assessment. Assess each workplace to determine if
hazards are present (or likely to be present) that would make it necessary to
use personal protective equipment. Document the assessment in writing or in
the Job Hazard Analysis.
8.1.2 PPE Maintenance. Each day, inspect PPE before use. Maintain and
store PPE properly. After each use, clean and sanitize PPE (as appropriate).
8.1.3 PPE Training. Provide training to each employee who wears PPE.
This training must include answers to the following questions:
• When will PPE be used?
• What PPE is necessary?
• How is the required PPE used?
• What are the limitations of the PPE2
• How is PPE properly maintained, inspected, and stored?
8.2 Requirements for Head Protection
8.2.1 Required Helmets (Hard Hats). All personnel, including contractors
and visitors, must wear helmets (hard hats) when entering or working in
designated hard hat areas.
8.2.2 Hard Hat Areas. Hard hat areas include all areas where a person may
be injured from overhead hazards, including overhead storage, and any kind
of construction, maintenance, and repair work in progress.
8.2.3 Posting of Hard Hat Areas. Post conspicuous signs at all entrances to
hard hat areas and appropriate locations. Signs must state:
“HARD HATS REQUIRED BEYOND THIS POINT*
8.2.4 Hard Hat Design. Verify that hard hats comply with Type I, Class G
or E, as specified in ANSI Z89.1-1997, “American National Standard for
Industrial Head Protection.” Confirm that hard hats worn by linemen,
October 2009 8-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
electricians, or employees working in tunnels, shafts, or near high-voltage
conductors or apparatus conform to class E requirements of ANSI Z89.1-
1997. Hard hats must have a manufacturer’s label that indicates its design
complies with ANSI requirements.
8.3 Requirements for Eye and Face Protection
Employees exposed to potential eye or face injury from physical, chemical, or
radiation agents must be furnished and required to wear eye and/or face protection
specifically designed for the exposure.
8.3.1 Design. Eye and face protection required by this section must comply
with the standards published in the current ANSI Z87.1, “Practice for
Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection.”
8.3.2 Corrective Lenses. Protect employees who wear corrective lenses,
when required to wear eye protection, with one of the following:
a. Protective spectacles with lenses that provide optical correction.
b. Protective goggles or face shields that can be worn over corrective
glasses or contact lenses.
c. Goggles that incorporate corrective lenses mounted behind protective
lenses.
8.3.3 Selection Guide. When selecting eye and face protection for the
hazards and operations noted, use the information in table 8-1, table 8–2, and
figure 8-1 as a guide.
8.3.4 Electric Welding. Employees must wear nonflammable welding
helmets with lift-front or stationary-front lens when engaged in electric
welding operations. Employees must wear plano prescription safety glasses
or flash goggles under the helmet to protect their eyes when raising the helmet
for scaling operations. Helmet filter lens shades must conform with table 8-2.
8.3.5 Gas—Torch Cutting and Welding. When gas-torch cutting and
welding, employees must wear a welding mask, weld-view or cover-glass
goggles, or similar goggles that provide equivalent eye and face protection.
The eye protectors must have filter lenses that conform to the requirements in
tables 8-1 and 8-2. Sunglasses do not meet this requirement.
8.3.6 Welder Helper or Inspector. Welder helpers or welding inspectors
must wear flash goggles with a minimum lens shade of 2 in the general
welding area. Helpers or inspectors observing actual welding operations must
wear the same protection as the welder.
8–2 October 2009
Section 8—Personal
Table 8-1.—Eye and face protector selection guide
Protective Equipment
Operation
Hazards
Recommended protectors
(numbers refer to figure 8-1)
Acetylene-burning,
acetylene-cutting,
acetylene-welding
Chemical handling
Chipping
Electric (arc) welding
Furnace operations
Grinding - light
Grinding - heavy
Laboratory
Machining
Molten metals
Spot welding
Sparks, harmful rays,
molten metal, flying
particles
Splash, acid burns, fumes
Flying particles
Sparks, intense rays,
molten metal
Glare, heat, molten metal
Flying particles
Flying particles
Chemical splash, glass
breakage
Flying particles
Heat, glare, sparks, splash
Flying particles, sparks
7, 8, 9
2, 10 (for severe exposure, add
10 over 2)
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8A
9, 11 (11 in combination with 4,
5, 6 in tinted lenses advisable)
7, 8, 9 (for severe exposure,
add 10)
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10
1, 3, 7A, 8A (for severe
exposure, add 10)
2 (10 when in combination with
4, 5, 6)
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10
7, 8 (10 in combination with 4, 5,
6 in tinted lenses)
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10
October 2009
8–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table 8-2.—Filter lenses for protection against radiant energy
Electrode size in
1/32 inches Minimum'
Operations (0.8 millimeter) Arc current protective shade
Shielded metal arC <3 <60 7
welding 3–5 60-160 8
5–8 160–250 10
>8 250–550 11
Gas metal-arc <60 7
welding and flux- 60-160 10
cored arc welding 160–250 10
250–500 10
Gas tungsten-arc <50 8
welding 50–150 8
150–500 10
Air carbon arc cutting (light) <500 10
(heavy) 500-1,000 11
Plasma arc welding <20 6
20-100 8
100–400 10
400–800 11
Plasma arc cutting (light)* <300 8
(medium)” 300–400 9
(heavy) 400-800 10
Torch blazing 3
Torch soldering 2
Carbon arc welding 14
Gas welding: < 1/8 <3.2 4
Light 1/8-1/2 3.2-12.7 5
Medium > 1/2 > 12.7 6
Heavy
Oxygen cutting: <1 <25 3
Light 1–6 25–150 4
Medium >6 > 150 5
Heavy
Source: 29 CFR 1910.133(a)(5), http://www.osha.gov/reg
"As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the Weld zone. Then, go to a
lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In
oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to se a
filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation.
*These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that
lighter filters may be used when the arc is hidden by the workpiece.
8–4
October 2009
10
Eye and face protectors are identified below
by number and type. Refer to Table 1 for
recommended usage applications.
Goggles, flexible fitting, regular
ventilation
Goggles, flexible fitting, hooded
ventilation
Goggles, cushioned fitting, rigid body
Spectacles, metal frame, with side shields*
Spectacles, plastic frame, with side shields*
Spectacles, metal-plastic frame, with
flatfold side shields*
Welding Goggles, eyecup type, tinted
lenses”
7A. Chipping Goggles, eyecup type, clear
safety lenses (not illustrated)
8. Welding Goggles, coverspec type,
tinted lens**
8A.Chipping Goggles, coverspec type,
clear safety lenses (not illustrated)
9. Welding Goggles, coverspec type,
tinted plate lens**
10. Face Shield (available with plastic or
mesh window, tinted/transparent)
11. Welding Helmets**
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Figure 8–1–Recommended eye and face protection.
Source: 29 CFR 1926.102(a)(5) table E-1.
These are also available without side shields for limited use requiring only frontal protection.
See Table 2, Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy.


O
&
Q.
CO
O
3
ă
C
N)
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
8.3.7 Laser Protection. Install and use lasers and laser systems according
to the manufacturer’s requirements and restrictions according to the
ANSI Z.136.1, “American National Standard for the Safe Use of Lasers.”
Employees whose work involves Class 3b or 4 laser beams must wear
appropriate laser safety goggles.
8.4 Requirements for Hearing Protection
8.4.1 Hearing Protective Devices. Use hearing protective devices whenever
ambient noise levels equal or exceed 85 dBa.
8.4.2 Noise Reduction Rating. Supervisor must verify that a noise reduction
rating (NRR) of all hearing protective devices is used, which is based upon
one of the following methods:
a. One of the three methods developed by NIOSH (described in the “List
of Personal Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data,” HEW Publication
No. 76-120, 1975, pages 21–37). These methods are known as NIOSH
methods No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3.
b. ANSI S12.6–1984, “Method for the Measurement of the Real-Ear
Attenuation of Hearing Protectors.”
c. ANSI S3.19–1974, “Measurement of Real-Ear Protection of Hearing
Protectors and Physical Attenuation of Ear Muffs.”
8.4.3 Hearing Device Labels. Use hearing protective devices labeled by
manufacturer according to Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 40
CFR Part 211.
8.5 Requirements for Protective Clothing
8.5.1 Welding Leathers. Employees engaged in overhead welding or
burning where severe burn hazards exist must wear leather gloves, chrome-
tanned leather chaps and coats, or a combination that provides equal
protection to prevent exposure to sparks and slag. They must wear leather
gloves and aprons when performing routine welding and burning.
8.5.2 High-Visibility Clothing. Employees exposed to vehicular traffic
on roadways or construction sites shall wear high-visibility safety apparel
labeled as compliant with the appropriate conspicuity class as defined in
ANSI/ISEA 107-1999 American National Standard for High-Visibility Safety
Apparel. Contractor Safety Plans or Reclamation work plans shall contain
justification for the class of clothing provided to workers.
a. Conspicuity Class 1 apparel will be used in activities where traffic
speeds do not exceed 25 miles per hour, traffic is well separated from
workers, and work tasks permit undivided attention to approaching traffic.
8–6 October 2009
Section 8—Personal
Protective Equipment
b. Conspicuity Class 2 apparel will be used where traffic speeds exceed
25 miles per hour, work tasks divert employee attention from traffic, or
work is not well separated from traffic. (Many construction activities will
fall in this category.)
c. Conspicuity Class 3 apparel will be used when workers are exposed to
traffic at speeds above 50 miles per hour or other situations where
visibility from a greater distance is needed.
8.5.3 Gloves. Gloves must be provided and used to prevent contact with
biological, chemical, and physical hazards. Substances which may require
protection include acids, caustics, solvents, herbicides, infectious materials,
and other toxic materials. Employees will wear leather-palm gloves when
working with steel cables, barbed wire, rough-sawn timber, or other materials
capable of causing lacerations. Insulating gloves will be worn when handling
materials of extreme temperatures.
8.5.4 Rubber Goods. Employees may use rubber gloves, sleeves, blankets,
covers, and line hose only when required by special conditions for work on
energized facilities. Rubber goods provided to protect employees who work
on energized facilities must meet American Society of Testing and Materials
(ASTM) specifications. Test, inspect, and maintain rubber goods according to
current ASTM standards. At a minimum, perform a visual inspection prior to
each use.
8.5.5 Protective Chaps. Employees who operate chain saws, hand-held
abrasive wheel cutoff saws, and other similar power tools must wear
protective chaps that meet current U.S. Forest Service requirements.
8.5.6 Foot Protection. When work endangers feet or requires special foot
protection, employees must wear protective footwear that meets the
requirements in ANSI Z41, “Protective Footwear.” This footwear must meet
the basic I/75 “impact,” C/75 “compression” standards for the protective toe
box. In addition, rubber footwear, including boots and packs, must meet the
Sole puncture-resistance requirements. Heavy-duty footwear must meet the
MT/75 metatarsal requirements. Work environments that may require
protective footwear include construction sites and activities, industrial areas,
underground work, and working with chemicals. Advise visitors of the
existing hazards in the area before planned visits or before permitting entrance
to the area.
8.5.7 Minimum Wearing Apparel. Along with other requirements of this
paragraph, all employees who work outdoors must wear, as minimum
protection, pants long enough to protect from environmental and physical
hazards, and sleeved shirts with a minimum 4-inch sleeve. Cutoffs, tank tops,
or modified shirts are not acceptable. Apparel must protect where irritants or
toxic substances may come into contact with skin or clothing.
October 2009 8–7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
8.5.8 Electric Flash Protection. Any person who enters the flash protection
zone (the area between the flash protection boundary and its associated
conductor (see NFPA 70E, Part II, 2-1.3.3.2) must wear flame-resistant
clothing and personal protective equipment, based on the incident exposure
associated with the specific task. Refer to NFPA tables 70E 3-3.8 and 3-4.11
for PPE standards.
a. Eye and Face Protection. Employees must wear protective eye
equipment whenever there is a danger of injury from electric arcs, flashes,
or from flying objects resulting from electrical explosion. Always wear
eye protection (safety glasses or goggles) under face shields or hoods.
b. Body Protection. Employees must wear flame resistant-clothing
whenever they may be exposed to an electric arc flash. Flash suits
and their closure design must permit easy and rapid removal. The
entire flash suit, including the window, must have energy-absorbing
characteristics suitable for arc-flash exposure. Use clothing and
equipment to maximize worker protection. Clothing and equipment
required by the degree of electrical hazard exposure can be worn alone
or be integrated with normal apparel. Protective clothing and equipment
must cover parts of the body subject to harm and all normal apparel that is
not flash-flame resistant, while allowing movement and visibility. Do
not wear meltable synthetic fibers next to the skin.
c. Hand and Arm Protection. Employees must wear rubber insulating
gloves where there is a danger of hand and arm injury from electric shock
and burns, due to contact with energized parts. Wear hand and arm
protection where you may be exposed to arc flash burn. Gloves made
from layers of flame-resistant material provide the highest level of hand
arc flash protection. Heavy-duty leather gloves also provide good
protection. Where voltage-rated gloves are used, wear leather protectors
over the rubber gloves.
d. Foot and Leg Protection. Dielectric overshoes are required where
electrically insulated footwear is used as protection against step and touch
potential. Heavy-duty leather work shoes normally provide a significant
degree of protection to the feet from arc flash.
e. Flash Protection Boundary. The flash protection boundary, Dc, is
defined as the distance, in feet, of a person from an arc source for a just
curable burn (i.e., skin temperature remains below 80 degrees C or
176 degrees F).
The flash protection boundary can be calculated using either of the
following equations:
8–8
October 2009
Section 8—Personal
Protective Equipment
D = [2.65 x MVAbºx tº (preferred equation for calculations applying
to generating and pumping facilities)
D. = [53 x MVA x tº (for systems with single sources of electric
fault current)
where:
MVAbf = bolted fault MVA available at the point involved
MVA = the MVA rating of the transformer. For
transformers with MVA ratings below 0.75 MVA,
multiply the transformer MVA rating by 1.25
t = time or arc exposure in seconds
You must know the voltage rating and fault current available to find the
MVAbf factor in the first equation. The use of the second equation, based
only on transformer rating, may not consider significant current
contributions from large rotating machines, and its use for Reclamation
facilities is discouraged.
According to NFPA, the flash protection boundary for systems rated at
600 volts and below, and with less than 50 kiloamperes of current
available, is 4 feet.
Calculate the flash protection boundary for each item of electrical
equipment in the plant. Include the flash protection boundary in the
facility Hazardous Energy Control Program. Personnel entering the flash
protection boundary near exposed energized electrical equipment must
wear appropriate electrical flash protective equipment.
8.5.9 Determination of Appropriate Clothing. The NFPA system of
hazard/risk classification associates many types of work on energized
equipment and within the flash protection boundary and five levels of
hazard/risk. Use the hazard/risk level to determine the required protective
clothing characteristics appropriate for the work. The classification system is
defined in several tables of the NFPA Standard No. 70E, Part II.
Determine the appropriate protective clothing in two steps:
• First, find the type of work planned in NFPA 70E, Part II,
Table 3–3.9.1 (Hazard Risk Category Classifications). This four-page
table lists over 70 of the various operations on various types of
electrical equipment of various voltage ratings. A corresponding
hazard/risk category from 0 to 4 (highest exposure) is listed for each
type of work. The table also indicates whether voltage rated tools or
gloves are required.
October 2009 8-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• Second, determine what types and layers of clothing are required for
the Hazard/Risk category by looking on NFPA 70E, Part II,
Table 3–3.9.2 (Protective Clothing and Personal Protective Equipment
Matrix). Use the clothing and equipment indicated on this table when
working on or near energized equipment within the flash protection
boundary. Table 3-3.9.3 (Protective Clothing Characteristics) gives
information on the weight of the clothing for the five levels of
Hazard/Risk.
As an alternative to using tables 3–3.9.1 and 3-3.9.2, Table F-1 (Simplified,
Two Category, Flame-Resistant Clothing System) provides a quicker method
of determining appropriate clothing for use within the flash protection
boundary of energized electrical equipment.
a. Synthetic Clothing Not Permitted. Do not wear clothing made from
synthetic materials such as acetate, nylon, polyester, rayon, either alone or
in blends with cotton. These materials will melt into the skin when
exposed to high temperatures and can aggravate a burn injury.
Do not wear conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such as
watchbands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces, metalized aprons,
cloth with conductive thread, metal headgear, or unrestrained metal frame
glasses) where they can present an electrical contact hazard with live parts,
unless such articles are rendered nonconductive by covering, wrapping, or
other insulating means.
8.6 Protection Against Drowning
Provide U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) approved type III or type V personal flotation
devices (PFDs) to employees when working on or around water or where a
drowning hazard exists.
Do not use PFDs that depend solely on inflation to provide flotation (USCG
Type III or V inflatables) onboard watercraft or in activities that subject the PFD
to abrasion or to substances that might affect the device’s effectiveness.
8.6.1 Design. The PFD must be international orange and must have at least
200 square centimeters of retroreflective material attached to the front and
200 square centimeters of retroreflective material attached to the back. If the
PFD is reversible, retroreflective material must be attached to each of its
reversible sides.
8.6.2 Ring Buoys. Install ring buoys with at least 90 feet of line and
approved by the U.S. Coast Guard at 200-foot intervals on worksites where a
water hazard exists.
8.6.3 Inspection and Replacement. Before each use, visually inspect each
personal flotation device defects that would compromise its effectiveness. At
8–10 October 2009
Section 8—Personal
Protective Equipment
annual intervals, conduct buoyancy test and discard any device with less than
13 pounds buoyancy.
8.7 Other Protective Equipment
Other sections of these standards cover other protective equipment, fire and
rescue devices, first aid and medical facilities, seatbelts, and special devices and
equipment for protecting personnel from specific hazards. Employees must use
such specified protective equipment when exposed to the respective hazards.
8.8 Safety Nets
The employer must install safety nets to protect employees when the workplace is
more than 25 feet above adjoining surfaces and where use of Scaffolding, catch
platforms, temporary floors, safety belts, or lifelines is impractical. Use Safety
nets when required or directed by the office head or the COR, to protect
employees or the public from overhead construction.
8.8.1 Net Specifications. The mesh size of safety nets must not exceed 6 by
6 inches. Nets must meet accepted performance standards of 17,500 foot-
pounds minimum impact resistance, as determined and certified by the
manufacturer, and must bear a label of proof test. Edge ropes must withstand
a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. Line nets installed for
overhead protection with wire or synthetic netting of not more than 1-inch
mesh. Wire mesh must not be less than No. 22 gauge; synthetic must not be
less than No. 18 twine.
8.8.2 Installation. Design and construct the net suspension system with a
minimum safety factor of four. The net suspension system must withstand
test loading without permitting contact between the net and any surface or
object below the net. Connections between panels must develop the full
strength of the net. Use forged steel safety hooks or shackles to fasten the net
to its supports.
8.8.3 Positioning. Install safety nets as close under the work surface as
practical, but not more than 25 feet below the working level. Extend nets at
least 8 feet beyond the perimeter of the work area.
8.8.4 Testing. Field test safety nets immediately following installation,
repositioning, or major repair. Conduct the test by dropping a 400-pound bag
of sand, more than 30 inches in diameter, from at least 25 feet high onto the
center of the net.
8.8.5 Inspection and Maintenance. The care, maintenance, and storage of
nets must conform to the net manufacturer’s recommendations. Give due
attention to the factors affecting net life. (See subsection on equipment.)
Protect nets from debris, sparks, and hot slag resulting from welding and
cutting operations. Nets must be capable of a minimum service life of 2 years
October 2009 8–11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
under normal, on-the-job exposure to weather, sunlight, and handling,
excluding damage from misuse, mishandling, and exposure to chemicals and
airborne contaminants.
Inspect nets daily for damage, and make necessary replacement or repairs
before work above the net resumes. Remove debris from nets at least daily.
Maintain an up-to-date record for each personnel net. The record must
include the following information:
a. Net serial number.
b. Date installed.
c. Dates inspected.
d. Inspection results. If results are unsatisfactory, state the reasons why
and describe the corrections made for each deficiency.
e. Dates tested.
f. Test results. If unsatisfactory, state the reasons.
g. Date removed.
h. Disposition and reason.
The responsible person conducting the net inspection must initial each set of
entries in the record.
8.8.6 Training. When using personnel nets, the employer must provide
appropriate training, so employees will recognize the hazards of falling into
nets and the procedures to follow to limit potential injury. The training
program must include the following:
a. The tested limits of installed nets.
b. Avoiding falls.
c. Recording and reporting of training.
d. Location of inspection records and the responsible person.
8.8.7 Factors Affecting Net Life
a. Sunlight. Ropes of natural and synthetic fibers can lose a significant
amount of strength after prolonged exposure to direct sunlight. Take
special precautions to shield ropes one-half inch in diameter and less from
the sun’s rays. When they are not in use, store properly and protect nets
from direct and indirect sunlight.
b. Abrasion. Keep in mind the adverse effects of abrasion. Do not drag
nets or allow them to chafe over the ground or other rough surfaces. No
test will predict the life of a net under the wide variety of abrasion
conditions that may be encountered.
8-12 October 2009
Section 8—Personal
Protective Equipment
c. Sand. Embedded sand can cut into fibers, reducing the strength of
nets. Keep nets as clean and free of sand as possible.
d. Rust. Prolonged contact with rusting iron or steel can cause significant
degradation and loss of strength.
e. Airborne Contaminants. Many chemicals and airborne contaminants
can adversely affect the strength of nets. Where such hazards exist,
identify the chemicals and measure the concentrations. Determine the
effect on the net materials by test, if not known.
8.9 Lifesaving Skiffs
Provide one or more lifesaving boats or skiffs where employees work over or
immediately adjacent to water where a drowning hazard exists. Persons trained in
launching and operating the skiff must be immediately available during working
hours. Use the skiff only for drills and in emergencies.
8.9.1 Equipment. Lifesaving skiffs must have the following equipment on
board:
a. Four oars (two, if motor powered).
b. Oarlocks attached to the gunwales or to the oars.
c. One ball-pointed boat hook.
d. At least one ring buoy with 90 feet of line attached.
e. One life preserver or work vest for each crew member, and additional
devices necessary for rescued persons.
f. Emergency lighting.
October 2009 8-13
Section 9
Signs, Signals, and Barricades
This section establishes design specifications for safety signs, tags, and barricades
used on sites administered by Reclamation. This section also covers standard
hoisting signals and provisions about the use of signal persons.
9.1 Requirements for Signs
9.1.1 Application. Signs described in this subsection must be visible at all
times when work is in progress. Promptly remove or cover them when the
hazard no longer exists. -
9.1.2 Standards. In addition to the design specifications set forth in this
Subsection, the design and application of signs must conform to the latest
edition of the following standards:
a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z535.1, Safety Color
Code
b. ANSI Z35.2, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs
c. ANSI Z35.5, Accident Prevention Tags (For Temporary Hazards)
d. ANSI C95.2, Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard Warning Symbols
e. 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1910.145, Specifications for
Accident Prevention Signs and Tags
f. U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration,
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways
(MUTCD)
g. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) A13.1, Scheme
for the Identification of Piping Systems
9.1.3 Danger Signs. Danger signs must conform to the following
requirements: -
a. Application. Use danger signs only when the lives of employees or
others are in danger.
b. Design. As illustrated in figure 9–1, danger signs must have
“DANGER” in white letters placed at the top of a rectangular safety sign
with a red background. The safety alert symbol must precede
“DANGER.” The base of the symbol must be on the same horizontal line
as the base of “DANGER.” The safety alert symbol must be as high as or
higher than “DANGER.”
October 2009 9–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards

9–2
Preferred Alternate
Figure 9-1.-Danger sign
a warning TWARNINGI
Figure 9-2-Warningsign
A CAUTION | CAUTION
Figure.9-3.-Caution sign
Figure 9–1–Danger, warning, and caution signs.
c. Alternative. As an alternative, danger signs may have “DANGER” in
white letters on a safety red oval background with a white border on a
black rectangular field. This distinctive panel must appear in the
uppermost portion of the sign. Do not use any other signal word or
symbol within this distinctive shape and color arrangement. The message
must be in black or red letters on a white background, or white letters on a
black background. The symbol/pictorial panel, if used, must be square
with a black, safety red, or black and safety red symbol on a white
background.
9.1.4 Warning Signs. Warning signs must conform to the following
requirements:
a. Application. Use warning signs to warn against a potential hazard
that, if not avoided, may result in serious injury or death. Do not use
warning signs for property damage hazards unless personal injury risk also
exists.
b. Design. As illustrated in figure 9–1, warning signs must have
“WARNING” placed at the top of the sign in black letters on a rectangular
orange background. The safety alert symbol must precede “WARNING.”
The base of the symbol must be on the same horizontal line as the base of
“WARNING.” The safety alert symbol must be as high as or higher than
“WARNING.”
c. Alternative. As an alternative, warning signs may have “WARNING”
in black letters within a safety orange truncated diamond of a black
October 2009
Section 9—Signs,
Signals, and Barricades
rectangular background. Locate this distinctive panel in the uppermost
portion of the sign. See figure 9–1. Do not use any other word or symbol
within this distinctive shape or color arrangement. The message panel
must be in black letters on a white background or white letters on a black
background. The message may, as an alternative, be black letters on a
Safety orange background.
9.1.5 Caution Signs. Caution signs must conform to the following
requirements:
a. Application. Use caution signs to warn against a potential hazard that,
if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Caution signs may
also alert against unsafe practices that may cause property damage.
b. Design. As illustrated in figure 9–1, caution signs must have
“CAUTION” placed at the top of the sign in black letters on a rectangular
yellow background. The safety alert symbol must precede “CAUTION” if
the hazard is a potential personal injury hazard. The base of the symbol
must be on the same horizontal line as the base of “CAUTION.” The
safety alert symbol must be as high as or higher than “CAUTION.”
c. Alternative. As an alternative, caution signs may have “CAUTION”
in safety yellow letters within a black rectangular background located in
the uppermost portion of the sign. See figure 9–1. Do not use any other
signal word or symbol with this distinctive color or signal shape
arrangement. Caution signs used to indicate accidents of property damage
only do not include the safety alert symbol. These signs have
“CAUTION” in black letters on a rectangular safety yellow background.
The message panel must be in black letters on a white background or
white letters on a black background. As an alternative, the message may
be black letters on a safety yellow background.
9.1.6 Exit and Fire Protection Signs. Identify fire exits, fire protection
equipment, and physical hazards in accordance with ANSI Z35.1, “Safety
Color Code,” or NFPA No. 101, “Life Safety Code.”
9.1.7 Instructional Safety Signs. Signs intended for general safety
instructions or information must have a green upper panel and white lower
section. White letters on the green background must convey the principal
message. Additional information must appear in safety green or black letters
on the white background.
9.1.8 Directional Arrow Sign Panels. The directional arrow symbol must
be white on a black or colored background on a rectangular field. The symbol
must appear in the uppermost portion of the visual alerting device if it appears
by itself or with general safety or fire safety signs. When using these
directional arrows along with DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, or
NOTICE signs, the arrow must be in the lower sign panel. The color of the
October 2009 9–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
arrows must be the same arrangement as the message or symbol described
above. The design of the directional arrows must be in accordance with ANSI
Z35.2.
9.1.9 Pipe Labels. Label pipes that carry hazardous materials to identify
their contents in accordance with ASME 13.1, “Scheme for the Identification
of Piping Systems.”
9.1.10 Traffic Signs and Barricades. Traffic signs and barricades must
conform to the following requirements.
a. Design and Use. Traffic signs and barricades erected in areas under
Reclamation jurisdiction must conform to the current U.S. Department Of
Transportation Federal Highway Administration MUTCD. Signs and
barricades erected on highways and roads must comply with MUTCD
requirements or the highway or street department having jurisdiction,
whichever are the more stringent. Do not use cable as a gate or road
closure device. Single and double pole pipe gates are permitted if they
comply with the standards set forth in MUTCD, section 3C-4, END OF
ROADWAY provisions. Each gate must have at least two double-sided,
18-inch by 18-inch, red reflective diamond panels mounted on and spaced
equally across the gate, as described in MUTCD section 3C-3. Mount the
diamond panels 36 to 48 inches above the ground. When closed, the
reflective panels must be visible from both directions of travel.
Equip gate ends with reflective material to identify the open end of the
gate. The gates must be designed to remain either fully opened or fully
closed.
b. Installation and Removal. Erect appropriate traffic control signs and
devices immediately before need and promptly remove them when no
longer required.
c. Visibility. Keep signs and barricades clean and legible. Reflectorize
or illuminate, as appropriate, any signs and barricades used at night. Signs
and barricades must be visible at all times. Do not obscure them with
parked equipment or other objects.
d. Traffic Controls. When signs and barricades do not provide adequate
protection, flag persons or other appropriate traffic controls must be
provided.
9.2 Accident Prevention Tags
Accident prevention tags are intended to warn employees and others of an
existing hazard. They are intended for temporary use to warn of equipment under
9-4 October 2009
Section 9—Signs,
Signals, and Barricades
repair, defective tools, or deflective equipment. Accident prevention tags must
conform to the current ANSI Z35.5, “Accident Prevention Tags (For Temporary
Hazards).”
9.3 Requirements for Radiation Hazard Signs
9.3.1 Lasers. Laser warning signs and symbols must conform to the design
specifications in the current issue of ANSI Z35.2, “Environmental and Facility
Safety Signs,” and ANSI Z.136.1, “Safe Use of Lasers.”
9.3.2 Ionizing Radiation. Ionizing radiation warning signs and symbols
must conform to the design specifications in the current issue of ANSI Z35.2,
“Environmental and Facility Safety Signs.”
9.3.3 Radio Frequencies. Signs warning of harmful radio frequencies must
display the standard warning symbol, as described in the current issue of
ANSI C95.2, “Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard Warning Symbol.”
9.4 Traffic Control Signals
9.4.1 Requirement. Flag persons directing traffic must use the signals and
procedures contained in the current issue of the U.S. Department of
Transportation Federal Highway Administration, MUTCD. It can be accessed
on the Internet at the following website address:
http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno-millennium.htm
9.4.2 Flag Persons. Use only employees who are trained, qualified, and/or
State certified as flag persons. Flag persons controlling traffic must wear high
visibility fluorescent apparel.
9.5 Barrier Tape
9.5.1 Requirement. When using barrier tape to identify a temporary
hazardous location, the employee in charge of the area must mark the tape
with an accident prevention tag showing his/her name and phone extension.
9.5.2 Red Plastic Tape. You may use red plastic tape to warn of dangerous
locations. Red plastic tape will mean STOP, DANGER, or DO NOT ENTER.
Instruct personnel working inside of the taped area on the requirements of the
JHA for the taped area. The employee in charge of the area must provide a
proper briefing and approval for other personnel requiring entry. Personnel
must not cross over or under a red barrier tape without proper authorization.
9.5.3 Yellow Plastic Tape. You may use yellow plastic tape marked
“CAUTION” to identify hazardous locations where caution is needed. Using
yellow plastic tape does not prevent employees from entering an area, but
does warn them of a hazardous condition.
October 2009 9–5
Section 10
Fire Prevention and Protection
This section sets forth the requirements for fire prevention and protection.
In addition to the fire prevention and protection requirements of this section, other
sections of these standards address requirements relating to specific hazards and
operations, welding and cutting, etc. Where these standards do not provide more
specific instructions, they adopt, by reference, the current edition of the National
Fire Codes, published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
10.1 Fire Prevention Requirements
10.1.1 Fire Prevention Plans. Write a fire prevention plan for each facility.
Include a list of major workplace fire hazards; potential ignition sources; the
type of fire suppression equipment of systems appropriate to control a fire;
assignments of responsibilities for maintaining the equipment and Systems;
personnel responsible for controlling the fuel source hazards; and
housekeeping procedures, including the removal of waste materials. Inform
employees of the fire hazards of the materials and processes to which they are
exposed. Brief new employees on the parts of the plan that are essential for
their protection and emergency evacuations. Keep the written plan in the
workplace and make it available for employee review.
Provide additional training for personnel assigned tasks that require them to
remain in a facility during a fire emergency. The work area where these
individuals remain during a fire emergency must be evaluated as an area of
refuge in accordance with NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.
10.1.2 Housekeeping. Maintain good housekeeping. Promptly remove and
dispose of accumulations of combustible scrap and debris in all areas of the
job site. Use self-closing metal containers to collect waste Saturated with
flammable or combustible liquids. At all facilities, properly collect, store, and
remove combustible and flammable waste products at the end of each
workday or at the end of each work shift. Use only noncombustible or UL
labeled, nonmetallic containers to dispose of waste and rubbish. Keep
combustible items separate from each other and from noncombustible items.
Label the contents of containers.
10.1.3 Grounds Maintenance. Don’t allow rubbish and waste to
accumulate. Prevent the growth of tall dry grass, brush, and weeds adjacent to
facilities with a maximum 3-foot fire break. Place combustible waste
materials outdoors to await subsequent disposal, at least 20 feet from a
Structure.
10.1.4 Smoking. Prohibit smoking and other sources of ignition in
storage areas for flammable or explosive materials or near operations
October 2009 10–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
that constitute a fire hazard. Conspicuously post “NO SMOKING OR
OPEN FLAMES” in all Such areas.
10.1.5 Open Flame Devices. Do not leave fires and open flame devices,
such as incinerators, torches, and controlled fires, unattended unless they have
automatic temperature control and cutoff devices.
10.1.6 Cleaning and Degreasing. Do not use gasoline or liquids with a
flashpoint below 100 degrees Fahrenheit for cleaning and degreasing. Use
only approved cleaners specifically for the type of equipment or material.
10.1.7 Fireproofing. Maintain adequate clearance between heating facilities
and combustible materials.
10.1.8 Explosive Gases and Vapors. Do not use open flames or heating
elements where flammable gases or vapors may be present.
10.1.9 Buildings and Structures. Ensure non-fire-resistive buildings or
structures are at least 25 feet apart. However, consider a group of non-fire
resistive buildings with a total ground floor area of no more than 2,000 square
feet as one building for this purpose, provided that each building in the group
is at least 10 feet away, on each side, from other buildings.
10.1.10 Building Exits. Ensure that exits from all buildings, shops, and other
facilities in which personnel work, or which are open to the public, are
sufficiently well marked and lighted. Evaluate the adequacy of the means of
exit, based on NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
10.1.11 Inspections. When justified by the size or nature of the operation,
security services personnel or other assigned personnel must frequently
inspect buildings, storage areas, employee quarters, and work areas.
10.2 Requirements for Heating Devices
10.2.1 General. The following requirements must be met prior to the use of
heating devices:
a. Approval. Use only heating devices accepted by the area/office
manager. Include the following items in acceptance requests:
1. The proposed placement, including distance from combustibles.
2. The service, maintenance, and surveillance schedules.
3. The proposed fuel storage and refueling system.
4. The method for prompt detection of gaseous contamination or
Oxygen deficiency.
10–2 October 2009
Section 10–Fire Prevention
and Protection
b. Data Plates. Permanently affix a data plate to each heater that
provides the following information:
Required clearances.
Ventilation requirements.
Fuel type and input pressure.
Lighting and extinguishing instructions.
5. Electrical power supply characteristics.
:
c. Wood Floors. Mark heaters that are not suitable for use on wood
floors and do not place them on combustible materials. When using such
heaters, rest them on appropriate noncombustible material equivalent to at
least 1 inch of concrete. The noncombustible material must extend at least
2 feet beyond the heater in all directions.
d. Combustible Covering. Do not use heaters near covers such as
tarpaulins, canvas, or similar combustible materials. Locate heaters at
least 10 feet away from these and similar materials. Securely fasten or tie
down the coverings.
e. Stability. Place heaters on level surfaces to prevent tipping.
f. Installation. Install, vent, operate, and maintain heaters in accordance
with the manufacturers’ instructions.
g. Spark arresters. Install spark arresters on smokestacks that could
otherwise permit sparks to escape.
h. Carbon monoxide monitors. Facilities where heating devices use
combustible fuel require carbon monoxide (CO) monitors.
i. Grounding. Ground the non-current carrying metal parts of cord and
plug connected heaters.
10.2.2 Portable Space Heaters. Use only electric-powered portable space
heaters equipped with tipover safety devices and thermostatic controls in
office spaces. Maintain 3 feet of clearance from combustible materials.
10.2.3 Liquid-Fueled Heaters. The following requirements govern the use
of liquid-fueled heaters:
a. General. Heaters may be either direct or indirect fired. Kerosene,
stove oil, fuel oil, and diesel oil are permissible fuels. The flashpoint of
the fuel must be at least 100 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Stability. Securely anchor liquid-fueled heaters or locate them to
prevent tipping.
c. Design. Equip liquid-fueled heaters with an automatic flame loss
device that will stop the flow of fuel when the flame is extinguished.
October 2009 10–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
d. Fueling. Train employees tasked with fueling to be thoroughly
familiar with the manufacturer’s heater operation and fueling instructions.
Before fueling, extinguish the heater and permit it to cool until cool to
touch. Store fuel in, and dispense fuel from, approved flammable liquid
containers.
e. Maintenance. Maintain heaters in good operating condition in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
10.2.4 Natural Gas Heaters. The following requirements apply to the use of
natural gas heaters:
a. General. Install, operate, and maintain natural gas heaters in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Stability. Securely anchor heaters or locate to prevent tipping.
c. Piping. Leak-test piping, tubing, or hose after installation, using a safe
detection means, such as soap suds. When using flexible gas supply lines,
they must not be more than 5 feet long. Supply lines and hose must have a
minimum working gauge pressure of 350 pounds per square inch, a
minimum burst gauge pressure of 1,750 pounds per square inch, and a pull
test of 400 pounds without leakage.
d. Fuel Cutoff. Equip heaters with an automatic flame loss device that
will shut off the gas supply if the flame or pilot light is extinguished.
10.2.5 Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) Heaters. The following
requirements apply to the use of LPG heaters:
a. General. Install, operate, and maintain LPG heaters in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not use, locate, or store LPG
containers and heating devices below grade or in confined spaces.
b. Protection. Protect heaters, when in use, from damage by location,
anchoring, or barricading.
c. Testing. Leak-test piping, tubing, hoses, and flexible hose connections
following installation, using a means such as soap suds. Use only flexible
gas supply lines that are less than 5 feet long. Supply lines and hose must
have a minimum working gauge pressure of 350 pounds per square inch, a
minimum burst gauge pressure of 1,750 pounds per square inch, and a pull
test of 400 pounds without leakage.
d. Hoses. Use only a hose labeled “LP-gas” or “LPG.” Hoses must have
a minimum working gauge pressure of 350 pounds per square inch and a
minimum burst gauge pressure of 1,750 pounds per square inch. Keep the
hose as short as practical, although long enough to comply with specified
safe spacing requirements without kinking or straining the hose or causing
it to be close enough to a burner to be damaged by heat.
10–4
October 2009
Section 10—Fire Prevention
and Protection
e. Hose Connections. The design capability of hose assemblies, after
the application of connections, must withstand a pressure of at least
700 pounds per square inch. Do not leak-test such assemblies at pressures
higher than the working pressure (350 pounds per square inch minimum)
of the hose.
f. Regulator. Equip heaters with an approved regulator between the
cylinder and the supply line.
g. Check Valve. Provide fuel cylinder connectors with an excess flow
check to minimize the flow of gas in case of fuel line ruptures.
h. Fuel Cutoff. Equip heaters with an automatic flame loss device that
will shut off the gas supply if the flame or pilot light is extinguished.
i. Fuel Supply in Buildings. Allow gas cylinders or containers in
buildings or structures only in accordance with the following provisions:
1. Keep the maximum water capacity of individual cylinders to
245 pounds (nominal 100 pounds LPG capacity) or less.
2. For temporary heating, such as curing concrete, drying materials, or
similar uses, keep heaters (other than integral heater-container units) at
least 6 feet away from any LPG container. However, you may use
heaters specifically designed for attachment to the LPG container or to
a supporting structure with connecting hose less than 6 feet long,
provided the heater does not directly radiate heat onto the container.
Do not direct blower-type or radiant heaters toward any LPG container
that is within 20 feet of the heater.
3. Keep LPG supply containers at least 20 feet apart when two or
more heaters are in an unpartitioned area on the same floor.
4. LPG containers manifolded together supplying one or more heaters
in an unpartitioned area on the same floor must not exceed 300-pound
nominal LPG capacity. Keep such manifolds at least 20 feet apart.
5. Containers may be manifolded together on floors where heaters are
not connected for use, for connection to one or more heaters located on
another floor, provided that: (a) the total nominal capacity of
containers connected to any one manifold does not exceed
1,000 pounds LPG and (b) where more than one manifold having a
nominal capacity exceeding 300 pounds LPG is located in the same
unpartitioned area, the manifolds must be at least 50 feet apart.
j. Storage of Containers. Store LPG containers not in use outside, in
accordance with the minimum distances identified in the section on
material handling, storage, and disposal.
October 2009 10-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
10.2.6 Restricted Use. The following restrictions apply to the use of heating
devices:
a. Open Flame-Type Heaters. Do not use open flame-type heating
devices with exposed fuel below the flame.
b. Lubrication or Service Areas. You may install an approved-type
heater in lubrication or service areas where employees do not dispense or
transfer flammable liquids, only if the bottom of the heater is at least 18
inches above the floor and protected from damage. If employees dispense
flammable liquids in such areas, the heater must be of a type approved for
garages and installed at least 8 feet above the floor.
10.3 Application of Fire Protection Requirements
10.3.1 Fire Fighting Response. Each facility must prepare an effective,
detailed fire protection plan, including provisions for the fire protection and
suppression equipment that are set forth in this section. The area/office
manager will review and approve the plan.
When community fire department services are not available, or are
insufficient, you may provide a trained firefighting brigade meeting NFPA
criteria, at the discretion of the area/office manager. Fire brigades must be
organized, trained, equipped, and protected as required by 29 CFR 1910.156.
Provide and install mobile and fixed firefighting equipment in accordance
with NFPA standards. The area/office manager may elect to evacuate all
persons and not fight any fire.
Meet the following requirements in arranging for offsite assistance:
a. Written Agreement. Secure a written agreement for fire response
covering the nature and type of assistance available, if possible.
Otherwise, provide a letter to the area/office manager, stating the nature of
the assistance, together with the details covering the equipment and
personnel to be made available. The agreement must be signed and dated,
and reviewed at least annually.
b. Standpipe and Hydrant Connections. When you receive offsite
assistance, make sure that standpipe and hydrant connections are
compatible with the equipment available from the fire department
providing the assistance.
c. Reporting. Post emergency telephone numbers and reporting
instructions at the job site.
10.3.2. Maintenance. Inspect and maintain fire protection systems, alarms,
and fire extinguishers in accordance with NFPA standards. All equipment
must be inspected periodically according to inspection table 10-1 and after
each use.
10–6 October 2009
Section 10—Fire Prevention
and Protection
10.3.3 Fire Extinguishers. Select fire extinguishers for a given situation
according to the character of the fire(s) anticipated, the construction and
occupancy of the facility, the vehicle or hazard to be protected, ambient-
temperature conditions, and other factors identified in NFPA Standard 10.
Select fire extinguishers for the class(es) of hazards to be protected in
accordance with the following:
a. Class A hazards—ordinary combustibles. Use water and
multipurpose dry chemical type fire extinguishers.
b. Class B hazards—flammable liquids. Use aqueous film forming
foam (FFF), film forming fluoroprotein foam (FFFP), carbon dioxide,
and dry chemical type extinguishers.
c. Class C hazards—energized electrical equipment. Use carbon
dioxide and dry chemical type fire extinguishers. Note: carbon
dioxide fire extinguishers equipped with metal horns are not safe for
use on fires in energized electrical equipment and, therefore, are not
classified for use on Class C hazards.
d. Class D hazards—combustible metals. Use fire extinguishers that
are approved for use on the specific combustible metal hazard.
10.3.4. Water Supply. Install a temporary or permanent water supply with
sufficient flow volume and duration to supply the standpipes, hose stations,
and sprinkler systems, before or during the construction of the facility to be
protected. In permanent structures under contract in which standpipes are
installed, connect the standpipe to the water supply, install the standpipe
concurrently with construction of the structure, and maintain the standpipe in
operable condition for fire protection use. Provide the standpipes with fire
department connections on the outside of the structure, conspicuously marked,
and located in an accessible location at street or road level.
10.3.5 Burning Areas. Do not burn waste materials, except in an approved
and permitted incinerator.
October 2009 - 10-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table 10-1.-Inspection schedule for fire protection equipment
Item
Inspection
interval
Procedure
1. All portable
and Wheeled
extinguishers
Monthly
Annually
Ensure that all extinguishers are in the proper
locations, have clear access, and are plainly visible.
Visually inspect extinguishers for damage, leakage,
and to determine if they are fully charged and
operable. If necessary, recharge extinguisher and
COrrect deficiencies.
Reference NFC Standard 10, “Standard for Portable
Fire Extinguishers.” Ensure annual maintenance of
extinguishers according to specific type.
2. Main
generator
CO2 system
Weekly
Monthly
Semi-
annually
Annually
Check nozzles for physical damage. Ensure that self-
closing doors or automatically releasing doors are in
place. For low-pressure CO2 systems, check the
liquid level in each low pressure gauge and refill if
loss is greater than 10 percent.
Check electrical control circuits and indicating lights.
Check for signs of leakage at cylinders. Check for
signs of physical damage to system components.
Weigh all cylinders and refill if necessary. Operate
control heads. Test and check system in accordance
With the manufacturer's recommendations.
Conduct an actuating test of the system. Test all
system components without discharging CO2.
3. Sprinkler
systems
Weekly
Monthly
Quarterly
Semi-
annually
Annually
Inspect sealed control valves. Check that water
supply valves are open. Inspect condition of Sprinkler
heads. Maintain an 18-inch clear space. For dry pipe
systems, inspect air and water pressure gauges, and
record readings.
Inspect fire department connections. Inspect control
valves. Ensure that water supply valves are open.
Determine dry pipe priming water level. Flow- test
main drains. Test water flow alarms in Wet pipe
systems. Test low-air pressure alarms and water flow
alarms in dry pipe systems. Exercise post indicator
and Valves.
Close and drain Cold Weather valves in the fall, before
freezing weather, and again in the spring, after
freezing weather has passed.
Test the freezing point of antifreeze solutions. Trip-
test the dry pipe valve on dry pipe systems. Lubricate
all Valve stems. Clean Strainers, if installed. Drain all
low pint drains on dry pipe systems.
10-8
October 2009
Section 10–Fire Prevention
and Protection
Table 10-1.-Inspection schedule for fire protection equipment (continued)

Inspection
Item interval Procedure
3. Sprinkler After After the first 50 years that a sprinkler system has
systems 50 years been in place, remove a representative sample of
(continued) heads and send to a lab for testing.
4. Fire pumps | Monthly Check the pressure of all gauges. Check for
automatic indication of controller lights. Ensure that
all valves are open. Conduct operational test, check
packing gland tightness, suction, and discharge
pressure gauges.
Annually Test pump performance. Test waterflow and alarm
switches. Check valve position. Verify pump speed
at each flow. Record suction and discharge pressure
at each flow.
5. Fire doors Monthly Inspect and manually operate doors.
and dampers
Quarterly Test operation of automatic fire doors.
Annually Lubricate rollers, clean-out channels, and moving
parts. Check operation of dampers and moving parts.
6. Water Weekly Check air pressure in pressure tanks. Check water
Supply level in storage and pressure tanks. Check control
systems valves (usually in Open position).
Annually Check accessibility and condition of fire department
connections. Check condition of storage tanks for
scale or rust, check storage tank access; check
condition of paint or fabric. Conduct a flow test.
7. Fire hose Monthly Inspect nozzles, hoses, and connections. Replace
Stations defective hose and discard Old hose.
Semi- Check dry barrel hydrants for leaks and cracks; check
annually the operating nut for wear and the nozzle threads for
damage.
Annually Test flow and hydrant pressure. Wet barrel hydrants
are checked for leaks and Cracks, Wear On the
operating nut and nozzle threads. Thoroughly inspect
and rerack hoses. Use graphite to lubricate swing-out
hose racks Or hose reels.
Every 5 Hydrostatically test dry standpipes.
years
October 2009
10–9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table 10-1.-Inspection schedule for fire protection equipment (continued)

Inspection
Item interval Procedure
8. Fire alarm Monthly Ensure that all equipment is operable. Illuminate
systems lamps and LEDs on fire alarm annunciator panels.
Conduct operational test of engine generator (if
connected to system). Check water level of
rechargeable batteries. Test initiating and signaling
device Circuits.
Quarterly Test two-way communications.
Semi- Check fuse ratings; check voltage of each
annual rechargeable battery cell. Test all remote
annunciators. Test Smoke detectors.
Annually Test supervisory device circuits. Test primary and
secondary power supply. Test lamps and LEDs.
9. Transformer | Weekly Check pilot lights indicating that system is operable
fog system and that all control valves are open. Check that
nozzles have not been blocked or repositioned.
Annually Test the Control Valve and automatic detection
equipment (a full operational test with water flowing is
not necessary). Inspect all piping for corrosion and
ensure proper drainage.
Every 5 A full flow test of the system is required at least every
years 5 years. This should be conducted when the
transformer bank is Out Of Service.
10-10 October 2009
Section 11
Standards for Material Handling, Storage,
and Disposal
This section sets forth the requirements for handling, storage, and disposal of
material. It specifically addresses the requirements for storing material in an open
yard; stacking bagged material; storing material in bulk; storing lumber; Storing
bricks and masonry blocks; handling and storing cement and lime; handling and
storing reinforcing sheet and structural steel; handling and storing pipe, conduit,
and cylindrical material; storing sand, gravel, and crushed stone; handling and
storing flammable and combustible liquids; handling asphalt and tar products;
handling liquified petroleum gas; and housekeeping.
11.1 General Requirements for Storage of Materials
Store materials in a planned and orderly manner that does not endanger employee
safety. Ensure stacks, tiers, and piles are stable and stacked to aid safe handling
and loading. Store hazardous materials in accordance with the individual
requirements.
Store all materials on pallets to discourage rodent infestation. Immediately clean
up spills and leaks that create such rodent habitat.
Use slings to hoist bagged material, lumber, bricks, masonry blocks, and similar
loosely stacked materials only if the slings are fully secured against falling by
straps, sideboards, nets, or other suitable devices.
11.2 Storing Materials in an Open Yard
Storing materials in an open yard requires attention to combustible materials,
access, powerlines, and fire protection.
11.2.1 Combustible Materials. Stack combustible materials securely.
Stacks or piles must be no more than 16 feet high. Store combustible material
at least 10 feet away from a building or structure.
11.2.2 Access. Driveways between and around combustible storage piles
must be at least 15 feet wide. Keep them free from accumulations of material
or rubbish. Use a map grid system of 50 by 150 feet when planning
driveways in open-yard combustible material storage areas.
11.2.3 Powerlines. Do not store materials under power lines or where
materials may block egress or emergency equipment.
11.2.4 Fire Protection. Provide portable fire extinguishing equipment rated
2-A:40-B:Cat accessible marked locations in the yard so that the nearest
extinguisher is no more than 50 feet away for a Class B hazard or 75 feet
away for a Class A hazard.
October 2009 11-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
11.3 Requirements for Storing Materials Indoors
Storing materials indoors requires attention to access, fire prevention and
protection, floor loading, and overhead hazards. Buildings under construction
require special precautions.
11.3.1. Access. Place or store materials so they do not interfere with access
ways, doorways, electrical panels, fire extinguishers, or hoistways. Do not
obstruct access ways or exits with accumulations of scrap or materials. Aisles
must be wide enough to accommodate forklifts or firefighting equipment.
11.3.2 Fire Prevention. When storing, handling, and piling materials,
consider the fire characteristics. Store noncompatible materials that may
create a fire hazard at least 25 feet apart or separate them with a barrier having
at least a 1-hour fire rating. Pile material to minimize internal fire spread and
to provide convenient access for firefighting.
11.3.3 Fire Doors. Maintain a 24-inch clearance around the travel path of
fire doors.
11.3.4 Sprinklers. Maintain at least an 18-inch clearance between stored
materials and sprinkler heads.
11.3.5 Heating Appliances. Maintain at least a 3-foot clearance between
stored materials and unit heaters, radiant space heaters, duct furnaces, and
flues or the clearances shown on the approval agency label.
11.3.6 Fire Protection. Emergency fire equipment must be readily
accessible and in good working order.
11.3.7 Floor Loading. Conspicuously post load limits in all storage areas,
except for floors or slabs on grade.
11.3.8 Buildings Under Construction. Store materials inside buildings
under construction at least 6 feet away from any hoistway or inside floor
openings, and 10 feet away from an exterior wall that does not extend above
the top of the material stored.
11.4 Requirements for Stacking Bagged Material
Stack bagged materials by stepping back the layers and cross-keying the bags at
least every 10 bags high, except when restrained by walls or partitions of adequate
strength.
11.5 Requirements for Storing Material in Bulk
Ensure entry to bulk storage locations, such as silos, hoppers, tanks, or bins
(which are also classified as confined spaces) complies with OSHA requirements
and local operating procedures.
1 1-2 October 2009
Section 11—Standards for Material
Handling, Storage, and Disposal
11.6 Requirements for Lumber Storage
Stack lumber on level and solidly supported sills so that the stacks are stable. Do
not pile lumber more than 16 feet high.
11.7 Requirements for Storing Bricks and Masonry Blocks
Stack bricks and masonry blocks on level and solid surfaces.
11.7.1 Bricks. Stack bricks no more than 7 feet high. Step back a loose
brick stack at least 2 inches for every foot of height above 4 feet. Stack
packaged brick no more than three units high.
11.7.2 Masonry Blocks. Step back masonry blocks one-half block per tier
above the 6-foot level.
11.8 Requirements for Handling and Storing Cement and Lime
Handling or storing cement or lime requires a job hazard analysis (JHA). Lime
requires careful storage and handling procedures.
11.8.1 Cement and Lime. Employees must wear appropriate personal
protective equipment, as specified in the “Personal Protective Equipment”
section and as identified in the JHA. Provide washing facilities, hand cream,
chemical barrier cream, or similar preparations for protection from dermatitis.
11.8.2 Lime. Store unslaked lime in a dry area and, because it presents a fire
hazard, separate it from other materials.
11.9 Requirements for Handling and Storing Reinforcing, Sheet, and
Structural Steel
Stack Steel to prevent sliding, rolling, spreading, or falling.
Use lagging (sleeve) when steel is handled by a crane or forklift to aid safe
rigging.
11.10 Requirements for Handling and Storing Pipe, Conduit, and
Cylindrical Material
Make sure cylindrical materials are stable when storing or handling.
11.10.1 Stacking. Place pipe, conduit bar stock, and other cylindrical
materials in racks or stack and block them on a firm, level surface to prevent
spreading, rolling, or falling. Use either a pyramided or battened stack. Step
back battened stacks at least one unit per tier and securely chock them on both
sides of the stack.
October 2009 - 11–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
11.10.2 Removal. Remove round stock (e.g., wood poles, pipe, and conduit)
from a stack from the ends of the stock.
11.10.3 Unloading. Unload carriers so that employees are not exposed to the
unsecured load.
11.10.4 Taglines. Use taglines when working with round stock.
11.11 Requirements for Storing Sand, Gravel, and Crushed Stone
Locate stockpiles to provide safe access for withdrawing material. Material or
vertical faces must not overhang.
Store material against walls or partitions only in an amount that will not endanger
the stability of the wall or partition.
11.12 Requirements for Handling Flammable and Combustible
Liquids
Unless defined otherwise, terms used in this subsection are the same as those in
the flammable and combustible liquids code, NFPA 30, or 29 CFR 1910.106.
11.12.1 Classification of Flammable and Combustible Liquids.
Flammable and combustible liquids are classified as follows:
a. Flammable Liquids (Class I Liquids):
1. Class I–Flashpoint below 100 °F (38 °C)
2. Class IA—Flashpoint below 73 °F (23 °C) and boiling point below
100 °F (38 °C)
3. Class IB–Flashpoint below 73 °F (23 °C) and boiling point at or
above 100 °F (38 °C)
4. Class IC–Flashpoint at or above 73 °F (23 °C) but below 100 °F
(38 °C)
b. Combustible Liquids (Class II and III Liquids):
1. Class II—Flashpoint at or above 100 °F (38 °C) and below 140 °F
(60 °C)
2. Class III—Flashpoint at or above 140 °F (60 °C)
11.12.2 Class IA Flammable Liquids
a. Restricted Use. Because of the extreme explosion hazard of Class IA
liquids, purchase them only after you have reviewed the MSDS and the
storage, dispensing, and use procedures have been approved. Submittals
for approval must provide the name and description of the liquid, its
11–4 October 2009
Section 11—Standards for Material
Handling, Storage, and Disposal
characteristics, a detailed description of its intended use, the MSDS, and
the safety and health precautions. This requirement does not apply to
small quantities of aerosol starter fluid used for engines.
b. Substitute Product. Wherever practical, use a less hazardous product.
c. Controlled Use. A competent person must supervise storage,
dispensing, and use of Class IA liquids, including design of the storage
and dispensing system.
11.12.3 Toxicity of Flammable and Combustible Liquids. Most
flammable and combustible liquids are highly toxic. Use them only after
determining their toxic characteristics. In handling toxic liquids, follow the
appropriate safety and health requirements in the “Occupational Health”
section.
11.12.4 Closed Tanks and Containers
a. Approved Types. Use only the following approved and labeled closed
tanks and containers to store, handle, and dispense flammable and
combustible liquids.
1. Original Container. Store and use flammable and combustible
liquids in the original Department of Transportation (DOT) shipping
containers, as shown in table 11-1. However, store only up to 1-day’s
use in the work area, up to a maximum of 25 gallons of a Class 1A
liquid or a maximum of 120 gallons of any other class of liquid. When
dispensing and using smaller quantities of flammable and combustible
liquids, dispense them into properly labeled, approved safety
containers. Exception: You may store and handle highly viscous
(extremely hard to pour) liquids in any size original container. Liquids
that are transferred from labeled containers to portable containers for
immediate use are exempt from labeling.
2. Safety Can. An approved container holding no more than 5
gallons with a spring-closing lid, spout cover, and designed to safely
relieve internal pressure when subjected to fire or heat exposure.
3. Drum/Barrel. An approved container holding more than 5 gallons
but no more than 60 gallons.
4. Portable Tanks. An approved, closed storage vessel holding more
than 60 but no more than 660 gallons and not intended to be a fixed
installation.
5. Tanks. Any vessel holding more than 60 gallons, intended for
fixed installation, is not used for processing.
October 2009 11–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards

Table 11-1.-Maximum allowable size of containers and portable tanks, combustible
Flammable liquids Liquids
Container type Class IA Class IB Class IB Class || Class Ill
Glass 1 pint 1 quart 1 gallon 1 gallon 5 gallons
Metal (other than 1 gallon 5 gallons 5 gallons 5 gallons 5 gallons
approved DOT drums)
or approved plastic
Safety cans 2 gallon 5 gallons 5 gallons 5 gallons 5 gallons
Metal drums (DOT 60 gallons |60 gallons |60 gallons |60 gallons |60 gallons
specifications)
Approved portable 660 gallons ||660 gallons ||660 gallons ||660 gallons ||660 gallons
tanks
Polyethylene DOT 1 gallon 5 gallons 5 gallons |60 gallons |60 gallons
specification 34,0r as
authorized by DOT
exemption
11.12.5 Approved Storage Cabinets
a. General Design and Construction. The design, construction, and
approval of storage cabinets must comply with NFPA 30.
11.12.6 Requirements for Storing Flammable or Combustible Liquids
a. Indoor Storage. Do not store flammable and combustible liquids
indoors, except as follows:
1. Store no more than 25 gallons in a room or single fire area.
2. Store no more than 60 gallons of Class I or II liquids, or more than
120 gallons of Class III liquids, in an approved cabinet. Locate no
more than three such cabinets in a single fire area.
3. You may store larger quantities in separated indoor storage areas
when such storage meets the requirements of NFPA 30, Section 4-4,
“Design, Construction, and Operation of Inside Storage Areas.”
4. Place at least one 2-A:40–B:C fire extinguisher 10 feet to 30 feet
away from the stored material or cabinet.
5. Place at least one 2-A:40-B:C fire extinguisher outside of, but not
more than 10 feet from, the door opening into an inside liquid storage
a ſeal.
b. Outdoor Storage. Do not store flammable and combustible liquids
outdoors, except as follows:
October 2009
Section 11—Standards for Material
Handling, Storage, and Disposal
1. Above ground in approved containers with no more than 60-gallon
capacity, subject to the following restrictions:
(a) The total capacity of any one group of containers stored
together must not exceed 1,100 gallons. Each group of containers
must be at least 5 feet apart, and each group must be at least 20 feet
away from any building or other combustibles.
(b) Each group of containers must be adjacent to an access way at
least 12 feet wide to facilitate the use of firefighting equipment.
2. Above ground in approved portable tanks with no more than
660-gallon capacity, providing that you:
(a) Keep a 5-foot clear area around groups of two or more tanks with
a combined capacity of more than 2,200 gallons.
(b) Keep portable tanks at least 20 feet away from any building or
other combustibles.
(c) Equip portable storage tanks with emergency venting and other
devices, as required in NFPA 30.
(d) Locate each tank adjacent to an access way at least 12 feet wide to
facilitate use of firefighting equipment.
3. Above ground in approved tanks installed in accordance with
NFPA 30, Section 2–3, “Installation of Outside Above Ground Tanks.”
4. Dike storage areas at least 12 inches high or grade and slope them, and
Seal them with a 50-mil plastic compatible sheeting or equivalent liner to
contain leaks and spills equal to the capacity of all tanks or containers in
each area. Keep the area free from vegetation or combustible material
within 10 feet of the storage area perimeter.
5. Place at least one portable fire extinguisher unit rated not less than
2-A:40-B:C 25 feet to 75 feet away from each portable tank or group of
tanks or containers.
11.12.7 Handling and Dispensing Flammable or Combustible Liquids
a. Dispensing Area. Separate areas where you transfer more than 5
gallons of flammable or combustible liquids at a time from other
operations by at least 25 feet or by a partition with a minimum 1-hour fire
rating. Use drainage or an equally effective method to contain spills.
b. Ventilation. Provide adequate natural or mechanical ventilation to
maintain the concentrations of flammable vapor below 10 percent of the
lower explosive limit (LEL).
October 2009 11-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
c. Grounding. Transferring Class I flammable liquids from one
container to another requires bonding of the containers and the transfer
system. Electrically ground and bond all dispensing systems.
d. Dispensing. Withdraw or transfer flammable and combustible liquids
into vessels, containers, or tanks only (1) through a closed piping system,
(2) from safety cans, (3) by means of a device drawing through the top, or
(4) from containers or tanks by gravity or pump through a listed self-
closing valve. Do not transfer by injecting pressurized air into a tank or
container. Use approved dispensing devises and nozzles. The dispensing
units must be protected against collision damage.
e. Lighting and Electrical Equipment. Use only electrical lighting to
illuminate areas where Class I flammable liquids are handled or dispensed
or where flammable vapor may be present. Wiring and all electrical
equipment must meet the requirements of NFPA designation: Class I,
Division 2, of the National Electrical Code.
f. Covered Containers. Keep Class I and II liquids in covered containers
when not in use.
g. Flame and Ignition. Do not permit open flame, smoking, or other
sources of ignition within at least 50 feet of areas where Class I flammable
liquids are dispensed or used. Post approved “No Smoking” signs in such
aſ CaS.
h. Leakage or Spillage. Clean up leaking or spilled flammable or
combustible liquids promptly and dispose of them safely.
i. Refuse Containers. Provide self-closing metal refuse containers in all
areas where employees use or dispense flammable or combustible liquids.
11.12.8 Requirements for Refueling
a. Equipment. Ensure that the design and installation of tanks and
equipment used to refuel vehicles or equipment (fueled with flammable or
combustible liquids) comply with the applicable provisions of the NFPA
standards or nationally recognized testing laboratories or have the
approval of the Government agency having jurisdiction.
b. Tank Truck. Ensure that tank trucks comply with the requirements
published in NFPA 385, “Standard for Flammable and Combustible
Liquid Tank Vehicles.”
c. Dispensing Stations. Mount dispensing devices, except those attached
to containers, on a concrete platform elevated at least 5 inches above
grade. Use guardrails or posts to protect them from collision with a motor
vehicle.
October 2009
Section 11—Standards for Material
Handling, Storage, and Disposal
d. Dispensing Hose. To dispense flammable and combustible liquids,
use an approved-type hose with an automatic self-closing valve or nozzle
without a latch-open device. Ensure that a hanger or hose retracting
system is in place to protect the hose from traffic abuse.
e. Electrical Equipment. Ensure that electrical wiring, pumps, and
equipment meet the appropriate requirements of NFPA designation, Class
I of the National Electrical Code. Provide clearly marked and accessible
switches at a location remote from dispensing devices to shut off all power
to devices in an emergency.
f. Refueling Equipment. During refueling, shut down vehicles or
equipment that use gasoline, liquified petroleum gas (LPG), or other
flammable or combustible liquid fuels. An exception is diesel equipment
when fueled in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Use guardrails or posts to protect refueling tanks or dispensing islands
from vehicular damage.
g. Smoking. Post a “No Smoking Within 50 Feet” sign on all mobile
refueling equipment and in established refueling areas.
h. Emergency Shut-Off Switch. Ensure that an emergency shut-off
switch is within 50 shall be located within 50 feet of the fuel dispensing
equipment. Post a conspicuous sign to identify the switch location.
i. Fire Protection. Provide each refueling area with one or more listed
fire extinguishers with a minimum classification of 40B:C. Locate a fire
extinguisher within 100 feet of each pump, dispenser, underground fill
pipe opening, and lubrication or service room.
11.13 Requirements for Handling Asphalt and Tar Products
Employees who handle or work with these materials must complete a JHA,
including exposure determinations. Make available and ensure employees follow
the MSDS for storing, handling, and applying these materials.
11.13.1 Protective Clothing and Equipment. Give full consideration to
protective clothing, respiratory protection, and skin protection, as specified in
the “Personal Protective Equipment” section, to protect employees handling or
applying these materials.
11.13.2 Confined Spaces. In enclosed or confined areas where hot tar,
asphalt, enamel, or similar materials are heated or applied, the operation must
conform fully with the “Confined Spaces” section.
11.13.3 Heating Kettles. Do not leave asphalt or tar kettles unattended,
when in use. Place them on a firm, level base and protect them from
overturning. Kettles must have an effective lid or hood. They must have an
operable temperature indicator and limiting device ensuring the asphalt or tar
October 2009 1 1-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
remains at no less than 50 EF below the flashpoint. Do not use kettles in
confined or unventilated spaces, underground, in conduits, or in or on
enclosed buildings or structures.
11.13.4 Fire Protection. Provide a fire extinguisher, rated not less than
2-A:40-B:C, where heating devices or heating kettles are in use.
11.13.5 Handling. Provide adequate unobstructed runways or access ways
for employees handling hot materials. Employees must not carry hot
materials up or down ladders. Instead, provide adequate hoisting devices.
11.13.6 Thinners. Do not use gasoline or similar volatile liquids as thinners.
11.13.7 Hand Spraying. The nozzle person applying hot tar asphalt must not
work under the hoses supplying the material to the spray nozzle. Use flexible
metallic hoses fitted with insulated handles in hand spraying operations.
11.13.8 Housekeeping. Keep distributors, retorts, hoses, and related
equipment reasonably free of asphalt and tar accumulations.
11.14 Requirements for Handling Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG)
Store, handle, install, and use LPG and systems in accordance with NFPA 58,
29 CFR 1910.1.10(f), and 29 CFR 1926.153. Cylinders must meet DOT
specifications published in 49 CFR, Part 178, “Shipping Container
Specifications.”
11.14.1 Hazardous Locations. Do not use LPG containers and equipment in
unventilated spaces, below grade in pits or trenches, below deck, or in
confined areas.
11.14.2 Tubing. Use only tubing or piping approved for use in LPG systems.
Do not use aluminum or polyvinyl piping or tubing.
11.14.3 Hose. Use only hoses labeled “LP-gas or LPG.” Hose must have a
minimum working pressure of 250 pounds per square inch.
11.14.4 Valves and Accessories. Valves, fittings, and accessories connected
directly to the container, including primary shutoff valves, must have a
minimum working gauge pressure of 250 pounds per square inch and be
designed for LPG service.
11.14.5 Shutoff Valves. Connections to containers, except safety relief
connections, liquid level gauging devices, and plugged openings, must have a
shutoff valve located as close to the container as possible. Shutoff valves
must not be located between the safety relief device and the container, except
when the location of the shutoff valve allows the fully required capacity flow
through the safety relief device.
11-10 October 2009
Section 11—Standards for Material
Handling, Storage, and Disposal
11.14.6 Safety Relief Valves. Equip each container with one or more
approved safety relief valves. These valves must allow free venting to the
Outer air. The discharge must be 5 feet away from any building opening.
Place container safety relief devices and regulator relief vents at least 5 feet
from air openings into sealed combustion system appliances or mechanical
ventilation air intakes.
11.14.7 Dispensing
a. Portable Containers. Fill portable containers from storage containers
outside and at least 50 feet away from the nearest building.
b. Motor Vehicles. Fill fuel containers on motor vehicles from bulk
storage containers at least 10 feet away from a masonry-walled building
and at least 25 feet away from any other building or structure.
c. Refueling. Shut down equipment using LPG during refueling.
11.14.8 Storage of Cylinders and Containers. Store LPG containers and
cylinders not in use outside of buildings or structures, at not less than the
following distances away from the nearest building or combustible material
Storage.
Minimum distance
Quantity of LP-gas stored (a) and (b) (c) and (d) (e)
(pounds) (feet) (feet) (feet)
720 Or less O O 5
721 to 2,500 O 10 10
2,501 to 6,000 10 10 10
6,001 to 10,000 20 20 20
Over 10,000 25 25 25

(a) nearest building or storage area; (b) line of adjoining property;
(c) thoroughfares or sidewalks; (d) line of adjoining property used for public
gathering; (e) dispensing station.
11.14.9 Fire Protection. Provide storage locations with at least one
accessible portable fire extinguisher rated not less than 2-A:40-B:C, between
25 feet and 75 feet away from the container.
11.15 Requirements for Storing and Handling Paints, Varnishes, and
Thinners
Storing and handling paints, varnishes, or thinners requires special attention to
flammability characteristics.
11.15.1 Storage. Store and dispense paints, varnishes, lacquers, thinners, and
other volatile paints or coatings according to their flammability
October 2009 & 11–11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
characteristics. Tightly close containers when not in use; store no more than a
1-day supply in buildings under construction.
11.15.2 Ventilation. Provide sufficient ventilation to prevent hazardous
concentrations of flammable vapors from accumulating where employees
dispense or apply paints or coatings.
11.15.3 Spray Painting. Do not allow smoking, open flame, exposed
heating elements, or other sources of ignition where employees spray
flammable or combustible paints or coating. Spray painting booths and
equipment must be in accordance with NFPA 33, “Standard for Spray
Application Using Flammable and Combustible Materials.”
11.15.4 Personal Protective Equipment. Make exposure determinations for
employees who have been exposed to paints or coatings potentially hazardous
to their health to document exposure and, when appropriate, provide
appropriate protective equipment and hazard training.
11.15.5 Electrostatic Paint Spraying
a. Electrical. Locate transformers, power packs, control apparatus, and
other electrical portions of the equipment, with exception of the gun and
its connection to the power supply, outside the spraying area.
b. Grounding. Ground the handle of the spray gun with a conductive
device to ensure the gun and the operator are at the same ground potential.
11.16 Housekeeping
Keep work and storage areas clean and orderly and in a sanitary condition. Keep
stairways, access ways, and exits free from scrap, supplies, materials, or
equipment.
11.16.1 Waste Disposal. Collect, store, and remove combustible waste
products at the end of each workday or at the end of each work shift. Use
only noncombustible containers to dispose of waste and rubbish and equip
them with fitted or self-closing covers. Promptly remove and dispose of
spills of flammable or combustible liquids. Place scrap lumber in containers
and do not allow it to accumulate in work areas. Remove or bend over
protruding nails unless the scrap lumber is placed directly in containers for
removal.
11.16.2 Segregation of Materials and Waste. Consider storage segregation
precautions for all materials. Use MSDS to determine appropriate storage
segregation. Identify and label segregated material containers. Following are
some examples of materials that must be segregated:
a. Ordinary combustibles such as paper, wood, and natural fiber fabrics.
11-12 October 2009
Section 11—Standards for Material
Handling, Storage, and Disposal
b. Oily or flammable materials, such as saturated oily or solvent rags.
c. Corrosive and caustic materials, such as batteries.
d. Infectious materials that may cause infection, disease, or death.
e. Reactive materials that may self-decompose or self-ignite because of
heat, chemical reaction, friction, or impact.
f. Radioactive materials.
g. Toxic materials that may be fatal if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin.
11.16.3 Outdoor Housekeeping. Keep the areas adjacent to facilities free
from rubbish, waste, and tall, dry vegetation. Place combustible waste
materials stored outdoors to await subsequent disposal at least 20 feet away
from facilities.
11.16.4 Tools and Equipment. To prevent tripping or injury, keep floors
clear of tools and portable equipment. Adequately secure tools, materials, and
equipment where a tripping hazard exists.
11.16.5 Wind. Store loose or light materials on roofs or unenclosed height
only if they are safely tied down or secured.
11.16.6 Sacks and Bags. Remove empty bags that contained cement, lime,
or other dust-producing material from the work area at least daily.
11.16.7 Working Aloft. Provide containers to store or carry rivets, bolts,
drift pins, and similar items. Secure containers against accidental
displacement.
11.16.8 Excavated Materials. Keep roads and walkways clear of excavated
materials wherever possible. Where this is not possible, adequately post or
barricade these areas and provide other access.
11.16.9 Dropping Material. Drop or throw waste material and debris more
than 6 feet only if you:
a. Completely enclose the area into which the material is dropped with
barricades at least 6 feet back from the projected edge of the opening or
level above. Post signs warning of the hazard at each level.
b. Install safely designed chutes providing protection for persons below.
Fully enclose chutes for debris and scrap for their entire run except for
openings for inserting materials. Equip such openings with covers or
enclosures.
October 2009 11–13
Section 12
Electrical Safety Requirements
This section sets forth requirements for electrical safety. It specifically addresses
working in restricted areas; working near exposed energized overhead lines or
parts; operating equipment near radio and microwave transmission towers;
working on electrical equipment and systems; personal protective grounding:
temporary wiring; disconnect and overcurrent protection; ground-fault protection;
hazardous locations; wet locations; and battery charging.
12.1 General Electrical Safety Requirements
All electrical work practices must comply with applicable sections of the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA), National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code,
and State adopted electrical codes.
12.1.1 Approval Required. Use only electrical wire, conduit, apparatus, and
equipment for the specific application that is approved or listed by
Underwriters Laboratories (UL), or Factory Mutual Corporation (FMC).
Install and use listed, labeled, or certified equipment according to the
instructions included in the listing, labeling, or certification.
12.1.2 Qualified Persons. Only qualified personnel familiar with code
requirements, safety standards, and experienced in the type work may work
on electrical circuits and equipment. NFPA 70E and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.269
contain references for training requirements. See attachment at the end of this
Sect1On.
12.1.3 Safety Requirements Before Performing Electrical Work. The
employer will determine, by inquiry, direct observation, or instruments, the
location of any part of an energized electric power circuit, exposed or
concealed. If the work may cause any person, tool, or machine to penetrate
the boundaries set forth in table 12-1, de-energize the circuit(s) and ground
them, as appropriate. Additionally, all of the following must be required:
a. Underground Lines. Protect all underground lines with surface signs
and a longitudinal warning tape buried 12 inches to 18 inches above the
lines. Do not perform drilling, auguring, or material excavating operation
within 6 feet of underground lines unless the lines have been deemergized.
b. Job Briefing. The supervisor or designee must conduct a job briefing
with affected workers. The supervisor or designee must hold additional
job briefings if significant changes occur during the course of work. The
briefing must cover the following:
(1) Job Hazard Analysis (JHA). Identify all hazards associated with
the job in a written JHA and discuss them.
October 2009 12–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
(2) Nonelectrical Hazards. Identify, in a written JHA, hazards not
associated with the electrical work but expected to be encountered,
and discuss them.
(3) Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Provide and use the
appropriate PPE needed to accomplish the job safely. Use flash-
protection clothing in accordance with NFPA 70E if the job requires
operating, racking, circuit breakers with the doors open, or, working
within reaching distances of exposed energized parts. Employees
working on energized lines and equipment rated at 440 volts or greater
must use rubber gloves, hard hats, safety boots, and other approved
protective equipment or hot-line tools that meet ASTM standards.
12.1.4 Other Procedures. Perform procedures related to electrical work in
accordance with the following:
• FIST 1-1, Hazardous Energy Control Program
• FIST 5-1, Personal Protective Grounding, and
• Written Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) of each area office
12.2 Restricted Areas
12.2.1 General. Provide effective barriers or other means to ensure that
people do not use areas with electrical circuits or equipment as passageways
when energized lines or equipment are exposed. Effectively guard live parts
of wiring or equipment to protect persons or objects from harmful contact.
Use special tools insulated for the voltage when installing or removing fuses
with one or both terminals energized.
12.2.2 High-Voltage Equipment (over 600 volts nominal). Isolate exposed
high-voltage equipment, such as transformer banks, open switches, and
similar equipment with exposed energized parts to prevent unauthorized
access. Isolation must consist of locked rooms, fences or Screened enclosures,
walls, partitions, or elevated locations. Keep entrances to isolated areas
locked when not under constant observation. Post DANGER—HIGH
VOLTAGE warning signs at entrances to these areas. Properly ground
conductive components, fences, guardrails, Screens, partitions, walls, and
equipment frames and enclosures.
12.2.3. Temporary Fences. When extending a fence or removing it for work
on high voltage equipment, erect a temporary fence of comparable
construction and protection. Electrically bond the temporary fence to the
existing fence. If the fence is more than 40 feet long, bond posts to the ground
mat at no more than 40-foot intervals. Bond posts at each side of gates or
openings to the ground mat/grid and install a bonding jumper across all gate
hinges. Bond all corner posts to the ground mat.
12–2 October 2009
Section 12–Electrical Safety
12.2.4 Perimeter Markings. Use approved perimeter markings to isolate
Requirements
restricted areas from designated work areas and entryways. Erect them before
work begins and maintain them for the duration of work. Approved perimeter
marking must be:
a. Barrier Tape. Install red barrier tape printed with the words
“DANGER—HIGH VOLTAGE” around the perimeter of the work area
and accessway approximately 42 inches above the floor or work surface.
b. Synthetic Rope Barrier. Install a barrier of yellow or orange
synthetic rope 36 to 45 inches from the floor with standard danger signs
of non-conductive material attached at 10-foot intervals containing the
WOrds “DANGER—HIGH VOLTAGE.”
12.3 Working Near Exposed Energized Overhead Lines or Parts
12.3.1 General. For troubleshooting and testing purposes only, qualified
persons using proper test equipment and personal protective equipment must
adhere to the boundaries shown in figure 12-1 and specified in table 12-1. For
adjusting, tightening, calibrating or any other work, the circuits must be de-
energized, or employees must use voltage-rated gloves and voltage-rated
insulated tools.

bounda
Flash protection
- different
for each situation
Limited
approach
{_º «. boundary
Any point on an
exposed, energized
electrical conductor
or circuit part
* Limited
* space
W.
x \
\
à \
| E.
- approac
J boundary
ſ? 47 Restricted
º Space
º Prohibited
approach
gº \ boundary
Prohibited
Space
Figure 12.1—Boundaries.
12.3.2. Low Voltage Testing. For low voltage troubleshooting and testing
purposes only, i.e., under 480 volts, a qualified person may penetrate the
prohibited approach boundary shown in table 12-1, column 5, with test
instrument probes, leads, ct’s, etc. The qualified person must wear Class 00
(500 volt-rated) gloves.
October 2009
12–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
12.3.3. Unqualified Person Restrictions. When a person without electrical
training works on the ground or in an elevated position near overhead lines or
any other exposed energized parts, supervisors and employees must ensure
that the unqualified person and the longest conductive object they might
contact or handle, can never come closer to any energized line or part than
those distances listed in table 12-1, column 2, for energized lines or column 3
for other exposed live parts.
Table 12-1.-Approach boundaries to exposed energized conductors/parts for
qualified employees (All dimensions are distances from energized conductor/part to
employee)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Limited approach boundaries Restricted
approach
Nominal voltage Exposed . Prohibited
Phase to Phase, or moveable | Exposed fixed inadvertent approach
single phase conductor circuit part movement boundary
0 to 50 not specified not specified not specified not specified
51 to 300 10-ft 0-in 3-ft 6-in avoid COntact aVOid COntact
301 to 750 10-ft 0-in 3-ft 6-in 1-ft 0-in 0-ft 1-in
751 to 15 kV 10-ft 0-in 5-ft 0-in 2-ft 2-in 0-ft 7-in
15.1 kV to 36 kV | 10-ft 0-in 6-ft 0-in 2–ft 7-in 0-ft 10-in
36.1 kV to 46 kV | 10-ft 0-in 8-ft 0-in 2–ft 9-in 1-ft 5-in
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV | 10-ft 0-in 8-ft 0-in 3-ft 3-in 2-ft 1-in
72.6 kV to 121 kV | 10-ft 8-in 8-ft 0-in 3-ft 2-in 2-ft 8-in
138 kV to 145 kV | 1 1-ft 0-in 10-ft 0-in 3-ft 7-in 3-ft 1-in
161 kV to 169 kV | 1 1-ft 8-in 11-ft 8-in 4-ft 0-in 3-ft 6-in
230 kV to 242 kV | 13-ft 0-in 13-ft 0-in 5-ft 3-in 4-ft 9-in
345 kV to 362 kV | 15-ft 4-in 15-ft 4-in 8-ft 6-in 8-ft 0-in
500 kV to 550 kV | 19–ft 0-in 19-ft 0-in 11-ft 3-in 10-ft 9-in
765 kV to 800 kV 23-ft 9-in 23-ft 9-in 14-ft 11-in 14-ft 5-in
Notes: This table is taken from NFPA 70E table 2–1.3.4 and OSHA 29 CFR, 1910.269 table R6.
Limited Approach Boundaries. A shock protection boundary to be crossed only by qualified
persons (at a distance from a live part). Unqualified persons must not cross this boundary unless
accompanied by a qualified person.
Restricted approach Boundary. A shock protection boundary to be crossed only by qualified
persons (at a distance from a live part). The boundary's proximity to a shock hazard requires the use
of shock protection techniques and equipment when crossed.
Prohibited Approach Boundary. A shock protection boundary to be crossed only by qualified
persons (at a distance from a live part). When crossed by a body part or object, this boundary
requires the same protection as if direct contact is made with a live part (i.e., requires voltage rated
tools and voltage rated gloves and, in some cases, other voltage rated clothing).
12-4 October 2009
Section 12—Electrical Safety
Requirements
12.3.4 Equipment Transit Clearances. A signal or flag person must guide
cranes, cherry pickers, high lifts, and other equipment in transit near exposed
energized lines or parts at all times. Do not move any equipment or
machinery under energized overhead high-voltage lines or near exposed
energized parts, unless clearances listed in table 12-2 are maintained. Unload
and lower any boom or mast to transport position. Ground the equipment
while it is being transported. Two grounds must be leap-frogged as the
vehicle is moved or the vehicles must be treated as energized.
Table 12-2.-Equipment in transit clearances

Up to 50 kV 4 feet
50 kV up to and including 345 kV 10 feet
Over 345 kV up to 750 kV 16 feet
12.3.5 Sign Posting. Post all crossings where equipment will be moved
under energized high-voltage line(s) with appropriate signs. Place the signs
50 feet from and on both sides of the line(s). They must be large enough to be
easily read from moving equipment. The sign must include the following
information:
• Warning of the high-voltage line.
• Line Voltage.
• Maximum height of equipment that may pass under the line.
Determine the maximum height of the equipment by subtracting the
clearance distance shown in table 12-2 from the actual line to ground
distance during maximum sag conditions.
12.3.6 Equipment Operation Near Energized Lines. Prohibit equipment
from coming any closer to overhead high-voltage lines or exposed energized
parts than distances shown in table 12-3, unless both subparagraphs a. and b.
below are satisfied, or subparagraph c. below is satisfied.
a. Before beginning work, place a clearance, ground and de-energize the
line or exposed energized parts, and implement hazardous energy control
procedures to prevent re-energization.
b. Equipment does not have the capability of coming within distances
shown in table 12-3.
c. In addition to the clearances in table 12-3, effectively ground all
equipment with booms or extensions above cab level while it is operating
in a substation, switchyard, or on a transformer deck, or any other location
near high Voltage energized lines/parts.
October 2009 12-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table 12-3.−Equipment clearances for
operations near energized overhead
lines
Table of minimum clearances (ft)
for nominal system voltages (kV)

kV Ft
50 (or less) 10
69 11
115 12
230 16
500 25
Note: Table 12-3 shows only common Reclamation voltages and rounds them
up to the nearest foot. For other voltages, use the 10-foot minimum and add 4
inches for every 10 kilovolts over 50 kilovolts. For example, 60 kilovolts
would be 10 feet plus 4 inches; rounding up to the nearest foot would require
an 11-foot clearance. Always round up because the clearance is usually only
an estimate. It is difficult, if not impossible, to accurately measure the actual
distance unless you de-energize the line and/or equipment.
12.3.7 Placard Posting in Equipment Cabs. Post a placard of minimum
clearances (table 12-3) in the cabs of all cranes, cherry pickers, shovels,
backhoes, and any other equipment with booms or extensions that could
possibly contact high-voltage lines. Tables posted in machines must be of
substantial material and suitable for the environment.
12.4 Operating Equipment Near Radio and Microwave Transmission
Towers
12.4.1 General. Because of high frequency, low power output, and point-to-
point transmissions, microwave transmissions do not present an induced
charge hazard. However, many microwave towers are mounted on VHF radio
transmission antennas. Therefore, the following safety precautions apply to
all transmission towers. Vehicles will rarely need to be grounded at
transmission towers. Tires contain carbon compounds and are conductive or
semiconductive, and static charges will bleed off through tires and/or out-
riggers. However, voltage could build up if all tires were insulated from the
earth by dry rip-rap or other insulation.
12.4.2 Requirement. Shut down the transmitter or ground and test the
equipment to determine if a hazard exists before working near any
transmission tower where an electrical charge may be induced in the
equipment or materials being handled. To conduct a test, connect an insulated
wire to the vehicle and touch it to the tower base. If you see or hear the Spark,
you must ground the vehicle.
12–6 October 2009
Section 12—Electrical Safety
Requirements
12.4.3 Grounding Mobile Equipment Near Transmission Towers. If
needed, ground the equipment to dissipate static electrical charge. On
equipment with a rotating boom, attach a ground wire to the structure
Supporting the boom. Place and remove ground wires using hot-sticks or
Voltage-rated gloves. Attach the ground connection first (if possible, to the
tower ground), then attach the other end to the equipment. These ground wires
do not have to be sized to carry fault current. They need only to carry low
level current to bleed off static voltage charges induced on the vehicle or lifted
materials. Any convenient wire size that will mechanically withstand the
service will be sufficient. A smaller conductor would carry the current, but an
insulated #2 copper conductor is recommended for mechanical strength.
12.4.4 Material Ground Wire. Also, attach a ground wire to conductive
materials handled by hoisting equipment. Attach the ground connection first,
then attach the other end on the materials. Alternatively, provide a ground
jumper from the load to the required grounding conductor installed on the
Structure.
12.5 Working on Electrical Equipment and Systems
12.5.1 General. Electrical installations must comply with the applicable
provisions of the current editions of the National Electrical Safety Code,
National Electrical Code, OSHA Regulations, and the Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards. The Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual
Laboratories, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory must approve
or list electrical wire, conduit, apparatus, power tools and equipment, for the
specific application. This approval/listing must appear on each piece of
equipment or tool as part of the “marking or labeling” required below.
12.5.2 Marking or Labeling. Do not use electrical equipment unless the
manufacturer’s name, trademark, and other descriptive marking by which the
manufacturer may be identified, is located on the equipment. Markings must
also provide Voltage, current, Wattage, approvals/listings, and ratings as
required by the edition of the National Electric Code in effect at the time of
purchase. Markings must be sufficiently durability to withstand the
environment.
12.5.3 Working Space
a. Figure 12-2 and table 12-4 provide access and working space distances
around electrical equipment and enclosures, e.g., panelboards, motor
controls, disconnects, etc., to permit ready and safe operation and
maintenance. Keep working space clear at all times.
b. Provide a working space of at least 30 inches horizontally where rear or
side access is required to work on de-energized parts of enclosed
equipment (see figure 12-3).
October 2009 12-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
x -::::::::::::,-, 3-º- (------
Do not service equipment
opposite each other at
the same time.
Electrical
SWitch-
board
< 3.5 ft ** 130,277 |<
Figure 12-2.-Access and working space requirements around
enclosures and equipment.
Table 12-4.—Working spaces around enclosures and equipment
Working spaces
Nominal voltage Minimum clear distance (ft)
to ground Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
0–150 3 3 3
151-600 3 3.5 4
601–2,500 3 4 5
2,501-9,000 4 5 6
9,001–25,000 5 6 6
Condition 1 - Exposed live parts on one side and no live parts or grounded parts on
the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively
guarded by suitable wood or other insulating materials. Insulated wire or insulated
busbars operating at not over 300 volts to ground shall not be considered live parts.
Condition 2 - Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side.
Consider concrete, brick, or tile walls grounded.
Condition 3 - Exposed live parts on both sides of the work space (not guarded or
enclosed, as provided in Condition 1) with the worker between.














12–8 October 2009
Section 12—Electrical Safety
Requirements
º
:
2.
* *s
*s
ź
* * *
º
Žº 3&
º | E-
... ſ
:ºxxxxxx lºgº:32:3: Lºx3 º
:%; 33333333%kºğ3% ====E. &
ź. [- --~~~~. T -
: /2–
|
Do not service equipment
opposite each other at
the same time.
C
:
Minimum
; L 30 in-
i`s P-
Electrical Electrical
switch- switch-
board 3.5 ft board 3.5 ft
480/277 480/277
§
N.
Bolted
Panels
£% ; :
:::::::::::::::::::::::::::3%
Figure 12-3.−Working space requirements for rear or side
a CCGSS.
c. Doors and hinged panels. Doors and hinged panels must have at least at
least a 90-degree opening. Keep working space clear at all times. Do not
store parts, tools, and equipment in the clear space (see figure 12-4).
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 32%%22%2%%%22%22%22%2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232222222222322222 % %22%22%22%2%;3%3%22%2, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
* * *
* * *
tº
Panelboard Panelboard Panelboard sº
ſº
g
ºa º A *s
ºf a ::::
p ºf ºw . . ."
P º a sº . . ."
& & is ſº *.*.*
22%
º
- g a rºº
† - tº º
90° <!— 30 in, —P- ź
* * *
*s
* * *
* *s
**s
tº º
; :
* g.
*
*
<– 30 in. —-
Figure 12-4.—Working space requirements for doors and
hinged panels.
12.5.4 Passageway Barriers. Provide effective barriers or other means
(barrier tape) to ensure that areas containing electrical circuits or equipment
are not used as passageways when energized lines or equipment are exposed
for testing or maintenance. This includes open doors on motor control
centers, and Switchgear.




October 2009 12-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
12.6 Personal Protective Grounding
12.6.1 General. Qualified persons must comply with applicable provisions
of FIST Volume 5–1 “Personal Protective Grounding.” Include written
grounding procedures in all clearances, special work permits, etc. The JHA
must include the procedures, and employees must discuss them before
beginning work.
12.6.2. Over 600 Volts. Place grounds as close as possible to the work and
within sight of the workers for all electrical circuits and equipment operated in
excess of 600 volts. The clearance holder is personally responsible for proper
placement and removal of protective grounds.
12.6.3 Personal Protective Ground Cables. Personal protective grounds
and clamps must be capable of conducting the calculated maximum fault
current available for the time necessary to clear the fault. They must be sized
in accordance with FIST 5–1.
12.6.4 Prior to Applying Grounds. After implementing hazardous energy
control, use a hot-stick “noise tester” or similar approved device of sufficient
insulating capacity to verify that the circuit or equipment is de-energized
before placing personal protective grounds. Test the voltage tester
immediately before use on a known energized source of similar voltage before
testing the equipment to be worked on. The circuit/equipment to be worked on
must be considered energized while conducting the test.
12.6.5 Placement and Removal of Personal Protective Grounds. After de-
energization, install personal protective grounds so that all phases of lines and
equipment are visibly and effectively bonded together in a multi-phase short
and connected to ground at one point. Do not use single-phase personal
protective grounds or grounding chains. Install personal protective grounds
using a hot-stick or voltage-rated gloves on both sides of the work area, if
possible. This precaution prevents a possible backfeed, especially when
working on transformers and related equipment. When attaching grounds,
attach the ground end first, and then attach the other end to the de-energized
circuit. When removing personal protective grounds, first remove the
grounding clamp from the de-energized circuit using a hot stick or voltage-
rated gloves, and then remove the other end from the ground connection.
12.7 Temporary Wiring
12.7.1 Installation. Temporary wiring must meet all the requirements of the
National Electrical Code (NEC). Permit temporary wiring only during the
period of construction, remodeling, maintenance, repair, or demolition.
Remove temporary wiring immediately upon completion of construction or
purposes for which the wiring was installed. Permit temporary wiring used
for feeders and branch circuits in multi-conductor cord or cable assemblies or
12–10 October 2009
Section 12—Electrical Safety
Requirements
open conductors, and guard, bury, or isolate it by elevation to prevent
accidental contact by personnel or equipment. Allow at least 10 feet of
vertical clearance above walkways for circuits rated 600 volts or less. Support
all exposed temporary wiring on insulators. Provide ground fault protection
for personnel for all temporary wiring installations to comply with the
National Electrical Code.
12.7.2 Weatherproof. Conductors used in tunnels, shafts, trenches, and wet
or damp locations must be of a type approved for the purpose as listed in
Article 310 Of the NEC.
12.7.3 Bushings. Wiring installed in conduit must be equipped with
bushings at ends of conduit.
12.7.4 Receptacles. All receptacles must be of the grounding type and must
be electrically connected to the equipment grounding conductor. Do not
install receptacles on construction sites on branch circuits that supply
temporary lighting. Do not connect receptacles to the same ungrounded
conductor of multiwire circuits that supply temporary wiring.
12.7.5 Lighting Strings. Temporary lighting strings must consist of
nonconductive lamp sockets and connections permanently molded to the
conductor insulation. Use lamp guards to protect bulbs attached to festoon
lighting strings and extension cords. Promptly replace broken or defective
bulbs. Protect all lights used for illumination from accidental contact or
breakage.
12.7.6 Extension Cords. Extension cords must be 3-wire grounded type,
must be designated for hard service or extra hard service, and must be listed
by the Underwriters Laboratories. Do not exceed the rated load. Use cords
only in continuous lengths without splice. Do not use worn or frayed
extension cords. To protect cable assemblies, flexible cords, and cables from
damage, Support them in place with approved staples, cable ties, straps, or
similar type fittings installed to prevent damage.
12.8 Disconnect and Overcurrent Protection
12.8.1 Marking. Plainly mark, label, or arrange switches, fuses, and
automatic circuit breakers to identify the circuits or equipment controlled by
them.
12.8.2 Switches. Switches must be of the enclosed safety type, with the
enclosures grounded, and installed so as to minimize the possibility of
accidental operation.
12.8.3 Lockout Provision. Provide disconnects and breakers with a means
of locking in the OFF position. Also, fuse cabinets and circuit breaker
cabinets must be equipped with lockable doors.
October 2009 12–11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
12.8.4 Wet and Outside Locations. Enclose switches, circuit breakers, fuse
panels, and motor controllers in wet or outside locations in approved
weatherproof cabinets or enclosures. Prevent moisture or water from entering
or accumulating within the cabinets or enclosure.
12.8.5 Shielding. Isolate or shield the disconnecting means to protect
employees.
12.8.6 Service Entrance Disconnect. Install the service entrance
disconnecting means in a readily accessible location, as close as possible to
the point where the service entrance conductors enter the premise. The
service disconnecting means must disconnect all the ungrounded service
entrance conductors supplying power to the service equipment. This
disconnecting means must plainly indicate that it is either in the open or
closed position.
12.8.7 Overcurrent Protection. Fuses or circuit breakers must provide
overcurrent protection for all ungrounded conductors. All overcurrent
protection devices and conductors must be designed and installed according
to the latest provisions of the NEC to ensure protection and proper
installation. Do not place any overcurrent device in any permanently
grounded conductor, except where the overcurrent device simultaneously
opens all conductors of the circuit.
12.9 Ground-Fault Protection
12.9.1 Requirement. Protect all 125-volt, single-phase, 15 and 20 ampere
receptacles outlets used in locations such as laboratories, shops, garages, wet
locations, outdoor receptacles, bathrooms, kitchens, and for construction
operations with a ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI). For temporary
wiring, all 125 volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacle outlets
that are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure and that
employees use must have ground-fault circuit interrupter protection for
personnel. For temporary wiring, receptacles other than 125 volt, single-
phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacles must have ground-fault circuit
protection or protection in accordance with the assured equipment grounding
conductor program. The ground-fault interrupter must open the circuit on a
ground current of 5 milliamperes plus or minus 1 and must be equipped with
an integral push-button test circuit. Install the GFCI in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and test it before initial use and periodically
thereafter.
12.9.2 Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program. Where
GFCI protection is not provided for personnel, the Assured Equipment
Grounding Conductor Program must be implemented. This program must
be used on all receptacle outlets, except 125-volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-,
and 30-amp receptacle outlets, used during construction, remodeling,
12–12 October 2009
Section 12–Electrical Safety
Requirements
maintenance, repair or demolition of buildings, structures, equipment, or
similar activities. Receptacle outlets must not be connected to any branch
circuits that supply power to lighting outlets, per NEC 527.4(D).
a. All cord sets and receptacles that are not part of the permanent wiring
of the building or structure, as well as cord and plug connected equipment
required to be grounded, must meet the following requirements:
• Have a written description of the program
• Have a qualified person to implement the program
b. All equipment grounding conductors must be tested for continuity and
be electrically continuous.
c. Each receptacle and attachment plug must be tested for correct
attachment of the equipment grounding conductor.
d. Tests are required under the following conditions for an Assured
Equipment Grounding Program:
• Before first use onsite
• When there is evidence of damage
• Before equipment is returned to service following any repairs
• At intervals not exceeding 3 months
e. The required test for all equipment grounding conductors and each
receptacle and attachment plug above must be recorded and available for
inspection.
12.10 Hazardous Locations
12.10.1 General. A hazardous location is any location where a potential
hazard, either a fire or an explosion, can exist because of the presence of
flammable, combustible, or ignitable materials. These materials can consist of
gases, vapors, liquids, dust, fibers, etc. Hazardous locations are classified
according to the properties and quantities of the hazardous material that may
be present. Hazardous locations are divided into three classes, two divisions,
and seven classified groups as follows: Class I, II, and III; Division 1 and 2;
and Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G. Wiring methods used in hazardous
locations must comply with more stringent requirements than wiring methods
used in other locations.
12.10.2 Requirement. Electrical wiring and equipment installed in
hazardous locations, as defined in the National Electrical Code, must conform
to the respective standards. All components and equipment used in hazardous
locations must be from among the equipment listed by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory, such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual
Engineering Corporation.
October 2009 12–13
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
12.10.3 Marking. Approved equipment must be marked to show the
class, group, and operating temperature or temperature range referenced to
a 40 degree C ambient. Install approved equipment in accordance with the
requirements of the NEC.
12.10.4 Intrinsically Safe Systems. Permit intrinsically safe apparatus and
wiring in any hazardous (classified) location for which it is approved.
12.10.5 Maintenance. Maintain wiring components and equipment as
explosion-proof. There must be no loose or missing screws, gaskets, threaded
connections, seals, or other impairments to tight conditions.
12.11 Wet Locations
12.11.1 Requirement. Only the following type electrical systems are
permissible for use in wet areas where there is danger of electrical shock:
a. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter. Electrical circuits for lighting and
hand tools must not exceed 120 volts and must be protected by UL-listed
ground-fault circuit interrupters installed in conformance with the
manufacturer’s specifications, and tested before beginning work.
b. Stationary Portable Equipment. Connect stationary portable
electrically powered equipment, such as pumps, heaters, blowers, welders,
transformers, etc., to a circuit protected by a ground-fault circuit
interrupter or effectively ground the equipment with both an internal
grounding system and a visible flexible copper ground wire.
c. Substitute Equipment. Whenever practical, substitute air, battery, or
hydraulically powered tools for electrically powered tools.
12.11.2 Receptacles. Receptacles and cord connectors used in damp or wet
locations must be designed for use in wet or damp locations and, unless
approved for submersion, must not be allowed to lie in water.
12.12 Battery Charging
12.12.1 Requirement. Restrict battery charging operations to well-ventilated
areas designated for that purpose. Post signs with the following wording (or
equivalent) at all entrances when explosive gases are produced: “BATTERY
ROOM - NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME WITHIN 25 FEET.”
12.12.2 Ventilation. Ventilation must be adequate to ensure diffusion of the
battery gases and prevent accumulation of an explosive mixture.
12.12.3 Vented Batteries. Locate nonseal-type batteries in enclosures with
outside vents or in well-ventilated rooms, arranged to prevent the escape of
fumes, gases, or electrolyte spray or liquid into other areas. Keep safety vent
caps in place during charging.
12–14 October 2009
Section 12–Electrical Safety
Requirements
12.12.4 Racks and Trays. Racks and trays must be of sufficient strength and
treated with an electrolyte resistive coating.
12.12.5 Housekeeping. Keep battery storage and charging areas free of
combustible materials and scrap. Promptly clean up and dispose of acid or
corrosive spills.
12.12.6 Protective Equipment. Provide face shields, goggles, aprons, and
rubber gloves for employees who handle acids or recharging batteries.
12.12.7 First Aid. Provide facilities for quick emergency drenching of the
eyes and body within 25 feet of a battery charging area.
October 2009 12–15
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Attachment 12-1
Training Requirements for
Electrically Qualified Persons
1. General. NFPA 70E, 2000 Edition, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.269 contains
references for training requirements. A person must have all the training listed
below to be a qualified person.
a. Required training must be of classroom and on-the-job training.
b. Qualified persons must be trained in and familiar with “Safety-Related
Work Practices,” safety procedures, and other safety requirements pertaining
to their work. Qualified persons must be trained in first aid and CPR and be
familiar with applicable emergency procedures. They must be trained in any
other safety practices, including those not specifically addressed in this
section such as confined space entry, manhole and pole-top rescue, fall
protection, personal protective equipment, etc.
c. Qualified persons must be trained and knowledgeable in Job Hazard
Analysis (JHA). This training and knowledge includes recognizing work
hazards, doing the work safely, writing a JHA, and communicating hazards
and safety work practices to fellow employees.
d. Qualified persons must be trained and knowledgeable in the construction,
operation, and maintenance of equipment and specific work methods. They
must be trained to recognize and avoid hazards with respect to equipment or
work methods and must be familiar with applicable codes and standards. They
shall be familiar with the proper use of special precautionary techniques,
personal protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and
insulated tools and test equipment.
2. Additional Training Required. Qualified persons permitted to work within
limited approach boundaries (table 12-1) of exposed conductors and parts must, at
a minimum, be additionally trained in all of the following:
a. Skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed energized parts
from other parts.
b. Skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of
exposed energized parts. These skills and techniques include those necessary
to safely use high and low-voltage meters, test instruments, and personal
protective equipment while performing measurements and testing.
c. The approach distances specified in table 12-1 and corresponding Voltages
to which the qualified person will be exposed. (Post table 12-1 in the Electric
12–16 October 2009
Section 12–Electrical Safety
Requirements
Shop and hand it out to each team member before beginning work on a project
that involves work near exposed energized lines or other equipment.)
d. The decision-making process to determine the degree and extent of the
hazard and the personal protective equipment necessary to perform the task
safely. For example, clothing that would increase injury by fire is not
permitted. Clothing made of acetate, nylon, polyester, and rayon is
prohibited. Refer to OSHA 29 CFR 1910.269 on apparel.
e. Lockout/Tagout and clearance procedures of FIST 1-1.
3. In-Training. A person who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the
course of this training, has demonstrated the ability to perform specific duties
safely at his or her level of training, and is under the direct supervision of a
qualified person, is considered a qualified person for the performance of those
specific duties only. For qualified persons, the employer must determine by
regular supervision and inspections of the employee’s work and his/her on-the-job
work practices, at least annually, that each qualified person is complying with the
Safety-related-work practices required.
4. Training Documentation. The employer must generate and maintain written
documentation that each employee has received the required training. The
employer must verify that the training has been accomplished and is current. The
documentation must contain the employee’s name, the training he/she has
received, and dates of training. Employee demonstrate their competence by their
proficiency in safety-on-the-job and work practices. Maintain training records in
the employee’s training file for the duration of employment. Employment records
that indicate an employee has received the required training are an acceptable
means of meeting this requirement.
5. An employee must receive additional training (or re-training) under any
of the following conditions:
• If supervision and/or annual inspections of the employees work and on-
the-job, safety-related work practices indicate the employee is not
knowledgeable or complying with the requirements of this section.
• If new technology, new type equipment, or changes in procedures dictate
the use of safety-related work practices that are different from those which
the employee would normally use.
• If the worker must use safety-related practices not normally used during
normal job duties.
• If the worker has not performed this specific task within 1 year or feels a
need for additional training to perform the job safely.
• If the worker’s other qualifications have expired, such as First Aid and
CPR.
October 2009 12-17
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Note: Employee who perform a task less than once a year must receive hazard
retraining before the employee may perform the task again. Retraining may be
done during the JHA, but must also include a jobsite visit to discuss hazards.
Performing a task less than once a year is not considered a part of normal job
duties. -
12–18 October 2009
Section 13
Walking and Working Surfaces
This section sets forth safety standards and work practices for walking and
working surfaces. It specifically addresses making work locations safe for access,
using scaffolds, requirements of work platforms, and designing and constructing
guardrails. -
13.1 Safe Access to Work
Use ladders, stairways, or ramps that comply with the requirements of this section
to provide safe access to all work locations (temporary or permanent).
• Provide a stairway, ladder, ramp, or manhoist at all personnel access
points where elevation changes 19 inches or more.
• Keep at least one point of access between levels of buildings or structures,
so employees can pass freely at all times.
13.1.1 Ladders. Use ladders where stairs or ramps cannot be installed.
Ladder construction must comply with the applicable ladder safety code.
a. General Ladder Requirements
1. Electrical Hazard. Do not use portable metal ladders or wood
ladders with metal reinforcements for any electrical work or in
Substations, Switchyards, powerplants, pumping plants, or in any area
where employees may contact energized circuits.
2. Maintenance. Routinely inspect and maintain all ladders.
Promptly repair or remove broken or damaged ladders. Properly store
ladders to prevent damage.
3. Securing Ladders. Portable ladders, except stepladders must be
secured. Fixed ladders must be fixed, and don’t require securing for
use, portable ladders do not require intermediate support.
4. Location. Protect ladders placed in access ways or other locations
where they may be displaced with barricades or guards. Keep the area
immediately adjacent to the top and bottom of a ladder free from
debris, materials, equipment, or other obstructions.
5. Restrictions. Use ladders as work platforms only for short
duration tasks, and use only light tools or material (changing a light
bulb, for example).
6. Use. Face ladders and keep hands free when going up or down
ladders.
October 2009 13–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. Portable Ladders
1. Design, construct, use, and maintain portable ladders according to
the more stringent standards published in this subsection and ANSI
A14.1, "Portable Wood Ladders," ANSI A14.2, "Portable Metal
Ladders," and ANSI A14.5, "Portable Reinforced Plastic Ladders."
Use only type 1A, extra heavy-duty industrial ladders.
2. Place portable ladders at a slope of 4:1 (vertical:horizontal).
3. Portable stepladders must be no more than 20 feet tall.
4. Employees working from ladders must remain within 20 feet of the
floor.
5. Secure portable ladders against accidental displacement at the top
and bottom. Portable ladders must extend at least 42 inches above the
upper landing. Do not use stepladders for access.
6. Rest portable ladders on a firm foundation that can support the load
without displacement.
7. Do not use extension sections of ladders as independent ladders.
8. Use job-made ladders only for their designed and constructed
purpose and not as portable ladders.
9. Allow only one person at a time on a portable ladder.
10. Equip ladders with safety shoes, spurs, spikes, tread feet, or other
slip-resistant devices at the base section of each rail. Use the
appropriate device for the type of surface they are used on.
c. Fixed Ladders
1. Design, construct, use, and maintain fixed ladders according to the
more stringent of standards in this subsection; ANSI A14.3, "Safety
Requirements for Fixed Ladders," and ANSI A14.4, "Safety
Requirements for Job-Made Ladders."
2. The climb length offixed ladders must be 24 feet or less; otherwise,
equip the ladder with a cage, well, or ladder climbing device or offset
landings at 20-foot intervals. Ladders equipped with cages or ladder
climbing devices must have a climb length of 30 feet or less between
ground, floors, or offset landings. Bottom of cages must start between
7 and 8 feet from the base of each section of ladder. Install climbing
devices so an employee can connect or disconnect while standing on
ground, floors, or platform. Increase ladder widths to accommodate
climbing devices. Do not use the reinforcing bar of fixed ladders as a
rung or grab rail.
13–2
October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
3. Provide a landing at the top of all fixed ladders and extend the side
rails, stanchions, or other supports at least 42 inches above the landing.
4. Provide at least 7 inches of toe space from the centerline of the rung
or step to the wall or other obstructions.
5. Provide two separate ladders or double-cleat ladders for access to
and from work areas for 25 or more employees, or where
simultaneous, two-way traffic is necessary.
6. Use nonslip material on rungs in slippery areas.
13.1.2 Stairways
a. Requirement. Use stairways for access to areas 20 feet or more above
the adjacent surface, except for scaffolds which are commonly accessed
by ladder. If scaffold is to be used for extended time periods, or if
employees routinely carry tools or materials, stairs must be provided.
b. Design
1. Temporary Stairways. Design and construct temporary stairways
with a live load safety factor of five, but never less than a moving
concentrated load of 1,000 pounds. Install temporary stairways at 30-
to 50-degree angles from horizontal. Use any uniform combination of
rise/tread dimensions between 6-1/2- to 9-1/2-inch rise and 11- to
8-inch tread run, to obtain a stairway within this permissible range.
Any flight of stairs with an unbroken rise of more than 12 feet must
have a standard landing that extends at least 30 inches in the direction
of travel. Where doors or gates open directly onto the stairway,
provide a platform. The swing of the door or gate must not reduce the
width of the platform to less than 20 inches. Provide a vertical
clearance of at least 7 feet above any stair tread, measured from the
leading edge.
2. Existing Permanent Stairways. On permanent stairways, riser
must be no more than 7-1/2 inches high and treads no less than 10
inches deep. Adjacent steps must not vary by more than 3/16 inch.
No flight of stairs may vary more than 3/8 inch.
3. New Permanent Stairways. New stairways must have risers no
more than 7 inches high and treads no less than 11 inches deep.
c. Construction. Construct temporary stairways and handrails of
materials without hazardous projections or surface imperfections, rigidly
support them, and securely fasten stair treads in place.
d. Stair Railings and Handrails. Stairs with 4 or more risers, or rising
more than 30 inches, must have standard railings and a standard handrail,
as specified below:
October 2009 13–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• Less than 44 inches wide and both sides enclosed: at least one
handrail on right side descending.
• Less than 44 inches wide and one side open: one stair railing on
the open side.
• Less than 44 inches wide and both sides open: a stair railing on
each side.
• More than 44 inches, but less than 88 inches, wide: one handrail
on each enclosed side and a stair railing on each open side.
• More than 88 inches wide: one handrail on each enclosed side,
plus a standard stair railing located midway (width).
e. Standard Stair Railing. Construct standard stair railings to the
specifications set forth in "Standard Guardrails," except that no toeboard is
required, and it must be at least 36 inches high (measured from top of the
forward edge of the tread to the upper surface of the top rail). When the
top edge of the stair rail system also serves as a handrail, the top edge
must be 37 inches maximum height.
f. Standard Handrail. Securely mount a standard handrail on the wall or
partition, enclosing the stairs. It must be between 30 and 37 inches high.
Material and strength requirements must equal the stair railing. Mount the
handrail with a minimum 1-1/2-inch clearance from any obstruction.
Handrails must provide an adequate handhold for employees grasping
them to avoid falling.
g. Projection Hazard. The ends of stair rail systems and handrails must
not be a projection hazard.
h. Metal Pan Stairs. Where permanent metal pan stairs are set for
temporary use, install treads of wood filler pieces flush with the pan rims.
i. Stairwells and Platforms. Protect platforms on all open sides with
standard guardrails and toeboards.
j. Maintenance. Routinely maintain stairways. Keep stairs free from
debris and materials. Eliminate slippery conditions as they occur.
13.1.3 Ramps.
a. Requirement. Substitute temporary access ramps, for stairways, when
the slope or incline does not exceed 15 degrees. With prior approval, you
may use cleated ramps for access on slopes up to 20 degrees.
b. Design.
13-4 October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
1. Temporary Ramps. Design temporary ramps with a safety factor
of five, with a minimum 100-pound-per-square-foot live load. The
ramp must be at least 18 inches wide, yet not cause congestion of
persons, materials, or equipment. Equip ramps with standard
guardrails on open sides and with at least one handrail. Cleated ramps
(chicken walks) must have 1- by 2-inch cleats. Space the cleats no
more than 12 inches apart. The cleats must be as long as the width of
the ramp. Secure them with nails, driven through the decking and
clinched on the underside. Provide vehicle trestles, ramps, and bridges
that permit foot traffic with a suitable walkway and guardrail outside
of the roadway. Protect roadway ramps with timbers or curbs at least
8 inches high, secured to each side of the roadway.
2. Permanent Ramps. Permanent ramps must be at least 44 inches
wide, and the slope must not exceed 1:12. The continuous slope must
not have more than a 30-inch rise, unless there is a horizontal landing
as long as the width of the ramp. When possible, ramps will be
designed for handicap access. When the ramp is used for public
access, wheelchair accessibility is required.
3. Overhead Protection. Provide overhead protection whenever
falling objects could pose a hazard to the public, employees, or
property. The overhead protection must be strong enough to withstand
all potential impacts. Install overhead protection between 7 and 9 feet
above the ramp.
13.2 Safe Use of Scaffolds
Provide scaffolds, platforms, or temporary floors whenever employees perform
work that they cannot perform safely from the ground or from solid construction.
13.2.1 General Requirements.
a. Competent Person. A competent person must supervise erecting,
dismantling, or altering of scaffolding. Such action must also comply with
the requirements of this section and ANSI A10.8, "Construction and
Demolition Operations - Scaffolding - Safety Requirements." (The more
stringent standards must prevail.) Do not use ladders or makeshift devices
to increase scaffolding height. Keep scaffolding working surfaces level.
b. Safety Factors. Wire or fiber rope used for scaffold suspension must
be able to support at least six times the maximum intended load. All other
scaffolds and their components must be able to support at least four times
the maximum intended load.
c. Access. Access scaffolding by separate or integral ladders or by
stairways. Do not use structural members to access scaffolding.
October 2009 13–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
d. Nets, Lifelines, Lanyard, and Belts. When employees work on
suspended or movable scaffolding (or scaffolding without standard
guardrails), use a fall protection system.
e. Guardrails. Work platforms and scaffolds more than 6 feet above the
ground or floor level must have standard guardrails, midrails, and
toeboards on the open side and ends. (Exceptions are floats, needle beam,
and ladder-supported scaffolds.) In addition, install standard guardrails on
open sides and ends on scaffolds 4 to 6 feet high, erected above machinery
or other hazards, or with a minimum horizontal dimension less than
45 inches in either direction.
f. Footing. The footing or anchorage for scaffolds must be sound, rigid,
and able to carry the maximum intended load without settling or
displacement. Do not use unstable objects (such as barrels, boxes, loose
brick, or concrete blocks) to support scaffolds or planks.
g. Poles, Legs, Uprights. Make sure poles, legs, and uprights are plumb.
Brace them securely and rigidly to prevent swaying or displacement.
h. Scaffold Lumber. All load-carrying wood members of scaffold
framing, except planks, must be No. 1 Douglas fir, or equivalent. All
dimensions are nominal sizes provided in the American Lumber
Standards. However, rough sizes are an exception. When rough sizes are
noted, only rough or undressed lumber of the specified size will satisfy
minimum requirements.
i. Loadings. Load scaffolds only up to their designed working load.
Store only those supplies needed for immediate operations on scaffolds.
j. Restrictions. While employees use or occupy scaffolds, do not alter or
move them horizontally, unless specifically designed for such use.
k. Design. A professional engineer (PE) must design scaffolding with
structural members or working surfaces that differ from those specified
here. The COR or office head must accept the design before erecting the
scaffolding onsite. The design of wood scaffolding members and
connections must adhere to the "National Design Specifications for Wood
Construction," published by the National Forest Products Association. To
account for the additional safety factors for scaffolding, multiply basic
allowable stresses therein by a factor of 0.065, and use a duration load
adjustment of 1.25. These section multiplication factors are cumulative.
l. Overhead Protection. Provide overhead protection for employees who
work on scaffolds and are exposed to falling objects.
13-6
October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
m. Scaffold Enclosures. When employees must work under scaffolding,
or the scaffold is above an accessway, enclose the scaffold on the open
side and ends. Also, enclose the space between the decking and the form
or wall. The protective enclosure must be No. 18 U.S. Standard gauge
wire, or equivalent, with mesh of 0.5 inch or less.
n. Welding, Cutting, Burning, and Riveting. Do not weld, cut, burn,
rivet, or perform open flame work on staging suspended by natural fiber or
Synthetic rope. When using natural fiber or synthetic rope staging
Supports near corrosive materials, protect or treat them to prevent
deterioration.
0. Hoisting Equipment. Only mount material hoists on scaffolds or
elevated work platforms if the scaffold or work platform is designed or
strengthened to withstand the additional loading. A PE must certify such
design or strengthening.
p. Lean-to Scaffolds. Do not use lean-to scaffolds.
q. Unsafe Conditions. Keep scaffolds, platforms, and access ways free
of ice, Snow, grease, mud, and any other material or equipment that creates
a slipping or falling hazard. Do not permit tools, materials, equipment, or
debris to accumulate on scaffolds, work platforms, or in access ways. To
improve footing, apply an abrasive material to scaffolds, work platforms,
or accessways that are usually wet or slippery. The competent person
must perform a daily inspection.
13.2.2 Scaffolding Platforms
a. Requirement. Select materials for scaffold decking that can safely
support the intended load. The load rating for scaffold decking is the
person loading requirements or the uniformly distributed load
requirement, whichever is greater.
1. Person Loading Requirements. If scaffold design is based on
person loading, use a 250-pound point loading at center span to
represent one person, two 250-pound point loads 18 inches from the
center on each side to represent two persons, and the sum of the above
to represent three persons.
2. Uniformly Distributed Load Requirement. When applicable,
you may design each scaffold decking unit to carry a uniformly
distributed load, as an alternate to the person loading requirement.
Light duty: 25 pounds per square foot
Medium duty: 50 pounds per square foot
Heavy duty: 75 pounds per square foot
Special duty: More than 75 pounds per square foot
October 2009 13-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. Scaffold Planks.
1. Sawn Wood Scaffold Planks. Design wood scaffold planks so the
deflection, at the center of the span at the design load, does not exceed
the span divided by 60. All solid sawn scaffold planks must be of a
scaffold grade and certified by, or bear the grade stamp of, a grading
agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee.
Table 13-1 shows permissible spans that comply with the above
requirements.
Table 13-1.-Permissible spans for wood scaffold planks
Rough sawn Douglas fir, 2 inches by 10 inches

One person, or medium duty 10 feet
Two persons, or heavy duty 8 feet
Three persons 5 feet
Note: Other combinations of planks and spans are permissible, as
long as all planks are grade stamped or certified as scaffold plank
grade and the stresses and deflections do not exceed those specified
in ANSI A10.8.
2. Manufactured Wood Scaffold Planks. Wood scaffold planks that
are not solid sawn (laminated wood planks) must bear the seal of an
independent, nationally recognized inspection agency to certify that
they comply with the design criteria in ANSI A10.8.
3. Fabricated Metal Scaffold Planks and Decks. Use fabricated
metal scaffold planks and decks only if they are marked by the
manufacturer to show the rated working load.
c. Width. Scaffolds, ramps, runways, and platforms must be wide
enough to prevent congestion of persons, materials, or equipment. They
must be at least 18 inches wide.
d. Lapped Planking. Planking, when lapped, must overlap at least
12 inches. Scaffold from 6 to 12 inches, or be cleated at 6 to 12 inches, or
else be cleated at both ends to prevent sliding off supports.
e. Flush Planking. When installed flush, the butt joint must be at the
centerline of a pole, and the plank ends supported by, and secured to,
separate bearers.
f. Corner Planking. When a scaffold changes direction, place and secure
planks to prevent tipping. Use diagonally installed bearers to support the
intended load and to prevent tipping.
g. Changing Levels. When moving platforms or planking to another
adjacent level, leave the old planking in place until you install the new
bearers.
13–8
October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
h. Working Surfaces. Fully plank or deck all working surfaces on
scaffolds. Place planking units as close together as possible. The decking
and guardrails must be no more than 9-1/2 inches apart.
13.2.3 Suspension Scaffolds.
a. General. Apply the following requirements when constructing and
using all types of suspension scaffolds.
1. Design. Design and construct all parts and components of
suspension scaffold systems with a minimum safety factor of four,
except the suspension ropes. • *
2. Suspension. Support suspension scaffolds by wire, synthetic, or
fiber ropes with a minimum safety factor of six. Secure suspension
scaffolds to outrigger beams. Equip the fixed ends of the suspension
ropes with a proper size thimble, secured by splicing or other
equivalent means, and attached to the supports by shackles. Securely
attach running ends of the suspension ropes to the hoisting drums.
Keep at least four turns of the rope on the drum at all times. Attach
the suspension ropes at the vertical centerline of the outrigger. The
attachment must be directly over the hoisting drum.
3. Outrigger Beams. Outrigger beams must be structural steel,
equivalent in strength to at least a standard 7-inch, 15.3-pound-per-
foot, steel I-beam. Outrigger beams must be at least 15 feet long.
Unless a PE designs outrigger beams for a specific use, they must not
extend more than 6.5 feet beyond the fulcrum or bearing point. Set
outrigger beams with their webs in the vertical position and anchor
them to the structure with U-bolts and anchor plates, washers, and nuts
(or equivalent). Rest the beams on wood-bearing blocks and install a
stop bolt on each end of every beam. When counterweights stabilize
the inboard ends of the outrigger beams, securely fasten the weight to
the outrigger beam and provide a safety factor of 4 to 1 against
overturning. Construct counterweights of solid material. Do not use
sandbags or other containers of material for counterweights.
4. Hoisting Devices. Equip all suspension scaffolds (except
stationary or crane supported) with either manual or powered hoisting
machines. The machines must be either worm geared or powered both
up and down. Design suspension scaffolds to stop independently of
manual braking; they must not move when power is not applied.
5. Hoist Safety Controls. Powered scaffolds must have constant
pressure, nonlocking controls. Install a device to shut off the power
ahead of the operating control. Design the speed control device to
prevent manual release.
October 2009 13-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
6. Scaffold Brackets. Scaffold brackets must be wrought iron or mild
steel. Do not use reinforcing steel as part of the support system.
7. Stability Control. Control suspension scaffolds with wire rope
guides or equivalent means, such as taglines, to prevent Sway. Install
3/4-inch, manilla rope tiebacks, or equivalent, on suspension scaffolds
as a secondary means of anchorage.
8. Plank-Type Platforms. Construct plank-type platforms of not less
than 2- by 10-inch scaffold planks, cleated together on the underside.
Install cleats within 6 inches of each end and at intervals no greater
than 4 feet along planks. The platform hangers must not be more than
8 feet apart, and the planking must not extend more than 12 inches past
the end hangers. Securely fasten the platform to the hangers.
9. Beam-Type Platforms. Side stringers for beam-type platforms
must be at least 2 by 6 inches and made of knot-free lumber, set on
edge. Support the flooring on 2- by 6-inch cross beams, laid flat and
set snugly into the top edge of stringers at intervals no greater than
4 feet. Flooring must be 1- by 6-inch lumber, nailed to the supports,
and spaced no more than 0.5 inch apart. Hangers must not be more
than 12 feet apart.
10. Metal Platforms. Use metal platforms only if they are tested and
listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
11. Safety Harnesses. When using suspension scaffolds, employees
must wear approved fall protection harnesses. Attach the harnesses to
a lifeline rigged independently of the scaffold system. An employee
does not need to use the lifeline if the system has independent wire
safety ropes installed at each end of the scaffold, with approved
grabbing and locking devices. However, each employee must wear a
safety harness with lanyard attached to the scaffold.
12. Overhead Protection. When an overhead hazard exists, erect
overhead protection of 3/4-inch exterior plywood (or equivalent
strength material). Overhead protection must be no more than 9 feet
above the decking.
13. Guardrails. Equip suspension scaffolds with standard guardrails
and toeboards on all sides and ends.
14. Operation. Only qualified persons trained in operating, using,
and inspecting the particular suspended scaffold may operate
suspended scaffolds.
13-10
October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
15. Testing and Maintenance. Test suspension scaffolds at twice
the intended working load before use. Before each shift begins,
inspect the Scaffold, including anchorage, rigging, and hoisting
machines. Maintain scaffolds and hoisting machines in safe, operable
condition.
b. Two-Point Suspension Scaffolds.
1. Platforms. Platforms of two-point suspension scaffolds must be
plank, beam, or metal type. Construct platforms according to the
requirements in this section. The platforms must be between 20 and
36 inches wide. Securely fasten platforms to the hangers with U-bolts
or other equivalent means.
2. Securing to building. At each elevated work station, secure the
scaffold to the building or structure to prevent sway or movement
away from the wall. Do not use window cleaner’s anchors for this
purpose.
13.2.4 Boatswain’s Chairs
a. Restrictions. Do not suspend boatswain’s chairs from cranes, derricks,
or any type of motorized hoist without prior approval.
b. Seat Design. The chair seat must be at least 12 by 24 inches and
1 inch thick. Reinforce the underside with cleats to prevent the seat from
splitting.
c. Seat Slings. The seat slings must be either fiber rope at least 5/8 inch
in diameter, or wire rope at least 3/8 inch in diameter. Thread the two
slings through the four seat holes so they cross each other on the bottom of
the seat. Construct boatswain’s chairs used for cutting, welding, or other
heat-producing operations with wire rope slings.
d. Safety Belts. Protect employees using boatswain’s chairs with safety
harness and lifelines.
13.2.5 Metal Scaffolds and Towers
a. General Requirements
1. Listing. A nationally recognized testing laboratory must list all
metal scaffolds and towers. Erect such scaffolds and towers according
to the manufacturer’s specifications. Do not exceed the design load
limits.
2. Access. Provide metal scaffolds and towers with access ladders or
Stairways.
October 2009 13-11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
3. Erection. Set sections of metal scaffolds plumb and securely
connect them together. Install all braces before using the scaffold.
Secure the entire scaffold together and brace it to the building or
structure at intervals no more than 30 feet apart horizontally and
26 feet vertically.
b. Tube and Coupler Scaffolds
1. Design. Design and construct tube and coupler scaffolds to the
specifications set forth in this paragraph. PEs must review all design
scaffolds.
2. Minimum Dimensions. Construct tube and coupler scaffolds of
steel tubing not less than the minimum diameters and maximum
spacing according to 29 CFR 1910.28.

Table 13–2.-Tube and coupler scaffold dimensions
tº- Medium Heavy
Component Light duty duty duty
Posts, runners, and bracing diameter (minimum) || 2 inches 2 inches 2 inches
Bearer diameter (minimum) - 2 inches 2.5 inches 2.5 inches
Post spacing (maximum length) - - 10 feet 8 feet | 6.5 feet
Post spacing (maximum width) 6 feet 6 feet 6 feet
Note: Design other spacing dimensions or other structural components, when used, to support an equivalent
load. Donot use dissimilar metal on the same scaffold frame. When tubing of metals other than steel are used,
they must be designed to support an equivalent load.
3. Bearers. Bearers must be at least 4 inches, but not more than
12 inches longer than the post or runner spacing. Install bearers
transversely between posts; secure the bearer coupler to the posts
bearing on the runner coupler.
4. Runners. Space runners no more than 6-1/2 feet apart on centers.
Make the bottom runners as close to the base as possible.
5. Transverse Bracing. Install transverse bracing, in an "X," across
the width of the scaffold at the top and bottom of the end posts, and at
every fourth runner vertically. Repeat this "X" bracing at every third
set of posts measured horizontally from one end of the scaffold.
6. Longitudinal Diagonal Bracing. Install longitudinal diagonal
bracing along the inside and outside rows of posts, beginning near the
bottom of the posts at one end and extending to the top of the posts at
the other end. Install the diagonal bracing at a 45-degree angle.
Couple longitudinal diagonal bracing to each runner it crosses.
13–12 October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
c. Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds
1. Design. Use tubular welded frame scaffold only if it is designed to
safely support four times the maximum rated load. Place the frames
directly over one another, using couplings or stacking pins to vertically
align the posts.
2. Height Limitation. A licensed PE must prepare drawings and
specifications for metal frame scaffolds that are more than 125 feet
high.
3. Uplift. Lock frame members together vertically with pins or other
equivalent means, whenever there is possibility that an uplift may
OCCUIT.
4. Cross Bracing. Properly brace metal tubular frame scaffold with
cross bracing or diagonal braces, or both, to secure vertical members.
The length of the cross braces must automatically square and align
vertical members. Make all brace connections secure.
d. Mobile Scaffolds
1. Maximum Height. Free-standing mobile scaffolds must be no
higher than four times the minimum base dimension.
2. Casters. Equip wheels and casters with a positive locking device
to prevent the scaffold from accidentally moving.
3. Moving. When moving mobile scaffolds, apply the force to move
them as close to the base of the scaffold as possible. Stabilize the
scaffold during movement. Use scaffolds only on firm, level, and
broom-clean surfaces.
• 4. Riding. Employees may ride manually propelled mobile
scaffolds only under the following conditions:
• The floor or surface is within 1.5 degrees of level and is free of
pits, holes, or obstructions.
• The minimum dimension of the scaffold base, when ready to
move, is at least one-half the height.
• If used, outriggers must be installed on both sides of staging.
• Equip wheels or coasters with rubber or similarly resilient tires.
• Remove tools and materials from the platform or secure them
prior to moving the scaffold.
October 2009 13–13
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
13.2.6 Form Scaffolds
a. Figure-Four Form Scaffolds
1. General. Use figure-four form scaffolds for light duty. Do not use
them to support loads more than 25 pounds per square foot, unless
specifically designed for greater loading.
2. Design and Construction. Design and construct figure-four form
scaffolds, incorporating the dimensions shown in table 13-3:

Table 13-3.−Figure-four scaffold dimensions
Component
Dimensions
Upright and guardrail
Upright or guardrail and ledger
Spacing
Guardrail height
Bearers (two)
Braces (two)
Intermediate guardrail
Maximum ledger length
Planking
TOeboards
2 x 4 inches minimum
8 feet 0 inch maximum
Approximately 42 inches
1x 6 inches minimum'
1 x 6 inches minimum
1 x 6 inches minimum
3 feet 6 inches beyond form support
member
2 x 10 inches minimum
4 inches minimum height
'Lumber sizes for components other than planking are nominal sizes.
3. Attachment to a Form. The form scaffold must be an integral part
of the form and nailed or bolted to the form studding.
b. Metal Bracket Form Scaffolds
1. Design. Metal bracket form scaffolds must be designed and
constructed with a minimum safety factor of four, computed on the
basis of maximum rated load.
The metal brackets may be of any
metal that will support the maximum rated load. Equip them with
standard guardrails and toeboards.
2. Attachment to Form. Space metal brackets no more than 8 feet
apart on centers. The brackets may be an integral part of the form. If
so, bolt or weld them to the form, or attach them using "clip-on" or
"hook-over" brackets, provided that you bolt the form walers to the
form or secure them with snap ties or shea-bolts extending through the
form and anchor securely.
3. Folding Brackets. Bolt or secure folding brackets in the extended
position with locking pins.
13-14
October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
13.2.7 Ladder–Jack Scaffolds
a. Requirement. Use only type 1A ladders with ladder-jack scaffolds.
The combined weight of workers, the planks, equipment, and materials
must not exceed the rated load of the ladders.
b. Height. The working platform of ladder-supported scaffolds must be
no more than 20 feet high.
c. Securing. To prevent ladders from moving, secure them at the top and
bottom with brackets.
d. Scaffold Planking. Only one person may occupy a ladder-jack
scaffold erected with wood scaffold planks. When using fabricated
planks, allow no more than two people on the plank.
e. Ladder Jacks. Design ladder jacks so that they bear on the side rails,
in addition to the ladder rungs, or they must bear on a minimum length of
10 inches on each rung.
f. Fall Protection. Protect employees using ladder-supported scaffolds
that are 6 feet or more above the ground or floor level with safety
harnesses and lifelines.
13.2.8 Special Work Platforms. A PE must design special work platforms,
such as draft tube scaffolds, and penstock jumbos. Recertify them every
5 years. A competent person must inspect them before each use.
13.2.9 Crane Supported Personnel Platforms (Manskips)
a. General Requirements. Use crane-supported personnel platforms to
reach the worksite only when conventional means of erection, use, and
dismantling (for example, personnel hoists, ladders, stairways, aerial lifts,
elevating work platforms, or scaffolding) are impossible or hazardous.
Use of crane-supported personnel platforms requires specific
authorization, must comply with the requirements of this subsection, and
requires supporting justification. The written request must be specific to
the operation and must: (1) detail the proposed operation with supporting
data that show why employees cannot safely reach the worksite using
other standard procedures and (2) confirm, with sufficient manufacturing
and design engineering data, that the proposed system and equipment fully
comply with the requirements contained herein. Approvals will be for the
Specific operation described. Do not use the platform system for any other
operation, unless an additional request has been submitted and approved.
Place approved systems in operation only after you have developed a JHA.
The JHA must contain provisions for initially and periodically instructing
the crane operator and all affected employees. Personnel must not work
from crane-Supported scaffolding except when under constant supervision
October 2009 13–15
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
of a general foreman or superintendent, or designated lift supervisor, and
the crane and operation meet the requirements of this subsection and the
section on cranes.
b. Specific Requirements
1. Hoist-Line Suspended Personnel Platforms
(a) Suspend platform only from the main boom nose.
(b) Do not handle personnel above ground when wind velocity
exceeds 10 miles per hour, when any dangerous weather condition
exists, or when other danger is impending.
(c) Keep cranes level during operation with outriggers fully
extended and jack pads set on firm, level terrain or on substantial
shoring.
(d) Select sites so that, when locating cranes for platform
operation, no part may come within the minimum distance from
energized lines. Do not use barriers, manufacturer’s locks, or
control level restraints to meet these requirements.
(e) Do not handle materials lifts when personnel are on the
platform. Detach the platform before rigging the crane for material
handling.
(f) Do not belt off or otherwise attach a platform to an adjacent
pole, structure, or equipment.
(g) Lifting and lowering speeds must not exceed 100 feet per
minute.
(h) Engage load and boom hoist drum brakes, swing brakes, and
locking devices (such as pawls or dogs) when the occupied
personnel platform is in the stationary position.
(i) When employees occupy platforms, they must wear body
harnesses with lanyards appropriately attached to the load block,
headache ball, or to a structural member of the platform.
Harnesses, lanyards, and structural support members used as
anchorages must meet requirements contained in the section that
discusses personal protective equipment and fall protection.
(j) Do not move a mobile-crane when employees are aloft.
(k) Employees must keep all body parts inside the platform during
raising, lowering, and positioning.
13-16
October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
2. Cranes
(a) Install and test the crane periodically, using the section on
hoisting equipment.
(b) Use only cranes equipped with planetary or worm gears, torque
converters, automatic braking systems, or other equivalent systems
that prevent placing the boom hoist and loadlines in a freewheeling
or neutral position controlled by manual brake and/or dogs only.
Use only the main hoist for personnel handling.
(c) The crane must be able to sustain a static load (as shown on the
crane’s capacity chart) of two times the rated platform capacity for
all radii and configurations through which the platform will be
hoisted.
(d) The minimum load hoist line wire rope safety factor must be 7
or 10 when using rotation-resistant rope.
(e) Install an anti-two-blocking device or two-block damage
prevention feature and ensure that it is operating. The anti-two
blocking device must have automatic capabilities for controlling
functions that may cause two-blocking conditions.
(f) Mark telescoping booms or equip them with a device that
clearly shows the boom’s extended length to the operator at all
times.
(g) All critical components of hydraulic or pneumatic systems
must have a minimum bursting strength of at least four times the
system’s designed operating pressure. (Critical components are
those in which a failure could result in free rotation or lowering of
the boom or platform.)
(h) Equip all critical hydraulic cylinders with pilot-operated check
valve, or other appropriate devices, to prevent freefall or
uncontrolled movement of boom or platform in the event of a
hydraulic line failure. Electrical systems used for positioning
platforms must provide equal protection in the event of power
failure.
(i) Make sure the crane is level within 1 percent and located on
firm footing. Extend and engage the outriggers.
October 2009
13-17
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
3. Platforms
(a) The crane manufacturer or a PE must design the personnel
platform.
(b) Suspension systems must be designed to minimize tipping of
the platform due to movement of employees on the platform.
(c) The entire platform must be designed with a minimum safety
factor of five.
(d) Provide 6-foot minimum headroom for employees on the
platform.
(e) Provide each personnel platform with perimeter protection
from the floor to 42 inches 3 inches above the floor. Perimeter
protection must be either solid construction or expanded metal
with openings no greater than one-half of an inch.
(f) Provide a grab rail inside the personnel platform.
(g) If you provide an access gate, make sure it swings inward and
equip it with a latch (restraining device) to prevent accidental
opening.
(h) Provide overhead protection on the personnel platform when
employees are exposed to falling objects.
(i) Grind smooth all exposed rough edges that employees on the
platform could contact.
(j) A certified welder, qualified for the weld grades, types, and
material specified in the design, must perform all welding.
(k) Conspicuously post a plate or other permanent marking on the
personnel platform showing the weight and the rated load capacity
of the personnel platform.
(1) Personnel platforms must be easily identifiable by color or
marking. Use personnel platforms only to hoist personnel and
approved tools and equipment.
(m) Use a wire rope bridle sling to connect the personnel platform
to the loadline.
13-18
October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
(n) You must close and lock hooks, headache ball assemblies,
lower load blocks, or other attachment assemblies, thus eliminating
the hook throat opening. Alternatively, use a shackle with a screw
pin, nut, and retaining pin.
(o) Wire rope, shackles, rings, and other rigging hardware must
have a minimum safety factor of seven.
4. Additional Inspections and Tests
(a) At the beginning of each shift, the competent person must
inspect cranes used to hoist personnel platforms. In addition,
inspect the crane again after using it for any material handling
operations, before using it to hoist employees.
(b) Before hoisting employees for the first time at each new setup
location, make a full-cycle operational test lift at 150 percent of the
intended load of the personnel platform.
(c) Note: Setup location means the location where the crane or
derrick is brought and set up, including assembly and leveling.
(d) Immediately after lift testing, visually inspect the crane,
personnel platform, and base support to determine if the testing has
adversely affected any component or structure.
(e) Before further use, correct any defects found during such
inspections that may create a safety hazard.
(f) At the beginning of each shift, and after using the crane to hoist
materials, make a trial lift with the personnel platform unoccupied
to make sure all systems, controls, and safety devices are
functioning properly.
5. Work Practices
(a) The crane operator must remain at the controls at all times
when the personnel platform is raised.
(b) Employees being hoisted must remain in direct communication
with the crane operator at all times.
(c) Hold a prelift meeting before each personnel hoisting
Operation. The crane operator, employees involved, and the
responsible general foreman, superintendent, or designated lift
Supervisor must attend the prelift meeting.
October 2009
13-19
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
13.2.10 System Scaffolds. System scaffold means a scaffold consisting of
posts with fixed connection points that accept runners, bearers, and diagonals
that can be connected at predetermined levels.
a. Scaffold Components. Do not intermix or modify the load-carrying
members of system scaffolding manufactured by different manufacturers
unless a competent person verifies that the resulting scaffold is structurally
Sound.
b. Erection. Erect the system scaffolding according to manufacturer’s
guidelines. The manufacturer’s guidelines for erecting and using system
scaffold must be on the jobsite while the scaffold is erected, used, and
dismantled. A PE must design scaffolds erected or used in a manner not
covered in the manufacturer’s guidelines.
c. Erection. Erect posts plumb, with runners and bearers level. Install
Vertical, horizontal, and diagonal bracing as recommended by the scaffold
manufacturer. Secure all connections on a scaffold level before
assembling the next level.
13.3 Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms
Design and use elevating and rotating work platforms according to the standards
set forth in applicable ANSI standards and these standards.
The design, construction, and operation of platforms and cranes must comply with
the current edition of ANSI A92.2, "Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating
Aerial Devices," or the manufacturer or PE for personnel platform work must
design and certify them. Mount personnel platforms on a crane boom only when
they conform with the more stringent of these or manufacturer’s requirements.
Control all crane operations from the platform with an overriding crane control
feature, except operations associated with travel. The crane and platform must
meet design safety factors, and employees must operate them according to
appropriate restrictions and requirements defined in this subsection.
13.4 Design and Construction of Guardrails
13.4.1 Standard Guardrails – Construction
a. Design. A standard guardrail must consist of a top rail, intermediate
rail, toeboard, and posts. The guardrail must be 42 inches high.
b. Dimension. Wooden posts and toprails must be at least 2- by 4-inch
construction grade lumber, or equivalent, with posts not more than 8 feet
apart on centers. Intermediate rails must be at least 1 inch by 6 inches.
Toeboards must be at least 4 inches high and installed within 1/2 inch of
the floor.
13–20 - October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
c. Pipe Guardrails. Posts, toprails, and intermediate rails must be at
least 1.5-inch inside diameter steel pipe with posts not more than 8 feet
apart on centers.
d. Metal Guardrails. Posts, toprails, and intermediate rails must be 2–
by 2- by 3/8-inch angle iron, or equivalent, with posts not more than 8 feet
apart on centers.
e. Guardrail Strength. Regardless of material used, the guardrail must
be able to withstand a loading of 200 pounds, applied in any direction at
any point on the toprail, with minimum deflection. The design of railings
that must withstand greater stress, because of the nature of use, must have
a minimum safety factor of four.
f. Rope Guardrails. Do not use wire, synthetic, or natural fiber ropes as
guardrails on scaffolds. Wire rope may be used for protective railings on
permanent structures during construction. When used, wire rope must
have sufficient tension so the maximum midspan deflection is less than 3
inches when applying a 200-pound force. Toprails and midrails must be at
least 1/4-inch in diameter. When using wire rope for the top rail, flag it
with high visibility material at intervals of 6 feet or less.
13.4.2 Standard Guardrails — Permanent
a. Design. Standard guardrails must have a top rail at least 42 inches
from the adjacent surface. Fill the opening between the toprail and the
adjacent surface with solid material, grills, or ornamental work, designed
so that a 4-inch ball cannot pass through any opening. However, if an
exception is made to use a midrail in industrial areas, the openings
between the midrail and the toprail, or the midrail and the adjacent
surface, must not exceed 21 inches.
b. Materials. Construct the toprail, grill material, and/or midrail of wood
or metal, strong enough to withstand a 200-pound force applied in any
direction with minimum deflection.
13.5 Safeguarding Floor and Roof Openings
13.5.1 Requirement. Cover the floor and roof openings, including skylights
into which persons can fall, with material and bracing that is strong enough to
support any imposed load, or protect it with a securely anchored enclosure
meeting the requirements of this subsection.
13.5.2 Protective Enclosure. Enclose all uncovered floor or roof openings
on open sides with a standard guardrail and toeboard, or provide a cover for
them that can sustain the expected load. At a minimum, the cover must be
able to sustain a load of 250 pounds.
October 2009 13–21
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
13.5.3 Stairways and Ladderway Openings. Provide all stairway and
ladderway floor openings with a standard guardrail and toeboard on exposed
sides (except the entrance). Offset entrances to stairways or ladderways, or
provide a gate to prevent persons from walking directly into the opening.
13.5.4 Hatchways and Chute Openings. Guard hatchways and chute floor
openings with one of the following:
a. Hinged covers that are strong enough to carry anticipated loads and a
standard guardrail with one exposed or open side. When the hatchway or
chute opening is not in use, keep the cover closed or guard the exposed
side with a removable standard guardrail.
b. A removable standard guardrail or self-closing gate installed on just
one side, and fixed standard guardrails and toeboards on all other exposed
sides. When not using the opening, keep the removable guardrails in
place. Guard chute openings into which debris is manually dumped.
Provide a guardrail on the side of the opening where employees stand
when they dump debris.
c. Removable standard guardrails, secured to the floor on all open or
exposed sides, installed to permit removal of only a section or side(s)
sufficiently large to perform the work. When the hatchway is not in use,
immediately replace the guardrail and secure it.
13.5.5 Doors and Gates. Provide a platform where doors or gates open
directly on a stairway. Make sure the swing of the door or gate does not
reduce the effective length of the platform to less than 20 inches.
13.6 Safeguarding Wall Openings
13.6.1 Requirement. If there is a drop of more than 4 feet from a wall
opening, and the bottom of the opening is less than 3 feet above the working
surface, provide a standard guardrail or guardrail components to afford
protection to a height of 42 inches above the working surface. Provide a
standard toeboard where the bottom of the wall opening is less than 4 inches
above the working surface.
13.6.2 Extension Platforms. Provide a standard guardrail and toeboard for
exposed sides of extension platforms, outside of wall openings, that provide
access for materials, equipment, or personnel.
13.7 Safeguarding Open Floors and Platforms
13.7.1 Requirement. Guard the perimeter of all floors, platforms, etc., 6 feet
or more above adjacent floor or ground level by installing guardrails or
equivalent guarding, unless or until permanently enclosed to a height of 3 feet
13–22 - October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
or more above the floor or working surface. Provide standard toeboards
where falling objects pose a hazard to persons or property.
13.7.2 Hazardous Locations. In locations where a hazardous condition
exists (such as projecting reinforcing steel, moving equipment, or hazardous
materials), provide standard guardrails, regardless of height.
13.7.3 Protection From Falling Objects. When employees must work
under an open-sided wall opening or platform where a falling objects hazard
exists, install effective protection, such as enclosed guardrails or nets, as
described in this section and the section on fall protection.
13.8 Requirements for Roofing Protection
13.8.1 Requirement. Whenever employees work on roofs during
construction, demolition, or repair and maintenance, and they are subject to
falls exceeding 6 feet from the adjoining surface, provide adequate fall
protection devices. Employees are subject to falls when working within 10
feet of the roof edge or when working in any place on a roof with a pitch
steeper than 1:3.
13.8.2 Fall Protection. Adequate fall protection includes the following:
a. Restraining lines, harnesses, lanyards, and safety nets meeting the
requirements in the section on fall protection.
b. Standard guardrails meeting the requirements of this section.
c. Catch platform.
d. Warning line system supplemented by a safety monitoring system is
only adequate on roofs with pitch flatter than 1:3.
13.8.3 Warning Line System. Erect warning lines around all open sides of
the work area. When mechanical equipment is not in use, erect the warning
lines at least 6 feet from the roof edge or opening. When mechanical
equipment is in use, erect the warning line at least 6 feet from the roof edge or
opening that is parallel to the direction of mechanical equipment operation,
and at least 10 feet from the roof edge or opening that is perpendicular to the
direction of mechanical equipment operation. Do not work outside warning
lines without fall protection.
a. The warning lines must be rope, wire, or chain, with a minimum
breaking strength of 500 pounds. Attach warning lines to supporting
stanchions. Mark the warning line with high-visibility material at
intervals no more than 6 feet. Rig the warning line so that it is at least
34 inches from the roof surface at its lowest point and no more than
39 inches at its highest point.
October 2009 13–23
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. After erection, the warning lines and stanchions must be able to support
a minimum force of 16 pounds applied horizontally 30 inches above the
floor.
c. Safety monitor. When using a warning line system, supplement it with
a safety monitoring system. Assign a competent person to be the safety
monitor. The safety monitor must ensure the safety of all employees
working on the roof and warn any employee who appears unaware of a
hazard or is acting unsafely. The safety monitor must be on the same roof
as the employees, within visual sight of the employees, and close enough
to verbally communicate with them. The safety monitor must not perform
any other work.
13.8.4 Overhead Protection. Require overhead protection for all employees
working under the roof edge. You may use temporary decking, suspended
platforms, nets, or other equivalent devices to provide such overhead
protection.
13.8.5 Roof Edge Materials Handling Areas and Materials Storage.
When using guardrails at hoisting areas, bitumen pipe outlet areas, or roof
edge storage areas, erect at least 4 feet of guardrail on each side of the area.
a. Place a chain or gate across the opening between the guardrail sections
when not handling materials.
b. Protect employees working in the vicinity of the open guardrail with a
safety belt or harness and lanyard system. Rig the safety belt system so
that employees cannot move beyond the edge of the roof.
c. If roofs are more than 16 feet high, install a hoisting device, stairway,
or progressive platform to supply material and equipment. Provide level
landing platforms with guardrails and toeboards at the roof edge.
13.8.6 Crawling Boards (Chicken Ladders). Use crawling boards to help
employees climb up and down steep roofs. Crawling boards must be at least
10 inches wide and 1 inch thick, with 1- by 1.5-inch cleats spaced not more
than 24 inches apart. The lengthened cleats must equal the width of the crawl
board. Secure the cleats with nails driven through the crawl board and
clinched on the underside. The crawling board must extend from the ridge
pole to the eaves. String a securely fastened grabline beside each crawl board.
Grablines must be of 3/4-inch manila rope, or equivalent.
13.8.7 Roofing Brackets. Secure roofing brackets in place by nailing, in
addition to using metal projections. If it is not practical to nail the brackets,
use rope supports that are 3/4-inch manila rope, or equivalent.
13.8.8 Training. Implement a training program for all employees working
on a roof. The training program must enable employees to recognize and deal
13–24 October 2009
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces
with the falling hazards associated with working near a roof perimeter or roof
opening. The training must cover the following areas:
a. The nature of the fall hazards.
b. The function, use, and operation of the fall protection systems, warning
line system, and safety monitoring systems in use.
c. Each employee’s role in the safety monitoring system when this system
is in use.
d. The correct procedures for handling and storing equipment and
materials. -
October 2009 13–25
Section 14
Confined Spaces
14.1 Purpose and Scope
This section establishes requirements for confined and permit required spaces. It
specifically discusses the general and program requirements for permit required
confined spaces; training requirements; and the duties of entrants, attendants, and
the entry supervisor.
Underground construction activities must also comply with the requirements of
tunnel and shaft construction. Tunnels are classified as confined spaces and
usually permit-required confined spaces. Entry into tunnels must be conducted in
accordance with the requirements of the confined space program, and address the
specific hazards associated with distance, communication, physical demands, and
emergency rescue, in addition to all other requirements.
The determination of whether a space is a permit-required confined space is
contingent upon two factors. The first factor is solely based on physical
characteristics of the space itself. A "confined space" must be large enough and
so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned work, have
limited or restricted means for entry or exit, and not be designed for continuous
employee occupancy. If the space is so configured, then the second factor is
whether the space contains or the activities introduce any hazard capable of
causing death or serious physical harm. A space would be classified as a "permit-
required" confined space if it either contained, or has a potential to contain, a
hazardous atmosphere, a material which has the potential to engulf an entrant, an
internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated, or
contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.
14.2 Applicable Definitions
The following definitions apply to this discussion of confined spaces.
Confined Space A space large enough for an employee to enter,
but with limited means of entry and egress, and
which is not designed for continuous human
Occupancy.
Permit Required Confined A confined space in which one or more of the
following:
Space potential hazards or existing conditions: (a) the
space contains, or may contain, an atmospheric
hazard; (b) the space contains a potential
October 2009 14–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Entrant
Attendant
Confined Space Supervisor
Confined Space Program
Prohibited Conditions
engulfment hazard (i.e., water or other flowable
material which may engulf an entrant); (c) the
space has a configuration which may trap or
asphyxiate an entrant; (d) the space has any
other serious safety or health hazard. A serious
safety or health hazard for purposes of this
standard means a hazard which may render an
entrant incapable of self-rescue.
A person trained and authorized to enter
confined spaces under conditions documented in
the local confined space permit.
A person trained and authorized to perform
attending duties as prescribed in the confined
Space program.
A person trained and authorized to conduct,
approve, and oversee entries into confined
Spaces.
A site-specific program that establishes the
procedures for permit-required confined spaces,
identifies the persons authorized to perform the
various duties, and includes the emergency
procedures, equipment, and communication.
A condition within a confined space that
indicates that a control measure specified in the
permit has become ineffective or that a hazard
exists within the space that was not anticipated
and for which no control measure is in place.
Other definitions applicable to confined spaces can be found in OSHA 1910.146
(b) or on the Internet at the following website address: http://www.osha.gov/
14–2
October 2009
Section 14—Confined Spaces
14.3 Requirements for Confined Spaces
14.3.1 Maintain an inventory of permit-required confined spaces and the
active and closed permits at each facility. The inventory must identify the
space and its associated hazards that must be controlled before entry.
14.3.2. Do not enter permit required confined spaces until a program for
managing such entries is in place and all of the requirements of that program
have been met.
14.3.3 Place a danger sign at each entrance to each permit required confined
space. The danger sign must identify the space as a permit required confined
space and have additional instructions such as "authorized entrants only", or
"entry prohibited."
14.3.4. Every employee whose assigned duties require entry into a permit
required confined space must be trained in the requirements of this standard,
the hazards of confined spaces, the measures used to control or eliminate
those hazards, and the specific duties assigned.
Each document developed for confined space entries, including the program,
the inventory, the closed entry permits, analysis for reclassification, written
hazard analysis and determination for alternative entry procedures, rescue
procedures, and training verification for participating
14.3.5 Personnel must be maintained in the facility files and be made
available for review.
14.4 Program Requirements for Confined Spaces
14.4.1 The confined space program must establish the procedures for issuing
and canceling permits, testing and preparing the space prior to entry, the
communications required between entrants and attendants, the acceptable
entry conditions, the rescue procedures, and the program documentation and
review required. As a minimum, it shall provide for the following:
a. Program Coordinator. Identifying a program coordinator who is
knowledgeable and responsible for implementing the confined space entry
program at the site. This coordinator will be delegated sufficient authority
to implement the program.
b. Confined Spaces. Before removing any cover to a confined space,
determine that it is safe to do so. Immediately upon removing the cover,
erect a barrier to prevent unauthorized entry into the space. If the opening
into the space is a floor opening, the barrier must meet the requirements
for a standard guardrail.
October 2009 14–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
c. Permit. Before entry, complete a permit that contains the following
information:
The identification of the space to be entered.
The purpose of the entry.
The time of entry and the expected duration.
The names of the entrants, attendants, and the entry supervisor.
Results of any atmospheric testing for oxygen content, lower
explosive limit, and toxic air contaminants, including the name of
the qualified person conducting the testing.
The control measures in place to control the hazards that caused
the space to be classified as a permit-required confined space.
A description of the hazards that may be introduced by the work to
be performed in the space, and the measures in place to control
those hazards.
A description of the communications equipment and methods to be
used to maintain communications between the entrants and the
attendant(s).
A list of the equipment to be used to conduct a safe entry and work
in the space, including personal protective equipment that must be
WOTI1.
A list of the prohibited conditions that would require an immediate
evacuation of the space.
A written rescue plan that identifies the rescue service and the
means for contacting the rescue services. Coordination with local
contracted agencies or in-house personnel must be established and
verified prior to entry.
The signature of the confined space entry supervisor, certifying
that the space is safe to enter, and authorizing entry.
d. Additional Documents. Documents required by other standards such
as Switching procedures, clearances, hazardous energy control document,
or hot work permits related to the work in the confined space must be
attached to the confined space permit and be retained in the confined space
files.
e. Air Testing Requirements. If atmospheric hazards or potential
atmospheric hazards are identified for a particular confined space, the air
inside the space shall be tested for oxygen content, flammable atmosphere,
or toxic contaminants by a qualified person using a properly calibrated
direct reading instrument prior to entry, and periodically, preferably
continuously, during an entry, and while performing work in the permit
14-4
October 2009
Section 14—Confined Spaces
required confined space. If testing is done using separate instruments, the
order of testing shall be oxygen first, then flammability, then toxic
contaminants. Employees or representatives of employees must be
afforded an opportunity to observe any testing and results. Continuous air
monitoring is highly advised, where practicable.
f. Control or Elimination of Hazards. Each hazard that caused the
confined space to be classified as a permit-required confined space or will
be introduced into the space as a result of the work to be performed must
be controlled to the extent possible, or eliminated before entering the
Space.
g. Re-evaluation of Confined Space. The program must provide for a
re-evaluation of all confined spaces whenever condition in those spaces
change.
h. Communication Between Entrant(s) and Attendant(s).
Communication between entrants and attendants are required for the
duration of the permit required confined space work. Loss of
communication is a prohibited condition requiring evacuation of the space
and termination of the entry until communication can be restored.
Communication may be by voice, land-line, radio, signaling system, or
other reliable method. -
i. Permit. In the permit, list all equipment necessary for safe entry into
confined spaces, including monitoring equipment, ventilation equipment,
rescue equipment, lighting equipment, personal protective equipment, and
other equipment such as ladders and railings.
j. Provisions for Rescue. For every permitted entry into a confined
space, the permit must include a plan for rescuing the entrants. The
adequacy of the rescue plan must be verified before entry into the space.
The selected rescue service’s response time and rescue capability should
be evaluated. Any one of the following three rescue procedures, generally
in order of preference, are adequate:
1. Rescue Without Entry. Make provision for rescuing entrants
without entry by rescue team members, whenever possible. To
facilitate such rescue without entry, entrants must wear a full body
harness attached to a lifeline. The other end of the lifeline must be
attached to a hoisting device to permit the attendant to begin rescue
immediately if a prohibited condition arises in the space. If the full
body harness presents a greater hazard, other rescue provisions must
be used in lieu of the full body harness.
October 2009 14-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
2. Employee Rescue. A designated group of employees trained and
equipped to enter the confined space to rescue an incapacitated entrant.
The designated rescue team must have practiced rescue from the space
entered (or a similar space) within the last year. Before entry, the
confined space entry supervisor must verify that an adequate number
of rescue team members are available to make a timely response to an
emergency, and must verify that the rescue team members have
current training. The procedure for summoning the response must be
established, and the attendant must have the means to issue the
SUIII]11]O11S.
3. Outside Rescue Service. A commercial ambulance service or
local fire department may be able to perform a rescue from a confined
space, provided that there is an agreement and members have
appropriate training and equipment. Reliance on a general emergency
phone number available to the general public is not adequate without
the written agreement. It is the responsibility of the entry supervisor to
verify that the selected rescue service is qualified to perform a rescue,
has current training, and is available at the time of the entry. The
adequacy of the response time must be considered in selecting an
outside rescue service. If the rescue service cannot make a timely
response to a summons, they may be required to standby in the area of
the access to the confined space. The attendant must have the means
and be trained in the procedure for summoning the outside rescue
squad. The outside rescue service must notify the attendant if some
other emergency compromises their response capability. The
attendant must then terminate the entry.
k. Alternative Entry Procedure. The program may provide for entry
into permit-required confined spaces under carefully controlled conditions.
If such alternative procedures are provided for in the program, the
following conditions must be met:
1. No hazards, such as potential engulfment or serious safety hazards,
other than actual or potential atmospheric hazards exist in the space.
2. The atmospheric hazards can be (are) controlled by continuous
mechanical ventilation. Employees are not allowed to enter the space
until forced air ventilation has eliminated the hazardous atmosphere.
3. Air testing is conducted before and after application of the
ventilation and periodically, preferably continuously, for the duration
of the entry. Employees or representatives of employees are provided
an opportunity to observe the air testing and results.
14-6
October 2009
Section 14—Confined Spaces
4. The entrants are trained and qualified confined space entrants.
5. An alternative entry certificate is created and signed by a qualified
confined space supervisor certifying that the above conditions have
been met, and identifying the space, the purpose of the entry, the time
of entry, and the entrants. Post the certificate at the point of entry into
the Space for the duration of the entry and file it in the confined space
program files after termination of the entry.
l. Temporary Declassification of a Space. When no actual or potential
atmospheric hazards are present, and the other hazards that caused the
Space to be considered a permit required confined space can be eliminated
without entry into the space, a confined space can be temporarily
identified as a non-permit confined space. Any such declassification must
be approved by the qualified confined space supervisor on a certificate of
declassification which identifies the space, the actions taken to eliminate
the hazards, and the time for which the declassification is valid. The
certificate will be posted at the point of entry for the period of validity,
which will not exceed one shift, and filed in the confined space program
files at expiration.
m. Contractors and Outside Entities. If confined spaces are to be
entered by contractors or other outside entities who do not normally work
in that facility, either alone, or in conjunction with the facility staff, the
program must describe the coordination and controls which will be applied
to such outside entity to assure a safe entry into a confined space.
n. Program Review. The program must be reviewed by the confined
Space program coordinator at least annually, and more frequently if
necessary. Any prohibited condition or near-miss incident arising in a
confined space will be investigated immediately.
14.5 Training Requirements
Each person who will be assigned duties in a confined space program shall be
trained to perform those duties safely and competently. The training instructor
must sign the certificate and include on it the date of training, the individuals
trained, and the qualifications of persons trained.
14.5.1 Retraining. Retraining prior to assignment of additional confined
space duties is required under any of the follow conditions:
a. The individual fails to perform the duties assigned in accordance with
the program.
b. The individual has not performed any confined space work for a period
of 1 year.
October 2009 14-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
c. Changes are made in the program.
d. Individual or supervisory request.
e. The individual has been involved in an accident or near-miss accident.
14.6 Duties of Entrants
14.6.1 Entrants must know the hazards that may be encountered during the
entry and be able to recognize when those hazards are present.
14.6.2 Entrants must properly use the equipment provided for entry into the
confined space.
14.6.3 Entrants must maintain communication with the attendant.
14.6.4 Entrants must tell the attendant whenever: (a) the entrant recognizes
any warning sign, or symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation, or (b) a
prohibited condition is detected.
14.6.5 Entrants must immediately exit the permit space whenever (a) an order
to evacuate is given, (b) a warning sign or symptom of exposure is
recognized, (c) a prohibited condition is detected, or (d) an evacuation alarm
is sounded.
14.7 Duties of Attendants
14.7.1 Attendants must know the hazards that may be encountered in the
confined space they are attending.
14.7.2 Attendants must be able to recognize the behavioral effects that
exposure to a hazardous condition may have on entrants.
14.7.3 Attendants must know at all times the number and identity of the
entrants inside the attended space.
14.7.4 The attendant must remain outside the attended space unless relieved
by another authorized attendant. Attendants may not enter the space unless
relieved by another attendant who is trained, equipped, and authorized to
perform attendant duties at that location.
14.7.5 Attendants must maintain communications with entrants to monitor
their condition and to order an evacuation when necessary.
14.7.6 Attendants must order an evacuation of the permit space if: (a) the
attendant detects a prohibited condition or is notified of a prohibited condition
by an entrant (b) the attendant detects entrant behaviors indicating potential
14–8 October 2009
Section 14—Confined Spaces
exposure to a hazardous situation, (c) the attendant detects a condition outside
the space which may endanger the entrants, or (d) the attendant is unable to
safely perform all of the duties.
14.7.7 The attendant must summon the rescue service as soon as it appears
that the authorized entrants may need assistance to escape from hazards within
the space.
14.7.8 The attendant must prevent unauthorized persons from entering the
confined space and notify the entry supervisor and the entrants if an
unauthorized person enters the space.
14.7.9 The attendant may perform nonentry rescue if specified on the Entry
Permit.
14.7.10 The attendant may not be assigned any other duties that will interfere
with his/her primary duty to monitor and protect the entrants.
14.8 Duties of the Entry Supervisor
14.8.1 The entry supervisor must know the hazards that may be encountered
during the entry and be able to recognize the behavioral effects that exposure
to a hazardous condition may have on entrants.
14.8.2. The entry supervisor must verify that appropriate steps have been
taken to make the space safe for entry and record this before allowing entry.
14.8.3 The entry supervisor must hold a meeting with entrants and attendants
before entry. At the meeting, the entry supervisor must review the hazards
associated with the space to be entered, the control measures in place to
mitigate the hazards, the results of air monitoring within the space, and
prohibited conditions that would require an evacuation of the space. He/she
must also verify that the entrants and attendants are trained and understand
their duties associated with the entry and work in the confined space.
14.8.4 The entry supervisor must terminate the entry and cancel the permit
when (1) the work is completed, (2) a prohibited condition arises in the space,
or (3) an evacuation of the space is ordered. If the permit is terminated, the
space must be re-evaluated before issuing a new permit to complete the work.
14.8.5 The entry supervisor must remove unauthorized individuals who
attempt to enter the permitted space.
14.8.6. The entry supervisor must verify the capability and availability of
rescue Services and the means for summoning them prior to authorizing entry
into a confined space.
October 2009 14-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
14.8.7 When responsibility for a permit space entry is transferred to a new
entry supervisor, the entry supervisor accepting the responsibility for the
space must verify that the operations within the space are consistent with the
permit.
14-10 October 2009
Section 15
Control of Hazardous Energy(Lockout/Tagout)
15.1 Scope and Purpose of Lockout/Tagout Program
The unexpected energization, release of stored energy, or startup of machines or
equipment can injure employees. This section covers servicing and maintenance
of these machines or equipment. It establishes minimum performance
requirements to control such hazardous energy at all Reclamation-operated
facilities. Contractor work at Reclamation-owned and/or -operated facilities must
comply with any existing hazardous energy control procedures of the facility. The
section on Electrical Safety contains additional requirements for electrical
clearance procedures to control hazardous energy sources.
15.1.1 Application. This standard applies to the control of energy when
installing, removing, servicing, or maintaining machines and equipment. This
Standard applies to any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic,
chemical, thermal, or other energy, but does not apply to the following:
a. Work on cord and plug connected electric equipment in which
unplugging the equipment from the energy source controls the exposure to
the hazards of unexpected energization or startup of the equipment and the
plug is under the exclusive control of the employee servicing or
maintaining the equipment.
b. Hot tap operations involving transmission and distribution of substances
Such as gas, steam, water, or petroleum products when they are performed
on pressurized pipelines, provided that the employer demonstrates that
(1) continuity of service is essential; (2) shutdown of the system is
impractical; and (3) documented procedures are followed and special
equipment is used that will effectively protect employees.
15.1.2 Purpose. This section requires the establishment of a hazardous
energy control program and the use of procedures to affix appropriate lockout
devices or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, and to otherwise disable
machines or equipment to prevent unexpected energization, startup, or release
of stored energy to prevent injury. When required by other sections, use
lockout or tagout devices and supplement them with the procedural and
training requirements of this section.
October 2009 15–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
15.1.3 Definitions
Affected person
Authorized employee
Capable of being locked out
Energized
Energy isolating device
An employee whose job requires them to
operate or use a system on which servicing
or maintenance is being performed under
lockout or tagout, or whose job requires
them to work in an area where such
servicing or maintenance is being
performed.
A qualified person who locks out or tags out
machines or equipment in order to perform
servicing or maintenance on that machine or
equipment. An affected employee becomes
an authorized employee when that
employee’s duties include performing
servicing or maintenance covered under this
section.
An energy isolating device has a built-in
lock, a hasp, or other means for affixing a
lock. Other energy isolating devices are
capable of being locked out if lockout can be
achieved without dismantling, rebuilding, or
replacing the energy isolating device or
permanently altering its energy control
capability (i.e., vendor devices that will
make energy isolating device lockable).
Connection to an energy source or
containing residual or stored energy.
A mechanical device that physically
prevents the transmission or release of
energy, including, but not limited to the
following: manually operated circuit
breakers, disconnect switches, slide gates,
line valves, blocks, or similar devices
capable of blocking or isolating energy. The
term does not include push buttons, selector
switches, and other control circuit type
devices.
15–2
October 2009
Section 15—Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)
Energy source
Hot tap
Job supervisor
Lockout
Lockout device
Responsible official
Servicing or maintenance
Any source of electrical, mechanical,
hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal,
nuclear, stored, or other energy.
Work involving welding on a piece of
equipment (pipelines, vessels, or tanks)
under pressure, to install connections or
appurtenances. It is commonly used to
replace or add sections of pipeline without
interrupting service for air, gas, water,
steam, and petrochemical distribution
Systems.
Any person authorized to request, receive,
and release clearances or Hot Line Orders
and who is responsible for meeting the
requirements of the Hazardous Energy
Control Program.
Placing a lockout device on an energy
isolating device, in accordance with an
established procedure, ensuring that the
energy isolating device and the equipment
being controlled cannot be operated until the
lockout device is removed.
A device that uses a positive means such as
a physical lock, to hold an energy isolating
device in the safe position and to prevent the
energizing of a machine or equipment.
Lockout devices include blank flanges and
bolted slip blinds.
The manager responsible for administering
the Hazardous Energy Control Program.
Workplace activities such as constructing,
installing, setting up, adjusting, inspecting,
modifying, and maintaining or servicing
machines or equipment. These activities
include lubricating, cleaning, or unjamming
machines or equipment and making
adjustments or tool changes where the
employee may be exposed to the unexpected
energization or startup of equipment, or
release of hazardous energy.
October 2009
15–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Setting up
Tagout
Tagout device
Work to prepare a machine or equipment for
normal production operation.
Attaching a tag on an energy isolating
device, in accordance with an established
procedure, to indicate that employees must
not operate the energy isolating device or
the equipment until the tagout device is
removed.
A prominent visible warning device, such as
a tag with a means of attachment, which can
be securely fastened to an energy isolating
device in accordance with established
procedures, to indicate that employees must
not operate the energy isolating device until
the tagout device is removed.
15.2 Requirements of the Hazardous Energy Program
15.2.1 Program. Each Reclamation facility and each contractor must have a
written Hazardous Energy Control Program that includes written procedures,
personnel training, and periodic inspections to ensure that before any
employee performs any servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment
in which the unexpected energizing, startup, or release of stored energy could
occur and cause injury or death, the machine or equipment is isolated from all
hazardous energy sources.
15.2.2 Energy Control Procedure
a. The procedures must clearly and specifically outline the scope,
purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to control hazardous energy
and the means to ensure compliance including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure.
2. Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking
and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy.
3. Specific procedural steps for placing, removing, and
transferring lockout devices or tagout devices and the
responsibility for them.
4. Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to
determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout
devices, and other energy control measures.
15–4
October 2009
Section 15—Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)
b. You do not need to document the procedures for a particular machine
or equipment when all of the following elements exist:
1. The machine or equipment has no potential for stored or
residual energy or reaccumulation of stored energy after
shutdown that could endanger employees.
2. The machine or equipment has a readily identified and isolated,
single energy source that will completely deemergize and deactivate
the machine or equipment.
3. The machine or equipment is isolated from that energy source
and locked out during installation, removal, servicing or
maintenance.
4. A single lockout device will achieve a locked-out condition.
5. The lockout device is under the exclusive control of the
authorized employee performing the servicing or maintenance.
6. The servicing or maintenance does not create hazards for other
employees.
7. No accidents involving the unexpected activation or
reenergization of the machine or equipment during servicing or
maintenance have occurred.
15.2.3 Lockout/Tagout
a. If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out, the
Hazardous Energy Control Program must use lockout procedures, unless
the employer can justify an operational need to use a tagout system instead
of locking out. The employer must demonstrate that using a tagout System
will fully protect employees.
b. If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked out, the
Hazardous Energy Control Program must use a tagout system.
c. Whenever replacing, making major repairs to, renovating, or modifying
a machine or equipment, and whenever installing new machines or
equipment, the design of energy isolating devices for the machine or
equipment must be designed to accept a lockout device.
15.2.4 Full Personnel Protection
a. When using a tagout device on an energy isolating device that is
capable of being locked out, attach the tagout device at the same place you
would have attached the lockout device. The employer must demonstrate
that the tagout program will provide the same level of safety as a lockout
program. Tagout alone is not considered as protective as lockout;
therefore, additional measures must be taken.
October 2009 15–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. In demonstrating that the tagout program provides an equivalent level
of safety as a lockout program, the employer must demonstrate full
compliance with all tagout-related provisions of this section, together with
such additional elements needed to provide the same level of safety as a
lockout device. Full personnel protection must include implementing
additional safety measures, such as removing an isolating circuit element,
blocking a controlling switch, opening an extra disconnecting device, or
removing a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent
energization.
15.2.5 Protective Materials and Hardware
a. Use locks, tags, chains, wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self-locking
fasteners, or other hardware will be provided to isolate, secure, or block
machines or equipment from energy sources.
b. Lockout devices and tagout devices must be singularly identified, must
be the only device(s) used to control energy, must not be used for other
purposes, and must meet the following requirements:
1. Durable.
(a) Lockout and tagout devices must be capable of withstanding
their environment for the maximum expected exposure.
(b) The construction and printing of tagout devices must prevent
the tag from deteriorating or the message on the tag from
becoming illegible when exposed to weather conditions or wet and
damp locations.
(c) Tags must not deteriorate when used in corrosive environments
such as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and
stored.
2. Standardized.
(a) Lockout devices within the facility must be of the same color,
shape, and size.
3. Substantial.
(a) Lockout Devices. Lockout devices must be substantial enough
to prevent removal without using excessive force or unusual
techniques, such as bolt cutters or other metal cutting tools.
15-6 October 2009
Section 15—Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)
(b) Tagout Devices. Tagout devices, including their means of
attachment, must be substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or
accidental removal. The means to attach tagout devices must be
nonreusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and
nonreleasable with a minimum unlocking strength of at least
50 pounds and at least equivalent in general design and basic
characteristics, to a one-piece, all environment-tolerant, nylon
cable tie.
4. Identifiable.
(a) Lockout devices and tagout devices must indicate who applied
the device(s).
c. Tagout devices must warn against hazardous conditions if the machine
or equipment is energized and must include a legend such as: DO NOT
START, DO NOT OPEN, DO NOT CLOSE, DO NOT ENERGIZE, DO
NOT OPERATE.
15.2.6 Energy Isolation. Only authorized personnel may perform lockout or
tagout.
15.2.7. Notification of Personnel. The job supervisor or authorized person
must notify affected employees after lockout or tagout devices have been
placed or removed and before machines or equipment are started.
15.2.8 Periodic Inspection. At least annually, conduct inspections to ensure
adherence to all requirements of the hazardous energy control program. As a
part of the inspection, inspect each energy control procedure used at the
facility. The responsible official must certify that the inspections have been
performed. The certification must specify the system on which the energy
control procedures were used when inspected, the date of the inspections, and
the names of employees and included in the inspections.
a. A qualified individual who does not use the specific hazardous energy
control procedure must inspect it annually.
b. Annual inspections of hazardous energy control programs and
procedures must include a review between the inspector and employees
involved in use of the procedures to assess individual, personal knowledge
of, and responsibilities under the program.
c. Document any deficiencies and take appropriate measures to correct the
deficiencies and to ensure future compliance.
d. Conduct additional inspections when an incident occurs.
October 2009 15–7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
15.2.9 Training and Communication
a. Provide annual training to ensure that employees understand the
purpose and procedures of the energy control program and that they
acquire the knowledge and skills to safely apply, use, and remove the
energy controls. All employees involved with hazardous energy control
procedures must have initial training and must demonstrate adequate
working knowledge of hazardous energy control policies and local
programs and procedures before they are placed on the list of authorized
personnel. The training must include the following:
1. Each authorized employee must receive training in recognizing
applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of
the energy available in the workplace, and the methods and means
necessary for energy isolation and control.
2. Each affected employee must be instructed in the purpose and
use of energy control procedures.
3. All other persons whose work is, or may be, in an area where
energy control procedures may be used, must be instructed about
the procedure, and about the prohibition relating to attempts to
restart or reenergize machines or equipment that are locked out or
tagged out.
b. When tagout systems are used, also train employees in the following
limitations of tags:
1. Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating
devices and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices
that is provided by a lock.
2. A tag attached to an energy isolating device must not be
removed without authorization of the employee responsible for it,
and it must never be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated.
3. Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized
employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose
work operations are in, or may be in, the area.
4. Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials
that will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in
the workplace.
5. Tags may evoke a false sense of security; understanding
hazards, verification, and absolute vigilance must be understood
as part of the overall energy control program.
15–8
October 2009
Section 15—Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)
6. Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so
that they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during
UIS®.
c. Provide retraining:
1. For all authorized and affected employees whenever job
assignments change, systems or processes that present a new
energy control hazard change, or when energy control procedures
change.
2. Whenever any inspection reveals, or there is reason to suspect,
deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or
use of the energy control procedures.
3. At least annually.
d. The responsible official must certify and document all training and
retraining. Certification must contain such information as the name of the
employee, the time, date, and location of training, and the name of the
trainer.
15.3 Application of Energy Control
The established procedures or applying energy control (the lockout or tagout
procedures) must cover the following elements and actions and must be done in
the following sequence:
15.3.1 Preparation for Shutdown. Before an authorized person or affected
employee turns off a system (machine or equipment), the authorized person
must have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of
the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the energy.
15.3.2 System (Machine or Equipment) Shutdown. Turn off or shut down
the machine or equipment, using the procedures established for the machine or
equipment. Use an orderly shutdown to avoid any additional or increased
hazard(s) to employees resulting from equipment stoppage.
15.3.3 System (Machine or Equipment) Isolation. Physically locate and
operate each energy isolating device needed to control the energy to the
machine or equipment to isolate it from the energy source(s).
15.3.4 Lockout or Tagout Device Application
a. Allow only authorized persons to affix lockout or tagout devices to
each energy isolating device.
b. Affix lockout devices, where used, to hold the energy isolating devices
in a "safe" or "off" position.
October 2009 15-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
c. Affix tagout devices, where used, to clearly indicate that operating or
moving energy isolating devices from the "safe" or "off" position is
prohibited.
1. Systems with energy isolating devices that are capable of being
locked out must use locking devices. If you cannot affix locking
devices, affix tagout devices at the same point of attachment as a
locking device.
2. If you cannot affix a tag directly to the energy isolating device,
locate the tag as close as safely possible to the device, in a position
that will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate
the device.
15.3.5 Stored Energy. Energy storage devices or equipment capable of
storing energy may include, but are not limited to, capacitors; power
electronic equipment; pneumatic, such as plant service compressed air and
governor pressurized oil systems; and mechanical, such as raised gates and
charged Springs.
a. After affixing lockout or tagout devices to energy isolating devices,
relieve, disconnect, restrain, or otherwise make safe all potentially
hazardous stored or residual energy.
b. If stored energy can reaccumulate to a hazardous level, continue to
verify isolation until the employee completes servicing or maintenance, or
until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists.
15.3.6 Verification of Isolation. Before starting work on locked out or
tagged out machines or equipment, the authorized person must verify
completion of machine or equipment isolation and deemergization.
15.4 Release From Lockout or Tagout
Before removing lockout or tagout devices and restoring energy to the machine or
equipment. Authorized employees must follow procedures and take actions to
ensure the following:
15.4.1 The Machine or Equipment. Inspect the work area to ensure that
nonessential items have been removed and to ensure that machine or
equipment components are operationally intact.
15.4.2 Personnel
a. Check the work area to ensure that all employees have been safely
positioned or removed.
b. Before removing lockout or tagout devices and before energizing
machines or equipment, notify affected employees.
15-10 October 2009
Section 15—Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)
c. After removing lockout or tagout devices and before energizing
machines or equipment, notify affected employees.
15.4.3 Lockout or Tagout Device Removal. The employee who affixed
each lockout or tagout device must remove it from each energy isolating
device. The responsible official may grant an exception when that employee
is not available to remove it. Then, the responsible official may remove the
device, provided that specific procedures and training for such removal have
been developed, documented, and incorporated into the employer's energy
control program. The responsible official must demonstrate that the specific
procedure includes at least the following elements:
a. Verification by the responsible official that the authorized employee
who applied the device is not at the facility.
b. Making all reasonable efforts to inform the authorized employee that
his/her lockout or tagout device has been removed.
c. Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before
he/she resumes work at the facility.
15.5 Requirements of Operating Equipment Under Clearance
15.5.1 Testing or Positioning of Machines, Equipment or Components. If
you must temporarily remove lockout or tagout devices from the energy
isolating device and energize the machine or equipment to test or position the
machine, equipment, or component, follow the following sequence of actions:
a. Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials, referring to the
Subsection on release from lockout or tagout.
b. Remove personnel from the machine or equipment area, using the
subsection on personnel. Be thoroughly familiar with the requirements of
this section "Control of Hazardous Energy."
c. Remove the lockout or tagout devices referring to the subsection on
lockout or tagout device removal.
d. Energize and proceed with testing or positioning.
e. Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures using
procedures in this section to continue the servicing or maintenance.
15.5.2 Group Lockout or Tagout
a. When a crew, craft, department, or other group of employees performs
Servicing or maintenance, they must use a procedure that provides the
same level of protection as a personal lockout or tagout device.
October 2009 15–11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. Use group lockout or tagout devices in accordance with the procedures
required by this section and FIST Volume 1-1 including, but not
necessarily limited to, the following specific requirements:
1. The primary authorized employee has the primary
responsibility for the employees working under the protection of a
group lockout or tagout device, and for the device itself. The
primary authorized employee must determine the exposure status
of individual group members with regard to the lockout or tagout
of the system.
2. When using group lockout, each authorized employee must
affix a personal lockout device to a group lockbox, or comparable
mechanism before beginning work and must remove these devices
when finished with their portion of the work.
3. When more than one crew, craft, or department, is involved,
the written procedure must prescribe the assignment of overall
job-associated lockout or tagout control responsibility.
15.5.3 Shift or Crew Changes. Use specific procedures during shift or crew
changes to ensure the continuity of group lockout or tagout protection. The
program must describe a procedure to allow for information exchange to
ensure the continuity of protection between off going and oncoming
personnel. The primary authorized employee accepting the transfer must
physically verify the lockout points.
15.6 Requirements for Outside Personnel (Contractors, etc.)
a. Whenever a contractor or non-agency organization is involved in
construction, maintenance, or testing on or near equipment in a
Reclamation facility or transmission line, a special work permit is required
to authorize the contractor to proceed with the work.
b. Properly qualified and authorized Reclamation representatives must
request the clearances or hot line orders, perform the required switching,
receive the clearances or hot line orders, and issue the special work permit.
c. Contractor personnel performing work at Reclamation-operated or
maintained facilities must comply with all existing Hazardous Energy
Control procedures of the facility and Reclamation’s Hazardous Energy
Control Program.
15-12
October 2009
Section 16
Fall Protection and Rope Supported Work
16.1 Fall Protection
Protect employees who work on slopes steeper than 1%:1, H:V slippery footing,
or who could fall from heights of 6 feet or more (if not protected by fixed
scaffolding, guardrails, or safety nets) by a personal fall protection system. The
fall protection system must meet the requirements of this section. However, these
requirements do not apply to rope supported work (high angle work) such as high
Scaling, geologic mapping, structural inspections, or other operations that require
specialized rope equipment or techniques. Refer to the section on "Rope-
Supported Work."
16.1.1 Hardware. Connectors must be drop forged, pressed, or formed steel
or equivalent materials. Connectors must have a corrosion-resistant finish,
and edges must be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of the
system. D-rings and snap-hooks must be able to sustain a minimum tensile
load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kilomewton [kn]). D-rings and snap-hooks must be
proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without
cracking, breaking, or being permanently deformed.
a. Snap-Hooks. Snap-hooks must be of a locking type designed to
prevent disengagement of the snap-hook by contact of the Snap-hook
keeper with the connected member.
b. Use. Connect snap-hooks to items 1-5 below only when designed for
that use:
1. Directly to webbing, rope, wire rope, or chain.
2. To each other.
3. To a D-ring to that has another snap-hook or other connector is
attached.
4. To a horizontal lifeline.
5. To any object with an incompatible shape or dimension that could
disengage the snap-hook (e.g., the connected object depressing the
Snap-hook keeper and releasing itself).
16.1.2 Lanyards and Lifelines. Lanyards and vertical lifelines that tie off
one employee must have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds
(22.2 kN). Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards that automatically limit free
fall distance to 2 feet (.61 meter [m]) or less must have components that can
October 2009 16–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
sustain a minimum static load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 km) applied to the device,
with the lifeline or lanyard fully extended. Self-retracting lifelines and
lanyards that do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet (.61 m) or less, ripstitch
lanyards, and tearing and deforming lanyards must be able to Sustain a
minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN), applied to the device with
the lifeline or lanyard fully extended. A qualified person must design, install,
and supervise the use of horizontal lifelines, as part of a complete personal fall
arrest system that maintains a safety factor of at least two. Restraint lines
must be able to sustain a tensile load of at least 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN).
Lifelines and carriers must not be made of natural fiber rope.
16.1.3 Anchorages. Anchorages must be able to support at least
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per employee attached, or must be designed, installed,
and used under the supervision of a qualified person as part of a complete fall
protection system that maintains a safety factor of at least two.
a. Rebar. Anchorages may not be made from drill steel or
reinforcing bar.
b. Mobile Anchorages. Anchorages must not be made to mobile
equipment or other items that can move while the anchorage is in use.
16.1.4 Procedures. Use personal fall protection systems and their
components only for employee fall protection. Inspect lifelines, lanyards,
belts, hardware, and anchorages before use each day and discard questionable
devices. Use and care for fiber lifelines and lanyards according to
recommendations contained in the Rigging Manual and in these standards,
whichever is more protective.
a. Lifelines. Provide each employee with a separate lifeline when using
Vertical lifelines.
b. Rescue. Make provisions to promptly rescue employees who fall or
provide the means for self-rescue.
c. Protection. Protect lifelines from cut, abraded, or damaged in any
Way.
d. Maintenance, Inspection, Testing. All personal fall protection
systems must follow the manufacturers' recommendations for
maintenance, inspection, and testing.
e. Training. Before using personal fall protection systems, and after
changing any component or system, train employees in the application
limits of the equipment, proper hookup, anchoring, and tie-off techniques,
methods of use, and proper methods of equipment inspection and storage.
16–2 October 2009
Section 16—Fall Protection and
Rope Supported Work
16.1.5 Personal Fall Arrest System. A system used to arrest an employee in
a fall from a working level consists of an anchorage, connectors, and a body
harness. The system may also include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline,
or suitable combination of these.
a. Performance Criteria. Personal fall arrest systems must, when
stopping a fall:
1. Limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds
(8 kN), when used with a body harness.
2. Bring an employee to a complete stop and limit the maximum
deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m).
3. Have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact
energy of an employee freefalling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the
free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is less.
b. Performance Test. When used by employees with a combined person
and tool weight of less than 310 pounds (140 kg), personal fall arrest
systems meeting the criteria and protocol contained in 29 CFR 1926
Subpart M, must comply with these requirements.
c. Use. Rig personal fall arrest systems to prevent an employee from
falling more than 6 feet or contacting any lower level. Employees must
wear a personal fall arrest system with the attachment point of the body
harness in the center of the back near shoulder level or above the head.
When connected to a horizontal lifeline that could become vertical,
connectors must be able to lock in either direction on the lifeline.
d. Maintenance. Maintenance is a critical element in personal fall arrest
systems. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations. At least one
employee, certified and trained by the manufacturer as qualified to inspect
and maintain personal fall arrest systems, must be available when such
systems are in use.
e. Impact Loading. When a personal fall arrest system has been
subjected to shock loading, immediately remove it from service until a
qualified person inspects it and determines it suitable for reuse.
16.1.6 Positioning Device System. Positioning device systems include
equipment or hardware that, when used with its body belt or body harness,
Supports an employee on an elevated vertical surface (such as a wall or a rebar
mat), allowing both hands freedom of movement. Such systems also refer to
devices attached between the employee and an anchorage to prevent an
accidental fall from an elevated surface.
a. Performance Criteria. Positioning device systems must withstand,
without failure, a 4-foot (1.2-m) drop of a 250 pound (113-kg) weight.
October 2009 16–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. Performance Test. Positioning device systems comply with these
requirements if they meet the test contained in 29 CFR 1926 subpart M,
appendix D. Restraint line systems must be designed to meet the same test
requirements as other positioning device systems.
16.1.7 Personal Fall Protection System for Ladder Climbing. Employees
wear, or are attached to, personal fall protection systems to prevent injuries
and falls.
a. Design Criteria for System Components. The system must permit
the employee to ascend or descend with both hands free for climbing,
without having to hold, push, or pull any part of the system. The
connection between the carrier or lifeline and the point of attachment to
the body belt or harness must be no more than 9 inches (23 cm) long. The
system must activate within 2 feet (0.61 m) after a fall occurs to limit the
descending velocity of an employee to 7 feet per second (2.1 meters per
Second) or less.
b. Performance Criteria. Ladder safety devices and their support
systems must withstand, without failure, an 18-inch (0.41-m) drop of a
500-pound (226-kg) weight. All other personal fall protection systems for
climbing activities must withstand, without failure, a 4-foot (1.2-m) drop
of a 250-pound (113-kg) weight.
c. Installation. Attach mountings for rigid carriers at each end of the
carrier. Attach intermediate mounting, as necessary, spaced along the
entire length of the carrier to provide the strength necessary to stop
employee falls. Attach mounting for flexible carriers at each end of the
carrier. When the system is exposed to wind, install cable guides used
with a flexible carrier with a minimum spacing of 25 feet (7.6 m) and a
maximum spacing of 40 feet (12.2 m) along the entire length of the
carrier, to prevent wind damage to the system. The design and installation
of mountings and cable guides must not reduce the design strength of the
ladder.
16.1.8 Requirements for Linemen's Belts and Lifelines
a. Belt and Lifeline Requirements. Use linemen's body belts and safety
straps when working above ground levels on wood poles, steel towers,
communication towers, and other transmission line, substation, and
switchyard structures.
b. Body Belts, Safety Straps, and Lanyards. Linemen's body belts,
Safety straps, and lanyards must meet the current design specifications in
29 CFR 1926.959. The manufacturer must certify compliance.
16–4
October 2009
Section 16—Fall Protection and
Rope Supported Work
c. Nonconductive Rope Lifelines. Nonconductive rope lifelines must
have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds and be able to
withstand an alternating current dielectric test of at least 25,000 volts per
foot "dry" for 3 minutes without visible deterioration.
16.2 Rope Supported Safety Requirements
The requirements in this section apply when an employee performs rope-
supported work on high angle slopes, where the rope is the primary means of
support, and where the employee must manipulate the rope and its attachments,
while using technical climbing techniques to obtain access to the work area. This
includes such work as high Scaling, geologic mapping, rock bolting, structural
inspections, construction, operations, and maintenance activities. Permit rope-
supported work only when other means of access are not feasible or methods
other than rope-supported work expose employees to greater danger.
16.2.1 Belays. Use a safety (belay) rope for work covered by this section.
The belay line must be separate and independent from the support (load) line.
Another employee may control the belay or the belay may be self-controlled.
Use a belay line, if feasible, for jobs where the work surface provides the
primary support once the work site is reached. The standard belay line (safety
line) must be a dynamic rope that meets the minimum strength requirements
of this section. When not using a standard belay, use a deceleration device to
limit fall forces to less than 1,800 pounds. The maximum free fall distance
must not exceed 6 feet.
16.2.2. Equipment. The employee who performs the inspection must know
how the entire system will function under various slope conditions.
Equipment strengths must be certified, listed as meeting, or shown by testing
to meet the requirements of ANSI A10.14, ANSI Z359.1, the European Union
(designated by the "CE" marking), Union Internationale des Associations
d'Alpinisme (UIAA), or other recognized certification organization. Knots,
friction devices, ascenders, and other hardware will decrease the overall
strength of the rope support system. Before use, evaluate the complete
support system, with all of its parts, for adequacy.
16.2.3 Anchorage. Use at least two independent anchorages. Each
anchorage must be able to support at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) static load.
Locate anchorages far enough apart so that failure of one anchor will not
cause failure of another anchor. If possible, locate anchors in line with the
direction of rope pull; otherwise, take steps to limit the rope extension if one
anchor fails. All climber-installed anchorages, except directional anchors,
must meet the minimum strength requirements of this section. Directional
anchors are anchors used to laterally position a climber who is supported by
two anchors meeting the requirements of this section. Directional anchors do
not take the place of the main support anchors.
October 2009 16-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
16.2.4 Rope. Support or safety ropes must be manmade fiber ropes,
specifically designed for climbing or rescue applications and must be capable
of supporting 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) static load without failure. Ropes must
be of kernmantle construction with a minimum diameter of 7/16 inch (11 mm)
and a maximum diameter of V, inch (13 mm). -
16.2.5 Hardware. All connecting hardware used in the support system must
be capable of supporting 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) static load without failure.
Use only locking carabineers in the support system. You may substitute
locking shackles for locking carabineers in anchor connections.
16.2.6 Body Harnesses. Use only full body harnesses, which distribute fall
arrest forces over at least the upper thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders.
Harness connections must be designed for work positioning and fall arrests
and be capable of supporting 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) static load without
failure. Separate waist and chest harnesses are permitted if designed to be
buckled together.
16.2.7 Equipment Inspection. Inspect all equipment used for rope-
supported work before and after each use, using the manufacturer’s
recommended procedures. Maintain a rope log for each rope.
16.2.8 Equipment Retirement. If any equipment used for rope-supported
work is subjected to severe impact or shock loading, immediately remove it
from service. Do not use it for employee protection until it has been inspected
and determined suitable for reuse. The employee who inspects the equipment
must be knowledgeable about equipment specifications. Remove from
Service any equipment that exceeds manufacturer’s recommended wear or
shows other defects. Automatically retire ropes, webbing, accessory cord, and
harnesses from service after 5 years, regardless of condition or use history.
16.2.9 Training. Train employees in the techniques and equipment used for
rope-supported work before assigning them to a job where its use is required.
The training must cover climbing safety and hazards; the use, limitations,
inspection and maintenance of equipment; and basic climbing and self rescue
techniques. Only the following individuals may conduct training courses for
Reclamation employees: (1) a Reclamation climbing certifier, (2) a
Reclamation employee designated by a Reclamation climbing certifier as
competent to train personnel in using rope-supported work equipment and
procedures, or (3) a training contractor certified by a Reclamation climbing
certifier as competent to train personnel in using rope-supported work
equipment and procedures. Contractors must provide training to their
employees to make sure they meet the minimum skills requirements of this
Sect1On.
16-6 October 2009
Section 16—Fall Protection and
Rope Supported Work
Reclamation employees’ minimum standards must meet the following for
basic training and experience:
a. Climber. A climber must have at least 32 hours of basic climbing
training. Basic training must include:
• Climbing safety and fall hazards
• Applications of equipment
• Estimating free fall distance
• Anchorage techniques
• Equipment maintenance and inspection
• Rescue
O
Practice in applying techniques outlined in the Reclamation rope-
supported work guidelines.
A climber must complete 32 hours of developmental training each year.
However, this requirement can be reduced to 16 hours annually if the climber
has at least 40 hours of on-rope work experience during the year.
b. Team Leader. The team leader must be a certified climber, have the
ability to write a job hazard analysis, be able to analyze and lay out rope-
supported jobs safely and efficiently, have experience in the type of work
to be performed, and be able to verify the climbing team's experience and
physical qualifications. A team leader is responsible for and will
Supervise, either directly or indirectly through an acting team leader, all
climbing operations conducted by his/her team. A team leader must
complete 32 hours of developmental training each year. This requirement
can be reduced to 16 hours annually if the team leader has at least
40 hours of on-rope work experience during the year.
c. Climbing Certifier. A climbing certifier must be a certified climber
and designated team leader or capable of fulfilling that role. The climbing
certifier will be responsible for certifying Reclamation employees as
climbers and team leaders, and will act as a resource person for climbing
teams. Each year, the climbing certifier must complete the annual training
required for a climber plus complete 16 hours of advanced developmental
training and maintain an approved independent certification.
d. Climb Training. Basic climbing training must include an opportunity
to practice the skills learned in progressively more difficult situations.
Beginning climbers will continue on-the-job training under the team
leader’s close Supervision following completion of basic training. Before
starting any job, provide refresher practice or developmental training, as
needed. Document all training.
October 2009 16-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
16.2.10 Certification. After completing basic climbing training and before
being certified for rope-supported work, Reclamation employees must pass a
certification test. The certification test must include a written exam and
opportunity to demonstrate basic technical skills. A Reclamation climbing
certifier must conduct the certification test. Certification will be valid for 1
year, and the team leader will renew certification upon successful completion
of the minimum annual developmental training. Certification will remain
valid only if a climber completes the annual minimum developmental training
requirement.
a. At least every 3 years, the team leader and a climbing certifier, who has
not climbed with the climber being evaluated or the team leader in the
preceding year will evaluate the experience and overall skill level of each
certified climber. If the climber’s skill is found to be inadequate, the
climber must retake the basic certification training course or complete a
focused training course designated by the team leader, or, at the discretion
of the team leader, will not be re-certified.
b. Each climber must maintain a personal log of climbing and training
activities to aid in recertification and training review.
16.2.11 Physicals. Certified climbers must successfully complete a medical
examination annually and be cleared to perform rope-supported work. The
team leader will remove any climber from the climbing team for failing to
meet the medical qualification criteria.
16.2.12 Climbing Team. A climbing team consisting of at least three
certified climbers will perform rope-supported work.
16.2.13 Team Leader. Appoint a team leader for each activity requiring
rope-supported work. The team leader must be a qualified individual and will
have overall responsibility for the coordination and conduct of the rope-
supported work activity.
16.2.14 Top Person. A lookout (top person) must be on duty at the anchor
points of the support (load) lines and belay (safety) lines at all times when
employees are working on ropes. The top person's duty will be to ensure that
anchorages remain secure and undisturbed and that no activities take place
that could endanger employees working on the ropes. The top person must
also help respond to emergency situations.
16.2.15 Communications. Maintain reliable voice communications between
an employee on the rope and the top slope or belay personnel. If distance or
background noise interferes with voice communications, use a two-way radio.
16–8 October 2009
Section 16—Fall Protection and
Rope Supported Work
16.2.16 Rescue. Before starting rope-supported work, make arrangements
for rescue. Provisions for rescue must include self-rescue, rescue using on-
site personnel, and rescue requiring off-site personnel.
16.2.17 Job Planning. Before starting a job requiring rope-supported work,
submit a Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) to the Contracting Officer's
Representative (COR) or the appropriate office head. A person qualified in
rope-supported work (high angle work) must review the JHA before
submitting it to the appropriate office heads. The JHA must address, at a
minimum, the following items:
a. Emergency procedures, including medical assistance.
b. Personal protective equipment required, including gloves, safety
glasses, hard hat with chin strap, foul weather gear, etc. Use climber
safety helmets certified by UIAA/CE for rope-supported work if they offer
equal or greater protection than ANSI Z89.1 type II hard hats.
c. Describe the equipment to be used for rope-supported work. For
example, type and sizes of rope to be used, hardware, types of anchorages,
and auxiliary equipment.
d. Methods for ensuring safe entrance and exit from slope.
e. Instruction and/or refresher training sessions (as required) to ensure
competency and knowledge of requirements for all employees performing
rope-supported work.
f. Procedures for protecting employees and public from falling material.
g. Provisions for rescue, including both rescue by onsite personnel and
arrangements for rescue services by offsite personnel.
h. Other hazards, including confined spaces, hazardous energy,
biohazards, chemical hazards, etc.
October 2009 16-9
Section 17
Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure Vessels,
Compressors, and Welding
This section sets forth the requirements for using hand tools, pressure vessels,
compressors, and for welding. It specifically addresses hand and power tools;
pneumatic tools; airless spray guns; grinding tools; woodworking tools; power
Saws; hydraulic-powered tools; powder-actuated tools; hand-powered winches
and hoists; lever and ratchet, screw, and hydraulic jacks; boilers and unfired
pressure vessels; compressors; compressed gas cylinders; gas welding and
cutting; arc welding and cutting; and inert gas metal-arc welding.
17.1 General Requirements for Hand and Power Tools
17.1.1 Maintenance. Maintain hand tools, power tools, and jacks in safe
Operating condition. Immediately remove damaged and defective tools from
Service and repair or replace them.
17.1.2 Proper Use. Use tools only for their designed purpose. Do not use
electrical cords, air hoses, and hydraulic hoses to raise or lower tools.
17.1.3 Storage. Do not leave tools on scaffolds or elevated work spaces.
Provide containers on the jobsite for hand tools.
17.1.4 Guarding. If a tool accommodates guards, operate the tool with the
guards in place. Safeguard moving part hazards as set forth in the current
edition of the American National Standards Institute/American Society of
Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME) B15.1, "Safety Standard for Mechanical
Power Transmission Apparatus."
17.1.5 Point of Operation Guarding. Point of operation is the area on a
machine where work is actually performed. Provide guards at the point of
Operation on machines that expose the operator to injury. The guards must
meet all applicable specific standards. If no standards exist, the guards must
prevent the operator from having any body part in the danger zone during the
Operating cycle.
17.1.6 Grounding. Double insulate or effectively ground electric tools.
17.1.7 Switches. On-off switches controlling the operation of hand-held
power tools must conform to the following requirements:
a. Equip hand-held power platen sanders, grinders with 2-inch or less
diameter wheels, routers, planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, shears,
Scroll saws, jigsaws with blade shanks 0.25 inch wide or less, concrete
vibrators, and power tampers with only positive on-off switch.
October 2009 17–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. Equip hand-held power drills, tappers, fastener drivers, horizontal,
vertical, and angle grinders with wheels more than 2 inches in diameter,
disk sanders, belt sanders, reciprocating saws, and similar tools with a
momentary contact "on-off" control. These may have a lock-on control if
the operator can shut off the power with a single motion of the same finger
or fingers that turn it on and if the switch is adequately guarded to prevent
accidental operation.
c. Equip jackhammers and similar pneumatic-powered hand tools and
other hand-held power tools, including chain saws, circular saws, and
percussion tools, with a constant pressure switch that shuts off power
when pressure is released.
17.1.8 Personal Protective Equipment. Provide hand tool and power tool
operators with personal protective equipment and ensure its use as set forth in
the section on "Personal Protective Equipment." Original equipment guards
or manufactured guards must be used on all grinders, drills, lathes, sanders,
and other equipment to prevent injury to the operator.
17.1.9 Anchoring Fixed Machinery. Securely anchor machines designated
for fixed locations to prevent movement.
17.1.10 Hazardous Conditions. Use only nonsparking or intrinsically safe
tools where sources of ignition may cause an explosion or fire. Do not use
gasoline-powered tools underground, in buildings, or in partially enclosed
locations where toxic exhaust gases can accumulate. Place gasoline powered
portable compressors, generators, and pressure washers outdoors and away
from air intakes to prevent drawing engine exhaust indoors.
17.2 Requirements for Pneumatic Tools
17.2.1 Impact Tools. Operate pneumatic impact tools with safety clips or
retainers installed to prevent accidental discharge from the chuck.
17.2.2 Air Hoses. For air lines more than one-half inch inside diameter,
provide whip-check devices attached to the hose at each connection or splice.
As a substitute, provide a safety device at the source of supply or branch line
that will automatically reduce pressure in case of a line failure if the device
effectively prevents whipping.
17.2.3 Operating Pressures. Do not exceed the manufacturer's safe
operating pressure for hoses, pipes, valves, and fittings. Remove defective
hoses, valves, and fittings from service.
17.2.4 Compressed Air Used for Cleaning. Never direct compressed air at
any part of the body. Use compressed air for cleaning purposes only if the
pressure is less than 30 pounds per square inch, and then only with effective
17–2 October 2009
Section 17—Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure
Vessels, Compressors, and Welding
chip guarding and personal protective equipment. The 30-pound-per-square-
inch requirement does not apply to Sandblasting, green cutting, removing mill
Scale, cleaning concrete forms, and similar cleaning operations.
17.2.5 Care of Air Hoses. Protect pneumatic hoses from physical damage
while they are in use and in storage.
17.2.6 Nailers and Staplers. Pneumatic nailers, staplers, and similar
equipment with an automatic fastener feed that operates at more than
100 pounds per Square inch must have a single-action trigger and a safety
device on the muzzle to prevent the ejection of the fasteners unless the muzzle
is in contact with the work surface.
17.3 Requirements for Airless Spray Guns
17.3.1 Airless Spray Guns. Equip airless spray guns that atomize fluids at
pressures of 1,000 pounds per square inch or greater with one of the following
Safety systems to prevent accidental fluid injection into the operator.
a. Automatic or Visible Manual Safety Device. The safety device must
prevent pulling of the trigger to release the paint or fluid until the operator
manually releases the safety device.
b. Diffuser Nut and Nozzle Guard. The diffuser nut must prevent high-
pressure high-velocity release when the nozzle tip is removed. The nozzle
tip guard must prevent the tip from contacting the operator.
c. Other Equivalent Protection. Any system that provides an equivalent
level of protection as above is acceptable.
17.4 Requirements for Using Grinding Tools
17.4.1 General. Installing, guarding, using, and caring for grinding tools
must comply with the standards set forth in the current standard ANSI B7.1,
"The Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive Wheels" and manufacturer's
instructions. Use grinding tools only if the safety guards and protective
flanges are installed and properly adjusted.
17.4.2 Power Supply. Supply all grinding machines with sufficient power to
maintain the spindle speed at safe levels under all conditions of normal
operation.
17.4.3 Guarding. Safety guards must cover the spindle end, nut, and flange
projections. Mount guards to maintain proper alignment with the wheel.
Where the work provides a suitable measure of protection to the worker, the
Safety guards may expose the spindle end, nut, and outer flange. Where the
work entirely covers the side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be
omitted. The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on portable
SaWS.
October 2009 17–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
17.4.4. Abrasive Wheels. Do not operate abrasive wheels faster than their
rated safe speed. Inspect wheels according to manufacturer's instructions
before mounting and, periodically, to ensure the abrasive wheel is not cracked
or otherwise defective. Remove cracked or defective abrasive wheels from
service immediately and destroy them.
17.4.5 Grinding Wheels. Grinding wheels must fit freely on the spindle. Do
not force them on. Tighten the spindle nut only enough to hold the wheel in
place.
17.4.6 Bench and Pedestal Grinders. Provide bench-mounted and pedestal
grinders with safety guards that are strong enough to withstand the effect of a
bursting wheel. The guard must not expose more than 90 degrees of the
grinding wheel periphery and sides. However, if the work must contact the
wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle, the angular exposure must
not exceed 125 degrees. The guard must have a readily adjustable toolrest
that is maintained within one-eighth inch of the wheel and an adjustable
tongue maintained within one-fourth inch of the periphery of the wheel to
prevent injury to the operator by containing the wheel failure inside the
housing.
17.4.7 Cup-Shaped Wheels. Protect cup-shaped wheels used for external
grinding by either a revolving cup guard or a band guard.
17.4.8 Special Conditions
a. Safety Flanges. Use a wheel equipped with safety flanges when work
location prevents the use of guarding. Use only safety flanges with wheels
designed to fit the flanges. Use only safety flanges of a type and design
and properly assembled so as to ensure that the pieces of the wheel will be
retained in case of accidental breakage.
b. Small Diameter Wheels. Wheels 2 inches or less in diameter that are
securely mounted on the end of a steel mandrel do not require guards.
c. Internal Grinding. Guarding is not required if a grinding wheel is
entirely within the work being ground while in use.
17.4.9 Side Grinding. Do not permit side grinding unless the abrasive wheel
is specifically designed for this purpose.
17.5 Requirements for Woodworking Tools
17.5.1 Requirement. Installing, guarding, using, and caring for power-
operated woodworking tools must comply with the standards set forth in
29 CFR Part 1910.213, "Woodworking Machinery Requirements."
17–4 October 2009
Section 17—Hand Tools, POWer Tools, Pressure
Vessels, Compressors, and Welding
17.5.2 Switches. Locate switches so the operator is able to shut off the power
without leaving the operating position. Provide fixed power-driven tools with
a disconnect switch that can be locked in the off position.
17.5.3 Automatic Feed. Whenever the nature of the work permits, install
automatic feeding devices on fixed, power-driven woodworking tools. Feeder
attachments must have the feed rolls and other moving parts guarded to
protect the operator.
17.5.4 Electrical Equipment. When automatic restarting would create a
hazard, control electrically driven equipment with a device to prevent
automatic restarting following a power failure.
17.5.5 Push Sticks. Use a push stick, block, or similar safe means for all
operations close to high-speed cutting edges.
17.5.6 Combs. Provide combs (featherboards) or suitable jigs when standard
guards cannot be used.
17.5.7. Planers and Joiners. Equip planers and joiners with cylindrical
cutting heads and fully guard them.
17.5.8 Cleanup. Keep work areas clean. Provide a brush or vacuum system
near each machine to remove sawdust, chips, and shavings.
17.5.9 Portable Belt Sanding Machines. Provide belt sanding machines
with guards at each nip point where the sanding belt runs onto a roller. These
guards must prevent the operator’s hands or fingers from coming in contact
with the nip points. Guard the unused run of the sanding belt against
accidental contact.
17.6 Requirements for Power Saws
17.6.1 Circular Saws. Equip bench saws with spreaders, anti-kickback
devices, and guards that automatically enclose the exposed cutting edges.
Equip portable hand-held circular saws with guards above and below the
baseplate or shoe. The upper guard must cover the saw to the depth of the
teeth, except for the minimum arc required to permit tilting the base for bevel
cuts. The lower guard must cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for
the minimum arc required to allow proper retraction and contact with the
work. As the blade is withdrawn, the lower guard must automatically and
instantly return to the covering position.
17.6.2. Operating Speeds. Permanently mark the operating speed on all
circular saws that are more than 20 inches in diameter or that operate at speeds
of more than 10,000 peripheral feet per minute. Use only blades designed for
use at the marked operating speed. When the saw is retensioned for a
different speed, change the marking to indicate the new speed.
October 2009 17–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
17.6.3 Radial Arm Saws. Equip radial arm saws and swing cutoff saws
with: (1) limit stops that prevent the leading edge of the blade from traveling
beyond the edge of the table, (2) hoods or guards that protect the operator
from flying material, direct the sawdust toward the back of the blade, and
enclose all parts of the blade not in contact with the material being cut, and
(3) automatic brakes or automatic return devices. Install nonkickback fingers
or dogs and a spreader when ripping.
17.6.4 Bandsaws. Fully enclose bandsaw blades except at the point of
operation. Adjust the adjustable guide within one-half inch of the work.
17.6.5 Unattended. Never leave running power saws unattended.
17.6.6 Sawdust Collectors. Equip bench-type circular saws and radial saws
used for production work with sawdust collectors.
17.6.7 Cleanup. Clean up scrap and sawdust. Clean up the shop area as
needed to maintain safe working conditions and at the end of each shift.
17.6.8 Defective Blades. Remove cracked, bent, or otherwise defective
blades from service and destroy them.
17.7 Requirements for Hydraulic-Powered Tools
17.7.1 Safe Operating Pressures. Adhere to the manufacturer's safe
operating pressure for hoses, valves, pipes, filters, and fittings.
17.7.2 Hydraulic Fluid. Ensure fluid in hydraulic-powered tools is fire
resistant and approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
17.7.3 Stationary Hydraulic-Powered Presses. Presses must have guards
that adequately contain flying particles forcibly expelled from the compressed
material.
17.8 Requirements for Powder-Actuated Tools
Design, maintain, and use powder-actuated tools in accordance with the standards
set forth in the current edition of ANSI A10.3, "Safety Requirements for Powder-
Actuated Fastening Systems"; the tool manufacturer’s instructions; and the
requirements of this subsection. These standards cover three types of tools: high
Velocity, low-velocity piston, and hammer-operated piston–low-velocity.
17.8.1 Operator Qualification. Allow only employees trained and certified
in the safe use of powder-actuated tools to operate and service them.
Operators must possess an operator's card issued by a firm or person
authorized to issue such cards.
17–6 October 2009
Section 17—Hand Tools, POWer Tools, Pressure
Vessels, Compressors, and Welding
17.8.2. Unauthorized Use. Take safeguards to prevent unauthorized persons
from possessing or using these tools and their charges.
17.8.3 Flammable Atmospheres. Do not use powder-actuated tools in
explosive or flammable atmospheres.
17.8.4 Studs and Fasteners. Use only the powder charges, studs, or
fasteners specified by the manufacturer for the specified tool.
17.8.5 Safety Features
a. All Tools. All powder-actuated tools must have the following safety
features:
1. The firing mechanism design must prevent the tool from firing
during loading or preparation to fire or if it is dropped while loaded.
2. Firing of the tool must depend on at least two separate and distinct
operations of the operator. The final firing movement must be
separate from the movement to bring the tool into the firing position.
3. The tool design must allow all breeching parts to be reasonably
visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be present.
4. The tool design must allow the operator to select a power level
adequate to perform the desired work without excessive force.
b. High-Velocity Tools. High-velocity tools must have the following
features in addition to the common features listed above.
1. The muzzle end of the tool must have a protective shield or guard at
least
3-W, inches in diameter, mounted perpendicular to and concentric with
the barrel, and designed to confine any flying fragments or particles
that might otherwise create a hazard at the time of firing.
2. The tool design must not allow firing unless the guarding or
shielding device is in place.
3. The tool design must not allow operation unless the operator is
holding the tool against the work surface with a force at least 5 pounds
greater than the total weight of the tool.
4. The tool design must not allow operation when equipped with the
standard guard indexed to the center position if any bearing surface of
the guard is tilted more than 8 degrees from contact with the work
surface.
c. Low-Velocity Piston. Low-velocity-piston tools must have the
following features in addition to the common features listed in the
subparagraph on Safety features.
October 2009 17-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
1. The muzzle end of the tool design must allow mounting,
perpendicular to the barrel, suitable protective shields, guards, jigs, or
fixtures, designed and built by the manufacturer. Supply a standard
spall shield with each tool. Choose and use the proper shields, guards,
jigs or fixtures in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
2. The tool design must not allow operation unless the operator is
holding the tool against the work surface with a force at least 5 pounds
greater than the total weight of the tool.
d. Hammer-Operated Piston Tools - Low Velocity. In addition to the
common safety features, hammer operated tools must have suitable
protective shields, guards, jigs, or fixtures, designed and built by the tool
manufacturer, that can be mounted perpendicular to the barrel. Supply a
standard spall shield with each tool. Choose and use the proper shields,
guards, jigs, or fixtures according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
17.8.6 Materials. Drive fasteners into soft or easily penetrated material only
if the material is backed to prevent complete penetration. Do not use tools on
Very hard or brittle materials such as cast iron, glazed tile, surface-hardened
steel, glass block, live rock, face brick, or hollow tile. Never drive a fastener
into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory fastening.
17.8.7 Safe Use. Load tools just before firing. Always attend loaded tools.
Never point a tool at anyone. Keep all body parts clear of the muzzle.
17.8.8 Inspection and Testing. Inspect and test tools each day before
loading to ensure that the safety devices are in proper working order. Conduct
the inspection in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended inspection
procedures.
17.8.9 High-Velocity Tools. Use high-velocity tools only for those
applications in which low-velocity tools will not meet the job requirements.
17.9 Requirements for Hand-Powered Winches and Hoists
17.9.1. Use hand-powered winches and hoists within the manufacturer's rated
capacity, and legibly mark the capacity on the winch or hoist. Hand-powered
hoists must have worm gear drives or with positive self-locking dogs.
Handwheels must not have projecting spokes or knobs.
17.9.2 Legibly mark the manufacturer's rated capacity on all come-alongs.
Do not exceed the rated capacity. Remove come-alongs from service when
they have worn or kinked cables or links, deformed hooks, or defective
17–8 October 2009
Section 17—Hand Tools, POWer Tools, Pressure
Vessels, Compressors, and Welding
ratcheting devices. Take care not to overstress structures or structure
Supporting systems when using come-alongs for leveling, plumbing, or
positioning structures.
17.10 Requirements for Lever and Ratchet, Screw, and Hydraulic
Jacks
17.10.1 Capacity. Legibly mark the manufacturer's rated capacity on all
jacks. Do not exceed the rated capacity.
17.10.2 Overtravel. Jacks of any type must have a positive stop to prevent
Overtravel.
17.10.3 Footing and Blocking. Set jacks on a stable and firm footing, and
crib or block where necessary to prevent settlement or dislodgement. If
slippage is possible, place a wood block between the jack and the load.
17.10.4 Operation. After a load has been raised, crib, block, or otherwise
Secure it at once.
17.10.5 Maintenance. Properly lubricate all jacks at regular intervals.
Supply adequate antifreeze liquid to hydraulic jacks exposed to freezing
temperatures. Examine for possible defects and repair or replace defective
parts as necessary.
17.10.6 Inspection. Thoroughly inspect jacks periodically, depending on
how they are used. Inspect jacks according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
but no less frequently than the following:
a. For constant or intermittent use at one locality, once every 6 months.
b. Forjacks sent out of shop for special work, when sent out and when
returned.
c. Before returning to service after a jack is subjected to abnormal loads.
17.11 Requirements for Hand Tools
Hand tools must be inspected periodically, maintained in a safe condition, and
replaced and removed from service when worn, defective, broken, or cracked.
17.11.1 Wrenches. Do not use wrenches, including adjustable, pipe, and
Socket wrenches, when jaws are sprung to the point that slipping occurs.
17.11.2 Wood Handles. Keep the wooden handles of tools free of splinters
or cracks, and keep tool handles tight.
17.11.3 Impact Tools. Keep impact tools, including drift pins, wedges, and
chisels, in a dressed condition or equipped with nonmushrooming heads.
October 2009 17-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
17.12 General Requirements for Boilers and Unfired Pressure
Vessels
17.
17.12.1 Applicable Codes and Regulations. Design, construct, install, test,
and maintain boilers and unfired pressure vessels according to all of the
following:
The current ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code"
The current National Board Inspection Code, ANSI/NB 23
The current codes or regulations of the State
17.12.2 Inspection and Testing. Inspect and test boilers and unfired
pressure vessels before placing them in service and after any alteration or
major repair. Perform subsequent inspections within 24 months for the first
inspection, followed by inspections no more than 60 months apart (providing
deterioration is shown to be low and at a predictable rate). When any part of a
vessel rapidly deteriorates, the interval between inspection and testing must be
according to the National Board Inspection Code or every 24 months,
whichever is less. Make hydrostatic or State acceptable tests when the
qualified person performing the inspection recommends them.
17.12.3 Inspector Qualifications. To perform inspections, use qualified
personnel who meet Federal or State certification requirements or personnel
who satisfy the "Owner-User Inspector" education and experience of the
National Board Inspection Code, issued by the National Board of Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Inspectors.
17.12.4 Posting Reports. Post a copy of the inspector's approval or
certification reports near or on the boiler or unfired pressure vessel.
13 Requirements for Unfired Pressure Vessels
17.13.1 Installation. Install pressure vessels so that all drains, handholes,
and manholes are easily accessible. Do not bury them underground or locate
them in inaccessible places. Locate pressure vessels used to store compressed
air in a cool place to facilitate condensation of moisture and oil vapors.
17.13.2 Drain Valves. Install a readily accessible drain valve on the lowest
point of every air receiver to remove accumulations of oil and water. Operate
the valve as recommended by the manufacturer or as determined by
experience to remove accumulations of oil and water.
17.13.3 Piping. Install piping with traps or other effective means of
removing liquid from the lines. Properly design and install air discharge
piping to eliminate possible oil pockets.
17–10 October 2009
Section 17—Hand Tools, POWer Tools, Pressure
Vessels, Compressors, and Welding
17.13.4 Stop Valves. Install a stop valve between the receiver and each piece
of Stationary utilization equipment and also at each outlet to which an airhose
may be attached.
17.13.5 Hose Connections. Hose connections must withstand the pressure
and service to which they are subjected.
17.13.6 Safety Relief Valves. Equip each pressure vessel with a readily
Visible indicating pressure gauge and with one or more spring-loaded safety
relief valves. The total relieving capacity of such safety relief valves must
prevent pressure in the receiver from exceeding the maximum allowable
working pressure of the receiver by more than 10 percent.
17.14 Requirements for Compressors
17.14.1 Air Intake. The design and location of compressor intakes must
prevent any flammable or toxic gas, vapor, or dust from being drawn into the
compressor. Never install a valve in the air intake pipe to an air compressor
with an atmospheric intake.
17.14.2 Governors. Install a speed governor, independent of the unloaders,
on all compressors except those driven by electric synchronous motors. Equip
engine- or turbine-driven compressors with an auxiliary control to the
governor to prevent racing when the unloader operates.
17.14.3 Limit and Bypass. Every air compressor must automatically stop
compressing before the discharge pressure exceeds the maximum allowable
working pressure of the weakest portion of the system. The design and
installation of electrical contacts must prevent locking or fusing in a position
that would permit the compressor to continue compressing when the allowable
pressure is exceeded. As a substitute, install an air bypass and alarm for the
automatic stop system.
17.14.4 Safety Relief Valves. Equip each stage of a multistage compressor
with a safety relief valve.
17.14.5 Discharge Piping. The diameter of air discharge piping between the
compressor and the receiver must be at least as large as the discharge opening
on the compressor. If you install a stop valve between the compressor and the
receiver, install spring-loaded safety valves between the stop valve and the
compressor. The total capacity of the safety valves must be sufficient to limit
pressures in the air discharge piping to less than 10 percent or 3 pounds per
Square inch, whichever is greater, above the working pressure of the piping.
October 2009 17–11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
17.15 Requirements for Gas Cylinders
Construct, inspect, and test compressed gas cylinders in accordance with
Department of Transportation requirements.
17.15.1 Cylinder Storage. Onsite storage of gas cylinders must conform to
the following requirements:
a. Separation. Store cylinders containing the same gas in segregated
groups. Do not intermingle with other gas cylinders. Store empty gas
cylinders in the same manner. Protect cylinders from damage or tipping
by chains or other security means.
b. Confined Spaces. Store cylinders in well-ventilated spaces. Do not
store or take cylinders containing oxygen, acetylene, or fuel gases into
confined spaces.
c. Flammable or Combustible Material. Separate cylinders in storage
from flammable or combustible material by at least 20 feet or by a fire-
resistive partition of at least 1-hour fire-resistive rating and at least 5 feet
high.
d. Oxidizing Gases. Separate cylinders containing oxygen or oxidizing
gases from fuel gas cylinders by at least 20 feet or by a fire-resistive
partition of at least 1-hour fire-resistive rating and at least 5 feet high.
e. Smoking Restrictions. Do not permit smoking or open flame where
cylinders are stored. Post the area with "DANGER—NO SMOKING OR
OPEN FLAME" signs.
f. Toxic Gas. Post areas containing toxic gas in storage with signs
warning of the danger.
17.15.2 Upright Position. Secure compressed gas cylinders in an upright
position at all times except when hoisting them or using them in special
services or arrangements approved in writing by the manufacturer or gas
Supplier.
17.15.3 Cylinder Valves. Close cylinder valves when cylinders are in
storage, in transit, or not in use.
17.15.4 Valve Caps. Ensure cylinder valve caps are securely in place when
they are in storage, in transit, and at all times when the regulator is
disconnected from the cylinder. Cylinders may be moved secured on
specialty trucks within a jobsite without removing the regulators when you
adequately protect the regulators and cylinder valves.
17-12 October 2009
Section 17—Hand Tools, POWer Tools, Pressure
Vessels, Compressors, and Welding
17.15.5 Transporting. Transport compressed gas cylinders by crane, hoist,
or derrick in cradles, nets, or skips. Never transport them by slings, chains, or
magnets.
17.15.6 Valve Wrenches. The valve wrench or wheel must be in the
operating position when the cylinder is in use.
17.15.7 Restricted Use. Use cylinders only for the designated purpose of
containing a specific compressed gas for which they were designed. Only
authorized entities may refill them.
17.15.8 Handling. Handle cylinders in a manner that will not weaken or
damage the cylinder or valve. Do not expose cylinders to extremes of
temperature, physical damage, or electrical current.
17.15.9 Oxygen. Keep oxygen cylinders and fittings free of oil or grease and
do not handle them with oily hands or gloves. Do not direct oxygen at oily
surfaces, greasy cloths, or into a container, storage tank, or vessel. Do not use
oxygen or other compressed gases as a substitute for compressed air.
17.15.10 Defective Cylinders. Move leaking cylinders to an isolated
location out of doors, away from personnel and sources of ignition. Then,
open the valve, allowing the gas to escape slowly. Tag the cylinder
"DEFECTIVE" and return it to the supplier. Only qualified personnel,
protected by appropriate personal protective equipment, may handle leaking
cylinders containing toxic gas.
17.16 Standards for Welding and Cutting
All welding and cutting apparatus, equipment, and operations must be according
to the standards and recommendations set forth in the current edition of
ANSI Z49.1, "Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes,” and the
requirements of this section. Provisions of the current NFPA Standard 51B, "Fire
Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work,” also apply.
17.16.1 Responsibility. The facility management is responsible for ensuring
the safety of hot work operations and establishing the following controls:
a. Based on fire potentials of plant facilities, establish areas for cutting
and welding, and establish procedures for cutting and welding, in other
aſ CalS.
b. Designate an individual who is responsible for authorizing cutting and
welding operations in areas not specifically designed for such processes.
This person must not be the hot work operator.
c. Ensure that cutters or welders and their supervisors are suitably trained
in the safe operation of their equipment and the safe use of the process.
October 2009 17–13
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
These individuals must be aware of the inherent risks and understand the
emergency procedures in the event of a fire.
d. Ensure use of only approved apparatus, such as torches, manifolds,
regulators or pressure reducing valves, and acetylene generators.
e. Advise all contractors of flammable materials or hazardous conditions
they may be unaware of
17.16.2 Hot Work Permit. Before hot work operations begin in a
nondesignated location, obtain a written hot work permit from the authorizing
individual. Before issuing the hot work permit, the authorizing individual
must ensure that the equipment is in satisfactory condition and in good repair
and that all fire protection measures are followed.
17.16.3 Daily Inspection. Inspect welding apparatus and equipment daily
before use. Remove defective apparatus and equipment from service, replace
it, or repair it and reinspect it before using it again.
17.16.4 Fire Extinguishers. Fire extinguishers rated 2-A:40-B:C units or
larger must be immediately available wherever welding, gouging, or cutting is
being carried out.
17.16.5 Fire Protection. Take the following precautions, as applicable,
when welding or cutting:
a. Flammable Material. Confine welding, whenever possible, to areas
free of combustible materials. When this is not possible, remove all
combustible material within 35 feet horizontally from the work site or
protect it from fire, sparks, and slag.
b. Fireguards. The fireguards must be on duty when hot work is
performed in a location where other than a minor fire might develop, or
where the following conditions exist:
1. Combustible materials are closer than 35 feet to the point of
operation.
2. Combustible materials are more than 35 feet away, but are easily
ignited by sparks.
3. Wall or floor openings within a 35-foot radius expose combustible
materials in adjacent areas, including concealed spaces in wells and
floor.
4. Combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of
partitions, walls, ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited.
17–14 October 2009
Section 17—Hand Tools, POWer Tools, Pressure
Vessels, Compressors, and Welding
The fireguards must be on duty during the operations and for a sufficient
period of time following the completion of the work to ensure that no
possibility of fire exists. Provide fireguards with necessary fire protection
equipment and instruct them in its use. They must watch for fires in all
exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when obviously within the
capacity of the equipment available, or otherwise sound the alarm.
c. Tests. Test for flammability before welding, cutting, or heating any
material covered by a preservative coating with unknown flammability.
Do not weld or cut in any area that could contain flammable vapors or
gases until the atmosphere has been tested and found safe.
d. Shafts. Install noncombustible barriers below welding or burning
operations in or over a shaft or raise.
e. Flammable and Combustible Liquids. Do not weld, cut, or burn in
areas containing flammable or combustible liquid, vapor, or dust.
f. Walls. When welding or cutting on walls, floors, or ceilings where
direct penetration of sparks or heat transfer may cause a fire in an adjacent
area, take the same precautions on both sides of the wall, floor, or ceiling.
Precautions include keeping the floor wet, covered with damp sand, or
protected with a fire-retardant shield or guard.
17.16.6 Warning Sign. After completing welding operations, the welder
must mark the hot metal or provide some other means of warning other
workers.
17.16.7 Goggles, Protective Clothing, and Screens. Welders and helpers
must wear protective clothing and eye protection as specified in the "Personal
Protective Equipment" section, subsections on "Eye and Face Protection" and
"Protective Clothing." Protect other people near welding and cutting from
exposure to welding rays, flashes, sparks, molten metal, and slag. Use
welding screens in repair shops and other areas where welding is regularly
performed.
17.16.8 Preservative Coatings. When preservative coatings are highly
flammable, remove them from the area to be heated to prevent ignition. Take
the following precautions when the coatings are determined to be toxic:
a. Enclosed Spaces. Strip the coating of all coated surfaces for a distance
of at least 4 inches on each side of the cut or weld.
b. Open Air. Protect employees in open air with either an air line
respirator, an appropriate respirator meeting the requirements of the
"Respiratory Protection" subsection or adequate local ventilation.
October 2009 17-15
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
17.16.9 Confined Spaces. Ventilation and protection of employees welding,
cutting, or heating in confined spaces must conform to requirements contained
or referenced in the "Confined Spaces" section, including the use of an outside
attendant and a preplanned written rescue procedure.
a. Ventilation. Ventilation is a prerequisite to work in confined spaces.
Adequately ventilate all welding and cutting operations conducted in
confined spaces to prevent: (1) the accumulation of toxic materials or
(2) oxygen deficiency. This requirement applies not only to the welder
but also to helpers and other nearby personnel. All replacement air must
be clean and respirable.
b. Airline Respirators. When you cannot provide such ventilation, use
airline respirators approved for this purpose by the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84.
c. Self-Contained Units. In areas immediately dangerous to life and
health (IDLH) or where hazards are unknown, use a full-facepiece,
pressure-demand, self-contained breathing apparatus or a combination
full-facepiece, pressure-demand supplied-air respirator with an auxiliary,
self-contained air supply approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84.
d. Securing Cylinders and Machinery. When welding or cutting in any
confined spaces, leave the gas cylinders and welding machines outside the
space. Before operations begin, securely block heavy portable equipment
mounted on wheels to prevent accidental movement.
e. Gas Cylinder Shutoff. To prevent gas from escaping through leaks of
improperly closed valves during gas welding or cutting whenever the torch
is not used for a substantial period of time, such as during the lunch hour
or overnight, close the torch valves and positively shut off the gas supply
to the torch at some point outside the confined area. Where practicable,
also remove the torch and hose from the confined space.
f. Accidental Contact. When suspending arc welding for any substantial
period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, remove all electrodes
from the holders and carefully locate the holders to prevent accidental
contact and disconnect the machine from the power source.
17.16.10 Toxic Materials. Protect employees who are welding, cutting, heating,
or brazing, or using fluxes, coatings, and filler products containing any of the
following materials in accordance with the requirements in subsections on Job
Hazard Analysis, Exposure Limits, Respiratory Protection, and ANSI Z49.1
Section 5, "Ventilation."
17–16 October 2009
Section 17—Hand Tools, POWer Tools, Pressure
Vessels, Compressors, and Welding
• Cadmium
• Fluorides
• Mercury
Chlorinated hydrocarbons
Stainless steel
Zinc or galvanized materials
Beryllium
Lead
Other materials or compounds determined to be toxic by the manufacturer or a
nationally recognized source referenced in 29 CFR Part 1910.1000
17.16.11 Flammable Liquid Containers. When it is necessary to cut or
weld closed containers or hollow structures that have contained flammable
materials, follow the recommendations in the pamphlet, F4.1, "Recommended
Safe Practices for Preparation of Welding and Cutting of Containers and
Piping," published by the American Welding Society.
17.17 Requirements for Gas Welding and Cutting
17.17.1 Equipment. Gas welding and cutting equipment must be as listed by
a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
17.17.2 Gas Cylinders. Transport, handle, store, use, and maintain gas
cylinders required in this section and with DOT requirements. Only
DOT stamped or labeled gas cylinder are permitted.
17.17.3 Regulators. Use pressure-reducing regulators only for the gas for
which they were designed. Except for cracking the valve slightly to remove
dust or dirt, do not release gas from a cylinder under pressure without
attaching the pressure-reducing regulator to the cylinder valve. Do not adjust
acetylene regulators to permit a discharge greater than 15 pounds per Square
inch (gauge).
17.17.4 Torches. Close torch valves and shut off the gas supply when
suspending work. Check torch valves for leaks at the beginning of each shift.
Light torches with friction lighters or other approved devices and not with
matches or hot work.
17.17.5 Check Valves and Flash-Back Protection. Equip all oxygen,
acetylene, or other fuel gas-oxygen combinations used in cutting or welding
with an approved device to prevent oxygen from flowing into the fuel-gas
system or fuel from flowing into the oxygen system. Use an approved device
to provide flash-back protection to prevent flame from passing into the fuel-
gas system. Install these protective devices according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
October 2009 17-17
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
17.17.6 Welding Hose. Use only properly marked and identified hose in
good condition and specifically manufactured for oxyacetylene service for gas
welding and cutting. Remove from service a hose that has been subjected to
flashback or that demonstrates severe wear or damage. Ventilate containers
used to store fuel gas hose.
17.18 Requirements for Arc Welding and Cutting
17.18.1 Applicable Standards. Electric arc welding apparatus must comply
with the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association EW1 "Electric Arc
Welding Power Sources." Install, operate, and maintain this apparatus in
accordance with ANSI Z49.1, "Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied
Processes."
17.18.2 Power Circuits. Install and maintain power circuits for electric arc
welding equipment in accordance with applicable provisions of the current
National Electrical Code (NEC).
17.18.3 Grounding. Effectively ground frames of all electric welding
machines operated from power circuits according to current NEC standards.
The current carrying capacity of grounding conductors and clamps must equal
or exceed the maximum output of the welder they serve. Do not use pipelines
containing flammable gases or liquids, electrical conduits, chains, wire rope,
cranes, hoists, or similar devices for grounding.
17.18.4 Cables. Do not allow splices or repaired insulation within 10 feet of
the electrode holder. Position cables so as not to obstruct walkways,
scaffolds, stairs, or ladders.
17.18.5 Gasoline-Driven Arc Welders. Do not use gasoline-driven arc
welders in confined spaces or underground in tunnels, shafts, or conduits.
17.19 Requirements for Inert-Gas Metal-Arc Welding
17.19.1 Chlorinated Solvents. Do not apply chlorinated solvents within
200 feet of the exposed arc. Thoroughly dry surfaces prepared with
chlorinated solvents before permitting welding on such surfaces.
17.19.2 Arc Protection. Employees exposed to the arc must wear goggles
with filter lenses. When two or more welders are exposed to each other's arc,
they must wear filter lens goggles of suitable design under their welding
helmets. Welders must use hand shields designed to dissipate radiant energy
when the welder either lifts the helmet or removes the shield.
17.19.3 Radiation. Welders and people exposed to radiation must wear
protective clothing completely covering the skin to prevent the harmful effects
of ultraviolet rays.
17–18 October 2009
Section 18
Slings, Chains, and Accessories
This section sets forth the requirements for using slings, chains, and accessories.
It specifically addresses using alloy steel chains; wire rope slings; synthetic fiber
rope; synthetic webbing slings; synthetic roundslings; and shackles, hooks, and
other rigging hardware.
18.1 General Requirements for Using Slings, Chains, and
Accessories
18.1.1 Standard Criteria. The Rigging Manual, latest edition, published by
the Construction Safety Association of Ontario, 21 Voyager Court South,
Etobicoke, Ontario, Canada M9W 5M7 is the designated Reclamation
Rigging Manual. Reclamation will use this manual as a guide to determine if
rigging practices are safe and conform to industry-wide practices. Although
used by Reclamation and contractors, both as a rigging manual and a training
text, contractually, it is advisory in nature (except where specifically
referenced) and intended only to complement the safety requirements set forth
in this section.
18.1.2 Safe Usage. Use of ropes, slings, and chains must conform to
equipment manufacturer’s recommendations, this subsection, applicable
current American National Standards Institute/American Society of
Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME) standards, and Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations.
18.1.3 Safe Working Loads. Determine the safe working load of slings,
chains, accessories, and rigging equipment before use. The safe working
loads of slings must not exceed the rated capacities. For types of slings not
included in these tables, follow the manufacturer's recommended safe working
load for the specific angle of loading, provided that you maintain a safety
factor of five.
18.1.4 Job-Fabricated Rigging Hardware. A professional engineer must
design and certify use of any job-fabricated rigging hardware and test it at
twice the rated safe working load or in accordance with applicable standards.
18.1.5 Use, Repair and Maintenance. The use, repair, and maintenance of
ropes, chains, slings, and rigging accessories must conform to the
manufacturer's written instructions. Test repaired slings and accessories at
twice their rated load before use.
18.1.6 Inspection. Make frequent and periodic inspections. Immediately
remove defective equipment from service.
October 2009 18–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
a. Frequent Inspections. The user must inspect rigging equipment
before each shift.
b. Thorough Periodic Inspections. A designated person must
thoroughly inspect rigging equipment and maintain a written record. The
field location must determine the frequency of the periodic inspection on
the basis of use, severity of service conditions, nature of the lifts, and
experience on the service life of slings used in similar circumstances.
Conduct inspections periodically and at least once every 12 months.
c. Special or Infrequent Service. For slings that are used infrequently,
inspect before each use. At the time of use, document the inspection.
18.1.7 Removal From Service. Routinely inspect chain, wire rope, fiber,
synthetic webbing, and sling hooks. Remove from service if any are
deformed, damaged, or otherwise do not meet inspection criteria and are not
safe for use. Cut up and discard slings removed from service due to defects or
plainly mark them as being unfit for load-bearing service. Do not repair
cracked, broken, or bent end attachments. Replace them.
18.1.8 Protection. Appropriately protect slings from sharp, rough, or square
corners to prevent damage to the strands, wires, or links. Properly store
slings when not in use to protect them from damage.
18.2 Requirements for Using Alloy Steel Chains
18.2.1 Safe Working Load. The safe working load applied to chains must
not exceed the strength (certified by the manufacturer) divided by the required
safety factor (usually four, unless specified otherwise). If the working load
exceeds the capacities as shown in table E-2, make the manufacturer’s data
available at the site for employee review. When heated in excess of 600 °F, or
used in temperatures below -40°F, adjust the chain’s safe working capacity to
conform to the manufacturer’s instructions.
18.2.2 Grade. Use only heat-treated alloy steel chains in hoisting operations,
meeting at least grade 80. Each link of heat-treated alloy steel chains must be
marked with an "A," "T," or "8." The marking designates heat-treated alloy
steel meeting at least grade 80.
18.2.3 Identification. Durable identification tags must be permanently
affixed to welded alloy steel chain slings. The tags must state the size, grade,
rated load, and sling manufacturer. Tags for multi-leg slings must also
identify the angle the load rating is based on, the reach, and the number of
legs.
18–2 October 2009
Section 18—Slings, Chains,
and ACCessories
18.2.4 Accessories. The rated capacity of hooks, rings, links, or other
attachments used with alloy steel chains must at least equal that of the chains.
Do not use job-made hooks, links, or makeshift fasteners made from bolts or
rods.
18.2.5 Impact Loading. Do not subject chains to impact loading.
18.2.6 Excessive Wear. Whenever wear at any point in any chain link or the
depth of gouge or rounded out portion exceed the measurements in the
appendix, table E-1, reduce the assembly’s capacity or remove it from service.
An identification tag must reflect the newly established reduced capacity. Use
a device capable of measuring to one one-thousandth of an inch to measure
chain wear. Remove any sharp nicks by grinding.
18.2.7. Removal From Service. Remove from service any assemblies with
deformed master or coupling links or cracked hooks or attachments.
Permanently remove from service alloy steel chains heated above 1,000 °F,
and reduce their capacities if exposed to temperatures at or above 600 °F.
18.2.8 Proof Testing. When repaired, a chain sling must be permanently
marked to identify the repairing agency. Before use, proof test each new,
repaired, or reconditioned alloy steel chain sling and all welded parts in the
sling assembly to twice the rated capacity. Make a copy of the proof test
certificate, with date and weight, available for examination.
18.3 Requirements for Using Wire Rope Slings
18.3.1 Safe Working Load. The safe working load of wire rope slings must
not exceed rated capacities, as shown in tables E-3 through E-14. For types of
slings not included in the appendix on wire rope slings, follow the
manufacturer's recommended safe working load for the specific angle of
loading, provided that you maintain a safety factor of 5.
18.3.2 Grade. Wire rope slings covered by this section are based on nominal
wire rope strength as shown in Federal Specification RR-W-410, Wire Rope
and Strand, and Military Specification MIL-W-83420, Wire Rope, Flexible,
for Aircraft Control, (except for fatigue requirements). When using grades,
types, sizes, and constructions other than those specified in the appendix,
consult the sling manufacturer for specific data.
18.3.3 Identification. Develop and use a system to identify individual slings
that include at least the manufacturer and safe working load. If the wire rope
sling no longer has an original identification tag, first determine the
construction of the sling, then use the applicable capacity chart to find the safe
working load.
October 2009 18–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
18.3.4 Proof Test. Proof-test all job-made or repaired slings. Proof-test all
swaged socket and poured socket assemblies to the wire rope or fitting
manufacturer’s recommendations but, in no case, to more than 50 percent of
the component wire ropes’ nominal strength. The proof test for a single-leg,
hand-tucked sling must be 1.25 times the rated load. The proof test for
mechanical splice single-leg slings and endless slings must be 2 times the
vertical load. Apply the proof load for multiple leg bridle slings to the
individual legs at 1.25 times the rated vertical load for hand tucked splice, or
2, for mechanical splice. Load any master link connected to multiple-leg
slings to 2 times the force of the combined legs. Make a copy of the proof test
certificate, with date and weight, and make the records available for
examination.
18.3.5 Environmental Effects. Do not expose fiber core wire rope slings to
temperatures above 180 °F. Consult sling manufacturers before using slings
in chemically active environments or in temperatures above 400 °F or below -
60 °F.
18.3.6 End Fittings and Connections. See the corresponding appendix for
instructions on selecting and using end connectors. Do not form eyes in wire
rope slings or chokers with wire clips or a fold back eye with pressed metal
sleeve.
18.3.7 Protruding Ends. Cover or blunt protruding ends of strands in splices
on slings and bridles.
18.3.8 Sling Inspection and Replacement. Inspect slings periodically and
remove them from service if one or more of the following conditions are
present:
a. Six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or three broken
wires in one strand in one rope lay.
b. Wear or scraping on one-third the original diameter of outside
individual wires.
c. Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any other damage resulting in
distortion of the rope structure.
d. Evidence of heat damage.
e. Cracked, deformed, or worn end attachments.
f. Corrosion of the rope or end attachments.
Permanently remove from service fiber core rope slings if exposed to
temperatures above 180 °F. Nonfiber core rope temperatures must not exceed
400 °F or minus 60 °F without manufacturer’s recommendation.
18-4 October 2009
Section 18—Slings, Chains,
and ACCeSSOries
18.4 Requirements for Using Synthetic Fiber Rope
18.4.1 Safe Working Load. The safe working loads for synthetic fiber rope
and slings must not exceed rated capacities, as shown in tables E-15 through
E-17.
18.4.2 Identification. Each sling must be marked to show the manufacturer,
code or stock number, rated load for the various types of hitches used, type of
material, and date of manufacture.
18.4.3 Splices. In addition to the manufacturer's recommendations, use the
following minimum requirements for splicing fiber rope:
a. Synthetic Fiber. Eye splices must have at least four full tucks, and
short splices must have at least eight full tucks, with four on each side of
the centerline of the splice.
b. Strand End Tails. Fiber ropes less than 1 inch in diameter must have
tails that project at least six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck.
Ropes 1 inch in diameter and larger must have tails that project at least
6 inches beyond the last full tuck. You may taper and splice the required
length of strand and tails into the body of the rope using at least two
additional tucks.
c. Eye of Splice. The eye must be large enough to provide no more than
a 60-degree angle at the splice when placing the eye over the load or
Support.
d. Knots. Do not use knots in rigging applications.
18.4.4. Environmental Effects. Load capacities, as shown in tables E-15
through E-17, apply in the temperature range of -20°F to 150 °F for
polypropylene slings and from -20°F to 180 °F for nylon and polyester slings.
For service in temperatures outside this range, or in chemical environments,
consult the fiber rope manufacturer.
18.4.5 Electrical Hazard. Use only nonconductive, synthetic fiber rope near
energized conductors or equipment, including handlines for work on electrical
facilities.
18.4.6 Care of Fiber Ropes. Properly care for fiber ropes to keep them in
safe condition. Do not use fiber ropes subjected to acids, alkalies, freezing, or
excessive heat to carry loads. Use padding to protect fiber rope from
abrasion when it is drawn over square corners or sharp or rough surfaces.
18.4.7 Inspection and Replacement. Inspect slings and remove them from
service if one or more of the following conditions are present:
October 2009 18-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
a. Slings shortened with knots, bolts, or other unapproved methods.
b. Damaged slings.
c. Rope less than 1/2 inch in diameter.
d. Slings subjected to a sustained load equal to the rated capacity for more
than 3 days.
e. Slings made from old rope.
f. Slings subjected to chemical environments, unless permitted by the
rope manufacturer.
18.5 Requirements for Using Synthetic Webbing Slings
18.5.1 Safe Working Load. Do not use a webbing sling at a load greater
than established safe working loads, as shown in tables E-18 through E-20.
Follow the manufacturer's recommended safe working load for the specific
angle of loading, provided that you maintain a minimum safety factor of five.
18.5.2 Identification. Synthetic webbing slings must be marked or coded
with the manufacturer's name, code or stock number, type of material, and the
rated capacity for the type of hitches used.
18.5.3 Care and Maintenance
a. Webbing. Synthetic webbing must be of uniform thickness and width;
do not split selvage edges from the webbing's width.
b. Fittings. The minimum breaking strength of fittings must equal that of
the sling and must be free of all sharp edges that could damage the
webbing.
c. Attachments. Use only stitching to attach fittings and form eyes. The
thread must be in an even pattern and contain a sufficient number of
Stitches to develop the full breaking strength of the sling.
d. Storage and Use. Do not use or store nylon web, polyester, and
polypropylene web slings and web slings with aluminum fittings where
caustic fumes, vapors, sprays, mists, or liquids are present. Store slings
out of direct sunlight to avoid deterioration from ultraviolet light and away
from sources of ozone generation.
e. Temperature. Do not use synthetic web slings of polyester and nylon
in temperatures above 180 °F or below -40 °F. Do not use polypropylene
web slings in temperatures above 200 °F.
18-6
October 2009
Section 18—Slings, Chains,
and ACCessories
18.5.4 Removal From Service. Immediately remove synthetic webbing
slings from service if one or more of the following visible defects is present:
a. Acid or caustic burns.
b. Melting or charring of any part of the surface.
C. Snags, punctures, tears, or cuts.
d. Broken or worn stitches.
e. Wear or elongation exceeding the amount recommended by the
manufacturer.
f. Distortion of fittings.
g. End of service life.
18.5.5 Repairs. Do not use repaired synthetic web slings unless a sling
manufacturer or an equivalent entity repairs them. Proof-test each repaired
sling to twice the rated load before returning it to service. Maintain
documentation of the proof test.
18.6 Requirements for Synthetic Roundslings
18.6.1 Safe Working Load. The safe working load for single-leg polyester
roundslings must conform to the values shown in the appendix, table E-21.
The minimum safety factor for roundslings is five. Load capacities are in the
temperature range of -40 °F to 194 °F. When using them in temperatures
outside this range, in chemical environments, or when constructed with yarns
of nonpolyester materials, consult the sling manufacturer.
18.6.2 Identification. Each roundsling must be tagged to show the
manufacturer's identification, code or stock number, type of material in the
core and cover (if different), and the rated capacity for the type of hitches
used.
18.6.3 Removal From Service. Immediately remove roundslings from
service if any of the following conditions are present:
a. Acid or caustic burns.
b. Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface.
C. Snags, punctures, tears, or cuts.
d. Broken or worn stitches.
e. Distortion of fittings.
October 2009 - 18-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
f. Appearance of wear indicators.
g. End of service life.
18.6.4 Repairs. Do not make temporary repairs to either roundslings or
fittings. Do not repair load-bearing yarns or fittings. Allow only a roundsling
manufacturer or qualified person to repair protective covers. When repaired,
the roundsling must be marked and proof-tested to twice the rated vertical
load before returned to service.
18.7 Requirements for Shackles, Hooks, and Other Rigging
Hardware
18.7.1 Shackles
a. Safe Working Load. Use the appendix, table E-22, to determine the
safe working loads of shackles. Higher safe working loads recommended
by the manufacturer are acceptable for specific identifiable products if you
maintain a minimum safety factor of five.
b. Hoisting. Shackles used for hoisting must be of forged alloy steel and
must be of the screw pin or bolt type.
c. Wear or damage. Remove shackles from service if they are bent,
distorted, or worn in the crown or pin by more than 10 percent of their
original diameter.
18.7.2 Hooks
a. Requirement. Manufacturing, testing, inspecting, and use of hooks
must conform to the more stringent requirements contained in
ANSI B30.10, Hooks, manufacturer specifications and recommendations,
or these standards.
b. Safe Working Load. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation to
determine the safe working load for the specific size and type of hook
used. If a manufacturer's recommendation is not available, test hooks at
twice the intended safe working load before use. Maintain a record of the
dates and results of the tests.
c. Inspection. Inspect hooks frequently and remove them from service if
they are cracked, severely corroded, have been opened more than
15 percent of the normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point,
or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook.
18.7.3 Rings, Links, and Swivels. Hardware items, including rings, links,
and swivels, must be forged alloy steel of weldless construction. Follow
manufacturer’s safe working loads.
18-8 October 2009
Section 18—Slings, Chains,
and ACCessories
18.7.4 Eyebolts. Eyebolts used for hoisting must be of forged alloy steel and
equipped with shoulders or collars.
a. Tapped Hole. The minimum depth of the tapped hole for screwed
eyebolts must be one and one-half times the bolt diameter.
b. Application of Load. Apply loads in the plane of the eye of the
eyebolt. Do not reeve slings through eyebolts or attach hooks directly to
the eyebolt. Use a shackle to distribute the load.
October 2009 18-9
Section 19
Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors
This section discusses hoisting equipment, piledrivers, and conveyors. It
specifically addresses the following:
General requirements
Inspections and testing
Recordkeeping
Qualifications of hoisting equipment operator
Operating requirements
Critical lifts
Wire rope
Overhead, gantry, monorail, and underslung cranes
Portal, tower, and pillar cranes
Derricks
• Floating cranes and derricks
• Material hoists
• Overhead hoists
• Elevators and personnel hoists
• Conveyors and related equipment
Cable highlines
Base-mounted drum hoists
Specialized hoisting systems
Piledrivers
19.1 General Requirements for Hoisting Equipment
Maintain and operate equipment covered by this section in a safe manner. Use
the more stringent of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), American Society of Mechanical Engineers/American National
Standards Institute (ASME/ANSI), or Bureau of Reclamation standards, or use
the manufacturer's guidance to install, set up, operate, and maintain all covered
equipment.
19.1.1 Equipment Design. Design and install cranes and other hoisting
equipment covered by this standard in accordance with the applicable standards
listed in table 19–1.
October 2009 - 19-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table 19-1.-Crane and hoisting equipment design and construction standards

ASME/ANSI B30.2
Overhead and gantry cranes (top running bridge, single or
multiple girder, top running trolley hoist)
ASME/ANSI E30.3
Construction tower Cranes
ASME/ANSI B30.4
Portal, tower, and pillar cranes
ASME/ANSI B30.5
Mobile and locomotive Cranes
ASME/ANSI B30.6
Derricks
ASME/ANSI B30.7
Base mounted drum hoists
ASME/ANSI B30.8
Floating cranes and floating derricks
ASME/ANSI B30.11
Monorails and underhung cranes
ASME/ANSI B30. 12
Handling loads suspended from rotorcraft
ASME/ANSI B30.14
Side boom tractors
ASME/ANSI B30. 16
Overhead hoists (underhung)
ASME/ANSI B30.22
Articulating boom cranes
19.1.2 Modification and Reconfiguration. Do not make modifications,
additions, or repairs that affect the structural competence, capacity, or safe
operation of the equipment or system without the manufacturer's written
approval or the approval of a professional engineer (PE).
19.1.3 Documentation. The following documents must be immediately
available to the operator at all times:
a. The manufacturer’s operating manual or equivalent for the specific
make and model of crane.
b. Operating manuals for any attachments or accessories with which the
crane is equipped.
c. The load rating chart for construction cranes; portal, tower, and pillar
cranes; mobile and locomotive cranes; floating cranes; floating derricks;
and articulating boom cranes. This chart must be completely legible. It
must also include the crane make and model and contain a complete range
of the manufacturer’s approved crane load ratings for all configurations
for which the crane is designed.
19.2 Requirements for Cranes and Hoisting Devices, Inspections,
and Testing
Inspect cranes and hoisting devices used in Reclamation activities. The
equipment is subject to operational and load-performance tests as required by this
section, other applicable standards, and manufacturer’s recommendations.
19–2
October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
19.2.1 Inspections. A designated person must conduct all inspections and
must cover, at a minimum, the items identified in attachment 19–1. For the
purposes of this section, a designated person is a person selected or assigned
by the employer as competent to perform specific duties. For inspection of
non-Reclamation owned equipment, notify a Reclamation representative at
least 24 hours before the inspection to observe the inspection.
a. Types of Inspections. Inspect cranes in accordance with table 19-2
and this section.

Table 19-2.—Crane and hoist equipment inspection criteria
When to inspect
Type of inspection
Notes
Before initial use - new Cranes
Initial inspection
Performed by manufacturer.
Before initial use - altered
CraſhëS
Initial inspection
"Altered "is defined as any change to the
original manufacturer's design
configuration, that is, replacement of Weight
handling equipment, parts, or components
with other parts or components.
A qualified person must conduct this
inspection.
Before initial use on a
Reclamation project
Periodic inspection
"Initial use" refers to the first time
Reclamation takes possession of and
assembles a Crane Or Whenever a non-
Reclamation-owned crane is brought onto a
jobsite and set up for use.
Before every operation (shift)
Start-up inspection
Annually or as required by
manufacturer (if more
frequent) for equipment in
regular use
Periodic inspection
If the hoisting equipment has not been in
service, inspect prior to operation.
However, do not use the equipment if you
have not inspected it in more than
12 months.
Before using a crane which is
not in use on a regular basis
and Which has been idle for
more than 1 month but less
than 6 months
Frequent inspection
Also inspect running ropes. Annual
(periodic) inspection also applies.
Before using a crane that is
not used on a regular basis
and that has been idle for
more than 6 months
Periodic and frequent
inspection
Also inspect running ropes.
Standby cranes, at least semi-
annually
Frequent inspection
Standby cranes are those not used
regularly
but are available, on a standby basis, for
emergencies (e.g., emergency operation
and maintenance work); requirements for
frequent inspections of standby cranes are
in addition to the requirement for a annual
(periodic) inspections.
October 2009
19-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. A copy of the completed inspection report must be readily available at
the operating site.
19.2.2 Performance Tests. Performance tests include operational tests or
load tests. Conduct performance tests in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations; at the minimum, performance testing must meet the
requirements listed in attachment 19–2. Conduct performance tests as
required by these standards and the ANSI B30 standard appropriate for the
equipment being tested.
a. Operational Tests. A designated person must conduct operational
tests without load, as follows:
• Before initial use of cranes in which a load bearing (excluding the
rope) or load controlling part or component, brake, travel
component, or clutch has been altered, replaced, or repaired. In
this case, a selective operational performance test—testing only
those components that have been or may have been affected by the
alteration, replacement, repair, or reassembly—may be performed.
• Each time it is reconfigured or reassembled after disassembly.
• Annually, unless the hoisting equipment has not been in Service, in
which case you may defer the test until before its operation.
However, do not use equipment if the last operational test was
conducted more than 12 months ago.
19.2.3 Load Tests. Conduct load tests, under the direction of a qualified
person, as follows: -
• Before initial use of cranes in which a load bearing or load controlling
part or component, brake, travel component, or clutch has been altered,
replaced, or repaired. -
• Each time it is reconfigured or reassembled after disassembly.
• Before any lift where the load is expected to be at least 75 percent of
the rated capacity of the crane or hoisting equipment. Load tests
results will remain valid for 5 years, and load tests for subsequent lifts
are not required during this period.
Test loads must be at least 100 percent, but not more than 110 percent, of the
manufacturer's load rating capacity chart at the configuration of the test,
except for manufacturer testing of new cranes and as excepted in the
subsection for maximum lifts. -
For the purposes of this section, a qualified person is a person who, by
possession of a recognized degree or certificate of professional standing, or
who, by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has demonstrated the
ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter and work.
19-4 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
a. Boom Stop Testing. Test hoisting equipment with boom stops during
the operating test process.
19.3 Availability and Retention of Records
Keep written records of inspections and performance tests, identifying the type
and nature of the inspection and testing, readily accessible to operating personnel
and make them available upon request to employees or compliance officials.
19.4 Qualifications for Operating Hoisting Equipment
19.4.1 Operators. Only qualified and designated personnel may operate
hoisting equipment. Only operators qualified to operate a particular type of
crane or hoisting device may operate that equipment.
19.4.2 Proficiency. Operators of cranes and hoisting equipment must be
qualified through formal training, testing, and demonstrated proficiency in
operating the equipment to a designated person. After initial qualification,
operators must complete a total of 24 hours of periodic refresher training over
any 3-year period, covering safe operation of the types of cranes and hoisting
devices they operate. Operators of non-Reclamation-owned equipment must
provide evidence of operator qualification before beginning work on
Reclamation activities.
19.4.3 Physical Qualifications. Operators must be physically qualified to
operate hoisting equipment.
a. Physician's Certification. Operators must have a physician's
certification that the operator meets physical qualifications to operate
hoisting equipment involving mobile cranes, cableways, cab operated
bridge cranes, derricks, mobile excavators, loaders, and similar heavy
equipment when used for hoisting materials. Consider the following
physical qualifications:
• Vision of at least 20/30 Snellen in one eye and 20/50 in the other,
with or without corrective lenses
• Normal depth perception and field of vision
• Ability to distinguish colors, regardless of position
• Adequate hearing, with or without hearing aid, for the specific
operation
• Sufficient strength, endurance, agility, coordination, manual
dexterity, and speed of reaction to meet the demands of equipment
operation
• No tendencies to dizziness or similar undesirable characteristics
October 2009 19–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. Examination Validity. The physician's certificate of examination
must be no more than 12 months old at the time of any hoisting operation.
c. Disqualification Factors. Evidence of physical defects; emotional
instability that could render a hazard to the operator, others, or safe
operation of the crane; or evidence that the operator is subject to seizures
or loss of physical control constitutes sufficient reason for disqualification.
In cases where the operator may be disqualified, specialized medical tests
may be required to determine these conditions and their effects.
19.5 Operating Requirements for Hoisting Equipment
19.5.1 Duty Periods. Operators must not work or be at the jobsite more than
12 hours in any 24-hour period.
19.5.2 Authority. Operators must be responsible for those operations under
their direct control. Whenever there is any doubt as to safety, the operator
must have the authority to stop or to refuse to handle loads until safety has
been ensured. Other onsite personnel must alert the operator if they believe
unsafe operating conditions exist.
19.5.3 Other Duties. When hoisting equipment is in operation, operators
must not perform any other work or leave the operator's position while a load
is suspended.
19.5.4 Environmental Conditions
a. Crane and hoisting operations must be shut down when wind speeds
exceed 25 miles per hour, or in accordance with specific manufacturer’s
instruction, whichever is less.
b. If dust, darkness, fog, snow, rain, or other environmental conditions
impair the operator's visibility, shut down the crane operation until steps
are taken to compensate for the lack of visibility.
c. Shut down crane and hoisting operations when lightning is present and
equipment is vulnerable to lightning strikes. See the section on "Work
Planning," for specific practices.
19.5.5 Maximum Lifts
a. Do not lift loads greater than the rated load of the crane, except for
performance load testing purposes or as otherwise permitted in this
subsection.
b. Overhead and gantry cranes, operating in accordance with
ASME/ANSI B30.2, may exceed their rated capacities for performance
load testing purposes (up to 125 percent), or planned engineered lifts.
19–6 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
19.5.6 Riding Loads. No person may ride loads, blocks, buckets, hooks,
Scaffolding, boatswain's chairs, cages, or other devices attached to hoist lines,
booms, or attachments of any crane, derrick, or materials hoist. Designated
maintenance personnel may ride the carriage service platform of a cableway
to perform inspection testing or maintenance. Under limited circumstances
where employees cannot perform work through other means, you may use
crane-supported personnel platforms (manskips) after obtaining written
authorization, supported by written risk assessment, from the office head.
19.5.7. Barricades. Barricade the rear-swing radius area of rotating
SuperStructures of cranes to physically prevent people or equipment from
entering the danger zone.
19.5.8 Radio Communications. During critical lifts or lifts involving use of
crane-supported work platforms, maintain and use direct radio
communications among the operator, personnel on the work platform (when
applicable), and an individual observing the load.
19.5.9 Crane and Hoist Signals
a. Signal Systems. Use a uniform standard signal system in operating
cranes, derricks, and hoists. Hand signals, as illustrated in "Hand Signals
for Cranes and Hoisting Equipment," must be used. Where hand signals
are insufficient, or when the distance between the operator and the signal
person is over 200 feet, the operator and signal person must use voice or
Other direct means of communication. The operator and signal person
must maintain communication.
b. Posting. Post signals at the operator's position and, as practical, at
signal control points and at other locations as necessary to inform those
using the signals.
c. Signal Visibility. Protect signal systems from unauthorized use,
damage, or interference. Predesignate a signal person and identify that
person by Special color of hard hat, armband, or other distinguishing
marking. The predesignated person will give crane and hoist signals.
19.5.10 High-Voltage Lines. See the section on "Electrical Safety" for
Specific requirements pertaining to operation of cranes and other equipment
near high-voltage lines.
19.5.11 Taglines. Use taglines to control loads when their use is practical
and will not create additional hazards to personnel, equipment, and structures.
19.5.12 Crane-Supported Personnel Platforms. Conduct activities
involving crane- supported personnel platforms using the requirements of
Subsection on crane-supported personnel platforms, located in the "Walking
and Working Surfaces" section. These activities are critical lifts. Conduct
them as required in the following subsection on critical lifts.
October 2009 19–7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
19.6 Requirements for Critical Lifts
A critical lift is a non-routine lift requiring detailed planning and additional or
unusual safety precautions. Critical lifts include: (1) lifts made when the load
weight is 75 percent or more of the rated capacity of the crane or hoisting device;
(2) lifts made with more than one crane; (3) hoisting personnel with a crane; or
(4) any lift that the crane or hoist operator believes critical.
19.6.1 Lift Supervisor. Designate a person, other than the crane operator, to
supervise the planning and execution of all critical lifts.
19.6.2 Critical Lift Plans. Prepare a written critical lift plan before making
any critical lift. The lift supervisor must prepare the plan in coordination with
the crane/hoisting equipment operator and rigger. All personnel involved in
the lift should review and sign the critical lift plan. The plan must include the
following information:
• Exact size and weight of the load, including all crane and rigging
components that add to the weight. Include the manufacturer’s
maximum load limits for the complete range of the lift.
• Exact information about the sequence of events and procedures,
including equipment positioning, height of the lift, load radius, and
boom length and angles, where applicable.
• Rigging plans with lift points, procedures, and hardware requirements.
• Conditions and procedures under which the lifting operation is to be
stopped.
• Coordination and communications procedures.
• Names of lift supervisor, hoisting equipment operator, rigger, and
other personnel with key roles in the operation.
• For tandem lifts, general information on the hoisting equipment,
including make, model, operating speeds, and other information to
ensure the equipment is compatible.
• Ground conditions and other information needed to ensure that a level,
stable foundation with sufficient bearing capacity for the lift supports
the hoisting equipment. This includes outrigger, crawler track, and
support mat design calculations.
19.7 Requirements for Working with Wire Rope
19.7.1 Safe Working Load. See the "Wire Rope" appendix for the
approximate safe working load for various specified sizes and classifications
of improved steel wire rope. Do not exceed these values unless
manufacturers’ data are available and the data permit greater loads.
19.7.2 End Fasteners. Use only commercial wire rope fittings. Install wire
rope clips as specified in the "Wire Rope" appendix. Make job-fabricated eye
19–8 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
splices in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and test them before
use. Give eye splices three or more full tucks. When using a wedge Socket
fastener, secure it with either an extended wedge through which a wire rope
clip is secured, a short piece of wire rope secured to the dead end with a wire
rope clip, or a dual-saddle (piggyback) clip that fastens tightly to the dead end
but slides freely on the live side. Never use a single clip to secure the live side
and the dead end.
19.7.3 Hoisting Rope. Except for end fasteners, wire rope used to hoist or
lower loads must be continuous, without knots or splices.
19.7.4 Spooling of Rope. Overwind or underwind wire rope correctly from
right to left or left to right, in accordance with the lay, to avoid twisting,
spreading, or overlapping on winch drums in accordance with the wire rope
manufacturer's instructions.
19.7.5 Sheave Diameter. The ratio between the rope diameter and the drum
or sheave diameter must not be less than specified by the rope manufacturer.
When not specified, the ratio must be in accordance with the appropriate
ANSI standard. Drums, sheaves, and pulleys must be smooth and free of
defects that could damage the rope.
19.7.6 Sheave Groove Tolerance. Use the sheave groove tolerances as
recommended by the sheave manufacturer.
19.7.7 Lubrication. Lubricate wire rope with manufacturer-approved
lubricants and follow the manufacturer's approved methods at the intervals
required by the type of service.
19.7.8 Removal and Replacement. Remove wire rope with one or more of
the following defects from hoisting or load-carrying service immediately:
a. Corrosion. Corrosion of the rope or end attachments.
b. Broken Wire.
1. One or more valley breaks. (A valley break is a wire break in the
valley between two adjacent strands.)
2. Six randomly spaced broken wires in one lay or three broken wires
in one strand in one lay.
c. Abrasion. Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, or other damage resulting
in the loss of more than one-third of the original diameter of the outside
wires.
d. Kinking. Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or other damage resulting in
distortion of the rope structure.
e. Heat Damage. Evidence of heat damage.
October 2009 19-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
f. Reduction in Diameter. Reductions from nominal diameter of more
than 3/64 inch for rope diameters up to and including 3/4 inch, of more
than 1/16 inch for diameters 7/8 to 1-1/8 inches, or of more than 3/32 inch
for rope diameters of 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inches.
19.7.9 Socket Breaks. Resocket or remove from service the wire rope when
any broken or corroded wires are next to a socket or end fitting. Resocket the
wire rope or remove it from service.
19.7.10 Hazardous Location. Guard running lines of stationary hoisting
equipment located within 8 feet of the ground or working level or enclose or
barricade the hazardous area.
19.8 Requirements for Mobile and Locomotive Cranes
In addition to the requirements set forth in these standards, mobile and locomotive
cranes must conform to the standards in the current edition of ANSI/ASME
B30.5, Mobile and Locomotive Cranes; side boom wheel or crawler tractors must
conform to the ANSI/ASME B30.14, Side Boom Tractors.
19.8.1 Performance Inspection and Testing. Conduct and record
performance inspections and testing in accordance with the requirements of
this section and attachment 19–2.
19.8.2 Boom Angle Indicator. Equip mobile cranes with a boom angle or
radius indicator located within the operator's view.
19.8.3 Boom Stops. Provide cranes or other hoisting devices with cable-
supported booms with stops to resist the boom falling over backwards.
Design boom stops to provide increasing resistance from the initial point of
contact to a stopping point no more than 87 degrees above horizontal.
19.8.4 Boom Hoist Disengagement Device. Provide mobile crane booms
with a functional boom hoist disengagement device that will automatically
stop the boom hoist mechanism when the boom reaches its highest rated
angle.
19.8.5 Anti-Two-Blocking Device. Equip all mobile cranes with a two-
block damage prevention feature or an anti-two-blocking device. Two-block
damage prevention features must prevent damage to the crane or hoist line in
case of a two-block condition. Anti-two-blocking devices must have
automatic capabilities to disengage all crane functions whose movement can
cause two-blocking. For lattice-boom cranes manufactured before 1992, two-
block warning features may be used to alert the operator to an impending two-
blocking condition. However, do not use cranes so-equipped in critical lifts or
personnel hoisting operations.
19-10 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
19.8.6 Level Indicator. Provide a means for the operator to visually
determine the levelness of the crane.
19.8.7 Jib Stops. In addition to boom stops, jibs must have a positive stop to
prevent overtopping.
19.8.8 Cab Windows. Windows in crane cabs must be safety glass or
equivalent. Cab windows must not introduce any distortion that interferes
with the crane's safe operation.
19.8.9 Audible Warning Device. Mobile cranes must have an audible
warning signal device distinguishable and audible above the usual
construction noise.
19.8.10 Securing Booms. When they are not in use, lower crane booms to
the ground or otherwise secure them to prevent displacement by wind or other
outside forces.
19.8.11 Fire Extinguisher. Provide the cab with a 2-A:40-B:C fire
extinguisher.
19.9 Requirements for Overhead, Gantry, Monorail, and Underslung
Cranes
In addition to requirements set forth in these standards, overhead and gantry
cranes must conform to requirements contained in the current edition of ANSI
B30.2. Monorails and underhung cranes must conform to the requirements
contained in the current edition of ANSI B30. 11.
19.9.1 Design. The manufacturer or a PE must design crane installations and
equipment.
19.9.2 Performance Inspections and Tests. Conduct and record
performance inspections and testing in accordance with requirements of the
"Cranes and Hoisting Devices, Inspections, and Testing" section, and
attachment 19–2.
19.9.3 Crane Access. Provide safe access to the cab or bridge walkway with
a fixed ladder, stairs, or platform, with no step or gaps exceeding 12 inches.
Fixed ladders and stairways must comply with the requirements set forth in
the section on "Walking and Working Surfaces."
19.9.4 Platforms and Walkways. Install maintenance platforms and
walkways protected by standard guardrails and toeboards, and means of safe
access onto the trolley and bridge. Where it is impractical to install platforms
and walkways, install safety lines with runners to attach safety belt lanyards to
afford safe inspection and maintenance. Refer to the section on "Walking and
Working Surfaces."
October 2009 19-11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
19.9.5 Markings. Mark the rated load of the crane on both sides of the crane.
Mark the rated load of each hoist on the crane on the hoist, trolley unit, or load
block. All markings must be readable from the ground or floor.
19.9.6 Hoist Identification Markings. For cranes with multiple hoists,
distinctively mark each hoist so that it is visible from the ground or floor.
Clearly mark operator controls to correspond to the hoist markings to indicate
the controls that operate each hoist.
19.9.7 Warnings. Cranes must have appropriate warning labels, as required
by ANSI B30.2.
19.9.8 Fire Extinguisher. Mount a fire extinguisher of 2-A:40-B:C rating in
the cab or near the operator's position.
19.9.9 Outdoor Equipment. Secure outdoor cranes from unauthorized
access when not in use.
19.10 Requirements for Portal, Tower, and Pillar Cranes
In addition to the requirements set forth in this section, portal, tower, and pillar
cranes must conform to the applicable standards in the current edition of ANSI
B30.4, "Portal, Tower and Pillar Cranes," and ANSI B30.3, "Construction Tower
Cranes."
19.10.1 Design. The manufacturer or a PE must design the crane equipment
and oversee its installation.
19.10.2 Performance Inspections and Tests. Conduct and record
performance inspections and testing in accordance with requirements of this
section and attachment 19–2.
19.10.3 Fire Extinguisher. Mount a fire extinguisher of 2-A:40-B:C rating
in the cab or near the operator's position.
19.10.4 Crane Erection and Dismantling. Erect and dismantle cranes in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable
ANSI/ASME standards. Following are the minimum requirements:
a. Erect cranes under the Supervision of a qualified person.
b. Make the manufacturer’s or a qualified person’s written instructions
and the weights of each component to be erected at the site.
c. Develop and implement a job hazard analysis (JHA) during the
planning and erection process. The JHA must include consideration of
temporary guying and bracing requirements during the erection.
19–12 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
19.10.5 Environmental Conditions. Place the crane into its most favorable
protected position to protect personnel and property when environmental
conditions require lifting operations to cease.
19.10.6 Unattended Tower Cranes. Place unattended tower cranes in a
weathervane configuration.
19.10.7 Limiting Devices. Where applicable, install the following limiting
devices:
a. Trolley limit switches to prevent further trolley motion beyond
predetermined points on tower crane booms.
b. Anti-two-block switches that cause the hoist drum to automatically
stop, preventing contact between the load hook and the head block.
c. Load-limiting switches to avoid exceeding crane capacities.
d. Limit switches and stops or buffers at each end of the tracks of track-
mounted cranes.
19.10.8 Boom Angle Indicator. Install boom angle indicators on machines
having booms capable of moving in the vertical plane.
19.11 Requirements for Derricks
Derricks, in addition to the requirements set forth in this subsection, must
conform to the requirements contained in the current edition of ANSI B30.6,
"Safety Standards for Derricks."
19.11.1 Design. A PE must design derrick installations and equipment.
19.11.2 Inspections and Performance Tests. Conduct and record
inspections and performance tests in accordance with requirements of this
section and attachment 19–2.
19.11.3 Foundation. Set derricks on foundations designed and constructed
to support the weight of the crane plus the maximum rated load.
19.11.4 Boom Angle Indicator. Provide a boom angle or radius indicator
and place it within the operator's view.
19.11.5 Fire Extinguisher. Mount a fire extinguisher of 2-A:40-B:C rating
at the operator's station.
19.12 Requirements for Floating Cranes and Derricks
In addition to the requirements set forth in these standards, floating cranes and
derricks must conform to the requirements contained in the current edition of
ANSI B30.8, "Safety Code for Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks."
October 2009 19-13
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
19.12.1 Design. The manufacturer or a qualified person must design and
certify all floating cranes and derricks.
19.12.2 Inspections and Performance Tests. Conduct and record
inspections and performance testing using this section and attachment 19–2.
19.12.3 Fire Extinguisher. Mount a fire extinguisher of 2-A:40-B:Cat the
operator's station.
19.12.4 Personal Flotation Devices. All personnel must wear U.S. Coast
Guard-approved personal flotation devices while onboard, except while in
enclosed cabins. Additionally, provide and make readily accessible at least
two U.S. Coast Guard-approved Type IV life rings (30 inch diameter) with at
least 90 feet of line. For night operations, equip at least one ring with a water-
activated flashing light.
19.12.5 Rescue Skiff. Make available a rescue skiff meeting the
requirements in the section on "Personal Protective Equipment."
19.12.6 Load Rating Chart. When reducing load ratings to compensate for
"barge list," provide a new rating chart. The manufacturer must rate barge-
mounted cranes designed and constructed as a unit. All other barge-mounted
cranes must be large enough to limit the "list" under maximum load to
5 degrees.
19.12.7 Wave Action. Suspend crane operation when significant wave
action affects the stability of the barge.
19.12.8 Mobile Cranes. Block and secure mobile cranes mounted on barges
or pontoons to prevent shifting.
19.13 Requirements for Material Hoists
Construct, install, test, operate, and maintain material hoists as set forth in the
latest edition of ANSI A10.5, "Safety Requirements for Material Hoists," and the
requirements of this section. The manufacturer or a PE must design material hoist
installations.
19.13.1 Assembly. A qualified individual must directly supervise erecting
and dismantling of hoist towers and material hoists.
19.13.2 Inspection. A qualified person must inspect the hoist, including all
its components, after initial installation and before it is placed into service. A
designated individual must inspect it monthly thereafter in accordance with
ANSI A10.5.
19.13.3 Car-Arresting Devices. Test car-arresting devices before initial use
and every 4 months thereafter. Conduct tests in accordance with ANSI A10.5.
19-14 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
19.13.4 Posting. Post operating rules, including signals, line speeds, and
loading, at the operator's station and on the cage frame or crosshead. A copy
of the hoist operating manual must be available at all times of operation.
19.13.5 Riding. Do not permit anyone to ride a material hoist except for
inspection and maintenance. Conspicuously post with "NO RIDERS
ALLOWED."
19.13.6 Hoistway Entrances. Protect entrances to the hoistway with
substantial gates or bars installed the full width of the landing entrance. Paint
entrance bars and gates with diagonal contrasting colors, such as black and
yellow stripes. Bars must not be less than 2- by 4-inch wood, or equivalent,
and not less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches above the floor. Bars must
be at least 2 feet from the hoist and equipped with a latching device. Where
gates are used, they must be at least 66 inches high, with a maximum
underclearance of 2 inches, and must be no more than 4 inches from the hoist
sill. Gate grilles or lattice must have openings no larger than 2 inches.
19.13.7 Overhead Protection. Protect the top of the cage or platform with
2-inch planking, 0.75-inch plywood, or material of equivalent strength.
19.13.8 Tower Enclosures. You may or may not enclose hoist towers on all
sides. However, the following requirements must apply:
a. Enclosed. An enclosed hoistway or tower must be enclosed on all
sides for its entire height, with 0.5-inch wire mesh screen, No. 18 U.S.
gauge or equivalent, except at access points.
b. Open Sides. For an unenclosed hoist tower, totally enclose the hoist
cage or platform on all sides between the floor and the protective top with
0.5-inch wire mesh screen, No. 14 U.S. gauge or equivalent. The hoist
cage or platform enclosure must include the required gates for loading and
unloading. Install an enclosure at least 6 feet high on the unused sides of
the hoist tower at ground level.
19.13.9 Operator's Station. Protect the operator's station with overhead
planking not less than 2 inches thick or with material of equivalent strength.
19.13.10 Towers and Shaftways. A PE must design towers and shaftways
with a safety device capable of stopping and holding the platform with
maximum load in the event of a cable failure.
19.13.11 Tower Support. Towers must rest on solid foundations. Ensure
the towers are plumb and well guyed or otherwise anchored in four directions
at the top and at least every 30 feet in height.
19.13.12 Hinged Roof. The car or platform roof may be hinged to
accommodate long material.
October 2009 19-15
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
19.13.13 Electric Hoists. Electric hoists must be provided with an automatic
motor brake to automatically stop and hold the load in case of a power failure.
19.13.14 Operating Restrictions. One hoisting machine, or one operator,
must operate only one cage, bucket, or hoist platform at a time.
19.13.15 Hoisting Machines. Design and install hoisting machines to raise
and lower the maximum rated load plus the weight of equipment and ropes.
Hoisting machines must incorporate the following features:
a. Brakes. The brakes must be capable of stopping and holding
125 percent of the rated hoisting capacity under all operating conditions.
b. Mechanical Brakes. Install mechanical brakes to stop movement of
the hoist drum and equip the mechanical brakes with a positive acting
device that will hold the brake in the engaged position.
c. Ratchet and Pawl. Equip friction-clutch-driven winding drum
hoisting machines with an effective pawl and ratchet capable of holding
the rated load capacity when suspended.
d. Controls. All controls must, when released, automatically return to
neutral and set the brake. Plainly mark each control to indicate its
function; it must be within easy reach of the operator.
19.13.16 Position Indicator. Use a positive system to indicate when the
hoist car or platform has reached specific locations, including the top and
bottom landings.
19.13.17 Signal System
a. Hand Signals. You may use hand signals on a single drum hoist when
the hoist tower is no more than 50 feet high and the signals are clearly
visible to the operator at all times.
b. Electrical Communication. Use a closed-circuit electrical
communication system on all other material hoist installations. The
system must be two-way, with a speaker located at the hoist operator's
station and at each landing. The hoist operator must be able to
communicate by voice to and from each station.
19.13.18 Fire Extinguisher. Mount a fire extinguisher of 2-A:40-B:C rating
at the operator's station.
19.13.19 Inspections and Performance Testing. Performance test material
hoists under the direction of the design engineer or his or her designee.
Conduct the test in accordance with ANSI A10.5 requirements and this
section. Include the car-arresting device in the test.
19–16 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
19.14 Requirements for Overhead Hoists
Install, operate, and maintain overhead hoists in compliance with the more
stringent provision of this section and ANSI B30.16, "Overhead Hoists
(Underhung)."
19.14.1 Design. The manufacturer or a PE must design hoists and hoist
suspensions and anchorages.
19.14.2 Inspections and Performance Tests. Conduct and record
inspections and performance tests in accordance with requirements in the
Section on "Cranes, Hoisting Devices, Inspections, and Testing," and
attachment 19–2 of these standards.
19.14.3 Safe Working Load. Indicate the safe working load, as determined
by the manufacturer, on the hoist. Do not exceed the safe working load.
19.14.4 Support. Design the supporting structure to withstand the loads and
forces imposed by the weight of the hoist and its rated load. The support must
provide unobstructed movement of the hoist and load. It must also permit the
operator to stand clear of the load in all hoisting positions.
19.14.5 Limit Switch. Equip power-operated overhead hoists with a limit
switch to prevent the load hook from exceeding the upper travel limit.
19.14.6 Hoist Controls. Controls on powered hoists must return to a neutral
position when released, and load hook movement must stop.
19.14.7 Brakes. Except for hand-powered hoists, all overhead hoists must
have brakes that apply automatically when the controls are in neutral.
19.14.8 Air-Operated Hoists. Connect air hoists to an air supply of
sufficient capacity and working pressure to safely operate the hoist with
maximum load.
19.14.9 Hand-Powered Hoists. Hand-powered hoists must be worm-gear-
driven or equipped with a pawl or ratchet system that provides continuous
effective control and braking reliability.
19.15 Requirements for Elevators and Personnel Hoists
Design, construct, test, inspect, and maintain permanent elevators in accordance
with the current editions of ANSIA17.1, " Elevators and Escalators," and ANSI
A17.2, "Inspectors' Manual for Elevators and Escalators." You must design,
install, and test elevators under the direction of the manufacturer or a PE.
Following installation, inspect, test, and certify elevators in accordance with
referenced standards.
October 2009 19-17
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
19.16 Requirements for Personnel Hoists
Construct, install, test, operate, and maintain personnel hoists as set forth in the
current edition of ANSI A10.4, "Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists," and
the requirements of this subsection.
19.16.1 Design and Installation. Observe manufacturer’s drawings,
specifications, and limitations when installing and operating personnel hoists.
A qualified person must design all personnel hoists, and a PE must certify
them.
19.16.2 Inspections and Performance Tests. A qualified person must
performance test and inspect personnel hoists at initial installation, and a
designated person must inspect them annually thereafter. Conduct the tests in
accordance with ANSI A10.4, "Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists."
Maintain a comprehensive report detailing test and inspection procedures and
results.
19.16.3 Posting. Post rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds,
and special hazard warnings on cages, platforms, and at the operator's station.
19.16.4 Hoistway Enclosure. Hoist towers that are installed outside
buildings or structures must be enclosed for the full height of the side or sides
used to enter or exit to the building or structure. Enclose the other sides to a
height of at least 10 feet above the lowest landing. Enclose the sides of the
tower adjacent to floors or scaffold platforms to a height of 10 feet above the
level of such floors or scaffolds. Enclose towers inside buildings or structures
on all four sides throughout the full height.
19.16.5 Tower Anchorage. Anchor towers to the structure at no less than
25-foot intervals. In addition to tie-ins, install a series of guys. Where tie-ins
are not practical, anchor the tower by wire rope guys, at least 0.5 inch in
diameter, securely fastened to anchorages to ensure stability.
19.16.6 Cage Enclosure. Fully enclose cages on all sides and the top, except
sides used for entrance, which must have car gates or doors.
19.16.7 Entrance Doors. Provide a door or gate that covers the full height
and width of the cage entrance opening, at each entrance to the cage.
19.16.8 Door Interlocks. Provide doors or gates with interlocks that prevent
movement of the cage unless the door or gate is fully closed.
19.16.9 Overhead Protection. Overhead protection of 2-inch planking,
0.75-inch plywood, or other material of equivalent strength must cover the top
of the cage. }
19-18 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
19.16.10 Overspeed Safety Device. Equip the cage with an overspeed safety
device that must stop and hold the cage, plus the maximum rated load, when
the cage exceeds governor tripping speed or the hoist rope fails.
19.16.11 Brakes. Equip the hoist with two independent braking systems.
One must be a system that automatically applies when the controls are in
neutral or when there is a power failure. In addition, attach a manually
operated braking system to the hoist drum that is capable of stopping and
holding 125 percent of the rated load in any position.
19.16.12 Power-Up and Power-Down. Design the hoist power unit to
provide power-up and power-down at all times. Refer to requirements in the
subsection on "Overhead Hoists."
19.16.13 Controls. On manually controlled hoists, the controls must return
to the stop position when pressure is removed from the control lever.
19.16.14 Maximum Speed. The speed of the cage must not exceed 200 feet
per minute.
19.16.15 Travel Limit Stops. Equip hoists with upper and lower travel limit
switches.
19.16.16 Hoist Ropes. Hoist wire ropes must meet the following minimum
requirements:
a. Minimum Number. Drum hoists must have at least two hoisting
ropes, and traction hoists must have at least three hoisting ropes.
b. Safety Factor. Hoisting ropes must have a minimum safety factor as
identified in table 19-3, but in no event may the ropes be less than 0.5 inch
in diameter.
Table 19-3.−Safety factors for hoisting
ropes used in personnel hoists

Rope speed Minimum safety
ft/min factor
0–100 8.00
101-125 8.10
126–150 8.25
151-175 8.40
176-200 8.60
201–225 8.75
226–250 8.90
251-300 9.20
301–350 9.50
351-400 9.75
401-500 10.25
501-600 10.70
October 2009 19-19
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
19.16.17 Emergency Stop Switch. Install an emergency stop switch in the
cage and mark it "STOP."
19.16.18 Maintenance Access. Provide safe accessways for inspection and
maintenance of hoist towers and equipment.
19.16.19 Bridge Tower Construction. A PE must design personnel hoists
used in bridge tower construction, and a PE must supervise their erection.
Inspect these hoists at least weekly and whenever exposed to winds exceeding
35 miles per hour.
19.16.20 Wire Rope. Inspect hoisting rope daily and remove it from service
when any of the conditions described in the subsection, "Requirements for
Working with Wire Rope," exist.
19.16.21 Signals. Where a hoist operator controls personnel hoists, users
must signal the operator either through direct radio communications with that
operator or through a visual and audible electrically operated signal system
between the operator and each cage access point.
19.17 Requirements for Conveyors and Related Equipment
Design, install, operate, and maintain conveyors and related equipment according
to the standards in the current edition of ANSI B20.1, "Safety Standards for
Conveyors and Related Equipment," and the requirements of this subsection.
19.17.1 Safe Access. Provide accessways to enable employees to safely
lubricate, repair, and maintain the conveyors. Provide stairways, ladders,
catwalks, or work platforms to all areas requiring lubrication and
maintenance. Such areas must include elevated head pulleys, tail pulleys, and
drive stations on belt conveyors. Unless rollers on a belt conveyor are self-
lubricating or remotely lubricated, erect a walkway protected by a standard
guardrail and by toeboards for access to all elevated sections of the conveyor
System.
19.17.2 Startup Signal. Equip conveyor systems with a time-delay audible
warning system, which must automatically sound an alarm before startup.
19.17.3 Anti-Runaway Device. On conveyors where reversing or runaway
is possible, install anti-runaway or "backup" stops.
19.17.4 Start and Stop Switches. Provide start and stop switches, capable of
starting and stopping drive motors, at the operator's station. Install stop
Switches at each motor or engine location.
19.17.5 Emergency Stopping. If you install conveyors within 8 feet of the
ground or you allow access along the conveyor or adjacent to unguarded
moving parts of a conveyor, presenting a hazard to employees, you must
19–20 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
install an emergency stop system. The system must consist of a line running
along the entire length of the exposed section of conveyor and its moving
parts. Attach a power disconnect switch that, when pulled, will stop the
conveyor. Design the system to prevent the conveyor from restarting until
you have manually reset the switch or disconnect.
19.17.6 Spillage. Design and install conveyors with sideboards or some
other provision to eliminate spilling or dislodging materials.
19.17.7 Elevated Crossings. Where conveyors pass next to or over work
areas, accessways, roadways, railways, etc., install suitable and effective
protection. The overhead protection must be capable of catching and retaining
any material that may fall from the conveyor. Each day, remove all spilled
material on retaining platforms or decking to prevent overtopping of
sideboards.
19.17.8 Crossovers and Underpasses. Adequately protect crossovers or
underpasses for passage over or under conveyors.
19.17.9 Hazardous Locations. Whenever conveyors are in tunnels, shafts,
pits, or similar confined areas, provide ample room to permit safe access.
Where this is not possible, completely enclose the conveyor. Unless enclosed,
install emergency stop systems. Provide adequate lighting for such areas.
19.17.10 Stockpiled Materials. Keep conveyor tunnels under stockpiled
bulk materials, such as sand and gravel, open at both ends.
19.17.11 Hoppers, Chutes, and Bins. Guard or protect openings to hoppers,
bins, chutes, or other hazard areas to prevent employees from stepping or
falling into them.
19.17.12 Riding Prohibited. Prohibit riding material conveyors; post
"DANGER-NO RIDING" signs along the conveyor.
19.17.13 Equipment Lockout. Lock out conveyors, feed screens, and other
moving parts in accordance with the section on "Control of Hazardous Energy
(Lockout/Tagout)" and hazardous energy control procedures, FIST Volume 1-
1, during repair or maintenance work, except for lubrication normally
provided with conveyor operating. Lubrication points must be easily
accessible and safe for lubrication. Ensure that personnel performing these
tasks are able to safely complete the work.
19.18 Requirements for Cableways and Highlines
In addition to the requirements of this subsection, cableways and highlines must
comply with the installation, testing, operation, and maintenance requirements in
this section and the standards in the current edition of ANSI/ASME B30. 19,
"Cableways."
October 2009 - 19–21
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
19.18.1 Design and Installation. A PE must design cableways and
highlines. You must install and operate cableways and highlines according to
the PE's design drawings, specifications, and operating, maintenance, and
inspection instructions.
19.18.2 Inspection and Performance Tests. Conduct inspections and
performance tests in accordance with the requirements of this subsection and
ANSI B30. 19.
19.18.3 Inspection and Maintenance. Inspect all cableway components
daily and provide daily routine maintenance and lubrication.
19.18.4 Cableway Log. Maintain a log for each cableway or highline on
which you record inspections, lubrication, maintenance, and repair activities.
The log must also include operating time and downtime, and the employee
responsible for performing the maintenance or repair work must sign it. Make
the log available for review.
19.18.5 Signal System. Continuously maintain at least two systems of
communication between the operator and the signalperson. One or both of the
systems must provide voice communication by telephone or radio. You may
substitute lights or bells for one of the systems. When the dual system is not
functioning properly, the operator may deliver the load suspended from the
cableway, but the operator may rig no further load until both communication
systems are functioning.
19.18.6 Control Consoles. During operation of the cableway, permit only
the operator(s) in the control console room. The console room windows must
be safety glass that introduces no distortion that interferes with the safe
operation of the cableway.
19.18.7 Operating Controls. All controls must automatically return to
neutral and set the brakes when released. Plainly mark each control to
indicate its function and ensure that it is within easy reach of the operator.
19.18.8 Cableway Platforms and Carriages. Provide cableway inspection
platforms, moving and stationary, with standard guardrails and toeboards.
Enclose open areas on carriages and moving platforms with wire mesh to
reduce the hazard from falling objects.
19.18.9 Concrete Buckets. Design concrete buckets with a safety device to
prevent accidental opening of the bucket while in transit to the discharge site.
Construct buckets to prevent aggregate from lodging on any part of the
bucket. Refer to the section on "Concrete, Masonry, Construction, and
Formwork."
19–22 - October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
19.18.10 Riding Cableways. Prohibit riding the cableway, except designated
maintenance personnel may ride the carriage service platform of a cableway
to perform inspections or maintenance. Prepare and review a JHA before
performing inspections or maintenance.
19.18.11 Track-Mounted Towers. Equip track-mounted cableway towers or
structures with both limit switches and rail stops or buffers at each end of the
tracks. Equip the wheel with track or rail sweeps extending below the top of
the rail and effective in all directions of travel. When two or more towers
operate on the same track, install an automatic control system to prevent the
towers from colliding.
19.19 Requirements for Base-Mounted Drum Hoists
Base-mounted drum hoists must conform to the requirements of ANSI B30.7,
"Base-Mounted Drum Hoists." Air-powered hoists must conform to the
requirements of ANSI/ASME HST-6M, "Performance Standard for Air Wire
Rope Hoists," or more stringent requirements of this section. Hoisting machines
used in personnel related systems must also meet the requirements in the
subsection on "Overhead Hoist."
19.19.1 Design. The hoist manufacturer or a PE must design hoisting
systems covered by this subsection.
19.19.2 Restrictions. Base-mounted drum hoist systems involving personnel
use or exposure (e.g., movable work platforms, raising or lowering drilling
machines, and personnel hoists) must conform to the provisions of this
section.
19.19.3 Inspections and Performance Tests. Conduct and record
inspections and performance tests using the requirements of this section and
the appendix.
19.20 Requirements for Specialized Hoisting Systems
19.20.1 Manlifts. Manlift design, installation, testing, and operations must
conform to requirements of ANSI A90.1, "Safety Standards for Manlifts."
19.20.2 Draglines. Do not use draglines as hoisting devices without the
manufacturer’s approval.
19.20.3 A-Frame Trucks. The design and operation of A-frame trucks must
conform to this section and "Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment."
Do not use them to hoist personnel.
October 2009 19–23
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
19.20.4 Mobile Hydraulic Excavators and Hoes, Crawlers, Wheel
Loaders, and Similar Machines.
a. Requirement. Do not use mobile hydraulic excavators and hoes,
crawlers, wheel loaders, and similar machines to hoist personnel. Use
them to hoist materials only when they conform to the requirements of this
paragraph and appropriate SAE-recommended practices.
b. Restrictions. Use only machines certified for hoisting by the
manufacturer and equipped with manufacturer-installed closed lifting eyes
or lugs for hoisting. The maximum load in any machine position must not
exceed the rated capacity in the least stable position.
c. Testing. Load-test the machine at 110 percent of the maximum load.
Hoist test loads clear of the ground at the maximum load radius and move
them through the maximum angle of articulation or arc radius in both
directions from the longitudinal centerline of the machine.
19.20.5 Facility Maintenance Hoisting Systems. Design, construct, install,
and use hoisting systems to inspect and maintain facilities, such as penstocks,
spillways, airshafts, and for external building maintenance such as window
washing, in accordance with ANSI A10.22, "Safety Requirements for Rope-
guided and Nonguided Workmen's Hoists" or ANSI A120.1, "Safety
Requirements for Powered Platform for Exterior Building Maintenance." The
manufacturer or a PE must certify such hoisting systems for the intended use.
19.21 Requirements for Piledrivers
19.21.1 Boilers and Pressure Vessels. Boilers and pressure vessels used in
piledriving operations must conform to the requirements and standards set
forth in applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
19.21.2 Hoisting Equipment. Cranes used to drive or extract piling must
conform to the requirements and standards set forth in applicable parts of this
Section.
19.21.3 Floating Piledrivers. Hulls for floating piledrivers must be at least
as wide as 45 percent of the height of the lead above water. Protect the
operating deck to prevent suspended piling from Swinging or drifting in over
the deck.
19.21.4 Hoist Drums. Do not equip piledriver hoist drums with dogs that
automatically disengage by relieving the load or by rotating the drum.
19.21.5 Hose Connections. Secure hose connections to piledriver hammers,
ejectors, or jet pipes with at least a 0.25-inch chain with a minimum working
load of 3,250 pounds or with equivalent devices.
19–24 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
19.21.6 Driving Leads. Provide pile driving leads with fixed ladders and
attachment points for safety harness lanyards.
19.21.7 Landings and Headblocks. Install fixed ladders or stairways for
access to landings and headblocks. Provide piledriver leads with stopblocks
to prevent the hammer from being raised into the headblock.
19.21.8 Blocking Device. When employees must work under the hammer,
place a blocking device in the leads that can support the hammer.
19.21.9 Guying. Use adequate guylines, outriggers, thrustboards,
counterbalances, or rail clamps to stabilize piledrivers during operation.
19.21.10 Moving Piledrivers. When moving the piledriver, lower the
hammer to the bottom of the leads.
19.21.11 Hoisting Piling. Hoist piling using a closed shackle or similar
positive means of attachment to the loadline and keep employees in the clear.
Use taglines to control unguided piles and "flying hammers."
19.21.12 Pulling Pile. Use extractors to pull piling that you cannot pull
without exceeding the safe load rating of the pulling rig. When pulling piling,
do not elevate the crane boom more than 60 degrees from the horizontal.
19.21.13 Overhead Protection. Position overhead protection, equivalent to
2-inch planking, so as not to interfere with the operator's view.
19.21.14 Headblock Guards. Install guards to prevent the line from
jumping out of the headblock.
19.21.15 Jacked Piles. When driving jacked piles, excavation for access pits
must conform to the requirements in the "Excavation Operations" section.
Provide access ladders and erect bulkhead curbs to prevent material from
falling into the excavation.
19.21.16 Cutting Piling. Do not trim piles within a distance from the pile
driver of twice the length of the longest pile.
19.22 Helicopter Operations
19.22.1 Requirement. Operators and aircraft must be licensed and must
comply with the applicable requirements of the Federal Aviation
Administration (FAA), the Department of the Interior Office of Aircraft
Services, ANSI B30.12, "Handling Loads Suspended from Rotorcraft," and
this subsection.
19.22.2 Briefing. Before each day's operation, conduct a briefing for pilots
and ground personnel and discuss in detail the plan of operation.
October 2009 19–25
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
19.22.3 Loads. Secure suspended loads with pressed sleeves, Swedged eyes,
or equivalent means to prevent hand splices from spinning open or cable from
loosening. Tag lines must be short enough so they cannot be drawn into the
rOtOrS.
19.22.4 Cargo Hooks. Use self-locking cargo hooks equipped with a quick
release device that can be activated from the pilot’s location. Electrically
operated cargo hooks must have the electrical activating device designed and
installed to prevent accidental operation. Also equip these hooks with an
emergency control to release the load. Test the hooks before each day's
operation to ensure that they function properly.
19.22.5 Personal Protective Equipment. Employees receiving the load
must wear safety goggles and hard hats fitted with chinstraps. Employees
must not wear loose-fitting clothing that may become snagged on the hoist
line.
19.22.6 Downwash. Remove or secure material and loose gear within 100
feet of the lift or delivery site.
19.22.7 Operator Responsibility. The helicopter pilot is responsible for the
size, weight, and manner in which loads are connected to the helicopter. Do
not make the lift if the pilot considers it unsafe.
19.22.8 Hooking and Unhooking. Employees must not perform work under
the hovering helicopter, except as necessary to hook and unhook loads.
Provide a safe means of access and egress for employees to approach the hook
to engage or disengage cargo slings.
19.22.9 Static Charge. Unless ground personnel use a grounding device to
dissipate the static charge, they must wear rubber gloves.
19.22.10 Weight Limitations. The weight of the load and rigging must not
exceed the aircraft manufacturer's rating, considering altitude and ambient
temperatures existing at the time.
19.22.11 Ground Lines. Do not attach hoist wires or other gear, except for
pulling lines or conductors that "payout" from a container or roll off a reel, to
any fixed ground structure or allow wires or other gear to foul on any fixed
structure. Use only pulling lines or conductor stringing systems designed with
stress release hardware, so located that it protects the aircraft against overload
and line entanglement with rotors.
19.22.12 Visibility. When dust or other conditions reduce visibility, ground
personnel must exercise special caution to keep clear of the rotor blades. The
employer must reduce the possibility of dust to the extent practical.
19–26 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
19.22.13 Approaching Helicopters. Permit only authorized personnel to
approach within 50 feet of a helicopter with turning rotor blades. People
approaching or leaving a helicopter with the blades turning must keep within
full view of the pilot and assume a crouched position. Persons must stay out
of the area from the cockpit or cabin rearward unless the pilot authorizes them
to enter that area.
19.22.14 Radio Communication. Provide reliable radio communication
between the pilot and a designated member of the ground crew during all
loading, unloading, and rigging operations.
19.22.15 Hand Signals. When personnel use hand signals, they must use
standard "Helicopter Hand Signals." The signal person on the ground must be
distinguishable from other ground personnel.
19.22.16 Inspection and Maintenance. Assign only FAA-certified
personnel, experienced on the type of aircraft being maintained, to inspect or
repair helicopters. Provide maintenance personnel with lighting systems that
meet minimum requirements set forth in ANSI/IES RP7, "Practice for
Industrial Lighting." During inclement weather, carry out repair work in
enclosures adequate to protect personnel against the elements. An appropriate
pilot must flight-test all repairs pertaining to safety of flight before returning
the aircraft to service.
October 2009 19–27
Attachment 19-1
Inspection Elements for Hoisting Equipment
Elements for Startup Inspections
1. Inspect all control mechanisms for maladjustment interfering with proper
operation.
2. Inspect all control mechanisms for excessive wear of components and
contamination by lubricants or other foreign matter.
3. Inspect all operator aids, motion, and load limiting devices, and other safety
devices for malfunction and inaccurate settings.
4. Inspect all chords and lacing.
5. Inspect all hydraulic and pneumatic systems - with particular emphasis on
those that flex in the normal operation of the crane.
6. Inspect hooks and latches for deformation, chemical damage, cracks, and wear.
7. Inspect rope for proper spooling onto the drum(s) and sheave(s) and inspect
rope reeving for compliance with the crane manufacturer's specifications.
8. Inspect electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive
deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
9. Inspect the hydraulic system for proper oil level.
10. Inspect tires for recommended inflation pressure (mobile cranes).
11. Inspect wedges and supports for looseness or dislocation (climbing tower
cranes).
12. Inspect braces and guys supporting crane masts; inspect anchor bolt base
connections for looseness or loss of preload (tower cranes and derricks).
13. Inspect derrick mast fittings and connections for compliance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
14. Inspect barge or pontoon ballast compartments for proper ballast; inspect
deckloads for proper securing; inspect chain lockers, storage, fuel compartments,
and battening of hatches; inspect firefighting and lifesaving equipment to ensure it
is in its proper place and is functional; and sound hull void compartments for
leakage (floating cranes and derricks).
Elements for Periodic Inspections
1. Inspect foundation and supports to determine their continued ability to sustain
imposed loads.
October 2009 19–29
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
2. Inspect braces supporting crane masts (towers) to determine that they are in a
safe condition; inspect anchor bolt base connections for tightness or retention of
preload; and inspect wedges and supports of climbing cranes for tightness and
proper positioning.
3. Inspect guys for proper tension.
4. For derricks, inspect all chords and lacing, tension in guys, plumb of the mast,
and derrick mast fittings and connections for compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
5. Inspect crane structure and boom and jib members and their connections for
deformation, cracks, or corrosion.
6. Inspect bolts, rivets, nuts, and pins for tightness.
7. Inspect for proper tension (torque) of high strength (traction) bolts used in
connections and at the slewing bearing.
8. Inspect power plants for performance and compliance with safety
requirements.
9. Inspect electrical apparatus for proper functioning and signs of excessive
deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
10. Inspect hydraulic and pneumatic tanks, pumps, motors, valves, hoses, fittings,
and tubing for proper functioning and the absence of damage, leaks, and excessive
wear; inspect hydraulic and pneumatic systems for proper fluid/air levels.
11. Inspect all control mechanisms for adjustment for proper operation, and to
determine that there is no excessive wear of components and no contamination by
lubricants or other foreign matter.
12. Inspect drive components such as pins, bearings, wheels, shafts, gears,
sheaves, drums, rollers, locking and clamping devices, sprockets, drive chains or
belts, bumpers, and stops for the absence of wear, cracks, corrosion, or distortion.
13. Inspect all crane function operating mechanisms for proper operation, proper
adjustment, and unusual sounds.
14. Inspect travel, steering, holding, braking, and locking mechanisms for proper
functioning and excessive wear or damage.
15. Inspect tires for damage or excessive wear.
16. Inspect brake and clutch system parts, linings, pawls, and ratchets for
excessive wear.
17. Visually inspect all running ropes, counterweight ropes, and load trolley
ropes, if provided. Pay particular attention to boom hoist ropes and sections of
19-30 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
rope subject to rapid deterioration, such as at flange points, crossover points, and
repetitive pickup points on drums. Concentrate visual inspections on discovering
gross damage, such as the following, which may be an immediate hazard:
• Distortion of rope such as kinking, crushing, unstranding, birdcaging,
main strand displacement, or core protrusion
• General corrosion
• Number, distribution, and type of visible broken wires
• Broken or cut strands
• Core failure in rotation resistant ropes (take care when inspecting rotation-
resistant ropes because they are susceptible to damage from misuse and
deterioration when used on equipment with limited design parameters)
• Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter because of loss of
core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires
• Severely corroded or broken wires at end connections and severely
corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections.
Take care when inspecting rope sections such as the following, which are subject
to rapid deterioration: sections in contact with saddles, equalizer sheaves, or other
sheaves where rope travel is limited; sections at or near terminal ends where
corroded or broken wires may protrude; sections subject to reverse bends; and
sections normally hidden during routine visual inspections, such as parts passing
over outer sheaves.
18. Inspect sheaves for cracks in the flanges and spokes.
19. Inspect rope for proper spooling onto drums and sheaves and proper reeving.
20. Inspect hooks and latches for deterioration, chemical damage, cracks, and
WCaſ.
21. Inspect crane operator aids (safety devices) and indicating devices for proper
operation.
22. Inspect motion-limiting devices for proper operation with the crane unloaded
(inch each motion into its limiting device at slow speed with care exercised) and
inspect load-limiting devices for proper operation and accuracy of Settings.
23. Inspect load, boom angle, load or load moment indicating wind, and other
indicators for proper operation and accuracies within the tolerances recommended
by the manufacturer.
24. Inspect safety and function labels for legibility and replacement, if necessary.
October 2009 19–31
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
25. For a floating plant: inspect ballast compartments for proper ballast;
deckloads for proper securing; chain lockers, storage, fuel compartments for
safety; battening of hatches; tie-downs for barge-mounted land cranes for wear,
corrosion, and tightness; cleats, bitts, chocks, fenders, capstans, ladders,
stanchions for corrosion, wear, deterioration, and deformation; sound hull void
compartments for leakage; and take four corner draft readings.
Elements for Frequent Inspections
1. Inspect braces supporting crane masts (towers) for safe condition, anchor bolt
base connections for tightness or retention of preload, and wedges and supports of
climbing cranes for tightness and proper positioning.
2. Inspect guys for proper tension.
3. For derricks, inspect all chords and lacing, tension in guys, plumb of the mast,
and derrick mast fittings and connections for compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
4. Inspect electrical apparatus for proper functioning and signs of excessive
deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
5. Inspect hydraulic and pneumatic tanks, pumps, motors, valves, hoses, fittings,
and tubing for proper functioning and damage, leaks, and excessive wear; and
inspect hydraulic and pneumatic systems for proper fluid/air levels.
6. Inspect all control mechanisms for adjustment for proper operation, for
excessive wear of components, and for contamination by lubricants or other
foreign matter.
7. Inspect all crane function operating mechanisms for proper operation, proper
adjustment, and unusual sounds.
8. Visually inspect all wire running ropes, counterweight ropes, and load trolley
ropes, if provided. Pay particular attention to boom hoist ropes and sections of
rope subject to rapid deterioration, such as at flange points, crossover points, and
repetitive pickup points on drums. Concentrate visual inspections on discovering
gross damage, such as the following, which may be an immediate hazard:
a. Distortion of rope such as kinking, crushing, unstranding, birdcaging, main
Strand displacement, or core protrusion;
b. General corrosion;
c. Number, distribution, and type of visible broken wires;
d. Broken or cut strands;
19–32 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
e. Core failure in rotation resistant ropes (take care when inspecting rotation-
resistant ropes because of their susceptibility to damage from misuse and
deterioration when used on equipment with limited design parameters);
f. Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter because of loss of core
Support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires; and
g. Severely corroded or broken wires at end connections and severely
corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections.
9. Inspect rope for proper spooling onto drums and sheaves and proper reeving.
10. Inspect hooks and latches for deterioration, chemical damage, cracks, and
WCaſ.
11. Inspect crane operator aids (safety devices) and indicating devices for proper
operation.
12. Inspect motion-limiting devices for proper operation with the crane unloaded
(inch each motion into its limiting device at slow speed with care exercised) and
load limiting devices for proper operation and accuracy of settings.
13. Inspect load, boom angle, load or load moment indicating, wind, and other
indicators for proper operation and accuracies within the tolerances recommended
by the manufacturer.
14. Inspect safety and function labels for legibility and replacement.
15. For a floating plant, inspect ballast compartments for proper ballast;
deckloads for proper securing; safety of chain lockers, storage, fuel
compartments; and battening of hatches. Sound hull void compartments for
leakage.
October 2009 19–33
Attachment 19-2
Crane Performance and Load Testing Requirements
Tables with Associated Testing Elements
Requirements for Crane Performance Tests

Table 1.-Crane performance testing requirements - no-load tests
hoists
|
Type of crane | X1 X2 | X3 X4 X5 |X6 X7 | X8 X9 X10 X11
Portal, tower, and pedestal = (1) = m = n | | || --- -
Floating Cranes and derricks m (1) = - - - m = - m __|-
Derricks = (1) = n = m (2) = - -
Construction -- = (1) = In L. m m m m - - - -
Mobile (3) m (1) m (4) – – || – m =
Overhead, gantry, monorail, m (1) | | |
and underhung - -- - - - - - - - - -
Base-mounted and overhead m (1) m m
Notes: (1) conduct for main, auxiliary, and whip hoists, as applicable; (2) conduct rotation tests through
normal design operating arc; (3) perform complete tests on each hook; extend outriggers or stabilizers as specified
by the manufacturer; level crane as specified by the manufacturer's load chart; rotate the boom 90° from the
longitudinal axis of the crane carrier and position the boom at the minimum working radius; (4) conduct fixed
boom or telescopic boom, as appropriate.

Table 2.-Crane load testing requirements



Type of crane L1 L2(2)|L3(2) L4(2) L5 L6(2) L7 || L8 L9(2) L10|L11 |L12|L13, L14|L15|L16|L17|L18|L19 L20 L21
Mobile and mz m |m m2 m m (6) # #
locomotive(1,5
| - .
Overhead, | | | mb mb | mb = - -
gantry,
monorail, and |
underhung | | | | | | | | – –--—----- - --—-
Portal, tower, m = m = m = m = m = n = n = |
and pedestal i
(1) - --- - - - - - - - - - -
DerrickS(1) m in m n = |s m = m 'm m (3) m m 'm - - -
Floating * = - - - - m = m = n =
Cranes and -
derricks (1) || | | | | | | | | | | | | |
Construction in m in m in m • | | | | | | •
(4) (4) º (4) (4) ––
Base-mounted m in m mb mb mb
and overhead
hoists
Notes: (1) for va
riable-rated cranes, perform the applicable variable-rated crane tests in addition to the any
other required tests; (2) conduct for main, auxiliary, jib, and whip hoists; (3) conduct rotation tests through normal
design operating arc; (4) conduct hoist tests in combinations so that you test all structural, mechanical, and electrical
Components in all possible configurations; (5) perform complete tests on each hook; extend outriggers or stabilizers
as specified by the manufacturer; level crane as specified by the manufacturer's load chart; rotate the boom 90° from
the longitudinal axis of the crane carrier and position the boom at the minimum working radius; (6) rotate the
maximum degrees allowed by manufacturer; perform test with boom fully retracted and fully extended.
Tests marked with "b" or "z" indicate an additional test element unique to the type of crane.
October 2009
19-35
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
2. Comply with the following sequence and limitations when conducting
performance tests:
a.
. Test rigging first.
b. Conduct the operational performance test before the load performance test.
c. Test the main hoist before testing the auxiliary or whip hoists.
d. Raise test loads only to a height sufficient to perform the test.
3. Operational performance testing. Operational performance testing must
include the tests specified in table 1 to this appendix, as defined below.
X1 =
X2 =
X2t =
Load hoist operation and limit switch test. (1) Raise the load hook
through all controller points, stopping below the upper limit switch
(where applicable), (2) slowly raise the load hook into the upper
limit switch to establish that the limit switch is operating properly,
(3) slowly raise the hook through the upper limit switch by using
limit switch bypass (where applicable), (4) lower the load hook
below the upper limit switch using all the lowering control points,
(5) slowly lower the load hook into the lower limit switch to
establish that the limit switch is operating properly.
Boom hoist operation and limit switch test, fixed boom. (1) Raise
the boom through all controller points, stopping below upper limit
switch; (2) slowly raise the boom into the upper limit switch; (3)
lower the boom below upper limit switch and raise the boom through
the limit switch by using the limit switch bypass (where applicable);
(4) lower the boom through all controller points, stopping above the
lower limit switch (where applicable); (5) slowly lower the boom
into the lower limit switch (where applicable); (6) raise the boom
above the lower limit switch and lower the boom through the limit
switch by using the limit switch bypass (where applicable).
Boom hoist operation and limit switch test, telescopic boom. In
addition to test X2, conduct the following: (1) extend and retract
telescoping boom sections the full distance of travel; (2) check the
radius indicator by measuring the radius at the minimum and
maximum boom angle.
Luffing drum pawl test. (1) Check luffing drum pawl for proper
engagement in ratchet gear and with limit switch; (2) ensure the
luffing drum pawl is disengaged; (3) check the luffing drum pawl
limit switch (if installed) for proper operation by operating the boom
hoist and manually (at the pawl) activating the limit switch; (4)
19–36
October 2009
Section 19–Hoisting Equipment,
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
X10
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
check that the boom hoist motor shuts off, the brake engages, and the
indicator lights operate correctly (where applicable).
Caution: Do not engage pawl in the ratchet gear.
Rotation lock test (wind lock, spud lock). (1) Engage the rotation
lock and inspect to ensure full engagement; (2) check that rotation
lock limit switches (clockwise and counterclockwise) prevent
engaging rotation drive (where applicable); (3) operate the rotation
lock bypass (clockwise and counterclockwise) to ensure proper
operation (where applicable).
Caution: Use only enough power to check the operation of the
bypass; ensure the rotation lock is disengaged before continuing the
leSt.
Note: You may manually operate applicable switches to check for
correct operation instead of engaging rotation lock
Rotation test. Rotate clockwise and counterclockwise with boom at
minimum radius.
Travel test. Conduct operation travel test as prescribed in L14,
except without load.
Deadman control test. Test all deadman controls (where installed):
(1) start each motion, (2) release deadman control—motion should
Stop.
Trolley test. (1) Trolley the allowable length of the trolley runway
using all control points; (2) operate the trolley into the limit switches
at slow speed; (3) bring the trolley back, and, by using the limit
switch bypass, move the trolley into the outboard rail stops; (4)
repeat the above procedure for inboard limit switches and rail stops.
Bridge test. (1) Operate the bridge travel controller through all
points in both directions; (2) operate the full distance of the runway
and slowly contact the runway rail stops with the crane bridge
bumpers.
Other motions test. Test other motions, including swing, by
operating through one cycle (one full revolution of the major
components).
October 2009
19-37
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
X11 = Boom stop test. See attachment 19–3.
4. Load performance testing. Load performance testing must include the tests
specified in table 1, as defined below.
L1 = Stability test. During tests L2m, L3m, L5, and L11, observe roller
clearance and roller lift-off from the roller path.
L1 V = Stability test, variable-rated crane. Conduct tests L2m, L3m, and
L11 with the test load on the main hoist at the maximum radius of
the crane; observe roller clearance and roller lift off from the roller
path.
L2m = Load and boom hoist static test, main hoist. (1) Raise the test load
to clear ground and hold for 10 minutes with the boom at the
maximum radius; (2) rotate the load to check the bearing operation;
(3) do not engage the boom or load hoist pawl; (4) observe if
lowering occurs; lowering indicates a malfunction of the boom or
hoisting components or holding brakes.
L2a = Load hoist static test, auxiliary hoist. (1) Raise the test load to clear
the ground and hold for 10 minutes without hoist pawl engaged; (2)
rotate load to check bearing operation - observe if lowering occurs;
lowering indicates a malfunction of the hoisting components or
holding brakes.
L2w = Load hoist static test, whip hoist. (1) Raise the test load to clear the
ground and hold for 10 minutes; (2) rotate load to check operation
of bearing; observe if lowering occurs; lowering indicates a
malfunction of the hoisting components or holding brakes.
L2Z = load hoist static test, main hoist, mobile crane. (1) Raise the test
load to clear the ground with the boom at the minimum radius and
hold for 10 minutes without the boom and load hoist pawls
engaged; (2) rotate load and hook to check bearing operation; (3)
observe if any lowering occurs; lowering indicates a malfunction of
the boom or hoisting components, brakes, or outriggers.
Note: For hydraulic cranes, perform the test with the boom fully
retracted and fully extended.
L3m = Load hoist dynamic test, main hoist. (1) Raise and lower the test
load on each hoist controller point and visually observe smooth
control between points; (2) lower the test load to unload the hoist
components, wait 5 minutes and then continue testing.
19–38 October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
L3a =
L3V =
L3W =
L4 =
L57 =
L6 =
L6b =
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
Load hoist dynamic test, auxiliary hoist. Raise and lower the test
load on each controller point and visually observe smooth control
between points.
Load hoist dynamic test, main hoist, variable-rated crane. Conduct
test L3m at the maximum radius of the crane.
Load hoist dynamic test, whip hoist. Raise and lower the test load
on each controller point and visually observe smooth control
between points.
Wire rope test. During either the static or dynamic test, where
possible, test the entire working length of the wire rope.
Boom hoist operating test. Visually watch for smooth rotation
between boom controller points: (1) starting from the maximum
radius, raise the boom to minimum radius using all boom controller
points; (2) lower the boom through all controller points.
Boom hoist operating test, mobile crane. Operate the boom from
the minimum radius to the maximum radius for the load applied;
for hydraulic cranes, perform the test with the boom fully retracted
and fully extended; perform the test at both the maximum test load
for crane and for the maximum test load at maximum radius of the
Cſa Il C.
Hoist foot brake test (hydraulic or mechanical brake). Lower the
test load, using the first control point, then apply the foot brake—
this should stop the lowering motion of the test load.
Caution: This is not applicable to load-sensitive reactor type hoist
controls.
Hoist load brake. (1) Raise the test load approximately 1.5 meters
(5 feet); (2) with the hoist controller in the neutral position, release
(by hand) the holding brake—the load brake should hold the test
load; (3) again, with holding brake in the released position, start the
test load down (first point) and return the controller to the off
position as the test load lowers—the load brake should prevent the
test load from accelerating.
Note: It is not necessary for the load brake to halt the downward
motion of the test load.
October 2009
19–39
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
L7 =
L8 =
L8V =
L9 =
L9b =
Boom foot brake test (hydraulic or mechanical brake). (1) Start
with the boom near the maximum radius and with the test load
approximately 0.6 meters (2 feet) from the ground surface; (2)
lower the test load using the first control point of the boom hoist;
(3) apply the foot brake—this should stop the lowering motion of
the boom and load.
Caution: This is not applicable to load-sensitive reactor type hoist
controls.
Automatic boom brake (where applicable). This brake prevents a
"free" boom in case the clutch fails, the boom hoist control fails, or
the foot brake fails: (1) Raise the boom to minimum radius and,
with the test load approximately 100 millimeters (4 inches) above
the ground, set the boom foot brake firmly; (2) release the
mechanical boom dog; (3) release the boom clutch by operating the
boom hoist control; (4) slowly release the foot brake to the free
position; (5) hold the test load with automatic brake for 5 minutes,
then lower the test load by applying the boom hoist clutch and
lowering with the controller operation.
Automatic boom brake, variable-rated crane (where applicable).
Conduct test L8 at the maximum radius of the crane.
Load hoist loss of power (panic test). This test is designed to test
the reaction of a hoisting unit in the event of a power failure during
a lift. (1) Hoist the test load approximately 3 meters (10 feet) above
the ground at maximum allowable radius; (2) slowly lower the test
load and, with the controller in the slow lowering position,
disconnect the main power source by pushing the main power stop
button(s); (3) return the controller to the neutral position—the test
load should stop lowering when the controller is in the neutral
position.
Caution: Do not perform this test on cranes that do not have
powered-down boom and load hoists.
Load hoist loss of power (panic test). This is a test to check the
reaction of a hoisting unit in the event of a power failure during a
lift. (1) Hoist the test load to a convenient distance above the
surface; (2) slowly lower the test load and, with the controller in the
slow lowering position, disconnect the main power source and
return the controller to the neutral position—the test load should
stop lowering when the controller is in the neutral position.
Note: Vent air-operated hoists during this test.
19–40
October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
L10 =
L12 =
L13 =
L14 =
L15 =
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
Boom hoist loss of power (panic test). This is a test to check the
reaction of the boom hoist in the event of a power failure during a
lift. (1) Hoist the test load approximately 3 meters (10 feet) above
the ground with the boom near maximum radius; (2) slowly lower
the boom, disconnect the main power source by pushing the main
power stop button(s), then return the controller to the neutral
position—the boom should stop lowering when the controller is in
the neutral position.
Caution: Do not perform this test on cranes that do not have
powered down boom and load hoists.
Rotation test. Start with the boom at the maximum radius and
rotate left and right 360 degrees.
Note: If test area does not permit, two complete revolutions of the
Swing pinion is adequate.
Caution: Exercise care when rotating loads over the water.
Ensure that during the initial load-test, the floating crane has
adequate draft readings per design data.
Rotate brake test. Rotate left and right at slow speed and apply
brakes, individually, periodically during rotation. Each brake
should stop the rotating motion in a smooth, positive manner.
Travel motion test. Conduct this test with the boom at the
maximum allowable radius, positioned at 90 degrees, with the crane
rails and boom dog engaged.
Caution: Operate the crane at very slow travel speeds; ensure the
track and supporting foundation are sound and free of any
obstructions over the test travel areas (not applicable to floating
Cranes).
Travel operation test. (1) With the test load raised to clear the
ground, the boom centered between the crane rails, and the boom
dog engaged, travel in one direction a minimum of 15 meters
(50 feet); (2) operate the controller through all controller points—
the crane should accelerate and decelerate smoothly, and all
motions should be smooth and positive; (3) repeat in the opposite
direction.
Trolley motion test. (1) Raise the test load to clear the ground and
move the trolley to the maximum allowable radius. Do not move
the trolley beyond the trolley limit switch; (2) hold the test load for
October 2009
19-41
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
L15b
L16
L17
L18
L19
10 minutes; (3) lower the test load to the ground until the hoist lines
are slack; (4) wait 5 minutes, raise the test load and trolley the
allowable length of the trolley runway.
Trolley motion test. Using extreme caution, operate the trolley with
the test load (if space is available) for the full distance of the bridge
rails; observe proper brake operation.
Bridge motion test. Using extreme caution, operate the bridge with
the test load (if space is available) for the full distance of the
runway and watch for any binding of bridge trucks and for proper
brake operation.
Hydraulic crane slippage. (1) Lift the test load at maximum radius
and allow time for fluid and component temperatures to stabilize;
(2) hold the load for 10 minutes without the operator using the
controls—there must be no significant lowering of the load, boom,
or outrigger beams resulting from components or systems
malfunction or failure during the test.
Free-rated load test. This is a test to check the stability of the crane
and the operation of the crane carrier, wheels, tires, and brakes
under load. Note: Retract outriggers before beginning free-rated
load test. (1) Hoist the maximum free rated test load at its
maximum radius over the rear of the crane?; (2) rotate through the
"over the rear" working arc and travel a minimum of 15 meters (50
feet) with the test load over the rear of the crane with the boom
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the crane carrier; (3) hoist
maximum free rated test load at its maximum radius over the side;
(4) rotate through the full working range and travel a minimum of
15 meters (50 feet) with test load over the left side of the crane
carrier with the boom 90° to the axis of travel; (5) rotate through the
full working range and travel a minimum of 15 meters (50 feet)
with the test load over the right side of the crane carrier with the
boom 90 degrees to the axis of travel.
Primary and secondary holding brakes. For cranes with primary
and secondary holding brakes (configuration of crane in which a
primary brake actuates when the controller returns to the neutral
position and the secondary brake actuates a few seconds later) or
eddy current hoist dynamic load brakes. (1) During either the static
or dynamic test, raise the test load and observe the proper timing
sequence in the application of the primary and secondary brake
when controller is returned to neutral (visually observe both hoist
holding brakes to ensure correct position); (2) raise test load
19-42
October 2009
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors
approximately 0.3 meter (1 feet), hold for 10 minutes, and
inactivate the secondary holding brake while testing the primary
holding brake - observe for noticeable lowering of test load that
may occur which must indicate malfunction of hoisting components
or brakes; (3) re-engage secondary holding brake and release the
primary holding brake and hold for 10 minutes - observe for
noticeable lowering of test load that may occur which must indicate
malfunction of hoisting components or brakes; (4) re-engage the
primary holding brake - recheck proper operation of time delay and
ensure smooth positive stopping.
L20 = Hoist dynamic load brake (eddy current). Check lowering speed
against specifications to ensure correct brake operation. (NOTE:
Eddy current brakes must not stop motion.)
L21 = Swing test (where applicable). Swing the test load (where space is
available) through the working range at maximum radius, stopping
the load at several points: there should be no excessive drift of jib
or trolley at any of these points (the significance of drift must be
evaluated).
October 2009 19–43
Attachment 19-3
Boom Stop Testing Requirements
Boom stop tests must follow these steps.
Step 1: Make sure an appropriate operator’s manual is available.
Step 2: Make sure the crane is level, and the outriggers (if so equipped) are in
place.
Step 3: Check the boom and boom stops for misalignment, bent parts, and other
physical damage.
Step 4: Check the boom stop pins (at connections) for lubrication, wear, and
damage.
Step 5: Check the boom angle indicator with an inclinometer for accuracy.
Step 6: Check the boom hoist disengaging device for proper adjustment and
alignment in accordance in accordance with the operator's manual.
Step 7: Make sure that the boom stops and boom hoist disengaging devise are set
up to operate properly. Physically boom up the boom just to the points listed
(described in subparagraphs a. and b. below), as long as the boom does not go
beyond the point of operation of the boom hoist disengaging device. This test is
not intended to override the boom hoist disengaging device.
a. For cantilever or scissors types, this is the point just before the boom and
boom stops touch.
b. For telescoping types, this is the point just before compression.
October 2009 19-45
Section 20
Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment
This section sets forth the requirements and standards for Reclamation’s safety
and occupational health programs. It covers the following specific areas:
Operational Requirements
Inspections
Maintenance
Testing -
Crawler Equipment
Off-Highway Wheel Construction Machines
Agricultural and Industrial Equipment
Industrial Trucks
A-Frame Trucks
Aerial Lifts
Other Mechanized Construction Equipment Standards
Roads
Mobile mechanized equipment requirements contained and referenced in this
Section are applicable to all equipment propelled or drawn by mechanical power
except rail rolling Stock, passenger cars, trucks under 10,000 pounds, trailers
under 3,000 pounds gross weight that meet Department of Transportation (DOT)
design standards, Snowmobiles, motorcycles, and all-terrain recreation machines.
20.1 Operational Requirements
20.1.1 Operators. Allow only authorized personnel to operate mobile
equipment. Assign operators only to equipment they are qualified and
licensed to operate. Provide operators with the instructions and training that
their jobs require and ensure that operators:
• Meet the physical requirements of their job
• Meet the DOT licensing requirements for on-highway operations
• Do not operate mobile equipment for over 12 hours in any 24-hour
period
• Comply with applicable operating instructions, limitations,
regulations, and written safety programs and plans
Do not allow the operation to begin or continue if the operator is not physically,
mentally, and emotionally capable of operating the vehicle or equipment safely.
20.1.2 Unusual Equipment Configurations. Refer to the section, "Hoisting
Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors."
October 2009 20–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
a. Examples. Examples of unusual equipment configurations:
• Special use or conditional operations of dozers or other
earthmoving equipment
• Anchoring mobile earthmoving or drilling equipment on steep
slopes
• Hoisting with hydraulic excavating machines or multiple crane lifts
• Using a crane in conjunction with other equipment to lift loads
b. Requirements. Do not use equipment in unusual configurations until
the following information and procedural documents have been obtained
or developed:
• Equipment manufacturer or registered professional engineer's (PE)
written approval
• Appropriate confirmation that hoisting systems used to raise,
lower, suspend, or stabilize equipment on slopes meet applicable
design, testing, and certification requirements
• A Job Hazard Analysis (JHA)
c. Exceptions
• Hydraulic excavating machine hoisting operations conforming
with applicable provisions in the section, "Hoisting Equipment,
Piledrivers, and Conveyors."
• Operation of equipment on 30 percent or less grades when the
operational assist system, dozer blades, loader buckets, dippers,
winches, etc., are not required to stabilize the working machine in
any operational configuration
20.1.3 Parking, Stopping, Standing. Do not stop, park, or leave standing
any equipment on any road, ramp, accessway, or other location in such a
manner as to endanger personnel or property. Do not leave equipment
unattended unless the motor has been shut off, brakes securely set,
transmission gears engaged, and all hydraulic components lowered to a
Supporting surface or otherwise protected against accidental movement.
Chock or turn the wheels toward the curb on any equipment parked on a
grade.
Transmix concrete trucks, lubrication trucks, fuel trucks, and similar
equipment using primary engine-powered auxiliary equipment, also know as
power take off (PTO), and/or exterior controls are not considered unattended
when:
20–2 October 2009
Section 20–Mobile and Stationary
Mechanized Equipment
• The operator is outside the cab but within arms length of the unit or is
in contact with auxiliary equipment or controls.
• The primary unit’s brakes and gearing arrangements are designed for
safe use of auxiliary attachments and/or exterior controls are in the
proper position.
• The primary unit is equipped with an automatic lockout device that
prohibits operating exterior controls until the brake and gear
arrangements are in the proper position.
Diesel-powered earthmoving equipment being refueled or cooled down in a
secured area or under visual observation of the operator or a mechanic, with
brakes set and wheels chocked and hydraulic components lowered to a supporting
surface, is not considered unattended.
20.1.4 Speeds. Do not operate equipment at speeds greater than those that
are reasonable and safe considering weather conditions, traffic, road
conditions, type and condition of equipment, and manufacturer’s
recommendations. The operator must have the equipment under control at all
times and be able to stop within the clear-sight distance.
20.1.5 Gears Engaged. Do not operate any vehicle on a downgrade with
gears in neutral or clutch disengaged.
20.1.6 Towing. Do not permit employees between a towed vehicle and the
towing vehicle, except when hooking or unhooking it.
20.1.7 Unattended at Night. Make sure equipment left unattended after
hours on or near roadways or in areas where work is in progress has lights,
reflectors, or lighted or reflective barricades to identify the location of the
equipment.
20.1.8 Unauthorized Riding. Do not allow personnel to ride in or on
mobile equipment unless they are sitting in a seat designed and installed for
that purpose.
20.1.9 Securing Loads. Properly distribute, chock, tie down, or otherwise
secure the load on every piece of mobile equipment according to DOT
regulations (table 20-1). Secure tools and material transported in the same
compartment as personnel to prevent movement of the tools and material.
October 2009 20–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table 20-1.-Applicable standards and regulations

Reference in
Regulation standard Title section
49 CFR 390–399 Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations 20.5
49 CFR 393.93 Seats, Seatbelt Assemblies and Seatbelt Assembly | 20.6.9
Anchorages — Federal Motor Carrier Safety
Regulations
49 CFR 399.207 Truck and Truck Tractor Access Requirements — 20.6.8
Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations App. F., (7)
App. H, (5)
49 CFR 393. 100 General Rules for Protection Against Shifting or 20. 1.9
Falling Cargo - Federal Motor Carrier Safety
Regulations
49 CFR 393.40 Required Brake Systems — Federal Motor Carrier 20.6.3
Safety Regulations App. F (32)
29 CFR 1910. 178 POWered Industrial Trucks 20. 10
20. 10.8
ANSI/ASME B30.5 Mobile and LOCOmotive Cranes App. F(1)
ANSI/ASME B56.1 Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks 20. 10
ANSI/ASME B56.6 Safety Standard for Trough Terrain Forklift Trucks 20. 10
ANSI/SIA A92.2 Vehicle Mounted and Elevating Rotating Aerial 20. 12
Devices
ANSI/SIA A92.3 Manually Propelled Elevating Aerial Platforms 20. 12
ANSI/SIA A92.5 Boom Supported Elevated Work Platforms 20. 12
ANSI/SIA A92.6 Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms 20. 12
ANSI E15. 1 Safety Standard for Mechanical Power 20. 13.1
Transmission Apparatus
ANSI A92.2 Section 5 Predelivery Testing and Inspection of New Aerial 20. 12
Devices
SAE JG82 Fenders and Mudflaps App. G, 8
J/ISO 3450 Braking Performance - Rubber-tired Construction 20.5.2
Machines (Formerly SAE J1152) 20.7.2
App. H (17)
App. F (32)
SAE J1040 Performance Criteria for Rollover Protection 20.6.1
Structures (ROPS) App. H (12)
SAE/J|SO 3449 Earth Moving Machinery - Protective Structures - 20.6.2
Laboratory Tests and Performance Requirements App. H (13)
SAE J1084 Operator Protective Structure Performance Criteria | 20.6.3
for Certain Forestry Equipment - App. H (14)
SAE J1116 Categories of Off-Road Self Propelled Work 20.6.9
Machines
SAE J386 Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work 20.6.9
Machines App. H (10)
SAE J185 Access Systems for Off-Road Machines 20.6.8
App. F (7)
App. H (7)
20-4 October 2009
Section 20–Mobile and Stationary
Mechanized Equipment
Table 20-1.-Applicable standards and regulations

Reference in
Regulation standard Title section
SAE J1029 Lighting and Marking of Construction Earth Moving | App. H (5)
Machinery
SAE J321 Tire Guards for Protection of Operators of Earth App. H (9)
Moving Haulage Machines
SAE J1 194 Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Wheeled App. H (10)(12)
Agricultural Tractors (13)
SAE J1042 Operator Protection for General Purpose Industrial | App. H(10)(12)
Equipment (13)
SAE J167 Overhead Protection for Agricultural Tractors App. H (13)
SAE J220 Crane Boomstop App. F (16)
SAE J101 Hydraulic Wheel Cylinders for Automotive Drum App. H (12)
Brakes
SAE J1 15 Safety Signs App. H (15)
SAE J1511 Steering for Off-Road Rubber-Tired Machines App. H (15)
SAE HS-5600 Lighting and Marking of Agricultural Equipment on | App. H(5)
Highways
20.1.10 Seats and Seatbelts. Do not allow operators or passengers to ride on
or in equipment unless they are seated with installed seatbelts fastened, except
for Stand-up operation.
20.1.11 Emergency Equipment. Equip all trucks and combination vehicles
operated on public roads including all buses, and vehicles carrying
flammables, explosives, or hazardous materials with emergency equipment.
Equip all mobile machines with appropriate fire extinguishers.
• Flags and reflectors. Use a red flag measuring at least 12 inches
square with three reflective markers when parked along public
roadways.
• Wheel chocks. Use two-wheel chocks for each vehicle or trailer use
where there is a possibility that the vehicle will move or shift because
of roadway conditions or loading or unloading of the vehicle or trailer.
• Fire extinguishers. Install one 2-A:40-B:C dry chemical extinguisher.
When transporting flammable or explosive cargo, install at least two
2-A:40–B:C dry chemical fire extinguishers.
20.2 Inspection Requirements
20.2.1 Initial. Qualified personnel must inspect mobile equipment before
conducting required onsite brake performance tests to ensure that the
equipment is in Safe condition and that it meets the original design
specifications and the standards of this section. Conduct the inspection at the
site. Ensure that the inspection is recorded on the applicable form and
verified by a Reclamation representative. Repair unsafe equipment and
October 2009 20–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
reinspect it before it is returned to service and/or before the brakes are tested.
The employer must inspect equipment exempted from brake tests before it is
used onsite. Repair and reinspect the equipment if it is unsafe. Make a record
of the inspection available for review.
20.2.2 Periodic. Inspect equipment in service at the beginning of each shift.
Do not place the inspected unit into service unless applicable equipment and
accessories are in Safe operating condition, including:
Service brake
Secondary brake
Parking brake
Windows
Tires
Warning devices
Steering mechanism
Operating controls
Wipers
Defrosters
Coupling devices
Fire extinguisher
Keep daily inspection logs with the vehicle.
20.3 Maintenance Requirements
20.3.1 Removal from Service. Remove equipment from service whenever
an unsafe condition is detected. Do not place it back in service until it has
been repaired.
20.3.2 Repair Shutdown. Shut down and secure equipment while repairs or
adjustments are being made unless operation is essential to making the
adjustments or repairs.
20.3.3 Refueling. Refueling is subject to the requirements in the section,
"Standards for Material Handling, Storage, and Disposal."
20.3.4 Tire Repair. Provide a safety tire cage and use it when inflating,
mounting, or dismounting tires installed on "split rims" or rims equipped with
locking rings or similar devices. Do not weld on rims unless the tire has been
removed. Reference the OSHA specified "Multi-Piece Rim Wheel Matching
Chart" or equivalent poster.
20.3.5 Blocking. Block or crib equipment or parts suspended or held aloft by
cables, hydraulic cylinders, slings, ropes, hoists, or jacks, or lower it to a
supporting surface before permitting employees to work in, under, or between
pieces of equipment or parts.
20–6 w October 2009
Section 20–Mobile and Stationary
Mechanized Equipment
20.3.6 Brake Repair. Use a vacuum with a high efficiency particulate air
(HEPA) filter to clean asbestos-lined brake assemblies. Do not use
compressed air for this purpose.
20.4 Testing Requirements
Conduct operational tests, required by the manufacturer's maintenance and
operational manuals accompanying the machine or equipment, at recommended
intervals. Appropriately log test results and make them available. Onsite brake
tests for specific equipment are included in operation tests. Loading tests are
required for operational testing of cranes.
20.5 Requirements for On-Highway Equipment
Trucks over 10,000 lb (GVW), including but not limited to tractor/trailer
combinations, transmix trucks, dump trucks and buses, and self-propelled and
rubber-tired truck cranes and excavators shall meet the applicable requirements of
this section and subsection, appendix G, and applicable DOT requirements
contained in Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations 49 CFR 390-399 (see table
20-1).
20.5.1 Dump Trucks and End-Dump Trailers. Equip dump trucks and
end-dump trailers of all types with the following safety devices:
a. Trip Handles. Equip trip handles or dump body operating levers that
control hoisting or dumping with a latch or similar device that will prevent
accidentally starting or tripping the mechanism. Locate the trip handle so
the operator remains clear of the load or dumping device.
b. Holding Device. Permanently attach a manually operated strut to the
truck body for use in preventing accidentally lowering the dump body or
bed during inspection or maintenance operations. Use the holding device
when personnel are around or under the dump body and the bed is in the
raised position.
c. Cab Protection. Protect the operators of trucks loaded or unloaded by
means of a crane, power shovels, loaders, or similar equipment with a cab
shield barrier and/or a protective canopy adequate to stop or deflect falling
or shifting material. When such protection is not installed, the operator
must leave the cab during loading and unloading operations.
d. Tip-Over Safety Device. Under the following circumstances, equip
long-bed end-dump trailers used in off-road hauling with a roll-over
warning device:
• The material being dumped is subject to being stuck or caught in
the trailer rather than exiting the bed freely.
October 2009 20-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• The dump site cannot be maintained in a nominally level condition
(lateral slope less than 3 percent).
Equip the device with a continuous monitoring display at the operator
station to give the operator a visible and audible warning of an unsafe
condition.
20.5.2 Braking Systems. Equip all on-highway equipment with braking
systems as described herein and in appendix G.
a. Equip a bus, truck, tractor-trailer, combination of vehicles, or similar
type equipment with the following braking systems that conform to these
requirements and the requirements in appendix G:
1. A service brake system
2. A parking brake system
3. A secondary braking system
b. Equip mobile cranes and excavators, mounted on rubber-tired chassis
or frames, and manufactured after July 1967 with a service braking
system, secondary stopping (brake) system, and a parking brake system.
(See provisions of appendices F or G for detailed requirements.)
20.5.3 Brake Performance Test. After satisfactorily completing initial
inspection requirements of this section and appendix F or G (whichever
appendix is applicable), but prior to initial onsite use, equipment must
satisfactorily complete an onsite brake performance test. Subsequent tests
must be conducted annually, or following repair or maintenance of braking
systems. Equipment owned/leased and operated by suppliers and engaged in
limited operation on the project are exempted from brake performance test
and inspection requirements. Onsite brake performance tests will be verified
by a Reclamation representative on each piece of equipment in accordance
with the manufacturer’s prescribed method for brake performance testing if
a. The procedure is in writing.
b. The method verifies the operation of the service, secondary, and
parking brake systems.
c. The manufacturer's opinion is adequate to verify that the braking
systems would meet the applicable SAE standard requirements.
In lieu of an acceptable manufacturer-approved brake performance test
procedure, onsite brake performance tests will be verified by a Reclamation
representative on each piece of equipment in accordance with appropriate
method and procedures (see appendices F and G). Test results will be
recorded on the appropriate form and maintained in the equipment file.
20-8 October 2009
Section 20–Mobile and Stationary
Mechanized Equipment
Equipment failing the test shall not be placed into service until repaired and
retested.
20.6 Crawler Equipment Requirements
Crawler equipment and operations must meet the requirements of this section,
appendix F and applicable references in table 20-1.
20.6.1 Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS). Install ROPS on all crawler
tractors and loaders except side-boom crawler tractors when these are
equipped with seatbelts and the boom and counterweights are installed.
20.6.2 Falling Objects Protective Structures (FOPS). Equip crawler
tractors and loaders with protective structures when they are used in
operations that expose the operator to falling objects.
20.6.3 Operator Enclosure. Equip crawler tractors, loaders, or forestry
machines with enclosures when used in tree-clearing operations or other
operations where objects may intrude into the operator's area.
20.6.4 Certification of Protective Structures (ROPS)(FOPS). Make
certain that protective structures, ROPS and FOPS, meet required design
criteria available for review before the equipment is used. Acceptable
methods of certification are:
• Manufacturer’s or PE's written confirmation that the structures meet
required design criteria
• Permanent labels attached to the structure
20.6.5 Modification or Repair of Protective Structures—ROPS and
FOPS. Modification or repair of protective structures of ROPS and FOPS
without manufacturer or PE's written approval voids certifications. Remove
decertified protective structure(s) from service until the modified, repaired, or
damaged protective structure is recertified or replaced.
20.6.6 Braking Systems. The service and parking brake systems on crawler
equipment must be adequate to stop and hold the machine on all surfaces.
20.6.7. Accessories. Equip all crawler equipment with the following
accessories:
a. Lights. Equip machines operated at night or when vision is obscured
with two symmetrically mounted lights or flood lamps that illuminate the
forward working area and with one light or flood lamp of equal intensity
for illuminating the rear working area.
October 2009 - 20–9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Also provide one bucket lamp on all shovels and excavators. Also equip
slow-moving vehicles such as dozers with a rotating amber light or
equivalent that is visible in all directions.
b. Warning Devices. Install an automatic functional backup alarm where
there is obstructed vision to the rear.
20.6.8 Access Systems. To personnel entering, leaving, or working in or on
operator cabs or stations or inspection or on service platforms provide steps,
stairways, ladders, walkways, platforms, handholds, guardrails, and entrance
openings. Keep the vertical height of the first steps no higher than 28 inches
from the ground. Such systems provide the person with three points of
support at all times.
20.6.9 Seatbelts. Install and use seatbelts on all equipment protected by
rollover protective structures or as required elsewhere. Where seatbelts are
installed, use is mandatory.
20.6.10 Equipment Cabs. Equip cabs with shatter-resistant glazing in all
windows, heaters, defrosters, windshield wipers, and door restraints. Provide
bidirectional machines with rearview mirrors. Equip machines with
windshields but not cabs with windshield wipers as appropriate.
20.6.11 Barricades. Barricade the swing radius area of rotating
Superstructures of track hoes or similar equipment in a manner that physically
prevents persons or equipment from being struck by the superstructure.
20.7 Requirements for Off-Highway Wheel Construction Machines
Off-highway wheeled construction machines, including but not limited to loaders
and tractors, scrapers, dumpers, graders, rollers and compactors of mass greater
than 3 tons, water wagons, and similar-type equipment, must conform with this
subsection; applicable provisions of this section, other relevant subsections, and
the appendix entitled, "Record of Performance— Inspection and Brake Test."
Mobile, self-propelled cranes are also subject to this subsection.
20.7.1 Braking Systems. Equip all equipment regardless of age with a safe
and operable service braking system, an emergency stopping (brake) system,
and a parking brake system. The braking systems must conform with the
criteria contained in appendix H. Units manufactured before 1980 may
conform to the SAE Standard under which they were manufactured, if: (1) the
Standard requires a service brake system, an emergency brake system, and a
parking brake system, and (2) failure of any one system or component will not
reduce the effectiveness of the machine's stopping capability below the
emergency stopping performance criteria shown in appendix H. In no
circumstances shall dropping the scraper bowl, loader bucket, grader/tractor
blade, or equipment loads be considered an emergency braking system. (See
appendix H, item 17, for exemptions on compactors and rollers intended for
use on grades of 3 percent or less.)
20–10 October 2009
Section 20–Mobile and Stationary
Mechanized Equipment
20.7.2 Brake Performance Test. The employer shall, after satisfactorily
completing the initial inspection requirements of appendix H, conduct onsite
brake performance tests on all equipment before it is returned to use, annually
thereafter, and as whenever needed.
a. A Reclamation representative will verify onsite brake performance tests
on each piece of equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's
prescribed method for brake performance. The certification will:
• Be in writing
• Provide a method to verify the operation of the service, emergency,
and parking brake systems
• Be, in the manufacturer's opinion, adequate to verify that the
braking systems would meet the applicable SAE standards
b. No testing is required for roller compactors on slopes less than 3
percent.
c. In lieu of an acceptable manufacturer's approved brake performance
test procedure, conduct onsite brake performance tests according to the
following procedures:
• Individually test each required braking system (service,
emergency, parking) according to criteria set forth in the
Reclamation form entitled, "Brake Performance Test Record,"
shown in appendix H.
• Record each test result on the form, then date and sign.
• Do not return equipment failing the test to service until corrective
measures have been taken and a retest confirms the equipment is
safe to operate.
20.8 Requirements for Agricultural and Industrial Equipment
Agricultural wheeled tractors and industrial equipment, including but not limited
to tractors, loaders, backhoe loaders, trenchers, and similar type equipment will be
designed, operated, and maintained in a safe condition. All equipment must have
service and parking braking systems that can stop and hold the equipment on any
surface.
20.9 Requirements for Personnel Transport Vehicles and Buses
All vehicles transporting personnel shall be operated and maintained in a safe
condition.
20.9.1 Type of Equipment. Use only fully enclosed vehicles with seats and
seatbelts for operators and passengers to transport personnel.
October 2009 20–11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
20.9.2 Operator Qualifications. Operators of buses must be 21 years old
and have in their possession a valid State operator's permit or license for the
type of vehicle being operated. Operators must have passed a physical
examination within the past year showing they are physically qualified to
safely operate the vehicle.
20.9.3 Starting. Do not allow vehicles transporting personnel to move until
the operator has checked that all persons are seated, Seatbelts are fastened, and
doors are closed.
20.9.4 Tools and Materials. Place tools and materials in containers or
secure when they are transported in vehicles carrying personnel.
20.10 Requirements for Industrial Trucks
All industrial trucks must meet the requirements for design, construction,
stability, inspection, testing, maintenance, and operation as required for safe use.
High-lift rider trucks shall be equipped with overhead guards (ANSI B56.1).
20.10.1 Inspection. Perform and document industrial truck inspections
according to the manufacturer’s operating manual before the trucks are
operated.
20.10.2 Lift Trucks and Stackers. Post capacity plates on lift trucks and
stackers within the operator’s view. When removable counterweights are
used, the operator must not exceed the corresponding rated capacities. Do not
make modifications or additions affecting the capacity or safe operation of the
equipment without the manufacturer’s written approval or without making
corresponding revisions to the capacity plates.
20.10.3 Steering Knobs. Do not attach steering or spinner knobs to the
steering wheel unless the steering mechanism is of a type that prevents road
reactions from causing the steering wheel to spin. Mount the knob within the
periphery of the wheel.
20.10.4 Lifting Personnel. Do not use powered industrial trucks for hoisting
personnel.
20.10.5 Rail Car and Semi-Trailer Lifting. Take positive steps to prevent
the movement of the car or trailer before using an industrial truck to load or
unload a rail car or "over the road" trailer. Positively fasten ramps or dock
plates in place to prevent accidental movement.
20–12 October 2009
Section 20–Mobile and Stationary
Mechanized Equipment
20.10.6 Multiple Lifting. Do not lift a load using more than one industrial
truck, unless a task specific job hazard analysis has been prepared and
approved by the office head. The load lifted by each truck must not exceed
80 percent of its rated capacity when used in conjunction with other trucks.
20.10.7 Battery Charging. Recharge battery operated industrial trucks in
designated areas that have been evaluated to ensure that ventilation is
adequate to prevent the accumulation of flammable and explosive gasses; and,
ensure there are no flammables or combustibles in the area.
20.10.8 Operator Training. Train and evaluate employees before
assigning them to operate powered industrial trucks. Train operators as
specified in 29 CFR 1910.178(1)(3). Include the name of the operator, the
date of the training, the date of the evaluation, and the identity of the person(s)
performing the training or evaluation in the certification that the training and
evaluation has been completed. A training program must consist of the
following three parts:
• Formal instruction that includes lectures, discussions, interactive
computer learning, videos, or written material.
• Practical, hands-on training that includes demonstrations performed by
the trainer and practical exercises performed by the trainee. Conduct
the training on the particular equipment the trainee will be operating
on the job.
• Evaluate the operator’s ability to handle the truck safely in the
workplace.
20.10.9 Frequency of Evaluation. Evaluate each operator’s performance
periodically, but at least once every 3 years.
20.10.10 Refresher Training. Training should include the following:
Surface conditions
Load stability
Lifting different types of loads
Putting down a load
• Traveling tips
• Hazardous locations
• Activities and environments employee will be working in
If one of the following occurs, provide refresher training:
• The operator was involved in an accident or near miss incident.
• The operator was observed operating the vehicle in an unsafe manner.
• The operator was evaluated as needing more training.
October 2009 20–13
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• Changes in the workplace could affect safe operation (such as a
different type of paving, reconfigured storage racks, new layouts with
narrower aisles or restricted visibility, or the operator is assigned to a
different type of truck).
20.11 Requirements for A-Frame Trucks
20.11.1 Design. A-frame trucks and similar job-fabricated mobile hoisting
equipment must conform to this subsection and applicable provisions in the
section, "Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors." Make sure design
is by a PE , and provide a written certification attesting that the equipment
meets load and capability requirements.
20.11.2 Safety Factor. Incorporate a minimum safety factor of 5 in the
design of chains, standing parts or guy cables, boom supports, and other load-
carrying boom (A-frame) parts. Live or running cable reevings including
boom hoist cables, shackles, hooks, and accessories must have a minimum
safety factor of 3.5.
20.11.3 Performance Inspection and Testing and Capacity Charts. Load
test, at 110 percent of rated capacity, A-frame trucks and associated
equipment, before use, annually thereafter, and after modification or repair.
Install capacity charts on the equipment in full view of the operator.
20.12 Requirements for Aerial Lifts
Vehicle mounted and elevating rotating aerial devices must conform with the
current edition of applicable ANSI/SAE standards. (See table 20-1.)
• Modification. Aerial lifts may be modified for uses other than those
intended by the manufacturer, provided the modification has been certified
in writing by the manufacturer or by other qualified equivalent entities
such as a testing laboratory to be in conformity with the applicable
provisions of the governing ANSI standard and the requirements of this
section.
• Ladder trucks and tower trucks. Secure aerial ladders in the lower
traveling position by a locking device on top of the truck cab and by a
manually operated device at the base of the ladder before permitting the
truck to travel.
• Routine testing. Elevate the boom and check the aerial lift before each
shift to ensure that all controls and safety devices are functioning properly.
• Operators. Instruct and train operators in the operation of the type of
equipment to which they are assigned. Allow only persons specifically
authorized to operate aerial lifts to operate this type of equipment.
20–14 October 2009
Section 20–Mobile and Stationary
Mechanized Equipment
• Safety harness. Employees working from an aerial lift must wear a safety
harness and a lanyard attached to the basket, platform, or boom. They
must stand on the floor of the basket or platform and must not sit or climb
up on the guardrail or enclosure. Do not allow planks, ladders, or other
devices to be used as work platforms.
• Load limits. Post load limits specified by the manufacturer on the
equipment and do not allow the limits to be exceeded. The date of the
most recent load test must be posted or stenciled on the equipment.
• Stabilization. Stabilize aerial lifts against movement or overturning in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Moving. Do not move aerial lift trucks, except for equipment specifically
designed for that purpose, when the boom is elevated with people in the
basket or on the work platform.
• Controls. Provide both platform (upper) and lower controls for
articulating booms and extensible boom platforms. Mount on the basket
or platform within easy reach of the operator. Design lower controls to
override the upper controls. Plainly marked controls as to their function.
A person familiar with the machine lower controls must be on the ground
in the vicinity of the aerial lift at all times when employees are elevated.
Do not operate lower controls without permission from the employee in
the lift, except in an emergency.
• Insulated booms
• Testing and certification. Test and certify any aerial device or component
thereof that is represented by the manufacturer or installer as being
insulated, as set forth in ANSI A92.2, Section 5, "Predelivery Testing and
Inspection of New Aerial Devices."
• Operation. Test, operate, and maintain the insulated aerial lifts, when used
to work on or near high-voltage lines or equipment, in strict compliance
with the manual or manuals provided by the manufacturer. The manual(s)
must contain:
• Descriptions, specifications, and capacities of the aerial device
• Instructions for installing or mounting the device
• Operating pressure of any hydraulic or pneumatic system that is part of the
aerial device
• Specific instructions regarding field testing, operation, and maintenance
• Replacement part information
• Manufacturer's Certification Test
• Alteration. Do not insulate portions of the lift, basket, and boom in any
manner that might reduce its insulating value
October 2009 20–15
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
20.13 Requirements for Other Mechanized Construction Equipment
Standards
In addition to specific requirements set forth elsewhere in this manual, the
requirements set forth in this subsection apply to all stationary mechanized
equipment and drives.
20.13.1 Guarding. Guard or isolate belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets,
spindles, drums, flywheels, chains, or other reciprocating, rotating,
articulating or moving parts of equipment to protect people and property.
Guarding must comply with the standards set forth in the current edition of
ANSI B15.1, "Safety Standard for Mechanical Power Transmission
Apparatus."
20.13.2 Working Platforms. Provide equipment with adequately designed
working platforms, guardrails, and accessories so that operating and
maintenance personnel will have a safe footing.
20.13.3 Fuel Tanks. Locate fuel tanks shall be located so that spills or
overflows can not contact the engine, exhaust, or electrical parts.
20.13.4 Removal of Guards. Do not remove or render ineffective guards
and safety devices except for necessary repairs or maintenance and then only
after isolating the power. Replace the guards and safety devices and make
them operable before restarting the equipment.
20.13.5 Hot Surfaces. Either isolate, guard, or insulate hot surfaces of
equipment, including exhaust pipes and steam pipes to prevent contact by
personnel.
20.13.6 Exhaust Fumes. Confine or control exhaust or discharges from
equipment so that they do not endanger personnel or obstruct the operator's
view.
20.13.7 Rock Crushers. Screen rock crushers and similar equipment to
prevent flying chips or rocks from injuring personnel in their vicinity.
20.13.8 Vibrating and Rocker Screens. Equip vibrating or rocker screens
with sides and baffles to prevent rock from falling from the screen. Where
materials are being processed dry, install exhaust systems to remove the dust.
20.13.9 Lockout/Tagout. Install power-driven equipment with provisions
for locking out the controls or switches while under repair. Establish an
effective lockout and tagout program in accordance with the section, "Control
of Hazardous Energy," prescribing specific responsibilities and procedures to
be followed by the person(s) performing the repair work. Lock out and tag
this type of equipment during repair.
20–16 October 2009
Section 20–Mobile and Stationary
Mechanized Equipment
20.13.10 Certification. Certify the design of all major facilities and
equipment built or provided by Reclamation or the contractor for
Reclamation’s use, such as conveyors, materials handling systems, hoists,
personnel hoists, manskips, and concrete forming support systems for major
Structures as structurally suitable for the use intended. The manufacturer or a
PE must submit a written certification before the erection or use of such
facilities and equipment on the job site. (Refer to relevant sections of this
manual and specifications for information on additional requirements.)
20.14 Requirements for Roads
Design all roads, including haul roads, on the project site in accordance with the
requirements contained in this section. Do not move any mobile equipment on
any road, accessway, or grade unless the roadway widths, grades, and curves are
constructed to safely accommodate the movement of the vehicle or equipment at
the speeds that are appropriate.
20.14.1 Haul Road Submittals. Submit the design of haul roads for
acceptance by the office head before beginning road construction.
20.14.2 Grades. The maximum allowable grade is 12 percent. Loading and
dumping ramps may be exempted if all of the following conditions exist:
• The ramp grade does not exceed the lesser of 25 percent
• Manufacturer's recommended maximum grade for the equipment
• The maximum grade on which the machine, when loaded to the
manufacturer's specified gross weight, can be safely stopped and held
• Acceptable machine gear range and ground speed for safely
descending and stopping on the ramp have been determined by field
testing or provided by the manufacturer.
• A JHA has been developed, and the office head has approved the
action.
20.14.3 Loading and Dumping Ramps. Loading and dumping ramps are
defined for the purpose of this subsection as follows:
• Sections of haul roads immediately adjacent to loading and dumping
areas and the loading site.
• Ramp sections that are less than 200 feet long, with a lower end that
(1) either stops on level ground no closer than 200 feet from foot
traffic or congested equipment areas, or (2) is not directly aligned to
terminate into these areas.
October 2009 20-17
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
20.14.4 Curves. Design all curves to have open sight lines and as great a
radius as practical.
20.14.5 Embankment Protection. Construct or install berms, curbs, or
barricades to prevent vehicles or equipment from overrunning the edge or the
end of the embankment when a difference in road or working level exists.
Construct berms or curbs to one-half the diameter of the tires of the largest
piece of equipment using the roadway.
20.14.6 Drainage. Design roadways to be constructed with a slight crown
and with ditches provided to facilitate drainage.
20.14.7 Posting Speed Limits. Post all roads, including haul roads, with
curve signs and maximum speed limits. Limit vehicle speeds on curves to
those which permit the vehicle to be stopped within one-half the minimum
sight distance. Post all curves with acceptable speed limits.
20.14.8 Single-Lane Haul Roads. Provide adequate turnouts on single-lane
haul roads with two-way traffic. When turnouts are not practical, provide a
traffic control system to prevent accidents. Advise all personnel of the traffic
control system and operating restrictions.
20.14.9 Two-Way Haul Roads. Whenever possible, use a right-hand traffic
pattern on two-way haul roads. Install signs and traffic control devices to
safely control travel when a right-hand traffic pattern is not feasible.
20.14.10 Traffic Control Devices. The employer must install traffic control
devices including signal lights, signs, and barricades, or provide trained traffic
flagpersons to ensure the safe movement of traffic. Refer to applicable
portions in the section, "Signs, Signals, and Barricades."
20.14.11 Road Maintenance. Routinely maintain all roadways, including
haul roads, in safe condition and eliminate or control dust, ice, and similar
hazards. Whenever dust conditions exist, provide adequate dust control
equipment on the jobsite and ensure that it is used to control the dust hazard.
20–18 October 2009
Section 21
Hazardous Waste Site Operations
21.1 Scope
The requirements of this section apply to personnel and operations involved in
investigation and remediation efforts associated with improperly disposed of
hazardous, toxic, and/or radioactive wastes on Reclamation properties.
Operations required by local, State, or Federal agencies will be conducted
according to these standards. Voluntary (nonemergency) cleanup operations
associated with classified hazardous wastes which may have environmental
impact or public exposure fall within the scope of this standard. This section does
not apply to activities involving the generation and collection of hazardous wastes
which are being temporarily stored prior to proper disposal.
21.2 Hazardous Waste Operations Safety and Health Program
A written program will be immediately available, indicating the specific chain of
command, roles, responsibilities, and authorities that govern hazardous waste
operations falling within the scope of this standard. The program will reflect the
necessary interface between general program and site-specific activities. A
written program will exist at each organizational level where management wishes
to exert consistent implementation of administrative procedures for specific
hazardous waste site operations.
21.2.1 The program will designate, in writing, a program manager who will
have the responsibility and authority to direct all hazardous waste operations
within the scope of this section.
21.2.2 Each project that falls under the general category of "hazardous waste
operation" will have a comprehensive work plan, as well as a site-specific
safety and health plan, in place prior to commencing operations.
21.2.3 The written program, work plan, and site-specific safety and health
plan will specify the means to implement the requirements of these standards.
21.3 Work Plan
Each facility, site, or project will have a written work plan that reflects the current
status of site characterization/analysis and the proposed objectives and tasks.
21.3.1 The plan will identify the personnel requirements and methods to
accomplish the identified tasks and objectives.
21.3.2 For uncontrolled hazardous waste sites, characteristics such as
location, size, boundaries, topography, accessibility, contaminant
concentrations, and contaminant dispersion pathways must be included.
October 2009 21–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
21.3.3 The plan must specify the means for providing required information to
employees, contractors, and others who enter the site.
21.3.4. The plan must include the requirements for training, medical
evaluations, and record-keeping not specified in site-specific documents.
21.4 Site-Specific Health and Safety Plan (HASP)
A HASP will be available to all employees at the worksite, which is inclusive of
all organizations/firms/activities at the site.
21.4.1 The plan must include a risk assessment for each identified hazard and
associated task in the work plan and specify the requirements and procedures
necessary to protect personnel according to all applicable standards.
21.4.2 The plan must indicate specific expectations for meeting the standards,
including programs for inspection, training, medical evaluation,
contaminant/exposure monitoring, site control, decontamination, personal
protective equipment (PPE), emergency response, confined space entry, and
spill containment requirements associated with site operations.
21.5 Hazard Evaluation and Control
21.5.1 Evaluation of the site and operations will be conducted to identify the
specific hazards and determine procedures appropriate for controlling
exposure to those hazards.
21.5.2 Controls must be implemented prior to initiating site activities.
21.6 Hazard Communication
21.6.1 Personnel must be informed of all identified risks and entry/work
requirements before their entry into a contaminated or restricted area and/or
before starting a hazardous activity covered by the requirements of this
Section.
21.6.2 Briefings will be conducted at intervals necessary to ensure personnel
are knowledgeable of the most current information and requirements of the
site-specific HASP.
21.7 Training
All personnel must receive the proper training required for their assigned duties,
the provisions of the program, project work plan, and HASP requirements
associated with specific personnel assignments and this section.
21–2 October 2009
Section 21—Hazardous Waste
Site Operations
21.7.1 Personnel are prohibited from participating in, or providing onsite
Supervision of, site activities unless:
a. They have been certified as having successfully completed the training
requirements for their assigned duties and responsibilities, and
b. Records of required training and certification have been established and
are immediately available at the activity site.
21.7.2 Trainers. The training must be conducted by a trainer meeting the
qualifications of OSHA standards in 29 CFR 1910.120 (e)(5). Generally,
trainer qualification is based upon the satisfactory completion of a training
program for teaching the subject matter, or appropriate academic credentials
and experience, combined with demonstrated competency in instructional
skills and knowledge of the subject matter.
21.7.3 The minimum training requirements are based upon OSHA
requirements contained in 29 CFR 1910.120 (e). The courses established to
meet these requirements must address both time and content standards.
Course content and certification must be conducted according to the
guidelines in Appendix E of 29 CFR 1910.120.
a. An offsite hazardous waste orientation course with sessions totaling
40 hours, plus 24 hours of supervised onsite training, will be required of
all persons who:
• Enter a site unescorted by trained site personnel
• Enter restricted areas of a site
• May be exposed to hazardous substances
• May be exposed to other health hazards of a physical or biological
nature
• May be exposed to safety hazards of any kind
• Are operators of equipment used in site assessment or remediation
operations
• Are required or expected to wear respiratory protection or PPE
when needed
• Disturb any materials within site boundaries
• Directly supervise site employees
Each year thereafter, 8 hours of supplemental training will be provided which
augments the basic knowledge provided by the core course.
b. All onsite managers and supervisors directly responsible for,
or who supervise, personnel engaged in hazardous waste
October 2009 21–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
operations must receive an additional 8 hours of training specific
to the management responsibilities associated with the program elements
and site requirements.
c. All employees and their managers and Supervisors working onsite who
are restricted to duties that are fully characterized as nonhazardous and
who are not expected to wear PPE or respond to emergencies under any
circumstance must receive:
• A minimum of 24 hours of off-site training from a certifying
instructor, and
• An additional 8 hours of supervised onsite guidance by an
experienced person before assuming their full duties associated
with the operations
• Any personnel trained at this level who are reassigned to hazardous
duties will be provided an additional 16 hours of training by a
certifying instructor as required for the duties and hazard control
measures utilized, as well as an additional 16 hours of Supervised
Onsite guidance.
21.8 Medical Evaluations
Medical evaluations necessary to meet the requirements of these standards (such
as respirator clearances or medical qualifications for specific hazardous jobs)
must be provided before employees engage in activities requiring such services.
Medical surveillance must be provided for employees exposed to or affected by
site contaminants.
21.8.1 All medical services required by this standard must be rendered under
the direction of a board-certified occupational health physician.
21.8.2 The evaluations must be provided in a timely manner. Timeframes for
medical screening tests that may become necessary during operations will be
specified in the medical surveillance plan before initiating onsite operations.
21.8.3 All employees whose exposure to contaminants exceeds permissible
exposure limits for 30 days or more per year will be placed in a medical
surveillance program. Medical requirements for the respiratory protection
program are separate, but may be included as part of the medical Surveillance
on the employee.
21.8.4 All employees who wear a respirator must be medically evaluated
according to the respiratory protection requirements of these standards and
29 CFR 1910.134.
21–4 October 2009
Section 21—Hazardous Waste
Site Operations
21.8.5 All employees who wear respiratory protection for 30 days or more
per year must be placed in a medical surveillance program.
21.8.6. All employees who develop signs or symptoms of illness or exposure
to hazardous substances, who become ill, or who are injured due to
overexposure to contaminants must be placed in a medical surveillance
program.
21.9 Inspections
Inspections will be conducted to assess the proper implementation of hazard
control. Identified deficiencies and corrective actions must be documented and
appropriate changes made to the plan(s) when necessary.
21.10 Contaminant/Exposure Monitoring
Air monitoring will be performed in a manner according to the provisions
contained within these standards and as required within the program, work plan,
or HASP. Minimum monitoring requirements are:
21.10.1 Upon initial site entry, representative air monitoring will be
conducted to identify any Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH)
condition or potential exposure above permissible exposure limits
21.10.2. Periodic monitoring will be conducted when:
• Work begins on a different portion of the site
• Contaminants other than those previously identified are being handled
• A different type of activity is initiated
• An employees are handling leaking drums or containers, or working in
areas with obvious liquid contamination
• There are indications that potentially hazardous conditions exist
21.10.3 Personal monitoring must be performed for personnel who are at
high-risk, such as, but not limited to, those handling leaking drums, opening
drums containing unknown or hazardous substances, conducting activities in
areas with obvious liquid contamination, or during any activity where
contaminated substances may be disturbed.
a. After commencing activities, personal exposure monitoring will be
performed for employees likely to have the highest exposures to hazardous
Substances and health hazards or when the airborne concentration of
hazardous substances is likely to be above permissible exposure limits.
b. A monitoring result that exceeds permissible exposure limits will be
considered a representative exposure of all personnel performing similar
October 2009 21-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
duties on the site. The exposure will be accordingly documented until
personal monitoring has been accomplished for each person performing
similar duties.
21.10.4. Representative sampling will be accepted to document exposures of
individuals engaged in similar activities.
21.11 Site Control
The site control program, as a part of the site-specific HASP, must include a site
map that characterizes site work zones and identifies any established engineered
site safety and health controls, specific work requirements, standard operating
procedures, decontamination requirements, safe work practices, site
communications including emergency plan, and provisions for medical
emergency services. It will identify names of personnel responsible for site safety
and health.
21.12 Control of Worker Exposure to Hazardous Substances
Engineering controls will be the primary means of control for occupational
exposure to hazardous substances. Administrative controls, such as scheduling
employee rotation as a method of controlling hazardous exposures associated with
hazardous waste activities and operations, must not be used.
21.13 Personal Protective Equipment
PPE must be provided and used according to the provisions contained in these
standards and as stipulated in the program, work plan, or HASP. PPE will be
based on the performance characteristics of the equipment, relative to:
• The requirements and limitations of the site
• The task-specific conditions and duration
• The hazards and potential hazards identified at the site
21.13.1 Personal Protective Equipment. The PPE program, as part of the
HASP, must address:
• PPE selection based on site-specific hazards
• The use and limitations of PPE
• Activity duration
• Maintenance and storage of PPE
• Decontamination and disposal of PPE
• PPE training and fitting
• Equipment donning and doffing procedures
21-6 October 2009
Section 21—Hazardous Waste
Site Operations
Procedures for inspecting equipment before, during, and after use
Evaluation of the effectiveness of the PPE program
Medical considerations, including work limitations due to temperature
extremes or physical stress
21.13.2 When airline respirators are utilized in hazardous waste operations,
an auxiliary self-contained escape air supply system will be incorporated.
21.13.3 When totally encapsulating suits are used, they must be capable of
maintaining positive air pressure.
21.14 Communications
All high-risk activities such as, but not limited to, remote or unobservable
operations, waste drum opening/sampling, or confined space entry must be
conducted in a way that ensures constant communication between the worker and
site management team.
21.15 Decontamination
Decontamination must be conducted in a way that prevents the spread of
hazardous contaminants and waste beyond the boundaries of the site of
operations. Decontamination will apply to equipment and personnel.
21.15.1 Procedures for all phases of decontamination will be developed,
communicated to all personnel, and implemented before any employee or
equipment may enter areas on a site where potential exposure to hazardous
Substances exists. Decontamination procedures, as a part of the site-specific
HASP, will specify:
Decontamination methods and procedures for testing and evaluating
their effectiveness
The number and layout of decontamination stations and
decontamination equipment needed
Procedures to prevent contamination of clean areas and to minimize
employee contact with hazardous substances or with contaminated
equipment that has contacted hazardous substances
Procedures to take if the nonimpermeable clothing of personnel
becomes wetted with hazardous substances
Methods for disposing of contaminated clothing and equipment
Methods for disposing of decontamination water and waste
21.15.2 All personnel leaving a contaminated area must be decontaminated;
all contaminated clothing and equipment leaving a contaminated area must be
appropriately disposed of or decontaminated.
October 2009 21-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
21.15.3 Decontamination procedures must be monitored by the site safety and
health officer to determine their effectiveness. If such procedures are found to
be ineffective, site work will immediately cease and remain shut down until
the situation has been corrected.
21.15.4 Decontamination must be conducted in geographic areas that
minimize the exposure of uncontaminated personnel and equipment to
contaminated employees or equipment.
21.15.5 All equipment and material used for decontamination must be
decontaminated or disposed of properly.
21.15.6 Decontamination of Personal Protective Equipment
a. PPE will be decontaminated, cleaned, laundered, maintained, stored,
and replaced as appropriate to maintain their effectiveness.
b. Unauthorized employees will not remove PPE from change rooms.
c. Commercial laundries or cleaning establishments that decontaminate
protective clothing or equipment will be informed of the potential harmful
effects of exposures to hazardous substances.
d. Where the decontamination procedure indicates the need for regular
showers and change rooms outside the contaminated area, or if cleanup or
removal operations will require 6 months or more to complete, showers
and change rooms must be provided. If temperature effects prevent the
use of water, other effective means for cleansing must be provided and
used.
21.16 Emergency Planning
Planning for site emergencies must be conducted before commencement of
hazardous waste activities.
21. 16.1 Site emergency cleaning must address all anticipated emergency
situations. -
21.16.2 The emergency response plan must be included in the HASP and
address:
• Personnel roles, responsibilities, and lines of communication
• Emergency recognition and prevention
• Safe distances and staging areas (safety zones)
• Site security and control
• Evacuation routes and procedures
• Emergency medical treatment
• Emergency alerting and response procedures
21-8 October 2009
Section 21—Hazardous Waste
Site Operations
• Critique of response and followup
• Procedures for reporting incidents to Federal, State and local
governments
• Decontamination
21.16.3 The emergency response plan will be a separate section of the HASP.
21.16.4 The emergency response plan will be exercised regularly as part of
the overall training program.
21.16.5 The emergency response plan will be reviewed periodically and, as
necessary, amended to keep it current with new or changing site conditions or
operations.
21.16.6 A personnel alarm system must be installed to notify personnel of an
emergency condition, to stop work activities if necessary, to lower
background noise in order to speed communications, and/or to begin
emergency procedures.
21.16.7 The emergency planning must be compatible and integrated with the
disaster, fire, and/or emergency response plans of local, State and Federal
agencies.
21.17 Underground Storage Tank Removal
Hazard analysis for the removal or disposal of an underground storage tank (UST)
system must address:
• Hazards of UST system contents and procedures for hazard control,
including explosion prevention
• Monitoring requirements and procedures
• UST system draining, purging, and cleaning procedures
• Excavation safety requirements and procedures for blocking free-standing
tanks
• Procedures and safety precautions for disassembly, removal, and disposal
of system
• Spill contingency planning
• Proper handling of contaminated groundwater and soil
21.18 Handling Drums and Containers
21.18.1 Identification and Inspection
a. Prior to handling or opening a drum or other container, effort will be
made to identify their contents.
October 2009 21-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. Drums and containers will be inspected and their integrity must be
ensured before moving them.
c. Drums or containers that cannot be inspected before being moved
because of storage conditions (e.g., buried beneath the earth, stacked
behind other drums, stacked several tiers high, in a pile, etc.) must be
moved to an accessible location and inspected prior to further handling.
d. Unlabeled drums or containers will be assumed to contain hazardous
substances and handled accordingly until the contents are positively
identified and labeled
21.18.2 Handling Requirements
a. Before moving drums or containers, all employees exposed to the
transfer operation must be warned of the potential hazards associated with
the contents of the drums or containers and their handling and instructed to
minimize handling as much as possible.
b. Where major spills may occur, a spill containment program must be
implemented to contain and isolate the entire volume of the hazardous
substance being transferred. U.S. Department of Transportation specified
Salvage drums or containers and suitable quantities of proper absorbent
must be kept available and used in areas where spills, leaks or ruptures
may Occur.
c. If drums and containers cannot be moved without rupture, leakage, or
spillage must be emptied into a sound container, using a device classified
for the material being transferred.
d. Subsurface exploration will be used to estimate the location and depth
of buried drums or containers. Soil or covering material must be removed
with utmost caution to prevent drum or container rupture.
21.18.3 Opening Drums or Containers
a. Where an airline respirator system is used, connections to the source of
air supply must be protected from contamination and the entire system
protected from physical damage.
b. Personnel not involved in opening drums or containers must be kept at
a safe distance from the drums or containers being opened.
c. When personnel must work near or adjacent to drums or containers
being opened, place a suitable shield that does not interfere with the work
operation between the adjacent person and the drums or containers being
opened to protect the employees in case of an accidental explosion.
21–10
October 2009
Section 21—Hazardous Waste
Site Operations
d. Controls for drum or container opening equipment, monitoring
equipment, and fire suppression equipment must be located behind the
explosion-resistant barrier.
e. When there is a reasonable possibility of flammable atmospheres being
present, material handling equipment and hand tools will be of a type to
prevent Sources of ignition (e.g., nonsparking tools).
f. Drums and containers will be opened in a manner that allows excess
interior pressure to be safely relieved from a remote location. Place
appropriate shielding between the employee and the drums or containers,
to reduce the risk of personnel injury.
g. Personnel shall not stand upon, or work from, drums or containers.
21.18.4 Transfer. Material handling equipment used to transfer drums and
containers must be selected, positioned, and operated to minimize sources of
ignition related to the equipment from ignitable vapors released from drums or
containers.
21.18.5 Precautions. The following precautions must be taken when drums
or containers containing, or suspected of containing, shock-sensitive waste are
handled.
a. All non-essential personnel must be kept a safe distance from the area
of transfer.
b. Material handling equipment must be provided with explosive
containment devices or protective shields to protect equipment operators
from exploding containers.
c. An employee alarm system, capable of being perceived above
surrounding light and noise conditions, will be used to signal the
commencement and completion of explosive waste handling activities.
d. Continuous communications will be maintained between the personnel
in charge of the immediate handling area and both the site safety and
health officer and the command center until the handling operation is
completed. Communication equipment or methods which could cause
shock sensitive materials to explode will not be used.
e. Drums and containers under pressure (as evidenced by bulging or
swelling) will not be moved until the cause of excess pressure is
determined and appropriate containment procedures have been
implemented to protect employees from explosive relief of the drum.
f. Drums and containers that contain packaged laboratory wastes will be
assumed to contain shock-sensitive or explosive materials until they have
been characterized.
October 2009 21–11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
21.18.6 Laboratory Waste Packs. When handling laboratory waste packs,
the following precautions will be taken.
a. Laboratory wastes will be considered shock-sensitive or explosive until
they have been characterized.
b. Lab packs will be opened only when necessary and then only by an
individual knowledgeable in the inspection, classification, and segregation
of the containers within the pack, according to the hazards of the wastes.
c. If crystalline material is noted on any container, handle the contents as
a shock-sensitive waste until the contents are identified.
21.18.7 Sampling. Sampling of drum and container contents must be done in
accordance with a sampling procedure which is included in the HASP.
21. 18.8 Shipping and Transport
a. Drums and containers must be identified as classified prior to
packaging for shipment.
b. Drum or container staging areas must be kept to the minimum number
necessary to identify and classify materials safely and prepare them for
transport.
c. Bulking of hazardous wastes is permitted only after a thorough
characterization of the material has been completed.
21. 18.9 Tank and Vault Procedures
a. Tanks and Vaults containing hazardous substances will be handled in a
manner similar to that for drum and containers, taking into consideration
the size of the tank or vault.
b. Avoid entering tanks or vaults if possible. When entry is required,
follow appropriate tank or vault entry procedures, as described in the
HASP.
21–12 October 2009
Section 22
Excavation Operations
The requirements contained in this section apply to all types of excavation
operations, except tunnels and shafts, covered in the section, "Tunnel and Shaft
Construction." This section sets forth Reclamation’s requirements for excavation
operations. It covers the following specific areas:
• General Requirements
• Structural Footings
• Excavation Protective Systems
• Cofferdams
22.1 General Requirements for Excavation Operations
22.1.1 Preliminary Inspection. Before excavation, thoroughly inspect the
site to determine conditions requiring special safety measures. Locate
underground installations, such as sewer, telephone, gas, water, and electric
lines. Make necessary arrangements with the utility company or owner to
protect, remove, or relocate the underground installations. In such
circumstances, excavate in a manner that does not endanger the underground
installation or the employees engaged in the work. Protect utilities left in
place by barricading, shoring, or suspending, or by other measures, as
necessary.
22.1.2 Protect the Public. Provide necessary barricades, walkways, lighting,
public awareness programs, and posting for the protection of the public before
the start of excavation operations. Do not start excavation operations on or
near State, county, or city streets or accessways or other locations where there
is extensive interface with the public or motorized equipment until after you
have the following:
a. Written permission to proceed, together with protective measures
required from the authority having jurisdiction (authority).
b. An extensive and detailed Job Hazard Analysis (JHA), using the
authority’s instructions and these standards.
c. A completed JHA, accepted by the designated authority.
d. Proof that the JHA has been discussed with affected employees and the
applicable protective measures are in place and functioning.
e. Implementation of a public awareness program, when required by the
contracting officer’s representative or the office head.
October 2009 22–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
22.1.3 Ingress and Egress. Provide safe access for employees, including
installing walkways, ramps, stairs, and ladders.
• A competent person, qualified in structural design, must design the
structural ramps used for ingress or egress of equipment. Make sure
the structural ramps are constructed according to the design.
• To prevent displacement, connect the structural members of ramps and
runways that are constructed of two or more structural members.
• Make sure structural members used for ramps and runways are of
uniform thickness.
• Attach cleats (or other appropriate items used to connect runway
structural members) to the bottom of the runway or in some other
location or fashion that will not contribute to tripping.
• Provide structural ramps used in lieu of steps with cleats or other
surface treatments on the top surface to prevent slipping.
Where employees must enter trenches more than 4 feet (1.22 meters) deep,
provide stairs, ladders, or ramps at intervals of no more than 25 feet (7.62
meters) of lateral travel. When access to excavations is more than 20 feet
(6.10 meters) vertically, provide ramps, stairs, or personnel hoists.
22.1.4 Lighting. Provide either natural or artificial lighting at excavation
sites, borrow pits, and waste areas in accordance with illumination
requirements.
22.1.5 Personal Protective Equipment. Provide personal protective
equipment in accordance with the specific requirements in the section,
"Personal Protective Equipment" and make sure that employees use the
equipment when it is needed. Protect employees exposed to occupational
health hazards. Drillers and helpers must wear approved safety goggles or
safety glasses with side shields, hearing protection, and safety shoes, as
required.
22.1.6 Removal of Surface Encumbrances. Before excavation, remove
trees, brush, boulders, and other surface encumbrances that may present a
hazard to employees.
22.1.7 Inspections. Each day, make sure that a competent person does the
following:
a. Inspects excavations, the adjacent areas, and protective systems for
warning signs of a situation that could result in possible cave-ins,
indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or
other hazardous conditions. The competent person must conduct an
inspection before the start of work and as needed throughout the shift.
Make inspections following every rainstorm or other hazard-increasing
eVent.
22–2 October 2009
Section 22—Excavation Operations
b. If the competent person finds: (1) evidence of a situation that could
result in a cave-in; (2) indications of failure of protective systems;
(3) hazardous atmospheres; or (4) other hazardous conditions, remove
exposed employees from the hazardous area until the necessary
precautions are made to ensure their safety.
22.1.8 Structure Foundations and Footings. Except in hard rock, do not
permit excavations below the level of the base of any foundation, footing, or
retaining wall, unless the wall is underpinned and all necessary precautions
are taken to ensure the stability of the adjacent walls. Install shoring, bracing,
or underpinning designed by a qualified person if the excavation endangers
the stability of adjacent buildings or structures. Have a qualified person
inspect such supporting systems at least daily to ensure that the protection is
adequate and effectively maintained.
22.1.9 Vertical Cuts and Slopes. Protect employees working below or on
slopes or cuts exposed to falling, rolling, or sliding rocks, earth, or to other
materials in the following manner:
a. Scaling. Effective scaling must be performed before exposure and at
intervals necessary to eliminate the danger.
b. Rock Bolting. Install rock bolting, wire mesh, or equivalent support
when material continues to ravel and fall, even after thorough scaling.
c. Barricades. Installing protective timber or wire mesh barricades at the
top of the cut and at necessary intervals down the slope.
d. Benching. Use benching, wherever practical, sufficient to retain
falling material instead of barricades.
e. Placing Personnel. Do not permit personnel to work above one
another where danger of falling rock or earth exists. Protect personnel
performing work on vertical cuts or slopes, where balance depends on a
Supporting system. Use appropriate fall protection.
22.1.10 Supporting Materials. Make sure materials used for sheeting,
piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, and underpinning are in good serviceable
condition and timbers are sound and free of large or loose knots.
22.1.11 Backfilled Excavation. Take special precautions in sloping or
shoring the sides of excavations adjacent to a previously backfilled excavation
or fill area. Do not use compacted backfill as backforms on slopes steeper
than 34 degrees measured from the horizontal (1-1/2 horizontal to 1 vertical),
unless specified by a design approved by a professional engineer (PE) and
properly documented in writing.
October 2009 22–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
22.1.12 Groundwater. Control groundwater. Use a PE to plan and direct
freezing, pumping, drainage, and other major control measures. Give full
consideration to the existing moisture balances in surrounding soils and the
effects on foundations and structures if the moisture balances are disturbed.
Provide an emergency power source when continuous operation of
groundwater control equipment is necessary.
22.1.13 Surface Water. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations.
Use diversion ditches, dikes, dewatering sumps, or other effective means to
control surface water.
22.1.14 Crossovers. Provide walkways or bridges protected by standard
guardrails where employees are required or permitted to cross over
excavations.
22.1.15 Undercuts. When necessary to undercut a slope or vertical cut,
adequately support the residual material. Submit the undercutting method and
support system to the contracting officer’s representative and be sure that it is
accepted. If Reclamation employees conduct the work, submit the
undercutting method and support system to the office head for acceptance
before starting undercutting operations.
22.1.16 Excavated Materials. Place excavated materials and retain at least 2
feet (0.61 meter) from the edge of the excavation or at a greater distance when
required to prevent hazardous loading on the face of the excavation.
22.1.17 Protective Devices. Maintain guardrails and fences, barricades and
warning lights, or other illumination systems from Sunset to Sunrise on
excavations adjacent to walkways, driveways, and other pedestrian or vehicle
thoroughfares. Effectively barricade or cover and post wells, subsurface
exploration holes, pits, shafts, and all similar hazardous excavations. Backfill
as soon as possible all temporary excavations at these locations.
22.1.18 Stoplogs. When mobile equipment is permitted adjacent to
excavations with steep slopes or cuts, install substantial stoplogs or barricades.
22.1.19 Exposure to Vehicular Traffic. Provide employees exposed to
public vehicular traffic with warning vests or other suitable garments marked
with, or made of, reflectorized or high-visibility material.
22.1.20 Equipment Operation. Provide equipment operating on loading or
waste areas with an automatic backup alarm. Additionally, use a competent
signalman to direct traffic when employees are on foot or otherwise
endangered by equipment in dumping or waste areas. Do not give the
signalman any other assignment that could interfere with signaling duties. If
the equipment or truck cab is not shielded, the operator must stand clear of the
22-4 October 2009
Section 22—Excavation Operations
Vehicle during loading. Do not allow excavating or hoisting equipment to
raise, lower, or swing loads over workmen unless you provide effective
overhead protection.
22.1.21 Hazardous Atmospheres. In locations where oxygen deficiency or
gaseous conditions are known or suspected, test the air in the excavation
before the start of each shift or more often if directed by the designated
authority. Maintain a log of all test results at the site. If the oxygen level is
less than 19.5 percent, the concentration of flammable gas exceeds 10 percent
of the lower flammable limit, or toxic materials exist at levels exceeding the
Threshold Limit Value (TLV), take steps such as increasing the ventilation to
control the hazards.
22.2 Requirements for Excavation Protective Systems
22.2.1 Sloping and Benching. Slope or bundle all excavations 5 feet
(1.52 meters) or more deep in accordance with one of the systems outlined
below.
a. For excavations less than 20 feet (6.10 meters) deep, the maximum
slope is 34 degrees, measured from the horizontal (1-1/2 horizontal to
1 vertical), unless one of the other options listed in this subsection are
used.
b. Determine the maximum allowable slope and benching systems
according to the conditions and the requirements set forth in OSHA 1926,
subpart P.
c. Select the design according to written tabulated data, such as charts and
tables. Maintain at least one copy of the tabulated data at the jobsite
during excavation. Include the following tabulated data:
• Identification of the parameters that affect the selection of a
sloping or benching system drawn from the data
• Identification of the limits of use of the data, including the
magnitude and configuration of slopes determined to be safe
• Explanatory information as may be necessary to help the user
correctly select a protective system from the data
• The PE who approved the data
d. Use a PE to design the sloping or benching system. Maintain at least
one copy of the design at the jobsite during excavation. Designs must be
in writing and must include:
October 2009 22-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• The magnitudes and configurations of the slopes that were
determined to be safe for the particular excavation
• The identity of the PE who approved the design
22.2.2 Support Systems. Use a PE to design sheeting, sheet piling, bracing,
shoring, trench boxes, and other methods of excavation and trench protection.
Use qualified personnel to install excavation and trench protection. Designs
must be in writing and must include the following:
• A plan indicating the sizes, types, and configurations of the materials
to be used in the protective system
• The identity of the PE approving the design
Maintain at least one copy of the design at the jobsite.
22.2.3 Shoring Design Requirements. Design criteria support systems or
shoring must meet or exceed the minimum requirements set forth in this
subsection and in OSHA 1926, subpart P. Do not subject braces and diagonal
shores in a timber shoring system to compressive stresses in excess of the
values given in the following formula:
S = 1300 – 20L
D
- - L
maximum ratio – = 50
D
where:
L = length, unsupported, in inches
D = least dimension of timber, in inches
S = allowable stress of cross section, in pounds per square inch
22.2.4 Shoring, Sloping, Benching, Trench Box Illustrations. Figures in
OSHA 1926, subpart P, tentatively illustrate the basic shoring, sloping,
benching, trench box, and shield requirements contained in this subsection.
22.2.5 Trench Boxes and Shields. The designated authority may authorize
portable trench boxes, sliding trench boxes, or shields instead of required
sloping, benching, or supporting methods when:
a. A PE designs the boxes or shields, which provides protection
equivalent to shoring and sheeting for the same condition and conform to
requirements of OSHA 1926, subpart P.
b. The boxes or shields are constructed and maintained to design
standards.
22-6 October 2009
Section 22—Excavation Operations
c. A job hazard analysis covering operation and maintenance of the boxes
or shields has been developed, and affected employees have been trained
and instructed on the effective use of the protective equipment.
d. Backhoes, excavators, and cranes used to move trench boxes and
shields meet the applicable requirements in the section on "Hoisting
Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors."
22.2.6 Benching. Benching excavation procedures may be used to
accommodate operations such as pipelaying (see 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P.
Appendix B).
22.2.7. Placing Shoring, Trench Boxes, or Shields. Carry shoring, trench
boxes, or shields along with the excavation, and do not omit them where the
depth of trench or soil conditions require shoring or bracing. Where a
backhoe or ditching machine is used, place the shoring box or shield as close
as possible to the lower end of the boom. Excavations may extend 2 feet
(0.61 meter) below the bottom of shoring, trench boxes, or trench shields,
provided the protective systems are designed to resist the forces calculated for
the full depth of the trench and there are no indications, while the trench is
open, of a possible loss of soil from behind or below the bottom of the support
system.
22.2.8 Removal of Support. Backfilling and removing trench support
systems must progress together from the bottom of the trench. Release jacks
and braces slowly. In unstable soil, use ropes or other safe means to remove
the braces from the surface after the employees have left the trench.
22.2.9 Cross Braces and Jacks. Place cross braces and trench jacks in true
horizontal position and secure them to prevent sliding, falling, or kickouts.
22.3 Requirements for Structure Footings
22.3.1 Casing Requirements. Provide a steel casing or support system of
sufficient strength to support the earth walls and prevent cave-ins in small
diameter footings, including bell-bottom footings over 4 feet (1.22 meters)
deep, that employees must enter. Provide the casing or support system the full
depth, except for the bell portion of bell footings.
22.3.2 Access Requirements. Provide fixed or portable ladders for access.
Every employee entering the footing must wear a lifeline securely attached to
a shoulder harness. Man the lifeline from above and separate it from any line
used to raise or lower materials.
22.4 Requirements for Cofferdams
22.4.1 Controlled Flooding. Provide for controlled flooding of the work
area in any design if overtopping of a cofferdam is possible. Devise an
October 2009 22–7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
evacuation plan, including installation of warning signals and emergency
exits, to safely evacuate employees and equipment from the work area.
22.4.2 Walkways and Guardrails. Where employees are permitted on
cofferdams, install safe walkways protected by guardrails.
22.4.3 Exit. Provide a rapid means for employees who work on cofferdams
to exit with their equipment.
22–8 October 2009
Section 23
Tunnel and Shaft Construction
This section sets forth requirements for tunnel and shaft construction. It covers
the following specific areas:
• General Requirements
• Emergency Provisions
• Ventilation
Air Quality
Dust Control
Internal Combustion Engines
Noise Control
Fire Prevention and Control
Excavation Operations
Ground Support
Transportation and Haulage
Shafts
Tunneling in Soil
Compressed Air Work
23.1 General Requirements for Tunnel and Shaft Construction
In addition to complying with the safety requirements set forth in this section and
other parts of these standards, comply with applicable provisions of the contract
when excavating and constructing tunnels and shafts. Begin underground-related
work only after an acceptable safety program or a detailed supplementary
submittal specific to underground operations has covered all aspects of the
operation.
23.1.1 Employee Identification. Entrances to all underground facilities must
have a check-in and checkout system that provides the contractor with an
accurate record of each person underground. The system must be able to
identify each individual and general location. General locations include
heading, train crew, track crew, maintenance area, storage area, Survey
stations, etc. Additionally, when underground, all employees must carry or
wear a positive means of identification, such as a metal disk or tag.
23.1.2 Illumination. Underground lighting and illumination intensities must
adhere to the current ANSI/IES RP-7, "Recommended Practice for Industrial
Lighting" and UL 924, "Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment." Use
nonmetallic light fixtures and support lighting conductors on insulators
located on the side of the tunnel or shaft opposite the firing line. Use
acceptable portable lighting equipment within 50 feet of any underground
heading during explosives handling.
October 2009 23–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
23.1.3 Electrical Equipment. A professional engineer (PE), knowledgeable
in underground wiring practices, must design and certify the underground
electrical distribution system to meet good practice and applicable standards.
Install and maintain all electrical equipment, including the section on
"Electrical Safety," to meet applicable requirements. Permit only dry-type
transformers underground and ensure they are protected from possible
damage. Separate or insulate power lines from air and waterlines, metal
ducts, telephone lines, and blasting lines.
23.1.4 Bonding and Grounding. Ground and bond air and water piping,
metal vent pipe, rails, and similar conductive devices at the portal or shaft
head and at no more than 1,000-foot intervals.
23.1.5 Communications. Install a telephone system or an equivalent
powered communication system between the tunnel heading and the portal,
the shaft bottom and shaft head, and the first-aid station. Keep the powered
communication systems independent of the tunnel or shaft power supply, and
install the powered communication systems so that failure or disruption of any
one station will not disrupt the operation of any other station. Test
communication systems at the beginning of each shift and more frequently,
when necessary, to ensure reliability. An employee must not work alone
unless that employee is either within voice communication distance of another
employee or has an appropriate powered communication system to obtain
instructions and emergency assistance. -
23.1.6 Blasting. Blasting and explosive-handling operations must conform to
the requirements in the "Blasting" section.
23.1.7 Personal Protective Equipment. Employees entering underground
workings must wear, as a minimum, hardhats, appropriate eye protection, and
foot protection. Employees entering wet areas must wear rubber footwear;
underground type rain gear; and eye, face, and head protection as described in
the section on "Personal Protective Equipment." When applicable, provide
employees with other personal protective equipment, and ensure they wear
them.
23.2 Emergency Provisions
23.2.1 Evacuation Plan. Develop and post emergency evacuation plans,
including provisions for rescue equipment, at the portal or shaft head. Instruct
employees in the emergency procedures.
23.2.2 Self-Rescuers. Provide employees and others with self-rescuers,
approved by National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
and/or Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), or make them
available at headings, shaft bottoms, and all other underground work areas.
Provide at least one readily available self-rescuer for each employee and
23-2 October 2009
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction
visitor. Ensure that employees and others have satisfactorily completed
certified training before going underground. Visitors instructed in operating
the Self-rescuer and accompanied by a trained employee are exempt from this
training requirement. Maintain self-rescuers in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements.
23.2.3 Emergency Hoists. Provide an emergency personnel hoist for shafts
more than 50 feet deep. Design the hoist so that, as a minimum, the load hoist
drum is powered in both directions and a brake automatically applies upon
power release or failure. Provide the emergency hoist in addition to the
primary hoist.
23.2.4 Rescue Crews. As part of the emergency plan required in the section
on "Emergency Planning," develop an emergency plan covering the possible
emergencies requiring the use of a rescue crew. The plan must include the
equipment, training, and organization of the rescue crews.
a. Provide at least two rescue crews of at least five men each for tunnel
and shaft operations employing 25 or more employees at one time
underground. One crew must be on the jobsite or within / hour travel
time away from the portal. The other crew must be within 2 hours travel
t1me.
b. Organize and train at least one crew of at least five employees as a
rescue crew, or, for Smaller jobs, arrange in advance with a locally
available rescue service. Locate the rescue crew or rescue service on the
jobsite or within / hour travel time from the portal.
c. Thoroughly instruct new crew members upon assignment to the rescue
crew and conduct refresher training for the full crew at least every
6 months.
d. Instruct and train rescue team members to perform rescue operations;
use and care for Oxygen breathing apparatus; and use firefighting
equipment. Provide oxygen-breathing apparatus unless, in the
development of the emergency plan, analysis specifically indicates that the
use of Self-contained breathing apparatus is sufficient. Keep breathing
apparatus in good repair and ready for use at all times. Maintain a
Sufficient Supply of spare breathing apparatus, replacement parts, and
regenerating material or air cylinders.
23.2.5 Emergency Lighting. Provide each employee and visitor entering
underground workings with an MSHA-approved portable hand or cap lamp
and make sure the employee or visitor carries it. Providing hand or cap lamps
does not take the place of meeting lighting requirements.
October 2009 23-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
23.2.6 Designated Person. At least one designated person must be on duty
above ground when personnel are underground. The designated person must
be familiar with operating features of the lighting and ventilation system and
the procedures for obtaining emergency service. The designee must remain
within contact range of the communication system annunciator.
23.3 Requirements for Ventilation
Mechanically ventilate all areas of tunnels, shafts, and other underground
workings with clean, breathable, nonrecirculated, outside air. Place the
ventilation system in operation before employees enter any underground workings
and keep the system in operation until all personnel have left the area serviced by
the system.
23.3.1 Ventilation System Design Requirements. Submit the system(s)
design criteria, specifications, and appropriate drawings before acquiring or
installing the system. Incorporate the following specific design features in all
ventilation systems:
a. Mechanically induce all airflows. Do not provide required air
quantities by natural ventilation methods.
b. Construct primary ducts and fans of noncombustible metallic materials.
You may use short, noncritical sections of expandable-type ducting in
Secondary systems.
c. Use class 1, division 1 electric motors, fans, drives, and auxiliary
equipment, including wiring, starters, and controls. Design, install, and
maintain the system in explosion-proof condition and make sure it is
capable of operating in an explosive atmosphere.
d. Ensure the noise levels of ventilation fans does not exceed 90 decibels
when measured at the closest point of employee exposure.
e. Ensure system airflows, secondary systems excepted, are reversible
from a surface location. Incorporate a control system in the reversing
feature so it is not necessary to rewire fans or electrical circuits to
accomplish the reversing sequence.
f. Design the primary ventilation systems to operate in the exhausting
mode.
g. Maintain primary duct system inlets within 3 duct diameters of the
tunnel face or shaft bottom when operating in exhaust and within 10 duct
diameters of the tunnel face or shaft bottom when operating on blow. In
conventional drill and blast tunnels, you may need to install a
Supplemental ventilation system to maintain minimum ventilation rate to
23-4
October 2009
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction
the tunnel face or shaft bottom during all portions of the excavation cycle.
"Blow Joes" or similar-type recirculating devices do not meet this
requirement.
h. Heat or cool the ventilation air as necessary to ensure air temperatures
at work sites are between 40 °F and 100 °F.
i. Design ventilation system capacities (cubic feet per minute) to be the
greater of:
1. The total rate (cubic feet per minute) required for all
MSHA-approved diesel engines operating underground.
2. The total rate (cubic feet per minute) required for all non
MSHA-approved equipment. Non MSHA-approved diesel equipment
must meet appropriate requirements in this section.
3. The total rate (cubic feet per minute) required to control airborne
contaminants or toxic and flammable gas or vapor within prescribed
limits or values specified or referenced in this section and in the
"Occupational Health" section.
4. The rate (cubic feet per minute) required to maintain a minimum air
velocity of 100 feet per minute (feet per minute) over the gross bore
area of all sections of the underground workings.
23.3.2 Air Volume Measurements. Develop and implement a procedure to
maintain design airflows in all sections of underground workings. The
procedure, as a minimum, must require the following:
a. Determining airflows immediately after any system installation or
modification that could significantly affect airflows (e.g., adding new fans,
repairing fans, or changing duct arrangements).
b. Continuously monitoring airflows in primary ventilation systems with
direct readout instruments containing low-air volume alarms.
c. Determining airflows in congested tunnel areas (e.g., headings and near
rapid excavation machines) by pitot tube traversing of the duct system
supplying or exhausting air from the area. (Refer to American Conference
of Governmental Industrial Hygienists publication, "Industrial
Ventilation," for acceptable equipment and methods for air volume
determinations.)
d. Maintaining all data obtained by measurement, including the date,
place, time, instrumentation, calculations, results, and the names of test
personnel, on the surface and make it available for review.
October 2009 23–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
23.4 Requirements for Air Quality
Underground air quality must meet the following specifications:
(a) Oxygen concentrations must be between 19.5 percent and 22.0 percent.
(b) Carbon monoxide concentrations must not exceed 25 parts per million
(0.0025 percent).
(c) Carbon dioxide concentration must not exceed 5,000 parts per million
(0.5 percent).
(d) Nitrogen dioxide concentration must not exceed 3 parts per million
(0.0003 percent).
(e) Hydrogen sulfide must not exceed 10 parts per million (0.001 percent).
1. Conduct tests for hydrogen sulfide in the affected areas every 4 hours
whenever hydrogen sulfide levels exceed 5 parts per million
(0.0005 percent).
2. Use a continuous sampling hydrogen sulfide indicator with alarm to
monitor the affected work area if hydrogen sulfide levels exceed 10 parts
per million (0.001 percent).
3. Take steps to increase ventilation to reduce the concentration if the
concentration of hydrogen sulfide exceeds 10 parts per million
(0.001 percent) time-weighted average for an 8-hour period.
(f) Do not allow methane gas to exceed 20 percent of the lower explosive
limit:
1. Whenever 5 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane
or other flammable gases is detected, take steps to increase the ventilation
rate or other steps to lower the methane concentration.
2. Whenever 10 percent of the lower explosive limit for methane or other
flammable gases is detected, evacuate all employees except those
necessary to eliminate the hazard, and disconnect electrical power except
for explosion-proof pumps and ventilation equipment.
(g) Do not allow other flammable gases or vapors to exceed 10 percent of the
lower explosive limit.
(h) Do not allow other airborne contaminants, including dust, to exceed the
limits prescribed in the section on "Occupational Health."
23.4.1 Quantitative Sampling of Underground Environments. A
competent person must conduct the quantitative sampling of underground
23-6 October 2009
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction
environments. A competent person is one who through education, experience,
and training can, using acceptable scientific instruments and methods,
determine the quality of air in underground environments. Conduct
quantitative sampling as follows:
a. While excavating the tunnel at least once each 4 hours and before
reentry into the face area after each blast, test the environment in the face
area: first for oxygen concentration and then for flammable gas or vapors,
carbon monoxide, hydrogen sulfide, and nitrogen dioxide.
b. At least once during each work shift change, test all working
environments for oxygen concentration, flammable gas or vapors, carbon
monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and other applicable gases
or vapors.
c. Sample all working environments near dust-producing operations for
applicable airborne particulates within 10 days after underground
operations begin, and at 90-day intervals thereafter, or within 10 days
following major changes in tunnel excavation methods or major
modifications to ventilation systems. Within 10 days following the
sampling date, furnish a full report of the sampling method and analysis
and an evaluation of the environmental conditions to the affected
employees.
d. Log and file environmental sampling data, including procedures,
equipment, personnel, dates, and results at a surface location and make it
available for review.
23.4.2 Specialized Instrumentation. In addition to quantitative sampling
requirements, install specialized direct reading instruments to determine the
concentration of flammable gases and vapors as follows:
a. Equip all rapid excavation machines with a multisensor continuous
flammable gas and vapor detector designed to shut down excavation
operations when gas or vapor concentrations reach 10 percent of the lower
explosive limit. Locate one sensor at the dust shield near the conveyor
belt opening. Locate another sensor at the operator’s station and a third
sensor in the primary duct of the exhaust mode ventilation system.
b. In conventional (drill and blast) operations, install an automatic
multisensor continuous gas detector near the tunnel heading or shaft
bottom. Equip the unit with visual and audio alarm components capable
of alerting employees working at the heading or bottom that flammable
gas or vapor concentrations have exceeded 10 percent of the lower
explosive limit. Locate one sensor in the primary duct of an exhausting
ventilation system and at least one more sensor in the general tunnel area
within 30 feet of the face. Locate all sensors installed in the tunnel proper
as near the crown as practical.
October 2009 23–7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
c. Machine excavation operations, other than those described in paragraph
a. above, require a similar detection system, a system with one sensor
effectively placed to detect flammable gas and vapor concentrations near
the cutter head.
23.4.3 Suspensions of Operations. Suspend all underground operations and
remove all employees from underground workings whenever flammable gas
or toxic gas or vapor concentrations exceed the acceptable levels set forth in
this section on "Air Quality." Prohibit reentry, except for rescue operations,
until authorized in writing by the contracting officer or representative, or
office head. Do not provide written authorization until the following occurs:
a. The employer has engaged the services of a PE experienced in gaseous
tunneling or mining operations.
b. The PE has, after onsite investigation and testing, developed a written
detailed procedure for safely reentering the underground workings and
resuming operations.
c. The procedure complies with all requirements of these standards and
the regulations of Federal and State entities having jurisdiction.
23.5 Requirements for Dust Control
Carry out all drilling and excavation operations in a manner that meets the
requirements of this subsection and control airborne dust concentrations within
limits prescribed in the section on "Occupational Health." Quantitative testing is
required for underground environments and operations to ensure effectiveness of
dust control methods.
23.5.1 Drilling. Equip rotary and percussion drills with water or chemical
dust-control systems or other control systems.
23.5.2 Machine Excavation. Equip tunnel boring machines or other
excavating machines with an effective dust-control system(s) before
installation. Make sure the system can control the dust concentrations within
the specified safe hygienic limits. Routinely maintain and test the system to
ensure its effectiveness.
23.5.3 Muck Piles. Keep muck piles wet to reduce dust concentrations.
23.6 Requirements for Combustion Engines
Do not use internal combustion engines, other than approved diesel-powered
equipment, underground. Provide written approvals or certifications before
taking the equipment underground. Do not consider equipment approved until it
meets one of the following provisions:
23-8 October 2009
Section 23–Tunnel and Shaft Construction
(a) The diesel-powered equipment has been approved or certified under the
provisions of MSHA regulations 30 CFR Part 32 or Part 36 (formerly
schedules 24 and 31). When applicable, obtain a permit from the State entity
having jurisdiction.
(b) The employer certifies the diesel-powered equipment is equivalent to
MSHA-approved equipment and meets the following requirements:
1. The engine’s fuel injection system allows adjustments to the
mechanism controlling maximum fuel injection only by breaking a seal or
by altering the design.
2. At maximum fuel air adjustment under normal operating conditions
and within the rated output range of the engine, make sure the undiluted
exhaust gas does not contain more than 2,500 parts per million carbon
monoxide and no more than 2,000 parts per million oxides of nitrogen.
3. Dilute the exhaust gas with air before discharging it into the
surrounding tunnel atmosphere. Ensure that the discharged mixture of
exhaust gas and air doesn’t contain more than 100 parts per million carbon
monoxide, 25 parts per million oxides of nitrogen, 10 parts per million
aldehydes, and 2 milligrams per cubic meter of exhaust gas particulate
emissions.
4. Cool engine exhaust to less than 160 °F before releasing it into the
surrounding tunnel atmosphere.
23.6.1 Ventilation Requirements. Ensure that ventilation (cubic feet per
minute) incident to the use of diesel-powered equipment underground meets
the requirements of this section, including the following:
a. The cumulative MSHA-approved ventilation rate for all diesel-powered
equipment must be used for underground ventilation.
b. For non-MSHA-approved equipment, a ventilation rate (cubic feet per
minute) adequate to dilute all gaseous exhaust contaminants to below the
prescribed limits or values specified or referenced in the "Occupational
Health" section and to reduce the particulate emissions to below
1 milligram per cubic meter. In no case must the required ventilation rate
be less than 150 cubic feet per minute multiplied by the manufacturer’s
rated horsepower of all engines when operating at maximum fuel/air ratio.
23.6.2 Maintenance and Testing. Inspect and maintain diesel equipment in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Design, operate, and
maintain diesel equipment in conformance with MSHA 30 CFR Parts 36,
75.1909, and 1914. Maintain records of inspections and maintenance.
October 2009 23–9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
23.7 Requirements for Noise Control
Assess and control noise associated with underground operations, using the
section on "Occupational Health."
23.8 Requirements for Fire Prevention and Control
In addition to the requirements set forth in the section, "Fire Prevention and
Protection," the following requirements apply to all underground operations.
23.8.1 Heating. Do not use liquified petroleum gas (LPG) and natural gas
heaters underground.
23.8.2 Gasoline, Diesel, and LPG. Do not permit gasoline or liquefied
petroleum gases underground. Do not permit more than 1 day’s supply of
diesel oil underground. Do not pipe diesel fuel or combustible liquids from
the surface to below ground.
23.8.3 Welding and Cutting. Comply with the section, "Hand Tools, Power
Tools, Pressure Vessels, Compressors, and Welding," as well as this
paragraph when welding and cutting underground. You may use acetylene
and methyl acetylene propadiene stabilized gas underground for welding,
cutting, and hot work. Do not permit underground more than the amount of
fuel gas and oxygen necessary for work under progress for that shift. Before
and continuously during welding or cutting, a competent person must
determine that the atmosphere does not exceed the flammable gas, vapor, or
Oxygen limits.
23.8.4 Lubricants. Keep oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored underground in
tightly sealed containers in fire-resistant areas at least 300 feet (91.44 meters)
from explosive magazines and 100 feet (30.48 meters) from shaft stations,
inclined passageways, and major electrical installations. Install in the storage
area only electrical lighting systems that are approved for class I, division
2 locations.
23.8.5 Hydraulic Fluids. Use only fire-resistant hydraulic fluids approved
by a recognized authority, such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or Factory
Mutual, in hydraulically actuated machinery and equipment, unless the
equipment is protected by a fire protection system.
23.8.6 Belt Conveyors. Provide fire extinguishers of at least 2-A:40-B:C
units at the head and tail pulleys and at 300-foot intervals along the belt line.
Install a device on the conveyor drive system that automatically disconnects
power to the drive unit if the conveyor stalls.
23.8.7 Portal Structures. Erect fire-resistive structures within 100 feet of a
tunnel portal or shaft entrance. Place flammable material storage areas at least
23–10 October 2009
Section 23–Tunnel and Shaft Construction
200 feet away from the portal or shaft entrance. Do not permit combustible or
flammable material within 100 feet of the portal or shaft entrance, main fan
installation, or in a location where, in case of a spill or leak, the material will
flow into the portal area.
23.8.8 Fire-Suppression Systems for Diesel-Powered Equipment. Equip
all diesel-powered equipment operated underground with all of the following:
a. A minimum of one 2-A:40-B:C dry chemical fire extinguisher that is
accessible from ground level.
b. Factory Mutual or other nationally recognized independent testing
laboratory must specifically approve a dry chemical, pre-engineered,
fixed-nozzle-type fire-suppression system for the respective service and
the potential hazard. The design, installation, operation, and maintenance
of the system must be in accordance with the testing laboratory’s
recommendation. The system, where applicable, must conform to
National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 17, "Dry Chemical
Extinguishing System," and the requirements of the authority having
jurisdiction. Manual system actuators must be accessible from ground
level and within reach of the operator when seated in the operating
position.
23.9 Requirements for Excavation Operations
Before the start of excavation operations, train employees in the safety
requirements for the method of excavation to be used: include the equipment to
be used, the ground support systems, and the material handling systems in the
training program.
23.9.1 Drilling Operations.
a. Examination and Scaling. Before starting the drill cycle, examine the
face and lifters for misfires. If found, remove them before drilling. Don’t
drill lifters through loose rock or water. Inspect the heading, including the
face, for loose rock, and scale it before mucking and drilling. Protect
employees engaged in these activities from dislodgements by location,
ground support, or other equivalent means.
b. Equipment Inspection. Inspect drilling equipment each shift and
correct defects affecting safety before using the equipment.
c. Drill Jumbos. On jumbo decks, more than 6 feet high, install
removable guardrails with pipe uprights and chain handrails or equivalent
protection on the open sides and back. Also provide safe access to the
deck and cover the decks with solid, nonslip decking. When moving
jumbos, do not permit riders on the deck unless they are assisting the
operator.
October 2009 23–11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
1. Chock jumbos to prevent movement while employees are working
on them.
2. Maintain walking working surfaces of jumbos to prevent slipping,
tripping, and falling.
d. Moving Drills. Secure drill steel, tools, mast, and other equipment in a
safe position when moving a drill to another area. Provide receptacles or
racks for drill steel stored on drill jumbos.
e. Drill Masts. Do not permit employees on the drill mast when the drill
bit is in operation.
f. Column Drills. Firmly anchor drills supported on columns before
operation and retighten the drill frequently during operation.
g. Startup Warning. Before the drill cycle begins, warn the employees
working below the jumbo deck.
h. Lifting Material and Equipment. Provide a mechanical means to
raise heavy materials and equipment to the top decks of jumbos more than
4 feet high.
i. Airhose. Secure all airhose with an inside diameter greater than
0.5-inch at each connection and at the drill with clips and wire rope, chain
lashings, or an equivalent safety device.
23.9.2 Mechanical Excavation.
a. Mechanical Hazards. Sound an audible warning before excavating or
conveying machinery. Equip excavating machines with dead-man
controls. Provide adequate guarding where workers are exposed to
moving parts or to hydraulic lines operating at temperatures greater than
160 °F.
b. Lockout. In addition to requirements found in the section, "Hazardous
Energy Control Program," provide a means to lock out all power sources
from the mechanical excavating equipment. Where employees may need
to work between the face and the cutter head tunnel-boring machines,
provide the employees with a positive mechanical block to prevent
movement of the cutter head and a provision to lock out the power.
c. Examination. Thoroughly examine the heading before starting
excavation equipment.
23–12
October 2009
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction
23.10 Requirements for Ground Support
23.10.1 Tunnel Portals. Keep rock faces above and adjacent to portal areas
thoroughly scaled, and remove all loose or overhanging rock. Provide chain
link fabric on rock faces that are subject to spalling or raveling. Provide a
fire-resistive protective canopy at all tunnel portals. The protective canopy
must project at least 15 feet from the portal face and must withstand falling
earth or rock.
23.10.2 Inspection and Scaling. At least once a shift, a competent person
must inspect tunnels and shafts where employees are working. Scale and
Support them as required. Provide scaling bars and maintain them in good
condition. A competent person must inspect the entire tunnel, including roof
and walls at least weekly. Maintain weekly inspection records on the surface.
23.10.3 Loose Ground. Remove or support loose rock and earth.
Employees scaling or installing supports must work from supported areas or
protect them with spiling, crown bars, shielding, or other equivalent protective
Systems.
23.10.4 Rock Bolting. A PE must design rock bolt support systems. Make
torque meters and torque wrenches available where rock bolts are in use.
Make sure a competent person establishes torque testing and retightening
intervals, on the basis of rock conditions and existing vibration sources.
23.10.5 Damaged Tunnel Supports. Immediately repair or replace damaged
or dislodged tunnel supports of any description. Whenever possible, install
new supports before removing the damaged supports.
23.10.6 Anchorage. Design and install all sets, including horseshoe-shaped
or arched rib steel sets, with the bottoms sufficiently anchored to prevent
movement. Install lateral bracing between sets to stabilize the support.
23.10.7 Wood Supporting Structures. Do not use timber supports or wood
lagging.
23.11 Requirements for Transportation and Haulage
The employer must develop a complete set of operating rules for all types of
haulage equipment. Provide a copy of these rules and discuss them with all
employees before they go underground. Do not implement operational changes
affecting the rules until you change the rules.
23.11.1 Inspection. Maintain all haulage equipment in safe operating
condition. A qualified person must inspect it at the beginning of each shift.
Correct equipment defects affecting safe operation before using the
equipment.
October 2009 23–13
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
23.11.2 Rail Haulage Systems
a. Locomotives. In addition to ensuring that locomotives meet the
requirements of this section, equip them with: (1) a braking system,
capable of stopping and holding a loaded train on any section of track;
(2) headlights, a backup light, an audible warning device, a continuous
revolving flashing amber light that is visible in all directions; (3) seats for
the operator and all passengers; (4) adequate platforms and handholds for
the train crew; (5) rerailers and jacks; (6) dead-man controls; and
(7) falling object protection in accordance with the latest revision of
29 CFR 1926, Subpart S, "Tunnels and Shafts, Caissons, Cofferdams, and
Compressed Air."
b. Man-Haul Units. (1) Totally enclose man-haul units, except for
doors, small windows, and ventilation openings; (2) equip man-haul units
with seats for all passengers, adequate access devices, and safety chains in
addition to safety coupling devices; (3) use man-haul units only to
transport personnel, their personal equipment, and small secured tools.
Man-haul trips must consist of an engine and man-haul car(s) only. Pull
man-haul cars when occupied. Personnel who are incidentally transported
between shift changes may sit on locomotive seats or in specially
equipped, empty muck cars that have adequate headroom. Engines must
pull muck cars carrying personnel, and muck cars must be equipped with
safety chains.
c. Haulage Cars. Equip mine dump cars with automatic safety
couplings. Equip cradle or bottom dump cars with a positive-locking
device to prevent accidental dumping. Provide and use tiedown chains or
bumper blocks to prevent overturning of cars dumped by hand.
d. Tracks. Install and maintain rails in a manner that prevents shifting or
excessive settlement. Anchor rails to prevent unsafe separation, and gauge
them during laying operations and regularly while in use. Provide berms,
bumpers, blocks, safety hooks, or equivalent means to prevent overtravel
or overturning at dumping areas.
e. Operations. Load and secure materials to be hauled to prevent sliding
or dislodgement. Carry only small hand tools, lunch pails, or similar light
items on top of locomotives, provided that the top of the locomotive is
designed or modified to retain them while traveling. Chock, block, or set
the brakes on parked equipment to prevent inadvertent movement.
23.11.3 Nonrail-Type Haulage Systems. Nonrail-type haulage systems
must comply with the following applicable requirements:
a. Rubber-tired or crawler equipment and operations must comply with
applicable requirements of this section and the section, "Mobile and
Stationary Mechanized Equipment."
23–14 October 2009
Section 23–Tunnel and Shaft Construction
b. Conveyor systems equipment and operation must conform with
applicable requirements of this section and the section, "Hoisting
Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors."
23.12 Requirements for Shafts
In addition to other applicable provisions of this section, the following
requirements apply to the excavation of vertical and inclined shafts. Support
shafts more than 5 feet deep if employees must enter. A competent person must
determine the method of support.
23.12.1 Access. Provide all shafts with a protected manway designed to
permit safe entrance to and exit from the shaft bottom. Hoisting systems
designed, installed, operated, and maintained as set forth in this section may
transport personnel.
23.12.2 Guards. Protect the shaft opening with totally enclosed perimeter
guarding that is as high as a standard guardrail. Slope the ground adjacent to
the top of the shaft collar away from the shaft to prevent liquids from entering
and construct an effective barrier to prevent mobile equipment from
accidentally entering the shaft.
23.12.3 Hoisting Systems. Do not use cranes, derricks, or similar equipment
as the primary hoisting system to raise or lower personnel. Only use cranes,
derricks, or similar equipment meeting the requirements of this section for an
emergency hoisting system. Do not use cranes to raise or lower muck or
concrete buckets or similar devices to remove excavated material or to place
concrete, except in shafts less than 75 feet (22.86 meters) deep. You may use
cranes to raise and lower construction materials or equipment that cannot be
safely handled by the hoisting system. Cranes must conform with applicable
provisions of the "Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors" section
and all of the following requirements:
• Equip primary and secondary hoisting lines with planetary or worm
gears, torque convertors, automatic braking systems, or other
equivalent systems that prevent the loadlines from being placed in a
free wheeling or neutral position controlled only by a manual brake or
dogs (hooked or U-shaped device used for gripping or holding heavy
devices).
• Equip hoisting lines with: (1) an anti-two-blocking device or a two-
block damage prevention feature; and (2) a limit switch to prevent
overtravel at the bottom of the shaft. Keep at least two full wraps of
wire rope on the drum at all times.
• A competent person must inspect the crane at the beginning of each
shift and each time it is set up at the work site. Give the crane a full
cycle operational test lift before initial use at the shaft site and each
time it is reset at the site.
October 2009 23–15
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
a. General Requirements of the Primary Hoisting System. Install a
stationary hoisting system meeting the requirements of this subsection and
applicable provisions of the "Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and
Conveyors" section, and ANSI A10.22, "Safety Requirements for Rope-
Guided and Non-Guided Workmens’ Hoists," at all shaft sinking
operations 75 feet (22.86 meters) or more deep. A PE must design all
stationary hoisting systems. Follow the more stringent standard if there
are conflicts between these and referenced standards.
b. Specific Requirements of the Primary Hoisting System. The
stationary hoisting system must meet applicable ANSI standards, the
requirements of the State having jurisdiction, and the following specific
requirements:
1. Personnel Hoisting. You may use the primary hoisting system to
hoist personnel in attached cages or manskips that meet the
requirements of referenced ANSI standards or in buckets suspended
beneath crossheads operating on rail or rope guides, provided: (1) the
sides of the bucket are steel and at least 4 feet high, and at least
1/16 inch thick; (2) you use emergency chains, slings, or double clevis
pins between the lower end of the hoisting rope and the bucket to
prevent the bucket from falling in the event of ring bolt or clevis pin
failure; (3) you provide a bonnet that covers the top to protect it from
falling rock or other objects; (4) the bonnet is the equivalent of two
steel plates 3/16 inch thick, sloping toward each side and arranged to
permit safe egress from the bucket; (5) the speed of the personnel
platform does not exceed 200 feet per minute; and (6) governor
controls set for 200 feet per minute are installed in the control system
and used during personnel hoisting.
2. Hoist Motors. Design the hoist motor so that the load powers up
and down through the gears. There must be no friction gearing or
clutch mechanism by which the motor or other power source can be
disconnected from the hoist drum. When the control is brought to the
"stop" position, or should the motor stop, the load must stop and
remain in the stopped position.
3. Hoist Controls. Design the hoist control to return to the "stop"
position when the operator removes his/her hand from the control
lever. Whenever the control lever is in the stop position, the brakes
must automatically apply and the power must cut off. All hoist
controls and the emergency power cutoff must be within reach from a
single operating position.
4. Guides. Equip shafts more than 75 feet (22.86 meters) deep with
guide rails or guide cables to prevent the cage or bucket from swaying.
23–16
October 2009
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction
When sinking shafts more than 75 feet (22.86 meters) deep, keep the
guide rails or cables as close as possible to the bottom of the shaft.
Maintain rail guides within one rail length of the bottom. Provide a
Safe means of access from the bottom landing to the bottom of the
shaft. When sinking shafts less than 75 feet (22.86 meters) deep,
guide cages, skips, and buckets that may swing, bump, or snag against
shaft sides or other structural protrusions by fenders, rails, ropes, or a
combination of those means. Guide cages, skips, and buckets in all
completed shafts by ropes or rails for the full length of their travel.
5. Broken-Rope Safety. Equip cages, skips, or buckets operating on
guides or guide cables in shafts more than 75 feet (22.86 meters) deep
with a broken-rope Safety device, or equivalent, that will stop and hold
a weight that is 150 percent of rated capacity in the event of a hoisting
cable failure.
6. Limit Stops. Equip hoists with approved-type limit switches that
will automatically stop the cage or bucket at the limits of travel.
7. Communications. Provide hoist operators with a closed-circuit
communications system to each landing station. Locate a speaker-
microphone so that the operator can communicate with individual
landing stations during the hoist.
8. Performance Inspections and Tests. Following installation and
before use, at 6-month intervals thereafter, and after modification or
repair of the critical components, inspect each hoist and load test it
under the direction of the PE or a qualified person certified by the PE
to conduct such inspections and tests. Maintain a comprehensive
report detailing the required inspections and test procedures and
results. The PE, or his or her designee, must sign and maintain the
report. Include a broken rope drop test to verify that safety clamps
function properly and that the guide ropes/rails, their supports, and the
bucket/cage are able to withstand the imposed load.
(Note: ANSI A10.5, "Safety Requirements for Material Hoists," under
"Standards for Material Handling, Storage, and Disposal," details one
method for conducting such tests.)
Further, performance test the hoist with a test load of 125 percent
through all limits of travel to ensure satisfactory operation of limit
Switches, speed indicators, braking systems, and controls.
9. Periodic Inspection and Tests. A competent person must visually
check all hoisting machinery equipment, anchorages, and hoisting rope
at the beginning of each shift and during hoist use, as necessary. A
competent person must check each safety device at least weekly during
October 2009 23–17
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
hoist use to ensure suitable operation and safe condition. Periodic
inspections and tests must conform to the PE's recommendations.
c. Overhead Protection. Do not hoist or lower material or tools while
personnel are working at the bottom of a shaft unless a barrier of adequate
strength is installed to protect the personnel from falling objects or
material. Do not lower any load, cage, skip, or bucket directly to the
bottom of a shaft when personnel are working there. All such equipment
must stop at least 15 feet above the bottom of the shaft and remain there
until the signal person at the bottom of the shaft gives the signal to lower.
23.12.4 Suspended or Movable Work Platforms. Design, inspect, and test
suspended or movable work platforms in accordance with applicable
provisions of this section and the section, "Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers,
and Conveyors." The term "platform" in this subsection is synonymous with
the terms skip or cage, in referenced subparagraphs, subsections, or standards.
23.12.5 Small-Diameter Shafts. Provide small-diameter shafts, such as
manholes, wells, or test pits that employees must enter, with a steel casing,
concrete pipe, timber cribbing, or other support adequate to retain surrounding
earth.
23.12.6 Inspection. Following a blast, check the walls, ladders, supports,
blocking, and wedges to determine if they have loosened. If they are loose or
unsafe, make repairs before continuing work in the shaft.
23.13 Requirements for Tunneling in Soil
23.13.1 Support. When excavating by conventional methods, do not extend
the excavation more than 2 feet in advance of the tunnel supports. When
using continuous mining machines, keep the support within 4 feet of the face
or shield. Do not permit employees under unsupported or unshielded sections
of the tunnel.
23.13.2 Voids. Fill, block, or brace voids behind ring beams, liner plates, or
other supports to prevent caving.
23.13.3 Design of Support. A PE must design support systems for tunnels
excavated in soil.
23.14 Requirements for Compressed-Air Work
The employer must comply with the requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926.803,
"Compressed Air," when operations involve work in a compressed-air
environment.
23-18 October 2009
Section 24
Blasting Operations
This section discusses blasting operations, with specific focus on the following
aſ CalS.
• General Requirements
• Radio and Electromagnetic Radiation
• Transporting Explosives
• Transporting Explosives Underground
• Storing Explosives
• Handling Explosives
• Loading Explosives and Blasting Agents
• Wiring operations
• Firing explosives
• Inspection following a blast
• Misfires
• Using safety fuses
• Using detonator cord
• Underwater blasting
24.1 General Requirements for Blasting Operations
In addition to the requirements of this section, the transportation, handling,
storage, and use of explosives are subject to provisions of ANSI A10.7 - Safety
Requirements for Transportation, Storage, Handling, and Use of Commercial
Explosives and Blasting Agents; 29 CFR 1910.109 - Explosives and Blasting
Agents; 29 CFR 1926, Subpart U - Blasting and the Use of Explosives (1926.900
to 1926.914); and 27 CFR Part 55 - Commerce in Explosives.
24.1.1 Competent Supervision. A blasting supervisor must be designated to
direct and supervise all blasting operations. This includes the transportation,
handling, storage, and use of explosives and blasting agents. The Supervisor must
provide written records of past experience to the employer as evidence of
competency.
24.1.2 Qualifications.
a. Personnel. Employees who transport, store, handle, or use explosives
or blasting agents must be at least 21 years of age. They must be able to
give and understand written and Verbal instructions.
October 2009 24-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. Blasters. Blasters must be qualified through training, knowledge, and
experience in transporting, storing, handling, and using explosives, and
have a working knowledge of State and local laws and regulations which
pertain to explosives. Blasters must hold a Federal, State, or local license
or certificate, have proof of formal training attended within the last
5 years, or three recommendations from past employers or explosives
manufacturers testifying to the blaster’s knowledge and ability to perform
in a safe manner the type of blasting that will be required.
24.1.3 Blasting Plan. Submit a comprehensive blasting plan before the start of
blasting operations and have it approved. The blasting plan may be submitted as
part of the overall site safety plan, as required by the "Contractor Requirements"
section of these standards (for contract operations) or as a supplementary plan to a
Job Hazard Analysis. Explosives must not be transported onto the jobsite before
the plan has been approved. The plan must identify proposed methods and
procedures for conforming with referenced standards and regulations, and it must
include the following information:
• Method and equipment for transporting explosives and detonators
• Type and location of storage facilities
• Type and quantity of explosives and detonators
• Primer assembly procedure and location
• Employee training programs
• Provisions for protecting people, structures, and private and public
property
• Provisions for developing and distributing a daily blasting plan
covering hole diameter, spacing, loading, and delay patterns
• Provisions for disposal of explosives, blasting agents, and associated
materials
24.1.4 Security and Inventory. Secure and protect explosives from theft.
Maintain an accurate running inventory of all explosives stored at the jobsite.
Such records must be available. Promptly report any loss or theft to the
appropriate authorities.
24.1.5. Notifications. Notify the owners and operators of the facility and take all
necessary precautions for the safe control of the blasting operations before
beginning blasting operations in the immediate vicinity of buildings, public roads,
Overhead powerlines, utility services, or similar facilities. At least 24 hours
before blasting in the vicinity of gas, electric, water, communications, or other
utilities is to begin, the blasting supervisor must notify appropriate utility
representatives.
24-2 October 2009
Section 24—Blasting Operations
24.1.6 Smoking Restrictions. Prohibit smoking, firearms, matches, open flame
lamps, fire, heat-producing devices, and sparks in or near explosive storage sites
or in areas where explosives are handled, transported, or used.
24.1.7 Thunderstorms. Discontinue the handling or use of explosives during
the approach and progress of a thunderstorm. All employees must leave the
danger areas and seek a place of safety when these conditions are present. Install
an approved lightning warning device capable of detecting atmospheric
conditions that could produce lightning on the jobsite. Warning devices must be
acceptable to the COR or office head before installation.
24.1.8 Damage Control. Take precautions to minimize ground vibration,
airblast, and flyrock. Include a damage control section in the site blasting plan
that addresses these issues. Use blasting mats where flyrock damage is possible.
Use modern blasting seismographs and methods to measure ground vibrations and
air blast levels at designated structures or locations. Unless otherwise specified,
control the blasting so that ground vibrations and airblast levels do not exceed the
following:

Ground Vibration Limits'
Peak Particle Velocity (inches per second)
Type of Structure” At Low Frequency’ At High Frequency
(<40 Hertz) (>40 Hertz)
Modern homes, drywall 0.75 2.0
interiorS
Older homes, plaster on
WOOC lath Construction for 0.5 2.0
interior Walls
Reference: Siskind, D.E., M.S. Stagg, J.W. Kopp, and C.H. Dowding, “Structure Response and
Damage Produced by Ground Vibration from Surface Mine Blasting.” U.S. Department of the
Interior, Bureau of Mines, Report of Investigations R 8507, 1980.
"The graph in Appendix B of the above reference may be used in lieu of the limits listed in this
table.
*For precarious structures not listed in the table, use the limits for older homes; for all other
Structures not listed in the table, use the limits listed for modern homes.
*AI spectral peaks within 50 percent amplitude of the predominant frequency must be analyzed.

Airblast Limits
Instrumentation Air Blast (decibels)
0.1 hertz high-pass system 134
2 hertz high-pass system 133
5 or 6 hertz high-pass system 129
C-slow (for events not exceeding 2 seconds' duration) 105
Reference: Siskind, D.E., V.J. Stachura, M.S. Stagg, and J.W. Kopp, “Structure Response
and Damage Produced by Airblast from Surface Mining," U.S. Department of the Interior, Bureau of
Mines, Report of Investigations R. 8485, 1980.
October 2009 24-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
24.1.9 Warning Signs. Post warning signs at access points to blasting areas.
24.1.10 Destruction of Explosives. Deteriorated or damaged explosives,
blasting agents, blasting supplies are prohibited. Destroy and remove these and
all excess explosives from the site in accordance with the specific written
instructions of the manufacturer.
24.1.11 Empty Explosive Containers. Destroy empty boxes and combustible
packing materials which have contained explosives in accordance with the
manufacturer’s disposal procedures. If disposal is through burning, all personnel
must remain at least 100 feet from the burning site once the material has been
ignited and until no visible flames or smoke have been detected for 1 hour.
24.1.12 Fire. If a fire begins that involves explosives, or where the danger of the
fire contacting explosives is imminent, do not fight the fire. All personnel must
seek safe shelter; guard the fire area to prevent intruders.
24.2 Radio and Electromagnetic Radiation
Take adequate precautions to prevent accidental discharge of electric blasting
caps from current induced by radar, radio transmitters, powerlines, and similar
Sources of electromagnetic radiation.
24.2.1 Mobile Radio Transmitters. Mobile radio transmitters or cellular
telephones within 100 feet of electric blasting caps or delays not in their original
containers are prohibited unless de-energized and effectively locked.
Post warning signs at least 36 by 42 inches in size, stating BLASTING ZONE–
TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIOS AND CELLULAR TELEPHONES, on all public
roads within 1,000 feet of blasting operations, using electronic detonators.
24.2.2 Non-electric Firing Systems. If it is not possible to observe the safe
clearance distances from radio frequency (RF) transmitter stations, as set forth in
Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME) publication 20, "Safety Guide for the
Prevention of Radio Frequency Radiation Hazards in the Use Of Electric Blasting
Caps," use nonelectric firing systems to blast. Electrical detonators must not be
stored or used within the IME-specified distances of a transmitter station.
24.3 Requirements for Transporting Explosives
Transporting explosives by air, water, or on public highways must comply with
the provisions of US Department of Transportation Regulations contained in
46 CFR 146-149 - Water Carriers; 49 CFR 171-177 Subchapter C - Hazardous
Materials Transportation; and 49 CFR 390-397, "Motor Carriers."
24.3.1 Vehicles. Vehicles used to transport explosives must conform to the
following requirements:
24-4 October 2009
Section 24—Blasting Operations
a. They must be in good repair, with all electrical wiring completely
protected and securely fastened to prevent short circuits.
b. They must have tight floors. Cover any exposed spark-producing metal
with wood or other nonsparking material to prevent contact with
containers of explosives.
c. Do not load them beyond rated capacity, and secure the explosives to
prevent shifting or dislodgment.
d. Transport explosive materials in open-bodied motor vehicles only if
they have been loaded into a portable magazine that is securely fastened to
the truck bed. Never transport explosive materials in open-bodied motor
vehicles that depend on a fire-resistant tarpaulin cover for protection.
e. Mark vehicles transporting explosives with reflectorized signs on both
sides and the front and rear with "EXPLOSIVES" in red letters. Make
letters at least 4 inches high on a white background or placarded in
accordance with 49 CFR Part 172, Subpart F - "Placarding."
f. Equip them with two or more fire extinguishers with a rating of at least
2-A:40–B:C.
g. Inspect them daily before use to ensure that the vehicle is in proper
condition for safe transportation. The inspection must determine that fire
extinguishers are charged and ready; electric wiring is protected and
fastened to prevent short circuiting; chassis, motor, pan, and underbody
are reasonably clean and free of oil and grease; fuel tanks and lines are
secure and have no leaks; tires are in serviceable condition with proper
inflation; and lights, brakes, horns, wipers, etc., are functioning properly.
24.3.2 Vehicle Operators. Motor vehicle operators transporting explosives must
be at least 21 years old and be properly licensed drivers. Drivers must be
physically fit, careful, capable, and reliable. Drivers must not be unlawful users
of, or addicted to, alcohol, narcotics, or dangerous drugs. Drivers must be
familiar with applicable local, State, and Federal laws and regulations governing
the transportation of explosive materials. Transportation on Federal highways or
other public roads requires a commercial driver's license.
24.3.3 Caps and Detonators. Do not transport blasting caps and detonators with
other explosives unless the blasting caps or detonators are in a closed metal
storage container that has at least a 2-inch wood lining. Such containers must be
at least 2 feet away from other explosives.
24.3.4 Flammable Materials. Do not transport spark-producing tools, carbides,
oil, matches, firearms, acids, storage batteries, oxidizing or corrosive compounds,
or flammable materials with explosives.
October 2009 24-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
24.3.5 Parking. Attend vehicles containing explosives at all times. Do not park
loaded vehicles, even if attended, near any bridge, tunnel, or other structure that
may be occupied or locations where people may congregate or assemble.
24.3.6 Fueling. Do not refuel vehicles while they are carrying explosives.
24.3.7 Smoking Restrictions. Employees who transport, handle, or use
explosives must not smoke or carry on their persons or in the vehicle matches,
lighters, firearms, ammunition, or flame-producing devices of any description.
24.3.8 Riders. Permit only the authorized driver and helper to ride on trucks
transporting explosives or detonators.
24.4 Requirements for Transporting Explosives Underground
In addition to the requirements set forth in the previous subsection,
"Requirements for Transporting Explosives," the provisions of this subsection
apply to underground transportation of explosives.
24.4.1 Hoists. Notify the hoist operator before transporting explosives or
blasting agents in a shaft conveyance. Do not permit any person to ride a hoist or
shaft conveyance transporting explosives or blasting agents. Do not transport
detonators while transporting explosives.
24.4.2 Powder Cars and Trucks. Convey explosives and blasting agents only
in specifically built or equipped insulated powder cars or truck-mounted
containers approved by the State entity having jurisdiction. Mark powder cars
with reflectorized signs on both ends and sides with "EXPLOSIVES" in letters at
least 4 inches high against a sharply contrasting background at all times that there
are explosives in the car. Cover or remove the signs when no explosives are
present. Do not transport explosives or blasting agents on a locomotive; at least
two car lengths must separate the locomotive from the powder car. Pull (do not
push) powder cars.
24.4.3 Common Transport of Detonators and Explosive Materials.
Physically separate compartments for transporting both detonators and explosive
materials in the same conveyance or car by at least 24 inches or by a solid
partition at least 6 inches thick. Do not transport detonators and other explosive
materials together in any shaft-conveyance.
24.4.4 Transportation of Personnel and Explosives. No personnel, other than
the transport operator, helper, and the individuals handling the explosives may
ride transports carrying explosives.
24.4.5 Truck Transportation. Trucks transporting explosives underground
must meet other applicable provisions of these standards and have their electrical
systems checked weekly to detect possible electrical hazards. A written record of
24-6 - October 2009
Section 24—Blasting Operations
such inspections must be maintained. Auxiliary lights on truck beds powered by
the truck's electrical system are prohibited. Do not store explosives in trucks.
24.4.6 Transporting Explosives to the Face or the Loading Area. Take only
the quantity of explosives or blasting agents estimated necessary for the blast to
the face or loading area. Take explosives or blasting agents to the loading area
only after the drilling has been completed and the holes are ready to be loaded.
Remove surplus explosives and blasting agents from the area before wiring up the
blast.
24.4.7 Makeups. Make up primers and delays at the face or loading area, unless
a primer-makeup plan is submitted and approved.
24.5 Explosives Storage
24.5.1 Requirement. Store explosives and related materials in approved
magazines and in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Bureau of
Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms as set forth in 27 CFR 55, "Commerce in
Explosives." Magazines must be bulletproof, rodent-resistant, weather-resistant,
ventilated, and constructed to the standards of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco,
and Firearms, or the Institute of Makers of Explosives.
24.5.2 Magazine Location. Locate explosives magazines in accordance with the
State and local laws. The COR or office head must approve the proposed sites
before location or construction. Consider contractor and Government offices,
shops, etc., to be inhabited buildings when determining magazine locations,
quantities, and safe distances.
24.5.3 Notifications. Notify local authorities, such as law enforcement agencies
and fire departments, of the type, planned quantity, and storage location on the
site before bringing explosives onto a site for storage.
24.5.4 Detonators. Do not store blasting caps, electric blasting caps, detonating
primers, and primed cartridges in the same magazine as other explosives or
blasting agents. Locate detonator magazines at least 100 feet from magazines
containing other explosives or blasting agents, if unbarricaded, and at least 50 feet
away, if barricaded.
24.5.5 Combustible Materials. Do not permit smoking or open flame within
100 feet of storage magazines. Remove vegetation and combustible material
within 25 feet of all magazines.
24.5.6 Security. Securely lock magazines at all times except to inspect or move
explosives. Maintain an inventory of all storage and withdrawal of explosives.
Inspect magazines storing explosives at least every 7 days to ensure that there has
been no unauthorized entry or removal of explosives.
October 2009 24-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
24.5.7. Posting. Post areas around magazines with "EXPLOSIVES" signs. Place
the signs so that a bullet passing through the sign will not strike a magazine.
24.5.8 Storage. Store explosives in their original containers. Store containers of
explosives with the top side up as designated on the container. Use the oldest
stock of explosives first.
24.5.9 Maintenance. Promptly remove debris and combustible material from
magazines. When magazine floors become stained with explosives, clean them in
accordance with the explosive manufacturer’s instructions.
24.5.10 Transfer In and Out. Provide for the safe transfer of explosives in and
out of magazines, including providing ramps or walkways, as necessary.
24.5.11 Storage Underground. Do not permanently store explosives
underground. Temporary storage must comply with the following requirements:
a. Powder Cars. Restrict temporary storage to limited supplies stored in
specially designed powder cars located at least 1,000 feet from the face or
blasting area. Do not permit transformers, storage of flammable materials,
welding, open flame, smoking, and other ignition sources within 100 feet
of the powder car.
b. Posting and Lighting. Designate the storage area or siding by a red
light visible in all directions, and post both ends of the powder car with a
luminous sign, stating "EXPLOSIVES - NO SMOKING, FLAME, OR
WELDING WITHIN 100 FEET."
c. Protection. Locate or barricade the powder car to protect it from
damage. Design siding or car-passes, when used for temporary storage, to
protect the powder car from accidental entry by other cars and to prevent
accidental entry of the powder car to the main line. The protective devices
installed are subject to approval of both the employer and the State entity
having jurisdiction.
24.6 Requirements for Handling Explosives
24.6.1 Handling Explosives. Handle explosives carefully. Do not drop, throw,
or slide them. Carry detonators, primers, and other explosives in separate
containers when transporting them manually. When they are not in their original
containers, place them in a suitable nonmetallic container for manual
transportation.
24.6.2 Removal from Containers. Remove explosives from their original
containers only as needed for immediate use. Use only nonsparking tools or
devices to open such containers. Dispose of empty containers and packing in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, or promptly burn them in
an approved location.
24-8 October 2009
Section 24—Blasting Operations
24.7 Loading Explosives and Blasting Agents
24.7.1 Planning. Plan and schedule excavation so that drilling and loading
operations will not conflict. Do not permit loading within 50 feet of drilling
operations. Do not permit any activity, other than that which is required for
loading holes, within 50 feet of loaded holes or holes that have the explosives in
place, ready to load. A qualified blaster must supervise loading operations.
24.7.2 Drilling. Do not drill in an area already blasted until examining
remaining "bootlegs" (holes that do not detonate full depth) for unexploded
charges, as well as the total area, to make sure no unexploded charges remain. Do
not insert drills, picks, or bars into bootlegs, even if examination fails to disclose
explosives.
24.7.3 Loading Areas. Make boreholes ready for loading, and remove
equipment and tools not used for loading from the area before delivering the
explosives to the site. Isolate the loading areas with appropriate signs or
temporary barricades to prohibit access by unauthorized people. While the bare
holes are being loaded with explosives, exclude all personnel, other than those
involved in the loading of boreholes, from the blast site.
24.7.4 Boreholes. Make boreholes large enough to permit loading of cartridges
and explosives without forcing. Prime, load, tamp, and fire as promptly as
possible with a minimum of exposure to personnel.
24.7.5 Tamping. Tamp only with wooden or plastic tamping poles without
exposed metal parts. Nonsparking metal connectors on jointed poles are
permissible. Seat cartridges by even, steady pressure, and do not tamp primers.
24.7.6 Priming. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations in priming
cartridges. Make primers up only at the loading area and in quantities limited to
the number required for a single round of blasting.
24.7.7 Stemming. Stem all blastholes in open work with noncombustible
material to the collar or to a point that will confine the charge.
24.7.8 Extraneous Electricity. Prohibit electric conductors, electric equipment,
and all sources of ignition in or adjacent to the loading area. Remove lights
50 feet from the face before starting to load in tunnels and shafts. If stray currents
are suspected, thoroughly check out the area with suitable instruments. If stray
currents cannot be eliminated, use nonelectrical detonators, delays, and caps.
24.7.9 Shunts. Do not remove the manufacturer's shunt from the cap leg wires
until you complete loading and connect the cap into the blasting circuit.
24.7.10 Sprung Holes. Do not chamber (spring) boreholes.
October 2009 24-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
24.7.11 Blasting Mats. Where blasting may expose personnel or property to
injury or damage from flying material, cover the charges with blasting mats.
Carefully protect the blasting circuits, and do not permit the circuits to contact
steel mats.
24.7.12 Loading and Shooting. Do not leave loaded holes unattended or
unprotected. If possible, fire all holes loaded on a shift during that same shift. If
it is necessary to delay firing because of an emergency, isolate the area and post
watchpersons to prevent entry to the area. Conduct aboveground blasting
operations between sunup and sundown.
24.7.13 Pneumatic Loading Systems. Conduct the hazards from static
electricity and stray currents associated with pneumatically loading boreholes
with blasting agents, take the following precautions:
a. Use only approved pneumatic loaders.
b. Effectively ground and bond the entire system, including placers,
valves, and loading hose. Ground at the face in tunnels and shafts. Do not
use piping and rails to ground the system.
c. Following installation of the ground, check the ground with an
approved meter to ensure that the resistance is within safe limits.
d. Use loading hoses of an approved, nonsparking, semiconductive
material designed to maintain static electricity within safe limits.
24.7.14 Underground Use of Blasting Agents. Before using blasting agents
underground, a powder technician representing the explosive manufacturer or
Supplier must inspect the proposed method of loading and the loading equipment.
Submit written evidence of such inspection and approval of the systems.
24.8 Wiring Operations
24.8.1 Firing Devices. Use an electric blasting machine to fire blasts using
electronic detonators. Do not fire blasts by connection to any other electrical
system. Fire blasts using nonelectric detonators with a blasting machine or
starting device prescribed by the detonator manufacturer. Do not use cap and fuse
firing underground or in the excavation of shafts. Do not use electric blasting
caps within 500 feet of energized high-voltage lines or facilities.
24.8.2. Wiring Procedure. Do not remove the manufacturer's shunt from the cap
leg wires until the cap has been connected to the leadlines or to another cap in
preparation for the assembly of two or more caps into a single series. When firing
two or more series of caps as a series-parallel system, make sure that the caps in
each series are the same in number (quantity, not delay periods), and test each
series separately with an approved blasting galvanometer to: (1) ensure that the
24-10 October 2009
Section 24—Blasting Operations
Series is complete, and (2) ensure that each series has the same resistance and that
the resistance is close to the calculated resistance for the series. If the first
reading indicates an incomplete circuit, locate the fault and correct it. If the
Second reading indicates a higher or lower resistance than calculated, correct the
situation before final hookup and firing.
24.8.3 Electric Caps and Delays. All caps and delays in a shot must be made by
the same manufacturer, and the number in a circuit must not exceed the capacity
of the blasting machine or power source.
24.8.4 Galvanometer Testing. Make the following tests with an approved
blasting galvanometer during all wiring operations:
(1) Test the circuit, including all caps, before connecting it to the firing
line.
(2) Check the firing line before connecting it to the blasting machine or
power source.
24.8.5 Firing Lines. Firing lines must be of sufficient current-carrying capacity
but not smaller than No. 14 gauge solid copper wire or equivalent. Do not
connect the firing line to the blasting machine or power source until you have
completed and tested the wiring and cleared the blast area. Do not ground a
power circuit used for firing electric blasting caps.
24.8.6 Connecting and Lead Wires. Connecting and lead wires must be
insulated single solid wires of sufficient current-carrying capacity.
24.8.7 Power Circuit. When using a power circuit for firing, lock the firing
switch in the "OFF" (open) position at all times, except when firing. Design the
power circuit so that the firing lines to the cap circuit are automatically short-
circuited when the switch is in the "OFF" position. Entrust the keys to the firing
switch only to the blaster. In underground operations, the firing circuit must have
a "lightning" gap of at least 5 feet, located between the firing switch and the
source of power. Bridge the gap with a flexible jumper cord just before firing the
blast.
24.9 Firing
24.9.1 Preparation. Before connecting the firing line to the power source, notify
all personnel in the danger area of the blast and remove them to a safe area. Make
Satisfactory arrangements for evacuating the danger area and ensuring that no one
enters the area before the blast.
24.9.2 Responsibility. The blaster must be in charge of the blasting machine or
firing switch, and must connect the firing line to the firing device. The blaster
must make all connections from the cap circuit back to the firing device, and the
firing line must remain shorted until connected to the firing device immediately
before firing.
October 2009 24–11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
24.9.3 Blasting Signal. Sound the following blasting signal on a clearly audible
whistle, horn, or siren before each surface or underground blast:
• Blasting warning: A 1-minute series of long blasts 5 minutes before
the blast signal
• Blast signal: A series of short blasts 1-minute before the shot
• All clear: A prolonged blast following inspection of the blast area
24.9.4 Posting Blasting Signals. Post blasting signals at all access points, and
before each shot, post competent flagpersons at all access points to the danger
aſ Ca.
24.9.5 Disconnecting. Immediately following the blast, disconnect the firing
line from the firing power source or blasting machine and shunt it. Lock firing
switches open.
24.10 Inspections Following a Blast
24.10.1 All Blasts. Before the all-clear signal, the blaster must thoroughly
inspect to determine if all charges have fired. The blaster must carefully check
wires and search for unexploded charges.
24.10.2 Underground. In addition to the previously listed requirements, check
and test the heading for adequate ventilation and safe concentrations of dusts,
toxic vapors, and gases. Also, before permitting personnel in the heading, scale
the face and make it safe.
24.10.3 All-Clear Signal. Sound the all-clear signal only after satisfactorily
completing the inspection.
24.11 Requirements Regarding Misfires
If you suspect or find a misfire, keep all personnel, except the blaster and
employees necessary to handle the misfire, out of the danger area. Prohibit all
work in the danger area except that necessary to remove the misfire hazard. If a
misfire occurs while using cap and fuse, all personnel must remain at a safe
distance from the charge for at least 1 hour. If other electric or nonelectric
initiating methods are used, the blasting supervisor may reduce the waiting period
to 30 minutes.
24.11.1 Refiring. Refiring is the desired method of clearing misfires. The
following actions are mandatory:
a. For electrically fired blasts in which broken wires or faulty connections
caused the misfire, make repairs, reconnect the firing line, and attempt to
fire the charge.
b. For misfires originally initiated by detonating cord or nonelectrical
detonators, the blaster must inspect lines coming out of the holes, and if
24-12 October 2009
Section 24—Blasting Operations
they appear to be intact, the blaster can reconnect them and attempt to
detonate the misfired holes.
c. In blastholes where leg wires are discontinuous or leads or detonating
cord cut off, there may still be explosives in the hole that can be reprimed
and fired. Remove any stemming in the hole. Float stemming out with
water. Place a new primer in the hole and attempt to fire the charge.
24.11.2 Removal of Explosives. This procedure must be the last resort. Perform
it only when refiring has failed or when refiring would present a hazard. Remove
explosives by washing them out with water, or, if the misfire is underwater, blow
them out with air.
24.11.3 Work Restrictions. Do not permit drilling, digging, or picking until:
(1) you have detonated all missed holes or removed the explosive, and (2) the
blaster has approved the resumption of work.
24.12 Requirements for Using Safety Fuses
Use Safety fuses only where sources of extraneous electricity make the use of
electric caps dangerous. Do not use damaged fuse or fuse with sharp kinks.
24.12.1 Capping. Before capping a safety fuse, cut a short length from the end
to ensure a fresh-cut end in each blasting cap.
24.12.3 Crimper. Use cap crimpers of approved design for attaching blasting
caps to safety fuse.
24.12.4 Length of Fuse. The minimum length of safety fuse must be as required
by State law, but it must not be less than 30 inches. Provide the blaster sufficient
time to permit the blaster to reach a place of safety.
24.12.5 Multiple Cap and Fuse Use. At least two blasters must be present when
multiple cap fuse blasting is done by hand lighting methods. Each blaster must
light no more than 12 fuses when using hand-lighting devices.
24.12.6 Mudcapping. Do not use cap and fuse to fire mudcap charges unless
you separate the charges sufficiently to prevent one charge from dislodging other
shots in the blast.
24.13 Use of Detonating Cord
24.13.1 Care in Use. Use only detonating cord consistent with the type and
physical condition of the borehole, stemming, and the type of explosive.
Consider and handle detonating cord in the same manner as other explosives.
October 2009 24–13
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
24.13.2 Installation. Cut the line of detonating cord extending out of a borehole
or from a charge from the supply spool before loading the remainder of the hole
or placing additional charges. All runs must be free of loops, sharp kinks, or
angles that take the cord back toward the oncoming line of detonation.
24.13.3 Connections. Detonating cord connections must be competent and
positive and in accordance with approved and recommended methods. Make
knot-type or other cord-to-cord connections only with detonating cord in which
the explosive core is dry. Inspect connections before firing.
24.13.4 Use of Delays. When using detonating cord millisecond-delay
connectors or short-interval-delay electric blasting caps with detonating cord,
follow the manufacturer's recommendations.
24.13.5 Connecting Blasting Caps. When connecting blasting caps to
detonating cord, tape or otherwise attach the cap securely along the side or the
end of the cord, with the end of the cap containing the explosive pointed in the
direction in which the detonation is to proceed.
24.13.6 Detonators. Do not bring detonators for firing the trunkline to the
loading area, and do not attach the detonating cord until everything else is in
readiness for the blast.
24.14 Underwater Blasting
24.14.1 Supervision. A competent blaster must conduct all blasting operations.
Do not fire any blast without that person’s approval.
24.14.2 Loading Tubes. Do not use loading tubes and casings of dissimilar
metals for electric or other stray-current-affected detonators or explosives. When
tubes are necessary, load these electrically affected devices through nonsparking
loading tubes.
24.14.3 Detonators. For underwater blasting operations, use only water-resistant
blasting caps and detonating cord or other detonators and/or firing systems and
methods approved by the manufacturer.
24.14.4 Marking Charges. When placing more than one charge underwater,
attach a float device to an element of each charge so that it will be released by the
firing. Handle misfires using precautions and procedures in this section.
24.14.5 Blast Warning. In addition to the standard audible blast warning,
display blasting flags.
24.14.6 Boats in Area. Do not fire blasts while any vessel underway is within
1,500 feet of the blasting area. Notify those onboard vessels moored or anchored
within 1,500 feet before the blast is fired.
24–14 October 2009
Section 24—Blasting Operations
24.14.7 Swimming and Diving. Do not fire blasts when swimmers or divers are
in the vicinity and exposed to injury from the blast.
October 2009 24-15
Section 25
Concrete, Masonry Construction, and Formwork
This section sets forth the requirements for concrete, masonry construction, and
formwork. It specifically addresses plant and equipment, concrete conveyance
Systems, reinforcing steel, surface preparation, formwork and falsework, vertical
shoring, tubular welded frame shoring, tube and coupler shoring, single-post
shores, Vertical slip forms, releasing and moving forms, precast concrete, lift-slab,
and masonry construction.
25.1 Plant and Equipment
25.1.1 General. Design, operate, and maintain all equipment, facilities, and
formwork for concrete and masonry construction according to the
requirements of this section, other applicable parts of these standards, the
Subsection, "Other Mechanized Construction Equipment," and the current
edition of ANSI A10.9, "Construction and Demolition Operations—Concrete
and Masonry Work."
25.1.2 Batching and Screening Plants. Design and construct concrete
batching and Screening plants, aggregate production plants, hoppers, bins,
silos, and related equipment with an adequate safety factor to prevent
structural failure or collapse. Refer to the subsection, "Other Mechanized
Construction Equipment" for certification requirements. Design and equip
batching plants, aggregate plants, and conveyor systems with mechanical dust
control systems and water spray systems (or other acceptable means) to keep
airborne dust concentrations within acceptable exposure limits. Comply with
permit-required confined space and hazardous energy control procedures
When entering silos, storage bins, tunnels, shafts, or similar enclosed areas.
25.1.3 Bulk Storage Bins. Bulk storage bins, containers, and silos must have
conical or tapered bottoms and be able to start material flow mechanically or
pneumatically.
25.1.4 Loading Skips. Install protective guardrails on each side of loading
skips if loading skips are one cubic yard or larger. Equip loading skips with a
mechanical device to clear the skip of material.
25.1.5 Bull Floats. Where bull float handles may contact energized electrical
conductors, establish a hazardous energy control clearance and lock out the
power to those conductors.
25.1.6 Powered Concrete Trowels. Equip manually guided powered and
rotating concrete troweling machines with a control switch or positive
mechanical release device that automatically stops trowel rotation when the
operator releases the equipment handle.
October 2009 25-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
25.1.7 Concrete Buggies. Handles of concrete buggies must not extend
beyond the wheels on either side of the buggy.
25.1.8 Concrete Buckets. Concrete buckets equipped with hydraulic or
pneumatically operated gates must have positive safety latches or similar
safety devices to prevent premature or accidental dumping. Design the
buckets so aggregate does not accumulate on the bucket’s top and sides. Do
not ride concrete buckets or permit personnel under buckets that are being
raised or lowered into position by cranes or cableways. Do not route elevated
concrete buckets over employees. Concrete buckets with manually operated
gates must be self-closing. Maintain all buckets in structurally sound
condition. A professional engineer (PE) must approve any alterations that
affect structural competency.
25.1.9 Transmix Trucks. Transmix trucks and concrete pumping trucks,
including operating procedures, must conform with requirements in this
subsection and the subsection "On-Highway Equipment."
25.1.10 Personal Protective Equipment. Employees placing or finishing
concrete must wear applicable protective equipment, but never less than long-
sleeved shirts, long pants, rubber safety boots, gloves, hardhat, and eye glasses
with side shields. Make eyewash facilities available at each placement or
finishing operation.
25.1.11 Lockout/Tagout. Lock out and tag equipment, such as compressors,
mixers, screens, and concrete pumps, before performing maintenance or repair
work.
25.2 Concrete Conveyance Systems
25.2.1 General. "Concrete Conveyance Systems" are defined as mechanical
devices used to move concrete from the receiving hopper of the system to the
point of use (i.e., pumps, tremies, conveyor belts, flexible hoses, pipelines,
and the structures or mobile equipment on which the system is installed).
They do not include concrete buckets hoisted by cranes, cableways, or
specialized hoisting systems, or transmix trucks used to convey concrete from
the batch plant to the placement site. These types of mechanical devices are
covered elsewhere in these standards.
25.2.2 Requirements. The manufacturer or a PE must design and certify all
concrete conveyance systems as safe for intended use. The contractor or
owner/operator must operate, maintain, inspect, and test the systems in
accordance with the more stringent requirements set forth in the
manufacturer’s instructions, PE's specifications or these standards.
25–2 October 2009
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry
Construction, and FormWork
25.2.3 Concrete Pumping Systems
a. General. Concrete pumping systems consist of a concrete pump,
pipeline (slickline) including short or long beds, couplings, intermediate
and end hoses, and all supporting structures and equipment. Pipe
accessories may include shutoff valves, direction change valves,
articulating pipe connections, telescoping pipes, cleaning heads, trap
baskets, and taper (transition) pieces. Concrete pumping systems may be
stationary or mobile, or a combination of both types.
Design, install, test, and operate all systems and supporting equipment
according to the more stringent requirements contained or referenced in
these standards or in the manufacturer’s or PE's specifications.
b. Concrete Pumping Line (slickline, intermediate or end hoses, bends,
couplings, transitions, etc.).
1. General. The manufacturer must certify that all materials, pipes,
and accessories are safe to use in concrete pumping systems and are
within the calculated design pressures. Remove piping and accessories
from service whenever rupture safety factors (bursting pressure
divided by maximum obtainable pump pressure) are less than two
(and, preferably, four). All hoses must be approved for concrete
pumping operations and maximum anticipated operating pressures.
Affix maximum approved operating pressures to the hose. Install
hoses according to manufacturer’s approved methods and procedures.
Provide safety lashings that can support a fully loaded hose at all hose
connections. The manufacturer must approve, in writing, any field
repairs to hoses, pipes, or couplings.
2. Couplings. Couplings may be bolt, Snap, toggle, or cup-tension
type. Secure Snap or toggle couplings against accidental opening
using safety pins or equivalent devices (see figure 25-1). Clearly mark
couplings with shoulder diameter and pressure rating. Couplings must
have a pressure rating two times greater than the pump’s maximum
manufacturer’s rating. Adjustable coupling eyebolts must have stops
on adjustment threads to prevent overadjusting.
3. Assembly
(a) A competent person, trained and experienced in the type of
systems being installed, must directly supervise their assembly.
Do not assemble or use a concrete pumping system on the
construction site unless the system supervisor has a manufacturer-
approved piping wall thickness monitoring and replacement
October 2009 25–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
procedure (ultrasonic, weepholes, etc.). Test all piping system
components in accordance with the procedure before onsite use,
unless written evidence proves that a satisfactory testing procedure
is in place and functioning.
Bolt-type coupling Snap-type coupling
Note: Adjoining pipe terminations and diameters
shall be compatible with each other and
the coup ling-
Figure 25-1.-Pipe couplings.
(b) Adjoining pipe terminations must be compatible with each
other and the coupling. Mating pipe terminations must be the same
diameter as marked on the coupling. It is not acceptable to
construct the flange shoulder by welding, screwing, or otherwise

25-4 October 2009
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry
Construction, and FormWork
attaching an external ring to the pipe or grooved-type flanges the
same diameter as the pipe.
(c) Securely brace and anchor all piping to minimize movement
and to ensure that line parts will be restrained if failure occurs. A
PE or the manufacturer must approve any piping attached to or
Supported from structural members or formwork, as well as piping
installed on equipment that may impose loadings beyond design
criteria.
c. Placing Booms
1. General. The manufacturer or a PE must design and certify
placing booms and all supporting structures or equipment. Delivery
piping, intermediate or end hoses, couplings, and accessories
supported by or used with placing booms must conform with this
section. Anchor each section of rigid pipeline or hose to the boom, so
no section can fall from the boom in the event of coupling or adapter
failure. Metal pipe swivels are the preferred method for
accommodating boom folding actions.
Equip all hydraulic cylinders with hydraulic pressure relief valves that
automatically prevent boom or cylinder damage. Use placing booms
only for hoisting system piping, accessories, and the concrete being
conveyed.
2. Mountings. Design and operate trailers and trucks with mounted
placing booms (see figure 25-2) according to the requirements in the
section, "Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment" and
Department of Transportation regulations. Inspect and brake test them
in accordance with the references above. The manufacturer or a PE
must design stationary boom mountings. Visibly display the weight of
booms, attachments, and accessories on the boom. Clearly display on
the boom or in the operating instructions all outriggers, jacks, or other
stabilizing features required by the manufacturer or PE. Visibly mark
outriggers with maximum load imposed on supporting surface. Locate
outrigger controls so the operator can continuously observe the
outrigger whenever it is being extended or retracted.
3. Controls and Gauges
(a) Mount permanently installed controls so the boom or other
moving parts cannot strike the operator and so the operator has a
clear view of the receiving hopper. Adequately light control
panels and operator platforms during night operations. Access to
elevated control stations must be in accordance with these
Standards. Fall protection systems meeting requirements in the
October 2009 25-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
section, "Mobile and Mechanized Stationary Equipment," must be
in place on the platform. Protect all operating platforms with
adequate guardrails.
hºm
Q)
C. c.
q9 O
uſ) q9 -
~5 Q9 -> U : Q9
£ q, 2 J & E
Q1) ... O > , 'O =
-C O -- *- º:
e- + d ? E = ? -
Q) º: ; 3 & # 3.
C. º “” 9 o. ºo
ºr- ‘E. .g. :- –o Q
S. bo'O Tº qu • * >
• º ºs O -3 ſº
.2 3-º ºr " := \{ z >
- # 3 g : g:#; †
& J 5 E 5 º' + c 2.
~ * ~ * u, º N & as
e- ºw ºw ºf 64 eV tº cºw ºw
, ſº
-><
C
fo
*
--
tA
^3 -
º
§ 3: ;
BS Q Q0 -
ſ: to .50 8–
2: -C - | (1)
== -:- * -] ºf
Q) 5 : - } S. >
- O 4-4 ſº *
q) E - * tº :- 9 - $–
E Tº ‘as ſº * > S.S 3 O
tº e- 9 * Q = 2= >
C E T. E. E F -
sº . C. U - G) -8 & Q1)
O 2 + 3: 9 º C
tº 2 q9 & J * * E O
-- (l) tº
dº bo - - - - 9 > C)
c 2 > -o-c = c → E J
6 : * > S > 5 § 2 5 || @
J 3 c5 ES > J 3 r < | ºf
$–
* - c, -, ºr ur, C N co on c | 9
r- r- - - - - - - - - 5
O
-C,
SD
* Cº.
-: º Q9 ID
*
to 5 : O
> * o – E
Q ~5 wn wº, ſº B
to ~ uſ) * q9 O
to -o s iſ $ 50 &
E * * C. Q P 55
Q1) : aſ Q) -- -C
: 2 E E v. - | (D
* - C C -> C
- :E := No a 3: 3
> > → º O ~ (U
9 G G 3 × 3 ºf $–
.9 ± 4, a 5 -o-; qu º |
- - -, -, 9 Q) *
> C a qu " : * > q9.9 -
º C - *- Q) q = - CN
fº * > →
E O - 2 = 3 ºf 9 2 - I
To c c E. C.: C. c as | 1Q
> F o o q & E. o o qu CN
I. O J O & T. O. T. Q & q)
g $–
* ~ * * u, o N co as o | P
- || C)
Ll-
(b) Mark all controls with symbols or wording that clearly shows
their function. When possible, ensure that the direction of control
movement corresponds with direction of motion. Arrange the
controls to prevent unintentional motion by the operator. All
controls must be deadman type.

25-6 October 2009
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry
Construction, and FormWork
(c) Ensure that combination stationary and remote control systems
for booms can only be operated from one location at a time. All
control panels (stationary or remote) must lock in the "off" position
when unattended.
(d) When the operator cannot see gauges that detect critical
temperatures and pressures, equip the pumping system with
automatic shutoff or control devices that limit temperatures or
pressures to within predetermined safe limits.
(e) Provide an emergency, all function, stop button on all control
panels. The button must be easily identifiable by size and color
and be accessible from the normal working surface.
(f) Radio remote controls must be Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) certified for two-way communication and have
Shielding, filtering, and discrete coding to prevent accidental
stimulation of the receiver.
4. Performance Inspection and Testing
(a) Stationary Mounting. After making major repairs or
alterations to critical structural members, or when directed by the
Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR) or office head,
performance inspect and load test stationary-type placing booms in
accordance with the manufacturer’s or PE's instructions.
Initially mounting a placement boom on a new stationary
Supporting structure, or at a new location, is considered a major
alteration. Performance and load testing must be completed before
use at the new location. When moving the boom between tested
Structures or locations, additional load tests are not necessary,
unless required by the COR or office head. However,
operationally test the placement boom before conveying concrete.
This test must include: (1) fully extending all boom sections to a
horizontal position with end hose attached; (2) rotating the boom
through 360 degrees or maximum degrees of operation; (3) raising
extended boom to vertical position and rotating through 360
degrees or maximum degrees possible; and (4) testing relief valve
Settings by folding boom sections against each other.
(b) Mobile Mountings. Performance inspect and load test
placement booms mounted on truck chassis or trailers after repair
or alterations to critical components and when directed by the COR
or office head. Further, when relocating them to any load tested
location, subject them to the more stringent operational test
described in the previous subparagraph or in the manufacturer or
PE's instructions. The load testing requirement for supplier-owned
October 2009
25–7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
and operated truck- and trailer-mounted units may be waived
when: (1) the equipment is used onsite sporadically or for short
intervals; (2) no critical defects are found after visual inspection
and conducting operational tests; (3) the owner/operator has
written confirmation that the boom and supporting equipment have
satisfactorily passed a performance inspection and load test
following the repairs or alterations.
(c) Performance Inspection and Load Test Procedures.
Conduct performance inspections of all critical components to
ensure they meet the minimum recommended levels specified in
the manufacturer’s or PE's operating or inspection manuals. If the
information is unavailable, the manufacturer or PE must develop it
for use in making the inspection. Conduct load tests with test
weights spaced along the boom as specified by the manufacturer or
PE. Load test data supplied by the manufacturer or PE is
unacceptable unless it adequately tests all critical structural
components and tipping moments to 100 percent of manufacturer’s
maximum rated conditions, and load-limiting devices are tested to
activating limits.
d. Concrete Pumps
1. General. A manufacturer or PE must design and certify concrete
pumps for intended use and pressures. Truck chassis, trailers, skids, or
railcars that have mounted pumps must conform with applicable
requirements of these standards, including the sections on "Mobile and
Mechanized Stationary Equipment" and "Tunnel and Shaft
Construction," and this section. Skid-mounted pumps must have
sufficient eyes for attaching slings or special hoisting devices. Affix a
permanent notice to the pump, stating overall weight of pump and
Supporting structures.
Support, anchor, and stabilize pumps in accordance with
manufacturer’s or PE's requirements. All docks, outriggers, or axle
locks specified by the manufacturer or PE must accompany the unit
and be placed in recommended operating position before starting
pumping operations.
2. Controls and Gauges. Mount permanently installed controls so
the operator can observe all critical pump components. Adequately
light control panels and operating platforms during night operation.
Mark controls with symbols or wording that clearly shows their
functions. Ensure that combination stationary and remote control
panels for pumps can only be operated from one location at a time.
25–8
October 2009
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry
Construction, and FormWork
All control panels must lock in the "off" position when unattended. If
the operator cannot directly view gauges for detecting critical
temperatures and pressures, equip them with an automatic shutoff or
control devices that limit temperature and pressure to within
predetermined safe limits. Provide an emergency shutoff button on all
control panels. The buttons must be easily identifiable by size and
color and be accessible from normal work surfaces. Radio remote
controls must be FCC certified for two-way communication and have
shielding, filtering, and discrete coding to prevent accidental
stimulation of the receiver.
3. Specific Requirements. Guard all dangerous moving parts.
Position the receiving hopper so concrete can readily flow from
transmix trucks or other concrete conveyance equipment discharge
chute into the hopper. Provide a hinged grill to prevent access to
dangerous moving parts. Securely mount the grill on the hopper with
an interlocking arrangement that prevents access until feed, agitator,
and valve mechanisms are rendered inoperative. Grill parallel bar
spacings must be no more than 3/4 inches apart and be able to support
a 250-pound load.
Construct inlet and outlet valves and chambers to restrict personnel
access until all energy sources are locked out and stored energy is
dissipated.
e. General Operating Requirements
1. Competent personnel must install and operate concrete pumping
Systems and equipment.
2. Personnel may work on piping systems or supporting structures
only after all inline pressures have been relieved by running the pump
in reverse or opening air or water relief valves.
3. Position pumps so trucks can avoid backing. If backing is
necessary because of site conditions that you cannot modify, a signal
person must stand to the side of the truck and direct it. Prevent
pedestrians and vehicle traffic from entering the pump area during
backing operations.
4. Trucks with installed pumps and placing booms that use truck
engine power to operate the equipment must conform fully with the
"Mobile and Mechanized Stationary Equipment" section and all other
applicable provisions of these standards.
5. End hoses must not exceed lengths specified by the manufacturer or
PE. Do not allow placing booms to drag end hoses laterally.
Manually relocate hose using pulling slings.
October 2009 25-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
6. When operating or transporting placing booms close to high-
Voltage power lines, comply with these and other applicable standards.
7. When relocating placing booms and end hose outside the operator’s
visible range, a signal person must give full attention to directing the
operation.
8. Do not externally brace placing booms or lay them on any
Supporting structure during pumping operations unless approved by
the manufacturer or PE.
9. All outriggers, jacks, or other stabilizing features required by the
manufacturer or PE must accompany the boom or pump and be in
recommended operating position before conveying concrete.
10. Do not relocate mobile-mounted placing booms or withdraw
outriggers unless the boom is in defined transport position.
25.3 Reinforcing Steel
25.3.1. Lateral Supports. Laterally support reinforcing steel for walls, piers,
columns, and similar structures to prevent overturning or collapse. The lateral
supports for reinforcing steel must be able to withstand the forces applied
during construction.
25.3.2 Rigging. Securely tie together bundles of reinforcing steel before
moving by crane or cableway to prevent slipping. Use two-part slings to
handle steel more than 20 feet long.
25.3.3 Impalement. Cover exposed rebar onto or into which employees
could fall to eliminate the hazard of impalement. Do not use plastic cap
coverings for impalement protection, but you may use them to cover the ends
of horizontal rebar. Cover vertically protruding rebar with wood troughs or
other substantial material.
25.3.4 Positioning Device Systems. Employees must use a positioning
device (see the section on "Fall Protection") when working in a stationary
location 6 feet or higher above any adjacent work surfaces or when placing
and tying reinforcing steel in walls, piers, columns, etc. Employees must use
a personal fall arrest system meeting the requirements of the section on "Fall
Protection" when moving on reinforcing steel higher than 24 feet above
adjacent surfaces.
25.3.5 Walkways. Reinforcing mats used as walkways must have planking
to ensure safe footing.
25-10 October 2009
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry
Construction, and FormWork
25.3.6 Prohibited Uses. Do not use reinforcing steel as guy attachments at
deadmen or other anchorage points for scaffolding hooks, for stirrups, or as a
load-bearing member of any lifting device.
25.3.7 Wire Mesh Mats. Secure wire mesh reinforcing mats at each end to
prevent recoiling. Secure unrolled wire mesh on each side of a proposed cut
before cutting the mesh.
25.3.8 Post-Tensioning Operations. Do not permit employees, except those
essential to post-tensioning operations, to be behind the jack during tensioning
operations. Erect signs and barricades to limit employee access to the post-
tensioning area during tensioning operations.
25.4 Surface Preparation
25.4.1 Green Cutting or Abrasive Blasting. Employees engaged in green
cutting must wear eye and face protection. Employees engaged in wet or dry
abrasive blasting using silica sand must wear an approved abrasive blasting
air-line respirator, heavy-duty footwear, and hardhat. (See the section,
"Personal Protective Equipment," for specific requirements.)
25.5 Formwork and Falsework
25.5.1 Design and Erection. In addition to the specific requirements set
forth in this section, the design and erection of formwork or falsework shall be
in accordance with specifications, pertinent provisions of the latest edition of
ACI 347, “Guide to Formwork for Concrete,” and ACI 318, “Building Code
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete,” and current edition of ANSI A10.9,
“Safety Requirements for Masonry and Concrete Work.”
25.5.2 Safety Factor. Design, erect, brace, and maintain formwork,
falsework, structural shoring, and bracing to safely support all vertical and
lateral loads that might be applied until the structure can support such loads.
Incorporate the minimum safety factors (as specified in ANSI A10.9,
"Construction and Demolition Operations - Concrete and Masonry Work") in
the design and erection of all framework, shoring, falsework, and formwork
accessories.
25.5.3 Construction Loads. Do not impose any construction loads on the
partially completed structures unless such loading has been considered in the
design and is shown on the formwork design drawings or specifications.
25.5.4 Drawings and Plans
a. A PE must approve and sign detailed design calculations and working
drawings for all formwork or vertical shoring installations when any of the
following conditions exist:
October 2009 25–11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
• The height, as measured from the top of the sills to the soffit of the
superstructure, exceeds 14 feet
• Individual horizon span lengths exceed 16 feet
• Provisions are made for vehicular or railroad traffic through the
falsework or vertical shoring.
b. For all formwork and vertical shoring installations not discussed in
subparagraph a. above, one of the following must approve and sign the
formwork plan or shoring layout:
e A PE
• A manufacturer’s authorized representative
• A contractor’s representative, qualified in using and erecting
formwork and vertical shoring.
c. Make drawings or plans showing the jack layout, formwork, shoring,
working decks, and scaffolding available at the jobsite.
25.5.5 Form Anchors. Design form anchors that support forms and
scaffolding with a minimum safety factor of three. Impose no load on form
anchors or concrete anchorages until the concrete has set the minimum period
of time set forth in the subsection, "Releasing and Moving Forms." Form
sections supported by form anchors must be no more than 50 feet long and
must be designed and installed so that no forces, incurred by form or
anchorage failure, can transfer to an adjacent section.
25.5.6 Housekeeping. In all areas where persons must work or pass, remove
and stockpile all stripped forms and shoring promptly after stripping. Pull or
cut protruding nails, wire ties, and other unneeded accessories to avoid
hazards.
25.5.7 Fall Protection. Employees, when working 6 feet or more above any
adjacent work surface (and not protected by fixed scaffolding, guardrails, or
Safety net) must use a personal fall protection system. Employees working in
a stationary position may use a positioning system, but only until they need to
relocate to a new position.
25.6 Vertical Shoring
25.6.1 Additional Loading. Temporarily store reinforcing rods, materials, or
equipment on top of formwork only if structures have been designed or
strengthened to support the additional loading. Do not load eccentric loads on
shore heads or similar members, unless these members are designed for
intended loading.
25.6.2 Sills. Sills used in shoring must be sound, rigid, and able to carry the
maximum intended load.
25-12 October 2009
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry
Construction, and FormWork
25.6.3 Shoring Equipment. Inspect all shoring equipment before erection to
make sure it conforms to the shoring layout. Do not use damaged equipment
for shoring.
25.6.4 Inspection. Inspect erected shoring equipment immediately before,
during, and after placing concrete to make sure shoring equipment meets the
requirements specified on the formwork drawings. Immediately reinforce or
reshore any damaged or weakened shoring equipment.
25.6.5 Reshoring. Provide reshoring when necessary to safely support slabs
and beams after stripping or where such structures are subject to
Superimposed loads.
25.6.6 Removal of Shoring. Remove shoring equipment only after concrete
has reached the minimum strength required in the formwork and shoring
design and a PE or supervisor has inspected and approved the placement.
Plan removal so you do not overload in-place shoring equipment.
25.7 Tubular Welded Frame Shoring
25.7.1 Safe Loading. Do not load metal tubular frames used for shoring
beyond the safe working load recommended by the manufacturer. Design
metal tubular frame shoring with a minimum safety factor of 2.5.
25.7.2 Condition. Locking devices on frames and braces must be in good
working order; coupling pins must align the frame or panel legs; pivoted cross
braces must have their center pivot in place; and all components must be in
good serviceable condition. Promptly repair or replace faulty or damaged
parts and components.
25.7.3 Inspection. Make a thorough inspection after erection to ensure that:
(1) spacing between towers and cross brace spacing does not exceed that
shown on the layout and that all locking devices are in the closed position;
(2) the devices for attaching the external lateral stability bracing are securely
fastened to the legs of the shoring frames; (3) baseplates, shoreheads,
extension devices, or adjustment screws are in firm contact with the footing
sill and the form.
25.8 Tube and Coupler Shoring
25.8.1 Design. Design the tube and coupler shoring for the maximum
intended loading with a minimum safety factor of 2.5.
25.8.2 Couplers. Couplers (clamps) must be of structural-type metal, such as
drop-forged steel, malleable iron, or structural grade aluminum. Do not use
gray cast iron or couplers that are deformed, broken, or have defective or
missing threads or bolts.
October 2009 25–13
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
25.8.3 Inspection. Make a thorough inspection after erection to ensure that:
a. The shoring has been erected as shown on the layout drawings.
b. The spacing between posts does not exceed that shown on the layout.
c. All interlocking tubular members and couplings are properly installed
and tightened.
d. All baseplates, shore heads, extension devices, or adjustment Screws
are in firm contact with the footing still and the form material and snug
against the legs of the frames.
25.9 Single-Post Shores
25.9.1 Design. Single-post shoring layouts must provide for the maximum
intended loading with a minimum safety factor of 3. When using single-post
shores in more than one tier, a PE with structural experience must design and
inspect them.
25.9.2 Bracing. Horizontally brace single-post shores longitudinally,
transversely, and diagonally. Install the bracing while erecting shores.
25.9.3 Inspection. Inspect single-post shores and adjusting devices before
use. Do not use fabricated shores and adjusting devices that are heavily
rusted, bent, dented, rewelded, damaged, or defective. Do not use timber
shores and timber components of fabricated shores if split, knotted, broken, or
otherwise structurally defective.
25.9.4 Baseplates and Shore Heads. Baseplates and shore heads of single-
post shores must be in firm contact with the footing sill and the form
materials.
25.9.5 Angled Formwork. When formwork is at an angle or sloping, or
when the shored surface is sloping, specially design the shoring for such
loading.
25.9.6 Adjustment. Do not adjust single-post shores after concrete is in
place.
25.10 Vertical Slip-Forms
25.10.1 Design and Supervision. A PE, experienced in slip-form design,
must design all vertical slip-forms. Drawings prepared by the PE, showing
the jack layout, anchorages, formwork, scaffolding, etc., together with
installation, jacking, and leveling instructions, must be available at the jobsite
and followed. A person experienced in slip-form operations must supervise
form installation, movement, and leveling.
25–14 October 2009
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry
Construction, and FormWork
25.10.2 Jack Supports. Design steel rods or pipe on which the jacks climb
(or by which forms are lifted) for that intended purpose. Encase supports in
concrete or anchor them. Supports anchored or secured by form anchors must
use two or more independent form anchors, separated a minimum of 5 feet
vertically.
25.10.3 Vertical Loading. Position jacks and vertical supports so the
Vertical loads are distributed equally. Do not exceed the capacity of the jacks.
25.10.4 Line and Plumb. Keep the form structure in line and plumb during
jacking operations.
25.10.5 Lifting. When lifting, proceed steadily and evenly. Do not exceed
the predetermined safe rate of lift.
25.10.6 Bracing. Provide lateral and diagonal form bracing to prevent
excessive distortion of the structure during jacking.
25.10.7 Holding Devices. Provide the jacks or other lifting devices with
mechanical dogs and other automatic holding devices to provide protection in
case the power supply or the lifting mechanism fails.
25.10.8 Scaffolding and Platforms. Vertical lift forms must have
Scaffolding or work platforms that completely encircle the area of placement.
25.10.9 Supervision. An experienced supervisor must oversee vertical slip-
form operations. The Supervisor must be present on the deck during slipping.
25.11 Releasing and Moving Forms
25.11.1 Lifting. When raising or moving forms by crane, cableway, A-
frame, or similar mechanical lifting device, securely attach the forms to wire
rope slings that have a minimum safety factor of eight. Equip the panels and
form sections with hoisting brackets to attach slings. Remove loose tools and
materials before moving forms. Use taglines for controlling forms whenever
necessary to protect personnel or structures.
25.11.2 Riding Forms. Employees must not ride forms or form scaffolding
as it is raised or moved, with the exception of vertical slip-forms.
25.11.3 Releasing. Adequately brace or secure vertical and overhead forms
before releasing them. Before releasing and moving forms, relocate
employees at lower levels who may be exposed to falling materials.
25.11.4 Form Removal. Do not remove forms until the concrete being
Supported is sufficiently strong to support its weight with all loads placed on
it, to ensure safe removal of the forms, shoring, and bracing.
October 2009 25–15
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
25.12 Precast Concrete
25.12.1 Requirement. Brace precast concrete walls, structural framing, or
tilt-up wall panels until after permanent connections are made. A PE must
design temporary bracing that provides at least 15 pounds per square foot on
projected surfaces.
25.12.2 Temporary Bracing. A PE must design temporary bracing for
precast concrete walls, structural framing, or tilt-up wall panels. Such bracing
must provide at least 15 pounds per square foot on projected surfaces.
25.12.3 Suspended Loads. Do not allow employees under precast concrete
members being lifted or tilted into position.
25.12.4 Lifting Inserts. The lifting inserts for tilt-up concrete members must
be able to support at least two times the maximum intended load. Other types
of lifting inserts for precast concrete members must be able to support at least
four times the maximum intended load. Lifting hardware must be able to
supporting at least five times the maximum intended load.
25.13 Lift-Slab
25.13.1 Lift-Slab Operations. A PE, experienced in lift-slab construction,
must design and plan lift-slab operations. Such plans must include detailed
instructions and sketches that show the prescribed method of erection and
ensure lateral stability of the building/structure during construction.
25.13.2 Jacks/Lifting Units. Mark jacks/lifting units to show the rated
capacity established by the manufacturer. Design jacks/lifting units with a
minimum safety factor of 2.5. Do not load jacks/lifting units beyond their
rated capacity.
a. Jacking equipment includes any load-bearing component used to carry
out the lifting operation, such as threaded rods, lifting attachments, lifting
nuts, hook-up collars, t-caps shear heads, columns, and footings.
b. Design and install jacks/lifting units so they will neither lift, nor
continue to lift, when loaded beyond their rated capacity.
c. Install a safety device for jacks/lifting units to ensure that loads will
remain supported in any position if jacks malfunction. -
25.13.3 Jacking Operations. Synchronize jacking operations so the slab will
remain level at all support points to within a /4-inch tolerance at all times.
a. If leveling is automatically controlled, install a device that will stop the
operation when the tolerance is exceeded or when the jacking system
malfunctions.
25-16 October 2009
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry
Construction, and Formwork
b. If manual controls maintain leveling, locate these controls in a central
location; an experienced, competent person must attend the controls
during lifting. Limit the maximum number of manually controlled
jacks/lifting units on one slab so the operator can maintain the slab level.
The maximum number must not exceed 14.
c. Only employees who are not essential to the jacking operation may
remain beneath a slab during lifting. During jacking operations, only
employees who are essential to the jacking operation may remain in the
building/structure.
d. When making temporary connections to support slabs, secure wedges
with tack welding, or an equivalent method, to prevent them from falling
out of position. Release lifting rods only after securing column wedges.
e. A certified welder, familiar with the welding requirements specified in
the plans and specifications for the lift-slab operation, must perform all
welding on temporary and permanent connections. Do not execute load
transfer from jack/lifting units to building columns until the welds on the
column shear plates cool to air temperature.
f. Make sure jacks/lifting units are secured to building columns so they do
not dislodge or dislocate. Design and install equipment so the lifting rods
cannot slip out of position.
25.14 Masonry Construction
25.14.1 Requirements. Establish a limited access zone when erecting a
masonry wall. The limited access zone must equal the height of the wall to be
constructed, plus 4 feet, and must run the length of the wall. Establish the
limited access zone before starting construction and locate it on the side of the
wall that will not be scaffolded. Only employees directly involved in the
construction of the wall may enter the limited access zone. The limited access
Zone must remain in place until the wall is adequately supported to prevent
collapse. The supports must be able to withstand a load of at least 15 pounds
per square inch. Walls over 8 feet high must have supports in place until
permanent supporting elements of the structure are in place.
25.14.2 Equipment. Guard masonry saws with (a) a semicircular enclosure
over-blade and (b) a slotted horizontal hinged bar mounted underneath the
guard enclosure to retain fragments of shattered blades. Equip saws with
dust-control systems or make provisions for wet sawing that control airborne
dust concentrations.
25.14.3 Scaffolding. Design masonry scaffolding for a minimum loading of
50 pounds per square foot. In all other respects, design, install, inspect, and
maintain masonry scaffolding in accordance with applicable provisions in the
section, "Walking and Working Surfaces."
October 2009 25-17
Section 26
Steel Erection
This section sets forth Reclamation’s requirements for erecting steel structures. It
covers the following specific areas:
• General Requirements
Permanent Flooring
Temporary Flooring
Other Flooring
Structural Steel Erection
Plumbing-Up
Bolting
Riveting
• Fire Protection
26.1 General Requirements for Erecting Steel Structures
Storage, handling, and erecting of steel structures, buildings, or structural
components or members must conform to the applicable requirements of these
standards and the current edition of American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
A10.13, "Safety Requirements for Steel Erection."
26.1.1 Fall Protection. Develop a fall protection program before starting
steel erection. Include all phases of the steel erection in the program and
eliminate, to the extent possible, employee exposure to falls.
a. Detail the steps to be taken to provide protection for employees
exposed to potential falls.
b. Provide a training program that enables all involved employees to
recognize the fall hazards and the procedures to follow to minimize the
hazard.
26.2 Requirements for Installing Permanent Flooring
26.2.1 Installation. Install permanent floors as the erection of structural
members progresses. Install no more than eight stories between the erection
floor and the uppermost permanent floor, except where the design maintains
the structural integrity.
26.2.2 Bolting and Welding. Erect no more than four floors or 48 feet of
unfinished bolting or welding above the foundation or the uppermost
permanently secured floor.
October 2009 26–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
26.3 Requirements for Installing Temporary Flooring
26.3.1 Planking. Solidly plank or deck the derrick or erection floor over its
entire surface except for access openings. Planking or decking must be
sufficiently thick and strong to supporting the working load. Never use
planking less than 2 inches thick, full dimension undressed. Lay planking
flush and secure it to prevent movement.
26.3.2 Skeleton Steel Erection. Where erecting skeleton steel, maintain a
tightly planked and substantial floor within two stories or 30 feet, whichever
is less, below and directly under that portion of each tier of beams on which
employees are performing any work. If installing a tightly planked and
substantial floor is not practicable, install safety nets.
26.3.3 Safety Nets. On buildings or structures not adaptable to temporary
floors, and where scaffolds are not used, install and maintain safety nets
whenever the potential fall distance exceeds two stories or 25 feet. The nets
must clear the surface of structures below.
26.3.4 Temporary Planking Removal. Remove temporary planking
successively, working toward the last panel of temporary floor, so that
employees work from the planked floor. Protect employees removing planks
from the last panel by safety harness with safety lines attached to a catenary
line or other substantial anchorage.
26.4 Requirements for Installing Other Flooring
26.4.1 Double-Wood Floors. In erecting buildings with double-wood floor
construction, complete the rough flooring, including the tier below the one on
which floor joists are being installed, as the construction progresses.
26.4.2 Single-Wood Floor. For single-wood floors or other flooring
systems, keep the floor immediately below the story where the floor joists are
being installed planked or decked over.
26.5 Requirements for Structural Steel Erections
26.5.1 Solid-Web Structural Members. In placing solid-web structural
members, do not release the hoisting line until the member is secured with at
least two bolts or the equivalent at each connection. Draw the bolts up
wrench tight.
26.5.2 Open-Web Joists. Place open-web steel joists on structural steel
framework only after such framework is permanently bolted, riveted, or
welded.
26–2 October 2009
Section 26–Steel Erection
26.5.3 Bar Joists. In steel framing, where bar joists are used and the
columns are not framed in at least two directions with structural steel
members, field bolt a bar joist at the columns to provide lateral stability during
construction.
26.5.4 Long-Span Joists. Where long-span joists or trusses 40 feet or longer
are used, provide lateral stability by installing a center row of bolted bridging
before slacking the hoisting line.
26.5.5 Securing Structural Members. Securely bolt or fasten into position
each structural steel member before releasing the loadline. When setting steel
trusses, temporarily cross brace them until permanent bracing is installed.
26.5.6 Taglines. Use a tagline or guide rope on all hoisted loads that expose
employees to the swing of the load.
26.5.7 Temporary Support. Before lifting falls are unhitched, either draw
the anchor bolts down tightly when columns are being set on base plates or
Shims, or guy and support them to prevent collapse.
26.5.8 Connectors. Whenever possible, "connectors" must straddle the beam
instead of walking along the top flange.
26.6 Requirements for Plumbing-Up
26.6.1 Connections. Secure connections of the equipment used in plumbing-
up. Properly secure turnbuckles to prevent unwinding when under stress.
26.6.2 Guys. Position plumbing-up guys and related equipment so that
employees can work on the connection points. Remove the plumbing-up guys
only under the supervision of a competent person.
26.7 Requirements for Bolting
26.7.1 Drift Pins. When knocking out bolts or drift pins, provide a means to
keep them from falling.
26.7.2 Impact Wrenches. Equip impact wrenches with a locking device to
retain the socket.
26.7.3 Containers. Provide containers for storing and carrying bolts, drift
pins, and rivets. Secure the containers against accidental displacement when
aloft.
26.7.4 Drilling and Reaming. Two employees must operate drilling and
reaming machines unless the handle is firmly secured to resist the torque
reaction of the machine if the reaming or drilling bit should bind.
October 2009 26–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
26.8 Requirements for Riveting
26.8.1 Riveting Hammers. Properly install a safety wire on the snap and on
the handle of the pneumatic riveting hammer and use it at all times. The wire
must be at least No. 9 (B&S gauge) leaving the handle, and the wire on the
snap must be at least annealed No. 14, or equivalent.
26.8.2 Removing Rivets. When knocking off or backing out rivet heads,
provide a means to keep them from falling.
26.9 Requirements for Fire Protection
26.9.1 Fire Protection. In accordance with the section, "Fire Prevention and
Protection," develop a fire protection and prevention plan before erecting any
major structure.
26.9.2 Welding and Cutting. Take precautions to prevent sparks or fires in
accordance with the section, "Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure Vessels,
Compressors, and Welding."
26.9.3 Riveting. Only rivet in the vicinity of combustible material when fire
extinguishers or hoselines are readily available to extinguish fires.
26–4 October 2009
Section 27
Reclamation Drilling Standards
This section establishes specific safety standards and safe work practices for earth
and rock drilling operations. The standards do not apply to drilling powder holes
for excavation.
27.1 Standards for Site Selection and Working Platforms
27.1.1 Preparation of the Work Site. Clear the work site to provide
adequate room for the drill platform and supplies. In preparing a work site
located on adverse topography, guard against flooding, caving, slides, and
loose boulders. Stabilize the drill platform with outriggers or adequate
timbering.
27.1.2 Underground Utilities and Overhead Lines. Survey the work site to
determine the presence of underground or overhead utilities before setting up
the drill rig. Locate and mark the underground utilities. Maintain a minimum
of 15 feet of clearance from buried utilities unless the location of the utilities
is positively determined by exposing them. Meet the requirements of the
"Electrical Safety" section for equipment operation adjacent to high voltage
lines, except maintain a minimum 30-foot clearance between any part of the
drill or mast and the powerline, regardless of Voltage.
27.1.3 Drainage. Provide a drain for the drill water to flow from the work
site. Extend the drain far enough to prevent undercutting of the foundation.
27.1.4 Drill Platform Design. Ensure drill platforms provide an adequate
working space for the drilling operation and have a firm stable foundation. A
professional engineer must design unusual drill platforms.
27.1.5 Mud Pits and Drainage Excavations. Ensure mud pits and drainage
excavations are safely sloped and located to provide minimum interference
with work. Where necessary, provide suitable barricades, catwalks, etc. to
reduce the possibility of injury. Use ladders in pits or excavations 4 feet deep
OT 11]OſC.
27.1.6 Lighting. Illuminate all working surfaces with a minimum of 10-foot
candles.
a. Ensure all electrical wiring for illumination purposes meets National
Electrical Code. Qualified personnel must install all wiring.
b. Use heavy duty, outdoor, nonshattering light bulbs, unless the bulbs are
enclosed by the fixture.
c. Maintain the lighting circuits in good repair. Remove defective wiring
or fixtures from service.
October 2009 27–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
27.1.7 Flammable Liquids. Store, handle, and dispense flammable liquids
in accordance with the section, "Standards for Material Handling, Storage, and
Disposal."
27.2 General Requirements for Drill Rigs
Drilling rigs must meet the following requirements regarding how they are
equipped, labeled, operated, and maintained.
27.2.1 Control Levers. Post labels clearly indicating the function and
direction of the control levers on the power unit controls of all drills. Where
practicable, design operating unit controls to return to neutral when the
control levers are released.
27.2.2 Safety Shutoff. Install at least two emergency safety power shutoff
devices on all units. Locate one switch within easy reach of the operator and
one within easy reach of the helpers at ground level near the drill or auger
head. You may connect a safety line to an emergency stop switch instead of
using the two emergency stop switches. Clearly label emergency stop devices
or make them readily identifiable in some other way. Check daily to ensure
that they work.
27.2.3 Operator. Only qualified personnel instructed in the operation of the
particular equipment may operate the power unit.
27.2.4 Lubrication and Repair. Lubricate all drilling equipment routinely.
Shut down equipment during manual lubrication and during repairs or
adjustments.
27.2.5 Preventive Maintenance. Provide an effective preventive
maintenance program for periodic inspections at such intervals as are
necessary to ensure safe operation and adequate maintenance.
27.2.6 Refueling. Do NOT refuel internal combustion engines while they are
running. Where practicable, position or shield the fuel tank to avoid
accidentally spilling fuel on the engine or exhaust manifold during refueling.
27.2.7 Inspection. A competent person must inspect drilling equipment
before each shift to determine if it is in safe operating condition. Correct any
damage or deficiencies before using the equipment. Maintain written records
of all deficiencies and repairs.
a. Develop an inspection checklist based on the manufacturer’s
recommendations and the requirements of this section for each piece of
drilling equipment. Inspect drilling equipment at least monthly and
maintain a written record. Use the inspection checklist to document the
monthly inspection.
27–2 October 2009
Section 27—Reclamation Drilling
Standards
b. Give hoisting units on the drill an annual performance test to the
maximum rated load.
c. Inspect truck-mounted drill rigs annually for compliance with the
applicable Department of Transportation regulations.
27.2.8 Gears and Moving Parts. Isolate or guard belts, gears, shafts,
pulleys, sprockets, spindles, drums, and other type moving drives as set forth
in the current edition of American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B15. 1,
"Safety Code for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus."
27.2.9 Fire Extinguishers. Carry a 2-A:40-B:C dry chemical fire
extinguisher on the unit and remove it to a position within 25 feet of the work
site during drilling operations. Inspect extinguishers at least once every
month. A qualified inspector must conduct annual maintenance inspections
and tagging.
27.2.10 Exhaust Systems. Equip engine exhaust systems with spark
arresters when operated where sparks constitute a fire hazard.
27.2.11 Raising Mast. Clear personnel from the immediate area before
raising the mast, except for the operator and a helper if necessary. Check to
ensure safe clearance from energized power lines or equipment. Remove
unsecured equipment from the mast before raising the mast. Adequately
secure cables, mud lines, and cat lines to the mast before raising the mast.
27.2.12 Securing Mast to Rig. Secure the mast to the rig in an upright
position using the original pins or bolts or equivalent pins and bolts, after it is
raised.
27.3 Truck-Mounted Drills
27.3.1 General. Provide platforms, steps, handholds, and guardrails on the
equipment to ensure safe access and footing. Coat the platform and decks
with a nonskid surface.
27.3.2 Truck Movement. DO NOT move trucks backwards unless the driver
has personally inspected the area behind the truck. Use a spotter in restricted
or congested areas or in areas where workers are located. Equip trucks with
serviceable automatic backup alarms.
27.3.3 Transporting Drill Equipment. Thoroughly inspect drill equipment
before moving it to ensure that the mast, drill rods, tools, and other supplies
and equipment are secure to prevent displacement while in transit. Observe
applicable traffic laws when moving drill equipment over public roads. Check
steering mechanism, brakes, lights, load limits, and proper flagging or lighting
of load extensions. Do not move trucks until the mast is secured in the
transport position.
October 2009 27–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
27.4 Skid-Mounted Units
27.4.1 Towing Equipment. Equipment used to skid drill units must have
adequate power to safely control the intended loads. Provide an adequate
means for braking the skid unit when moving a skid mounted drill down a
slope. Skidding operations must meet the requirements in the section on
"Mechanized and Stationary Equipment," specifically "Unusual Equipment
Configurations."
27.4.2 Access. Provide employees with a safe means of access to the skid-
mounted drill unit.
27.4.3 Tie Downs/Anchors. Secure the drill while raising the mast or during
drilling operations with either a deadman or by weighting or bolting it down
to prevent the drill from tipping over.
27.5 Drilling Operations
27.5.1 General. Before starting the power unit, disengage all gears, set the
cable drum brake, and make sure no rope is in contact with the cathead.
27.5.2 Safety Chains. Use a safety chain and cable arrangement to prevent
water swivel and mud line whip.
27.5.3 Water Swivels and Hoisting Plugs. Check all water swivels and
hoisting plugs daily for possible frozen bearings and lubricate properly before
using. A frozen bearing could cause mud line whip and injure employees.
27.5.4 Breaking Operation. The operator must have eye contact with the
employee placing the tongs, forks, or wrenches when breaking drilling tools,
rods or casing with the use of the drill’s power.
27.5.5 Chuck Jaws. Periodically, check the chuck jaws and replace them as
necessary.
27.5.6 String of Drill Rods. Do not tighten the chuck jaws against a moving
drill string. Use a cat line or hoisting cable and plug for braking before
tightening the chuck.
27.5.7 Supporting Drill Rods. Use mechanical means to raise or lower drill
rods.
27.5.8 Drilling with Air. When drilling with air, direct the exhaust into a
dust collection system, divert it through a long discharge hose away from
drilling personnel, or dampen it with water or a wetting agent to control the
dust. Direct the cuttings to the side away from employees.
27-4 October 2009
Section 27—Reclamation Drilling
Standards
27.5.9 Cleaning Drill Rods. When using drilling fluids, use a rubber or
other suitable wiper to remove material from the drill rods when removing
them from the drill hole.
27.5.10 Pipe Wrench Jaws. Check pipe wrench jaws periodically and
replace them as they become worn.
27.5.11 Draining of Drill Rod. Allow drill rods to drain completely
following breaking and before removing them from the working area.
27.5.12 Hoisting of Drill Rod. The operator must exercise care to avoid a
sudden release of the drill rod while the rod is being carried from the hole.
27.5.13 Hoist Capacity. Determine the hoist capacity and weight of the drill
rod to prevent collapse of the mast during drill string removal. Do NOT
exceed the operating capacity of the mast and hoist.
27.5.14 Cleaning of Auger Flights. Do NOT clean auger flights while the
auger is rotating.
27.5.15 Auger Sections. Avoid mismatching auger sections. Do NOT use
different brands and different weights in the same auger string.
27.5.16 Fitting Pins. Use only tight-fitting pins designed for the auger.
Inspect all connectors daily, and do not use any defective connectors.
27.5.17 Drill Hole Protection. Adequately cover or protect unattended drill
holes to prevent animals or people from accidently falling into them.
27.5.18 Warning Signs. On all equipment, install a durable warning sign
containing the following wording in full view of the operator:
• All personnel must be clear before starting machine
• Stop the auger to clean it
• Stop engine when repairing, lubricating, or refueling
• Do not wear loose fitting clothing or gauntlet-type gloves
27.6 Underground Drilling Operations
27.6.1 General Requirements. All drilling activities conducted underground
must comply with the section, "Tunnel and Shaft Construction" of this
standard and 29 CFR 1926, Subpart S, "Tunnels and Shafts, Caissons,
Cofferdams, and Compressed Air," of the Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction.
27.6.2. Access. Provide and maintain a safe means of access to all
underground working places.
October 2009 27–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
27.6.3 Lowering and Hoisting Equipment in Shafts. Do not carry heavy
equipment down ladders into a shaft. Provide mechanical hoisting devices to
lower and hoist equipment in shafts more than 10 feet deep.
27.6.4 Unattended Shafts. Use barricades equipped with gates or doors to
restrict access to unattended shaft openings. Fence and post subsidence areas
that present hazards.
27.6.5 Evacuation Plan. Develop evacuation plans and procedures before
startup and make them known to all employees.
27.6.6 Underground Ventilation. Mechanically ventilate underground work
areas in accordance with the section, "Tunnel and Shaft Construction."
Provide a minimum air velocity of 100 feet per minute (FPM) over the gross
bore area of the underground workings.
27.6.7 Scaling Work Areas. Thoroughly scale work areas before any
drilling operations and periodically during all underground work.
27.6.8 Walkway. Maintain a clear walkway and do not allow equipment or
materials to obstruct the passageway.
27.6.9 Drainage. Provide and maintain drainage away from the work site.
27.6.10 Lighting. Install and maintain sufficient lighting in work areas and
access ways. Illuminate all work areas with a minimum of 10-foot candles.
27.6.11 Electric Service Lines. All work areas must have electrical service
lines that are insulated, strung on insulators, and separated from water, air, or
telephone lines.
27.6.12 Hardhats. Employees must wear hardhats conforming with
ANSI Z89.1, type I, class E.
27.6.13 Miner’s Lamps. Provide miner’s lamps to all employees who work
underground and ensure all employees wear them while working
underground. Install a lighting system to provide illumination.
27.6.14 Rain Clothing. Wear rain suits if conditions warrant.
27.6.15 Anchors. Install rock bolts or anchors in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Rock bolts or anchors used for lifting and pulling
must have a safety factor of 5. Adequately torque all rock bolts in accordance
with manufactures’ recommendations.
27.6.16 Column Mounted Drill Units. Securely stabilize all column mount
drills with necessary timbers and wedges adjacent to column foot plates.
Drive wedges into place and nail them to adjacent timbers to prevent vibration
mCVenent.
27-6 October 2009
Section 27—Reclamation Drilling
Standards
27.6.17 Flammable Liquids or Gases. Do not allow flammable liquids or
gases underground, except as needed for welding and cutting.
October 2009 27-7
Section 28
Watercraft and Dredging
This section sets forth the requirements for watercraft and dredging. The
requirements for actual watercraft and dredging equipment are discussed, as well
as the requirements for personnel performing such watercraft and dredging
operations. Inspection, training, certification, and various operating activities are
discussed in detail.
28.1 General Requirements for Watercraft Operations
28.1.1 Requirement. Construct all watercraft and perform all watercraft
operations according to the requirements of these standards, as well as
applicable U.S. Coast Guard (USCG), Department of the Interior, State, and
local requirements.
28.1.2 Inspection and Certification. Inspect, certify, license, and number
all watercraft and equipment according to applicable regulations of USCG and
other jurisdictional entities before placing them in service.
28.1.3 Capacity Plates. Plainly mark on all watercraft the maximum
occupancy and carrying capacity allowed onboard for safe passage (i.e.,
USCG maximum capacities). Do not exceed this maximum occupancy or
carrying capacity.
28.1.4 Loading. Make sure each boat has enough room, freeboard, and
stability to safely carry the maximum cargo and passengers under various
weather and water conditions.
28.1.5 Flame Arresters. Equip gasoline engines, except for outboard types,
with a USCG-approved backfire flame arrestor. Make sure the arrestor is
attached to the air intake with a flame-tight connection. It must be kept clean
and in serviceable condition.
28.1.6 Fire Extinguishers. For watercraft less than 65 feet in length, at least
one USCG-approved fire extinguisher, rated 2-A:40-B:C or greater, must be
carried onboard. Watercraft 65 feet or larger must carry sufficient fire
extinguishers to meet USCG requirements. Watercraft with gasoline or liquid
petroleum gas powerplants located in a compartment or confined location
must have a fixed automatic carbon dioxide (or equivalent) fire-extinguishing
System.
28.1.7 Ventilation. Watercraft with permanently installed gasoline engines
must have powered ventilation systems to remove gasoline vapors from the
vessel. -
October 2009 28–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
28.1.8 Fuel. Store fuel in approved containers suitable for marine use. Fuel
lines must be equipped with a valve to cut off fuel flow. In addition, if the
watercraft will not be in use for a period of 8 hours or longer, then the valve
must be closed.
28.1.9 Navigation Lights. Watercraft must be able to display navigation
lights required by USCG. Display navigation lights between sunset and
Sunrise and any other time visibility is reduced (fog, haze, rain, etc.).
28.1.10 Operator Training and Qualification. Reclamation employees and
others who operate a Reclamation-owned watercraft must first be certified or
licensed to operate watercraft in accordance with DOI 485 DM 22. Non-
Reclamation employees who operate watercraft owned by others must be
qualified in accordance with USCG, State, and local regulations.
28.1.11 Float Plans. If the operator expects watercraft activities to take
longer than 4 hours from time of departure until time of return, a float plan
must be prepared. The float plan must include the following information:
Watercraft information (vessel make/model or local identifier)
Personnel onboard
Activity to be performed
Expected time of departure, route, and time of return
Means of communication (if any)
28.1.12 Personal Flotation Devices (PFD) Equip watercraft with one
USCG-approved PFD for each occupant, and once USCG-approved throwable
device onboard the watercraft. Wear a PFD whenever you are onboard a
watercraft or working around bodies of water where a drowning hazard exists.
Refer to the section on "Personal Protective Equipment."
28.1.13 Safety Equipment. Equip all watercraft with adequate safety
equipment to meet USCG requirements and any hazards that may be
encountered during normal operations.
28.1.14 Swimming. You must not swim from watercraft or any floating
equipment unless you are a certified diver whose duties require such
Swimming.
28.2 Dredging Operations
28.2.1 Inspections. A qualified person must inspect dredges and related
equipment before they are entered into service, and at least yearly thereafter,
to make sure they are in safe operating condition. The inspector must have a
recognized degree, certificate, or license, or professional standing, as well as
extensive knowledge, training, and experience in solving problems related to
the work. Inspections must be documented and accessible to personnel.
28–2 October 2009
Section 28—WaterCraft and
Dredging
28.2.2 Maintenance and Repair. Before performing repair or maintenance
work on the pump, suction, or discharge lines below the water line, or within
the hull, in addition to the normal process of securing hoisting machinery, you
must raise the ladder (or drag arm) above the water line and positively secure
it. Set blank or block plates in suction or discharge lines as appropriate. Also
see the section on "Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)."
28.2.3 Pipeline Marking. Dredge pipelines that float or are supported on
trestles must display appropriate lights at night and when visibility is
restricted, in accordance with USCG regulations and 33 CFR 88.15.
28.2.4 Public Notification. Issue public notices where dredging activity may
pose hazards to navigation or to the public.
28.2.5 Safety Plans. Prepare a comprehensive safety plan for each dredging
operation. Make the plan location specific and include provisions for
communications and emergency response.
28.2.6 Submerged Dredge Pipeline
a. Where a pipeline crosses a navigation channel or other area subject to
boat traffic, submerged pipeline must rest on the channel bottom. The top
of the pipeline and any anchor securing the pipe must be no higher than
the maximum draft of traffic expected in the area where pipe is placed.
b. When buoyant or semibuoyant pipeline is used, the dredge operator
must make sure the pipeline remains fully submerged and on the bottom.
When raising the pipeline, warn boat traffic of the pipeline hazard.
Adequately mark the entire length of the pipeline as required by the
USCG.
c. Mark the entire location of the submerged pipeline with signs, buoys,
lights, or flags as required by USCG and as approved by the authority
having jurisdiction.
d. Conduct routine inspections of the submerged pipe to ensure
anchorage.
e. Remove all anchors and related materials when removing the
submerged pipe.
28.2.7 Floating Pipeline. Floating pipeline is any pipeline not anchored on
the channel bottom. Clearly mark floating pipeline, including rubber
discharge hoses. Do not allow pipelines to fluctuate between the water
surface and the channel bottom or to lie partially submerged.
a. If floating pipelines are used as accessways, equip them with a
walkway and handrail on one side. Personnel using the walkway or
working on the pipeline must wear an approved PFD.
October 2009 28–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
28.2.8 Dredge Design. Design dredges so that a failure or rupture of any of
the dredge pump components (including dredge pipe) will not cause the
dredge to sink.
a. Dredge Pumps. Any dredge with a dredge pump below the water line
must have a bilge alarm or automatically shut down in the event of a pump
leak.
b. Fall Protection. Provide guardrails, bulwarks, or taut cable guard
lines for deck openings, elevated surfaces, or other locations where a
person may slip or fall from them. Guardrails and taut cable guard lines
must comply with the requirements for standard guardrails.
c. Walking and Working Surfaces
1. Provide anti-slip surfaces on all working decks, stair treads, Vessel
ladders, and other walking or working surfaces that may become wet
during operations.
2. Remove obstructions in walking and working surfaces if possible.
Where obstructions cannot be removed, post appropriate warning signs
or distinctively mark them in accordance with section 9 and
ANSI Z535.1.
3. Where the distance between the vessel and docks or landings
exceeds 18 inches horizontal or 12 inches vertical, provide gangways.
Gangways must be at least 22 inches wide, with standard railings, and
be able to support 250 pounds (with a safety factor of 4:1) at its
midpoint.
28.2.9 Relocation. A qualified person must directly supervise any
mobilization, demobilization, or relocation of dredges, support barges, or
other support equipment.
28–4 October 2009
Section 29
Marine and Diving Operations
This section establishes the requirements for marine and diving operations,
oversight of contractor diving operations and Reclamation diving operations.
Issues discussed include dive team requirements, diver qualifications, predive
planning, hazard control measures, Supervision, equipment, recordkeeping,
accident reporting and first aid, recompression, surface-supplied air diving, scuba
diving, and communication systems.
29.1 Requirements for Contractor Diving Operations
29.1.1 General Requirements. Conventional hardhat and lightweight
Surface supplied and scuba diving operations must conform to the more
stringent requirements of this subsection or 29 CFR 1910, Subpart T.
“Commercial Diving Operations.” Use regulations contained in the
U.S. Navy Diving Manual, volumes I through V, to resolve issues not covered
by these or referenced standards.
29.1.2 Hazard Control Measures. Bring diving equipment to the worksite
only after a Safe Practices Manual, diving plan, and dive hazard analysis have
been developed and the Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR) or Dive
Master has approved it. The dive hazard analysis and diving plan must
Specifically address safety procedures for each separate diving location or
mode and include policies to ensure compliance with these and referenced
Standards. If conditions change, cease diving operations until you reevaluate
conditions and implement appropriate controls.
29.1.3 Diver Qualifications. Divers, including those on standby, must have
a certificate of training from a recognized diving school or certified record of
past diving experience. Prior to commencing diving operations, submit
divers’ names and qualifications to the COR or Dive Master. Divers must be
at least 18 years old and be fully familiar with the equipment, diving system,
and emergency procedures to be used. Divers must have undergone a medical
examination within the past year that certifies them as physically fit for
diving. In addition, a diver may dive to depths greater than 100 feet seawater
equivalent only if they have previous experience diving to the maximum
depth required in the planned dive. Divers must not take part in diving
operations if they have severe colds, sinus or ear infections, alcohol
intoxication or its aftereffects, drug addiction, fatigue, acute illness, or vertigo.
All dive team members must be trained in cardiopulmonary resuscitation, first
aid (American Red Cross standard course, or equivalent), and oxygen first aid.
29.1.4 Supervision. A designated, experienced, onsite Dive Master must
personally Supervise all diving operations, including use of personnel and
decompression.
October 2009 29–1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
29.1.5 Equipment. Use a tagging or logging system to record equipment
modification, repair, test, calibration, or maintenance services. Include the
date and type of work performed and the name or initials of the person who
did the work.
a. Air Compressor System. Compressors that supply air to the surface-
supplied air (SSA) diver must have a volume cylinder with a check valve
on the inlet side, a pressure gauge, a relief valve, a drain valve, and a
carbon monoxide filter and alarm system. Compressors must have the
capacity to overcome any line loss or other losses and deliver a minimum
of 4.5 cubic feet per minute to each diver at the maximum working depth.
Locate air compressor intakes away from areas containing exhaust or other
contaminants. Respirable air supplied to a diver, or to air tanks, must not
COntal n:
1. Carbon monoxide (CO) greater than 10 parts per million (ppm).
2. Carbon dioxide (CO2) greater than 1,000 ppm.
3. Oil mist greater than 5 milligrams per cubic meter.
4. A noxious or strong odor.
Test the air compressor system output for air purity at least every
6 months, by taking samples at the connection to the distribution system.
b. Compressed Gas Cylinders. Compressed gas cylinders must:
1. Be designed and maintained according to the applicable provisions
of 29 CFR 1910.101(a).
2. Be stored in a ventilated area and protected from excessive heat.
3. Be Secured against falling.
4. Have shutoff valves recessed into the cylinder or protected by a
cap, except when in use, when manifolded, or when used for diving.
29.1.6 Surface-Supplied Air Diving
a. Auxiliary Air Supply. Provide an auxiliary air supply during all
dives. The auxiliary air supply must have a standby compressor or air
flasks with a capacity of 72 cubic feet or more. Compressors that are used
for diving operations must not be used for any other purpose. Auxiliary
air supply must meet the requirements in the subsection, "Air Compressor
System." -
b. Decompression. A recognized decompression specialist must prepare
decompression tables. Post decompression times inside and outside
decompression chambers.
29-2
October 2009
Section 29—Marine and Diving Operations
c. Decompression Chamber. The following circumstances require an
Onsite, dual-lock, multiplace decompression chamber (capable of
recompressing the diver to a minimum of 165 feet seawater equivalent)
and trained operating personnel:
• Diving operations that are outside the no-decompression limits or
to depths greater than 100 feet seawater
• When surface recompressing capabilities are recommended by the
decompression specialists, Dive Master, or where necessitated by
Onsite conditions
Decompression chambers must accommodate at least two persons.
d. Decompression Dives. Divers engaged in dives outside no-
decompression limits or engaged in mixed-gas diving must remain awake
and close to an attended decompression chamber for at least 1 hour
following the dive. The diver must be able to contact a decompression
chamber facility during the 4-hour period immediately following treatment
or after leaving the water.
e. Communications. Equip divers and standby divers with
communication systems that permit simultaneous, two-way conversations
between the diver, his tender, other divers and tenders, and the Dive
Master. Communication systems must be operable from the time the diver
puts on his helmet or mask until it is removed.
f. Minimum Crew Size. Two divers must be available on any one diving
operation. The standby diver must be available, suited up, and ready to
dive in an emergency. The standby diver must not serve as a tender. The
minimum crew must consist of at least four persons: the Dive Master, a
diver, a standby diver, and a tender. For each diver added to the crew, one
tender must also be added.
g. Reserve Breathing Gas Supply. Each diver using lightweight SSA
must carry a reserve breathing gas tank. When heavy, deep-sea diving
gear are used, when diving to depths exceeding 100 feet of seawater, or
when diving outside the no-decompression limits, the standby diver must
have an extra breathing gas hose for the working diver.
29.1.7 Scuba Diving
a. Requirement. Scuba diving is permitted only when sanctioned by the
contract specifications and authorized in writing by the contracting officer.
b. Maximum Depths. Limit scuba diving to depths and times that will
not require decompression staging as set forth in the U.S. Navy Standard
Air Decompression Tables. Scuba dives depths must not exceed 100 feet
of seawater after altitude adjustment.
October 2009 29–3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
c. Compressed Air. Oxygen or mixed gases are prohibited, except for up
to 40 percent nitrox, when used in accordance with the National Oceanic
and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) Diving Manual: Diving for
Science and Technology, Chapter 15, "Nitrox Diving" and Appendix VII,
"Nitrox Dive Tables." Use only open circuit scuba systems.
d. Diving Equipment. A recognized approving agency must approve
Scuba diving equipment. Use and maintain scuba diving equipment in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
e. Buddy System. A dive may be made singly if the dive is less than
20 feet deep, there is little current, and visibility is good (at the discretion
of the Dive Master). All other dives with scuba gear must use a buddy
System.
f. Standby Diver. Provide a standby diver for each diver or buddy pair.
The standby diver must be a qualified, fully equipped scuba diver and
remain on the surface, close to the diver.
g. Standard Equipment. Scuba divers must wear buoyancy
compensators and have a depth indicating device, timing device, cutting
tool, compass, submersible pressure gauge (or integrated dive computer)
to monitor cylinder/System air pressure, and an alternate second stage air
Source, such as an Octopus or safe second.
29.2 Requirements for Reclamation Diving Operations
29.2.1 Regulations and Policy. Reclamation diving operations must comply
with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, Subpart T. “Commercial Diving
Operations.” The policies and guidelines for Dive Team establishment,
review, training, certification, and diver qualifications are contained in
Department of the Interior Manual 485 (Safety and Health Handbook),
Chapter 27, “Underwater Diving Safety.” Use the U.S. Navy Diving Manual,
Volumes I, II, and V, to resolve issues not covered by these or referenced
standards.
29.2.2 Reclamation Oversight. A Bureau Diving Safety Board and a
Regional Diving Advisory Committee (RDAC) must oversee Reclamation
diving operations. These organizations must provide guidance for the safety
of all diving operations. They are responsible for:
a. Establishing a Bureau of Reclamation Safe Practices Manual for
Underwater Inspection Program.
b. Reviewing diving activities.
c. Establishing qualifications for divers.
29–4 October 2009
Section 29—Marine and Diving Operations
d. Providing periodic diver training opportunities.
e. Approving dive teams and Dive Masters.
f. Reviewing all diving operations and accidents.
29.2.3 Diving Operations.
a. General. Sufficiently train and equip Reclamation dive team members
with resources to safely perform diving operations.
b. Restrictions on Specialized Diving. Reclamation teams must not
undertake specialized operations, such as underwater welding, gas or
electric arc cutting and burning, or explosive demolition. Permitted
activities include minor maintenance (such as removing rocks and debris
from stilling basins; operating small, hand-held, nonelectric power tools;
inspections; and assisting surface maintenance crews with installation or
cleaning operations).
c. Recordkeeping.
1. Each diver must maintain a dive log that contains, at a minimum,
the following information:
Names of dive team members (including Dive Master)
Location
Date
Time
Diving mode
General nature of the work performed
Appropriate surface and underwater conditions
Maximum depth and bottom times
Any accidents or unusual conditions encountered
RDAC will ensure that accurate dive logs are maintained and tabulated
on an annual basis.
2. Maintain a log of all equipment modifications, repairs, tests,
calibrations, and maintenance.
3. Maintain the underwater diving safety records identified above and
other dive team records in accordance with table 29-1.
October 2009
29–5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards

Table 29-1.-Dive team recordkeeping
Record
Instructions
Retention period"
Responsibility
Injury or illness requiring
hospitalization of
24 hours
Notify RDAC, report using
SMIS system within 6 days;
CA-1 within 2 days
5 years (SMIS)
Permanent (CA-1)
Team leader
Minor diving injuries
Report using SMIS system
within 6 days; (CA-1) within
2 days
5 years (SMIS)
Permanent (CA-1)
Team leader
Safe practices manual Retain copy at dive site Current document Dive Master
Depth-time profiles Individual records Until transferred to the Diver
dive log
Recording of dives (dive Individual records (tabulated | 1 year, unless an Dive Master
log) annually) accident; in case of
accident, 5 years
Dive hazard analysis and Review and discuss dive 1 year Dive Master
briefing notes
hazard analysis prior to
each dive.
Dive team medical
records and medical
Clearance
Keep with medical records.
Retain copy of medical
Clearance at dive site.
5 years; most recent
clearance (1 year)
Team leader
Equipment inspections,
repairs, maintenance,
and Calibration
Keep current record until
equipment is withdrawn from
Service.
Most current tag or entry
Team leader
Dive training and dive
training summary
Individual diver must
maintain it as a Continuous
record; annual summary at
dive site.
Continuous running
record; Summaries
every 5 years
Team leader
Compressor air quality
Check every 180 days.
Most current record
Team leader
"Records required to be retained 5 years (with the exception of minor injuries report) must be forwarded by
Reclamation to the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and
Human Services.
d. Dive Plan and Hazard Analysis. Prepare a dive plan and hazard
analysis before each diving activity. All personnel involved must review
the dive plan and hazard analysis before suiting up. As a minimum, the
plan must contain the following:
1. Names and duties of dive team members, including diving
Supervisor.
2. Date, time, and location of the dive operation.
3. Diving mode to be used (scuba, surface-supplied air, etc.),
including a description of the backup air supply.
4. A description of the work divers will perform, and inspection
requirements.
5. Surface and underwater conditions, including visibility,
temperature, thermal protection, and currents.
29-6
October 2009
Section 29—Marine and Diving Operations
6. Activity hazard analysis for each phase of work, including the
hazards of flying after diving.
7. Maximum depth and bottom time (make altitude adjustments to
dive tables for dives at altitudes of 1000 feet or more above sea level).
8. Emergency management plan, including emergency procedures,
means of notification, telephone numbers (for ambulance, doctors, and
Divers Alert Network), locations of evacuation route, and emergency
assistance.
9. Lockout/tagout procedures, including how to deal with differential
water pressures due to unequal water elevations.
10. Equipment servicing records, procedures, and checklists and
requirements for special tools and equipment.
29.2.4 Accident and Incidents. Report all accidents that occur in connection
with a diving activity, following standard accident reporting procedures (see
table 29-1). In addition, the team leader must submit to the RDAC a
comprehensive analysis of each accident or incident involving a diver. The
purpose of the accident and incident analyses is to identify hazardous
situations and constructively prevent their recurrence.
29.2.5 Diving Supervision. The Dive Master must attend each diving
operation. The Dive Master is responsible for predive planning, the dive
hazard analysis, and the conduct and safety of the dive. The Dive Master’s
decisions are final. However, a diver who considers a diving operation unsafe
is not required to participate in the dive.
29.2.6 Required Divers. At least three divers must be present during all
Reclamation dives. In addition to the diver, there must be a standby safety
diver and the Dive Master. Top side personnel are responsible for tending the
diver, recordkeeping, and controlling any surface-supplied breathing air
equipment. This requirement may be varied only with the approval of the
Dive Master and RDAC.
29.2.7. Predive Briefing. Before beginning work on a dive operation, the
dive team, facility representatives, and/or others involved in, or affected by,
the operation must meet to review the dive plan and dive hazard analysis and
to coordinate the diving operation. Maintain a record of the briefing notes.
29.2.8 Safe Practices Manual. Make the Safe Practices Manual available at
each dive location.
29.2.9 Maximum Depth. Limit diving operations to depths and times that
will not require decompression staging, in accordance with the U.S. Navy
standard air decompression tables and the altitude conversion tables
October 2009 29–7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
developed by R.L. Bell and R.E. Borgwardt (1975). When diving, do not
exceed 100 feet of seawater (after altitude conversion).
29.2.10 Clearance and Lockout Procedures in Areas of Hazardous
Energy Sources. Use clearance and lockout procedures where hazardous
energy sources exist. When diving near dams, powerplants, pumping plants,
or diversion structures with mechanical or electrical features that could pose a
hazard to divers, a technical representative from the project at which the dive
is being made must be present or in direct communication to assist the divers.
All divers must review the clearance before beginning diving operations.
Clearance procedures and lockouts must conform with the section, "Control of
Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)" of this standard.
29.2.11 Pressure Differentials. Review diving operations for potential
hazards to divers before beginning to dive on the upstream or high-pressure
side of open or badly leaking gates, valves, diversion structures, or other
features where a combination of flow and pressure differential could
immobilize a diver.
29.2.12 Equipment. Equip each diver to ensure personal safety. No diver is
required to dive with a type or brand of equipment they consider unsafe.
Divers must not dive with equipment known to be damaged or improperly
maintained.
a. Basic Auxiliary Requirement. The basic auxiliary requirement for
each scuba diver includes, but is not limited to:
1. Buoyancy compensating device.
. Depth indicating device.
. Timing device.
2
3
4. Cutting tool.
5. Compass.
6
. Submersible pressure gauge (or integrated dive computer) to
monitor cylinder/system air pressure.
7. Alternate second stage air source, such as an octopus or safe
second.
b. Equipment Inspection. Before diving operations begin, and every
day during dive operations, dive team personnel must inspect the
equipment to make sure it is in proper operating condition. Record
inspection results in a dive log or as required by the Safe Practices
Manual.
29-8 October 2009
Section 29—Marine and Diving Operations
c. Air Cylinders. Every year, have all air cylinders visually inspected by
a certified cylinder inspector, attach an inspection sticker to the cylinder
and issue a certificate. Hydrostatically test the cylinders every 5 years in
accordance with U.S. Department of Transportation regulations.
Permanently mark the cylinder with the most recent test date.
d. Regulators. A diver’s first and second stage regulators must be
professionally inspected at least once a year, or more frequently if
recommended by the manufacturer. Retain the inspection certificate until
the next inspection or maintenance.
29.2.13 Diving Flag. Fly a red flag
with white diagonal stripe (see
figure 29-1) at all times when divers are
working near motor boats or other
dangerous watercraft, or where mandated
by State or national Coast Guard
regulations.
29.2.14 Surfacing. Divers must surface
when the cylinder pressure reaches 500
pounds per square inch or at the first
signs of equipment malfunction.
29.2.15 Recompression Chamber
Location. Include in the dive hazard Figure 29-1.-Diving flag.
analysis all emergency telephone
numbers, including the Divers Alert Network (DAN) and the local hospital.
DAN maintains a listing of the closest recompression chambers for each day.
The dive hazard analysis must also specify the most effective mode of
transportation to the hospital, as determined by the Dive Master.
29.2.16 Repetitive Dive Tables. Keep repetitive dive tables at the dive site
as part of the dive plan and dive hazard analysis.
29.2.17 Emergency First Aid Equipment. Make emergency first aid
equipment immediately available to the dive team. Include in the dive plan
and dive hazard analysis the location and telephone number of an ambulance
service and hospital near the dive area. Emergency first aid equipment must
include a first aid kit, spine board, and a demand-type oxygen unit able to
deliver at least 15 liters of oxygen per minute. When traveling to remote sites
where professional medical assistance is more than 1-1/2 hours away, have
Remote Emergency Medical Oxygen available at all times.
29.2.18 Post-Dive Restrictions
a. Commercial Flying. Wait a minimum of 12 hours after completing a
single no-compression dive, or 24 hours after multiple days of diving or
decompression dives.
October 2009 29-9

Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
b. Driving to Altitude. Divers shall correct for altitude prior to diving by
assuming the highest point to be reached after the dive is the altitude of the
dive. Refer to the Travel Delay Table and Altitude Modifications
discussion in Bureau of Reclamation Safe Practices Manual for
Underwater Inspection Program.
29.2.19 Individual Safety. Divers are ultimately responsible for their own
safety. It is the diver’s responsibility and privilege to refuse to dive if, in the
diver’s judgment, conditions are unsafe, unfavorable, or the dive would
violate the dictates of their training, judgment, or these regulations.
29.2.20 Transporting Cylinders. Transport all dive cylinders in racks
designed for this purpose or secure them safely. Shade dive cylinders and
maintain the temperature at less than 100 [IF if possible. If the temperature,
elevation, or other conditions cannot be controlled, reduce the pressure to
avoid exceeding the cylinder’s working pressure.
29.2.21 Scuba Diving
a. Compressed Air. Use only open-circuit type scuba equipment using
compressed air. Obtain compressed air from a reliable source, meeting the
specifications of Compressed Gas Association (CGA) Standard G7.1,
Commodity Specification for Air.
b. Penetration Drive. You must not dive with scuba, under overhead
obstructions, or when vertical access to the surface is restricted if you can
become disoriented as to the egress direction. Limit penetration to less
than 50 feet.
c. Standby Diver. Provide a standby diver for each working unit or pair
of divers. The standby diver must be suited up and have all diving gear
available for immediate use. Position the standby diver to respond quickly
to the needs of the divers.
d. Buddy System. Conduct all scuba diving activities using a buddy
system, unless the Dive Master determines that two divers working in
close proximity will increase the hazards. A single diver may work alone,
subject to the following conditions:
1. The working depth does not exceed 20 feet, or 30 feet with
approval by the Dive Master and Safety Manager.
2. A standby diver is provided for the single diver.
3. The Dive Master, standby diver, and diver clearly understand that
the diver will be working alone.
4. The Dive Master, standby diver, and diver agree, in advance, on the
exact operation. The diver must not alter the agreed-upon operation or
stray from the prescribed locality.
29-10
October 2009
Section 29—Marine and Diving Operations
29.2.22 Surface-Supplied Air Diving. SSA diving is permitted only if
divers, standby divers, and console operators have successfully completed
SSA training by an RDAC-approved instructor from an accredited or
nationally recognized organization.
a. Air Supply. Each diving operation must have a primary breathing air
supply sufficient to support divers for the duration of the planned dive.
Air supply to SSA must be a manifold control system of scuba cylinders
that meet the criteria of this section or a volume tank specifically designed
for use in a breathing air system. A manifold system must be at least a
two-cylinder system and allow cylinders to be changed without shutting
down the air supply.
b. Air Quality. Respirable air that will be supplied to divers through
cylinders must be obtained from suppliers whose air is tested every 6
months by an independent tester. Respirable air must not contain:
1. Carbon monoxide greater than 10 ppm.
2. Carbon dioxide greater than 1,000 ppm.
3. Oil mist greater than 5 milligrams per cubic meter.
4. A noxious or pronounced odor.
c. Reserve Breathing Air. Equip each diver with a reserve breathing
supply that the diver can immediately turn on if the primary air source is
lost.
d. Umbilicals. Mark umbilicals in 10-foot increments to 100 feet,
beginning at the diver’s end, and in 50-foot increments thereafter.
Umbilicals must be made of kink-resistant materials. Include a safety line
as an integral part of each umbilical. Umbilicals must have a nominal
breaking strength of at least 1,000 pounds.
e. Helmets. SSA helmets and masks must have a check valve at the
attachment between the helmet or mask and hose. They must also have an
exhaust valve. Helmets and masks must have a minimum ventilation rate
capacity of 4.5 cubic feet per minute at the depth in which they are
operated.
f. Weight System. Equip divers with a weight belt that can release
quickly.
g. Safety Harness. Divers must wear a safety harness. The safety
harness must have a positive buckling device and an attachment point for
the umbilical and safety line.
h. Equipment Records. Record each equipment modification, repair,
test, calibration, or maintenance service in the equipment log.
October 2009 29-11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
i. Minimum Crew Size. At least two divers must be available on any
one diving operation. The standby diver must be suited up and ready to
dive in an emergency. The standby diver must not serve as a tender. The
crew must consist of at least four persons: the Dive Master, a diver, a
standby diver, and a tender. For each diver added to the crew, one tender
must also be added.
j. Dive Tender. While in the water, each diver must be continuously
tended by one tender.
k. Penetration Dive. Station an SSA diver at the underwater point of
entry when diving takes place in enclosed or physically confining area.
Limit penetration to 300 feet total distance.
I. Standby Diver. While a diver is in the water, the SSA standby diver
must be suited up and ready to dive in an emergency.
m. Communication System. All SSA diving operations require
electronic communication systems. The communication system must
provide diver-to-diver and diver-to-surface communication. If voice
communications are lost, terminate all diving.
29–12 October 2009
Contents for Appendices A-L
Appendix A - Job Hazard Analysis........................................................
Appendix B – Contractor Safety Program.............................................
Program Outline..........….
I. General Requirements...................................................................
II. Medical.….
III. Communications.........................................................................
IV. Occupational Health...................................................................
V. Machinery and Mechanical Equipment.......................................
VI. Excavation and Demolition........................................................
VII. Working Surfaces......................................................................
VIII. Protection of the Public............................................................
IX. Marine and Diving Operations...................................................
X. Electrical Facilities.......................................................................
XI. Required Safety Program Coordination......................................
Appendix C – Electrical Grounding........................................................
Low-Voltage Equipment Grounding..........................................................
Equipment Grounding.........................................................….
The Earth Shall Not Be Used as the Sole Equipment Grounding
Conductor…
A Grounding Electrode or Ground Rod is Not for the Purpose of
Clearing Ground Faults in Low-Voltage Circuits.............................
Building Steel is Not Permitted to be Used as the Required
Equipment Grounding Conductor (See NEC 250–58)......................
Reclamation Does Not Permit Conduit, Cable Tray, Electrical
Metallic Tubing (EMT), Liquidtite Conduit, Flexible
Conduit (Flex), or Any Other Conductive Raceways as
Equipment Grounding Conductors...................................................
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI), for 125-Volt, 15- and
20-Amp Receptacles Are Required in All Damp and
Wet (Conductive) Locations and Any Other Location Where
Conductive Material is Nearby.........................................................
Caution When Using Portable and Vehicle Mounted Generators..............
Portable and Vehicle (Trailer or Truck) Mounted Generators Do
Not Require Ground Rods ................................................................
Do Not Use Electrical Enclosure and Other Steel Structures as
Equipment Grounding Conductors...................................................
Electrical Enclosure........................................................~
Tools and Appliances..................................................................................
Portable Cords/Extension Cords.................................................................
C-3
C-3
C-4
C-4
C-4
C-4
C-5
C-5
C-5
October 2009
Append-i
Contents (continued)
Ground Fault Protection While Using Temporary Power..........................
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters...............................................................
Appendix D – Wire Rope .........................................................................
1.0 General.....….
1.1 General …
1.2 Materials.….
1.3 Terminology..........................….
2.0 Wire Rope End Connectors ...............................................................
2.1 General …
2.2 Wire Rope Clip Connectors ....................................................
2.3 Wedge Socket.....................................................….
2.4 Handmade Spliced Eyes..........................................................
2.5 Manufactured Eye Splices.......................................................
2.6 Average Efficiency of Well-Made End Connectors on
Terminals…
3.0 Common Safety Factors and Maximum (Safe) Working Loads .......
3.1 Safety Factors...................................................….
3.2 Maximum (Safe) Working Load .............................................
4.0 Inspection and Retirement of Wire Rope...........................................
Appendix E – Slings..................................................................................
Types..….
Definitions.….
Safe Practices.............….
Appendix F – Record of Performance Inspection and Test—Crawler,
Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes.........................................
General.…
Performance Inspection..............................................................................
Performance Test Procedure..............................................................
Computation of Test Radius..............................................................
Braking System Requirements and Test Procedures..................................
Part I - General...............................................….
Part II – Braking System, Features, Components, Accessories.........
Part III – Brake Testing Methods and Procedures.............................
Appendix G – Record of Performance Inspection and Brake Test—
On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment...........................................
General.….
Performance Inspection ..............................................................................
Append-ii - October 2009
Contents (continued)
Page
Brake Performance Test Record................................................................. G-4
Part I - General … G-4
Part II – Braking Systems Features, Components, Accessories,
and Performance Capabilities........................................................... G-4
Part III – Brake Testing Methods and Procedures ........................... G-6
Appendix H – Record of Performance—Inspection and Brake Test—
Off-Highway, Wheel-Type Construction Machines, Loaders,
Dumpers, Scrapers, Graders, Tractor Water Wagons, and
Similar-Type Machines ................................................................... H-1
General.…. H-1
Performance Inspection .............................................................................. H-1
Braking System Requirements and Test Procedures.................................. H-5
Part I - General.…. H-5
Part II – Braking Systems, Features, Components, and
Accessories … H-5
Part III – Brake Testing Methods and Procedures ........................... H-7
Appendix I – Cleanout Operations.......................................................... I-1
Appendix J – Explosives........................................................................... J–1
Appendix K – Glossary of Terms, Definitions, and Acronyms............. K-1
Appendix L – Referenced Material......................................................... L-1
October 2009 Append-iii
Appendix A
Job Hazard Analysis

Points of contact :
Phone number:
Requirements, including
training, certifications,
aurhorizations, permits, and
licenses:
Job Hazard Analysis #
Project: Job: Location:
Job description:
Analysis by: Reviewed by: Participants:
Date: Date:
Equipment:
Applicable regulatory considerations:
Sequence of Steps
Potential Accidents or Hazards
Preventive Measures (including
personal protective quipment)
1
|
1.
2.
3.
Tasks with Potential Exposure to Hazardous Materials, Physical Agents, or Hazardous Conditions
Analysis by: Reviewed by: Points of contact:
Date: Date:
Tasks Name of Material or Physical Agent | Location Control
1. 1. 1. 1.
* * * 2.
3. 3. 3. 3.
Job Inventory of Hazardous Chemicals
Analysis by: Reviewed by: Points of contact:
Date: Date:
Name of chemical Route of entry and physical state Controls
1. 1. 1.
2. 2. 2.
3. 3. 3.
October 2009 A-1
Appendix B
Contractor Safety Program
Unless waived by the Contracting Officer's Representative (COR), prime and
supplementary safety program submittals must, as a minimum, address all
appropriate contractual requirements shown under the program outline. Program
items will be so detailed that reviewers can ascertain adequacy. The original
program submittal can cover all work phases, or only address the initial work
phase with timely supplementary submittals as major work phases occur.
Contractors desiring to follow this latter course of action will, in the initial
submission, clearly define the original work covered and the work phases to be
covered by supplements.
In no case will any phase of work commence until a program for that portion of
the work has been accepted by the COR. Original and supplemental submissions
covering hazardous operations and/or activities will include a standing operating
procedure (SOP) and hazard analysis. The SOP will break down the operation or
activity into specific basic steps. The hazard analysis will define the hazards
associated with each basic step and proposed method(s) for eliminating or
minimizing the hazard. Such methods will outline, as a minimum, employee
training requirements, personal protective equipment requirements, procedural
changes, methods for evaluating program effectiveness, etc.
All activities involving use of hazardous and/or toxic materials, work in confined
spaces, work at heights over 6 feet, or underwater require an SOP and hazard
analysis. Material Safety Data Sheets will be attached to all SOPS governing
work that involves use of hazardous or toxic materials.
Program Outline
I. General Requirements
Statement of Policy
Statement of Safety and Health Responsibilities
Statement of Compliance with Regulations, Standards, and Codes
Statement of Subcontractor Compliance
Safety Inspection Procedures
Accident Investigation and Reporting Procedures
Applicable Emergency Plans
Confined Space Procedures
Lockout/Tagout Procedures
Fire Protection Plans
1. Type and location of suppression equipment or systems
2. Offsite assistance agreement
3. Temporary heating devices
October 2009 B-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
II. Medical
Facilities
Training
Certifications
Physician
Ambulance (Name, location, and telephone number)
Physical Qualification of Employees
. Records
III. Communications
A. Employee Training
B. Safety Meetings
C. Onsite Training
D. Supervisor Training
i
IV. Occupational Health
A. Procedures and Equipment to Minimize Hazards
B. Testing program for employees and work environments
C. Qualified personnel
D. Personal protective equipment
E. Ventilation plans
V. Machinery and Mechanical Equipment
A. Procedures and Equipment to Minimize Hazards
1. Testing program for employees and work environments
2. Mobile and stationary equipment
Inspection Procedures
Maintenance Procedures
Operating Personnel
Protective Safety Devices and Certifications
Elevators and Aerial Lifts
VI. Excavation and Demolition
A. Tunnels and Shafts
1. Internal combustion engines
2. Ventilation plans
3. Transportation systems and equipment
4. Work environment testing
5. Ground support
B. Blasting
1. Blaster certification
2. Written procedures
3. Storage
4. Transportation
B-2 October 2009
Appendix B-Contractor
C. Excavations Other Than Tunnels and Shafts
1. Slide protections
2. Support systems
3. Inspections
4. Access
D. High Scaling
1. Definition
2. Personal protective equipment
3. Standing operating procedure
E. Haulage
1. Haul roads
2. Equipment and Procedures
VII. Working Surfaces
A. Access
1. Ladders
2. Platforms, stairways, and ramps
B. Personal Protective Equipment
C. Scaffolding
D. Safety Nets
VIII. Protection of the Public
A. Signs and Barricades
B. Flagging Procedures
C. Jurisdictional Approvals
IX. Marine and Diving Operations
Detailed Plan and Written Procedures
X. Electrical Facilities
Substations
Safety Program
This outline provides guidance in preparing a safety program and does not cover
all material that may be necessary. The contractor must review specifications and
all safety and health regulations to ensure a comprehensive plan.
XI. Required Safety Program Coordination
1. Confined Space Program
2. Electrical and Lockout/Tagout Program
October 2009
B-3
Appendix C
Electrical Grounding
Low-Voltage Equipment Grounding
The most frequently cited Office of Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
electrical violation is improper occupational grounding of equipment or circuits
(Source: National Institute

of Safety and Health /
[NIOSH) publication 98-
131).
. conductors to
Equipment Grounding Z ...
Equipment grounding must
comply with the National
Electric Code (NEC) Article
250. All noncurrent-
carrying metal enclosures
for electrical equipment or
wiring must be grounded.
Equipment grounding means
a continuous copper
conductor connected
between the grounding
electrode (rod/grid)
connection, at the source
-e-
LL-T
Equipment Ground and
NS neutral to building
service disconnect below
“Down line”
*— grounding electrode
conductor from transformer
cans and neutral point of
transformer
Pole “butt ground,”
bare copper wire is
*— wrapped around
bottom of pole to serve
as “ground electrode”
or ground rod
Power conductors

_T from transformer
Neutral and equipment
transformer, and at each J U .” ground from transformer
enclosure and equipment Service disconnect
tº a circuit breaker or
frame. This 1S the moSt Building L^ fusible disconnect switch
critical concept 111 service ) ) )+1 Neutral conductor to
equipment groundin disconnect single phase
p 8. y— loads if needed
Figure C-1 (right) shows an N. l. A ſº - -
Equipment grounding
Outdoor three-phase supply | | conductor to
& -- - e. equipment enclosures
for a building remote from –
P duct
the powerplant and the ºnaution
building service disconnect. ſ
Ground rod
Note in figure C-1, between *~. ohm resistance to
earth is acceptable
the transformers and the Sec NEC 250-84
Service disconnect, the
grounded conductor Figure C-1.
(neutral) and the equipment
October 2009
C-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
grounding conductor is the same conductor. This is permitted only on the line
side of the service disconnect. On the load side of the service disconnect, the
neutral cannot be used as the equipment grounding conductor. Even though the
neutral may be needed for single-phase loads. There must be an equipment
grounding conductor, run from the service disconnect ground connection to each
enclosure and equipment frame (see NEC 250–23).
The Earth Shall Not Be Used as the Sole Equipment Grounding
Conductor
There must be an electrically continuous (unbroken) conductor, installed between
each electrical enclosure and the grounding electrode conductor (rod/grid/bed) at
the source transformer (see NEC 250–51).
As shown in figure C-2, connections-to-earth (ground rods) and the earth have a
resistance too high to be an effective equipment grounding conductor.
Breaker
/*TN — — — — —-

!/ Ground fault
Assume low
: \ resistance
2 connection
to earth
25 ohm
ground rod --
ZºS +- ŻNZN ZX
Fault current through earth
Figure C-2.
The most common misconception is that fault current is trying to “get to ground.”
The correct concept is that fault current uses the earth as a conductor to complete
the circuit back to the source transformer. The problem is that the earth, and
connections to earth, are not good conductors.
A Grounding Electrode or Ground Rod Is Not for the Purpose of
Clearing Ground Faults in Low-Voltage Circuits
A ground electrode or ground rod is intended to dissipate static, switching Surges,
and lightning. A ground rod and earth present a resistance too high for low-
voltage breakers and fuses to open quickly. There must be a low-impedance
equipment grounding conductor between each electrical enclosure and the Source
transformer grounding electrode.
During a ground fault, enough current must flow to open a breaker or fuse quickly
to prevent shock, electrocution, or equipment damage. Even a few ohms in the
grounding circuit will prevent, or greatly slow, the opening of a breaker or fuse.
C-2 October 2009
Appendix C–Electrical Grounding
If there is a ground fault and the circuit is not cleared, electrical enclosures, motor
frames, and other conductive structures such as handrails and walkways can
become energized. A person touching any of these may be shocked fatally or
electrocuted.
For example, if you do not have an equipment grounding conductor, but you do
have a good ground rod (NEC 250-84 indicates that a good ground rod is
25 ohms), Ohms law (I = V/R) gives the current flow. On a 480/277-volt system,
voltage to ground is 277 volts. Therefore, the ground fault current would only be:
I = 277/25 or 11 amps. This would not trip even a 15-amp breaker. In a 120-volt
circuit, only 10 ohms in the equipment grounding circuit will make a 15-amp
breaker fail to trip (I = 120/10 = 12 amps). This is not very much resistance; a
rusty bolt can easily add this to a grounding circuit. As mentioned above, a shock
or electrocution is the likely result. This illustrates why a low impedance
equipment grounding conductor is so important.
Equipment grounding conductors must be run with the circuit conductors (see
NEC 250-57b). This reduces impedance in the circuit facilitating opening the
breaker or fuse.
STATION SERVICE Building Steel Is Not
A B | C I *— Equipment grounding conductor Permitted to be Used aS
*—Transformer the Required Equipment
Grounding Conductor
P ris- (See NEC 250-58)
: tº -ºº º
480/277Y N–| | Neutral At right is a 3-phase
H-T EO transformer set-up inside a
is: plant. Due to high impedance,
( L_*\ rust and poor electrical
O sº O sº Q f |2 connections where steel beams
º:-tºi" || 3:. intersect. Building steel may
#| || "..." be used as the grounding
wº \º conductor. electrode (ground rod), but
Main bonding jumper &
wº Neutral terminal never as the equipment
To loads - ". ~ Equipment droundi duct grounding conductor. A
UIHOITTen TOUITCIIITC. COrl CIUCtC)r & *
. ". º: . Copp €I’ equipment gr ounding

conductor must be installed to
Fidure C–3.
Q each enclosure and load.
Reclamation Does Not Permit Conduit, Cable Tray, Electrical Metallic
Tubing (EMT), Liquidtite Conduit, Flexible Conduit (Flex), or Any
Other Conductive Raceways as Equipment Grounding Conductors
Time, rust, moisture, vibration, and temperature changes all reduce integrity of
the numerous electrical connections along the length of these enclosures. This
October 2009 C-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
increases resistance and prevents clearing the circuit in event of a ground fault.
Therefore, Reclamation requires a copper grounding conductor be run with the
power conductors from the source transformer grounding electrode connection to
all enclosures and equipment frames, such as motor starters, motors, junction
boxes, breaker panels, control panels, heaters, light fixtures, etc. Portable hand
lamps with metal guards must also be grounded (see NEC 410-42b).
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI), for 125-Volt, 15- and
20-Amp Receptacles Are Required in All Damp and Wet (Conductive)
Locations and Any Other Location Where Conductive Material Is
Nearby
Any location is considered a damp/wet/conductive location if floors/walls are
concrete, cinder block, or tile (see NEC 110-16(a)0. Outside locations require
GFCI protection. Bathrooms, kitchens, shops and most other locations at
Reclamation facilities are conductive locations and require GFCIS (see NEC
Article 210, 1999 edition). If the standing surface is conductive material, or if
grounded conductive material is within reach of a tool/appliance after it is
plugged into a receptacle, the circuit must be GFCI protected. GFCIS must be
tested each month or before each use by pressing the test button. Do not use a
GFCI tester, as many of the designs are incorrect for proper testing.
Caution When Using Portable and Vehicle Mounted Generators
Reclamation requires GFCIs on all 120-volt receptacles mounted on any
generator or vehicle frame. Most portable/vehicle-mounted generators have
regular 120-volt receptacles without GFCIs. The neutrals are seldom grounded
by the factory. See FIST 5-3 for the proper method to ground the neutrals and
replace regular 120-volt receptacles with GFCIs on these generators. This work
must be done by qualified electricians.
Portable and Vehicle (Trailer or Truck) Mounted Generators Do Not
Require Ground Rods
If the aforementioned generators power only loads on the vehicle (such as lights),
or if they power only cord and plug connected equipment from receptacles on the
generator or vehicle, then they do not require grounds (see NEC 250-6). All
neutrals on 120/24-volt generators must be grounded (FIST 5-3), and ground pins
of the 125-volt receptacles (GFCIs) must be bonded to the generator frame (not
the vehicle frame).
Do Not Use Electrical Enclosures and Other Steel Structures as
Equipment Grounding Conductors
For example, in the paragraph above, if the ground pins were bonded to a trailer
frame, fault current would have to travel from the grounding pin to the steel frame
C-4 October 2009
Appendix C–Electrical Grounding
of the trailer, along the steel trailer frame, to the generator frame, then to the
generator winding. A rusty bolt or weld can add enough resistance to prevent
opening a circuit breaker or fuse.
Electrical Enclosure
Inside an electrical enclosure, all grounding conductors must terminate on the
same grounding connection. If there is more than one termination point for
grounding conductors, a copper jumper must be installed between these two
points, so the total grounding circuit will be copper. If this is not done, fault
current must use the steel of the box and connections to the steel box as part of the
equipment grounding conductor. Steel rusts and is not as good a conductor as
copper; in addition, vibration and temperature changes loosen threaded
connections. This adds resistance to the equipment grounding path and can easily
prevent opening the breaker or fuse. Enclosures, walkways, and other conductive
structures become energized. A shock or electrocution is the likely result.
Tools and Appliances
NEC 250-114 requires all cord and plug connected tools and appliances to be
grounded. There are three exceptions that apply to powerplant usage:
1. Double insulated tools and appliances do not need to be grounded. Tools
and appliances must be “listed.” This means it must carry an Underwriters
Laboratory (UL) or other testing laboratory label. In addition, it must be
clearly marked “Double Insulated.” It is recommended that Reclamation use
“double insulated” tools and appliances whenever possible. Independent
testing laboratories have proven, through testing, that double insulated tools
are “no less safe” or even more safe than grounded tools.
2. Tools and portable hand lamps are not required to be grounded if they are
Supplied through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary of
not over 50 volts.
3. Toasters that may be in lunch rooms must not be grounded. Toasters do
not appear in article 250 of the NEC; however, it has been addressed and
tested by UL and has been found safer to remain ungrounded. UL testing and
experience has shown that one will insert a knife or fork into the slots to
remove stuck toast. Heating elements can easily be touched with a knife or
fork while it is against the case, causing arcs, sparks, and perhaps a shock if
the toaster is grounded. Therefore, toasters are to remain as they come from
the manufacturer (that is, ungrounded).
Portable Cords/Extension Cords
All extension cords used at Reclamation facilities must be the grounding type.
Never use an extension cord that has a missing ground pin, a damaged jacket, or a
October 2009 C-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
jacket that is pulled away from an end cord connector. All cords must be
U.L. listed and be rated for “hard usage” or “extra hard usage.” See NEC
Table 400-4 for cord types and permitted usage. All cords used in Reclamation
powerplants or construction sites must be rated for damp locations and/or outdoor
use. The NEC article ratings show “damp locations.” UL and some
manufacturers rate some cords for “outdoor use.” Either of these are acceptable
for general use around Reclamation powerplants or construction sites. Cords that
must be underwater must be rated “submersible.” Some “outdoor-use” rated
cords are also rated for submersible use; however, the specific manufacturer must
be contacted to determine this use.
Caution: Standard SO cord with “jute” or paper filler is not suitable for use in
wet or submersible locations. Jute and paper are natural fibers and will act as a
wick, pulling water along the inside of the cord to electrical connections if the
cord is nicked and is in a wet location.
Depending on the application, the following cord types and markings are
permitted for portable cords or cables at Reclamation facilities. Others are also
permitted if the applications meet NEC article 400 requirements. See NEC article
400 for ampacities and acceptable cord uses. See NEC 400-8 for uses not
permitted.
“Water Resistant” indicates the cord is suitable for immersion in water; however,
it may not be suitable for extended use outdoors, as it is not sunlight (UV)
resistant. “W’’ indicates suitability for use outdoors and for immersion in water.
“Outdoor” or “W-A” indicates suitability for use outdoors but not for submersion
in water.
Some manufacturers make “Water Resistant,” “Outdoor,” “W-A,” and type “W’’
as all the same cord but marked with only one of the above designations. Check
with the supplier or manufacturer if there is a question of proper application of a
cord or cable.
Do not run over portable cords or cables with pickup trucks, fork trucks or other
vehicles. The internal conductors can be crushed together and cause ground faults
and line-to-neutral faults. This is impossible to detect by looking at the outer cord
jacket. When it is plugged into a receptacle for use with a tool, the tool case can
become energized, causing a shock or electrocution. If a cord cannot be
unplugged, build a protective bridge for the cord out of boards or other material.
Ground Fault Protection While Using Temporary Power
This applies to Reclamation and contractor activities involving temporary wiring
used to supply power for equipment or tools during construction, maintenance,
repair, remodeling, or similar activities (see NEC 305-6).
Ground fault protection for personnel shall be provided for all temporary wiring
installations to comply with the paragraph below.
C-6 October 2009
Appendix C–Electrical Grounding
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters
All 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-amp receptacles that are not a part of the
permanent wiring of a building or structure, and that are in use by personnel shall
have GFCI protection. Cord sets that have built in GFCIs are permitted. This
applies to all extension cords and portable generators (see the above sections
where these items are covered).
125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-amp receptacles that are a part of the
permanent wiring of a building or structure require GFCIs in all conductive areas.
October 2009 C-7
Appendix D
Wire Rope
1.0 General
Data included in this appendix and the section on “Slings, Chains, and
Accessories” include general information and specific requirements about the
design and construction characteristics of commonly used wire rope and
accessories.
1.1 General. Wire rope design and construction characteristics shown in this
appendix are for reference only. Manufacturer’s specification data may differ from
these and must be used in determining safe working loads and proper application.
1.2 Materials. Wire rope may be manufactured from many grades and types of
steel and alloys. They may be constructed from nonferrous materials or coated
wires. Some of the more common grades with the differing designations are as
follows:
a. Improved plow steel—monitor steel—purple grade–Level 3 steel'
b. Extra improved plow steel—monitor AA grade—purple plus—Level 4
steel'.”
1.3 Terminology. Cross section AA.
General view.
1.3.1 Wire Rope. Figure D-1 shows the general terminology, structure,
and cross-sectional views of wire rope.
1.3.2 Cores for Wire Rope. The core is the central member about which
the main strands are laid. The principal function of the core is to provide a
bearing for the strand. This foundation maintains the proper lateral
position of the strands and permits their relative longitudinal motion in
adjusting the distribution of stress. Figure D-2 shows the three common
types of cores used in wire rope.
1.3.3 Wire Rope Lays. The lay direction of a wire rope is the direction in
which the strands rotate around the rope, as seen receding from the
observer and viewed from above. The lay direction of outer wires of a
single strand is determined in the same manner. Figure D-3 shows the
Various lay combinations.
'These two major grade classifications and corresponding rope breaking strengths may vary
with different manufacturer’s and date of manufacturing.
* Application of these high strengths should be under the direction of manufacturer or a
professional engineer.
October 2009 D-1
O? YOº,
e.9e Oº eSe
Q. Sºoººººººſe
CºSQo X; SOºººo
OſCSPO4.3: O'S
© CŞe
•ºf O COre
O Center
•º §
OCONº O OSº Oc O
© CO
wires in each strand
Orº O
* refers to the number of
Cross section AA.
General and cross sectional views showing general structure and ter-
minology of wire ropes. Wire rope shown is a class 6X 19, of the 6X25
filler wire type VV construction. The rope is made up of
six 25-wire
strands. The strands are each laid 12-6-6-1; that is 12 Outer wires,
Strand
6 refers to the
number of strands
in the rope
General view.
Filier Wire - Filler wire Type W
indicates that some of the wires
are very small and have the
primary purpose of supporting the
other wires in the strand.
six filler wires, six inner wires, one center wire.
Figure D-1.-General terminology, structure, and cross-sectional views of wire rope.








º
Appendix D–Wire Rope
FIBER CORE (FC)
Natural fibers such as
sisal, cotton, and jute;
synthetic filaments such
as polypropylene
.*.*.*.C. O
º
O *:::::::: 2e
O
INDEPENDENT WIRE
ROPE CORE (WRC)
A small wire rope used
as a core in a Irger rope
$$.”
232*, *222
sº
O
22*.*222
sceºsº
ege
WIRE STRAND CORE
(WSC)
A single strand used as
a core in a wire rope
Figure D-2.—Three common types of cores used in wire rope.
One wire rope lay-length
Figure D-3.−Various combinations
of wire rope lays.


October 2009
D-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
The lay as a unit of measure is the length a single strand extends in
making one complete turn around the rope. Lay length is measured in a
straight line parallel to the centerline of the rope; not by following the path
of the Strand.
RIGHT
Measure the larger
dimension, be-
tween the outer lim-
its of the strands.
WRONG
Do not measure
the smaller dimen-
sion a cross the
‘‘flats’’ of the
strands.
Figure D-4.—Right and wrong way to
measure rope diameter.
Nuts are heavy hexagon.
U-Bolt Clips
Drop-Forged Steel Base, Galvanized
Figure D-5.—U-bolt clip construction details.
1.3.4. Rope Diameter. Figure D-4
shows the right and wrong way to
measure rope diameter.
1.3.5 Rope Class. Wire rope is
designed by class: 6x7 (6 strands,
7 wires); 6x19 (6 strands, 19 main
wires per strand); 6x37 (6 strands,
nominally 37 wires per strand).
When “nominally” is used, the
number of wires per strand may
vary significantly (i.e., 6x19
nominal may have from 9 to
26 wires per strand).
2.0 Wire Rope End
Connectors (fittings, end
attachments, terminals)
2.1 General. Choosing proper end
connectors (fittings) to be used with
wire rope is second in importance
only to selecting the rope itself.
Connectors are subjected to the same
loads as the wire rope used and must
be properly designed and built to
withstand the stresses imposed on
them.
2.2 Wire Rope Clip Connectors.
Wire rope clip connectors may use
the U-bolt type or the twin base clip
(“First” grip, double saddle) type.
Use only new clips in making wire
rope clip connectors.
2.2.1 U-bolt Type Clip. U-bolt clips
shall be constructed of drop-forged
steel bases protected by an



October 2009
Appendix D–Wire Rope
application of a galvanized zinc coating (see figure D-5). Approximate dimensions
and construction details are shown in table D-1.

Table D-1.-Dimensions for U-bolt clips
Dimensions Approxi-
Rope (inches) mate
diameter weight
(inches) A D E K N O T Y (pounds)
1/8 13/16 7/32 7/16 25/64 15/16 16/32 23/32 16/16 .05
3/16 15/16 1/4 8/16 1/2 1–7/32 19/32 31/32 1–5/32 .08
1/4 1-3/16 5/18 5/8 21/32 1-1 1/32 3/4 1-1/32 1–7/16 .17
5/16 1–5/16 3/8 3/4 23/32 1-1 1/16 7/8 1–5/16 1-1 1/16 .30
3/8 1–5/8 7/16 13/16 28/32 1-15/16 1 1-1/2 1-15/16 .41
7/16 1–13/16 1/2 1-1/16 1-1/84 2–3/8 1-3/16 1–7/8 2–8/32 .65
1/2 1–29/32 1/2 1-1/16 1-1/8 2–3/8 1-3/16 1–7/8 2–9/32 .75
9/16 2-1/16 9/16 1–7/16 1–7/32 2–13/16 1–5/16 2-1/4 2–31/64 1.00
5/8 2-1/16 9/16 1–7/16 1-1 1/32 || 2–13/16 1–5/16 2-1/4 2-1/2 1.00
3/4 2-1/4 5/8 1-9/16 1–25/84 || 3–3/8 1-1/2 2-3/4 2–27/32 1.40
7/8 2-1 1/16 3/4 1–13/16 || 1–5/8 3–7/8 1-3/4 3-1/8 3-1 1/32 2.40
1 2–5/8 3/4 2-1/8 1–49/84 || 4-1/4 1–7/8 3-1/2 3–15/32 2.50
1-1/8 2–13/16 3/4 2-1/4 1–28/32 || 4-5/8 2 3–7/8 3–18/32 3.00
1-1/4 3-1/8 7/8 2-1/2 2-1 1/64 5-1/8 2–5/16 4-1/4 4–1/8 4.50
1-3/8 3–1/8 7/8 2–1 1/16 || 2–5/16 5-1/2 2–3/8 4-5/8 4–3/16 5.20
1-1/2 3–17/32 7/8 2–13/16 || 2–23/32 5–13/16 2–19/32 || 4–15/16 || 4–5/16 5.90
1–5/8 3–5/8 1 2–7/8 2–21/32 || 6-5/16 2-3/4 5–5/16 4-3/4 7.30
1-3/4 3–1 3/16 1-1/8 3–3/16 2–58/64 || 6-7/8 3–1/16 5-3/4 5–9/32 9.80
2 4–7/16 1-1/4 3–5/8 3–9/32 7-1 1/16 3–3/8 6–7/16 5–7/8 13.40
2-1/4 4–9/16 1-1/4 4 3-15/16 || 8–3/8 3–7/8 7-1/8 6–3/8 15.70
2-1/2 4-1 1/16 1-1/4 4–3/8 4–7/16 8–15/16 4–1/8 7-1 1/16 || 6-5/8 17.90
2-3/4 5 1-1/4 4-1/2 4–7/8 9–8/16 4–3/8 8–5/16 6–7/8 22.00
3 5–5/16 1-1/2 5–1/32 5–1 1/32 10-1 1/16 4–3/4 9–2/16 7–5/8 30.50
There is only one correct way to attach U-bolt clips to wire rope ends.
The base of the clip bears on the live end of the rope; the “U” of the bolt
bears on the dead end with a thimble installed in the eye (see figure D-6).
The approximate number of clips and their spacing distance is shown in
table D-2 and figure D-7. Consult the clip manufacturer for exact number
of clips required and spacing dimensions.
2.2.2 Twin Base Clips. Twin base clips must be constructed of drop
forged steel bases protected by an application of zinc coating (galvanized).
Approximate dimension and construction details are shown in table D-3.
Number of clips and their spacings are the same as shown for U-bolt clips.
Twin-base clips are installed as shown in figure D-8. Because of their
special design, there is no top or bottom, and they cannot be installed
incorrectly.
Additional information on installation of wire rope clips is in the Rigging
Manual.
October 2009 D-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
2.2.3 Joining Wire Ropes. Figure D-9 shows an acceptable method for
joining wire ropes using a combination of clips and thimbles.
The right way to clip wire rope
Figure D-6.-Right and wrong way to clip wire rope.
Table D-2.—Dimensions of twin-base clips
Dimensions
Rope (inches)
diameter N
(inches) A B D d J K L approx
1/4 15/16 1-1/4 1/4 3/8 1-1/4 21/64. 1/2 1–5/8
5/16 1-1/16 || 1–1 1/32 || 5/16 3/8 1-16/32 7/16 5/8 1-15/16
3/8 1-1/16 || 1–37/64 || 3/8 7/16 1–13/16 31/64 3/4 2–3/8
7/16 1-1/4 1–7/8 7/16 1/2 2–1 1/64 9/16 1 2-3/4
1/2 1-1/4 1–7/8 1/2 1/2 2–1 1/64 9/16 1 2-3/4
9/16 1-1/2 2–8/32 8/16 5/8 2-1 1/16 1 1/16 1-1/4 3-1/2
5/8 1-1/2 2–8/32 5/8 5/8 2-1 1/16 1 1/16 1-1/4 3-1/2
3/4 1-3/4 2–27/64 || 3/4 5/8 2-3/4 55/64 1-1/2 3–3/8
7/8 2-1/8 2–61/64 || 7/8 3/4 3–5/16 31/32 1-3/4 4-1/8
1 2-1/4 3–1/16 1 3/4 3–23/32 1-3/16 2 4-5/8
1-1/8 2–5/16 || 3–3/16 1-1/8 3/4 4–3/32 1–8/32 2-1/4 5
1-1/4 2-1/2 3–8/16 1-1/4 7/8 4–1/4 1-1 1/32 || 2-1/2 5-1/4
1-3/8 3 4–1/8 1-3/8 1 5–9/16 1-9/16 2-3/4 7
1-1/2 3 4–1/8 1-1/2 1 5–9/16 1-9/16 3 7

D-6 October 2009
Appendix D–Wire Rope
Diameter of
Rope No. Clips for
inches Each Rope End"
%s 3
% 3
%s 3
% 3
%s 3
% 3
% 3
% 3
% 4.
1 4.
1-A, 5
1.% 5
1-3% 6
1-3/, 6
1.5% 6
1-94 6
2 6
Number of Clips
D=6 times rope diameter
Clip Spacing
Figure D-7.—Spacing dimensions for clips.
Table D-3.−Approximate design safety factors for wire rope
Approximate
Type of service safety factors
a. Mobile Cranes
Running ropes 3.5
Standing or pendant lines 3.0
b. Overhead and gantry cranes 5.0
c. Overhead hoists (underslung) 5.0
d. Portal, tower, pillar cranes
Running ropes 3.5
Standing ropes 3.0
e. Hammer head tower Cranes 5.0
f. Power passenger and freight elevators 7–12
g. Rope guided Workmen hoist
Hoist ropes 8.9
Guide ropes 7.0
h. Personnel hoists 8–11
i. Derricks
Guy 3.0
Hoist 3.5
j. Slings 5.0
k. Material hoists 7.0

October 2009
D-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Nuts are heavy hexagon.
Twin-Base Clips
Drop-Forged Steel, Galvanized
Figure D-8.—Twin-base clip installation.
Figure D-9.-Wire ropes joined with clips and thimbles.
2.3 Wedge Socket. The construction industry uses wedge sockets
extensively because they attach easily to a wire rope. In applying the
Socket, the live rope should lead out of the socket in a straight line. Figure
D-10 shows a wedge socket. Figure D-11 shows two recommended
methods of attaching the socket to the wire rope.



D-8 October 2009
Appendix D–Wire Rope
Figure D-10.-Wedge socket.
Method Using a Small Piece The extended wedge method
Clipped to the Dead End
T = 6 x rope
diameter
(minimum)
but not less
than 150mm
(6 inches)
S = approx.
3 x rope
diameter
or 75mm
(3 inches)
A small piece of rope is cut and clipped In the extended wedge method,
to the dead end. This method is good for the wedge has an extension that
regular rope and approved by ASME accommodates a clip. Once the
B30.5. Distance “S” should be approxi- nuts are torqued, loading of the
mately 3X rope diameter or 3 inches, socket automatically results in
whichever is less. proper seating.
Figure D-11-Two recommended methods of attaching the socket to the wire rope.
Regularly inspect the integrity of the wire rope at the point of exit at the dead-end
side. High-velocity spin of wire rope when loading and unloading causes the rope
to flip-flop, fatigue, and finally break off. When the wire rope has delivered each
one-fifth of service life, remove the portion through the wedge and move the wedge
up the rope to a new location.



October 2009 D-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
2.4 Handmade Spliced Eyes. Spliced eyes are frequently used as wire rope end
attachments (see figure D-12). They must incorporate rope thimbles to maintain
rope strength and reduce wear. Because of the many forms of eye splices and the
varying efficiencies, do not use these types of attachments in slings or hoisting
Operations.
Figure D-12.-Example of a handmade spliced eye.
2.5 Manufactured Eye Splices. Manufactured eye splices, such as flemish eye,
flemish eye plus serving, and flemish eye plus pressed metal sleeve are the most
efficient attachments and should be considered for all hoisting operations. The zinc
and Swagged sockets are an excellent attachment for use in permanent nonmovable-
type installation such as pendant lines and guy wires. They, like the manufactured
eyes, must be constructed by well-trained, qualified personnel to ensure reliability.
2.6 Average Efficiency of Well-Made End Connectors on Terminals
a. Standard open and closed sockets.
Attached with pure molten zinc: 100 percent
b. Flemish eye and pressed metal sleeve
or swaged sockets on IWRC rope: 100 percent
c. Mechanically spliced eyes: 90 percent
d. Handmade eye splices: 80–90 percent
e. U-bolt clips (drop forged, new): 70-80 percent
f. Cast steel wedge sockets: - 70 percent
Note: Percentages relate to rope breaking strength (i.e., a swaged socket has the
same strength (100 percent) of the wire rope.

D-10 October 2009
Appendix D–Wire Rope
3.0 Common Safety Factors and Maximum (Safe) Working Loads
3.1 Safety Factors. The total stress in a wire rope, in service, is composed of
several separate elements. These are reduced to a single tensile load value. When
this value exceeds the breaking strength of the wire rope, a failure occurs.
The factor to provide a margin of safety between the applied tensile forces and the
breaking strength of the rope is defined as the factor of safety.
Minimum safety factors for wire rope used in different types of service are
contained in national standards (i.e., ANSI 17.1 safety code for elevators and
escalators, ANSI/ASME B30.5 Mobile and Locomotive Cranes).
Table D-3 shows a partial compilation of approximate design safety factors. Refer
to appropriate standards for precise requirements.
3.2 Maximum (Safe) Working Load. Calculate the maximum safe working load
of wire rope, dividing the manufacturers’ supplied breaking strength by the safety
factor.
Example: Calculate the maximum safe working load of a single-leg sling
made from a 1/2-inch-diameter, 6X19 class wire rope constructed of
improved plow steel (purple grade) material with poured zinc fittings and
an independent wire rope core (IWRC).
(1) Obtain the breaking strength of the wire rope from the 6X19 class
table shown under paragraph 2.4.1 of this appendix (11.5 tons or
23,000 pounds).
(2) Find the appropriate safety factor (5) for slings from table D-3 or
from subsection 17.4 of the text.
(3) Divide the breaking strength (23,000 pounds) by the safety
factor (5) to obtain the maximum (safe) working load (4,600 pounds).
Max (safe) working load = 23,000 pounds = 4.600 pounds (1)
5 2
Conversely, to determine the actual safety factor under any condition of loading,
multiply the rope breaking strength by the number of parts of line under load and
divide this product by the actual working load.
Example: Using a 1/2-inch-diameter, 6X19 class wire rope with the
breaking strength shown, in a two-part line hoisting operation with a
maximum load including weight of blocks, hooks, etc., of 9,200 pounds,
calculate the actual safety factor.
23,000 pounds X 2 46,000 pounds – 5 safety factor
9,200 pounds 9,200 pounds
October 2009 D-11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Note: Consult the table of required safety factors or specify safety factor
requirements contained in national standards to determine what type of
service this specific hoisting system can be used for. In any service
requiring a safety factor of 5 or less, the system would be satisfactory. In
any system requiring a safety factor greater than 5, the system would be
unsatisfactory.
Exercise caution in using this simplified method of calculation as some dynamic
forces may need to be included in the maximum loading figure. Also, other factors
such as sheave diameters, friction losses, hot environments, etc., may require higher
safety factors.
4.0 Inspection and Retirement of Wire Rope
Eventually, all wire ropes deteriorate to the point that they are no longer safe for
use. The frequency of inspections, the extent of the inspection, and the criteria for
condemning wire ropes vary greatly for each type of service. Inspection
frequencies and rope retirement criteria are usually found in specific national
standards. If no standards exist for the type of service anticipated, the rope or
equipment manufacturer or a professional engineer must develop the criteria. In
no case shall the rope retirement criteria allow rope to be continued in any
hoisting or load carrying service when one or more of the following deficiencies
eX1St.
(a) Ropes are not of proper size, grade, or construction for the particular
performance or function.
(b) In running ropes, six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or three
broken wires in one strand in one rope lay. (A rope lay is the length along the rope
in which one strand makes a complete revolution around the rope.)
(c) In pendants or standing ropes, evidence of more than one broken wire in one lay.
(d) Abrasion, scrubbing, or peening causing loss of more than one-third of the
original diameter of the outside wires.
(e) Evidence of severe corrosion.
(f) Severe kinking, crushing, or other damage resulting in distortion of the rope
Structure.
(g) Evidence of any heat damage from a torch or arc caused by contact with
electrical wires.
(h) Reduction from nominal rope diameter of more than 3/64 inch for diameters up
to and including 3/4 inch; 1/16 inch for diameters 7/8 to 1-1/8 inches; and 3/32 inch
for diameters 1-1/4 inch to 1-1/2 inches. Marked reduction in diameter indicates
D-12 October 2009
Appendix D–Wire Rope
deterioration of the core, resulting in lack of proper support for the load carrying
strands. Excessive rope stretch or elongation may also indicate internal
deterioration.
(i) Evidence of “bird caging” or other distortion resulting in some members of the
rope structure carrying more load than others.
(j) Noticeable rusting or development of broken wires in the vicinity of attachments.
See separate appendix on “Slings” for retirement criteria for wire rope used in
slings.
October 2009 D–13
Appendix E
Slings
Types
This appendix covers the types of slings made from alloy steel chain, wire rope,
metal mesh, synthetic fiber rope (conventional, three-strand construction),
synthetic web (nylon, polyester, and polypropylene), and synthetic round slings.
Definitions
“Angle of loading” is the inclination of a leg or branch of a sling measured from
the horizontal or vertical plane, provided that an angle of loading of 5 degrees or
less from the vertical may be considered a vertical angle of loading.
“Basket hitch” is a sling configuration in which the sling is passed under the load
and has both ends, end attachments, eyes, or handles on the hook or a single
master link.
“Braided wire rope” is a wire rope formed by plaiting component wire ropes.
“Bridle wire rope sling” is a sling composed of multiple wire rope legs with the
top ends gathered in a fitting that goes over the lifting hook.
“Cable-laid endless sling-mechanical joint” is a wire rope sling made endless by
joining the ends of a single length of cable-laid rope with one or two more
metallic fittings.
“Cable-laid grommet-hand tucked” is an endless wire rope sling made from one
length of rope wrapped six times around a core formed by hand tucking the ends
of the rope inside the six wraps.
“Cable-laid rope” is a wire rope composed of six wire ropes wrapped around a
fiber or wire rope core.
“Cable-laid rope sling-mechanical joint” is a wire rope sling made from a cable-
laid rope with eyes fabricated by pressing or swaging one or more metal sleeves
over the rope function.
“Choker hitch” is a sling configuration with one end of the sling passing under the
load and through an end attachment, handle, or eye on the other end of the sling.
“Coating” is an elastomer or other suitable material applied to a sling, or to a sling
component, to impart desirable properties.
“Cross rod” is a wire used to join spirals of metal mesh to form a complete fabric.
“Fabric (metal mesh)” is the flexible portion of a metal mesh sling consisting of a
series of transverse coils and cross rods.
October 2009 . E-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
“Female handle (choker)” is a handle with a handle eye and a slot sized to permit
passage of a male handle, thereby allowing the use of a metal mesh sling in a
choker hitch.
“Handle” is a terminal fitting to which metal mesh fabric is attached.
“Handle eye” is an opening in a handle of a metal mesh sling, shaped to accept a
hook, shackle, or other lifting device.
“Hitch” is a sling configuration in which the sling is fastened to an object or load,
either directly to it or around it.
“Link” is a single ring of a chain.
“Male handle (triangle)” is a handle with a handle eye.
“Master coupling link” is an alloy steel, welded coupling link used as an
intermediate link to join alloy steel chain to master links.
“Master link” or “gathering ring” is a forged or welded steel link used to support
all members (legs) of an alloy steel chain sling or wire rope sling.
“Mechanical coup link” is a nonwelded, mechanically closed, steel link used to
attach master links, hooks, etc., to alloy steel chain.
“Proof load” is the load applied when performing a proof test.
“Proof test” is a nondestructive tension test performed by the sling manufacturer,
or an equivalent entity, to verify construction and workmanship of a sling.
“Rated capacity” or “working load limit” is the maximum working load
permitted.
“Reach” is the effective length of an alloy steel chain sling measured from the top
bearing surface of the upper terminal component to the bottom bearing surface of
the lower terminal component.
“Selvage edge” is the finished edge of synthetic webbing designed to prevent
unraveling.
“Sling” is an assembly that connects the load to the material handling equipment.
“Sling manufacturer” is a person or organization that assembles sling components
into their final form for sale to testers.
“Spiral” is a single transverse coil that is the basic element that metal mesh is
fabricated from.
“Strand laid endless sling-mechanical joint” is a wire rope sling made endless
from one length of rope with the ends joined by one or more metallic fittings.
E-2 October 2009
Appendix E–Slings
“Strand laid grommet-hand tucked” is an endless wire rope sling made from one
length of strand wrapped six times around a core, formed by hand-tucking the
ends of the strand inside the six wraps.
“Strand laid rope” is a wire rope made with strands (usually six or eight) wrapped
around a fiber core, wire strand core, or independent wire rope core (IWRC).
“Vertical hitch” is a method of supporting a load by a single, vertical part or leg
of the sling.
Safe Practices
Whenever any sling is used, observe the following practices:
(1) Do not use damaged or defective slings.
(2) Do not shorten slings with knots, bolts, or other makeshift devices, or
kink sling legs.
(3) Do not load slings in excess of their rated capacities.
(4) Balance the loads of slings used in a basket hitch to prevent slippage.
(5) Securely attach slings to their loads.
(6) Pad or protect slings from the sharp edges of their loads.
(7) Keep suspended loads clear of all obstructions.
(8) Keep all employees clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended
loads.
(9) Do not place hands or fingers between the sling and its load while the
sling is being tightened around the load.
(10) Prohibit shock loading.
(11) Do not pull a sling from under a load when the load is resting on the
Sling.
(12) Do not drag slings on the floor or over an abrasive surface.
October 2009 E-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table E-1.-Correction table to compensate for chain link wear

Original nominal
Reduce safe working
Load by following % when
diameter at worn section is
chain stock as follows Remove from service
diameter (inches) when diameter Is
(inches) 5% 10% (inches)
1/4 = 0.250 0.244 0.237 0.233
3/8 = 0.375 0.366 0.356 0.335
1/2 = 0.500 0.487 0.474 0.448
5/8 = 0.625 0.609 0.593 0.559
3/4 = 0.750 0.731 0.711 0.671
7/8 = 0.875 0.853 0.830 0.783
1 = 1.000 0.975 0.949 0.895
1 1/8 = 1.125 1.100 1,070 1.010
1 1/4 = 1.250 1.220 1. 190 1.120
1 3/8 = 1.375 1.340 1.310 1.230
1 1/2 = 1.500 1.460 1,430 1.340
1 5/8 = 1.625 1.590 1.540 1.450
1 3/4 = 1.750 1.7.10 1,660 1.570
1 7/8 = 1.875 1.830 1.780 1.680
2 = 2.000 1.950 1.900 1,790
E-4 October 2009
i
#

Double sling Triple and quadruple sling
Single Vertical angle' Vertical angle"
Chain breach
size, Sling– 30 degree 45 degree 60 degree 30 degree 45 degree 60 degree
inches 90-degree Horizontal angle: Horizontal angle”
leading
60 degree 45 degree 30 degree 60 degree 45 degree 30 degree
1/4 3,250 5,560 4,550 3,250 8,400 6,800 4,900
3/8 6,600 11,400 9,300 6,600 17,000 14,000 9,900
1/2 11,250 19,500 15,900 11,250 29,000 24,000 17,000
5/8 16,500 28,500 23,300 16,500 43,000 35,000 24,500
3/4 23,000 39,800 32,500 23,000 59,500 48,500 34,500
7/8 28,750 49,800 40,600 28,750 74,500 61,000 43,000
1 38,750 67,100 54,800 38,750 101,000 82,000 58,000
1 – 1/8 44,500 77,000 63,000 44,500 115,500 94,500 66,500
1 – 1/4 57,500 99,500 81,000 57,500 149,000 121,500 86,000
1-3/8 67,000 116,000 94,000 67,000 174,000 141,000 100,500
1-1/2 80,000 138,000 112,900 80,000 207,000 169,000 119,500
1-3/4 100,000 172,000 140,000 100,000 258,000 210,000 150,000
" Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading, measured as the included angle between the inclined leg and the vertical.
* Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading, between the inclined leg and the horizontal plane of the load.
* Other grades of proof-tested steel chains include Proof Coil, BBB Coil, and Hi-Test Chain. These grades are not recommended for
Table E-2.-Safe working load (working load limit) for alloy steel chain slings (pounds)
overhead lifting and, therefore, are not covered by these standards.
.

Table E-3.-Safe working load for single leg slings 6 x 19 and 6 x 37 classification improved plow steel grade rope with fiber
core (FC)
Rope Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Vertical Choker Vertical basket'
Diameter Constr
(inches) HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S
1/4 6 x 19 0.49 0.51 0.55 0.37 0.38 0.41 0.99 1.0 1.1
5/16 6 X 19 0.76 0.79 0.85 0.57 0.59 0.64 1.5 1.6 1.7
3/8 6 x 19 1.1 1.1 1.2 0.80 0.85 0.91 2.1 2.2 2.4
7/16 6 X 19 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.9 3.0 3.3
% 6 X 19 1.8 2.0 2.1 1.4 1.5 1.6 3.7 3.9 4.3
9/16 6 X 19 2.3 2.5 2.7 1.7 1.9 2.0 4.6 5.0 5.4
5/8 6 X 19 2.8 3.1 3.3 2.1 2.3 2.5 5.6 6.3 6.7
3/4 6 X 19 3.9 4.4 4.8 2.9 3.3 3.6 7.8 8.5 9.5
7/8 6 x 1.9 5. 1 5.9 6.4 3.9 4.5 4.8 10.0 12.0 13.0
1 6 X 19 6.7 7.7 8.4 5.0 5.8 6.3 13.0 15.0 17.0
1-1/8 6 X 19 8.4 9.5 10.0 6.3 7.1 7.9 17.0 19.0 21.0
1-1/4 6 X 37 9.8 11.0 12.0 7.4 8.3 9.2 20.0 22.0 25.0
1-3/8 6 X 37 12.0 13.0 15.0 8.9 10.0 11.0 24.0 27.0 30.0
1-1/2 6 X 37 14.0 16.0 17.0 10.0 12.0 13.0 28.0 32.0 35.0
1–5/8 6 X 37 16.0 18.0 21.0 12.0 14.0 15.0 33.0 37.0 4.1.0
1-3/4 6 x 37 19.0 21.0 24.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 38.0 43.0 48.0
2 6 X 37 25.0 28.0 31.0 18.0 21.0 23.0 49.0 55.0 62.0
HT = Hand-tucked splice and hidden-tuck splice. For hidden-tuck splice (IWRC), use values in HT columns.
MS = Mechanical splice.
S = Swaged or zinc poured socket.
"These yalues only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S slings is 20 or greater, where d = diameter of Curvature
around the body of the slip is bent, and d = diameter of rope.
.
i
#

Table E-4.—Safe working load for single leg slings 6 x 19 and 6 x 37 classification
improved plow steel grade rope with independent wire rope core (IWRC)
Rope Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Vertical Choker Vertical basket
Diameter Constr HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S
(inches)
1/4 6 x 1.9 0.53 0.56 0.59 0.40 0.42 0.44 1.0 1.1 1.2
5/16 6 x 1.9 0.81 O. 87 0.92 0.61 0.65 0.69 1.6 1.7 1.8
3/8 6 x 19 1.1 1.2 1.3 0.86 0.93 0.98 2.3 2.5 2.6
7/16 6 X 19 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3 1.3 3. 1 3.4 3.5
% 6 x 1.9 2.0 2.2 2.3 1.5 1.6 1.7 3.9 4.4 4.6
9/16 6 x 19 2.5 2.7 2.9 1.8 2. 1 2.2 4.9 5.5 5.8
5/8 6 X 19 3.0 3.4 3.6 2.2 2.5 2.7 6.0 6.8 7.2
3/4 6 x 19 4.2 4.9 5, 1 3.1 3.6 3.8 8.4 9.7 10.0
7/8 6 X 19 5.5 6.6 6.9 4.1 4.9 5.2 11.0 13.0 14.0
1 6 x 1.9 7.2 8.5 9.0 5.4 6.4 6.7 14.0 17.0 18.0
1 – 1/8 6 x 1.9 9.0 10.0 11.0 6.8 7.8 8.5 18.0 21.0 23.0
1-1/4 6 x 37 10.0 12.0 13.0 7.9 9.2 9.9 21.0 24.0 26.0
1-3/8 6 x 37 13.0 15.0 16.0 9.6 11.0 2.0 25.0 29.0 32.0
1-1/2 6 x 37 15.0 17.0 19.0 11.0 13.0 14.0 30.0 35.0 38.0
1-5/8 6 x 37 18.0 20.0 22.0 13.0 15.0 17.0 35.0 4.1.0 44.0
1-3/4 6 X 37 20.0 24.0 26.0 15.0 18.0 19.0 4.1.0 47.0 51.0
2 6 x 37 26.0 30.0 33.0 20.0 23.0 25.0 53.0 61.0 66.0
HT = Hand-tucked splice and hidden-tuck splice. For hidden-tuck splice (IWRC), use values in HT columns.
MS = Mechanical splice.
S = Swaged or zinc poured socket.
"These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S slings is 20 or greater, where D = diameter of
curvature around the body of the slip is bent, and d = diameter of rope.
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table E-5.—Safe working load for single leg slings, cable-laid rope-mechanical sp
7 x 7 x 7 and 7 x 7 x19 constructions galvanized aircraft grade rope 7 x 6 x 19
IWRC construction improved plow steel grade rope
Rope Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Diameter Vertical
(inches) Constr Vertical Center basket'
1/4 7 X 7 x 7 0.50 0.38 1.0
3/8 7 x 7 x 7 1.1 0.81 2.2
1/2 7 x 7 x 7 1.8 1.4 3.7
5/8 7 X 7 X 7 2.8 2.1 5.5
3/4 7 x 7 x 7 3.8 2.9 7.6
5/8 7 X 7 X 19 2.9 2.2 5.8
3/4 7 X 7 X 19 4.1 3.0 8.1
7/8 7 X 7 X 19 5.4 4.0 11.0
1 7 X 7 X 19 6.9 5.1 14.0
1-1/8 7 X 7 X 19 8.2 6.2 16.0
1-1/4 7 X 7 X 19 9.9 7.4 20.0
3/4 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 3.8 2.8 7.6
7/8 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 5.0 3.8 10.0
1 7 X 6 x 19 |WRC 6.4 4.8 13.0
1-1/8 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 7.7 5.8 15.0
1-1/4 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 9.2 6.9 18.0
1–5/16 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 10.0 7.5 20.0
1-3/8 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 11.0 8.2 22.0
1-1/2 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 13.0 9.6 26.0
"These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 10 or greater, where D = diameter of curvature
around which the body of the sling is bent, and d = diameter of rope.
E–8
October 2009
i
#

Table E-6.—Safe working load for single leg slings 8-part and 6-part braided rope
6 x 7 and 7 x 19 construction improved plow steel grade rope
7 x 7 construction galvanized aircraft grade rope
Component ropes
Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Diameter Constr Vertical Choker Basket vertical to 30 degree'
(inches) 8-part 6-part 8-part 6-part 8-part 6-part
3/32 6 X 7 0.42 0.32 0.32 0.24 0.74 0.55
1/8 6 X 7 0.75 0.57 0.57 0.42 1.3 0.98
3/16 6 X 7 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.94 2.9 2.2
3/32 7 x 7 0.51 0.39 0.38 0.29 0.89 0.67
1/8 7 x 7 0.95 0.71 0.71 0.53 1.6 1.2
3/16 7 x 7 2.1 1.5 1.5 1.2 3.6 2.7
3/16 6 X 19 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.98 3.0 2.2
1/4 6 X 19 3.1 2.3 2.3 1.7 5.3 4.0
5/16 6 x 19 4.8 3.6 3.6 2.7 8.3 6.2
3/8 6 X 19 6.8 5.1 5.1 3.8 12.0 8.9
7/16 6 X 19 9.3 6.9 6.9 5.2 16.0 12.0
1/2 6 X 19 12.0 9.0 9.0 6.7 21.0 15.0
9/16 6 X 19 15.0 11.0 11.0 8.5 26.0 20.0
5/8 6 X 19 19.0 14.0 14.0 10.0 32.0 24.0
3/4 6 X 19 27.0 20.0 20.0 15.0 46.0 35.0
7/8 6 X 19 36.0 27.0 27.0 20.0 62.0 47.0
1 6 x 19 47.0 35.0 35.0 26.0 81.0 61.0
"These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 20 or greater, where D = diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent,
and d = diameter of componeſt rope.
.

Table E-7.—Safe working load for 2-leg and 3-leg bridle slings
6 x 19 and 6 x 37 classification
improved plow steel grade rope with fiber core (FC)
Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Rope g g tº g
2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings
Vertical 30 degrees 45-degree 45-degree Vertical 30 degrees 45-degree 45-degree
Diameter Constr | Horizontal 60 degrees angle angle Horizontal 60 degrees angle angle
(inches) HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS
1/4 6 X 19 0.85 0.88 0.70 0.72 0.49 0.51 1.3 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.74 0.7
5/16 6 X 19 1.3 1.4 1.1 1.1 0.76 0.79 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.7 1.1 1.2
3/8 6 X 19 1.8 1.9 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 2.8 2.9 2.3 2.4 1.6 1.7
7/16 6 X 19 2.5 2.6 2.0 2.2 1.4 1.5 3.7 4.0 3.0 3.2 2.1 2.3
1/2 6 X 19 3.2 3.4 2.6 2.8 1.8 2.0 4.8 5.1 3.9 4.2 2.8 3.0
9/16 6 X 19 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.5 2.3 2.5 6.0 6.5 4.9 5.3 3.4 3.7
5/8 6 X 19 4.8 5.3 4.0 4.4 2.8 3.1 7.3 8.0 5.9 6.5 4.2 4.6
3/4 6 X 19 6.8 7.6 5.5 6.2 3.9 4.4 10.0 11.0 8.3 9.3 5.8 6.6
7/8 6 X 19 8.9 10.0 7.3 8.4 5.1 5.9 13.0 15.0 11.0 13.0 7.7 8.9
1 6 X 19 11.0 13.0 9.4 11.0 6.7 7.7 17.0 20.0 14.0 16.0 10.0 11.0
1-1/8 6 X 19 14.0 16.0 12.0 13.0 8.4 9.5 22.0 24.0 18.0 20.0 13.0 14.0
1-1/4 6 X 37 17.0 19.0 14.0 16.0 9.8 11.0 25.0 29.0 21.0 23.0 15.0 17.0
1-3/8 6 X 37 20.0 23.0 17.0 19.0 12.0 13.0 31.0 35.0 25.0 28.0 18.0 20.0
1-1/2 6 X 37 24.0 27.0 20.0 22.0 14.0 16.0 36.0 4.1.0 30.0 33.0 21.0 24.0
1–5/8 6 X 37 28.0 32.0 23.0 26.0 16.0 18.0 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0
1-3/4 6 X 37 33.0 37.0 27.0 30.0 19.0 21.0 49.0 56.0 40.0 45.0 28.0 32.0
2 6 X 37 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0 64.0 72.0 52.0 59.0 37.0 4.1.0
HT = Hand-tucked splice.
MS = Mechanical splice.
º
i
#

Table E-8.—Safe working load for 2-leg and 3-leg bridle slings
6 x 19 and 6 x 37 classification improved plow steel grade rope
with independent wire rope core (IWRC)
Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Rope
2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings
Vertical 30 degrees 45-degree 45-degree Vertical 30 degrees 45-degree 45-degree
Diameter Constr Horizontal 60 angle angle Horizontal 60 degrees angle angle
(inches) degrees
HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS
1/4 6 X 19 0.92 0.97 0.75 0.79 0.53 0.56 1.4 1.4 1.1 1.2 0.79 0.84
5/16 6 x 19 1.4 1.5 1.1 1.2 0.81 0.87 2.1 2.3 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3
3/8 6 x 19 2.0 2.1 1.6 1.8 1.1 1.2 3.0 3.2 2.4 2.6 1.7 1.9
7/16 6 x 19 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.5 1.7 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.3 2.5
1/2 6 x 19 3.4 3.8 2.8 3.1 2.0 2.2 5.1 5.7 4.2 4.6 3.0 3.3
9/16 6 x 19 4.3 4.8 3.5 3.9 2.5 2.7 6.4 7.1 5.2 5.8 3.7 4, 1
5/8 6 X 19 5.2 5.9 4.2 4.8 3.0 3.4 7.8 8.8 6.4 7.2 4.5 5.1
3/4 6 x 19 7.3 8.4 5.9 6.9 4.2 4.9 11.0 13.0 8.9 10.0 6.3 7.3
7/8 6 X 19 9.6 11.0 7.8 9.3 5.5 6.6 14.0 17.0 12.0 14.0 8.3 9.9
1 6 X 19 12.0 15.0 10.0 12.0 7.2 8.5 19.0 22.0 15.0 18.0 11.0 13.0
1-1/8 6 x 19 16.0 18.0 13.0 15.0 9.0 10.0 23.0 27.0 19.0 22.0 13.0 16.0
1-1/4 6 X 37 18.0 21.0 15.0 17.0 10.0 12.0 27.0 32.0 22.0 26.0 16.0 18.0
1-3/8 6 X 37 22.0 25.0 18.0 21.0 13.0 15.0 33.0 38.0 27.0 31.0 19.0 22.0
1-1/2 6 x 37 26.0 30.0 21.0 25.0 15.0 17.0 39.0 45.0 32.0 37.0 23.0 26.0
1–5/8 6 X 37 31.0 35.0 25.0 29.0 18.0 20.0 46.0 53.0 38.0 43.0 27.0 31.0
1-3/4 6 x 37 35.0 41.0 29.0 33.0 20.0 24.0 53.0 61.0 43.0 50.0 31.0 35.0
2 6 x 37 46.0 53.0 37.0 43.0 26.0 30.0 68.0 79.0 56.0 65.0 40.0 46.0
HT = Hand-tucked splice.
MS = Mechanical splice.

Table E-9.—Safe working load for 2-leg and 3-leg bridle slings, cable-laid rope-mechanical splice only
7 x 7 x 7 and 7 x 7 x 19 constructions galvanized aircraft grade rope
7 x 6 x 19 independent wire rope core (IWRC) construction improved plow steel grade rope
Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Rope
2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings
Diameter Constr Vertical 30 degrees | 45-degree | Vertical 60 degrees | Vertical 30 degrees | 45-degree | Vertical 60 degrees
(inches) Horizontal 60 degrees angle Horizontal 30 degrees |Horizontal 60 degrees angle Horizontal 30 degrees
1/4 7 X 7 X 7 0.87 0.71 0.50 1.3 1.1 0.75
3/8 7 x 7 x 7 1.9 1.5 1.1 2.8 2.3 1.6
1/2 7 X 7 x 7 3.2 2.6 1.8 4.8 3.9 2.8
5/8 7 X 7 X 7 4.8 3.9 2.8 7.2 5.9 4.2
3/4 7 X 7 x 7 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.1 5.7
5/8 7 X 7 X 19 5.0 4.1 2.9 7.5 6.1 4.3
3/4 7 X 7 X 19 7.0 5.7 4.1 10.0 8.6 6.1
7/8 7 X 7 X 19 9.3 7.6 5.4 14.0 11.0 8, 1
1 7 x 7 x 19 12.0 9.7 6.9 18.0 14.0 10.0
1-1/8 7 X 7 X 19 14.0 12.0 8.2 21.0 17.0 12.0
1-1/4 7 X 7 X 19 17.0 14.0 9.9 26.0 21.0 15.0
3/4 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.0 5.7
7/8 7 X 6 X 19 WRC 8.7 7.1 5.0 13.0 11.0 7.5
1 7 X 6 x 19 WRC 11.0 9.0 6.4 17.0 13.0 9.6
1-1/8 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 13.0 11.0 7.7 20.0 16.0 11.0
1-1/4 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 16.0 13.0 9.2 24.0 20.0 14.0
1–5/16 7 X 6 x 19 WRC 17.0 14.0 10.0 26.0 21.0 15.0
1-3/8 7 X 6 x 19 WRC 19.0 15.0 11.0 28.0 23.0 16.0
1-1/2 7 x 6 x 19 WRC 22.0 18.0 13.0 33.0 27.0 19.0
º
i
#

Table E-10.-Safe working load for 2-leg and 3-leg bridle slings, 8-part and 6-part braided rope
6 x 7 and 6 x 19 construction improved plow steel grade rope
7 x 7 construction galvanized aircraft grade rope
, tons (2,000 lb)
Component Safe working load
rope
2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings
Vertical 30 degrees 45-degree Vertical 60 degrees | Vertical 30 degrees 45-degree Vertical 60 degrees
Diameter Constr |Horizontal 60 degrees angle Horizontal 30 degrees | Horizontal 60 degrees angle Horizontal 30 degrees
inches
( ) 8-part 6-part | 8-part 6-part 8-part 6-part 8-part 6-part 8-part 6-part 8-part 6-part
3/32 6 x 7 0.74 0.55 0.60 0.45 0.42 0.32 1.1 0.83 0.90 0.68 0.64 0.48
1/8 6 x 7 1.3 0.98 1.1 0.80 0.76 0.57 2.0 1.5 1.6 1.2 1.1 0.85
3/16 6 x 7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.7 2.5 1.9
3/32 7 x 7 0.89 0.67 0.72 0.55 0.51 0.39 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.82 0.77 0.58
1/8 7 x 7 1.6 1.2 1.3 1.0 0.95 0.71 2.5 1.8 2.0 1.5 1.4 1.1
3/16 7 x 7 3.6 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.1 1.5 5.4 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.1 2.3
3/16 6 x 19 3.0 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.5 3.4 3.7 2.8 2.6 1.9
1/4 6 x 19 5.3 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.1 2.3 8.0 6.0 6.5 4.9 4.6 3.4
5/16 6 X 19 8.3 6.2 6.7 5.0 4.8 3.6 12.0 9.3 10.0 7.6 7.1 5.4
3/8 6 x 19 12.0 8.9 9.7 7.2 6.8 5.1 18.0 13.0 14.0 11.0 10.0 7.7
7/16 6 x 19 16.0 12.0 13.0 9.8 9.3 6.0 24.0 18.0 20.0 15.0 14.0 10.0
1/2 6 X 19 21.0 15.0 17.0 13.0 12.0 9.0 31.0 23.0 25.0 19.0 18.0 13.0
9/16 6 x 19 26.0 20.0 21.0 16.0 15.0 11.0 39.0 29.0 32.0 24.0 23.0 17.0
5/8 6 X 19 32.0 24.0 26.0 20.0 19.0 14.0 48.0 36.0 40.0 30.0 28.0 21.0
3/4 6 X 19 46.0 35.0 38.0 28.0 27.0 20.0 69.0 52.0 56.0 42.0 40.0 30.0
7/8 6 x 19 62.0 47.0 51.0 38.0 36.0 27.0 94.0 70.0 76.0 57.0 54.0 40.0
1 6 X 19 81.0 61.0 66.0 50.0 47.0 35.0 122.0 91.0 99.0 74.0 70,0 53.0
.

Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table E-11.-Safe working load for strand laid grommet— hand tucked improved pl
steel grade rope
Rope body Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Diameter Vertical
(inches) Constr Vertical Choker basket'
1/4 7 X 19 0.85 0.64 1.7
5/16 7 X 19 1.3 1.0 2.6
3/8 7 X 19 1.9 1.4 3.8
7/16 7 X 19 2.6 1.9 5.2
1/2 7 X 19 3.3 2.5 6.7
9/16 7 X 19 4.2 3.1 8.4
5/8 7 X 19 5.2 3.9 10.0
3/4 7 X 19 7.4 5.6 15.0
7/8 7 X 19 10.0 7.5 20.0
1 7 X 19 13.0 9.7 26.0
1-1/8 7 X 19 16.0 12.0 32.0
1-1/4 7 x 37 18.0 14.0 37.0
1-3/8 7 x 37 22.0 16.0 44.0
1-1/2 7 x 37 26.0 19.0 52.0
"These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater, where D = diameter of Curvature
around which the rope is bent, and d = diameter of rope body.
Table E-12.-Safe working load for cable laid grommet—hand tucked 7 x 6 x 7 and 7
6 x 19 constructions improved plow steel grade rope 7 x 7 x 7 construction
galvanized aircraft grade rope
Cable body Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Diameter Vertical
(inches) Constr Vertical Choker basket'
3/8 7 X 6 X 7 1.3 0.95 2.5
9/16 7 x 6 X 7 2.8 2.1 5.6
5/8 7 X 6 X 7 3.8 2.8 7.6
3/8 7 X 7 X 7 1.6 1.2 3.2
9/16 7 x 7 X 7 3.5 2.6 6.9
5/8 7 x 7 x 7 4.5 3.4 9.0
5/8 7 X 6 X 19 3.9 3.0 7.9
3/4 7 X 6 X 19 5.1 3.8 10.0
15/16 7 X 6 X 19 7.9 5.9 16.0
1-1/8 7 X 6 X 19 11.0 8.4 22.0
1–5/16 7 X 6 X 19 15.0 11.0 30.0
1-1/2 7 X 6 X 19 19.0 14.0 39.0
1-1 1/16 7 X 6 X 19 24.0 18.0 49.0
1–7/8 7 X 6 X 19 30.0 22.0 60.0
2-1/4 7 X 6 X 19 42.0 31.0 84.0
2–5/8 7 X 6 X 19 56.0 42.0 112.0
"These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater, where D = diameter of curvature
around which the rope is bent, and d = diameter of rope body.
October 2009
Appendix E–Slings
Table E-13.− Safe working load for strand-laid endless slings—mechanical joint
improved plow steel grade rope

Cable body Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Diameter Vertical
(inches) Constr Vertical Choker basket'
1/4 6 X 19 |WRC 0.92 0.69 1.8
3/8 6 X 19 |WRC 2.0 1.5 4, 1
1/2 6 X 19 |WRC 3.6 2.7 7.2
5/8 6 X 19 |WRC 5.6 4.2 11.0
3/4 6 X 19 |WRC 8.0 6.0 16.0
7/8 6 x 19 |WRC 11.0 8.1 21.0
1 6 x 19 |WRC 14.0 10.0 28.0
1-1/8 6 x 19 |WRC 18.0 13.0 35.0
1-1/4 6 x 37 IWRC 21.0 15.0 4.1.0
1-3/8 6 x 37 IWRC 25.0 19.0 50.0
1-1/2 6 X 37 IWRC 29.0 22.0 59.0
"These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater, where D = diameter of curvature
around which the rope is bent, and d = diameter of rope body.
Table E-14.—Safe working load for cable-laid endless slings—mechanical joint
7 x 7 x 7 and 7 x 7 x 19 constructions galvanized aircraft grade rope
7 x 6 x 29 IWRC construction improved plow steel grade rope

Cable body Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb)
Diameter Vertical
(inches) Constr Vertical Choker basket'
1/4 7 X 7 x 7 0.83 0.62 1.6
1/8 7 x 7 x 7 1.8 1.3 3.5
% 7 x 7 x 7 3.0 2.3 6.1
5/8 7 x 7 x 7 4.5 3.4 9.1
3/4 7 x 7 x 7 6.3 4.7 12.0
5/8 7 X 7 X 19 4.7 3.5 9.5
3/4 7 X 7 X 19 6.7 5.0 13.0
7/8 7 X 7 X 19 8.9 6.6 18.0
1 7 X 7 X 19 11.0 8.5 22.0
1-1/8 7 X 7 X 19 14.0 10.0 28.0
1-1/4 7 X 7 X 19 17.0 12.0 33.0
3/4 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 6.2 4.7 12.0
7/8 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 8.3 6.2 16.0
1 7 X 6 X 19 (WRC 10.0 7.9 21.0
1-1/8 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 13.0 9.7 26.0
1-1/4 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 16.0 12.0 31.0
1-3/8 7 X 6 X 19 WRC 18.0 14.0 37.0
1-1/2 7 X 6 X 19 |WRC 22.0 16.0 43.0
"These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater, where D = diameter of curvature
around which the rope is bent, and d = diameter of rope body.
October 2009 E-15

Table E-15.-Safe working loads for nylon rope slings
Safe working load in pounds (safety factor = 9)
Eye and eye sling
Endless sling
Basket hitch: angle of rope to
Basket hitch: angle of rope to
Rope Nominal |Minimum g tº
diameter weight per|breaking Vertical Chok horizontal Vertical Chok horizontal
nominal || 100 feet strength eruca oker o o o o €ITIC3 oker o Q o o
(inches) (pounds) |(pounds) hitch hitch | 90 60 45 30 hitch | 90 60 45 30
Angle of rope to vertical Angle of rope to vertical
O° 30° 45° 60° O° 30° 45° 60°
1/2 6.5 6,080 635 320 | 1,270 | 1,100 | 900 | 635 1,140 570| 2,290 | 1,980 | 1,620 | 1,140
9/16 8.3 7,600 790 395 | 1,580 | 1,370 | 1,120 | 790 | 1,420 1,850 2,540 710| 2,840 || 2,460 2,010 | 1,420
5/8 10.5 9,880 1,030 515| 2,060 | 1,780 | 1,460 | 1,030 925 || 3,710| 3,210| 2,620 | 1,850
3/4 14.5| 13,490 1,410 705 || 2,820 2,440 | 1,990 | 1,410 1,270 5,080 || 4,400 3,590 2,540
13/16 17.0|| 16,150 1,680 840 || 3,360 2,910| 2,380 | 1,680 3,020 | 1,510 || 6,050 5,240 || 4,280 3,020
7/8 20.0|| 19,000 1,980 990 || 3,960 || 3,430| 2,800 | 1,980 3,560 | 1,780 7,130 6,170 5,040 3,560
1 26.0|| 23,750 2,480 | 1,240|| 4,960 || 4,300|| 3,510 || 2,480 4,460 || 2,230|| 8,930| 7,730| 6,310|| 4,460
1-1/16 29.0| 27,360 2,850 | 1,430| 5,700 || 4,940 || 4,030| 2,850 5,130| 2,570|10,300|| 8,890| 7,260|5,130
1-1/8 34.0|| 31,350 3,270 | 1,640 6,540 || 5,660 4,620 3,270 5,890| 2,940|11,800|10,200 | 8,330 5,890
1-1/4 40.0|| 35,625 3,710 | 1,860 | 7,420 6,430 5,250 3,710 6,680|| 3,340|13,400||11,600|| 9,450 | 6,680
1–5/16 45.0 | 40,850 4,260| 2,130 || 8,520 | 7,380 6,020 |43,260 7,670|| 3,830|15,300||13,300||10,800 || 7,670
1-1/2 55.0|| 50,350 5,250| 2,630|10,500|| 9,090| 7,420 || 5,250 9,450 || 4,730|18,900|16,400||13,400 || 9,450
1–5/8 68.0| 61,750 6,440|| 3,220 |12,900||11,200 || 9,110 || 6,440 11,600| 5,800|23,200 |20,100|16,400||11,600
1-3/4 83.0| 74,100 7,720 3,860 15,400||13,400|10,900| 7,720 13,900 || 6,950|27,800|24,100 |19,700||13,900
2 95.0| 87,400|9,110 10,500| 4,560|18,200 15,800||12,900 || 9,110 16,400| 8,200|32,800|28,400|23,200|16,400
2-1/8 109.0|| 100,700 5,250 |21,000||18,200|14,800|10,500 18,900 || 9,450|37,800|32,700 |26,700|18.900
2-1/4 129.0|| 118,570 12,400| 6,200|24,800|21,500|17,500||12,400 22,300|| 11,200 |44,600|38,700 |31,600|22,300
2-1/2 149.0|| 133,000 13,900| 6,950|27,800 |24,100|19,700 |13,900 25,000 | 12,500|50,000 |43,300|35,400|25,000
2–5/8 168.0|| 153,900 16,000 | 8,000|32,000 |27,700|22,600|16,000 28,800 || 14,400|57,600|49,900|40,700 |28,800
º
i
#

Table E-16.-Safe working load for polyester rope slings
Safe working load in pounds (safety factor = 9)
Eye and eye sling
Endless sling
Basket hitch: angle of rope to
Basket hitch: angle of rope to
Rope Nominal | Minimum tº {
diameter | Weight per breaking Vertical Chok horizontal Vertical | Chok horizontal
nominal 100 feet strength ||Veſtical Choker o o o -verucaſunoker o © o o
(inches) (pounds) |(pounds) hitch hitch 90 60 45 30 hitch hitch | 90 60 45 30
Angle of rope to vertical Angle of rope to vertical
O° 30° 45° 60° O° 30° 45° 60°
1/2 8.0 6,080 635 320 | 1,270 | 1,100 900 635 | 1,140 570 2,290 | 1,980 | 1,620 | 1,140
9/16 10.2 7,600 790 395 | 1,580 | 1,370 120 790 | 1,420 710 || 2,840 || 2,460 | 2,010 | 1,420
5/8 13.0 9,500 990 495 | 1,980 | 1,710 | 1,400 990 | 1,780 890 3,570 3,090 2,520 | 1,780
3/4 17.5 | 11,875 | 1,240 620 2,480 || 2,150 | 1,750 | 1,240 || 2,230 | 1,120 || 4,470 || 3,870 || 3,160 | 2,230
13/16 21.0 14,725 | 1,540 770 3,080 2,670 2,180 | 1,540 || 2,770 | 1,390 5,540 || 4,800 3,920 2,770
7/8 25.0 || 17,100 | 1,780 890 3,560 | 3,080 2,520 | 1,780 3,200 | 1,600 || 6,410 5,550 || 4,530 || 3,200
1 30.5 20,900 2,180 | 1,090 4,360 3,780 || 3,080 2,180 || 3,920 2,960 | 7,850 | 6,800 5,550 | 3,920
1-1/16 34.5 | 24,225 | 2,530 | 1,270 5,060 || 4,380 || 3,580 || 2,530 || 4,550 || 2,280 || 9,110 || 7,990 || 6,440 || 4,550
1-1/8 40.0 | 28,025 2,920 | 1,460 5,840 || 5,060 || 4,130 || 2,920 || 5,260 | 2,630 || 10,500 || 9,100 || 7,440 || 5,260
1-1/4 46.3 || 31,540 || 3,290 | 1,650 6,580 || 5,700 || 4,650 3,290 5,920 2,960 | 11,800 | 10,300 | 8,380 5,920
1–5/16 52.5 35,625 || 3,710 | 1,860 | 7,420 | 6,430 5,250 || 3,710 || 6,680 3,340 || 13,400 | 11,600 || 9,450 | 6,680
1-1/2 66.8 || 44,460 || 4,630 || 2,320 || 9,260 | 8,020 | 6,550 || 4,630 || 8,330 || 4,170 | 16,700 || 14,400 || 11,800 8,330
1–5/8 82.0 | 54,150 | 5,640 2,820 | 11,300 || 9,770 || 7,980 || 5,640 || 10,200 5,080 |20,300 || 17,600 14,400 | 10,200
1-3/4 98.0 | 64,410 || 6,710 || 3,360 | 13,400 || 1 1,600 || 9,490 6,710 | 12,100 | 6,040 |24,200 |20,900 17,100 | 12,100
2 118.0 || 76,000 || 7,920 | 3,960 | 15,800 || 13,700 | 11,200 || 7,920 || 14,300 || 7,130 |28,500 |24,700 |20,200 || 14,300
2-1/8 135.0 | 87,400 || 9,110 || 4,460 | 18,200 | 15,800 12,900 || 9,110 | 16,400 | 8,200 |32,800 |28,400 |23,200 | 16,400
2-1/4 157.0 | 101,650 | 10,600 || 5,300 |21,200 | 18,400 | 15,000 || 10,600 | 19,100 || 9,540 |38,200 |33,100 |27,000 | 19,100
2-1/2 181.0 | 115,900 | 12,100 || 6,050 |24,200 |21,000 || 17,100 | 12,100 || 21,800 | 10,900 |43,600|37,700 |30,800 |21,800
2–5/8 205.0 | 130,150 | 13,600 | 6,800 |27,200 |23,600 | 19,200 | 13,600 || 24,500 | 12,200 |49,000 |42,400 |34,600 |24,500

Table E-17.-Safe working load for polypropylene rope slings
Rope
Nominal
Minimum
Safe Working load in pounds (safety factor = 6)
Eye and eye sling
Endless sling
Basket hitch: angle of rope to
Basket hitch: angle of rope to
g º s horizontal horizontal
diameter|weight per|breaking |Vertical Choker o O o TVertical |Choker T. o o Q
nominal | 100 feet strength hitch hitch 90 60 45 30 hitch hitch 90 60 45 30
inch
(inches) (pounds) (pounds) Angle of rope to vertical Angle of rope to vertical
O° 30° 45° 60° 0° 30° 45° 60°
1/2 4.7 3,990 645 325 1,290 | 1,120 910 645 | 1,160 580 2,320 | 2,010 | 1,640 | 1,160
9/16 6.1 4,845 780 390 1,560 | 1,350 | 1,100 780 | 1,400 700 2,810 || 2,430 | 1,990 | 1,400
5/8 7.5 5,890 950 475 1,900 | 1,650 | 1,340 950 | 1,710 855 | 3,420 | 2,960 2,420 | 1,710
3/4 10.7 8,075 | 1,300 650 2,600 2,250 | 1,840 | 1,300 || 2,340 | 1,170 || 4,680 || 4,050 3,310| 2,340
13/16 12.7 9,450 | 1,520 760 3,040 2,630 || 2,150 | 1,520 || 2,740 | 1,370 5,470 || 4,740 || 3,870 2,740
7/8 15.0 | 10,925 | 1,760 880 3,520 3,050 2,490 | 1,760 3,170 | 1,580 6,340 || 5,490 || 4,480 3,170
1 18.0 || 13,300 2,140 | 1,070 4,280 || 3,700 3,030 2,140 || 3,850 | 1,930 || 7,700 | 6,670 5,450 3,860
1-1/16 20.4 || 15,200 || 2,450 | 1,230 4,900 || 4,240 || 3,460 || 2,450 || 4,410 || 2,210 || 8,820 | 7,640 6,240 || 4,410
1-1/8 23.7 || 17,385 2,800 | 1,400 5,600 4,850 | 3,960 || 2,800 5,040 2,520 | 10,100 | 8,730 || 7,130 5,040
1-1/4 27.0 | 19,950 3,210 | 1,610 6,420 5,560 || 4,540 || 3,210 || 5,780 2,890 | 11,600 10,000 || 8,170 5,780
1–5/16 30.5 22,325 || 3,600 | 1,800 7,200 6,240 || 5,090 3,600 6,480 3,240 || 13,000 || 11,200 || 91.70 || 6,480
1-1/2 38.5 28,215 || 4,540 || 2,270 9,080 || 7,860 | 6,420 || 4,540 | 8,170 4,090 | 16,300 || 14,200 || 11,600 || 8, 170
1–5/8 47.5 || 34,200 || 5,510 || 2,760 | 11,000 13,200 || 9,540 || 7,790 5,510 || 9,920 || 4,960 | 19,800 || 17,200 || 14,000 || 9,920
1-3/4 57.0 | 40,850 | 6,580 || 3,290 15,900 |11,400 || 9,300 || 6,580 | 11,800 || 5,920 |23,700 |20,500 | 16,800 | 11,800
2 69.0 || 49,400 || 7,960 3,980 18,700 | 13,800 11,300 || 7,960 || 14,300 || 7,160 |28,700 |24,800 |20,300 14,300
2-1/3 80.0 57,950 || 9,330 || 4,670 16,200 | 13,200 || 9,330 | 16,800 | 8,400 |33,600|29,100 |23,800 | 16,800
2-1/4 92.0 || 65,550 | 10,600 || 5,300 21,200 | 18,400 | 15,000 |10,600 | 19,100 9,540 |38,200 |33,100 |27,000 || 19,100
2-1/2 107.0 | 76,000 | 12,200 6,100 24,400 |21,100 17,300 | 12,200 22,000 || 11,000 |43,900 |38,000 |31,100 |22,000
2–5/8 120.0 | 85,500 | 13,800 6,900 27,600 |23,900 | 19,600 | 13,800 24,800 | 12,400 |49,700 |43,000 |35,100 |24,800
.
i
#

Table E-18.-Safe working load for synthetic web slings–1,000 pounds per inch of width–single ply
Sling Slings, type II; Endless slings, type V Return eye slings, type VI
body eye and eye with flat eye slings, type Ill;
Width eye and eye with twisted eye slings, type IV
(inches)
Vertical || 30° 45° 60° Vertical 30° 45° 60° Vertical || 30° 45° 60°
Vertical | Choker | basket basket basket | basket | Vertical | Choker | basket basket basket basket | Vertical | Choker | basket basket | basket basket
1 1,000 750 2,000 | 1,700 | 1,400 | 1,000 | 1,600 | 1,300 || 3,200 2,800 2,300 | 1,600 | 800 650 1,600 | 1,400 | 1,150 | 800
2 2,000 | 1,500 || 4,000 || 3,500 || 2,800 2,000 || 3,200 2,600 6,400 || 5,500 4,500 || 3,200 | 1,600 | 1,300 || 3,200 2,800 || 2,300 | 1,600
3 3,000 || 2,200 || 6,000 || 5,200 || 4,200 || 3,000 || 4,800 || 3,800 || 9,600 | 8,300 | 6,800 || 4,800 2,400 | 1,950 || 4,800 4,150 || 3,400 || 2,400
4. 4,000 || 3,000 || 8,000 || 6,900 || 5,700 || 4,000 || 6,400 5,100 | 12,800 || 11,100 || 9,000 || 6,400 || 3,200 || 2,600 | 6,400 5,500 || 4,500 || 3,200
5 5,000 || 3,700 || 10,000 | 8,700 || 7,100 || 5,000 || 8,000 6,400 | 16,000 || 13,900 11,300 8,000 || 4,000 || 3,250 8,000 || 6,900 5,650 4,000
6 6,000 || 4,500 | 12,000 || 10,400 | 8,500 || 6,000 || 9,600 || 7,700 || 19,200 | 16,600 || 13,600 || 9,600 || 4,800 || 3,800 || 9,600 | 8,300 6,800 || 4,800
Notes: 1. All angles shown are measured from the vertical.
Triangle-choker slings, type l; triangle-triangle
2. Capacities for intermediate widths not shown may be obtained by interpolation.

Table E-19.-Safe working load for synthetic web slings–1,200 pounds per inch of width–single ply
Triangle-choker slings, type l; triangle—
triangle slings, type II;
g eye and eye with flat eye slings, type Ill;
Sling eye and eye with twisted eye slings, type IV Endless slings, type V Return eye slings, type VI
body
Width Verticall 30° 45° 60° Vertical 30° 45° 60° Verticall 30° 45° 60°
(inches)|Vertical|Choker|basket basket|basket|basket|Vertical|Choker basket basket basket basket|Vertical|Choker|basket basket|basket|basket
1 1,200 900] 2,400| 2,100| 1,700 1,200| 1,900||15,300 3,800| 3,300 2,700| 1,900 950 750| 1,900) 1,650) 1,350| 950
2 2,400| 1,800| 4,800| 4,200| 3,400| 2,400 3,800| 3,000 7,600| 6,600 5,400 3,800| 1,900| 1,500 3,800|23,830 2,700 1,900
3 3,600| 2,700| 7,200 6,200|5,100| 3,600| 5,800| 4,600 11,600| 10,000 8,200| 5,800| 2,850| 2,250| 5,700| 4,950| 4,050|2,850
4 4,800| 3,600|| 9,600| 8,300|| 6,800| 4,800| 7,700| 6,200 15,400| 13,300|| 10,900| 7,700 3,800| 3,000| 7,600| 6,600|5,400|3,800
5 7,000| 4,500| 12,000|10,400| 8,500| 6,000| 9,600| 7,700 19,200) 16,600|| 13,600|| 9,600| 4,750| 3,750, 9,500| 8,250| 6,750|4,750
6 7,200| 5,400|| 14,400||12,500|10,200|7,200|| 11,500|| 9,200 23,200| 19,900| 16,300||11,500| 5,800| 4,600| 11,600|10,000| 8,200|5,800
Notes: 1. All angles shown are measured from the vertical.
2. Capacities for intermediate widths not shown may be obtained by interpolation.
º
i
#

Table E-20.-Safe working load for synthetic web slings—1,600 pounds per inch of width—single ply
Triangle—choker slings, type l;
Sling triangle—triangle slings, type || Endless slings, type V Return eye slings, type VI
body eye and eye with flat eye slings, type Ill;
Width eye and eye with twisted eye slings, type IV
(inches) Vertical Vertical| 30° | 45° | 60° Vertical basket| 30° | 45" | 60° Vertical| 30° | 45° | 60°
Chokerl basket basket basket basket|Vertical|Choker basket|basket basket|Vertical|Chokerſ basket basket|basket basket
1 1,600 | 1,200 3,200 2,800 || 2,300 | 1,600 2,600 2,100 5,200 4,500 || 3,700 2,00 | 1,50 | 1,050 2,600 2,250 | 1,850 | 1,300
2 3,200 || 2,400 6,400 || 5,500 || 4,500 || 3,200 5,100 || 4,100 10,200 8,800 || 7,200 |5,100 2,600 2,100 5,200 4,500 3,700 2,00
3 4,800 || 3,600 || 9,600 | 8,300 || 6,800 || 4,00 7,700 6,200 15,400 13,300||10,900|7,700 3,900 3,150 || 7,800 6,750 5,500 |3,900
4 6,400 || 4,800 | 12,800 |11,100|| 9,000 || 6,400 | 10,100 || 8,200 20,400 17,00 |14,400|10,200|5,100 || 4,100 || 10,200 || 8,800 || 7,200 |5,100
5 8,000 || 6,000 | 16,000 |13,800||11,300|| 8,000 | 12,800 |10,200 25,600 22,200|18,100||12,800| 6,400 |5,150 | 12,800 |11,050|9,050 |6,400
6 9,600 7,200 | 19,200 |16,600||13,600|9,600 | 15,400|12,300 30,800 26,700|21,800||15,400|7,700 || 6,200 || 15,400||13,300||10,900|7,700
Notes: 1. All angles shown are measured from the vertical.
2. Capacities for intermediate widths not shown may be obtained by interpolation.
§
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table E-21.-Single leg polyester roundslings—endless and eye and eye type
(safe working load in pounds)

Size Vertical 60° 45° 30°
(see note) | Vertical Choker basket basket basket basket
1 2,600 2,100 5,200 4,500 3,700 2,600
2 5,300 4,200 10,600 9,200 7,500 5,300
3 6,400 6,700 16,800 14,500 11,900 8,400
4 10,600 8,500 21,200 18,400 15,000 10,600
5 13,200 10,600 26,400 22,900 18,700 13,200
6 16,800 13,400 33,600 29,100 23,800 16,800
7 21,200 17,000 42,400 36,700 30,000 21,200
8 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,400 25,000
9 31,000 24,800 62,000 53,700 43,800 31,000
10 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,300 56,600 40,000
11 53,000 42,400 106,000 91,800 74,900 53,000
12 66,000 52,800 132,000 114,300 93,300 66,000
13 90,000 72,000 180,000 155,900 127,300 90,000
Note: Roundslings are identified by the vertical rated load shown on the tag. The size
numbers in this column have been adopted by the Web Sling and Tiedown Association to describe
Certain polyester round slings. They are included for reference only.
E–22
October 2009
Appendix F
Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes
General
All mobile cranes must be performance inspected and tested by the owner and/or
contractor in accordance with the provisions contained herein; in the section
entitled “Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors; and on attached forms
entitled “Brake Performance Test Record” and “Performance Load Test Record.”
Such inspections and tests must be conducted (a) prior to initial onsite operation;
(b) periodically, but at least once each 12-month period; (c) whenever the crane
is modified, altered, or undergoes extensive repair, including rerigging; and
(d) when directed by the Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR). For
contractor equipment, such inspections and tests must be conducted in the
presence of a Reclamation representative and recorded in the appropriate places
on inspection records. The forms will then be signed by a contractor and
Reclamation representative and submitted to Reclamation. Initial and periodic
crane inspections and tests will be conducted onsite after the crane has been
assembled or reassembled and fully rigged for operation. Manufacturer’s,
contractor’s, or owner’s offsite inspections and tests must not be conducted until
all appropriate performance inspection items are found to be available and in
acceptable condition.
October 2009 F-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards

Item
Description
Available/
Acceptable
(1) Manufacturer's
operating and
maintenance
manuals
Manufacturer's operating and maintenance
instructions and manuals must accompany all
mobile hoisting equipment. These manuals set for
the inspection operation and maintenance criteria
that is not available from any other source.
(2) Maintenance
“frequent” and
“periodic”
inspection records
Inspection and maintenance records must be
complete and current. Unless owner can produce
these records, this performance inspection will not
be continued until the appropriate maintenance and
inspections are completed and current records
developed. (See ANSI/ASME B30.5)
(3) Reverse signal
alarm
An automatic reverse signal alarm is installed and
functions when unit is placed in reverse gear or is
moving in reverse. The alarm has been field
tested.
(4) Audible
warning device
The Crane is equipped with an audible warning
device having the control lever(s) within reach of the
operator(s) when seated in the operating
position(s).
| (5) Lights
On-highway type equipment has, as a minimum,
two taillights, two stoplights, flashing emergency
lights (forward and backward), turn signals (forward
and backward), or combination turn, flashing,
stopping lights, and backup light. DOT
requirements shall govern when applicable. Off-
highway type equipment must have two headlights,
two combination stop and tail lights, and backup
light. On- or off-highway equipment, when used in
restricted visibility situations, must have floodlamps
to illuminate working areas.
(6) Cabs
Cabs are provided with safety glazed windows in
the front and both sides. Visibility forward includes
a vertical range adequate to cover the boom point at
all times. A windshield wiper is provided for front
window. An effective heater and defroster system is
provided. Cab doors (whether of sliding or swinging
type) have a restraining system while crane is
traveling or operating. Operator's door swings
outward or slides rearward. Operator is provided
clear passageway from the operator station to exit
GOOr.
(7) Access
Walking surfaces are of the skid-resistant type.
Platforms are provided with guardrails. Access
system incorporates the three-point support
method. One foot - 2 hands; 1 hand – 2 feet On
ladders or handholds at all times. (See SAE J185
or Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations
399.207, Truck and Tractor Access Regulations.)
October 2009
Appendix F-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, LOCOmotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes

Available/
Item Description Acceptable
(8) Fire One 2A 40 B.C fire extinguisher is mounted near
extinguishers operator's station and accessible from a ground
location.
(9) Fenders Truck-mounted cranes are equipped with fenders.
Self-propelled cranes are equipped with
manufacturer available fenders.
(10) Seat belts Truck-mounted cranes have seat belts conforming
to DOT standards. Self-propelled cranes have seat
belts conforming to DOT or appropriate SAE
Standards.
(11) Guarding Exposed moving parts, such as gears, chains,
reciprocating or rotating parts, are guarded or
isolated.
(12) Exhaust Engine exhaust gases are piped outside of cab
system and/or discharged away from operator. Exhaust
pipes are guarded or insulated to protect operating
and maintenance personnel.
(13) Swing Materials for guarding rear swing area are available.
Clearance
protection
(14) High-voltage High-voltage warning signs displaying Reclamation
Warning sign requirements are installed at operator's station and
at strategic locations on the crane.
(15) Operator Operator has evidence of undergoing and
physical exam satisfactorily completing a physical examination
within the preceding 12 months.
(16) Boom stops Telescoping shock-absorbing or hydraulic-type
boom stops meeting SAE J 220 (see SAE J220) are
installed in a manner that resists boom overtopping.
(17) Jib boom Jib booms are restrained from backward
stops overturning.
(18) Boom angle A boom angle indicator, readable from the operator
indicator station, is installed and field tested for accuracy.
(19) Boom hoist A boom hoist disconnect, shutoff or hydraulic relief,
disconnect is provided to automatically stop the boom hoist
when the boom reaches a predetermined high
angle. The disconnect has been field tested.
October 2009 F-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards

Item
Description
Available/
Acceptable
(20) Two-block
damage
prevention device
All cranes with telescoping booms are equipped
with a two-block damage prevention feature that
has been Onsite tested in accordance With
manufacturer's requirements. All cranes to be used
in manskip or shaft sinking operations are equipped
with two-block prevention devices on all hoistlines
intended to be used in the operation. The two-block
device has automatic capabilities for controlling
functions that may cause a two-blocking condition.
A two-block prevention device which sounds an
alarm only is not acceptable. Two-blocking devices
have been tested during this inspection.
(21) Power-
controlled lowering
Cranes for use in manskip or shaft sinking
operations are equipped for power-controlled
lowering operation on all hoistlines. Cranes with free
(22) Leveling
indicating device
A device or procedure for leveling the crane is
provided.
(23) Sheaves
Sheave grooves are smooth and free from surface
defects, cracks, or worn places that could cause
rope damage. The bottom of the sheave groove
forms a close-fitting saddle for the rope being used.
Lower load blocks are equipped with close-fitting
guards. Load hoisting sheaves have a pitch
diameter not less than 18 times the nominal
diameter of rope used. Lower block pitch diameters
are not less than 16 times the nominal rope
diameter.
(24) Main boom,
jib boom, boom
extension
Boom jibs, or extensions are not cracked or
corroded. Bolts and rivets are tight. Certification
that repaired boom members meet manufacturer's
original design standard must be attached to this
form. Noncertified repaired members must not be
used until recertified.
(25) Load hooks
and hook blocks
Hooks and blocks are permanently labeled with
rated capacity. Hooks and blocks are
counterweighted to overhaul line from highest hook
position. Hooks do not have cracks or throat
openings more then 15 percent of normal or twisted
off center more than 10 degrees from the
longitudinal axis. All hooks are equipped with
effective safety catches.
October 2009
Appendix F-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, LOCOmotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes
Item
Description
Available/
Acceptable
(26) Ropes
Ropes are proper size, grade, and Construction for
the particular performance or function. They do not
have the following deficiencies:
a. In running ropes, six randomly distributed broken
wires in one rope lay, or three broken wires in one
rope lay, or three broken wires in one strand in one
rope lay. (A rope lay is the length along the rope in
which one strand makes a complete revolution
around the rope.)
b. In pendants or standing ropes, evidence of more
than one broken Wire in one lay.
c. Abrasion, scrubbing, or peening causing loss of
more than one-third of the original diameter of the
Outside Wires.
d. Evidence Of Visible COrrosion.
e. Kinking, crushing, or other damage resulting in
distortion of the rope structure.
f. Evidence of any heat damage from a torch or arc
caused by contact with electrical wire.
g. Reduction from nominal rope diameter of more
than
3/64 inch for diameter up to and including 3/4; 1/16
inch for diameters 7/8 inch to 1-1/8 inches; 3/32
inch for diameters
1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inches. Marked for reduction in
diameter indicates deterioration of the COre,
resulting in lack of proper support for the load-
carrying strands. Excessive rope stretch or
elongation may also be an indication of internal
deterioration.
h. Evidence of “bird caging” or other distortion
resulting in some members of the rope structure
carrying more load than
Others.
i. Noticeable rusting or development of broken
wires in the vicinity of attachments.
October 2009
F-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards

Item
Description
Available/
Acceptable
(27) Hydraulic
hoses, fittings, and
tubing
Flexible hoses are sound and show no signs of
leaking at the surface or its junction with the metal
and couplings. Hoses show no blistering or
abnormal deformation to the outer covering. There
are no leaks at threaded or clamped joints that
cannot be eliminated by normal tightening or
recommended procedures. There is no evidence of
excessive abrasion or scrubbing on the Outer
surfaces of hoses, rigid tubing, or hydraulic fittings.
(28) Outriggers
Outrigger number, locations, types, and type of
control are in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications. Outriggers are designed and
operated to relieve all weight from wheels or racks
within the boundaries of the outriggers. If not, the
manufacturer's specifications and operating
procedures must be clearly defined. Outriggers are
visible to the operator or a signal person during
extension or setting.
(29) Load rating
Chart
A durable rating chart(s) with legible letters and
figures is attached to the crane in a location
accessible to the operator while at the controls. The
rating chart contains the following data:
a. A full and complete range of manufacturer's
Craſhe
b. Optional equipment on the crane such as
outriggers and extra counterweight which affect
ratings.
c. A work area chart for which capacities are listed
in the load rating chart (i.e., overside, Over read,
over front).
d. Weights of auxiliary equipment (i.e., load block,
jibs, boom extensions).
e. A clearly distinguishable list of ratings based on
structural, hydraulic, or other factors rather than
stability.
f. A list Of no-load Work areas.
g. A description of hoistline reeving requirements.
(30) Hoisting rope
specifications
Rotation-resistant rope and fiber core rope are not
being used for boom hoist reeving. Socketing is
being done in the manner specified by
manufacturer. Eye splices meet manufacturer's
requirements or these standards.
F-6
October 2009
Appendix F-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes
Item
Description
Available/
Acceptable
(31) Tires
Tires are the size recommended by the
manufacturer for the anticipated load. Tire
conditions are satisfactory, and the tires are inflated
to recommended pressures.
(32) Braking
systems
(a) Trucks and self propelled cranes: Truck cranes
and self propelled cranes mounted on rubber-tired
chassis or frames manufactured after July 1, 1967,
are equipped with a service brake system,
secondary stopping (emergency brake) system, and
a parking brake system. All systems conform to
J/ISO 3450, Braking Performance Rubber-tired
Construction Machines, or Department of
Transportation Federal Motor Carrier Safety
Regulations 393.40 applicable provisions of this
appendix and RSHS. Rubber-tired equipment
manufactured prior to July 1967 are equipped with
an effective service braking system having, as a
minimum, features, components, accessories, and
capabilities set forth on form entitled “Brake
Performance Test Record.” The units are also
equipped with an effective secondary stopping
system meeting these requirements unless the
owner/operator can show written evidence that such
systems were not required by the standards or
regulations in force at the date of manufacture and
are not available from the manufacturer. The
braking systems have been inspected and tested
and found to be in conformance with applicable
requirements contained in the referenced standards
and on an attached brake performance test record
form. Further, the inspection and test results have
been recorded On the aforementioned form.
(b) Crawler cranes: Crawler cranes are provided
with brakes or other locking devices that effectively
hold the machine stationary on level grade during
the Working cycle. The braking system is capable of
stopping and holding the machine on the maximum
grade recommended for travel. The brakes or locks
are arranged to engage or remain engaged in the
event of loss of operating pressure or power.
(c) Locomotive Cranes: Locomotive cranes are
provided with an effective braking system(s) that is
capable of stopping and holding the cranes on the
maximum grade recommended for travel. Further,
a manual engagement means is provided to hold
the machine stationary during the working cycle.
Such means must be arranged to engage or remain
engaged in the event of loss of operating power or
pressure.
October 2009
F-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Performance Inspection
The performance inspection must as a minimum, include the following features,
components, accessories, and tests.
Performance Test Procedure
Upon completion of a satisfactory performance inspection and Part I of the
performance load test record form, the crane can be prepared for testing. The
crane must be placed on level ground (or railroad tracks if rail type). Outriggers,
if provided, must be firmly set and relieve all weight from wheels within the
boundary of the outriggers. The owner or contractor must select a test weight and
boom radius that will provide a test load of 110 percent of the manufacturer’s
rating for the selected radius when the boom angle is between 30 degrees and 60
degrees above the horizontal. The load will be raised and lowered and rotated
through 360 longitudinal degrees or manufacturer’s specified maximum degree of
rotation. The load must remain in the raised position for 10 minutes, then be
lowered to the ground and critical load-bearing parts inspected for damage.
(Note: Paint chipping or cracking, or deformation of structural members usually
denotes a serious structural deficiency.) This testing procedure is basic for all
cranes. Cranes to be used with jibs or boom tip extensions or manually extended
boom sections must have these components tested in accordance with the above
procedures. (Note: If the jib or boom extension is to remain in place during main
hoist line operation, the basic test must be conducted with the jib or extension in
place and test loads adjusted accordingly).
Hydraulic or other type cranes with telescoping booms must be further tested
during telescoping operations. Cranes to be used in pick and carry operations
must be tested with a load consistent with owner/contractor intended operation
but never greater than the manufacturer’s Secom-mediation. Cranes to be used in
manskip or shaft sinking operations must be further tested in the power-controlled
lowering mode. This test can be integrated into the basic testing procedure by
raising the load a second time and lowering it under power to near ground level,
and suspending it there an additional 10 minutes. Cranes without free falling
capabilities need only be tested in the power-controlled lowering mode. (Caution:
Exercise extreme care in determining mobile cranes test load).
Once manufacturer’s rating charts are consulted to determine maximum loading at
chosen radius, rigging limitations must be computed to ensure wire rope safety
factors are not exceeded. Such determination is made by: (1) adding selected
load weight to weight of all auxiliary handling devices such as hoist block, hooks,
slings, etc.; (2) dividing this figure by number of parts of line to obtain hoisting
load per single part of line; (3) obtaining manufacturer’s specified breaking
strength for type of rope being used (i.e., a 3/4-inch Manioc steel rope of 6 - by
35 filler wire constructed with independent wire rope core has a breaking strength
of 25.6 tons); and (4) dividing or guy ropes. Compare this resultant figure with
F-8 October 2009
Appendix F-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes
single part line load to determine if selected load exceeds safe load. If safe load is
exceeded, a new weight consistent with calculated line load must be chosen.
(Note: Calculated safe single part line load multiplied by number parts of line
sets the maximum crane load rating under existing rigging conditions regardless
of maximum crane rating set by manufacturer).
Computation of Test Radius'
W = Test weight (weight + sheave + rigging or dynamiter reading)
w.e. = Computed weight = test weight = W = —
wg. = Crane chart rated capacity (use next weight greater than we) F
wi = Crane chart rated capacity (use next weight less than w.e.) —
W = Weight difference (w.g. - we) = - F
wo = Weight difference (w.g. - wil) = º —
R = Radius shown on crane chart for w g. -
RLL = Radius shown on crane chart for wi —
r = Radius difference (RLL - R.) = sº F
Ro = Computed radius difference = w x r = --x– -
WO
Tr = Test radius (R, + Ro) + + F
' Contractor's test radius can be checked by the above formula for an estimate, but is
not to be used for determining the actual test radius.
Braking System Requirements and Test Procedures
Part 1 - General
Truck cranes and self-propelled cranes mounted on rubber tired chassis or frames
must have braking systems conforming to the section entitled “Mobile and
Stationary Mechanized Equipment” and Item 32 of performance inspection
criteria. Further, the crane’s braking systems must incorporate the features,
components, accessories, and performance capabilities required under parts II and
III of this form.
Cranes that meet the requirements of item 32 and part II of this form and the
section entitled “Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment” shall be brake
tested in accordance with the requirements, methods, and procedures described in
that section and in part III of this form. Record the results in parts V, VI, and VII
of this form. Sign the completed form in part VIII and submit it to Reclamation.
Equipment failing brake test(s) must not be place into service or performance load
tested until the braking system has been repaired and satisfactorily tested.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
ft.
ft.
ft.
ft.
October 2009 F-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Part II - Braking Systems, Features, Components, Accessories
A. Service Braking System
1. All cranes must have an effective service braking system. The service
brake system must be capable of stopping and holding an unloaded crane
on a 25-percent grade with the boom and other applicable components in
the transport position recommended by the manufacturer. This
requirement applies to both forward and reverse directions. The braking
system also must be capable of bringing the crane to a stop within the
distances and under the conditions specified in part III.
2. The service braking system must be the type that can be foot-applied or
released by the operator while sitting in the operating position.
3. Cranes must have service brakes on all wheels except:
a. Truck cranes with three or more axles need not have brakes on the
front wheels unless equipped with two steerable axles, and then the
wheels on one such axle must be equipped with brakes.
b. Self-propelled cranes may have only two braked wheels (one
lefthand, one right-hand) if the system meets the stopping distance
requirements (part III).
B. Secondary Braking System
1. All cranes, unless exempted by paragraph 20.6.3 of RSHS or item 32,
must have an secondary braking system.
2. The system must be capable of being applied manually by a person
seated in the operating position. The system must be arranged so it cannot
be released from the operator’s seat after any application, unless
immediate replication can be made from the operator position.
3. The system may, in addition to manual activation, be activated
automatically. If equipped with an automatic activation feature, the
automatic application must occur after a warning device is activated.
4. The system must be capable of bringing the crane to a stop within the
distances and under the conditions specified in part III.
C. Parking Brake System
1. All cranes must have an effective parking brake system.
2. The braking system must be capable of being applied by a person
seated in the operator’s seat. - -
3. The braking system can be applied by the driver’s muscular efforts, by
spring actions, or by other energy, provided that the brake will remain in
the applied position despite any contraction of brake parts, exhaustion of
October 2009
Appendix F-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, LOCOmotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes
energy source, or leakage of fluid. The brake shall be such that it cannot
be released unless adequate energy is available to make immediate further
application with required effectiveness.
4. The braking systems must be capable of holding the crane stationary
under the conditions specified in part III.
D. Features, Components, Accessories
1. Braking systems utilizing air, or vacuum energy assist devices must be
equipped with a gage that indicates the pressure or vacuum available for
braking.
2. Braking systems utilizing air, hydraulic (other than brake pedal
pressure), or vacuum assist energy devices must be equipped with a
readily visible or audible continuous warning device at the operator’s
position. The device will actuate: (a) before air or hydraulic pressure
drops below 50 percent or maximum operating energy level; (b) when
Vacuum in the supply reservoir is less than 8 inches of mercury; or (c)
before or upon application of dual hydraulic type systems. Gauges
indicating pressure or vacuum do not meet this requirement.
3. All braking systems utilizing air, pressure, or vacuum for braking must
have reserve capacity or a reservoir of sufficient capacity to ensure a full-
Service brake application with the engine stopped, without depleting the
air pressure or vacuum below 70 percent of operating pressure or vacuum.
Part III - Brake Testing Methods and Procedures
All trucks and self-propelled cranes mounted on rubber-tired chassis or frames
must undergo the braking performance tests required by the section entitled
“Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment.” Conduct such tests in
accordance with the following methods and /or procedures.
A. General
1. All tests must be conducted with applicable braking systems at full
charge.
2. Units must be tested in an unloaded condition with all attachments and
components in the transport position recommended by the manufacturer.
3. All stopping tests must be conducted from a 20-mile-per-hour speed.
4. Stopping tests must be conducted with the transmission in the gear
range commensurate with the 20-mile-per-hour testing speed. The power
train may be disengaged prior to completing the stop.
5. Auxiliary retarders must not be used in the test unless the retarders are
simultaneously activated by the applicable brake control system.
October 2009 F-11
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
6. Stopping distances must be measured from the point at which the brake
control is applied to the point at which the machine stops.
7. Means must be provided to determine equipment weight and stopping
distance with an accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent and test speed with
an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Service and Secondary Braking System
1. Service and secondary braking tests must be conducted on a level (less
than 1-percent grade in direction of travel and 3 percent at right angles to
travel), clean, swept dry surfaces at least 18 feet 0 inches wide. The
course length will be sufficient for accelerating from 0 to 20 miles per
hour and providing a stopping distance equal to 1-1/2 times that shown for
the emergency braking system.
Units utilizing a dual system for meeting emergency brake system
requirements must have each system independently tested (i.e., each
system of a dual hydraulic system must be tested independently).
2. Service and secondary braking system must have the following
stopping capabilities when traveling at 20 miles per hour:
Machine GVWR Service brake Secondary brake
Up to 50,000 55 feet 146 feet
Over 50,000 62 feet 156 feet
The unit will not deviate from a 12-foot-wide lane before or during the
test. Do not permit any wheels to drag during the service brake tests.
Parking Brake System
1. Conduct parking brake system tests on a dry, swept, 15-percent grade
surface. Conduct the tests with the unit facing both up and down the
slope.
2. Once the unit is in place and the parking brake is set, release all other
holding devices and braking systems and place the transmission in the
neutral position. Any energy assist sources (air, vacuum, hydraulic) will
be depleted. The unit must remain in this condition without movement for
5 minutes.
Energy Recovery Test
1. The braking system’s primary power source must have the following
recovery capabilities:
a. Air. Seventy percent of maximum brake pressure when the service
brakes are fully applied 12 times at the rate of 4 applications per
minute with the engine running at maximum governed revolutions
per minute.
F-12
October 2009
Appendix F-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, LOCOmotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes
b. Vacuum. Seventy-percent maximum brake vacuum after one full
(pedal depressed to full limit of travel) service brake application with
engine stopped.
c. Hydraulic. Pedal cannot be depressed to within 1 inch of floor or
limit of travel on any one full application of the pedal.
October 2009 F-13

Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
BRAKE PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD
TRUCK CRANES AND SELF-PROPELLED CRANES MOUNTED ON RUBBER—TIRED CHASSIS OR FRAME
General Information
Date of Test Specification No.
Contractor Subcontractor
Description (Make and Model)
Serial No., Or Contractor's No. | Year Of Manufacture
Service Brake System Test
Type (air, vacuum, mechanical, hydraulic, comb.) |No. Of axles With Brakes
Condition of Test Course (Surface and Grade)
Weight of Vehicle (Manufacturer's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating- GVWR)
Pressure or Vacuum Maintained During Braking
[] Satisfactory [] Deficient
Pressure or Vacuum Recovery
Warning Device for Stored Energy Systems
[] Satisfactory [] Deficient
Stopping Distance (Satisfactory or Deficient in Comparison with Appropriate Table)
Feet Traveled Feet Traveled
1"Trial Satisfactory E. Deficient [. 2" Trial Satisfactory [. Deficient [.
Holding Performance on Grade
Satisfactory [. Deficient []
Emergency Stopping System
Type Manual Only Manual/Automatic
Stopping Distance (Satisfactory or Deficient in Comparison with Appropriate Table)
Feet Traveled
Satisfactory [] Deficient D
Parking System Tests
Holds On 15% Grade Forward Reverse | Remains Applied for 5 Minutes
[] [] ForWard D Reverse D
Signatures
Tested by (Contractor Representative): Witnessed by (Government Rep):
Signature: - Signature:
Title: Title:
F-14 October 2009

Appendix F-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, LOCOmotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes
rt |
PERFORMANCE LOAD TEST RECORD
(Crawler, Locomotive, Truck and Wheel Cranes)
Oecification No.
Name Of Contractor
ake
Model
Serial No.
ted Capacity
Counterweight lbs.
2ngth of Boom (if hydraulic, open / closed)
Condition of BOOm
Bngth of Jib
Weight
Condition of Jib
Rated Capacity
2ngth of Boom Extension
Weight
Condition Of Extension
Rated Capacity
OOm Hoist Line Size
Breaking Strength
NO. Parts Of Line
Pendant Line Size
bad Line Size (main)
Breaking Strength
NO. Parts Of Line
Rotation
Resistance
yes no
Class
ſhipline Size (runner or
X)
Breaking Strength
NO. Parts Of Line
Rotation
Resistance
yes ſh O
Class
heave Pitch Diameter
Boom Hoisting
Load Hoisting
Load Block (lower)
quipped with Power Controlled Lowering. [I Load line [] Whipline [] Jibline [] BOOm
Dist line
ype Boom Stops Main BOOm Jib Boom | Condition of Stops-Main Boom Jib BOOm
ype Mounting: DTrack DCrawler Standard [Truck [] Self-Propelled (rubber tired)
art || Performance Test- Main Boom
est Load in Pounds (include sheave rigging and weight of other equipment as | Test Radius BOOm Manufac.
ecified by owner's manual) Angle Load
Rating at
Radius
egree of Swing Outriggers
atisfactory: D Lifting D Swinging E LOWering [] Braking
October 2009 F-15
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards

Part III Travel under Load Test
(if crane is going to travel under load on actual work)
Load in Pounds BOOm Radius Load Rating at Radius
Part IV Performance Test - Jib or Boom Extension
LOad in Pounds BOOm Radius Jib Used
Degree of Swing Outriggers
Satisfactory: D Lifting El Swinging D Lowering [] Braking
Remarks:
Part V Signatures
Bureau Representative Contractor Representative
Date: Date:
Note: (1) Load testing of cranes will be conducted in accordance with performance testing requirements contained herein and
set forth in the section entitled, “Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors." (2) Contractors are responsible for equipme
meeting or exceeding minimum specified requirements and/or standards, conducting required load tests, and signature of
Government representative on the form only indicates the contractor did effect tests in accordance with Reclamation
requirements. (3) Load tests will not be conducted until performance inspection requirements have been met.
F-16 October 2009
Appendix G
Record of Performance Inspection and Break Test—
On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment
General
Nonexempt on-highway trucks, truck tractor/trailer combinations, transmix
trucks, dump trucks, buses, manhaul units, and rubber-tired excavators and other
similar on-highway-type equipment must be performance inspected and tested by
the contractor and/or owner in accordance with provisions contained herein and in
the section entitled "Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment." (Cranes
will be inspected and tested in accordance with the section entitled "Hoisting
Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors.") The contractor/owner must conduct the
inspections and tests prior to initial onsite use, annually thereafter, and when
directed by Reclamation.
Initial and annual inspections and tests must be conducted in the presence of a
Bureau of Reclamation representative and recorded using performance inspection
criteria below and on the "Brake Performance Test Record" or a form that
provides the same information. The form will then be signed and submitted to the
appropriate Reclamation representative. Initial and periodic inspections and tests
must be conducted onsite after the vehicle has been assembled or reassembled and
prepared for operation. Manufacturer, contractor, or owner offsite inspections
and tests must not be conducted until all appropriate performance inspection items
are found to be available and in acceptable condition.
Performance Inspection
The performance inspection must, as a minimum, include the following features,
components, accessories, and tests.
Item
Description
Available/
Acceptable
) Manufacturer's operating
hd maintenance manual
Manufacturer's operating and maintenance manuals
or similar instructions must accompany equipment.
) Maintenance and inspection
COrds
Maintenance and inspection records must
accompany the equipment. Unless the owner can
produce such records, a complete inspection and
maintenance program will be carried out and
recorded.
) Reverse signal alarm
An automatic reverse signal alarm is installed and
functions when unit is placed in reverse gear or is
moving in reverse. Requirements for this device
may be waived if the equipment will not be operating
in close proximity to personnel on foot or in
congested areas. The alarm has been field tested.
) Audible warning device
The unit is equipped with an audible warning device
having the control lever within reach of the operator
when seated in the operating position.
October 2009
G-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Item
Description
Available
Acceptab
(5) Lights
Equipment meets DOT requirements but never less
than two headlights (one on each side), one red
taillight on each side, one red stoplight on each
side, and directional signal lights on each side both
front and rear. Backup lights and floodlamps to
illuminate working areas in restricted visibility
Situations.
(6) Cabs
All equipment must have cabs with shatter-resistant
glazing in all windows, heaters, defrosters, rearview
mirrors, and windshield wipers. Windshield must be
free of discoloration or damage that affects safe
operation. There must be at least one window on
each side of driver compartment. Engine exhaust
gases are piped outside and/or discharged away
from operation.
(7) Towing
Towing devices used on any combination of
vehicles must be structurally adequate for the load
imposed and securely and properly mounted. A
locking device must be provided on fifth-wheel and
tow bar systems to prevent accidental separation of
units. Safety chains must be provided for towed
units up to
3,000 pounds gross weight, and automatic break
away stopping systems for towed units over 3,000
pounds gross Weight.
(8) Fenders and mudflaps
All equipment with maximum speed exceeding 15
mph and traveling on unsurfaced roads are provided
with fenders and splash and stone throw protection.
Haul trucks must conform to these requirements
regardless of road surface. Trucks with beds or
other structural members extending beyond wheel
width and in a manner that prevents or eliminates
danger from wheel thrown objects meets fender
requirements. Reclamation may exempt fenders
When not available from manufacturer.
(9) Seatbelts
Seatbelts and anchorages meeting DOT
requirements are installed for the operator and all
passengers.
(10) Emergency equipment
Vehicles exceeding 10,000 pound gross weight,
buses, and manhaul units, are equipped with one
12-inch square red flag, three reflective markers,
wheel chocks for each unit, one 2-A:40-B:C dry
chemical fire extinguisher. When transporting
flammable or explosive cargo, two 2A 40 B.C
extinguishers are required.
(11) Access
ACCeSS to Cab Or Other Work location On the
equipment has sufficient steps and handholds to
provide a three-point contact system for employees
ascending or descending from work or operator
positions. The first step is no more than 24 inches
from ground level, or no more than 20 inches,
unless means are provided for two handholds.
G-2
October 2009
Appendix G–Record of Performance Inspection and
Brake Test—On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment
Available/
Item Description Acceptable
2) Fill openings Fill hatches On Water tank trucks Or trailers are
guarded by either reducing the size of the opening
to a maximum of 8 inches in diameter or by
attaching a heavy metal grill over the opening.
3) Dump trucks Dump trucks of all descriptions are equipped with:
(1) latches or other means for preventing accidental
movement of trip handles or dump body operating
levers. (2) A permanent mounted manual device to
prevent accidental lowering of dump body or bed.
(3) Cab protection if loaded or unloaded by crane,
loader, or shovel. Trucks without this protection are
equipped with a readily visible sign instructing the
operator to leave the cab during loading or
unloading operations.
4) End-dump trailers End-dump trailers are equipped with a tipover
2signed for on-highway protection device with continuous monitoring display
auling and used in off-road of the trailer box position at the equipment operator
âuling station to provide the operator with a quick and
easily read indicator that shows safe, marginal, and
unsafe degrees of lateral tilt. Additional
requirements are:
(1) an indicating audible alarm that signals an
unsafe degree of tilt (alarm should have an on-off
switch so it can be switched off when not dumping);
(2) sufficient indicator lighting to be visible for night
operations; and (3) hookup flexibility for easy
interchange between tractors and trailers.
5) Transmix trucks lockout Transmix trucks are equipped with a lockout device
BVice that prevents use of exterior controls until interior
gear arrangement and brakes are in proper position.
Providing equal protection acceptable to
Reclamation meets this requirement.
6) Braking systems A bus, truck, tractor, Or Combination of vehicles Or
similar type equipment have the following braking
systems conforming to these requirements, the
RSHS, and DOT requirements.
1. A service braking system.
2. A parking brake system.
3. A secondary brake system. (Equipment
manufactured prior to July 1967 may be exempted
from this requirement unless the system was
available from the manufacturer at date of
manufacture, is presently available from the
manufacturer, or was required by the standard in
force at time of manufacture.)
The above braking systems have been installed,
inspected, and tested and found to be in
Conformance with applicable requirements
COntained in the referenced Standards and On the
Brake Performance Test Record form. Further, the
inspection and test results have been recorded on
the aforementioned form.
October 2009 G-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Brake Performance Test Record
Part I - General
Nonexempt on-highway type trucks, truck-tractor/combinations, transmix trucks,
dump trucks, excavators, and similar on-highway type equipment must have
braking systems conforming to Reclamation Safety and Health Standards and
performance inspection criteria. The equipment must incorporate the features,
components, accessories, and performance capabilities required under part II and
part III.
Equipment found to meet the requirements of this form and RSHS section entitled,
"Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment" must be brake tested in
accordance with the requirements, methods, and procedures described in part III
and the RSHS. Results must be recorded in parts V, VI, and VII of this form. The
completed form must be signed in part VIII and submitted to Reclamation.
Equipment failing brake test(s) must not be placed into service until the braking
system has been repaired and satisfactorily tested.
Part II - Braking Systems Features, Components, Accessories, and
Performance Capabilities
A. Service Braking System
1. All equipment must have an effective service braking system. The service
brake system must have the capability of stopping and holding the equipment
when loaded to the gross vehicle weight (GVW) on the maximum slope of
intended travel. This requirement applies to both forward and reverse directions.
The braking system also must be capable of bringing the equipment to a stop
within the distances and under the conditions specified in part III.
2. The service brake system is the type that is foot applied or released by the
operator while sitting in the operating position.
3. Equipment must have brakes on all wheels.
B. Secondary Braking System
1. All equipment, unless exempted, has a secondary brake system.
2. The system is capable of being applied manually by a person seated in the
operating position. The system is arranged so it cannot be released from the
operator’s seat after an application, unless immediate reapplication can be made
from the operator position.
G-4 October 2009
Appendix G–Record of Performance Inspection and
Brake Test—On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment
3. The secondary brake system can be separate from the service brake system or
an interconnected system. If an interconnected system is used, it must be
designed, constructed, and maintained so failure of any part of the operating
mechanism of one or more systems (except service brake activation pedal or valve
in a dual hydraulic system) does not reduce the effectiveness of the vehicle’s
stopping capability below the secondary brake stopping performance
requirements.
4. The system may, in addition to manual activation, be activated automatically.
If equipped with an automatic feature dependent upon pressure or vacuum forces,
the automatic application will not occur until a warning device is activated.
5. The system must be capable of bringing the equipment to a stop within the
distances and under the condition specified in part III.
C. Parking Brake System
1. The equipment has an effective parking brake system or combination maxi-
brake parking brake system.
2. The parking brake is capable of being applied by a person seated in the
operator’s seat.
3. The parking brake may be applied by the driver’s muscular effort, or by spring
action, or by any other energy, provided that energy source is isolated from other
SOUITCCS.
4. The parking brake system is held in the applied position by energy other than
fluid pressure, air pressure, vacuum, or electric energy. The system must be such
that it cannot be released unless adequate energy is available upon release to make
further application with the required effectiveness.
5. The braking system is capable of holding the equipment stationary under the
conditions specified in part III.
D. Features, Components, Accessories
1. Braking systems utilizing air, stored hydraulic, or vacuum energy must be
equipped with a gage that indicates the pressure or vacuum available for braking.
2. Braking systems utilizing air, stored hydraulic, or vacuum energy must be
equipped with a readily visible or audible low energy, continuous warning device
at the operator’s position. The device will activate: (a) before air or hydraulic
pressure drops below 50 percent of maximum energy level; (b) when vacuum in
the supply reservoir is less than 8 inches Hg, (c) before or upon application of
dual hydraulic type systems. Gages indicating pressure or vacuum are not
acceptable for meeting this requirement.
October 2009 G-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
3. Braking systems may use common components (see secondary brake system
requirements).
4. Braking systems utilizing air, stored hydraulic pressure, or vacuum for braking
must be equipped with reserve capacity or a reservoir of sufficient capacity to
insure a full service brake application with the engine stopped without depleting
the air or hydraulic pressure or vacuum below 70 percent of operating pressure of
VaCUIUIII].
Part III - Brake Testing Methods and Procedures
All equipment referenced in this appendix and section entitled "Mobile and
Stationary Mechanized Equipment," unless exempted, must undergo the braking
performance tests required. Such tests must be conducted in accordance with the
following methods and/or procedures.
A. General
1. All tests must be conducted with applicable braking systems at full charge.
2. Units must be tested at maximum loading.
3. All dynamic stopping tests must be conducted from a 20-mile-per-hour speed.
4. Stopping tests must be conducted with the transmission in the gear range
commensurate with the 20-mile-per-hour testing speed. The power
train may be disengaged prior to completing the stop.
5. Auxiliary retarders must not be used in the test, unless the retarders are
simultaneously activated by the applicable brake control system.
6. Stopping distances must be measured from the point at which the brake control
is applied to the point at which the machine stops.
7. Means must be provided to determine weight of the equipment and stopping
distance with an accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent and test speed with an
accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Service and Secondary Braking System
1. Service and secondary dynamic braking tests must be conducted on a level
(less than
1-percent grade in direction of travel and 3-percent grade at right angles to travel)
clean, swept dry surfaces at least 18 feet 0 inches wide. The course length must
be sufficient for accelerating from 0 to 20 miles per hour and providing a stopping
distance equal to 1-1/2 times that shown for the emergency braking system. Static
Service brake holding tests shall be conducted on maximum grade of intended
travel.
G-6 October 2009
Appendix G–Record of Performance Inspection and
Brake Test—On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment
2. Service and Secondary braking system must have the following stopping
capabilities when traveling at 20 miles per hour.

Equipment Service Break Secondary break
Light trucks and buses to 10,000 pounds 25 85
Trucks and buses over 10,000 pounds 35 85
Combination of vehicles 45 85
The units must not deviate from a 12-foot-wide lane prior to or during tests. No
wheels shall drag during the service braking test.
3. Units utilizing a dual system for meeting emergency brake system
requirements must have each system independently tested (i.e., each system of a
dual hydraulic system can be tested independently by freely releasing the fluid to
the atmosphere at the point of simulated failure in the dormant system). Each
System must be capable of stopping the machine in the distance shown under
secondary brakes.
C. Parking Brake System
1. Parking brake system tests must be conducted on a dry, swept, 15-percent
grade surface. The tests must be conducted with the unit facing both up and down
the slope. Once the unit is in place and the parking brake set, all other holding
devices must be released and the transmission placed in the neutral position. Any
energy assist Sources (air, vacuum, hydraulic) will be depleted. The unit must
remain in this condition without movement for 5 minutes.
D. Energy Recovery Test
1. Air and air assist systems. With engine off and brakes applied listen for
Sounds or not any other evidence of air leakage. If no leakage is found, make a
full-pressure application and hold for 1 minute. Pressure must not drop below 70
percent of operation pressure. Again, check for sounds or leakage of air.
2. Vacuum and Vacuum assist systems. Turn engine off and depress the brake
pedal with a light pressure for 10 seconds, and then press hard for 10 seconds.
Determine if brake pedal moves or there is noise or other evidence of leaking
System. Vacuum loss should not exceed 70 percent of normal operating level, nor
should the brake pedal come within 1 inch of floor or travel stop.
3. Hydraulic or stored hydraulic pressure systems. Follow the procedure for
Vacuum system for Straight hydraulic system or air system procedures for stored
hydraulic pressure system.
October 2009 G-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards

BRAKE PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD
Non-Highway Type Trucks 10,000 Pounds GVW and Over, Truck-Tractor/Trailer Combinations,
Transmix Trucks, Dump Trucks, Excavators, and Similar Type Equipment
General Information
Date Of Test | Specification No.
Contractor Subcontractor
Description (Make and Model)
Serial No., Or Contractor's No. Year Of Manufacture
Service Brake System Test
Type (air, vacuum, mechanical, hydraulic, comb.) No. Of axles With Brakes
Condition of Test Course (Surface and Grade)
Weight of Vehicle (Manufacturer's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating- GVWR)
Pressure or Vacuum Maintained During Braking
[] Satisfactory [] Deficient
Pressure or Vacuum Recovery
Warning Device for Stored Energy Systems
[] Satisfactory [] Deficient
Stopping Distance (Satisfactory or Deficient in Comparison with Appropriate Table)
Feet Traveled Feet Traveled
1"Trial Satisfactory E. Deficient D 2" Trial Satisfactory [. Deficient []
mºs
Holding Performance on Grade
Satisfactory [. Deficient []
Emergency Stopping System
Type Manual Only Manual/Automatic
Stopping Distance (Satisfactory or Deficient in Comparison with Appropriate Table)
Feet Traveled
Satisfactory [. Deficient []
Parking System Tests
Holds On 15% Grade Forward Reverse | Remains Applied for 5 Minutes
[] D ForWard [] Reverse []
Signatures
Tested by (Contractor Representative): Witnessed by (Government Rep):
Signature: Signature:
Title: Title:
G-8 October 2009
Appendix H
Record of Performance—Inspection and Brake
Test—Off-Highway, Wheel-Type Construction
Machines, Loaders, Dumpers, Scrapers, Graders,
Tractor Water Wagons, and Similar-Type Machines
General
All nonexempt, off-highway, wheel-type construction machines described above
and in section 20 of Reclamation Safety and Health Standards must be
performance inspected and brake tested by the owner and/or contractor: (a) prior
to initial onsite operation; (b) at least once annually thereafter; and (c) whenever
directed to do so by Reclamation.
Such inspections and tests must be conducted in the presence of a Bureau of
Reclamation representative and recorded in the appropriate places on this form.
The form will then be signed and submitted to Reclamation. Initial and periodic
performance inspection and brake tests must be conducted onsite after each unit
has been assembled, reassembled, and/or prepared for operation. Manufacturer's
or owner's offsite inspection and tests must not be substituted for Onsite
inspections and tests. Performance brake tests must not be conducted until all
appropriate inspection items are found to be available and in acceptable condition.
Performance Inspection
The performance inspection must, as a minimum, include the following features,
components, accessories, and tests.

Available/
Item Description acceptable
(1) Manufacturer's Manufacturer's operating and
operating and maintenance manuals shall accompany
maintenance manuals all off-highway, rubber-tired equipment
covered by section 20 and this appendix.
These manuals set forth inspection,
operation, and maintenance criteria that
is not available from any other source.
(2) Maintenance and Inspection and maintenance records
"frequent" and "periodic" must be complete and current. Unless
inspection records owner can produce these records, brake
tests Will not be COnducted until the
appropriate maintenance and
inspections have been performed and
current records developed.
October 2009 H-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards

Available/
Item Description acceptable
(3) Reverse An automatic reverse signal alarm is installed and
signal alarm functions when machine is placed in reverse gear or
is moving in reverse. It has been field tested.
(4) Audible All operator-controlled machines are equipped with
warning an audible warning device having the control lever(s)
device within reach of the operator(s) when seated in the
operating position(s). The device has been field
tested.
(5) Lights Off-highway use. A minimum of two head lamps
mounted symmetrically on the front. Head lamps
must provide adequate illumination for a distance that
exceeds machine maximum stopping distance at
maximum speed. Two stop lamps at rear of
machines for day operation, plus two tail lamps and
one backup lamp for night operation. Work area
floodlamps for night operation, including scraper bowl
lamp, motor grader blade and front lamp, bucket
lamps, ripper lamps. One rotating amber lamp visible
in all directions on motor graders, front-end loaders
and similar slow moving machines used on public or
haul roads or in borrow or fill areas. On-highway use
equipment intended for use on highways, public
roads, or in public accessible areas must be
equipped for highway operation.
(6) Cabs Cabs are provided with safety glazed windows,
heaters, defrosters, windshield wipers, door
restraints, and rearview mirror On bidirectional
machines.
(7) Access Walking surfaces are of the skid-resistant type.
Platforms are provided with guardrails. Access
systems incorporate the three-point support method;
One foot- two hands; One hand-two feet on handholds
Or ladders at all times.
(8) Fire Two 2A 40 B:C extinguishers are required on
extinguisher vehicles transporting flammable or explosive
Or fire materials. Two 2A 40 B:C extinguishers and a fixed
Suppression nozzle fire- suppression system are required on all
systems diesel-powered equipment operated underground.
All other equipment must be equipped with the type
and number of extinguishers or suppression systems
deemed necessary by Reclamation.
(9) Fenders Machines with a maximum speed exceeding 15 mph
are equipped with fenders or operator tire guards
conforming to SAE J321 or devices providing
equivalent protection.
H-2 October 2009
Appendix H-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, LOCOmotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes

Item
Description
Available/
acceptable
(10) Seatbelts
Machines with installed ROPS are equipped with
operable seatbelts conforming with criteria set forth in
applicable SAE standards (See table-1, RSHS
section 20.) Only seatbelts permanently and legibly
marked or labeled with: (1) year of manufacture; (2)
model and style number; (3) trademark of
manufacturer, distributor, or importer, and (4) design
and test data certification are acceptable.
(11) Exhaust
systems
Engine exhaust gases are piped outside of cab
and/or discharged away from operator. Exhaust
pipes are guarded or insulated to protect operating
and maintenance personnel.
(12) ROPS
Machine is equipped with a rollover protective
structure that has a permanently attached label that
certifies the structure conforms to applicable SAE
Standard. Nonlabeled structures must not be used
Without a manufacturer's or PE's Written confirmation
that the Structure meets the aforementioned Criteria
or practices. ROPS showing signs of damage,
repair, or modification must not be used on
equipment unless recertified.
(13) FOPS
Machine is equipped with falling object protective
structure unless the contractor representative notes
on this inspection report that the machine will not be
loaded and/or used in a manner that would subject
the operator to falling material. Installed FOPS will
be certified as conforming with SAE J/ISO 3449
Criteria by a permanent label on the structure or the
COntractor has a Written Certification from the
manufacturer or PE.
(14) Operator
enclosure
Tractors, loaders, or forestry machines used in tree
clearing operations, Winching operations, or other
operations where objects may intrude into the
Operator's area are equipped with enclosures
conforming to SAE J1084. Equivalent protective
enclosures acceptable to Reclamation meet this
requirement.
(15)
Emergency
steering
Wheeled earthmoving machines such as tractors,
Scrapers, wheel loaders, graders, and dumpers
manufactured in or after 1980 using a power steering
system are equipped with emergency steering
provisions meeting SAE J1511.
October 2009
H-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Item
Description
Available/
acceptable
(16) Dump
truck safety
devices
Dump trucks of all descriptions are equipped with:
a. Trip handle or dump-body operating levers, safety
latches, or an equivalent protective system for
preventing accidental movement of the lever.
b. Permanently mounted device for preventing
accidental lowering of dump body or bed during
inspection or maintenance operations.
c. Operator protective cab shield or canopy to protect
operator during machine loading or unloading
operations. Machines without this protection will
display a suitable warning sign directing the operator
to leave the cab during the loading or unloading
process.
(17) Brake
systems
All off-highway, wheel-type machines (regardless of
age) are equipped with an operable and effective
service braking system, emergency stopping (brake)
system, and parking brake system. The braking
systems conform fully with the criteria contained in
SAE J/ISO 3450, this appendix, and RSHS section
20. If the machine was manufactured prior to 1980,
its braking system may conform with the SAE
standard under Which it was manufactured, if that
standard requires the three braking systems and
failure of a common component or system will not
reduce machine stopping capability below the
emergency stopping performance criteria shown on
the attached "Brake Performance Test Record" form.
In no circumstances can dropping the scraper bowl,
loader bucket, or grader/tractor blade or equipment
loads be considered as an emergency braking
system.
Reclamation may exempt emergency braking
systems requirements for compactors and rollers
manufactured prior to 1976 if such systems are not
available from the manufacturer. Additionally,
compactors and rollers intended for use on 3 percent
or less grades can be Reclamation exempted from
brake performance test requirements.
The braking systems have been inspected, tested,
and found to conform with applicable requirements
Contained in the referenced Standards and On
attached brake performance test record form.
Further, the inspection and test results have been
recorded on the inspection form.
H-4
October 2009
Appendix H-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, LOCOmotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes
Braking System Requirements and Test Procedures
Part | - General
Nonexempt, off-highway, wheel type machines must have braking systems
conforming to the section "Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment" and
item 17 of this appendix (performance inspection criteria). Further, the machines
braking systems must incorporate the features, components, accessories, and
performance capabilities required under parts II and III of this form
Machines found to meet the requirements of item 17 and part 11 of this form and
the section "Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment" must be brake tested
in accordance with the requirements, procedures, and methods described in part
III of this form. Results must be recorded in parts V, VI, and VII of this form.
The completed form shall be signed in part VIII and submitted to Reclamation.
Equipment failing brake test(s) must not be placed into service until the braking
system has been repaired and satisfactorily tested.
Part II - Braking Systems, Features, Components, and Accessories
A. Service Braking System
1. All machines must have an effective service braking system. The
service braking system must have the capability equivalent to holding the
respective machine under the following conditions:

Machine Grade - Condition
Loaders 30% Loaded to manufacturer's gross weight rating and
distribution with bucket in SAE carry position.
Dumpers and 25% Loaded to manufacturer's gross weight rating and
tractor scrapers distribution.
Graders 30% Cutting edge to be in the transport position.
Tractors With 30% Lowest part of cutting edge to be 18 feet above test
dozers Surface
Compactor loaders | 20% All conditions of loading
2. The braking system must be capable of bringing the machine to a stop
within the distances and under the conditions specified in part III.
3. The service braking system must be of the type that can be applied or
released by the operator while sitting in the operating position.
4. All tractor scrapers and dumpers must have braked wheels on at least
one axle of the prime mover and one axle of each trailing unit. All other
machines may have only two braked wheels (one right hand, one left
hand) if the system meets stopping distance requirements of part Ill.
October 2009 H-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
5. With the machine stationary, the service braking system's primary
power source must have the capability of delivering at least 70 percent of
maximum brake pressure when the brakes are fully applied twelve
(12) times at rate of four (4) applications per minute with the engine at
maximum governed speed for dumpers and tractor scrapers and twenty
(20) times at the rate of six (6) applications per minute for loaders,
graders, tractors with dozer, compactors, and rollers.
6. The service braking system using stored energy must be equipped with
a warning device that activates before system energy drops below 50
percent of manufacturer's specified maximum operating energy level. The
device must be readily visible and/or audible to the operator and provide a
continuous warning. Gages indicating pressure or vacuum do not meet
these requirements.
. Emergency Stopping Systems
1. All machines, unless exempted elsewhere, must be equipped with an
emergency stopping system.
2. The emergency stopping system must be capable of bringing the
machine to a stop within the distance and under the conditions specified in
part III.
3. The emergency system must be capable of being applied from the
operator's position. The system must be arranged so that it cannot be
released by the operator unless immediate reapplication can be made from
the operator's seat to stop the machine or combination of machines.
4. In addition to the manual control, the emergency stopping system may
also be applied automatically. If an automatic system is used, the
automatic application must occur after the warning device is actuated.
. Parking Brake System
1. All machines must be equipped with a parking system capable of being
applied from the operators position. The brake must be such that it cannot
be released unless immediate reapplication can be made by the operator.
2. The parking system, when applied, must maintain the parking
performance despite any contraction of the brake parts, exhaustion of
energy, or leakage of any kind.
. Features, Components, and Accessories
1. Braking systems utilizing stored energy or vacuum assist device must
be equipped with a gage that indicates the pressure or vacuum available
for braking.
October 2009
Appendix H-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, LOCOmotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes
2. Braking systems may use common components; however, a failure of a
common component must not reduce the effectiveness of the machine
stopping capability below the emergency stopping performance
requirement.
Part III - Brake Testing Methods and Procedures
All off-highway, wheel-type machines described in the RSHS section, "Mobile
and Stationary Equipment" and, unless exempted elsewhere, must undergo the
braking performance tests required. Such tests must be conducted in accordance
with the following methods and procedures.
A. General
1. All tests must be conducted with applicable braking systems fully
charged.
2. Units will be tested under the following condition:

Machine
Conditions
Loaders
Unloaded with bucket in carry position (The vertical
distance from ground to center-line of bucket hinge pin,
with the angle of approach at 15 degrees
Dumpers and tractor
Scrapers
Loaded to manufacturer's gross machine weight rating
and distribution.
Tractors With dozers
Lowest part of cutting edge 18 inches above test surface.
Compactors or rollers
Maximum fuel, oil, sprinkler system water, and ballast as
actually in use when operating.
Graders
Cutting edge to be in the transport position.
3. All dynamic stopping tests must be conducted from 20 mph, except
compactor and roller stopping tests will be conducted from 10 mph or the
maximum rated speed, if less than 10 mph.
4. Stopping tests shall be conducted with the transmission in the gear
range commensurate with 20 mph testing speed. The power train may be
disengaged prior to completing the stop. On machines using hydrostatic
drives, the drive train shall be disengaged to eliminate the retarding torque
of the transmission.
5. Auxiliary retarders shall not be used in the test unless the retarder is
simultaneously activated by the applicable brake control system.
6. Stopping distances shall be measured from the point at which the brake
control is applied to the point at which the machine stops.
October 2009 H-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
7. Means shall be provided to determine weight of equipment and
stopping distances with an accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent and test
speeds with an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Services and Emergency Braking Systems
1. Service and emergency dynamic braking tests shall be conducted on a
level (less than 1 percent grade in direction of travel and 3 percent at right
angles to travel) clean swept dry surface. The course length will be
sufficient for accelerating from 0 to 20 mph (10 mph for compactors and
rollers) and providing a stopping distance equal to 1-1/2 times that shown
for the emergency braking system. Static service brake holding tests shall
be conducted on the greater of 15 percent grade or maximum grade of
intended travel.
2. Service and emergency braking systems shall have the following
stopping capabilities in feet when traveling at 20 mph (10 mph for
compactors and rollers).

Machine weight Service Emergency
Machine (Ibs) braking braking
Loaders tractors With dozers Up to 36,000 45 135
Over 36,000 to 70,000 61 183
Over 70,000 to 140,000 75 225
Over 140,000 to 280,000 89 267
Over 280,000 111 333
Dumpers Up to 100,000 59 153
Over 100,000 to 200,000 74 173
Over 200,000 to 400,000 96 202
118 231
Combination - Up to 100,000 59 153
dumpers and dumper trains Over 100,000 to 200,000 89 192
Over 200,000 to 400,000 125 241
Over 400,000 177 310
Over 400,000
Tractor scrapers Up to 50,000 58 151
Over 50,000 to 100,000 73 170
Over 100,000 to 150,000 88 190
Over 150,000 102 209
Graders Up to 35,000 42 126
Over 35,000 to 70,000 54 162
Over 70,000 75 225
Compactor rollers Up to 12,000 23.7 56.5
Over 12,000 to 30,000 27.4 60.2
Over 30,000 31.1 63.9
H-8 October 2009
Appendix H-Record of Performance Inspection and Test—
Crawler, LOCOmotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes
C. Parking Brake System
1. Parking brake systems must be conducted on a dry, 15-percent grade
surface. The tests must be conducted with the unit facing both up and
down the slope. Once the unit is in place and the parking brake set, all
other holding devices and braking systems must be released and the
transmission placed in the neutral position. Any stored energy assist
Sources (air, vacuum, hydraulic) must be depleted. The unit must remain
in this condition without movement for 5 minutes.
D. Energy Recovery Test
Energy recovery tests must be conducted as follows:
a. Machine will be placed on the stopping test surface. The engine speed
will be increased to the maximum governed revolutions per minute. The
system storage pressure or vacuum will be allowed to increase until gages
indicate the system is at the manufactured full rated level. The brakes on
dumpers and tractor scrapers must be fully applied four times per minute
for 3 consecutive minutes. During this test procedure, the
pressure/vacuum gage must never read less than 70 percent of full rated
reading. The brakes on loaders, graders, tractors with dozer, compactor,
and rollers must be fully applied 6 times per minute for 3-1/2 consecutive
minutes. During this test procedure, the gage must never read less than 70
percent of full rated reading.
October 2009 H-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
BRAKE PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD
OFF-HIGHWAY WHEEL-TYPE CONSTRUCTION MACHINES
Refer to Section 19 of the Reclamation Safety and Health Standards (RSHS).
This form is to be used in conjunction with Appendix G of the RSHS

FOR BRAKING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS AND TEST PROCEDURES
SEERSHS APPENDIX G (PARTS I, II, AND III)
GENERAL INFORMATION
PART IV -
DATE OF TEST - SPECIFICATIONS NO.
CONTRACTOR - SUBCONTRACTOR
DESCRIPTION (Make and Model)
SERIAL No. OR CONTRACTOR's No. | YEAR OF MANUFACTURE
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM TEST
PART V • .
TYPE (air, vacuum, mechanical, hydraulic, comb.) - NO. OF AXLES WITH BRAKES NO. BRAKED WHEELS
- R.H., L. H.
CONDITION OF TEST COURSE (Surface and Grade)
WEIGHT OF VEHICLE (Manufacturer's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (GVWR)
PRESSURE OR VACUUM MANTAINED DURING BRAKING
SATISFACTORY D DEFICIENT [...]
PRESSURE ORVACUUM RECOVERY (See Reverse side for criteria)
WARNING DEVICE FOR ENERGY SYSTEMS
SATISFACTORYū DEFICIENTI) ,
STOPPING DISTANCE (Satisfactory or Deficient in Comparison with Appropriate Table)
FEET TRAVELED FEET TRAVELED
1ST TRIAL SATISFACTORY IT DEFICIENT [...] 2ND TRIAL SATISFACTORY DJ DEFICIENT [...]
HOLDING PERFORMANCE ON GRADE (See reverse side for holding performance criteria)
SATISFACTORYI] DEFICIENTI]
- EMERGENCY STOPPING SYSTEM
PART VI
TYPE - MANUAL ONLY MANUAL/AUTOMATIC
STOPPING DISTANCE (Satisfactory or Deficient in Comparison with Appropriate Table)
FEET TRAVELED SATISFACTORYI DEFICIENTI]
PARKING SYSTEM TESTs
PART VII
HOLDS ON 15% GRADE FORWARD REVERSE | REMAINS APPLIED FOR FORWARD REVERSE
[] [] FIVE MINUTES DI) []
PART VIII
TESTED BY (Contractor's Representative) WITNESSED BY (Government Representative)
(Signature) (Title) (Date) (Signature) (Title) (Date)
NOTE:
(1)Brake Performance test will be conducted in accordance with the performance criteria outlined in RSHS Appendix G (Parts I,II, III) or in





the latest edition of appropriate Society of Automotive Engineers braking performance standards or recommended Practices.
(2) Contractors are responsible for equipment meeting or exceeding minimum requirements and/or standards and inspecting and testing
equipment, and signature of Government representative on this form only indicates the Contractor did effect an inspection and test in
accordance with Bureau of Reclamation requirements.
H-10 October 2009
Appendix I
Cleanout Operations
Clean all concrete placing pipelines using one or more of the following
procedures:
1. Suction. Insert a soft, sponge rubber ball into the end hose. Use the pump
to suck the concrete and ball back into the hopper.
2. Water Pressure Procedure. Attach a specialized pipe cleaning head to
the pump side of the pipeline. Make a paper plug from wet, double-folded,
close-furled empty cement bags; place it in the head, followed by a sponge
rubber ball; and arrange it so the bags contact the concrete. Apply water
pressure to the ball through a head connection.
If the concrete and water are to be wasted at the discharge end, leave the
bends and end hoses in place. If the water is to be retained in the pipe and
returned to the pump, remove the elbows and end hoses and attach a catch
basket to the end of the pipe. Arrange the catch basket so the plug and ball
remain in the end of the pipe and seal in the water. Then, use air or water
pressure to force the water back through the pipe to the pump.
3. Compressed Air Procedure. This procedure for cleaning pipelines is
very hazardous and requires exact methods and special equipment to ensure
safety of personnel. Only use this procedure with the approval of the
Contracting Officer's Representative or office head and in accordance with the
following, or equivalent, safe methods:
a. Have a trained employee supervise blowing out operations.
b. Move all nonessential personnel to a safe location.
c. Equip the pipeline inlet end with a blowing hood, complete with ball
and plug.
d. Remove bends and end hose from pipeline discharge end. Attach a
catch basket to the pipeline discharge end. The catch basket must be
correctly sized to allow the concrete to flow freely, while preventing the
plug and ball from exiting the pipeline and breaking the hermetical seal
that keeps the compressed air in the line.
e. Slowly build up pressure in the pipe until the air gauge indicates
movement of concrete, but never beyond 150 pounds per square inch.
Constantly monitor the air pressure until the plug enters the catch basket.
f. Relieve the air pressure to zero gage pressure through an air relief cock
in the blowing head before working on the line or removing the catch
basket and plug.
October 2009 |-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Caution: Exercise extreme care when cleaning vertical pipes with
compressed air. High-pressure air pockets that cannot be relieved through the
relief cock can be created in the line where the concrete column separates.
Column separation occurs when the bottom of the line is disconnected before
the blowing head is attached.
§ J- g
| |
: >SST # - # 3. Jº
| | E 5 : 5 # t
§ O * : * * ©
º O & # 3 2 É
- 63
H. § 3 * : 3 ©
i 5 C/2 - cº
* - - Cl
- * O O º
===ſt -* 63
--ET- | ©
º | * ©
º G3
| | || - C
->
| Cº
>
e ſº-
|| || G3
| i + 5
sº
69
- A - ſ s
º
O
ſº-
tº º *
& Cº. >
$2 - E
.E º Cº
§ g # 3
3. # = ſº o 63
C9 | * # =
=S © o “ .* 3
£ .º *— º 5 to
# Cl G º $: ſº-
–1 || Dy Q E 3 2 sº ©
º * ºf # º Q.
.92 () ..? : g
". E * to E ſº. CO
- © ſº- tº G ©
| r * E O * uj 2.
| I H. H- - Hº- 3
# / E-i r_*- :
2 . * 69
3 | e
5 | T :
i -3
# E
º:
E t ſº
5 f E
69 L -
: | Y | :
.de | kl==Al .C
- - Cl
* CD | E uſ
Hº- - ſº ſ E 3
© Cº. - ° E s e
3 3 t # 3 + 2
"Nº E § 3 ; 9
Hº- F Hº-
r)
- |- <
O

|-2 October 2009
Appendix J
Explosives
Distance for Storage
Table J-1.—Distances for storage of explosives

Explosives Distances in feet when storage is barricaded
Pounds Pounds Inhabited Passenger Public Separation of
OVer not Over buildings railways highways magazines
| 2 || 5 70 51 || 30 6
5 10 90 64 35 8
10 20 110 81 45 | 10
20 30 125 93 50 11
30 40 140 103 55 12
_40 50 150 1 10 60 14
50 75 170 127 70 15
75 100 190 139 75 16
100 125 200 150 80 18 -
125 150 215 159 85 19
- 150 200 235 175 95 21
200 250 255 189 105 23
250 300 270 201 110 24 -
300 400 295 221 120 || 27
400 500 320 238 130 29
500 600 340 | 253 135 __31
600 700 355 266 145 || 32
700 800 375 278 150 33 -
800 900 390 289 155 35
900 1,000 400 300 160 36
1,000 1,200 425 318 165 39 -
1,200 | 1,400 || 450 336 170 41
1,400 1,600 470 351 175 43 -
1,600 1,800 490 366 180 44
1,800 2,000 505 378 185 _45 -
2,000 2,500 545 408 190 - 49
2,500 3,000 580 432 195 52
3,000 4,000 635 474 210 58
4,000 5,000 685 513 225 61
5,000 6,000 730 546 235 65
6,000 7,000 770 573 245 68
7,000 8,000 800 600 250 72
8,000 9,000 835 624 255 75
9,000 10,000 865 645 260 78
10,000 12,000 875 687 270 82
12,000 14,000 885 723 275 87
14,000 16,000 900 756 280 90
October 2009 J-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table J-1. Distances for storage of explosives (continued)

Explosives Distances in feet when storage is barricaded
Pounds Pounds Inhabited Passenger Public Separation of
OVer not Over buildings railways highways magazines
16,000 18,000 940 786 285 94
18,000 20,000 975 813 290 98
20,000 25,000 1,055 876 315 105
25,000 30,000 1,130 933 340 112
30,000 35,000 1,205 981 360 119
35,000 40,000 1,275 1,026 380 124
40,000 45,000 1,340 1,068 400 129
45,000 50,000 1,400 1,104 420 135
50,000 55,000 1,460 1,140 440 140
55,000 60,000 1,515 1,173 455 145
60,000 65,000 1,565 1,206 470 150
65,000 70,000 1,610 1,236 485 155
70,000 75,000 1,655 1,263 500 160
75,000 80,000 1,695 1,293 510 165
80,000 85,000 1,730 1,317 520 170
85,000 90,000 1,760 1,344 530 175
90,000 95,000 1,790 1,368 540 180
95,000 100,000 1,815 1,392 545 185
100,000 110,000 1,835 1,437 550 195
110,000 120,000 1,855 1,479 555 205
120,000 130,000 1,875 1,521 560 215
130,000 140,000 1,890 1,557 565 225
140,000 150,000 1,900 1,593 570 235
150,000 160,000 1,935 1,629 580 245
160,000 170,000 1,965 1,662 590 255
170,000 180,000 1,990 1,695 600 265
180,000 190,000 2,010 1,725 605 275
190,000 200,000 2,030 1,755 610 285
200,000 210,000 2,055 1,782 620 295
210,000 230,000 2,100 1,836 635 315
230,000 250,000 2,155 1,890 650 337
250,000 275,000 2,215 1,950 670 360
275,000 300,000 2,275 2,000 690 385
Note 1. “Explosive materials” means explosives, blasting agents, and detonators.
Note 2. “Explosives” means any chemical compound, mixture, or device, the primary or common
purpose of which is to function by explosion. A list of explosives determined to be within the
Coverage of “18 U.S.C. Chapter 40, Importation, Manufacture, Distribution and Storage of
Explosive Materials" is issued annually by the Director of the Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms
Division.
Note 3. “Blasting agents” means any material or mixture, consisting of fuel and oxidizer,
intended for blasting, not otherwise defined as an explosive, provided that the finished product, as
mixed for use or shipment, Cannot be detonated by means of a number 8 test blasting cap when
unconfined.
Note 4. “Detonator" means any device containing a detonating charge that is used for initiating
detonation in an explosive. The term includes, but is not limited to, electric blasting caps of
instantaneous and delay types, blasting caps for use with safety fuses, and detonating-cord delay
COnnectorS.
J-2 October 2009
Appendix J–Explosives
Note 5. “Magazine” means any building or structure, other than an explosives manufacturing
building, used for the permanent storage of explosive materials.
Note 6. “Natural barricade” means natural features of the ground, such as hills, or timber of
sufficient density that the surrounding exposures which require protection cannot be seen from the
magazine when the trees are bare of leaves.
Note 7. “Artificial barricade” means an artificial mound or revetted Wall of earth With a minimum
thickness of 3 feet. -
Note 8. “Barricaded” means that a building containing explosives is effectually screened from a
magazine, building, railway, or highway, either by a natural barricade, or by an artificial barricade of
such height that a straight line from the top of any sidewall of the building containing explosives to
the eave line of any magazine, or building, or to a point above the center of a railway or highway,
will pass through such intervening natural or artificial barricade.
Note 9. "Inhabited building distance” is the minimum allowable separation between explosive
storage areas and public/private places of residence or assembly, commercial facilities and utilities,
recreational facilities, project visitor areas, and Government and contractor work and storage areas
or places where workers gather, whether indoors or outdoors.
Note 10. “Railway” means any steam, electric, or other railroad or railway which carries
passengers for hire.
Note 11. “Highway” means any street or public road. “Public Highways Class A to D" are
highways with average traffic volume of 3,000 or less vehicles per day as specified in “American
Civil Engineering Practice” (Abbett, Vol. 1, Table 46, Sec. 3-74, 1956 Edition, John Wiley and
Sons).
Note 12. When two or more storage magazines are located on the same property, each
magazine must comply with the minimum distances specified from inhabited buildings, railways,
and highways, and, in addition, they should be separated from each other by not less than the
distances shown for “Separation of magazines,” except that the quantity of explosives contained in
Cap magazines shall govern in regard to the spacing of said cap magazines from magazines
Containing other explosives. If any two or more magazines are separated from each other by less
than the specified “Separation of magazines" distances, then such two or more magazines, as a
group, must be considered as one magazine, and the total quantity of explosives stored in such
group must be treated as if stored in a single magazine located on the site of any magazine of the
group, and must comply with the minimum distances specified from other magazines, inhabited
buildings, railways, and highways.
Note 13. Storage in excess of 300,000 pounds of explosives in one magazine is prohibited.
Note 14. This table is not applicable to transportation of explosives or any handling or temporary
storage necessary or incident thereto. It is not intended to apply to bombs, projectiles, or other
heavily encased explosives.
For transportation purposes, the Department of Transportation in Title 49 Transportation CFR
Parts 1-199 subdivides explosives into three classes:
Class A–Maximum Hazard
Class B–Flammable Hazard
Class C—Minimum Hazard
Note 15. All types of blasting caps in strengths through No. 8 cap should be rated at 1% pounds
of explosives per 1,000 caps. For strengths higher than No. 8 cap, consult the manufacturer.
Note 16. For quantity and distance purposes, detonating cord of 50 or 60 grains per foot should
be calculated as equivalent to 9 pounds of high explosives per 1,000 feet. Heavier or lighter core
loads should be rated proportionately.
Note 17. When a building containing explosives is not barricaded, the distance shown in the
above tables should be doubled.
Note 18. These tables are for minimum distances applicable to any human exposed to explosive
hazards on or off Government-owned property.
October 2009 J-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Table J-2.—Recommended separation distances of ammonium nitrate
and blasting agents from explosives or blasting agents'

Minimum separation distance
of receptor when barricaded 2
Minimum thickness
Donor weight (feet) of artificial
Pounds Pounds not | Ammonium Blasting barricades”
OVer OVer nitrate” agent" (inches)
100 3_ 11_ 12
100 || 300 4 14 12
300 600 5 18 12
_600 | 1,000 6 22 12
1,000 1,600 7 25 12
1,600 || 2,000 8 29 12
2,000 3,000 9 32 15
3,000 || | 4,000 10 36 15 -- -
4,000 6,000 11 40 15
6,000 8,000 12 43 20
8,000 10,000 13 47 20
10,000 12,000 14 50 20
12,000 || 16,000 15 54 25
16,000 20,000 16 58 25
20,000 25,000 18 65 25
25,000 || 30,000 19 68 30
30,000 35,000 20 72 30
35,000 || 40,000 21 76 30 -
40,000 45,000 22 79 35
45,000 50,000 23 83 35
50,000 55,000 24 86 35
55,000 || 60,000 | 25 90 35
60,000 || 70,000 26 94 40
70,000 || 80,000 || 28 101 40
80,000 90,000 30 108 40
90,000 100,000 32 115 40
100,000 120,000 34 122 50
120,000 140,000 - 37 133 50
---- 140,000 160,000 40 144 50
160,000 180,000 44 158 50
180,000 | 200,000 48 173 50
200,000 220,000 || 52 187 | 60
220,000 250,000 56 202 60
250,000 275,000 60 216 60
275,000 300,000 64 230 60
Note 1. Recommended separation distances to prevent explosion of ammonium nitrate and
ammonium nitrate-based blasting agents by propagation from nearby stores of high explosives or
blasting agents referred to in the table as the “donor.” Ammonium nitrate, by itself, is not considered
to be a donor when applying this table. Ammonium nitrate, ammonium nitrate-fuel oil or
Combinations thereof are acceptors. If stores of ammonium nitrate are located within the
sympathetic detonation distance of explosives or blasting agents, one-half the mass of the
October 2009
Appendix J–Explosives
ammonium nitrate should be included in the mass of the donor. The distances apply to the
separation of stores only. The “Table of Distances” shall be used in determining separation
distances from inhabited buildings, passenger railways, and public highways.
Note 2. When the ammonium nitrate gas and/or blasting agent is not barricaded, the distances
shown in the table shall be multiplied by six. These distances allow for the possibility of high
Velocity metal fragments from mixers, hoppers, truck bodies, sheet metal structures, metal
containers, and the like which may enclose the “donor.” Where storage is in bullet-resistant
magazines' recommended for explosives or where the storage is protected by a bullet-resistant
wall, distances and barricade thicknesses in excess of those prescribed in the “Table of Distances”
are not required.
Note 3. The distances in the table apply to ammonium nitrate that passes the insensitivity test
prescribed in the definition of ammonium nitrate fertilizer promulgated by the National Plant Food
Institute; and ammonium nitrate failing to pass said test shall be stored at separation distances
determined by competent persons and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
Note 4. The distances referred to in Note 3 apply to nitro-carbo-nitrates and blasting agents
which pass the insensitivity test prescribed in the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
regulations.
Note 5. Earth, or sand dikes, or enclosures filled with the prescribed minimum thickness of
earth or sand are acceptable artificial barricades. Natural barricades, such as hills or timber of
sufficient density that the surrounding exposures, which require protection, cannot be seen from the
"donor" when the trees are bare of leaves, are also acceptable.
Note 6. When the ammonium nitrate must be counted in determining the distances to be
maintained from inhabited buildings, passenger railways, and public highways, it may be counted at
one-half its actual weight because its blast effect is lower.
1 For construction of bullet-resistant magazines, see IME Publication No. 1.
2 Definition and Test Procedures for Ammonium Nitrate, Fertilizer, National Plant Food Institute, November 1964.
Reprinted from Recommended Separation Distances of Ammonium Nitrate and Blasting Agents from Code for the manufacture, transportation, storage,
and use of explosive materials, NFPA 495, Copyrighted by National Fire Protection Association. Reproduced by permission.
October 2009 J-5
Appendix K
Glossary of Terms, Definitions, and Acronyms
The following definitions apply to this and other documents related to the U.S.
Bureau of Reclamation Safety and Occupational Health Standards unless
specifically stated in the section.
Abatement Plan
Accepted/Acceptable
Accident
Approved
Attendant
Authorized Person
A written plan identifying the deficiency, date of
correction, individual(s) responsible for correction,
interim corrective measures, and a justification for
delay in immediate correction of the deficiency.
A term denoting when a written procedure, practice,
method, program, engineering design, or employee
qualification criteria submittal, which, after a
cursory review by an authorized Reclamation
representative, is determined to generally conform
to safety and health or contractual requirements.
Acceptance or acceptability of such submittals in no
way relieves the submitting entity from ensuring
employees a safe and healthful work environment
or complying with all contractual requirements and
good engineering practices.
An unplanned event that results in injury, illness,
death, property damage, mission interruption, or
other loss that has a negative effect on the mission.
A method, equipment, procedure, practice, tool,
etc., which is sanctioned, confirmed, as acceptable
for a particular use or purpose by a person or
organization authorized to render such approval or
judgment.
An attendant is a person trained, authorized, and
designated to perform attending duties as prescribed
in the confined space program. The individual must
have no other tasks except to be stationed outside
the permit required confined space to monitor the
entrantS.
A person approved or assigned by the employer to
perform a specific type of duty or to assume a
specific responsibility.
October 2009
K-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Blanking or Binding
Buddy System
Certification
Certified or Licensed
Certified or Licensed
(employee, craftsman,
or professional)
Clearance
The absolute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by the
fastening of a solid plate that completely covers the
bore and that is capable of withstanding the
maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with no
leakage beyond the plate.
A team of two diving partners on a diving
operation. The buddy divers are jointly responsible
for the assigned mission. Each diver keeps track of
depth and time during the dive. Each diver must
watch out for the safety and well-being of his buddy
and be alert for symptoms of nitrogen narcosis,
decompression sickness, and carbon dioxide
intoxication.
The process and documentation of testing and
validating an individual, system, or component,
preferably by an independent testing agency, for
compliance with established criteria.
One who possesses a license or certificate issued by
a recognized authority, attesting that he/she has
been trained and/or tested and is competent and
qualified in a specific field of endeavor.
One who possesses a certificate or license (or has
been licensed or certified by a recognized authority)
attesting that he/she has been trained or tested and
is competent and qualified in a specific field of
endeavor.
A process used to establish, under tightly controlled
discipline, a safe environment in which workers can
perform their tasks on specific electrical, hydraulic,
pneumatic, or mechanical equipment and/or
facilities. It includes the actions of systematically
isolating the equipment from all sources of
hazardous energy and using lockout/tagout
procedures for the operating and control points for
these sources of energy. It also includes a written
statement with documentation (switching program)
declaring that the equipment to be worked on has
been deemergized and isolated from hazardous
Sources of energy
K-2
October 2009
Appendix K–Glossary of Terms,
Clearance (minimum
distance)
Codes
Collateral Duty Safety
Representative (CDSR)
Competent Person
Confined Space
Confined Space Program
Contaminant
Contractor
Definitions, and Acronyms
The distance from uninsulated, energized equipment
that is considered safe. The term "minimum
distance" is preferred to avoid confusion with
"Clearance."
Rules and standards adopted by a governmental
agency as mandatory regulations having the force
and effect of law. Also used to describe a body of
standards.
An employee who is formally charged, on a
part-time basis, with safety program duties and
responsibilities, in addition to regularly assigned
duties. The assigned CDSR must have training
prior to assuming the assignment, and periodically
during the period of assignment.
A person who by training and/or experience is
capable of performing specifically assigned duties
and responsibilities. Further, the person is capable
of recognizing existing and predictable hazards or
conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or
dangerous and is authorized to initiate prompt
corrective action.
A confined space is a space that is large enough and
configured for an employee to enter and perform
assigned work, but has limited or restricted means
of entry and egress, and is not designed for
continuous human occupancy.
A confined space program is a site-specific program
that establishes the procedures for entry into permit
required confined spaces, and identifies the persons
authorized to perform the various duties at each
entry.
Any material, that, by nature of its composition or
reaction with other materials, is potentially capable
of causing injury, death, illness, damage, loss, or
pain.
Any individual or firm under contractual agreement
with Reclamation or its subunits for the
performance of services and products, such as
construction, maintenance, and hazardous waste
activities, including subcontractors of a prime
COntractOr.
October 2009
K-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Danger
Deadman Switch
Defect
Designated Person
Double Block and
Bleed
Employer
Energized Facility
Maintenance
Engulfment
Entrant
Entry Supervisor
A term denoting liability or potential to cause
injury, death, illness, damage, loss, or pain.
A Switch that requires constant pressure to supply
electrical current to the circuit.
Any characteristic or condition that weakens or
reduces the strength of a procedure, material, or
object of which it is a part.
An employee who has been trained or is qualified
and assigned the responsibility to perform a specific
task.
The closure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing and
locking or tagging two in-line valves and by
opening and locking or tagging a drain or vent valve
in the line between the two closed valves.
A contractor or Reclamation project/area manager
who has employees engaged in work for or in
Reclamation controlled areas.
Maintenance work on an energized conductor or
part of its supporting structure. Also includes work
on a deemergized component (busing, disconnect
Switch, etc.) located near an energized conductor
or part.
The surrounding and effective capture of a person
by a liquid or flowable solid substance that can be
aspirated to cause death by filling and plugging the
respiratory system or that can exert enough force on
the body to cause death by strangulation,
constriction, or crushing.
An entrant is a person trained and authorized to
enter confined spaces under conditions documented
in the confined space permit.
A person trained, authorized, and designated (such
as employer or foreman) by a written permit to be
responsible for determining if acceptable entry
conditions are present at a permit required confined
space, authorizes each entry, oversees entry
operations, and terminates entries when violations
or hazards occur. The entry supervisor may also
serve as an attendant if the individual meets
requirements as an attendant.
K-4
October 2009
Appendix K–Glossary of Terms,
Equipment
Foreman
(Job Supervisor)
Groundman
Hazard
Hazardous
Atmosphere
Hazardous
Condition
Hazardous
Substance or Material
Heavy Gear
High Scaling
High Voltage
Definitions, and Acronyms
Any machine, device, or apparatus—electrical,
mechanical, or hydraulic—including transmission
lines, piping systems, and waterways.
The person directly in charge of personnel at the
worksite, regardless of operating or payroll title.
A person working at ground level in support of a
lineman working aloft.
A dangerous condition, potential or inherent, that
can bring about an interruption or interfere with the
expected orderly progress of an activity.
An atmosphere that may expose employees to the
risk of death, incapacitation, impaired ability to
self-rescue unaided, injury, or acute illness.
Hazardous atmospheres include flammable gas,
vapor, or mist, airborne combustible dust, oxygen
concentration below 19.5 percent or above
23.5 percent, concentrations of substances that
exceed dose or permissible exposure limits, or other
atmospheric condition immediately dangerous to
life or health.
A physical condition or circumstance that is a
precondition of an accident occurrence.
Refers to any substance which, by reason of being
explosive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive,
oxidizing, irritating, or otherwise harmful, is
likely to cause illness or injury.
Diver-worn, deep-sea dress, including helmet,
breastplate, dry suit, and weighted shoes.
Manually or mechanically removing, drilling,
blasting, rock bolting, grouting, shoring, forming,
inspecting, Surveying, or testing rock, concrete, or
other materials on vertical faces and slopes or
inclines steeper than 1:1 or where workers and
machinery require external assistance to maintain
stability.
Refers to all voltages of 600 volts or greater, unless
otherwise defined in the text of this manual.
October 2009
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Hot Line Order
Immediately Dangerous to
Life and Health (IDLH)
Imminent Danger
Incident
Industrial
Hygienist
Job Hazard
Analysis
Lineman
A statement with documentation from the
Operations Supervisor to the Job Supervisor that
specific work may be done on or near a line or
other equipment without requiring that it be
disconnected from all sources of energy. The
equipment is to be considered energized or “hot”
(see FIST Volume 1-1 for application).
A condition or practice that poses an immediate
threat to life and health, or an immediate threat of
severe exposure to contaminants, such as toxic or
radioactive materials which are likely to have
adverse delayed effects on health.
Any condition or practice that could reasonably be
expected to cause death or serious physical harm
before normal abatement actions can be taken.
For reporting purposes, an unplanned event
involving people, equipment, or the environment
that could have resulted in an injury, illness, or loss,
but did not.
An individual who, by virtue of education,
training, special studies, certification, and
experience, has acquired competence in industrial
hygiene. He/she is capable of recognizing the
environmental factors, toxic chemicals, and stress
of work operation; evaluating those factors based
on experience and quantitative measurement
techniques; and recommends methods to
eliminate, control, or reduce such stresses.
A study of a job or activity to (1) identify hazards or
potential accidents associated with each step or task,
and (2) develop solutions that will eliminate,
mitigate, or prevent such hazards or accidents. A
job hazard analysis should be an integral part of the
written procedures for work activities.
A payroll classification or title given a craftsperson
whose duties include climbing wood poles or steel
structures to perform work on electric power
transmission and distribution circuits.
October 2009
Appendix K–Glossary of Terms,
Office Head
O&M Employee
Onsite Construction
Operations
Performance Inspection
and Tests
Permit Required
Confined Space
Personal Protective
Equipment (PPE)
Procedure
Definitions, and Acronyms
Unless otherwise indicated, means the Reclamation
official responsible for the area or work activity to
which the standard applies. Usually, the Area
Manager, Project Manager, or Project Construction
Engineer; but in some organizations, the Chief,
Power Division; Chief, Field Division; or similar
official.
Any person directly involved with the operation and
maintenance of facilities or features of a
Reclamation power or water system or involved in
activities supporting the O&M function.
All construction activities performed under
Bureau of Reclamation contract which are carried
out within the confines of the project or
construction site as specified in the contract
document. It also includes all activities on offsite
property used by the contractor or his
subcontractors for the primary purpose of
implementing work under the contract
(i.e., borrow pits, repair shops, warehousing,
equipment fabrication, and assembly sites, etc.).
Inspection and tests to determine if equipment can
safely perform its intended functions.
A confined space in which one or more of the
following conditions may exist: (a) the space
contains, or may contain an atmospheric hazard;
(b) the space contains an engulfment hazard
(i.e., water or other flowable material that may
engulf an entrant); (c) the space has a configuration
which may trap an entrant; (d) the space has any
other serious safety or health hazard. A formal
process and documentation (entry permit) which
includes entry and work procedures, atmospheric
monitoring, hazards, and emergencies, is required.
The term shall include, but is not limited to, devices
designed to be worn by workers for eye, face, head,
respiratory, hand, arm, body, leg, foot, and fall
protection.
A course of action by which work is initiated,
performed, controlled, and completed. A procedure
establishes what action is required, who is required
to act, and when the action is to take place.
October 2009
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Professional Engineer
Prohibited Conditions
Qualified
Radiation Specialist
Safe
Safety Factor
Safety and Health
Professional
Scuba
One possessing a recognized degree from an
accredited college and a current engineering
registration certificate, and who, by knowledge of
appropriate national standards, training, and
experience, has successfully demonstrated the
ability to design, analyze, and determine proper
application of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, and
structural equipment and systems and their proper
application.
A condition within a confined space that indicates
that a control measure specified in the permit has
become ineffective, or that a hazard exists within
the space which was not anticipated and for which
no control measure is in place. Immediate
evacuation is necessary when a prohibited condition
is identified.
Refers to one who, by possession of a recognized
degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who
by extensive knowledge, training, and experience,
has successfully demonstrated ability to solve or
resolve problems relating to the subject matter, the
work, or the project.
An individual who, by virtue of education, training,
certification, or experience, possesses the expertise
necessary to develop and implement methods and
procedures for the evaluation of radiation hazards to
the subject matter, the work, or the project.
Relatively free from danger or hazard which could
cause or result in injury, illness, or damage.
The ratio of the ultimate braking strength of a
member or piece of material or equipment to the
actual working stress or safe working load when in
UlSC.
An individual who, by virtue of education, training,
certification, and experience, has achieved
professional status in the safety field.
Am acronym for Self-Contained Underwater
Breathing Apparatus, in which the supply of
breathing mixture carried by the diver is
independent of any other source.
K-8
October 2009
Appendix K–Glossary of Terms,
Special Work
Permit
Supervisor
Surface-Supplied Air
(SSA)
Threshold Limit Values
Toxic
Unsafe Condition
Definitions, and Acronyms
A statement that formalizes and documents the
preparation and coordination between Reclamation
and non-Reclamation personnel for Clearances
and Hot Line Orders to facilitate work by
non-Reclamation forces on or near Reclamation
power facilities.
A person held responsible for the behavior and
production of a group of employees.
A diving mode in which the diver in the water is
supplied from the dive location with compressed
air for breathing.
The limit below which the effects of airborne
substances cease to be perceptible and dangerous to
employees who may be repeatedly exposed, day
after day.
Of, pertaining to, or caused by poison; poisonous;
harmful.
Any physical state that is not acceptable or that
presents risks to personal safety, or that has the
potential to cause personal injury, illness, and/or
damage to property. Also, any physical state that
contributes to a reduction in the degree of safety
normally present.
October 2009
K-9
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Acronyms
ACGIH
ACI
AGCA
ANSI
API
ASME
AWS
CFR
CO
COR
DM
DOT
EMT
EPA
FAA
FHA
FOPS
FR
HEW
HHA
JHA
LPG or LP-gas
LPN
MSDS
American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists
American Concrete Institute
Associated General Contractors of America
American National Standards Institute
American Petroleum Institute
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Welding Society
Code of Federal Regulations
Contracting Officer
Contracting Officer's Representative
Department Manual
Department of Transportation
Emergency Medical Technician
Environmental Protection Agency
Federal Aviation Administration
Federal Highway Administration
Falling Object Protection Structure
Flame Resistant
Health, Education, Welfare
Health Hazard Analysis
Job Hazard Analysis
Liquefied Petroleum Gas
Licensed Practical Nurse
Material Safety Data Sheet
K-10
October 2009
Appendix K–Glossary of Terms,
MSHA
MUTCD
NEC
NESC
NFPA
NIOSH
NRC
NRR
OSHA
PCSA
PEL
PFD
POL
PPE
ROPS
SAE
TLV
TWA
UL
USC
USCG
Definitions, and Acronyms
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Safety Code
National Fire Protection Association
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Nuclear Regulatory Commission
Noise Reduction Rating
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Power Crane and Shovel Administration
Permissible Exposure Limits
Personal Flotation Devices
Petroleum, Oils, and Lubricants
Personal Protective Equipment
Radio Frequency
Registered Nurse
Rollover Protective Structures
Society of Automotive Engineers
Threshold Limit Value
Time Weight Average
Underwriters Laboratories
United States Code
U.S. Coast Guard
October 2009
Appendix L
Referenced Material
These references apply unless superseded by more current standards.
American Concrete Institute, Box 19150, Redford Station, 22400 West Seven
Mile Road, Detroit MI 482.19
Publication SP4, “Formwork for Concrete”
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, Box 1937,
Cincinnati OH 45201
“Industrial Ventilation”
“Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents in
the Work Environment”
American Lumbering Standards Committee, PO Box 210, Germantown MD 20874
American Lumbering Standards
American Lumbering Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York NY 10018
American National Standards Institute: http://www.ansi.org
A10.3, “Safety Requirements for Powder Actuated Fastening System”
A10.4, “Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists and Employee
Elevators for Construction and Demolition Operations”
A10.5, “Safety Requirements for Material Hoists”
A10.6, “Safety Requirements for Demolition”
A10.7, “Safety Requirements for Transportation, Storage, Handling, and
Use of Commercial Explosives and Blasting Agents”
A10.8, “Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition
Operations—Scaffolding”
A10.9, “Construction and Demolition Operations—Concrete and Masonry
WOrk”
A10.13, “Safety Requirements for Steel Erection”
A10.14, “Requirements for Safety Belts, Harnesses, Lanyards, and
Lifelines for Construction and Demolition Use”
A10.15, “Safety Requirements for Dredging”
October 2009 L-1
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
A10.22, “Safety Requirements for Rope Guide Non-Guided Worker’s
Hoists”
A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems”
A14.1, “Safety Requirements for Portable Wood Ladders”
A14.2, “Safety Requirements for Portable Metal Ladders”
A14.3, “Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders”
A14.4, “Safety Requirements for Job-Made Wooden Ladders”
A17.1, “Elevators and Escalators”
A17.2, “Inspector’s Manual for Elevators and Escalators”
A90.1, “Safety Standards for Manlifts”
A92.2, “Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices”
A120.1, “Safety Code for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building
Maintenance”
B7.1, “Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels”
B1.1.1, “Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use for Machine
Tools–Mechanical Power Presses”
B15.1, “Safety Standard for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus”
B20.1, “Safety Standard for Conveyors and Related Equipment”
B30.2, “Overhead and Gantry Cranes”
B30.3, “Hammerhead Tower Cranes”
B30.4, “Safety Standard for Portal, Tower, and Pillar Cranes”
B30.5, “Mobile and Locomotive Truck Cranes”
B30.6, “Derricks”
B30.7, “Base Mounted Drum Hoists”
B30.8, “Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks”
B30.9, “Slings”
B30.10, “Hooks”
B30.11, “Monorails and Underhung Cranes”
B30.12, “Handling Loads Suspended from Rotor Craft”
L-2
October 2009
Appendix L–Referenced
Materials
B30.14, “Side Boom Tractors”
B30.16, “Overhead Hoists (Underhung)”
B30.17, “Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single
Girder, Underhung Hoist)”
B30.19, “Cableways”
B30.22, “Articulating Boom Cranes”
B31.1, “Power Piping”
B56.1, “Low Lift and High Lift Trucks”
C2, “National Electrical Safety Code.”
C95.2, “Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard Warning Symbol”
D6.1, “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and
Highways”
HST-6M, “Performance Standards for Air Wire Rope Hoists”
N2.1, “Warning Symbols—Radiation Symbol”
RP7, “Practice for Industrial Lighting”
S1.4, “Specification for Sound Level Meters”
S1.25, “Personnel Noise Specification for Dosimeters”
S3.19, (Formerly 224.22) “Method for the Measurement of Real-Ear
Protection of Hearing Protectors and Physical Attenuation of Earmuffs.”
S12.6, “Method for the Measurement of the Real-Ear Attenuation of
Hearing Protectors”
Z41, “Personal Protection—Protective Footwear”
Z49.1, “Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes”
Z87.1, “Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face
Protection”
Z88.2, “Practices for Respiratory Protection”
Z89.1, “Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers”
Z136.1, “Safe Use of Lasers”
Z308.1, “Minimum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type First Aid Kits”
Z535.1, “Safety Color Code”
October 2009 L-3
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
Z535.2, “Environmental and Facility Safety Signs”
Z535.3, “Criteria for Safety Symbols”
Z535.4, “Product Safety Signs and Symbols”
Z535.5, “Accident Prevention Tags”
American Petroleum Institute, 2101 L. Street, Washington DC 20037
American Petroleum Institute Standards
American Plywood Association, PO Box 11700, Tacoma WA 984.11
Group BB, Group 1, Exterior
(Plywood Products Standard PSI-74)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 345 East 47" Street,
New York NY 10017
ASME Boiler and Pressure Code
ASME Boiler and Pressure Code, Sec. VIII, “Unfired Pressure Vessels”
ASME 13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems”
American Welding Society
F4.1, “Recommended Safe Practices for the Preparation of Welding and
Cutting of Containers and Piping”
Compressed Gas Association, 1725 Jefferson Davis Highway, Suite 1004,
Arlington VA 2.2202-4102
G-7.1, “Commodity Specification for Air”
Construction Safety Association of Ontario, 21 Voyager Court South Etobicoke,
Ontario, Canada M9N 5M7
“Crane Handbook”
“Mobile Crane Handbook”
“Rigging Manual" – Designated as "Reclamation Rigging Manual”
E. I. du Pont DeNemours & Company (Inc.), Technical Service Section,
Explosives Products Division, Wilmington DE 19898
“Blasters' Handbook” (16" edition or later)
L-4 October 2009
Appendix L–Referenced
Materials
Factory Mutual Engineering, 1000 Fourth Street, Suite 700, San Rafael CA
94901
Factory Mutual Standards
Factory Mutual Laboratories
Factory Mutual Engineering
Federal Specifications
QQ-P-416, “Plating, Cadmium (Electrodeposited)”
RR-S-001302, “Safety Equipment, Climbing”
Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME), 420 Lexington Avenue, New York NY
10017
National Electric Manufacturers' Association
EW 1, "Electric Arc Welding Power Sources"
National Fire Protection Association, 470 Atlantic Avenue, Boston MA 02210
NFPA No. 10, “Portable Fire Extinguishers”
NFPA No. 13, “Installation of Sprinkler Systems”
NFPA No. 30, “Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.”
NFPA No. 31, “Oil Burning Equipment”
NFPA No. 33, “Spray Application Using Flammable and Combustible
Materials”
NFPA No. 51B, “Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot
WOrk”
NFPA No. 58, “Storage and Handling Liquefied Petroleum Gases”
NFPA No. 70, “National Electrical Code” (NEC)
NFPA No. 70E, “Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for
Employee Workplaces”
NFPA No. 101, “Life Safety Code.”
NFPA No. 251, “Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials”
NFPA No. 385, “Flammable and Combustible Liquid Tank Vehicles”
October 2009 L-5
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
National Forest Products Association
“National Design Specifications for Wood Construction”
Reclamation, Bureau of
FIST Volume 1–1, “Hazardous Energy Control Program”
FIST Volume 3–6, “Storage Battery Principles and Maintenance”
FIST Volume 3–29, “Energized Facility Maintenance”
FIST Volume 4–1, “Maintenance Schedules and Records”
FIST Volume 5-1, “Personal Protective Grounding”
“Record of Inspection and Test – Cranes and Hoisting Equipment”
“Contractor’s Report of Recordable Injury/Illness”
“Brake Performance Test Record – Truck Cranes and Self-Propelled
Cranes Mounted on Rubber-Tired Chassis or Frames”
“Brake Performance Test Record – Off-Highway Type Trucks 10,000
Pounds GVW and Over, Truck-Tractor/Trailer Combinations, Transmix
Trucks, Dump Trucks, Excavators, and Similar Type Equipment”
“Brake Performance Test Record – Off-Highway Wheel-Type
Construction Machines”
“Contractor Monthly Summary of Occupational Injuries/Illnesses
Experience”
“General Design Standards, Design Standard No. 1, Chapter 3, "Safety
Design Standards”
Society of Automotive Engineers, 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale PA
15096
J101, “Hydraulic Wheel Cylinders for Automotive Drum Brakes”
J115, “Safety Signs”
J167, “Overhead Protection for Agricultural Tractors - Test Procedures
and Performance Requirements”
J185, “Access Systems for Off-Road Machines”
J220, “Crane Boomstop”
J321B, “Tire Guards for Protection of Operators of Earthmoving Haulage
Machines”
J386, “Operator Restraint System for Off-Road Work Machines”
L-6
October 2009
Appendix L–Referenced
Materials
J682, “Fenders and Mudflaps”
J1029, “Lighting and Markings of Construction, Earthmoving Machinery”
J1040, “Performance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS)
for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry, and Mining Machines”
J1042, “Operator Protection for General Purpose Industrial Equipment”
J1084, “Operator Protective Structure Performance Criteria for Certain
Forestry Equipment”
J1116, “Categories of Off-Road Self Propelled Work Machines”
J1194, “Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Wheeled Agricultural
Tractors”
J/ISO 3449, “Earthmoving Machines, Falling-Object Protective
Structures - Laboratory Test and Performance Requirement”
J/ISO 3450, “Earthmoving Machinery - Braking Systems, Rubber-Tired
Machines - Systems and Performance Requirements and Test Procedures”
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 207 East Ohio Street, Chicago IL 60611
U.S. Department of Labor
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Information Circular 8183, “Mobile Diesel-Powered Equipment
for Non-Coal Mines Approved by the Bureau of Mines, 1951-62”
Report of Investigations 5616, “Safety With Mobile Diesel-
Powered Equipment Underground”
30 CFR Part 32, “Diesel Engines Certification and Diesel
Equipment for Use in Non-Gassy Coal Mines”
30 CFR Part 36, “Mobile Diesel-Powered Transportation
Equipment for Gassy Non-Coal Mines and Tunnels”
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
29 CFR 1910, Subpart T. “Commercial Diving Operations”
29 CFR Part 1910, Subpart Z, “Toxic and Hazardous Substances”
29 CFR 1926, “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction”
29 CFR 1926.104, “Safety Belts, Lifelines, Lanyards”
29 CFR 126.153, “Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LP-Gas)”
October 2009 L-7
Reclamation Safety and
Health Standards
29 CFR 1926.200, “Accident Prevention Signs and Tags”
29 CFR 1926,251, “Rigging Equipment for Material Handling”
29 CFR 1926.803, “Compressed Air”
29 CFR 1926, Subpart U, “Blasting and the Use of Explosives”
29 CFR 1926.959, “Lineman’s Body Belts, Safety Straps, and Lanyards”
U.S. Department of Transportation
Coast Guard
46 CFR Parts 146-149, “Dangerous Cargoes”
Federal Aviation Administration
Federal Highway Administration
49 CFR Parts 390-399, “Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations”
49 CFR Parts 171-179, “Hazardous Materials Regulations”
49 CFR Part 195, “Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by
Pipelines”
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
49 CFR 571, “Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards”
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)
U.S. Department of the Treasury
Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms
27 CFR 55, “Commerce in Explosives”
U.S. Navy
U.S. Navy Diving Manual, Volumes I through V
U.S. Navy Standard Decompression Tables
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
Title 10, Chapter 1, CFR Part 20, “Standards for Protection Against
Radiation”
L-8 October 2009
Index
A
abrasive blasting, 7-43, 25-11
abrasive wheels, 17–3, 17-4
accident prevention tags, 9–1, 9–4, 9-5
accident reporting, 3-4, 29-1, 29-7
acids, 8-7, 12–15, 18–5, 24-5
aerial lifts, 13–15, 20–1, 20–14, 20–15
A-frame trucks, 19–23, 20-14
air, 2-3, 7–2, 7–3, 7–6 through 7-17, 7–28, 7–29, 7–30, 7–33, 7–34, 7–37 through
7–39, 7-40, 10–8, 10–9, 11–8, 11–11, 12-14, 14-4 through 14–6, 14-9, 15-3, 17-1,
17-2, 17–10, 17–11, 17-13, 17-15, 17-16, 19-17, 19-30, 19–32, 19-40, 20-7, 21-5,
21-7, 21-10, 22-5, 23–2 through 23–7, 23–9, 23-18, 24–3, 24-4, 24-13, 25-9, 25-11,
25-17, 27-4, 27–6, 28–1, 29-1 29-2, 29–4, 29-6 through 29-11 -
aircraft, 5-2, 18-3, 19-25 through 19-27
ambulance service, 4-3, 5–3, 14–6, 29-9
animals, 27-5
arc welding and cutting, 17-1
asbestos, 7–39 through 7-42, 20-7
asphalt, 1-1, 11–9, 11-10
B
backup alarms, 27-3
barricades, 9–1, 9–4, 11–13, 13–1, 20–3, 20-18, 22-1, 22–3, 22-4, 24–9, 25-11, 27-1,
27-6
battery charging, 12-1, 12-14, 12-15, 20-13
belts, 8–11, 13–6, 13–11, 16–2, 16–4, 19-30, 20–16, 25–2, 27–3
biological monitoring, 7-43, 7-45
blasting agents, 24–1, 24–2, 24-4, 24-6, 24–7, 24-10
blasting mats, 24–3, 24-10
blasting operations, 24–1, 24–2, 24–4, 24–10, 24-14
blasting signals, 24-12
bloodborne pathogens, 7-25, 7-27
boatswain’s chairs, 19–7
boilers, 7-41, 17-1, 17–10, 19–24
Index-1
brakes, 13–16, 17-6, 19–16, 19–17, 19–22, 19–38, 19-41 through 19-43, 20-2, 20-3,
20-6, 23–14, 23–16, 24–5, 27–3
burning areas, 10-7
C
cableways, 19–5, 19–21, 19–22, 25-2
capacitors, 15-10
caustics, 8-7
cement, 11-1, 11–3, 11-13 -
certification, 3–1, 4–2, 7-10, 12–1, 15–7, 16-5, 16–7, 16-8, 17-10, 19–5, 20–2, 20-9,
20-11, 20-13 through 20–15, 20–17, 21-3, 25-1, 28-1, 29-4
chain saws, 8-7, 17–2
chains, 8–10, 12–10, 15-6, 17-12, 17-13, 17–18, 18–1 through 18-3, 19-30, 20-14,
20-16, 23–14, 23-16
chemicals, 6–1, 7–4, 7–23, 7–24, 7-25, 8–7, 8–11, 8-13, 15-6
clearance procedures, 12-17, 15-1, 29-8
clothing, 6–6, 7–25, 7-26, 7–28, 7–29, 7-30, 7-34, 7-44, 8–6 through 8-10, 11-9,
12–2, 12–4, 12–17, 17-15, 17–18, 19–26, 21-7, 21-8, 27-5
codes, 2–1, 4–1, 4–2, 7–21, 7–23, 10–2, 12–1, 12–16, 17-10
cofferdams, 22–8, 23–14, 27-5
cold stress, 7–29
combustible liquids, 10-1, 11-1, 11-4 through 11-9, 11-12, 17-15, 23-10
combustible materials, 10–2, 10–3, 11–1, 12-15, 17-14, 24-7
compactors, 20-10, 20-11 -
compressed air, 7-40, 15-10, 17-2, 17-10, 17-13, 20-7, 20-10, 23-1, 23-14, 23-18,
27–5, 29–4, 29-10
compressed gas cylinders, 17-1, 17-12, 17-13, 29–2, 29-10
concrete conveyance systems, 25-1, 25-2
concrete forms, 17-3
confined spaces, 10-4, 11–2, 14-1 through 14–7, 16-9, 17-12, 17-16, 17-18
conveyors, 19-1, 19–20, 19–21, 20-1, 20–2, 20–14, 20–17, 22-7, 23-10, 23-15,
23–16, 23-18
cranes, 12-5, 12-6, 13-11, 13-16 through 13-20, 17-18, 19-1 through 19–7, 19-10
through 19-14, 19–29, 19–30, 19–32, 19-38 through 19–42, 20-7, 20-8, 20-10,
22-7, 23-15, 25–2 -
cutting, 7-43, 8–2 through 8-4, 10-1, 13-11, 15-6, 17-1, 17-3, 17-5, 17-13 through
17–17, 19–25, 23-10, 25-11, 26–4, 27–7, 29–4, 29-5
cutting and welding, 8–2, 17-13
Index-2
cylinders, 7–10, 7-12, 7–15, 10-5, 10-8, 11–11, 13–17, 17-1, 17-12, 17-13, 17-16,
17-17, 20-6, 23-3, 25-5, 29–2, 29-9 through 29-11
D
definitions, 14-1, 14–2, 15-2
demolition, 7-43, 12–10, 12–13, 13–23, 25–1, 25-11, 29-5
detonating cord, 24-13, 24-14
diving operation, 29-1 through 29–5, 29–7, 29–8, 29-11, 29-12
drilling operation, 24–9, 27-1, 27–3, 27-4, 27-6
drinking water, 7–21
dump trucks, 20-7
dust control, 20-18, 23-8, 25-1
E
earthmoving equipment, 20-2, 20-3
eating facilities, 7–20
education, 17–10, 23–7, 7–30
electric lines, 22-1
electrical wiring, 11–9, 12–13, 24–5, 27-1
electromagnetic radiation, 24–1, 24-4
elevators, 6–1, 19-17
emergency equipment, 6–1, 6–2, 6–4, 11-1, 20–5
emergency plans, 6-1
enclosed spaces, 17-15
energized equipment, 8-9, 8-10
excavation, 19–25, 22-1 through 22-7, 23-5, 23–7, 23-8, 23-11, 23-12, 23-15,
23–18, 24–9, 24–10, 27-1
excavation operations, 22-1, 23-7, 23-8, 23-11
explosives, 20-5, 23-1, 24-1 through 24–9, 24–13, 24–14
exposure monitoring, 7–2, 7–3, 7-4, 7–7, 7–18, 7–39, 7-43, 7–45
21–2, 21-5
explosive magazines, 23-10
extension cords, 12–11
eye and face protection, 8–2, 8–5, 17–15, 25-11
eyewash facilities, 25-2
Index-3
F
fenders, 19–32, 20–4, 23-17
fire extinguishers, 10-6, 10-7, 11–2, 11–9, 17-14, 20-5, 23-10, 24–5, 26-4, 27-3,
28–1
fire prevention, 6–7, 10-1, 11-2
fire protection, 7–23, 9–3, 10-6 through 10-10, 11-1, 17–14, 17-15, 23-10, 26-4
firearms, 2–2, 24–3, 24–5, 24-6
first aid and medical facilities, 8–11
first aid kits, 5-1, 5-2
fixed ladders, 13-1 through 13–3, 19-11, 19–25
flammable gases, 10–2, 17-18, 23-6, 23-7
flammable liquids, 10-4, 10-6, 10-7, 11-4, 11-6, 11–8, 27–2, 27-7
floating cranes, 19–2, 19-13, 19-14, 19–29, 19-41
foot protection, 8-7, 23-2
footings, 22-1, 22–3, 22-7, 25-10, 25-13, 25-14, 25-16
foremen, 3-4
form scaffolds, 13-14
forms, 17–3, 25–1, 25-12, 25–15, 24-15
fueling, 10–2, 10-4, 24-6
G
garbage, 7–23
gas welding and cutting, 17-1, 17-18
gates, 12–2, 13–3, 13–22, 15-2, 15-10, 19-15, 19–18, 25–2, 27–6, 29–8, 9-4
gears, 13–17, 19–30, 20–2, 20–3, 20-16, 23-15, 23–16, 27–3, 27-4
glasses, 7–21, 8–2, 8-8, 8-10, 16-9, 22-2, 25-2
gloves, 5–2, 7-25, 7–26, 7–34, 8–6 through 8-9, 12–2 through 12-4, 12–7, 12-10,
12–15, 16-9, 17-13, 19–26, 25–2, 27-5
grounding, 10–3, 11–8, 11-12, 12-1, 12–2, 12–7, 12-10 through 12-14, 17-1, 17-18,
19–26, 23–2 -
groundwater, 21–9, 22-4
guarding, 13–23, 17-1, 17–3, 17-4, 17–7, 20-16, 23-12, 23-15
guardrails, 11–8, 11–9, 12–2, 13-1, 13-4 through 13-6, 13–9, 13-10, 13-14, 13–21
through 13–24, 16–1, 19–11, 19–22, 20–10, 20-16, 22-4, 22–8, 23-11, 25–1, 25-6,
25-12, 27–3, 28–4
Index-4
H
hand signals, 19–7, 19–16, 19–27
hardhats, 23–2, 27-6
haul roads, 20–17, 20–18
hazardous locations, 9–5, 11-10, 12-1, 12–13, 13–23, 19–21, 20–13
hazardous materials, 6-4 through 6–6, 7–1, 7–2, 7-4, 9–4, 11-1, 13–23, 20-5
hearing protectors, 7-19, 7–20, 8-6
heat stress, 7–1, 7-28
heating devices, 10-2 through 10-4, 10-6, 11-10
helicopters, 19–27
high-voltage lines, 12-5, 12-6, 19–7, 20-15, 24-10
hoisting equipment, 12-7, 13-7, 13-17, 19-1 through 19-10, 19–24, 19-29, 20-1,
20–2, 20–14, 22–5, 22-7, 23-15 through 23-18, 27-6
hooks, 8–11, 13-18, 16-1, 17-8, 18-1 through 18–3, 18–8, 18–9, 19–7, 19–26, 19–29,
19–31, 19–33, 20–14, 23-14, 25-11
horns, 10–7, 24-5
housekeeping, 2-3, 7-43, 10-1, 11-1, 11-10 through 11-13, 12-15, 25-12
hydraulic fluids, 23-10
illumination, 7-1, 7-46, 12–11, 22–2, 22-4, 23-1, 27–1, 27-6
impact wrenches, 26-3
industrial trucks, 20-1, 20-4, 20-12, 20-13
inspection, 3–1, 3–2, 5–2, 7–10, 8–7, 8–12, 10-6, 12–13, 13–7, 13-8, 15–7, 15-9,
16–2, 16-5, 16–6, 16–7, 17-8, 17–10, 18–2, 19-3, 19-4, 19–5, 19–7, 19–11, 19–15,
19-18, 19–20, 19-22, 20–5 through 20-12, 21–2, 21-12, 22–2, 23-13, 24–5, 24-10,
24-12, 25–8, 25-13, 25–14, 27–2, 29-6, 29–8, 29-9.,
ionizing radiation, 7-30, 7–31, 7-32, 7-35, 7-36, 9-5
JHA, 4–1, 4-2, , 7–5, 7–6, 7–7, 7–11, 7–16, 7–17, 8–1, 9–5, 11–3, 11–9, 12–1, 12–2,
12–10, 12–16, 12–18, 13–15, 16-9, 19–12, 19–23, 20–2, 20–17, 22-1
job hazard analysis, 3-1,4-1, 5–1, 7–5, 7–6, 7-17, 7-42, 11–3, 12-1, 12–16, 16-7,
16-9, 17-16, 19–12, 20–2, 20–13, 22-1, 22-7, 24–2
Index-5
L
ladders, 7-46, 11-10, 13-1 through 13-5, 13-11, 13-15, 14-5, 17–18, 19-11, 19–20,
19–25, 19–32, 20–10, 20–14, 20-15, 22–2, 22-7, 23-18, 27–1, 27–6, 28–4
lasers, 7-36, 7–37, 8–6, 9–5
lifelines, 8–11, 13–6, 13–11, 13–15, 16–1, 16–2, 16–4, 16-5
lift trucks, 2-4, 20–12, 20–15
lighting, 7-46, 8-13, 10–3, 11-8, 12–11, 12-13, 12-14, 14-5, 19–21, 19–27, 20-5,
22–1, 22–2, 23–1, 23–3, 23-4, 23–10, 24–13, 27–1, 27–3, 27-6
lime, 11-1, 11–3, 11-13
linemen’s belts, 16-4
liquefied petroleum gas, 23-10
load test, 19-4, 19-6, 19–42, 20–15, 23–17, 25–7, 25-8
loaders, 19–5, 19–24, 20-7, 20–9 through 20–11, 24-10
loads, 13–7, 13–14, 13–22, 17–9, 18–1, 18–5, 18-6, 18–8, 18–9, 19–2, 19-4, 19-6
through 19–9, 19–17, 19–24, 19–26, 19–29, 19–36, 19-41, 20–2, 20-10, 20–13, 22-5,
25-11 through 25–13, 25-15, 25-16, 26–3, 27-4
lockout/tagout, 12-17, 15-1, 15-5, 19–21, 20-16, 25–2, 28-3, 29–7, 29-8
lumber storage, 11-3
M
machinery, 3-2, 12-5, 13-6, 17–2, 17-4, 17-16, 20-4, 20-5, 23-10, 23-12, 23-17,
28–3
material hoists, 13–7, 19–1, 19–14, 19–16, 23-17
material safety data sheets, 6-4
mechanized equipment, 19–23, 20-1, 20-16, 23-14, 25-5
medical facilities, 5-1, 8–11
mobile equipment, 12-7, 16–2, 20-1, 20–3, 20-5, 20-17, 22-4, 23-15, 25-2
N
nailers, 17-3
nets, 8-11 through 8-13, 11-1, 11-6, 13-6, 13–23, 13–24, 16-1, 17-13, 26-2
noise, 7–2, 7–3, 7–4, 7-17 through 7–20, 8–6, 12-10, 16-8, 19-11, 21–9, 21-11, 23-4,
23–10
noise exposure, 7-1, 7-18, 7-19
Index-6
O
oil, 7–12, 10–3, 15-10, 17-10, 17–13, 19–29, 23-10, 24–5, 29–2, 29-11
overcurrent protection, 12-1, 12–11, 12-12
overhead lines, 12-1, 12-3, 12–4, 12-6, 27-1
overhead protection, 8–11, 13-5, 13-6, 13-10, 13-18, 13–24, 19–15, 19-18, 19–21,
19–25, 20-5, 22–5, 23-18
oxygen, 7-11, 7-12, 8–4, 10–2, 14–4, 14-5, 17-12, 17-13, 17-16, 17-17, 22-5, 23-3,
23–6, 23–7, 23–10, 29–1, 29–4, 29-9
P
paint, 7-43, 10–9, 11-11. 11-12, 17-3, 19-15
personal protective equipment, 6-4 through 6–6, 7–2, 7-4, 7-8, 7–16, 7–18, 7-24,
7–26, 7–27, 8–1, 8-8, 8–9, 11–3, 11–9, 11–12, 12–2, 12–3, 12–16, 12–17, 13–16, 14-4,
14-5, 16-9, 17–2, 17–3, 17-13, 17–15, 19–14, 19–26, 21–2, 21-6, 21-8, 22–2, 23-2
personnel hoists, 13–15, 19-1, 19-18 through 19–20, 19–23, 20-17, 22-2
physical qualifications, 4–2, 16–7, 19–5
piledrivers, 19-1, 19–24, 19–25, 20-1, 20–2, 20–14, 22-7, 23-15, 23-16, 23-18
piling, 11–2, 19–24, 19–25, 22-3, 22-6
pipe, 9–4, 10–8, 11-1, 11–3, 11-4, 11–9, 13–21, 13–24, 17–9, 17-11, 23–2, 23-10,
23-11, 23-18, 25-3 through 25–5, 25-15, 27-5, 28–3, 28–4
plants, 13–1, 19-30, 25-1, 29-8
platforms, 7-46, 8-11, 13-1, 13-4 through 13-11, 13-15 through 13–24, 19–7,
19-11, 19-18, 19-20 through 19–23, 20-10, 20-15, 20-16, 23–14, 23-18, 25-5,
25–6, 25–8, 25–15, 27–1, 27-3
pneumatic tools, 17-1, 17-2
poles, 11-4, 13-6, 16–4, 24-9
powder-actuated tools, 17-1, 17-6, 17-7
power saws, 17-1, 17-6
power tools, 8-7, 12–7, 17-1, 17–2, 23-10, 26–4, 29-5
pressure vessels, 17-1, 17-10, 19–24, 23-10, 26-4
Q
qualifications, 2–2, 4–2, 7–7, 7–27, 12-17, 14–7, 16–7, 17–10, 19-1, 19–5, 20-12.
21–3, 21-4, 24–1, 29–1, 29–4
Index-7
R
radiation, 7–1, 7–2, 7–30 through 7-38, 17-18, 8–2, 9–1, 9-5, 17-18, 24-1, 24-4
ramps, 13-1, 13-4, 13-5, 13-8, 20-12, 20-17, 22-2, 24-8
records, 3–2, 3–4, 7–3, 7–6, 7–7, 7–15, 7–17, 7–20, 7–25, 7–27, 7–32, 7–34, 7–35,
7–39, 7-40, 7-45, 8–12, 12–17, 18–4, 19–5, 23–9, 23–13, 24–1, 24–2, 27–2, 29-5
through 29–7
reference material, 7-24
reinforcing steel, 13-10, 13–23, 25-1, 25-10, 25-11
reports, 7-9, 7-25, 7-35, 17-10
respiratory protection, 6–4, 7-1, 7–2, 7–6, 7–7, 7–10, 7-33, 7–39, 7-44, 7-45, 11-9,
17-15, 17–16, 21–3 through 21-5 .
rigging, 11–3, 13-11, 13–16, 13-19, 16–2, 18-1, 18–2, 18–5, 19–8, 19–26, 19–27,
19-36, 25-10
ring buoys, 8-10
riveting, 13–7, 26-1, 26-4
roads, 9–4, 11–13, 20–5, 20–17, 20–18, 24–2, 24–4, 24–5, 27-3
rock bolting, 16-5, 22-3, 23–13
rollover protection, 20-4
roof openings, 13–21, 13-22
ropes, 8–11, 8–12, 13–9, 13–10, 13–21, 16–6, 16-8, 18-1, 18-4, 18–5, 19-3, 19-16,
19-19, 19-30 through 19–33, 20-6, 22-7, 23-17
S
safety, 1-1, 2–1, 2–2, 3–1, 3–2, 3-4, 4–1, 4–3, 6–1 through 6–3, 7–25, 7–30, 7–31,
7–36, 7-42, 8–2, 8–6, 8-8, 8–11, 9–1 through 9–3, 10–3, 11-1, 11–5, 11–8, 11-10,
11-11, 12-1, 12–2, 12-6, 12–11, 12–14, 12-16, 12-17, 13-1 through 13–3, 13-5,
13-6, 13-9 through 13-11, 13-14 through 13–25, 14-1, 14-2, 14-6, 15-5, 15-6, 16-1
through 16-9, 17-2 through 17-4, 17-7, 17-8, 17-11, 17-13, 18-1 through 18-3,
18-6 through 18–8, 19-6, 19–8, 19-11, 19-15, 19-19, 19-22, 19–25 through 19-33,
20-1, 20–6, 20–7, 20-14 through 20-16, 21-1, 21-3, 21-6, 21-8, 21-9, 21-11, 22-1,
22–2, 22-3, 23–1, 23-11, 23-12, 23-14, 23-17, 24-1 through 24–3, 24–13, 25-1
through 25–3, 25-11 through 25–16, 26–2, 26–4, 27-1, 27-2, 27-4, 27-6, 28-2
through 28–4, 29–1, 29–4, 29–5, 29–7, 29–8, 29-10, 29-11
safety belts, 8–11, 13-11
Safety equipment, 4–2, 28-2
safety factor, 8–11, 13-3, 13-5, 13-6, 13–9, 13-14, 13-17 through 13–21, 16-2, 18-1
through 18-3, 18-6 through 18–8, 19-19, 20-14, 25-1, 25-3, 25-11 through 25-16,
27–6, 28–4
Index-8
safety fuse, 24-1, 24-13
safety glasses, 8–2, 8-8, 16-9, 22-2
safety inspection, 3-2
safety line, 16-5, 19-11, 26–2, 27–2, 29-11
safety meeting, 3–2, 4-1
safety nets, 8–11, 13–23, 16–1, 26-2
safety program, 3-1, 3–2, 3-4, 7–31, 7-34, 20-1, 23-1
safety shoes, 13-2, 22-2
sand and gravel, 19–21
sanitation, 7–1, 7–20, 7–22, 7–23
scaffolding, 13-5 through 13-7, 13-15, 13-20, 16–1, 19–7, 25-11, 25-12, 25-14,
25–15, 25–17, 8–11
scaling, 7-46, 8–2, 16–1, 16-5, 22-3, 23-11, 23-13, 27-6
scuba diving, 29–1, 29–3, 29–4, 29-10
shafts, 8-2, 12-11, 17-15, 17-18, 19-21, 19–24, 19-30, 20-16, 22-1, 22-4, 23-1,
23-3, 23-4, 23-13 through 23–18, 24–9, 24–10, 25–1, 27–3, 27-5, 27-6
signalperson, 19–22
signals, 9–1, 9-5, 19–7, 19-15, 19–16, 19–20, 19–27, 20–18, 22–8, 24-12
signs, 5–1, 7–2, 7-9, 7-24, 7–33, 7-36, 7-40, 7-41, 8–1, 9–1 through 9-5, 10-8, 11–8,
11-13, 12-1 through 12–3, 12-5, 12-14, 17-12, 19-21, 19–29, 19-30, 19–32, 20-18,
21-5, 22-2, 24-4 through 24-6, 24–8, 24–9, 25-11, 28–3, 28–4, 29-9
sleeping facilities, 7–23
slings, 11-1, 13-11, 17-13, 18–1 through 18-9, 19–26, 20–6, 23-16, 25–8 through
25-10, 25-15
slip-forms, 25-14, 25-15
sound levels, 7-18
special work permits, 12-10
spray painting, 7-43, 11-12
stairways, 11-12, 13-1, 13–3 through 13-5, 13-11, 13–15, 13–22, 19–11, 19–20,
19–25, 20-10
stationary mechanized equipment, 19-23, 20-1, 20-16, 23-14, 25-5
Statutes, 2-1
steel erection, 26-1, 26-2
storage, 7-4, 7–10, 7–15, 7–24, 7–30, 7-32, 7–33, 7–44, 7-47, 8–1, 8–11, 10–1, 10–2,
10-5, 10-9, 11-1 through 11–7, 11-11, 11-12, 12–15, 13–24, 15-10, 16–2, 17-1,
17–3, 17–12, 17–13, 18-6, 19–29, 19–32, 19–33, 20–6, 20–14, 21-6, 21–9, 21–10,
23-1, 23-10, 23-17, 24–1 through 24-5, 24–7, 24–8, 25-1, 26-1, 27-2
Subcontracts, 3-1
substations, 13-1
surface preparation, 25-1, 25-11
Index-9
T
taglines, 11-4, 13-10, 19–7, 19–25, 25-15, 26-3
tar, 11–1, 11–9, 11-10
temporary wiring, 12-1, 12-10 through 12-12
testing, 7–6, 7–7, 7-9, 7-15, 7–17, 7–20, 8–7, 8–11, 10-4, 10–9, 11–8, 12–3, 12–7,
12-9, 12-10, 12-13, 12–16, 13-10, 13-11, 13-19, 14-3 through 14–6, 15-4, 15-11,
15-12, 16–2, 16-5, 17-6, 17-8, 17–10, 17-17, 18–8, 19-1, 19-4, 19–5, 19–7, 19-10
through 12, 19–14, 19–21, 19–23, 19-35, 19-36, 19–38, 19-43, 20–2, 20–7, 20–8,
20–11, 20-12 through 20–15, 20–17, 21–7, 23-8, 23-11, 23–13, 25-4, 25–7
thinners, 11–10, 11–11
toilet facilities, 7–21, 7–22
tools, 4–2, 7-37, 8-9, 9-5, 11-13, 12-2 through 12-4, 12-9, 12-14, 12-16, 13-1,
13–3, 13–7, 13–13, 13-18, 15-6, 15-11, 17-1 through 17–9, 20–3, 20-12, 21-11,
23–12, 23–14, 23-18, 24–5, 24–8, 24–9, 25–15, 27–3, 27–4, 29-7
tower cranes, 19–2, 19–13, 19–29
toxic gases, 7-15
toxic materials, 7–45, 8-7, 11–13, 17–16, 22-5
traffic control, 9–1, 9–4, 9–5, 20–18
training, 2-2, 2–3, 3–1, 3-4, 5–1, 6–1 through 6–6, 7-2 through 7–7, 7-9, 7-16, 7-17,
7-20, 7-24, 7-27 through 7-31, 7-41 through 7-45, 8-1, 8-12, 10-1, 11-12, 12-1,
12–4, 12–16, 12–17, 13–25, 14-1, 14–3, 14–6, 14–7, 15–1, 15–4, 15-8, 15-9, 15-11,
16-6 through 16-9, 18-1, 19-4, 19–5, 20-1, 20–13, 21-2 through 21-4, 21-6, 21-9,
23-3, 23–7, 23-11, 24–2, 26-1, 28–1, 28–2, 29–1, 29–4 through 29-6, 29-10, 29-11
transformers, 8-9, 11-12, 12–10, 12–14, 23–2, 24-8
tunnels, 7-46, 8–2, 12–11, 14–1, 17–18, 19–21, 22–1, 23-1, 23–4, 23–13, 23–14,
23–18, 24–9, 24–10, 25–1, 27–5
tunnels and shafts, 22–1, 23–1, 23–13, 23–14, 24–9, 24–10, 27-5
U
unfired pressure vessels, 17-1, 17-10
V
Variances, 2-1
vehicles, 5-2, 11-8, 11–9, 11-11, 12-5, 20-5, 20-8, 20-10 through 10-12, 20-18,
24-5, 24-6
Index–10
ventilation, 7–2, 7–21, 7–26, 7–39, 7-40, 10–3, 11–7, 11-11, 11-12, 12–14, 14-5,
14-6, 17-15, 17-16, 20–13, 22-5, 23-4 through 23–7, 23–9, 23-14, 24-12, 27–6,
28-1, 29-11
ventilation requirements, 10–3, 23-9
W
walkways, 7-46, 11-13, 12–11, 17-18, 19–11, 20–10, 22-1, 22–2, 22-4, 22–8, 24–8,
25-10
wall openings, 13–22
washing facilities, 7-22, 7-44, 11-3
waste disposal, 7–23, 7–34, 11-12
water, 2-3, 7-17, 7-20 through 7-22, 7-26 through 7-30, 8–10, 8–13, 10-5, 10-7
through 10-10, 12-12, 12–14, 14–2, 15–1, 15-3, 17–10, 19–14, 19–24, 19–41, 20–10,
21-7, 21-8, 22-1, 22-4, 23–2, 23-8, 23-11, 24–2, 24-4, 24–13, 24-14, 25-1, 25-9,
27-1, 27-4, 27–6, 28-1 through 28–4, 29–3, 29–7, 29-12
water hazard, 8-10
welding, 7-15, 7-43, 8–2 through 8-4, 8–6, 8–11, 10–1, 13–7, 13-11, 13-18, 15-3,
17-1, 17-13 through 17-18, 23-10, 24–8, 25-4, 25–17, 26-1, 26-4, 27–7, 29-5
welding and cutting, 8–11, 10-1, 17-1, 17-13, 17-15 through 17-18, 23-10, 27-7
wire rope, 13-10, 13-11, 13-17, 13-18, 13–21, 16–1, 17–18, 18-1 through 18–4,
19-8 through 19–10, 19-18, 19-19, 19–39, 23-12, 23-15, 25-15
wiring, 11–8, 11–9, 12-1, 12–2, 12-10 through 12-14, 23–2, 23-4, 24-1, 24–5, 24-7,
24-10, 24–11, 27–1
woodworking, 17-1, 17–4, 17-5
Index–11
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN